JP2019010407A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving a light emitting presentation.SOLUTION: It is so configured that a second rotation member A728 can be displaced between a first position and a second position and therefore can interfere with the light emitted from light emitting means A715a. As a result, the mode of the light emitting presentation can be switched by the displacement of the second rotation member A728. Consequently, the mode of the light emitting presentation can be changed without performing a control on the light emitting means A715a to eliminate the necessity of data for the control and miniaturize a substrate by eliminating the necessity of a circuit for the control. This can improve a method of achieving the light emitting presentation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 382

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with light emitting means configured to be able to execute a light emitting effect (Patent Document 1).

JP2015-208360A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement with respect to the light emission effect. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the light emission effect.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is a gaming machine comprising a light emitting means and an irradiated means to which light from the light emitting means is irradiated, and the outer shape of the irradiated means in a predetermined direction. The appearance of the irradiated means is changed while leaving

  In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the difference in appearance of the irradiated unit is caused by the light irradiated from the light emitting unit being reflected by the irradiated unit.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the degree of difference in the appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the light emission effect can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the light emission effect can be improved by utilizing the reflection of light.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the light emission effect can be improved based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is the partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line | wire of Fig.6 (a). (A) is the partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIIb-VIIb line | wire of Fig.7 (a). FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device when viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device when viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is XIVc− in FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in a XIVc line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of the lid of a tilting device. (a) is a front view of a drive device, (b) is a side view of the drive device in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17 (a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of a cancellation | release member and a rotation claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). (A) is a side view of the slide claw member in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotating plate member, (c) is a side view of a cancellation | release member. (A) And (b) is a side view of a cancellation | release member, a rotating plate member, and a slide claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is a side view of the tilting apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is a side view of the tilting apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is FIG. 59 (a). It is a partial top view of the lower frame member in the arrow LIXc direction view. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the vibration apparatus in the LXa-LXa line | wire of Fig.59 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the transmission apparatus 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line | wire of Fig.59 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of a right disk cam, (b) is a back perspective view of a right disk cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam in the LXVb-LXVb line in FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line in FIG. 66 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a), (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the arrow LXVIIb direction view of Fig.67 (a). It is. (A) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of Fig.6 (a), (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the arrow LXVIIIb direction view of Fig.68 (a). It is. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the drive device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a disc member, a ring member, and the 2nd transmission member of a left disc cam. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a right disk cam. 74A is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a partial side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. It is. (A) is a front view of a ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of an engaging member, (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the arrow LXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of a right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disk cam, (f) FIG. 78 is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the state where the inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (opening) which opened the back pack with respect to the inner frame in the state where the inner frame was opened to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state where the inner frame was closed with respect to the outer frame and the front frame was opened (deployed). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where a front frame was removed. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame illustrated by disassembling components disposed below the window portion of the front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame illustrated by disassembling the constituent members disposed below the window portion of the front frame. (A) is a disassembled rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the bundling movable member in which the released state and the fixed state of the bundling movable member are shown side by side. (A) is the partial rear view of the front frame which shows the lower left corner part of a front frame, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the front frame in the XCIVb-XCIVb line | wire of Fig.94 (a). (A) is the partial rear view of the front frame which shows the lower left corner part of a front frame, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line | wire of Fig.95 (a). (A) is a rear schematic view schematically showing the binding movable member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a), and (c) is a binding movable member and the harness. It is a back surface schematic diagram shown typically, (d) is an upper surface schematic diagram of Drawing 96 (c). (A) And (b) is a top surface schematic diagram of a front frame, an inner frame, a bundling movable member, and a harness which illustrate a bundling movable member and a harness typically. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a 1st bending area | region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a side surface schematic diagram of a light guide member, (b) is sectional drawing of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line | wire of Fig.115 (a). It is a partial rear view of a right panel unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper frame member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper frame member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a speaker assembly. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front side assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear side assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of FIG. 124 (a). It is a top view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVc direction view, and (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVd direction view of FIG. 124 (a). (A) is a fragmentary sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper side frame member, the main body frame, and the upper side plate member in the CXXVa-CXXVa line of FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the front side assembly, rear side assembly, upper side frame member, main body frame, and upper side board member in the CXXVb-CXXVb line. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of a game board, (b) is a front view of an inner frame. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the inner frame in the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line | wire of FIG.127 (b). (A) And (b) is the side view of the board surface support apparatus and game board which showed the board surface support apparatus and game board typically. (A) is a front perspective view of a board surface support apparatus, (b) is a back perspective view of a board surface support apparatus. (A) is a front perspective view of a board surface support apparatus, (b) is a back perspective view of a board surface support apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a board surface support apparatus. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a board surface support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board surface support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board surface support apparatus. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a ball launch unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launch unit. (A) And (b) is an exploded front perspective view of a ball launch unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of a ball launching unit showing the ball delivery status by the ball feeding device in time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of a ball launch unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launch unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of a ball launch unit, (b) is a front perspective view of a cutting metal member showing the relationship between the yarn and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147 (a). It is a partial front view of the ball launch unit, the inner rail, and the outer rail after the launch of the ball. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is sectional drawing of the petal operation apparatus in the CLIV-CLIV line | wire of FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is a disassembled front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member, (b) is an exploded back perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) And (b) is a back perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center axis | shaft rotation apparatus and a loose-fitting apparatus. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of a center axis | shaft rotation apparatus and a loose fitting apparatus. It is a back perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of a back plate. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a second effect member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide plate, and a second effect member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. (D) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. (D) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. (D) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a back perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. (A) And (b) is the partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a back surface perspective view of the loose-fitting apparatus in 12th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal motion apparatus. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal motion apparatus. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is the elements on larger scale of the slit member and slide member in another example of 12th Embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the inner frame in 14th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in 15th Embodiment, (b) And (c) is a rear view of a fraud detection apparatus. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit according to the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 2C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 2C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically representing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIc of FIG. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically representing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. It is a partial expansion perspective view of the light guide member which represents typically the upward concave part provided in a light guide member in the area | region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 17th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front view of a front frame. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line | wire of FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front perspective view of a left front cover and a right front cover, (b) is a rear perspective view of a left front cover and a right front cover. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a schematic cross section of a right side reinforcement rib, (b) is a schematic cross section of a left side reinforcement rib. (A) is a top view of a lower plate unit, (b) is a front view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a bottom view of the lower plate unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a right view in the arrow L direction view of a lower plate unit, (b) is a left view in the arrow R direction view of a lower plate unit. It is a rear view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit along the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit along the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb of FIG. (C) is sectional drawing of the lower pan unit in the CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc line of FIG. 229 (a). 229 is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit taken along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the upper production device. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the upper effect device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the upper production device. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the upper effect device. (A) is a front view of a rear unit, (b) is a front view of an electrical decoration board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rear unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rear unit. (A) is the fragmentary member in the CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa line of FIG. 241, an electrical decoration board | substrate, a back surface supporting member, and the fragmentary sectional view of an audio equipment, (b) is the division member in the CCXLIVb-CCXLIVb line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an audio equipment. (A) is the fragmentary member in the CCXLVa-CCXLVa line of FIG. 241, an electrical decoration board | substrate, a back surface support member, and the fragmentary sectional view of an audio equipment, (b) is the division member in the CCXLVb-CCXLVb line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an audio equipment. (A) is the fragmentary member in the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line of FIG. 241, an electrical decoration board | substrate, a back surface support member, and the fragmentary sectional view of an audio equipment, (b) is the division member in the CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an audio equipment. It is a side surface schematic diagram of an upper production apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the rear unit in the CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII line | wire of Fig.241 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front unit. (A) is a front view of a division unit and a guided unit, (b) is a rear view of a division unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of a division unit, (b) is a rear view of a division unit. (A) is a front view of a board guide unit, (b) is a rear view of a board guide unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the division unit and guided unit in the CCLIVa-CCLIVa line of FIG. 251 (b), (b) is the division unit and guided unit in the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line of FIG. 251 (b). (C) is sectional drawing of the division unit and the guided unit in the CCLIVc-CCLIVc line | wire of FIG. 251 (b). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a partition unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of an optical transmission unit and an outer frame member, (b) is a rear view of an optical transmission unit and an outer frame member. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of an optical transmission unit and an outer frame member, (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of an optical transmission unit and an outer frame member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an optical transmission unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an optical transmission unit. (A) is a front view of a transparent tubular member, (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member, and (d) is It is a right view in the arrow L direction view of a transparent cylindrical member, (e) is a rear view of a transparent cylindrical member. (A) is a front view of an optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, and (d) is an optical transmission unit. FIG. 6E is a right side view in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 5E is a rear view of the optical transmission unit. 241 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit, the acoustic device, and the optical transmission unit, taken along the line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. (A) is the front schematic diagram which illustrated typically the arrangement | positioning of a 1st illumination part, (b) is the front schematic diagram which illustrated typically the arrangement | positioning of the light visually recognized through an optical transmission unit. . It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a horizontal effect device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a horizontal effect device. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the horizontal effect device. (A) is a front view of a base member and an electrical decoration substrate, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, and (d) is a It is a top view of a base member, (e) is a bottom view of a base member, (f) is sectional drawing of the base member and electrical decoration board in the CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line | wire of Fig.269 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a covering unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a covering unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a light receiving member, (b) is a front view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the light reception member in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a), (b) is the elements on larger scale of the light reception member in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b). (A) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is sectional drawing of the horizontal production | presentation apparatus in the CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa line | wire of FIG. 274 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the light-receiving member in the CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb line | wire of FIG. 274 (b). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. (A) is sectional drawing of the base member in the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line | wire of FIG.272 (b), an electrical decoration board | substrate, and a light receiving member, (b) is the base member in the CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb line | wire of FIG.272 (b), It is sectional drawing of an electrical decoration board | substrate and a light receiving member, (c) is sectional drawing of the base member, electrical decoration board | substrate, and light receiving member in the CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line | wire of FIG.272 (b). It is a schematic diagram of the base member, the electrical decoration board | substrate, and light receiving member which show the cross section of Fig.280 (a) typically. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is sectional drawing of the production | presentation apparatus in the CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa line | wire of FIG. 282, (b) is a schematic diagram of the electrical decoration board | substrate of the production | presentation apparatus in the arrow CCLXXXIVb direction view of FIG. 284 (a). It is a side view of the cover in a 19th embodiment. 229 is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit according to the twentieth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb line of FIG. 229. FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the front frame, operation device, and lower platen unit in 21st Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a vibration apparatus. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a vibration device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member. It is a front perspective view of a covering member. It is a front view of a covering cover member. (A) is a top view of a lower dish unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the lower dish unit in the CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb line | wire of FIG. 296 (a). It is a rear view of a lower plate unit. It is sectional drawing of the lower pan unit in the CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII line | wire of Fig.296 (a). (A) is the partial upper surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit which shows a lower plate unit typically, (b) is the partial side surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit in the arrow CCXCIXb direction view of FIG. 299 (a). is there. (A) is the partial upper surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit which illustrates a lower plate unit typically, (b) is the partial side surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit in the arrow CCCb direction view of FIG. 300 (a). is there. It is a partial upper surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit which illustrates a lower plate unit typically. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 22nd embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state where the front frame was opened (deployed) with respect to the inner frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state where a front frame was removed. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. (A) is an enlarged front view of the game board in the range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board along the line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lottery unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lottery unit. (A) is the side view of the engaging member which visually recognized the engaging member from the rotating shaft direction, (b) is the front view of the engaging member in the arrow CCCXIIb direction view of FIG. (c) is sectional drawing of the engaging member in the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line | wire of FIG. 312 (b). It is a disassembled back perspective view of a main body member, an engaging member, and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a side view of an electric accessory, an engaging member, and an electromagnetic solenoid. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the lottery unit in the line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line of FIG. 312 (b). (A) is a top view of the operation unit, and (b) is a side view of the operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 33 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII in FIG. 302. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a back perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front cover. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front cover. (A) is a front view of an electrical decoration board | substrate and a board | substrate fixed board, (b) is sectional drawing of the electrical decoration board | substrate and board | substrate fixed board in the CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb line | wire of Fig.331 (a). (A) is a front view of an electrical decoration board | substrate and a board | substrate fixing plate, (b) is sectional drawing of the electrical decoration board | substrate and board | substrate fixing board in the CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb line | wire of Fig.332 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the front unit and the rear unit of the first operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the front unit and the rear unit of the first operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st displacement member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 1st displacement member. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. It is a rear view of a front unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st operation | movement unit in the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line of Fig.339 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st operation | movement unit in the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line of Fig.344 (a). is there. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the gear with a pin and the same phase member, (b) is a front perspective view of the gear with the pin and the same phase member on the left side, and the gear with the pin and the same phase member on the right side. It is a rear perspective view. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 2nd displacement member. It is an exploded back perspective view of the 2nd displacement member. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a rear unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a rear unit. It is a rear view of a rear unit. FIG. 356 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit along the CCCLIX-CCCLIX line in FIG. 356 (a). It is a schematic diagram which shows the rotation angle of the gear with a pin on the basis of an initial angle, and the same phase member. It is a front exploded perspective view of a 2nd operation unit and a back case. It is a front exploded perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a production unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the production unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotating body of the effect unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the rotating body of the effect unit. It is a rear view of a 1st rotation member. (A) is a front exploded perspective view of a support part, (b) is a front exploded perspective view of a 2nd support part. (A) is a back surface exploded perspective view of a support part, (b) is a back surface exploded perspective view of a 2nd support part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper cover part and a box-shaped part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper cover part and a box-shaped part. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (A) is a top view of an upper cover part, a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism, (b) is a front view of an upper cover part, a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (A) is a front view of a 1st rotation member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 376 (a), (c) is a 1st rotation member. (D) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the direction of arrow D of Drawing 376 (c). (A) is a front view of a 1st rotation member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 377 (a), (c) is a 1st rotation member. (D) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 377 (c). (A) is a front view of a 1st rotation member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 378 (a), (c) is a 1st rotation member. (D) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378 (c). (A) is a front view of a 1st rotation member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 379 (a), (c) is a 1st rotation member. (D) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of Drawing 379 (c). (A) is a front view of the effect unit, (b) is a top view of the effect unit in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380 (a), and (c) is a front view of the effect unit, FIG. 38D is a top view of the effect unit when viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. (A) is a front view of the effect unit, (b) is a top view of the effect unit in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381 (a), and (c) is a front view of the effect unit, FIG. 38D is a top view of the effect unit when viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. It is a front view of a cyclic | annular front cover and a rotary body. It is an upper surface schematic diagram which shows typically the 1st rotation member in 23rd Embodiment. It is a rear view of the front unit in 24th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing in the line corresponding to the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line of FIG. 339 (a) of the 1st operation | movement unit in 25th Embodiment, (b) is the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line of FIG. 344 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st operation | movement unit in the line corresponding to. (A) And (b) is a front view of the displacement apparatus in 26th Embodiment. (A) And (b), It is a rear view of the rear unit in 27th Embodiment. It is a rear view of a rear unit.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 44, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened on the left side. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 that are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are disposed. The operation device 300 will be described later.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are tapped from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of place, by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, and the jackpot It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or setting the second winning port 640 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is disposed below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to an unillustrated sphere discharge path through the out opening 71. The out ports 71 are provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable by being pushed into the player, and is provided in a region configured by a receiving recess 17a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Arranged. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

  A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a so that at least a finger of a hand can easily enter. Thereby, the player can make preparations to operate the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the fingertip is disposed on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

  Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following explanation, explanation is given on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

  6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along the line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 7 (a). These are the partial front views of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.7 (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIIb-VIIb line | wire of Fig.7 (a).

  6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed in a first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a faces in the up-down direction. In FIG. 7, the tilting device 310 is moved from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state in which the operation surface 312a faces upward and rearward by rising up around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. Details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

  An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is, for example, performed by the player when a specific display (for example, “Press button”) appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  Here, for example, when the tilting device 310 is pushed by a method of dropping the hand downward as in the case of pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the front depending on the degree of tilting. In this mode, the palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing a push-in operation with a method of dropping his / her hand downward.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, so that the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1, The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

  Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to cause the method to drop the hand vigorously downward. Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 is damaged can be reduced.

  With reference to FIG.8 and FIG.9, the difference in the appearance of the tilting apparatus 310 in a player viewpoint is demonstrated. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated with imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand that pushes in the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible from the player's viewpoint in the first state, while the area is reduced to the extent that it cannot be seen in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player viewpoint). Thereby, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protection lens member 311i is configured in such a manner that the area of the protection lens member 311i gradually increases, and accordingly, the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12), the difference in the amount of light that can be visually recognized by the player between the first state and the second state (the degree of light and darkness) increases, and the first state and the second state Thus, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

  An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side surface of the little finger is placed in the vicinity of the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward using the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist around the axis), the tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

  Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm of the hand with the side surface portion on the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to cause the method of dropping the hand vigorously downward. Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 is damaged can be reduced.

  Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is pivotally supported so that the tilting device 310 can rotate around a shaft portion 314 disposed at the rear end portion.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that gives a direct impact to the tilting device 310 and detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state lower the tilting device 310. It arrange | positions on the outer side of the lower frame member 320 enclosed from the side.

  In this way, by placing a sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310, a voice coil motor for applying a driving force, etc. on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the inner region of the lower frame member 320 can be used largely to tilt. The device 310 can be accommodated in the lower frame member 320. Thereby, a large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

  FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including ring members BR <b> 1 disposed at the left and right ends at the rear side end (the back side end in FIG. 12), and the tilting thereof. The lower frame member 320 which has the lower bearing part 323 which supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from the lower side and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and the lower frame member 320 which supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from the upper side. A member having a recessed portion disposed facing each other and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is disposed between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. In addition, the upper frame member 330 for determining the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state and the lower frame member 320 are fastened and fixed to the lower side, and the tilting device 310 and the link mechanism are configured. A driving device 340 that transmits a driving force to the tilting device 310 via the movement member 345, and a protective cover device that is fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and that protects the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from the left and right directions. 350.

  The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the near side, and a bottom plate portion 321 that is inclined downward toward the near side, and the bottom plate portion 321. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-like member that is horizontally disposed at the upper end of the rear side, and a semicircular receiving portion opened upward in the vicinity of the rear end of the horizontal portion 322, A lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from the lower side, a left side detection sensor 324L that is disposed in a pair on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321, a right detection sensor 324R, and a horizontal center position in the left and right direction of the bottom plate portion 321 An opening 325 that is an opening that is opened by cutting a portion disposed on the lower side of the portion 322 is mainly provided.

  The bottom plate portion 321 is configured to contact the tilting device 310 so as to determine the moving end of the tilting device 310 and to have a plurality of openings, through which the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321. The

  The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a drilled in the front center, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right on the left and right of the opening 325. An insertion hole 321c that is formed symmetrically is mainly provided.

  The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a position in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed to have a size that allows the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass therethrough. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state where the projecting protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 310 projects to the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

  The detection hole 321b is a through hole configured to allow detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 to be inserted therethrough. The detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the detection hole 321b are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, so that the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

  The insertion hole 321c is configured to have a size that allows the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the driving device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

  The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, and is formed in a U-shape that extends upward from the upper surface and has an open portion on the near side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

  The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

  The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are disposed at positions where the distance (the position of the detection groove) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 is equal on the left and right.

  In addition, a photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) in which a detection unit can be inserted. And a sensor arranged in a substantially U shape.

  The opening 325 is a through-hole that allows the LED device 341 f of the driving device 340, the rotating claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the lateral width is made larger than the lateral width of the pair of rotating claw members 347.

  On the other hand, with respect to the vertical width, the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f so as to protrude upward and forward (see FIG. 17B), and thus the drive device after the LED device 341f passes through the opening 325. By pushing up 340 upward, the LED device 341f can be disposed above the opening 325. Compared to the vertical width including the LED device 341f to the rotating claw member 347, the opening 325 The vertical width can be shortened.

  The upper frame member 330 is disposed so as to face the opening 331 that is an opening that is hooked by the extending portion 311 h that extends from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. And an upper bearing portion 332 configured to have a semicircular shape with the lower side opened and supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

  The protective cover device 350 is configured such that it can be divided in the vertical direction and is covered in three directions except the front side, and is fastened and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351 A voice coil motor 352 supported on the bottom plate and disposed on the front side and having a vibration surface directed diagonally forward and upward, a left detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove above the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and a right side And a detection sensor 353R.

  FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken in order to make the right detection sensor 353R disposed on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center visible.

  The voice coil motor 352 is disposed in a posture in which the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). Accordingly, when the tilting device 310 projects the projecting protruding portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

  The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340. The disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 are arranged in such a manner that they are arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether or not the detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disc cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R, and detecting that the disc cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase Can do.

  In the present embodiment, since the left and right disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the specific phase that can be detected by the detection sensors 353L and 353R is 2. It becomes a kind.

  Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 (a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus 310 in the XIVc-XIVc line | wire of Fig.14 (a). FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 has a case main body 311 formed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and an upper and lower opening, and a cover on the upper opening of the case main body 311. A lid 312 that is fastened and fixed to the case body 311, a spherical lens member 313 that is fastened and fixed to the front end portion of the lid 312 and hangs downward, and a mode that is sandwiched between rear ends of the case body 311 and the lid 312. A ring-shaped portion that fixes the case main body 311 and the lid 312 in an inseparable manner at the rear end portions of the case main body 311 and the lid 312. A ring member BR1.

  The case main body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a that is inclined downward from the back side toward the near side in the first state, an opening portion 311b that is opened at the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right sides of the opening portion 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending from the flange extending downward along the edge of the shaft to the center in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311d that is a semicircular recess in cross section that supports the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. An insertion groove 311e, which is a groove disposed at a position where both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f that is formed in a hook shape and engages the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending in a pair of left and right below the bottom plate portion 311a, and a predetermined amount from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side. A protective lens member 311i formed from a light-transmitting material and having a shape extending along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 and disposed on the upper side of the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a. And an overhanging protruding portion 311j that protrudes downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a.

  The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.

  The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

  The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the driving device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to and from the driving device 340. Is provided.

  The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. However, the overhang length is made longer than that of the right detection piece 311gR.

  In the present embodiment, the angle from the front end of the right detection piece 311gR to the front end of the left detection piece 311gL with the shaft portion 314 as the center is approximately 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22)) and the push-in end (see FIG. 23), the left detection piece 311gL is projected in comparison with the right detection piece 311gR.

  The extending portion 311h is a portion that protrudes from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and extends to a position that is locked to the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). It is comprised by the aspect.

  The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from the top (see FIG. 14A), and also has a curved shape when viewed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 14C). The configuration is such that the load when the tilting device 310 is pushed is easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  The overhanging projecting portion 311j is projecting at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320, and the player pushes the tilting device 310. In the state (refer to FIG. 29), the tip is inserted into the transmission hole 321a and the tip is projected below the lower frame member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b. And a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

  While the cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 with the rigidity in the axial direction, the cylindrical member 312c cylinders light irradiated from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 6). While being held inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such a limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated in a wide range.

  The lens member 313 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and upper and lower end portions are extended forward in a flange shape, and the extended end portion is configured to have a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. In addition, a spherical shell portion 313a formed from a spherical shell shape is provided in the central portion.

  The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right torsion portions, both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer end portions of the torsion portion, and a center portion 315b connecting the pair of torsion portions, .

  Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17A is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17B is a side view of the drive device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A, and FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the driving device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a skeleton by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a driving motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam) that are fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343 so as not to rotate. 344R), an arm member 345 that is pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344, a shaft 341c of the main body member 341, and a first overhanging portion 344c1 or second of the disk cam 344. A release member 346 that abuts the overhanging portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, a rotary claw member 347 that is pivotally supported coaxially with the release member 346 and relatively moves as the release member 346 rotates. The first spring SP1, which is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction in which the rotary claw member 347 is tilted down, and the direction in which the release claw member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are separated from each other. And a second spring SP2 that is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates a force.

  The main body member 341 is perforated at the same position on the motor housing portion 341a that is bent rearward on the left and right and formed in a U-shape when viewed from the top, and a plate portion that is opposed to the motor housing portion 341a. A shaft support hole 341b that supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that protrudes in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b in a mode having an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. The extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, the illumination support portion 341e extending from the motor accommodation portion 341a toward the front upper direction, and the illumination support portion 341e An LED device 341f that is disposed at the upper end portion and in which an LED light source is disposed is mainly provided.

  The LED device 341f is a triangular member on an upper surface portion thereof, and includes a portion that refracts light (portion that refracts light). Thereby, it becomes possible to irradiate the light of the LED device 341f uniformly upward and forward.

  The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing portion 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341a.

  The fixed member 342a supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the rotation gear of the drive motor 342 is pivotally supported and the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotation gear.

  The arm member 345 is drilled in a perfect circle shape at one end and is pivotally supported in a shaft support hole 345a that is pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344 and a rectangular shape in the other end. And a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

  The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where an end portion on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a contacts the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the disc cam 344 is rotated one or more times at the opposite end portion. It is formed at a position sufficient to be rotatable.

  The transmission shaft bar 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft bar 343. The transmission shaft bar 343 includes a cylindrical member 343a to which a disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with a rotation gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not the driving force is transmitted between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by an axial movement; a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b; Is mainly provided.

  The cylindrical member 343a includes D-shaped fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed to be longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. The Here, in detail, the fixed portion 343a2 is formed with a length that can move to a position that does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

  The transmission gear 343b includes a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the columnar member 343a is inserted, and a clutch in which irregularities are formed along the axial direction at a circumferential position centered on the axis from a surface opposed to the movable clutch 343c. Part 343b2.

  Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the column member 343a even when the column member 343a is fixed.

  The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross-section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and irregularities along the axial direction at a circumferential position centered on the shaft from a surface opposed to the transmission gear 343b. And a clutch portion 343c2 configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

  In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are constituted by a mountain-shaped convex portion and a concave portion having an apex angle of about 100 °.

  Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot be rotated relative to the columnar member 343a. Therefore, the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged. Thus, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. Thereby, by rotating the drive motor 342, the disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18) can be rotated.

  The movable clutch 343c is normally disposed at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when an axial load is applied to the movable clutch 343c, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 in a manner to be separated from the transmission gear 343b.

  The disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. The disc cam 344 is such that the left disc cam 344L and the right disc cam 344R are substantially mirror-shaped, and only the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR are different, so only the left disc cam 344L. A description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

  20A is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20B is a side view of the left disc cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. is there. 20A and 20B show a state where the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions protruding from both sides of a perfectly circular disc, and at the center position of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a projecting in a cylindrical shape in the inner direction, a circular rib 344b projecting inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and outside the circular rib 344b An engaging rib 344c that protrudes inward as a rib having a lower height than the circular rib 344b and has a portion protruding radially outward at two locations, and an outer side between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. A connecting pin 344d that protrudes in a cylindrical shape in the direction and is connected to an arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL that is formed near the outer periphery are mainly provided.

  The right disc cam 344R is different from the right disc cam 344R only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position that forms an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other is configured by mirroring the shape of the left disc cam 344L. .

  The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner periphery engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19), and the outer periphery has a shape that is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). Composed. That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

  The circular rib 344b protrudes to a position where it can contact the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

  In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c protrudes radially outward at a position shifted by 80 ° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed. From the overhanging portion 344c1, the first drawing-in portion 344c1 that retracts radially inward at a position shifted from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (in this embodiment, angle θ1 = 50 °), and the first overhanging portion 344c1. At a position shifted by the angle θ2 (in this embodiment, angle θ2 = 150 °), the second overhanging portion 344c3 that projects outward in the radial direction again, and the angle θ3 (in the present embodiment, the angle from the second overhanging portion 344c3). (θ3 = 20 °) mainly includes a second lead-in portion 344c4 that retracts radially inward at a shifted position.

  In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connecting pin 344d is disposed at a position having the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

  The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are arranged in a pair on the left and right sides, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

  FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 21A shows a state in which the rotation claw member 347 is rotated to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346. FIG. 21B shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 is rotated to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

  The state in which the release member 346 rotates by contacting the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position of the guide long hole 347b). (See FIG. 35).

  As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and a shaft support hole 346a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), From the projecting pin 346b projecting in the thickness direction in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a, the insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 346a And an engagement portion 346d configured as a portion protruding with the maximum diameter.

  The engaging portion 346d is a portion configured to be able to contact the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, since the outer periphery of the engaging portion 346d is formed to be curved, the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

  The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide elongated hole 347b that is pierced so as to be able to guide the projecting pin 346b of the release member 346 along the size (including a movement locus of the projecting pin 346b inside), and an end of the second spring SP2 An insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, a flange-shaped portion 347d that protrudes downward in a hook shape at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a, and an end of the first spring (see FIG. 18) can be inserted. And a pull-down hole 347e formed in the main body.

  In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21A, the release member 346 is disposed at the terminal position in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 21A clockwise) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the push-down direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are integrally rotated in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion When a load in the push-up direction is applied to 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotating claw member 347 until the small angle state shown in FIG.

  Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 22 to FIG. 24, an operation example in the case where the player performs a pushing operation in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

  22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 22 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state illustrated in FIG. Then, the state after the tilting device 310 returns from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand who operates the tilting device 310 repeatedly is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311 a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotating claw member 347. As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

  In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is disposed before the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

  Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

  Here, when the tilting device 310 is operated repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated. However, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 depends on the time interval at which the player repeatedly hits. The player will not be able to return in time, and will push in at a halfway position, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Conventionally, this can be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. However, in this embodiment, if the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 is resisted against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 to be pushed down (see FIG. 18), and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342. For this reason, there are problems that the product cost increases and space saving cannot be achieved.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by a vibration operation is disposed at a position facing the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. The

  As shown in FIG. 24, by driving this voice coil motor 352 in the extending direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the return operation of the tilting device 310 can be quickly performed without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. it can.

  Here, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the voice coil motor 352 is always driven. For example, when the player presses the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the player Since an unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state is calculated for a predetermined period. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hitting operation. Thereby, the player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25 to FIG. 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (turning operation) from the first state will be described. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.

  25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In FIG. 26, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 27 illustrates a state in which the posture has changed, and FIG. 27 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward direction by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. 26 and the posture of the rotating claw member 347 returns. FIG. 29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates. FIG. 29 shows a state where the player has pushed the tilting device 310 from the state of FIG. 28 to the end position, and FIG. 30 shows a circle from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the plate cam 344 has rotated in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach a second initial state in which the second overhanging portion 344c3 of the engagement rib 344c is in contact with the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346 Is illustratedIn FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand that pushes the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, while a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction can be secured. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c can have an effect of improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and an effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

  26, the disc cam 344 is moved forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26) from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state. ), The first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, so that the release member 346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward direction to a position where the engagement with the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 is released.

  The change in the posture of the release member 346 is continued until the disc cam 344 is rotated until the first retracting portion 344c2 and the engaging portion 346d of the engaging rib 344c face each other. The spring 315 is lifted by the biasing force (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

  At this time, in the state of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345, the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

  As shown in FIG. 27, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) by the urging force of the first spring SP1, and the rotating claw member 347 can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (see FIG. The state shown in FIG. At this time, since the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotates while maintaining the state (large angle state) shown in FIG.

  In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area where the protective lens member 311i can be viewed from the player's viewpoint is increased as compared to the tilting device 310 in the first state. The light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated in the front direction (the direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the light effect can be improved.

  In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the up and down reciprocating operation can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) from the state shown in FIG. 27, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated backward by the same amount ( By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. Thereby, the appearance of the tilting device 310 with respect to the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player with respect to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes corresponding to the operation in which the tilting device 310 repeatedly operates up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 among the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 28).

  According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction (front direction) toward the player, and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the attention degree of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the player can push in the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction in which the tilting device 310 is lowered (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311c). Only moves in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

  Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only a load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. Thereby, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the pushing end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating pawl member 347, thereby rotating the pawl. When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and then the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the bowl-shaped portion 347d, the rotating claw member 347 is moved to the tilting device 310. Return to the engageable position (rotate in the forward direction). Accordingly, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the upward direction by the rotating claw member 347.

  Therefore, after the player depresses the tilting device 310 from the state where the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 28 is moved up and down, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases his / her hand. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation that repeats the movement in the expansion direction and the movement in the reduction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 310.

  That is, the voice coil motor 352 generates a driving force for assisting the raising of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 24), and the purpose is to perform a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the pushing end position. Can be used.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the projecting protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 310 is formed on the lower frame member 320. The contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released by being buried in the lower surface. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only in a state where the player pushes the tilting device 310 and pushes it into the terminal end.

  Therefore, in comparison with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, whether or not vibration by the voice coil motor 352 is generated at the end of pushing is determined by the player who pushed the tilting device 310. Can only be grasped.

  Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operation means is lowered.

  On the other hand, this embodiment is configured in such a manner that the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

  Here, for example, when the jackpot is confirmed, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled so as to produce a vibration effect, so that the player can improve the expectation when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and the tilting device 310 is improved. The value as a prefetching means can be improved. Thereby, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as the operating means can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is moved in the forward rotation direction (reverse to FIG. 29) until the second overhanging portion 344c1 contacts the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. The drive device 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating it by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction.

  The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhang portion 344c1 contacts the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhang portion 344c3 and the engagement rib 344c abut.

  29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 29), and the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d, and then reversely rotates. By this method, the driving device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while maintaining the posture of the rotary claw member 347. it can.

  Next, referring to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (turning motion) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( The second operation mode will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (turning operation) through the second state.

  31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 31, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, and the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31). FIG. 32 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 31 and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state. FIG. 33 shows the state shown in FIG. FIG. 34 shows a state where the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state shown in FIG. 33. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand that pushes the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotating claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting is performed. The device 310 operates in the upward direction.

  At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 and the disc cam 344. Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be lifted with a low resistance, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the disc cam 344 is changed to about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state where the engagement between the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 is released) by about 10 degrees. It is possible to make the posture 310 that can be arranged in the second state (the posture in which the disc cam 344 is rotated by 180 ° from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state from the state of FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the disk cam 344 obstructs the state change (the disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 enters the second state.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the reverse rotation direction ( By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. Thereby, the appearance of the tilting device 310 with respect to the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player with respect to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes corresponding to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 among the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 33, since the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is changed in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33).

  That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the attention degree of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, as the vertical movement mode of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movement (turning movement) shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. This can be done immediately after the restriction on the upward movement of the device 310 is released. Accordingly, two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342 can be created.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, difference in expectation of jackpot), and the player's attention to the tilting device 310 The degree can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push in the tilting device 310. In the state shown in FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and a load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345 does not occur).

  Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being loaded with the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only a load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. Thereby, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of reaching the state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, so that the rotating claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the bowl-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (FIG. 34 clockwise) and subsequently pushing in the tilting device 310. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Accordingly, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the upward direction by the rotating claw member 347.

  Therefore, after the player depresses the tilting device 310 from the state where the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 33 is moved up and down (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310 is set to the first state when the player releases his / her hand. Can be maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, an operation for setting the disc cam 344 in the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 after the player performs the pushing operation will be described. To do. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of vertical movements (turning movements) of the tilting device 310 or continuously perform one of them.

  35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 35 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 36, the rotation cam 344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) more than the state shown in FIG. 35 and then forwards to the position where the disc cam 344 contacts the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. The state rotated counterclockwise (FIG. 35) is shown. In FIG. 37, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. A state where the sensor 353L is in the ON state is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of the player's hand that can swing from the top to the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the engaging rib 344c is engaged with the engaging portion of the release member 346. 346d abuts. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346 to change the posture of the release member 346, but the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide long hole 347b of the rotary claw member 347. The rotating claw member 347 is maintained in the posture shown in FIG.

  That is, in the process of further rotating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 35 in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and releasing the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the rotary claw member 347 Regulation of the rise of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

  From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotation cam 344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in FIG. 5, the driving device 340 can be set to the second initial state.

  In the present embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disc cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the second initial state shown in FIG. 36 is passed. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, as described above, it is possible to perform the up and down operation (turning operation) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2.

  Here, the player who pushes in the tilting device 310 can perform an operation of keeping the hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if there is no special indication such as “long press”. is there.

  This is an operation that occurs, for example, by forgetting to release the hand that pushed the excessive tilting device 310 that concentrates on the production, but in this case, the tilting device 310 rises even if the restriction by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (turning operation) within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on in a state where the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts below the first state), the disc cam 344 is not rotated reversely, and as shown in FIG. 37, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 In the first initial state of the driving device 340 that is turned on (see FIG. 14), the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped).

  In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, since the tilting device 310 does not move up when the player's hand is placed above the tilting device 310, in this case, from the state shown in FIG. 36 to the state shown in FIG. The change is caused by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the player's hand is kept on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation), the burden on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

  When the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) is kept on when the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (up to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, the plate cam 344 may be controlled so as to immediately reversely return to the state shown in FIG. Thereby, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and it is not necessary to apply a useless load on the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

  With reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a device for preventing the destruction of the driving device 340 will be described. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. In FIG. 38, a player's hand that holds and fixes the tilting device 310 in a state where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 39, an upper member of the main body cover 351 is illustrated. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 38, when the player holds and tilts the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left untreated, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may break down. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate freely with respect to the transmission shaft bar 343a that fixes the disc cam 344, so that it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 39, when the disc cam 344 is fixed, the drive motor 342 starts driving, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are interposed. Power is transmitted and the movable clutch 343c moves away from the transmission gear 343b. Thereby, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

  When the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 passes through the first state if the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 is not turned on while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °) (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state). In addition, it is determined that the player has intentionally performed an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and notification is made, for example, by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation. However, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

  As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player is intentionally performing an erroneous operation and notify that the erroneous operation is stopped only at that time, and also stop the drive motor 342 early to prevent a failure. be able to.

  When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disc cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c are shifted. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled from the state before the phase shift occurs (by the number of steps or the like), the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it can be determined that the drive device 340 has entered the first initial state by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 has been turned on. Even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c by restarting the control of the drive motor 352 using the state as an initial position (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342). Control can be performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are matched again.

  Thereby, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, there is a deviation between the operation that the tilting device 310 performs by the rotation control of the drive motor 342 and the operation that the tilting device 310 actually performs. It is prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be appropriately operated to produce an effect.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that idles with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

  40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 41 further shows the disc cam from the state shown in FIG. A state in which 344 is rotated in the direction of arrow CCW is illustrated. 42 shows a state where the disc cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 43 further shows the disc cam from the state shown in FIG. A state in which 344 is rotated in the direction of arrow CW is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 rises toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain that state in the first state shown in FIG.

  This is not only because the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 from the state shown in FIG. 42 toward the state shown in FIG. 43, but the disc cam 344 rotates in the arrow CW direction. In this case, even if the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344c, A load in the direction of pushing up the member 347 does not occur. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

  Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, both of the operations from the first state shown in FIG. 38 to FIG. 40 and FIG. However, the operation differs from that in FIG. 41 or 43.

  For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by the control of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39), but the drive sound due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in change, the player notices the mode of control being performed, and the player will be aware of the effects to be executed, which may cause the player to lose interest. In addition, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by the sudden stop of the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the operation of the subsequent tilting device 310 is changed, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is Since only the directions are different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction by the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the expectation of the production changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, by confirming whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state, the player can produce an effect. Since the change in expectation can be grasped, the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 enters the second state (see FIG. 38) and the drive motor 342 moves toward the first state. Can be directed to watch over.

  That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 and the drive are driven by the player operating incorrectly when driving the drive motor 342. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

  Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to produce an effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the burden imposed on the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. The durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, even when the player performs an operation of pushing down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 performs an up / down motion without being regulated by the rotating claw member 347 (third motion mode). explain.

  44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 44 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the driving device 340. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by an imaginary line. .

  As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are the engaging portions of the releasing member 346. By rotating the disc cam 344 in a reciprocating manner while maintaining a positional relationship that does not pass through 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

  In this case, since the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in the state of being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) in accordance with the change in the posture of the release member 346, the tilting device 310 is configured in the manner shown in FIG. When the player moves up and down, even if the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 are not engaged, and the tilting device 310 is in the first state (rotation) when the player releases his / her hand. When the claw member 347 is engaged with the tilting device 310, an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 moves upward from the position where the ascent is restricted and the vertical motion is continued can be implemented.

  Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only after the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether it was moving up or down in the third operation mode.

  As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first motion mode or the second motion mode (the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and released. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the hand is released after the tilting device 310 is pushed in). Assuming that the expectation level of the jackpot is high, not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when releasing the hand from the tilting device 310, the expectation level of whether or not the jackpot will be hit is recognized. Since an opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings when the player pays attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the attention degree of the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described. However, in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the drive device 2340 has the slide claw member 2348. The slide claw member 2348 is configured to slide when the release member 2346 is pushed up. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

  45 (a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45 (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45 (c) is a view of the release member 2346. It is a side view.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. .

  46A shows a state where the rotating plate member 2347 is rotated to the end position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 2346, and FIG. 46B shows the state with respect to the release member 2346. Thus, the small angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 is rotated to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated. Note that the state in which the release member 2346 rotates by contacting the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position of the guide long hole 347b). (See FIG. 48).

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a release member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a rotation thereof as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47). A slide claw member 2348 arranged on the opposite side of the release member 2346 across the plate member 2347 and configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47); Is mainly provided. In addition, about the structure which has the function similar to 1st Embodiment in the cancellation | release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed in a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted to the rail portion 2347f, and a front end at the upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b that is projected in a hook-like shape (to the left in FIG. 45) and a thickness portion of the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b (a vertical direction in FIG. 47 (a)) are arranged to overlap. A reinforcing portion 2348c formed of a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a projecting pin 2348d that protrudes in a columnar shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c mainly. Prepare.

  The curved portion 2348a has a width that is slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the bending portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state where the bending portion 2348a is fitted in the rail portion 2347f.

  The hook-shaped part 2348b is similar in shape to the hook-shaped part 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is disposed on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force to be adsorbed with a bottom plate portion 2311a of a tilting device 2310 described later.

  The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 of the rotating plate member 2347 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. This is a portion for reinforcing the slide claw member 2348.

  The projecting pin 2348d is a columnar member that is inserted into the functional long hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is configured by a metal rod that is inserted and fixed into the main body plate portion 2348e. As the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348 d is pushed against the side surface of the functional long hole 2346 e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides.

  In addition to the shaft support hole 347a, the guide long hole 347b, the insertion hole 347c, and the pull-down hole 347e, the rotary plate member 2347 includes a rail portion 2347f that guides the slide operation of the slide claw member 2348, a slide A long support hole 2347g through which the protruding pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted.

  The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the rotating plate member 2347 is rotated in the forward direction (see FIG. In a state of being arranged at the terminal position (46 counterclockwise), it is formed in a curved shape along an arc centering on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47).

  The support long hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47), similarly to the rail portion 2347f. When the slide claw member 2348 is slid and moved with the protruding pin 2348d inserted into the support long hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support long hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be supported. It is possible to suppress wobble.

  The release member 2346 includes a functional long hole 2346e, which is a long hole drilled in the thickness direction, in addition to the shaft support hole 346a, the protruding pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engaging portion 346d. .

  The functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and the first long hole is configured by a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole 2346e1 and a second long hole 2346e2 extending in a direction inclined from one end of the first long hole 2346e toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. To slide.

  Since the functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the moving speed of the release member 2346 remains as it is without the time delay for the movement of the release member 2346. Reflected in speed.

  That is, if the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 quickly slides, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is reduced, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 is also reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the slide direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the projecting pin 2348d to the functional long hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, a force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding.

  In other words, in this embodiment, even if the slide claw member 2347 slides due to the rotation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 slides when the slide claw member 2347 is pulled when the angle is large. There is no movement. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the rising of the tilting device 2310 can be restricted by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

  FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 47 shows a state where the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is disposed below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. 48 shows the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. Is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engagement portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 is moved in the backward direction (see FIG. 48). The state in which the release member 2346 is returned by the urging force of the second spring SP2 after being rotated clockwise (48) is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface in the vicinity of the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and is made of a magnetic material.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet part 2311a1 and the hook-like part 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes in the tilting device 2310 from this state, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are separated from each other due to a change in the posture of the tilting device 2310, so that a large load is applied to the slide claw member 2348 from the tilting device 2310. There is nothing to be done.

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet part 2311a1 and the hook-like part 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, when the release member 2346 operates quickly, the operation of the tilting device 2310 also becomes quick.

  Accordingly, the sliding claw member 2348 is slid at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, so that the sliding claw member 2348 is rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be lifted and moved at a speed different from that when the tilting device 2310 is lifted and the lifting movement restriction is canceled (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the upward direction can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

  By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes, in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the operation modes increase, the association between the operation modes and the jackpot expectation level makes it easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a pre-reading means. The degree of attention can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-like portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilt device 2310 are used. Since the tilting device 2310 is raised by the magnetic force adsorption between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310, the tilting device 2310 can be applied to the tilting device 2310 as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. The load can be increased.

  That is, normally, when the player places his hand on the top of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from being lifted by the weight of the hand. 48 (even if the biasing force by the torsion spring 315 is not so large as to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, the player's hand is lifted in the state shown in FIG. In this manner, the tilting device 2310 can be raised.

  Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to make a difference in the load in the upward direction (force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his / her hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pushing in the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in load.

  For example, by associating the difference in load with the expected degree of jackpot, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of prefetching, so the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 for the player is increased. Can be improved.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment. Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state where the tilting device 3310 is pressed by the player or is pressed by the player. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case main body 3311 and the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (the rotation of the tilting device 3310). And a left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position perpendicular to the axis and positioned at the center position in the rotation axis direction on the opposite side of the right detection piece 311gR. The extension length of the left detection piece 3311gL is longer than that of the right detection piece 311gR, and the extension length is shorter than that of the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

  51A and 51B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. 51A shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51B shows a state where the tilting device 3310 is being pushed in. 51A and 51B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R. (The left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

  As shown in FIG. 51B, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, while the right side The detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

  By detecting the change in the state of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where it is pushed to the pushing end, it is in the middle of pushing. Or whether it is in the middle of returning.

  That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where it is pushed to the pushing end, By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

  52A and 52B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. 52A illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, and FIG. 52B illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is moving from the pushing end to the first state. . 51A and 51B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52A, when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted through the right detection sensor 324R. (Left side detection sensor 324L is ON and right side detection sensor 324R is ON).

  As shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state where it is disposed at the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L. The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

  If the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where it is pushed to the pushing end, but this is the left side detection. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of returning to the first state.

  Here, in the case where the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 and an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310 is applied, the voice coil motor 352 is moved to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving down. Rather than causing the collision, the voice coil motor 352 is allowed to collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving up, so that a load that effectively lifts the tilting device 3310 can be applied.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of rising and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when it is not, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

  Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player operates the tilting device 3310 repeatedly, the ascending operation of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 3310 can be used by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 as compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 is lifted only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably performed.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player. However, the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is described. Is a mode in which the tilting device 4310 detects an operation speed during the change from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that protrudes in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding protrusion 311j of the case body 4311.

  The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

  54 (a) and 54 (b) are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating the push-down operation of the operation device 4300 in time series. 54A, the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54B, the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 54A, and the front detection piece 4311k is detected on the lower side. A state in which the sensor 4321e is passed downward is illustrated. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side portion of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler-type sensors, and are arranged in a posture in which the detection groove is directed in a direction in which the front detection piece 4311k can pass. In the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

  When the player changes the state shown in FIG. 54B by pushing the tilting device 4310 from the state shown in FIG. 54A, the front detection piece 4311k is connected to the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor. 4321e in order. By detecting the interval of the passage timing, the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be determined, and whether or not the voice coil motor 352 is driven is selected based on the determination.

  Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the pushing length becomes long (because the period during which acceleration is applied is long), so that the tilting device is compared with an operation button having a short pushing length. The upper limit of the operation speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no means for decelerating, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 sturdy as a safety measure when the player pushes in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

  It is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is disposed near the pushing end, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak power or a player who decides to push in gently, the reaction force always becomes large near the push-in position, and it becomes a burden of the push-in operation, and it is easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 according to the timing intervals at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. Thus, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 until it is not necessary.

  That is, for example, when the interval of the timing at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is On the other hand, when the above-described timing interval is shorter than the predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

  Thereby, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated even with a weak force. Push-in operation is possible.

  Further, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is fast, not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of pushing as the reaction force against the tilting device 4310. Can be added. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54B, the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the projecting protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 projects below the lower frame member 4320. In other words, the control is performed in such a manner that the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is pushed in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide in the middle of pushing out the movable member of the voice coil motor 352, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

  55 (a) and 55 (b) is a side view of the operation device 4300. FIG. 55A shows a state where the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55B shows a state where the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end. .

  In FIGS. 55A and 55B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second state at a high speed, the overhanging projection of the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of the tilting device 4310 reaching the pushing end from the first state. The installation portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

  By pushing in the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the projecting protruding portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. It is possible to consume the force of the pushing operation to move to. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 can be applied by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

  At this time, the voice coil motor 352 has a structure in which a load is applied by electromagnetic force rather than a structure in which a load is applied by friction as in the case of a disc brake, so that damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

  In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), the projecting protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, so the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left detection sensor 324L is The reaction force applied to the tilting device 4310 from the voice coil motor 352 can be gradually increased by gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state.

  Accordingly, the tilting device 4310 decelerates from the first state toward the push-in end while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 contacts the voice coil motor 352. The effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is disposed at the push-in end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

  In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55B, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation that repeats the movement in the expansion direction and the movement in the reduction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 4310 is pushed down to the end of the pushing operation, it is possible to produce an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310.

  That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of performing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position.

  Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes the tilting device 310 by vibrating the voice coil motor 352, but the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is applied to the lower frame member 5320. , A drive motor 5411 for rotating a weight member 5412 disposed at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric, and based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411, vibration is transmitted to a player who touches the lower frame member 5320. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, a difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

  56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operation device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320 and the drive device 340 is the drive device 5340, compared to the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 are configured similarly to the first embodiment.

  The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disc cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft bar 5343 with one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

  58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 is made of a flexible material while accommodating a transmission device 5410 that rotates and drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410. A flexible member 5420 that is formed in a bottomed dish shape having an open upper surface, and accommodates the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 in separate sections and is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. 5430.

  The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor, and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is a fan shape and whose rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 is supported by a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan. And mainly.

  The drive motor 5411 is provided with a fixed portion 5411a which is disposed in a pair of left and right sides on the side where the shaft extends and is formed in a flange shape from a metal material.

  The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is pivotally supported eccentrically with the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the gravity center position of the weight member 5412 is changed, and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate together.

  The flexible member 5420 includes a main body portion 5421 having a cylindrical container shape having a bottom on the opposite side of the drive motor 5411 inserted along the axial direction, and a main body portion 5421 in an assembled state. And a rib-like leg portion 5422 projecting in a pair of rib shapes and a rib-like leg portion 5422 projecting left and right on the open side of the main body portion 5421. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a protruding leg portion 5424 that protrudes upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421 in a pair of columnar shapes.

  The main body 5421 has a container-shaped depth that is the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, in a state where the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end surface on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end surface on the opening side of the main body portion 5421 are formed on the same surface. In this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

  The rib-like legs 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body 5421, and the rib-like legs 5422 on the left and right sides are equivalent to the arrangement of the posture maintaining parts 5423 on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance increases as compared to the lower rib-like leg 5422.

  Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is projecting in a columnar shape, the load can be easily concentrated at one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by the tilt of the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

  In the assembled state, the housing member 5430 includes a first housing portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are housed, and a second housing portion that is adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 and in which the weight member 5412 is housed. 5432 and a groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of the first housing portion 5431 and the second housing portion 5432.

  When the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 is attached to the bottom and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (an assembly load release state), the depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is increased from the upper surface. The depth is such that the protruding leg 5424 protrudes.

  The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed outward from the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 and is a flexible member. When 5420 is deformed (assembled load state), the depth interferes with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

  The groove 5433 has a width that is slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth that extends slightly below the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. The

  59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a). ) Is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc in FIG. In FIG. 59A, a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 59 (a), when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first region S51, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310, is pushed into the player by three times from the first state, An ending area S52, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed at the end position of the push-in, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 59A, the projecting leg 5424 is projected in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the center axis of the arc of the lower bearing 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum amount of deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56).

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second housing portion 5432 in the assembly load release state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the projecting leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center line of the lower frame member 5320 in the extending direction view. For this reason, the convex leg 5424 can be pushed right and left evenly on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, so that it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right (tilting left and right on the paper surface in FIG. 59B) when pushed. The convex leg 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture of FIG. 59 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d that are pierced so that the protruding leg portions 5424 can be inserted. Since the through hole 5321d has a width in the left-right direction that is slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding leg 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player, and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is convex. When pressed against the leg 5424, deformation of the protruding leg 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, deformation of the shape of the projecting leg portion 5424 can be suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 together with the projecting leg portion 5424 can be easily translated in the downward direction (downward in FIG. 59B).

  FIG. 60A and FIG. 60B are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. In FIG. 60A, the assembly load release state is illustrated, and in FIG. 60B, the protruding leg 5424 is in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 59A). The assembled load state after being pushed inward of the first accommodating portion 5431 is illustrated. In addition, the external shape of the 2nd accommodating part 5432 and the weight member 5412 is illustrated with an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), when the vibration device 5400 is loaded from the assembled load released state and becomes the assembled loaded state, the projecting leg 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion are provided. 5422 is deformed, and the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

  In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 60B, the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force that pushes back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 comes closer to the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed into the end position, the tilting device 310 is operated. The impact when 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be reduced. Further, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without a time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at a high speed.

  Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the first state (the state where the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38). The ascending speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in becomes slow. In this case, even if the player operates the tilting device 310 repeatedly, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 effectively, the tilting device 310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 310 can be comfortably performed.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, in the assembly load release state, the weight member 5412 does not contact the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even when driving of the drive motor 5411 is started in the assembly load released state, vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second storage portion 5432 does not occur.

  Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 and transmitted to the housing member 5430 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

  As shown in FIG. 60B, in the assembly load state, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced up and down by the deformation of the upper protruding leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422. Configured in an acceptable manner.

  When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg 5422 disposed on the lower side of the main body part 5421 changes to a state of being compressed further up and down, and the rib-like leg 5422 is slightly cured. Therefore, the vibration attenuation effect by the rib-like leg 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

  In addition, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 is extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and at a uniform interval from side to side from the central axis. Since the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the radially outer end of the rib-like leg portion 5422 is moved to the left and right outer sides (at the connection position between the main body portion 5421 and the rib-like leg portion 5422). It is deformed in such a manner that it moves in the direction of smaller resistance (see FIG. 60B). In this case, since the protruding direction of the rib-like leg 5422 disposed on the lower side of the main body 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-like leg 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second housing portion 5432 collide is partially reduced by the elastic force of the rib-like leg portion 5422 below the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. Thereby, the position shift of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

  61 (a) and 61 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a).

  61 (a) and 61 (b) illustrate an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) illustrates a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation shaft. In b), a state in which the gravity center position of the weight member 5412 is disposed below the rotation shaft is illustrated. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the state of the vibration device 5400 in a state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player and occupies the terminal area S52 is illustrated.

  The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed on the upper side in the assembly load state, the drive motor 5411 is rotated to a position where the distance from the lower bottom portion of the second housing portion 5432 is the distance Q1. An axis is placed. In the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

  That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in an assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof abuts (rubs) against the second housing portion 5432. Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes compared to the assembly load release state, and different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

  Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432, a force that moves the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61B) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 approach and separate from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward ). This repulsive force causes the flexible member 5420 to move upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412. The flexible member 5420 faces the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (in the direction of movement of the tilting device 310). Force to push back in the direction).

  As described above, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) is divided into the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. By configuring with a combination of generated forces, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted.

  That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 from the time when the tilting device 310 starts to contact the protruding leg 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 59A). After the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force that pushes back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force to push back the tilting device 310 can be increased particularly in the vicinity of the termination region S52, so that the lightness of the operation of the tilting device 310 and the mitigation of the impact during the pushing operation can be favorably achieved. This adjustment can be performed in a state where the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is maintained. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) varies depending on the detection timing. ) Is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight members 5412 is changed based on the determined operating speed.

  For example, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 gives the tilting device 310 to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than the specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to be in a downward posture (see FIG. 61B).

  As a result, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation shaft is raised upward from the lower end of the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 by the radius Ra. Thereby, compared with the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61A) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered from the state shown in FIG. 61A), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 is set. The movable region of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

  That is, when the convex leg 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount, the compression dimension of the flexible member 5420 and the upper part of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Accordingly, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

  Although description is omitted in the present embodiment, a force to push back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A). In addition, it is possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 from being generated.

  Here, the contact of the member occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 can be changed and the transmission range of the vibration can be expanded. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to, for example, a portion touching the housing of the pachinko machine 10 other than the portion touching the tilting device 310.

  That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320. Therefore, the palm placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing or a part of the side of the hand can be used. The vibration can be transmitted to the player. Thereby, the situation where a vibration is not transmitted to a player can be avoided.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the weight member 5412 is used only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibration device 5400 forms an assembly load state. And the accommodating member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

  Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that the player's pushing operation is detected. Therefore, it is possible to easily transmit the vibration to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the player.

  That is, when the player performs a push-in operation in such a manner that the player releases his / her hand immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (pulse-pushing manner), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated until the player releases his / her hand (the start of vibration is not in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect due to the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in and ready to generate vibrations, vibration can be transmitted simultaneously with the pushing of the tilting device 310. Thereby, the player can experience the effect by vibration.

  Further, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent vibration from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

  Therefore, the state in which vibration is transmitted by the pushing of the tilting device 310 can be realized by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

  Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The driving device 5340 is different from the driving device 340 in the first embodiment in a disc cam 5344 and a transmission shaft bar 5343. Others are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment, and thus the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed at the center of a pair of disk cams 5344 composed of a left disk cam 5344L and a right disk cam 5344R.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R. Since the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 5344L are configured in a symmetrical shape, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

  The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft bar 5343 are disposed at a connection portion with the transmission shaft bar 5343. It is.

  That is, the right disc cam 5344R has a support cylinder portion P1 that extends in a cylindrical shape from the disc portion toward the side where the circular rib 344b is disposed, and an axial direction of the support cylinder portion P1. Along the long hole recess C1 that is recessed from the disk portion in the shape of an axially symmetric long hole, and the axis of the support cylinder portion P1 that is recessed by the long hole recess C1. A pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 extending from the end in the direction toward the disc portion side along the axial direction.

  The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by making the inner diameter thereof equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft bar 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 includes a deformed portion P1a that is the same in the axial arrangement as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1 and remains without being recessed in the long hole recess C1.

  The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged with the elongated hole recess C1 interposed therebetween, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part.

  The long hole recess C1 is formed so that the shape of the recessed cross section is slightly longer than the width of the clamping arm A1. Therefore, the clamping arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the recessed cross section of the long hole recess C1.

  Moreover, the surface which the long hole recessed part C1 opposes is comprised from the shape engaged with D shape of the fixing | fixed part 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the cylindrical member 5343a from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

  The sandwiching arm portion A1 includes an engagement convex portion A1a that protrudes in a direction close to the arm portion on the other side from the surface of the pair of arm portions that faces the other arm. . The engaging projection A1a engages with the tip of the columnar member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft bar 5343, and prevents the columnar member 5343a from coming off the disc cam 5344.

  The distal end shape of the engaging projection A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64). Thereby, compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface, the overlapping length in the radial direction in the state where the engaging convex portion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 (FIG. 65). (B) The length in the left-right direction) can be secured long.

  The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (long hole concave portion) in which the side surface close to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is recessed along the shaft in the vicinity of the shaft. The side surface of the opening side of C1 and the surface position are arranged.

  Thereby, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63 (b)) with respect to the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65 (b)). reference). Therefore, on the outer side of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63 (b)), the length that the cylindrical member 5343a protrudes from the recessed surface portion C2 is longer than the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a. (See FIG. 65B).

  Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for inserting the e-ring (a space necessary for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction of the right disk cam 5344R (a direction parallel to the surface). Therefore, the recessed area (radial area) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced. Thereby, the design freedom degree of the shape of the right disc cam 5344R can be improved.

  The transmission shaft bar 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft bar 5343. A difference between the transmission shaft bar 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is a columnar member 5343a.

  The cylindrical member 5343a is the same as the fixing portion 5343a1 with the fitting groove 5343a3 interposed between the fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof and the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side when viewed from the front. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from a cross-sectional shape, a fitting groove 5343a3 for positioning the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction by the e-ring and a groove for fitting the e-ring, and the fitting groove When the disc cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in 5343a3, the engagement groove 5343a4, which is the groove with which the engagement convex part A1a of the clamping arm part A1 is engaged, is mainly used. Prepare. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the pair of plates in which the shaft support holes 341b are formed in the assembled state.

  The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

  Since the e-ring is later fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a part of the cylindrical member 5343a having a diameter partially increased by the e-ring, the cylinder is inserted before the e-ring is fitted. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

  With this diameter being uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the axial support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, whereby the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the axial support hole 341b with the e-ring. And the e-ring can prevent the disc cam 5344 from shifting in the axial direction.

  With the above-described configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft bar 5343, the disk cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft bar 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft bar 5343, the columnar member 5343a is defined as the side where the engagement convex portion A1a is disposed on the end of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344. Insert from the opposite end to a position where the engaging projection A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engagement protrusion 5A4 is inserted into the engagement groove 5343a4 until the engagement protrusion A1a is inserted, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement protrusions A1a. The sandwiching arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between them can be increased. After that, when the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging convex portion A1a, the engaging convex portion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging convex portion A1a is fitted into the engaging groove 5343a4. Thus, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft bar 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65B).

  On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft bar 5343 functions not only as a one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing breakage in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG.

  FIG. 65A is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65B is a diagram of the right disc cam 5344R in the LXVb-LXVb line in FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 66 (a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66 (b) is a right disc cam along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66 (a). It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

  FIG. 66 shows a deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player overloads the unloaded right disk cam 5344R shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the columnar member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end side portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position spaced from the disc portion of the right disc cam 5344R, and the disc In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging projection A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the columnar member 5343a or the right disc cam 5344R, the columnar member 5343a is configured such that it can be tilted about the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 are opposed to each other, the resistance of the column member 5343a to fall down is reduced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connection pin 344d are connected. Are in contact with each other, and the resistance of the column member 5343a to fall down is increased.

  Accordingly, when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (for example, when the player forcibly presses down (pulls up) the tilting device 310), the displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62) When the load for restricting is applied), the direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

  That is, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in a direction with a small resistance. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, On the plane parallel to the plane of the disc portion, the disc portion is tilted about the support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1. Thereby, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG.

  67 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67 (a). 4 is a partial rear view of a device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 67B, the protective cover device 350 is not shown, and only the disc cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 67 (a), for easy understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R that is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft bar 5343 is illustrated by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to collapse. The outline of the finished state is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  In FIG. 67 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is shown enlarged. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 67A, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts to operate, the left disk cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the player is restricted from displacing the tilting device 310. As a result, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L about to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disk cam 5344R can undergo the above-described shaft collapse deformation, so that the load can be reduced.

  In FIG. 67 (a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after the axis collapse deformation is illustrated by an imaginary line. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft collapse deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

  In FIG. 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts to move and the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd, the shaft support of the arm member 345 is moved by this dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are displaced from each other, and the right disk cam 5344R is deformed to fall down to absorb this.

  Due to the shaft tilting deformation, the connecting pin 344d is tilted with respect to the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67 (a), so that the center Pb on the base side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the protruding tip side are right-round. The position is displaced along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. Since this misalignment can partially absorb the misalignment between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the right disc cam 5344R with the dimension Rd, the drive motor is held while the tilting device 310 is gripped. When driving 342 (see FIG. 62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), when the disc cam 5344 is axially deformed, the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, and therefore the player drives the driving motor 342 while holding and fixing the tilting device 310. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but in the direction to repel it, the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, the rotation claw member 347 is blocked by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so that the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

  On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 in the direction to repel it. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

  Accordingly, when the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disc cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or Of any elastic force of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344 can be increased. As a result, the load applied to the disk cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased, so that the load applied to the arm member 345 can be increased. Can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction.

  In the present embodiment, the right disk cam 5344R is formed in a line-symmetric shape with respect to a straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the central point (a direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the central point). Since the elongated hole C1 is extended to the right disk cam 5344R, the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed regardless of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the direction of displacement of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). The shaft can fall down and deform with resistance.

  68 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68 (a). 4 is a partial rear view of a device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 68B, illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 68 (a), for easy understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R that is inserted and fixed perpendicularly to the transmission shaft bar 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied and the shaft collapses. The outline of the finished state is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  68A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and is tilted down by the angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. The player's hand holding the is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the player holds the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 5344R regardless of whether or not the tilting device 310 is in the second state. The tip end of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R due to the tilting of the shaft, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. As a result, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

  The matters described as the right disc cam 5344R are also the same as the left disc cam 5344L.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates in a state where the tilting device 310 is gripped by the player, resulting in overload. Then, the right disk cam 5344R tilts with respect to the axial direction.

  Therefore, by detecting the degree of the tilting operation with respect to the axial direction, it is possible to quickly notice the occurrence of overload. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, when the drive motor 342 is driven for a period in which the right disk cam 344R rotates once, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right detection sensor 353R. However, when the player holds the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right detection sensor 353R, and the right detection sensor. Since the input to 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

  In this case, it takes a period of time to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle in a state where no overload occurs until the occurrence of the overload, so that the detection of the overload is delayed. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disk cam 5344R is tilted with respect to the axial direction (see FIG. 66B), the overload is caused. The occurrence can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage. As a detection method, for example, a method using the notification device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c is illustrated (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66 (a)). ).

  The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with an input unit, and is arranged in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 and the engagement rib 344c intersect. In addition, the input unit is arranged in such a manner as to protrude toward the support cylinder part P1. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65B), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 65). 66 (b)). Thereby, it can be judged at an early stage whether the disc cam 5344 is overloaded by determining the output from the notification device E1.

  Next, an operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment includes the disc cam 344, the engagement rib, and the engagement rib. 344c is composed of another member and is configured to be rotatable relative to each other. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, a difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disc cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R is configured to have a mirror shape with respect to the left disc cam 6344L, so the description of the left disc cam 6344L. The description of the right disk cam 6344R is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

  As with the first embodiment, the left disc cam 6344L is provided with a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL, and a disc member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the columnar member 343a, and the disc member 6344L1. A ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially supported and rotates relative to the disk member 6344L1.

  The disc member 6344L1 has an annular shape in the axial direction at a position where the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment is disposed at the center position of the disc portion and is spaced radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided so as to project along.

  The ring member 6344L2 has an annular main body 6344g having a ring shape that has the same outer peripheral diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and whose inner peripheral diameter is slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, and its circular shape. A lid plate portion 6344h that is disposed at an axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the lid plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. Receiving gear teeth 6344i that are formed on the radially outer side of the thickened portion.

  Since the inner peripheral diameter of the annular main body 6344g is formed larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, the annular main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b in the assembled state, whereby the central shaft portion 344a. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be rotatable relative to the center.

  Note that the end surface of the annular body 6344g on the side of the disk member 6344L1 in the axial direction is in contact with the annular rib 6344f. Thereby, compared with the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the surface is in contact with the disk member 6344L1, the contact area can be reduced, and the frictional resistance can be reduced. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disc member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be performed smoothly.

  The receiving gear teeth 6344i mesh with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Accordingly, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In this embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1 (in a mode in which the disk member 6344L1 makes one rotation while the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times). , The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c and the receiving gear teeth 6344i is set).

  The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft bar 343. The second transmission device 6348 is an auxiliary column member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the column member 343a, and the auxiliary column. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a reduction transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. 6348c.

  With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is removed from the first state of the tilting device 310 is composed of a plurality of types.

  71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 6300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36. In FIG. 72, the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the backward direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the disc member 6344R1 is rotated by 1/3 in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction). Is illustrated. 73 illustrates a state in which the ring member 6344L2 has rotated by a predetermined angle in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state illustrated in FIG.

  Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is moved by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

  In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the fixed position by the rotating claw member 347 is released, and the reaching position when the tilting device 310 moves up instantaneously (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) is the second state. It was limited to the position (refer FIG. 34) to arrange | position.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connection pin 344d that is a support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, the engagement rib 344c, Can be changed, and the types of arrival positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

  That is, when the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 and tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) in the case where the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 71 and the case where the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. It is possible to change the position to reach and reach (without waiting for the rotation of 344).

  Thereby, for example, when the gaming machine is configured in a manner in which the expectation degree of the effect is changed by the difference in height that the tilting device 310 rises instantaneously from the first state and reaches, the attention of the tilting device 310 is increased. Can be improved. In this case, there is no limitation on whether to increase the degree of expectation when the tilting device 310 rises higher or to raise the degree of expectation when the tilting device 310 has a lower rising arrival position.

  However, by keeping the rising position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation reaches the maximum, the expectation degree is reached. Can be associated with the magnitude of the amount of displacement by which the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the player can easily understand the difference in expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

  In this case, the player can be motivated to confirm to which position the tilting device 310 is lifted, so that the player watches the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. Can be directed. Therefore, regardless of the production mode of the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the gaming method of operating the tilting device 310 in a disorderly manner.

  Next, an operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, the disk cam 7344 has a disk member. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged as separate members, and these separate members are configured to be capable of forming a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which relative rotation is possible. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 74 and FIG. 75, characteristics of a disc cam 7344 used as an alternative to the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 74 (a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is FIG. FIG. 75A is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 75A, and FIG. 75B is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. The right disc cam 7344L is configured by a mirror-symmetric shape of the right disc cam 7344R, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disc cam 7344R includes a disc member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a into which the columnar member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state, and the disc member 7344R1. Ring member 7344R2 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the ring member, and an engaging portion 7630 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits in the equally recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. And an engaging member 7344R3.

  The disk member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center, and includes a detection hole 344eR in a portion extending in a flange shape from the edge of the cup toward the radially outer side, and an engagement rib. 344c is a member that has a shape that is partially omitted (a portion between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first drawing-in portion 344c2 is omitted).

  The disc member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in the assembled state with a surface, and a first circular recessed portion 7410 that is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a first circular recessed portion 7410 thereof. Between the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion having a diameter smaller than that of the first circular recessed portion 7410 and deep in the axial direction, and the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the radial direction. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be drilled and a fixing projecting radially outward from the side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (the outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430. The projection 7440 is mainly provided.

  The insertion hole 7430 is a first elongated rectangular portion that is elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a position shifted from the intermediate position between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first drawing-in portion 344c2. A long hole 7431 and a second long hole 7432 which is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1 from the bottom end of the disk member 7344R1 of the first long hole 7431. And a return portion 7433 configured to project to the second long hole 7432 side with the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum.

  The dimension of the second long hole 7432 in the width direction (short direction) is smaller than the dimension of the first long hole 7431 in the width direction (short direction), and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (short direction).

  The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (the lower end portion in FIG. 75 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed to be movable outward of the second long hole 7432.

  The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3, and is configured with a protruding height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

  Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (c) is a view in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a). It is a side view of ring member 7344R2.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 includes a ring plate-shaped ring-shaped plate portion 7510 in which the connecting pin 344d is projected, and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. And a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and having a star-shaped through-hole formed at the center.

  The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recess depth of the first circular recess portion 7410, and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recess portion 7410. The Thereby, in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the relative rotation resistance from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1.

  The thick wall portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to reach (do not interfere with) the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75A). However, it is made slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This prevents the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive while the engagement member 7344R3 can be operated in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 75A) in the assembled state. can do.

  The thick-walled portion 7520 is recessed at an equal interval in the circumferential direction (in this embodiment, equally divided by 5) outwardly in the deformed through-hole 7521 formed in the axial direction and radially outward. And an equally-divided recessed portion 7522.

  The deformed through-hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is formed on a radially outer side than the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3 described later is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. Composed.

  77 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the engaging member 7344R3 is disposed radially outside the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)). Arc-shaped plate portion 7610 arranged in the direction, an extending portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the rear side end portion (the right end portion in FIG. 77 (b)) of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610, and the extending The engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 77 (b)) from the extending tip of the portion 7620, and the side facing the engaging portion 7630 of the arcuate plate portion 7610 are disposed. A coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

  The arcuate plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing projection 7611 that is a projection into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted at a position facing the tip of the engaging portion 7630 on the side surface on the inner peripheral side.

  The extended portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when the extended portion 7620 is pushed inward in the radial direction in opposition to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extended tip is The ring member 7344R2 has an extended length that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

  The engaging portion 7630 has a width dimension that is slightly shorter than the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends in a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick wall portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

  As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

  With reference to FIG. 78, a method of assembling the right disc cam 7344R will be described. 78 (a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a). c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, FIG. 78 (d) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), and FIG. 78F is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78F is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78E.

  78 (a), 78 (b), 78 (c), and 78 (d) illustrate a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1, and FIG. ) And FIG. 78 (f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1. In order to facilitate understanding, the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown in FIGS. 78 (b), 78 (d), and 78 (f).

  As a method of assembling the right disc cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first long hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78A and 78B). As described above, the dimension in the width direction of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the engaging part 7630, so that the engaging part 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

  Next, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid along the extending direction of the second long hole 7432 to the position where the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 are aligned in the depth direction of FIG. 78 (d). Moving.

  In this moved position, the fixed projection 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engagement member 7344R3 is restrained from being displaced in the circumferential direction (FIG. 78 (d) left-right direction) of the disk member 7344R1 and engaged. The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

  Further, the engagement member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first long hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outward from the second long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78B). Next, when the engagement member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engagement member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved to the second by the elastic recovery force. It enters the inside of the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

  In a state where the second elongated hole 7432 enters the inside, the tip of the return portion 7433 comes into contact with the extended portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3. The contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large). ) (See FIG. 78 (d)), the movement of the extending portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. Thereby, since the movement of the engagement member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the position of the engagement member 7344R3 from shifting during the operation.

  After the engaging member 7344R3 is held by the disk member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1 in a state where the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. To do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the engaging portion 7630 moves along the direction D7 directed radially outward by the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. By this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

  The right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled by the process described above. Note that the right disc cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetric shape of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction will be described. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disc cam 7344 are shown in the center. Illustration of unnecessary portions is omitted.

  The rotation claw member 7347 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the length of the guide long hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the protruding pin 346b is configured to be a movement end at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c contacts and passes from below.

  The release member 7346 is different from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80A) of the main body portion is cut obliquely in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

  79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81, the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (FIG. 79 (a) clockwise). Are illustrated in time series.

  FIG. 79A shows a state in which the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R comes into contact with the release member 7346 and the release member 7346 starts to rotate, and in FIG. 79B, FIG. ) Shows a state in which the right disc cam 7344R is further rotated, and FIG. 80A shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disc member 7344R1 to the end, and M6-2. 80 (b) shows a state in which the disk member 7344R1 is further rotated in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a). In FIG. 81, the right disk cam is changed from the state shown in FIG. 80 (b). The state after 7344R rotates in the reverse rotation direction and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is illustrated. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), and 80 (b), the release member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which it can rotate relative to the rotating claw member 7347 ( A small angle state) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 79A, in the state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start to contact, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state of protruding outward is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 is in contact with the side surface of the outermost diameter of the engaging member 7344R3, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in a small angle state. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction, and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form the arcuate plate portion 7610 in a small angle state. The disc cam 7344 is in a positional relationship in which the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 is rubbed against the release member 346 in a state where the inner peripheral surface is in contact with the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c. It arrange | positions (refer Fig.80 (a)).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the release member 7346 is rotated toward the small angle state by the rotation of the disc cam 7344, and when it becomes impossible to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member. From 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disc cam 7344.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the state where the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backward rotation direction cannot be continued. Therefore, based on the rotation of the disc cam 7344. The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80A). In this pushed-in state, the engaging portion 7630 is disposed radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through hole 7521.

  Therefore, the circumferential load is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a). However, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

  Due to this shift in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from one equally recessed portion 7522 that was originally arranged to another different equally recessed portion 7522, so the disk member 7344 R 1 and the ring member 7344 R 2. And the relative rotation of the phase by one concave portion (72 degrees).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 is released, so that the engagement member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction. Then, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, one equally recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated shifts.

  That is, by passing the process shown in FIG. 81 from FIG. 79 (a), the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided. It can be relatively shifted by an arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portion.

  With reference to FIG. 82, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. 82 (a), FIG. 82 (b), FIG. 83 (a), and FIG. 83 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disc cam 7344 are shown in the center, and other unnecessary parts are not shown.

  82 (a) to 83 (b) show the time series of how the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 82 (a) counterclockwise direction). FIG. 82A shows a state immediately before the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R come into contact with each other. In FIG. 82B, the engagement member 7344R3 is located above the release member 7346. FIG. 83 (a) shows a state where the disk cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82 (b). In (b), a state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 move in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 82 (a) timepiece. When rotating in the rotation direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. It will only be done.

  Therefore, a load that pushes the engagement member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction does not occur, and the engagement member 7344R3 is in the radially outward direction after the engagement member 7344R3 comes into contact with the release member 7346 until it is separated. Maintain overhanging state. Therefore, when the disc cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented from rotating relative to each other.

  From these configurations, it is possible to switch whether or not the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other by switching the rotation direction of the disc cam 7344. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform an effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment. Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81) that causes relative rotation.

  In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Therefore, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

  As a result, a state not noticed by the player (a state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is used as a state for changing the relative posture between the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a state where it cannot be seen by the player. be able to.

  With reference to FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, according to the present embodiment, it will be described that a plurality of types of modes for raising the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 (without rotating the disc cam 7344). ) A state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that can be displaced is illustrated. In FIG. 85, the ring member 7344R2 is changed from the state illustrated in FIG. 84 through the process described in FIG. In FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, the second overhanging portion 344c3 contacts the engaging portion 346d in both of FIGS. 84 and 85. The contact state is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is immediately released (without rotating the disc cam 7344R2) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state. The moving range of movement can be changed.

  That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the moving range).

  On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced rearward and lower than the position shown in FIG. It moves to a state where it sinks below the two states.

  Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the position where the tilting device 310 arrives immediately (without rotation of the disc cam 7344) from the first state by the ascending operation can be changed. Thereby, the kind of effect by operation | movement of the tilting apparatus 310 can be increased, and the attention power as an effect device of the operation device 7300 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 to FIG. 179, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described.

  Although the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper will be described as the rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 shown in FIG. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, refer to FIG. 86) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. The definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings before FIG.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (opening) in which the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 in a state where the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed), and FIG. 90 is a pachinko machine 8010 with the front frame 14 removed. FIG. In FIG. 90, reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides with a wooden plate material as upper and lower sides and an aluminum plate material as left and right sides are fixed. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has an inner frame 12 support structure (such as the hinge 18) and a locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is good also as a structure with which the member to have was equipped in the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side in the front view is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side), and the right side is the rotation front end side. It can be rotated forward as (opening / closing tip side).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side in the front view is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is rotated. The moving tip side (opening / closing tip side) can be rotated backward.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at the rotating tip, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are locked to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. And the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. In each of these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, an unlocking operation is performed by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 8010. Respectively.

  The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a cylindrical portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft). When the metal plate having the holes engages with the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12.

  Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front side end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the rear side. It is pivotally supported by a pivotal support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that is recessed in a size that allows fitting. The front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape projecting upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 (in the configuration in which columns having different diameters are connected vertically, the diameter of the upper column is larger). Is supported on the support pin 19a having a small shape).

  As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (such as the illumination parts 8029 to 8033) and units (the operation device 300, the operation handle 51, and the like) on the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in front view (see FIG. 86). By covering the window 14c from the back side with the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire area of the front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having a larger outer shape than the window portion 14c and transparency, and a fixed frame (not shown) for integrating the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And. The fixed frame is formed in a ring shape that is slightly larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b by a synthetic resin, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are bonded to the fixed frame so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with the laminated glass. Has been.

  The glass unit 16 is colorless and transparent formed by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. However, the glass unit 16 is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. The glass unit 16 may be formed from the front of the pachinko machine 8010. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored and transparent instead of being colorless and transparent.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the front frame 14, a plurality of electrical decoration parts 8029 to 8033 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window part 14c. In these lighting parts 8029 to 8033, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach. The lighting unit 8030 on the upper side of the window 14c includes a light emitting unit that is turned on at a predetermined error such as a shortage of payout balls, and a light emitting unit that is turned on during payout of the prize ball.

  In addition, speaker covers 27 (thin plate members made of punching metal) are provided on the upper right side and upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects corresponding to the gaming state. . Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are arranged to bulge toward the near side and are arranged in parallel up and down.

  The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 50 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 17. A ball guide opening 53 that is opened in the front-rear direction and that guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the rear side surface of the lower plate 50.

  In addition, it is not necessary to divide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 into portions for storing the game balls in a plurality of locations, and as a configuration having only one storage unit that eliminates the lower plate 50 and uses only the upper plate 17. Also good.

  An operation device 300 that is manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 (the storage area for game balls). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided in another part such as the periphery of the lower dish 50 in addition to the upper dish 17 or may be provided in a plurality of places. Further, the operation device 300 is a push button type switch as an operation method. Alternatively, the information may be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

  As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 that communicates with the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 that communicates with the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( 92).

  At the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner at the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), a payout ball receiving portion 143 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed. By partitioning 143 left and right by the partition wall 144, a passage entrance of the front door side upper dish passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 are formed.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion that forms a passage for discharging a game ball that has not reached the game area out of the game balls launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the lower plate 50 as a foul ball.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul balls received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flow down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and are then discharged to the lower plate 50. The foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected not to the lower plate 50 but to the upper plate 17 so that the foul ball is discharged to the upper plate 17.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 joins a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which an unfired ball flowing from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 is guided by the player performing a ball removal operation. Formed as follows.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened to the left and right corners of the upper part and bulge to the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multi-function cover members 171 and 172 are wiring connectors that conduct electricity to the lighting unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the inner substrate and one end of the lighting units 8031 and 8032 through the front frame 14. An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the part is connected is connected is disposed, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

  The part covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 of the front frame 14 has a wiring through groove 14h communicating with the left and right electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032, and an electric decoration part 8031 passing through the wiring through groove 14h. An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn out from 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are drawn back through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. It is.

  Therefore, when the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of FIG. 89) to the electric decoration unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450. It is possible to easily insert / remove the connector of the conductive wiring and the connector in which one end portion is connected to the internal substrate of the electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032 with respect to the electronic substrate 14i.

  Multi-function cover members 171 attached to the front end of the front frame 14 are arranged in pairs above and below the front end of the inner frame 12 to support the board surface support device 600 (for holding the base board 60 of the game board 13). 126) and the upper apparatus in the front-rear direction, and can be brought into contact with each other depending on the situation, details will be described later.

  On the back side of the front frame 14 is a container-shaped member formed of a resin material with the front side opened, and is formed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and between the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates wiring in a space is attached from the back side. The long cover member 173 is configured to have a cross-sectional area that decreases as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation front end side to the rotation base end side, and a lower wall portion 173a that configures the lower side of the space that accommodates the wiring, An upper wall portion 173b which is arranged in parallel with the lower side of the front frame 14 and is opposed to the upper side of the lower wall portion 173a and which forms the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring coincides with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 on the surface. Consists of shapes.

  The long cover member 173 is a wall portion disposed in contact with the front frame 14 similarly to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b. An upper extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

  The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that the end portion on the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be further bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

  That is, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (wave shape corresponding to one cycle of the sine wave), and the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall portion 173c. Projects to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring in the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the change in the position of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. The possibility that the wiring is disconnected can be reduced.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, an upwardly extending wall portion 173 c of the long cover member 173 (a portion closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14 a A reverse cup-shaped reverse cup portion 178 that is a portion formed of a resin material and opens downward is disposed between the upper and lower long plate portions on the rotating base end side of 14.

  For example, the reverse cup portion 178 is a portion that improperly spreads the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserts a piano wire from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and takes measures against fraudulent acts that are caused to enter the game area. It is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the reverse cup shape of the reverse cup portion 178 from below. Since the progression of the piano wire can be hindered, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

  Moreover, since the reverse cup part 178 and the elongate cover member 173 are formed from a resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire having a heated tip is entered and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heat and passed through the reverse cup portion 178. 173 also melts. And since the wiring accommodated in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burned out by passing the piano wire whose tip is heated through the long cover member 173, by detecting that the wiring is disconnected. , Making it easier to detect fraud.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a on the long cover 173 side of the reverse cup portion 178 is configured with a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and abuts (closes) with each other on the surface. Moreover, since the normal line of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is shaped downward, the piano wire can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a when entering the reverse cup portion 178 from below. When the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, the long cover 173 can be melted with a high probability, so that it is possible to easily detect fraud.

  The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap that is forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is further inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire becomes a wall portion. 178a.

  Since the wall portion 178a is shaped to match the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire is Guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is further inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire proceeds in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 (travels in the left-right direction). Can be prevented from reaching the game area.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing an increase in the reaction force given to a person who performs fraud via the piano wire. By disposing a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to find out the misconduct before the person who performs the misconduct escapes and to easily secure the person who performs the misconduct. .

  That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who performs the cheating cannot determine it, so it is assumed that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. . Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire is visible from the front side through the window portion 14c), the operation of deeply inserting the piano wire is made natural to the person who performs the fraud (piano wire). Without the suspicion that the plug-in is not working). Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time until the person who performs the fraud notices that the fraud is detected and tries to escape.

  The detection device may be a device constituted by a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be disposed in the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be disposed on the back side of the operation handle 51. In the case of being disposed on the operation handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally disposed on the operation handle 51 may also be used for the determination of the entry of the piano wire.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the ball launch unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a includes an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball launched by the launching solenoid 701 includes an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so as to be emitted toward the area between them, and a ball feeder 720 are provided.

  The ball feeder 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) one by one on the firing rail 730. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on a projecting path of a plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. In response to the input of an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the launch rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launch unit 112a is not limited to the launch solenoid 701, and a launch motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launch unit 112a will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged on the left side of the inner frame 12 and on the left side of the firing rail 730. It is installed. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole penetrating in a front-rear direction through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided. The dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage section 161 and a main body side lower dish passage section 162. The main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and the main body side lower dish passage portion 162 are opened toward the back side so that one end can communicate with a through-hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage in which the direction of the passage changes 90 degrees (changes from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction) is formed so that the end of the passage is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball paid out from the payout device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end. The

  When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the payout ball receiving portion 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. A front door side upper dish passage part 141 is disposed below the main body side upper dish path part 161, and a front door side lower dish path part 142 is disposed below the main body side lower dish path part 162.

  A lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160 is provided with a shutter 163 for restricting outflow of game balls from the main body side upper dish passage section 161 and the main body side lower dish passage section 162, as shown in FIG. . The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between both a blocking position for narrowing the exit portions of both passages to prevent the game ball from flowing out and an allowable position for allowing the game ball to flow out.

  Further, a biasing member (coil spring or the like) that biases the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the biasing member is biased when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. The shutter 163 remains in the blocking position by the force. Thereby, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state where game balls are stored in the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 or the main body side lower dish passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls spill out is avoided. Yes.

  On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 resists the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and the front door side upper dish passage portion 141 communicate with each other, the main body side lower dish passage portion 162 and the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 communicate with each other, and the game ball flows down. Permissible.

  The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. In addition, the board | substrate 167 is comprised by a separate board | substrate in the location in which the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arrange | positioned, and the location in which the connector CN3 is arrange | positioned. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main controller 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp controller 113. By doing so, it is based on the intention to prevent malfunction.

  With reference to FIG.91 and FIG.92, the part below the window part 14c of the front frame 14 is demonstrated. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the constituent members disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are disassembled, and FIG. 92 is a window portion of the front frame 14. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 illustrated by disassembling components disposed below 14c. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window 14 c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main body frame 14 c, is the front side of the upper plate 17, and is obliquely above and to the right of the lower plate 50. The operation device 300 is disposed at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and the covering cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the operation device 300.

  The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 so as to cover the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured with a left-right width that is approximately the same as the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are disposed vertically below the electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

  The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right end portions, and a main body bending portion 371 configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project to the front side, and the main body bending thereof. Extending downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right central portions of the portion 371 and the end portion in the left and right direction toward the sides close to each other in the width direction, and joins at the lower end of the extension and joins the front view V A drooping portion 372 configured in a letter shape, and a plate-like member that closes an opening surrounded by the main body bending portion 371 and the drooping portion 372, is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the main body bending portion 371 or the drooping portion 372 A translucent portion 373 fastened and fixed to at least one of the first, a left side flat support portion 374 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body bending portion 371, and a flat surface on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body bending portion 371. A right-side flat support portion 375 formed as a groove, and a groove that is recessed in the right-side flat support portion 375 from the back side, and that the recessed width increases (tapered) toward the back side; Is mainly provided.

  The main body bending portion 371 has a curved shape with a rounded front side edge, and has a shape matching the front side edge of the upper plate 17 as a rear side edge, and the upper plate in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The rear left edge portion 371a that abuts the front edge of the front surface 17 in the front-rear direction and the shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300 that is connected to the rear left edge portion 371a. A rear middle edge portion 371b that abuts the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and a shape that matches the front side edge of the lending operation unit 40 that is connected to the rear middle edge portion 371b on the opposite side of the rear left edge portion 371a. It mainly comprises a back right edge 371c that abuts the ball lending operation unit 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

  The hanging portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body bending portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported and between the right corner cover 380 disposed at the right corner portion of the front frame 14. It is a portion that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by being formed into a shape that does not create a gap (a shape that abuts the right corner cover 380 with each other). The hanging portion 372 is screwed into a bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed at a position on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later. Fastened to the bottom plate to be formed.

  The translucent portion 373 is a portion that can transmit the light emitted from the operation device 300 to the front side and can produce an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. At the same time, it is disposed close to the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

  In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is an arbitrarily determined matter, and in this embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, six LEDs that irradiate light upward (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e) and two LEDs that irradiate light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e). , Respectively.

  Of the LED device 341 f, the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320 and then passes through the light transmitting portion 373. To do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates light downward passes through the lower frame member 320 without passing through the tilting device 310, and then translucent. Pass through part 373.

  Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the translucent portion 373 is compared with that when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Thus, the case where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is stronger. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates light downward (while reducing the control burden by omitting the control to change the amount of light), and in accordance with the state change of the tilting device 310. An effect of changing the amount of light visible through the light transmitting portion 373 can be performed.

  As another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in accordance with a change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is changed (in a stepwise manner), while the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Light that can be visually recognized through the translucent part 373 according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310 by controlling the light amount to change weakly (stepwise) in accordance with the change from the first state to the second state. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (can be eliminated depending on the setting).

  The left side plane support portion 374 abuts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electric decoration unit 8031 and the electric decoration unit 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat support part 374 toward the electric decoration part 8031. . Thereby, the position shift to the downward direction of the electrical decoration part 8031 can be suppressed.

  The right plane support portion 375 is in contact with the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration unit 8032 and the electrical decoration unit 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right plane support 375 toward the electrical decoration unit 8032. . Thereby, the position shift to the downward direction of the electrical decoration part 8032 can be suppressed.

  Although details will be described later, the electrical decoration unit 8031 and the electrical decoration unit 8032 are in contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the electrical decoration units 8031 and 8032 An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the electric decoration part 8031, the electric decoration part 8032, and the covering cover 370 fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be distributed over a wide range.

  The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that receives the lower end portion of the electric decoration portion 8032 entering from the back side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electric decoration portion 8032 is in a state of entering the innermost part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end portion of the electric decoration portion 8032 and the front side end portion of the right plane support portion 375. And the position matches.

  Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electric decoration unit 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, an assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. Separate fixing portions for fastening the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration portion 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

  Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is disposed on the main body frame 14a on the back surface of the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17 disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a). The passage forming unit 140 is disposed on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 is fastened and fixed in such a manner as to cover the passage forming unit 140 from the back side (with the main body frame 14a sandwiched by another member (a member constituting the upper plate 17)). Fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or sandwiching the main body frame 14a with another member (a member constituting the upper plate 17 or the like) disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

  Even if the sheet metal member 150 has a situation in which the passage forming unit 140 formed of a synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, a situation in which a wire or a piano wire heated at the tip is pressed and melted) has occurred. 14 functions as an entry preventing member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 from the front side. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even when a wire heated at the tip is pressed, and the illustrated wire can be prevented from entering the back side of the front frame 14. .

  The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower and upper left and right sides of the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side when viewed from the front, and the opened front side is a passage forming unit. 140 is mainly provided with a fitting box portion 151 to be fitted to 140, and a flat plate-like plate-like portion 152 that covers the lower surfaces of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

  Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower and upper left and right sides of the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145, the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion. Even if the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of 145, even if the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the exemplified wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140. This can be prevented.

  Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the rear surfaces of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, the wire exemplified in the passage formation unit 140 is pressed to the right of the lower plate 50 to open a through hole. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized member from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. As a case where such a situation occurs, for example, the exemplified wire is pressed against a place where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness of the front and back is reduced accordingly (a place obliquely above the recessed portion 15a). The case where a through-hole is opened by being performed and the illustrated wire enters is illustrated.

  Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation unit rear member 155 that is fastened from the rear side to the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140, and the cylinder lock 20 is disposed in the operation unit rear member 155 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the vertical position.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation portion back member 155 is a member configured to increase the size in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge portion of the left and right long plate members. In addition, a through hole 156 that is formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can be penetrated, and a screw that is formed above and below the through hole 156 and that fastens and fixes the operation unit rear member 155 are inserted into the main body frame 14a. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 drilled side by side in a portion (left end) overlapped on the back side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation base end than the through hole 156 And an open / close restricting portion 159 that protrudes toward the back side.

  The connecting insertion hole 158 is disposed so as to coincide with the connecting portion 148 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 protrudes on the back side in a columnar shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that matches the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. A projecting portion 148a, and a screw insertion portion 148b formed as a hole into which a screw inserted into the connection insertion hole 158 can be screwed in a position that matches the lower connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Prepare mainly.

  With this configuration, when the operation unit back member 155 is stacked on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the projecting portion 148a is passed through the upper connection insertion hole 158, so that the passage forming unit 140 and the operation unit back surface are Alignment with the member 155 is performed, and then the screw through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 is screwed into the screwing portion 148b, so that the operation unit rear member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140. be able to.

  In addition, an L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming a left side edge and a lower side edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155 in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the region, and the extending wall portion. 148c is formed in an L-shape that can come into contact with the wall 158a vertically and horizontally in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

  Therefore, as positioning when assembling the operation portion back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is vertically moved with respect to the extending wall portion 148c. By making contact with the left and right surfaces, the position and posture of the operation portion back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

  The open / close restricting portion 159 is a portion that is opposed to the front and rear of the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). There is an effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being closed by contacting the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13 under predetermined conditions.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that extends toward the back side of the operation portion back member 155 and is formed of a synthetic resin, and is a cross-sectional view in the extending direction in order to ensure rigidity. The shape is formed in a U shape. Therefore, it is harder to bend than when it is formed into a flat plate with the same thickness, and the amount of material required while ensuring rigidity compared to the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped opening. Can be reduced. Accordingly, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of the other portion of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, the strength is dependent on the main body frame 14a, so there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion formed as thin as possible is used. It is possible to ensure the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 while improving formability.

  Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing regulating portion 159 is not limited to a U-shape, as long as it is a shape that can ensure rigidity and maintain the shape. For example, it may be a curved (wave) shaped cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wave cross section, or a cylindrical cross section as compared to a flat cross section.

  Further, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear surface member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the rear surface side or is fixed to the rear surface side of the main body frame 14a from the rear surface side. You may comprise from the metal part extended to. However, as in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is made of synthetic resin, the board surface support device 600 is brought into contact with the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member. It can be prevented from being chipped or dented. Thereby, the operator who changes the state of the board surface support apparatus 600 and detaches the game board 13 can reduce the risk of injury by touching the chipping or dent made in the board surface support apparatus 600.

  Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is disposed on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is disposed, the cylinder lock disposed on the rotation distal end side beyond that. A long interval between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 locations can be secured. Therefore, in a state where the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13, the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotating front end side are locked by mistake is reduced. it can.

  As a path through which a foreign object such as a wire enters, for example, a path through a gap of the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the gap of the operation device 300 is followed.

  The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying power to the operation device 300 is inserted into the wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) drilled in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower right corner of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

  Thereby, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 configured in a substantially case shape. This makes it difficult to prevent foreign matters such as wires from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

  It should be noted that liquid is considered as a foreign substance that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels uncomfortable with the game result may apply drinking water or the like to the pachinko machine 10. At this time, the operation device 300 at a reasonable position is likely to be a prey that can be drunk with water, and if no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) are out of order. There is a risk.

  Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like. However, as described above, in this embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it becomes the separable independent structure, it can prevent that liquids, such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300, permeate into the back side of the main body frame 14a.

  In addition, on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300), a recessed portion 15a is recessed in a T shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep bottom recessed portion. A gap is formed in some places (for example, see FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321 a and the opening 325 correspond to the gap) instead of the complete case shape, and passes through the inside of the operation device 300 and below the operation device 300. The recessed portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

  In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is disposed near the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 serves as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17B), and further connected to the wiring. Since the portion is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor housing portion 341e and the illumination support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), liquid such as drinking water is supplied to the drive motor 342. It can be applied directly and can be prevented from malfunctioning.

  Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that liquid such as drinking water may be applied, but the other part is covered with the bottom plate portion 321. The liquid stays attached to the vibration surface (upper surface), and the attached liquid flows down downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibration surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from failing.

  With the above-described configuration, even if the player on the way home is sprayed with a liquid such as drinking water, the next player can play a game as long as the upper surface of the operation device 300 is wiped off. Therefore, the maintenance time of the operation device 300 can be prevented from pressing business hours.

  Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the bundling movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the bundling movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. 93 to 96 show a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG.

  93 (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93 (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. is there. In FIG. 93B, the bundling movable member 180 in the released state is illustrated on the upper side, and the bundling movable member 180 in the fixed state is illustrated on the lower side.

  The bundling movable member 180 is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and that are extended leftward from the upper end of the upper extending wall portion 173c.

  In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are each connected to the bundling movable member 180 without a relay board. Each is guided and bound to the binding movable member 180.

  On the other hand, the harness connected to each of the lighting units 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) is once a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. A bundle of extension harnesses HN3 goes from the relay board to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

  The bundling movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported, and one side surface in the rotational direction of the movable arm portion 182 along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93A) A pair of highly flexible bundling arm portions 183 extending from the opposite side surface) and the other side surface in the rotational direction of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93A). And a position between the pair of binding arms 183 (intermediate position) and a pair of locking portions 184 capable of locking the binding arms 183. Extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm 182 and having an opening Mainly includes that the temporary retaining portion 185, a.

  The bundling movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the bundling arm portion 183, while the other portions are formed with lower flexibility (high rigidity) than at least the bundling arm portion 183.

  The main body portion 181 has a cross-section whose upper side is substantially horseshoe-shaped and has a fixed portion 181a having a through-hole through which a screw passes in the center, and a left and right lower corner portion of the fixed portion 181a toward the plate member 14d side. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b provided, and an intermediate stop portion that extends downward from the lower edge of the front-side end portion of the fixed portion 181a and has an extended tip that curves close to the plate member 14d side 181c, a plate-like support plate portion 181d (see FIG. 96 (a)) extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a, and a portion disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d And a cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed mainly from a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the screw head to be fastened.

  The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 including through holes arranged at positions where the bundling movable member 180 is fixed to coincide with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of rotation preventing portions 181b.

  When a screw that penetrates the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to a corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of detent protrusions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Thus, it is possible to prevent the bundling movable member 180 from rotating around the screw passing through the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and to determine the posture of the bundling movable member 180 relative to the plate member 14d at the time of fixation.

  The intermediate stopper 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between the plate member 14d. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from sliding down by narrowing the distance between the extended end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, and the center is on the plate member 14d side. A shape that is curved along the arranged circle ensures a large cross-sectional area of a region (region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 181c) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

  The support plate portion 181d forms a plane for guiding the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181e has an outer peripheral surface fitted into a portion on the proximal end side of the movable arm portion 182 so that the movable arm portion 182 is attached. The shaft is supported (see FIG. 96).

  The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion that is shaped so as to be smoothly connected to the plane OS1 that is offset from the axial support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a base end. 182a and a thin plate portion 182b having a long thin plate shape that is connected to the opposite side of the shaft support position of the base end portion 182a.

  The base end portion 182a includes left and right end portions (portions where the straight line connecting the shafts is parallel to the plane OS1) and back side end portion (the uppermost portion of the plane OS1 and the plane OS1) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion that is fitted over the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Side walls in the rotational direction extend from the approaching portion. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the same side, and the separation distance between the side walls gradually decreases as it approaches the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

  Therefore, the base end portion 182a is maintained with higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept that does not intend elastic deformation (high rigidity), and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept that intends elastic deformation (low rigidity) depending on the situation. .

  Since the pair of binding arms 183 are each configured in the same shape, one will be described and the description of the other will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, a small width portion 183a formed with a width equivalent to the width of the base near the tip portion and a large width portion 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a are alternately spaced at equal intervals. It is formed. Note that, in the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into a through-hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93B).

  The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93B), so that a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183.

  The locking portion 184 is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 across the large opening portion 184a with the large opening portion 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side, and has an opening width larger than that of the large opening portion 184a. The small opening 184b is mainly provided (see FIG. 96).

  The large opening 184a is sized to allow the bundling arm 183 to pass without depending on the position of the bundling arm 183, while the small opening 184b allows the small width 183a of the bundling arm 183 to pass therethrough. The large width portion 183b has a size that cannot be passed (locked).

  According to this embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is desired to move relative to the locking portion 184, the binding arm portion 183 is disposed on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 is reduced). When the binding arm portion 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the small opening 184b side so that the size of the inner area (tightness) surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily increased. Can be adjusted.

  The temporary fixing portion 185 includes a through-hole through which the binding band can be inserted at the center thereof. Even if the binding arm portion 183 is broken due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band is inserted into the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

  The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94 (a). 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is a front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95 (a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 14.

  94 (a) and 94 (b) illustrate a state where the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b). In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and is in contact with the vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees around an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis facing the up-down direction). This angle is normally used according to the situation of pachinko machines 8010 installed at amusement stores (the situation where there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010 if the pachinko machines 8010 are arranged side by side and rotated 90 degrees or more). This is sufficiently larger than the turning angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14.

  Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not elastically deform and does not exceed the range in which it can rotate relative to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no, the possibility that the movable arm part 182 may deteriorate and break due to elastic deformation can be reduced.

  Next, a support mode of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the harnesses HN <b> 1 to HN <b> 3 are supported by the bundling movable member 180, the arrangement is regulated, so that it is possible to prevent the harness HN <b> 1 to HN <b> 3 from being accidentally sandwiched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

  FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). c) is a schematic back view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

  96 (a) and 96 (b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed at a position moved from the opening opened leftward at the upper end of the upper extending wall 173c toward the rotation base end of the front frame 14. The That is, since the horizontal line of the intermediate stopper portion 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upper extending wall portion 173c are the same, it is extended from the upper extending wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stopper 181c.

  Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c in the vicinity of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e that is the pivotal support position of the movable arm 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upper extending wall 173c across the intermediate stopper 181c. The shape of ˜HN3 can be made to conform to the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the bundling movable member 180. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 96 (b) and 96 (d), the shape of the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes a curved shape, thereby preventing extreme bending deformation.

  Further, by disposing the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the region surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, particularly when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Thereby, the disconnection by the harnesses HN1 to HN3 being bent can be prevented.

  97 (a) and 97 (b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the bundling movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically illustrating the bundling movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. is there. 97A shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97B shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

  97 (a) and 97 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the center axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is shown, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically illustrated. A member fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 is schematically shown by a solid line. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the bundling movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is similar to the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 around the rotation center point P57. Rotate.

  From one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b), the proximal end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 is turned around the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Since it corresponds to opening and closing of the frame 12 and the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that durability can be improved (FIG. 96 ( b), see also FIG. 96 (d)).

  97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the bundling movable member 180 are the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed along a path that passes through the vicinity of the vertically long metal portion (the portion with which the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 abuts in FIG. 96D) constituting the left side portion of the frame 14a. That is, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the front end of the front frame 14 by forcing the harnesses HN1 to HN3 to bypass.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the operator's work during the work performed by opening and closing the front frame 14, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 when the front frame 14 is closed ( It is possible to improve the fit that is curved only once on the rotation base end side (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

  In the present embodiment, the intermediate stopper 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 91). The intermediate stopper 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3. For example, the tip of the wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup 178. Thus, it is possible to take measures against an illegal act of causing the wire to enter between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

  That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted to penetrate the wire, and the wire is advanced to the game area side, if the wire proceeds vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the wire becomes hot. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stopper 181c. Therefore, harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out, and conduction is disabled.

  When the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, fraud can be quickly detected by controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (display an error screen), etc. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a person who performs an illegal act from obtaining an illegal profit.

  More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 is burned out, the ball can be launched even if the operation handle 51 is rotated. Disappear. For this reason, it is possible to shorten the period until the fraud is detected after the fraud has been performed (it is possible to detect fraud early).

  In this case, after making the wire enter the game area and messing with the game area (for example, after bending a nail to make it easy to win a prize illegally), the ball is moved to the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. Since it is possible to disable the launch of a ball against a person who performs an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent an illegal profit from being given. That is, it is impossible to perform a specific fraud.

  Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, the operation of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) and the return button when the harness HN2 is burned out. 43 (see FIG. 89) cannot be operated. Accordingly, a person who performs an illegal act may not be able to collect the banknotes and the remaining amount of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his own fraud. Therefore, deterrence against fraudulent acts can be used.

  In addition, in order to eliminate the possibility that it will not be possible to collect the banknotes inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) or the amount of the sphere of the card balance, Even though the remaining amount of the unit) is 0 yen, since the cheating is performed without leaving the seat, the gaming machine side can easily recognize the cheating.

  In the first place, when the harness HN2 is disconnected, a disconnection error (CR error) of a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) is output. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the possibility of fraud.

  FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left and right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. Is partitioned by the partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining region (region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53.

  The front door side lower pan passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages respectively extended from the dispensing ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146 so that the balls can flow toward the lower plate 50. The S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 each have a direction in which the extending direction is directed (switched) to the left and right sides at least once.

  The S-shaped path SL1 allows the flow path length of the front door side lower dish passage part 142 to be increased while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that it stays in the front door side lower dish path part 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86), so that the vertical dimension of the game area and the effect area can be increased. Because of the large number of balls that can be placed on the lower plate 50 (and its upstream side), the stress of replenishing the ball to the player (if the ball for the lower plate 50 minutes is gone, remove the ball from the thousand boxes. A pachinko machine 8010 that can suppress stress) due to demand for supplementation or the like can be configured.

  The front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, NEb2 as regions where the extending direction is bent in the vertical direction and the left-right direction, respectively. It has features. That is, the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending portion in which the right and left of the characteristic part are reversed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1. Region NEa2.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending region NEb2 disposed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1, with the right and left of the characteristic portion reversed. . In the description of the characteristic part, the characteristic of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, NEb2 will be omitted.

  FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right. The ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner that intersects with the extending direction of the side wall Na, and extends closer to the extending end from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the side wall Na. The adjacent walls Nc are mainly provided, and each of the walls Na, Nb, and Nc extends from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

  The adjacent wall Nc is formed such that the surface Nc1 opposite to the ceiling wall Nb is curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a spherical guide surface. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the wire HM (a small diameter metal typified by a wire or a piano wire) inserted illegally. The details will be described later. The proximity wall Nc is set such that the gap Nin between the adjacent lower end and the side wall Na is larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending area NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an approach path for the wire HM that is illegally inserted, a path that travels upstream of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance can be considered. A person who performs an illegal act advances the wire HM while pressing the wire HM against the side wall of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142.

  When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a person who performs an illegal act, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, while the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances to the right by the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142, so that it is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 are reversed left and right, so that the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without any leakage.

  An example of the traveling path of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin is shown in FIG. Note that the tip position of the wire HM at each timing is indicated by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is indicated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the proximity wall Nc. Here, when the wire HM is caught (clamped), further progress of the wire HM can be prevented, and further, the wire HM can be prevented from being held, and illegal acts can be detected quickly. it can.

  On the other hand, even if the wire HM does not get caught and proceeds further, when the wire HM projects from the gap Nin, the tip bulges in a posture facing downward, so that the wire HM is further advanced. Even so, the tip of the wire HM advances downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 disposed on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the game area disposed on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

  As a result, an illegal payout ball is obtained by causing the wire HM to reach the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and causing the payout device 133 to malfunction, or the wire HM reaches the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from gaining an illegal profit by forcibly releasing a movable device such as to obtain an illegal payout ball by making it easy to illegally win a prize.

  Returning to FIG. The foul sphere passage portion 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the merge region CE where it joins the ball removal passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the sphere (in this embodiment, twice or more). Thereby, when the sphere flowing down the ball extraction passage 147 is arranged in the merge region CE, the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enters the merge channel CE (the balls enter the merge region CE at the same time). Even if two spheres are arranged vertically, the possibility that the spheres are sandwiched and engaged by the upper and lower wall portions can be extremely reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in the portion downstream from the merge region CE.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage portion 145a that vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The passage portion 145a has a width that is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and is formed so as to project toward the front side as the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage formation unit 140 moves downward.

  In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back-side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is located at the surface position with the upstream end of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140. The back side bottom plate portion is set to a surface position with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

  That is, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a larger front-rear width in the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a than in the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a slightly larger front-rear width than the diameter of the sphere downstream of the passage portion 145a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul sphere passage portion 145 is set to have a slightly smaller front-rear width than twice the diameter of the sphere upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when a sphere stays in the foul sphere passage portion 145, the number of stagnation can be increased because a plurality of spheres can be arranged at different positions on the upstream side of the passage portion 145. Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being lined up in the front-rear direction (slightly shifts from left to right and up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

  In other words, it is possible to restrict the entry of the balls into the passage portion 145a one by one. Accordingly, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the merge region CE at the same time. The possibility of being caught between the upper and lower wall portions can be reduced.

  The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left side wall portion, and the flow surface of the sphere faces rightward. From the inclined plate portion 146a inclined downward, the closing portion 146b closing the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. It is mainly provided with a curved guide plate portion 146c that extends in a plate shape toward the back side and curves in such a manner that the extending direction is directed upward as it goes toward the back side.

  While the sphere is guided to the foul sphere passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the foul ball receiving portion 146 is moved to the front side by the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b. The passing position of the ball passing through can be brought close to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the sphere rolling down the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow to the right, and the blocking portion 146b prevents the sphere from passing through the left side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can do.

  Thereby, the period until the sphere that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the upper and lower bounds of the sphere can be finished before the sphere reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because variation in the vertical position of the sphere can be reduced), the foul sphere passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the sphere can flow smoothly.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere) in a range (for example, the passage portion 145a) in which the S-shaped path SL2 is formed. It is possible to prevent the tool from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

  Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. 100 and 101 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the electrical decoration unit 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

  The upper panel unit 400 is a unit that is formed to be elongated in the left and right directions, and the left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration part 8031 and the electric decoration part 8032. In this lower support structure, like the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, the tapered supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side to the front side is formed at the lower end portion of the right end portion of the upper panel unit 400. (See FIG. 118), and the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed on the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

  As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 can be connected and fixed to each other by being fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a, without the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. From the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the assembly order to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

  Further, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) respectively provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into the left and right are used as the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. Due to the configuration in which the portions are fitted to each other, the heavy plate units 500R and 500L can be prevented from being separated from each other to the left and right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

  102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 include the main body frame. The state disassembled from 14a is illustrated.

  The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101) and is provided in the recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIGS. 121 and 122) of the speaker assembly 450. A cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

  The fastening portion 14e1 includes a through hole into which a screw is inserted from the back side, and the screw that passes through the through hole is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, thereby This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

  FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500 fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole formed in the main body frame 14a is disassembled from the main body frame 14a. The upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are not shown, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

  The cover cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a as an actual assembly procedure. In the right panel unit 500, the right side wall portion forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

  105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510. FIG. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 is a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 is a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R that are overlapped in the left-right direction, and these heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed, and a main body frame. 14a (refer to FIG. 104), and a plate-like support plate portion 510 that is long in the vertical direction and is fixed mainly.

  The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate 510 by screws inserted through the support plate 510 from the back side to the front side. In this state, the support plate 510 is attached to the main body frame 14a from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw inserted toward the front side.

  The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending an extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right side edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side, and is assembled. 86 (see FIG. 86), a fixing plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511a abuts on the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, and a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511. A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and It mainly includes a pin support hole 515 formed in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

  The fixing plate 511 includes a base portion 511b that overlaps with the base plate member 512 in a front view, and a portion of the base plate member 512 that protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

  Since the base portion 511b can be brought into contact with the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) (see FIG. 115B), the horizontal direction of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R is increased. Can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

  In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extension portion 511a is displaced to the right by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 relative to the base portion 511b, so that the front side of the extension portion 511a. In the front-rear direction, the outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510, while the left side surface of the fixed plate 511 is formed as a side surface of the base portion 511b up to the rear side end, The rear side end of the inner cover member 520 can be disposed at the surface position of the rear side end of the support plate 510, and the inner side 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is the support plate 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It contacts with the left side surface 511c.

  The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512 a are arranged on a row that is curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) adjacent to each other. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512 a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes are parallel to each other from the back of the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

  Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is longer than the width of the LED 512a (the left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light irradiated from the LED 512a does not leak. The light enters the light source 540 and exits from any surface of the light guide member 540. The light entry / exit and the route thereof will be described later.

  The cover side through-hole 513 is a hole through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening portion 527 is inserted from the back surface side while positioning the back surface fastening portion 527 disposed in the inner cover member 520. When the screw is fastened to the back fastening portion 527, the inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510.

  The lens-side through hole 514 is a hole through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 is inserted from the back surface side while positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 disposed in the outer lens member 550. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 556.

  The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protruding portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The pin support hole 515 is set to have a lateral width slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding portion 566, while the vertical width is set to be about twice as long as the diameter of the protruding portion 566. Accordingly, it is possible to improve work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560.

  That is, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced up and down with respect to the support plate portion 510 in a fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut against the support plate portion 510 from the front side (projecting portion 566). Even when the position is shifted up and down by about the diameter of the protrusion 566, the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. Thus, after the protruding portion 566 is inserted into the pin support hole 515, the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are moved up and down by the amount corresponding to the positional deviation with respect to the supporting plate part 510, thereby eliminating the positional deviation and easily fastening. Fixing can be performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left double plate unit 500L includes an inner cover member 520 that forms the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86) and is formed of a resin material that does not transmit light, An inner lens member 530 that is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

  The right heavy plate unit 500R faces the light guide member 540 disposed opposite to the left heavy plate unit 500L, the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction, the front side end portion is disposed opposite to the front-rear direction, and the light. An outer lens member 550 made of a transparent white resin material, and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 are arranged on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and made of a resin material that does not transmit light. And an outer cover member 560 to be fastened and fixed.

  Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 110 is a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view with the left side facing the front side, and each of the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Is shown exploded.

  The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 522 that is disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. The lower fastening portion 523 is disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, the plurality of opening portions 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and the inner lens member 530. A plurality of short fastening portions 525 into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and are formed to be longer than the short fastening portions 525, and the inner lens member 530 is formed. A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed and projecting on the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and from the back side Support plate 5 0 a plurality of rear fastening portion 527 screws that secure is screwed to, mainly comprises.

  The main body plate 521 has a corrugated front end portion 521a, and a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front end portion 521a and the rear base portion 521b in the corrugated short width portion (portion approaching the rear side). Is provided.

  The back side base portion 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that comes into contact with the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

  The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion disposed so as to be inclined leftward toward the back side, and the opening 524 is partitioned by the connecting plate portion 521c.

  In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged so that the intervals gradually increase from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening area of the some opening part 524 can be varied, and the effect by light can be varied for every opening part 524. FIG.

  The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction, and recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. A fitting groove 522b.

  The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

  The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a that is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b that is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by inserting screws at two locations at the upper end portion and at one location at the lower end portion.

  The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

  The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four locations, and function as a window for viewing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape portion of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape projecting rightward with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end portion (left end portion). That is, each opening 524 is arranged so as to be recessed to the right from the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

  The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at a boundary portion between the back side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design shape in the present embodiment, the portion where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 protrudes to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the back-side base 521b is curved in a design shape, rightward, between the aforementioned boundary portions. In other words, the surface of the back side base 521b is formed in a wave shape that undulates from side to side as it advances in the vertical direction.

  In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding to the design-like surface side. In the case where the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a concavity that tends to be a dead space is formed on the reverse side of the design-like projecting portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dead space can be effectively utilized by disposing the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, and the space on the back surface side (the inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520. Efficiency can be improved.

  The inner lens member 530 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear end portions follows the shape of the front and rear end portions of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 has a wave shape in which the front side end portion 531a of the main body plate portion 531 formed in the shape of a long plate up and down substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520. Is done.

  The front-side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front-side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is drilled in the front-rear direction at a switching position in the front-rear direction of the curve forming the wave shape. And support holes 531b and 531c into which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

  The support hole 531b is formed in the front side portion of the wave shape of the front side end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the back side. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b can be prevented from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied in the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

  The support hole 531c is formed in the rear portion of the wave shape of the front side end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where it can come into contact with the light guide member 540 is disposed on the back side thereof. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, even if a load is applied near the support hole 531c, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced. be able to.

  The main body plate portion 531 includes a through-hole 531d that is drilled in the left-right direction in a size that allows the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction. When the long fastening portion 526 is inserted through the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

  The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending rightward from the upper and lower edge portions of the connecting plate portion 521c. And a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b that connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction.

  The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended in a manner to fill a gap between the light guide member 540 and the upper and lower plate portions 532a. That is, like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes to the left as it goes to the back side. A triangular shape with a tip at the top.

  The inner lens member 530 includes a protruding portion 533 that is formed to protrude from the main body plate portion 531 to the left in a manner that passes through the opening 524. The overhang portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a that is formed in a wave shape on the side opposite to the overhang side and has a shape that scatters light on the wave-like curved surface.

  The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and is formed on the left and right side surfaces as a halftone dot pattern in which concave portions that change the traveling direction of light emitted from the LEDs 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right directions are arranged in a grid pattern. A so-called light guide plate is formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear side end portion of the light guide member 540 is changed in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is applied to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. The The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is from the end surface on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

  Here, the concave portion is a processing portion for changing light from a so-called edge light type light source (LED 512a in the present embodiment) into uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512 a and emits it from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

  In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is a thermoplastic mold plate having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of a base circle of about 1 mm are dispersedly arranged in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (hot pressing) the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light reaching the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

  The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but preferably has transparency, acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), polycarbonate resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, amorphous polyester resin, amorphous olefin type. Resins, polystyrene resins, AS resins (acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compounds) can be exemplified. Among these, by using an acrylic resin in particular, the light guide member 540 having a high average luminance and a small decrease in luminance distribution can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the light guide member 540 is set such that the thickness of the end portion on the LED 512a side is 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retainability after the heat bending process is improved, and a practical strength can be obtained.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed in a wave shape in which the shape of the front side end portion is slightly shifted to the back side from the front side end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 and left and right. Also formed from undulating wave shapes.

  The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the degree of a waveform, It is preferable that a curvature radius (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less in a curved surface part. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design that can give a three-dimensional degree of freedom while maintaining good practical mechanical properties with less distortion after hot bending. .

  The details of the wave shape that undulates to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114). However, the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c adjacent to the inner cover member 520 is located to the left at the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c. It is set as the wave shape of the aspect located in the position between (positioning away from the inner cover member 520).

  As described above, the wave shape in the left-right direction is formed by hot-bending a substrate on which a concave portion is formed. As the method of the thermal bending process of the present invention, a gold having a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (male type) curved in a state heated to a heating deflection temperature +10 to 40 ° C. of a thermoplastic resin as a base material. This is done by pressing the substrate against the mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin is mainly composed of an acrylic resin, the heating temperature can be set to 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

  The heating temperature of the base material at this time is set to be equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to a deflection temperature under load of + 40 ° C. or lower and a melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light source light before and after the thermal bending process It can suppress that the reflection angle of fluctuates. Thereby, the brightness fall in a light-guide plate and the nonuniformity of brightness distribution can be prevented. Moreover, the distortion to a light-guide plate can be suppressed by setting it as such heating temperature conditions.

  The light guide member 540 is inserted with a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate, and a screw that extends vertically from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and is fastened to the outer cover member 560. The fastening portion 542 is mainly provided.

  The light guide member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction at a position other than the fastening portion 542 and the concave portion 541 a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is formed of a single plate without a hole at least on the inner side of the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of staging the effect of light through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear side end of the light guide member 540 is substantially in the surface position with the rear side end of the inner lens member 530.

  The outer lens member 550 has a main body plate portion 551 that is formed in a vertically long plate shape, and is disposed at the upper and lower end portions of the main body plate portion 551 so that the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is fitted and supported. An inner cover portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through-holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region that is surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 project to the right. A protruding portion 554 that is visible through the member, a plurality of through-holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and protruding from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and from the back side And a plurality of back fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

  The outer lens member 550 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear end portions is similar to the shape of the front and rear end portions of the light guide member 540. That is, in the outer lens member 550, the front side end portion 551 a that extends leftward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forms a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a wave shape and is slightly displaced from the front end of the light guide member 540 on the front side. In the present embodiment, the front side end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front side end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. The

  The front side end portion 551a is protruded to the front side at a switching position in the front-rear direction of the curve constituting the wave shape, and a plurality of protrusions fitted in the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The installation part 551b is provided.

  A bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115 (a)) that bulges in a semicircular shape in a side view to the front side is vertically located on the surface opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540 of the front side end portion 551a. It is formed innumerably. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter light emitted from the front side end face of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are spaced apart at a predetermined interval, the light guide member 540 The light emission at the front side end face can be a strip-like light emission mode that is continuous in the vertical direction.

  The insertion hole 553 is disposed in a deep depth of a shape that is recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhang portion 554. Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

  In the right heavy plate unit 500R, a back fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided in the outer lens member 550, and is not provided in the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the arrangement of the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or screw arrangement). it can). Thereby, the area | region (left area | region of the right panel unit 500) facing a player can be expanded.

  The main body plate portion 551 is formed so that the surface facing the light guide member 540 is curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). 540 and the main body plate portion 551 come into contact with each other on the surface (see FIG. 114B).

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 is disposed to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

  Accordingly, the LED 512a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate 510 and the light guide member 540 can be prevented from being misaligned, and light can be accurately incident on the light guide member 540 from the LED 512a. Can be made.

  The outer cover member 560 has a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. And a plurality of screws having a longitudinal width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a long hole portion formed in an oval shape having a lateral width longer than the vertical width and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. The upper fastening portion 562 having a screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561 are receiving surfaces that can receive the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520, and the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a. A lower fastening portion 563 having a screw receiving portion 563a which is formed in a long hole shape having a slightly larger vertical width and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side, and a main body plate portion 561 At the front side end, it is a receiving surface that can receive the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520, and has a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526, and the vertical width. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 that are formed in a long hole shape having a long width and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and an opening that is formed in an inner shape that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the protruding portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 And a plurality of protrusions 566 that protrude from the main body plate 561 toward the back side.

  The upper fastening portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at the vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

  The lower fastening portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at the vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

  That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting with the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the right panel unit 500 has a shape that protrudes to the front side by the covering cover 370. However, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

  The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the protruding portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion 554). Therefore, a path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening portion 565 and the overhang portion 554 can be narrowed, so that an illegal act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

  With reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, an assembly method of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R will be described. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). FIG. 113A is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113A.

  112 (a) and 112 (b) illustrate a state in which the protruding portion 551b is disposed on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) illustrate the protruding configuration. A state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

  The assembly of the right panel unit 500 is a state in which the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are in contact in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112B). ), The left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the protruding portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

  In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the protruding portions 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b. By doing so, the design freedom of the front side front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

  For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above-described configuration, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R that are disposed at the front side end portion of the right panel unit (front side rather than the front side surface of the light guide member 540) The number of screws that fasten and fix the light can be reduced, thereby reducing the area where light is blocked by the screws, so that the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 extends in the vertical direction. It can be made easy to make it visible in a strip shape.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the screw (fastening location) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that it is erroneously introduced at the time of fastening. The range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged by applying a load to the optical member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged to the vicinity of the front side front end (near the tapered front end) of the right panel unit 500 can be expanded. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being visually recognized in the vicinity of the front end of the right panel unit 500.

  When the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer to the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the protruding portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and The light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500 </ b> R forms a parallel surface with each other along the front-rear direction, and is in a positional relationship in which the surfaces can contact each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) for moving the left heavy plate unit 500L in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R. The panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

  Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, when the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are assembled to the support plate portion 510 by fastening and fixing, at least two kinds of assembling procedures can be considered. .

  The first procedure is a method in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to each other and then fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. The second procedure is a right heavy plate unit 500R. The left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left heavy plate unit 500L is moved to the right weight. In this method, the plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510 are fastened and fixed. The two procedures can be similarly employed when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

  As described above, since the assembly and disassembly can be performed in two procedures, the operator who performs maintenance or the like disassembles and assembles the right panel unit 500 in either procedure depending on the location of the part that needs to be replaced. Can be selected, and the working time can be shortened.

  In either case, the left heavy board unit 500L and the right heavy board unit 500R are slid to each other in the plane direction in order to disassemble the left heavy board unit 500L and the right heavy board unit 500R. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the projecting portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid relative to each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

  As described above, the configuration in which the projecting portions 551b and 551c are fitted to the support hole 531b is obtained by prying open (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86). This is useful for preventing fraudulent acts entering the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the 500.

  That is, when fixing the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 by fastening a screw, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screw, and fraud can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and these screws are connected to the front surface. If the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are difficult to disassemble unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the right panel unit 500 can be viewed from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Can be difficult to disassemble. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an illegal act that enters the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500.

  With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the production will be described. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . In FIGS. 114A to 114C, the support plate portion 510 is not shown.

  The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is left and right by the action of the light guide member 540. It can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

  Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114B), light is condensed on the side forming the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side) at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

  In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the outer lens member 550 side from the light guide member 540 at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted to can be diffused and used for production.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the aspect of the light effect (condensed or diffused) executed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as a boundary. It can be provided, and the production effect can be improved.

  In addition, the difference in the aspect of the effect of light does not arise only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 by region or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 by region, it is possible to vary the aspect of the light effect on both the left and right sides. .

  The light guide member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the side of the opening 524 at a position facing the opening 524, and the curvature radius of the concave shape changes corresponding to the size of the opening 524. That is, with respect to the upper three openings 524, the curvature radius of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the second opening from the top in correspondence to the fact that the vertical width increases as the opening 524 moves upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1> R2). Similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is larger. , Shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1> R2> R3).

  As a result, even when there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512 a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512 a that emit the condensed light for each opening 524 is different, so that it can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light to be changed can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light compared to the lower opening 524.

  Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the lowermost opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line coming out of the shape is slightly inclined upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower openings 524 can be increased, and the effect of the light can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lower openings 524 is directed to the player's eyes. The light can be emitted upward.

  As shown in FIG. 114C, the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as a length connecting the midpoint of the upper side of the opening 524 and the midpoint of the lower side in a side view. The width of the opening 524 disposed opposite to the portion of the curvature radius R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 disposed opposite to the portion of the curvature radius R2 is the vertical width W2, and the portion of the curvature radius R3. The width of the opening 524 arranged to face is the vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 arranged to face the portion of the curvature radius R4 is the vertical width W4.

  In the present embodiment, the lower opening 524 of each opening 524 is formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1> W2> W3> W4). That is, in the portion of the curvature radii R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship of the curvature radii R1 to R3 is related to the magnitude relationship of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524. As a result, in a portion where the degree of light collection is weak (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light collection In a portion where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1, so that light does not enter the opening 524 too much. Therefore, the light emission mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform by the configuration of the present embodiment.

  In addition, the center point of each curvature radius R1-R4 shown in FIG.114 (b) is a point corresponding to the focus of the light radiate | emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and each vertical width W1-W4 in an up-down direction. Is disposed at a substantially intermediate position.

  The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the region KE at the boundary of the opening 524. Here, the region KE is a belt-like region extending in the front-rear direction and is defined as a region where the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent opening 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above the region KE, and the lower end of the region KE is the opening 524 adjacent below the region KE. Coincides with the top of. Therefore, the light irradiated on the region KE in the front-rear direction from the LED 512a travels in a state of being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114C).

  In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that it can be visually recognized by the player even if the condensing function is lowered. There is little difference in the amount of light.

  On the other hand, by forming the convex shape to the left side instead of the flat surface in the region KE, the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed from a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. The durability of can be improved.

  Further, by forming a convex shape on the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, where light is diffused inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560 and light is condensed. Can be formed. Thereby, the production effect of the effect of the light visually recognized through the opening 565 can be improved.

  That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light viewed through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light viewed through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. .

  For example, it is also possible to irradiate light inside the opening 524 and the opening 565 without any gap by turning off the LED 512a that causes light to enter the region KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a. At this time, the shape of the right side of the light guide member 540 on the upper and lower sides of the region KE is a concave surface, so that the light emitted rightward from the upper and lower positions of the region KE crosses on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being visually recognized in the area KE.

  In addition, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the light emitted from the region KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emission mode of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be sharpened.

  Note that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524. In this case, the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE is turned ON, and a corresponding portion (a portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) is emitted in a band shape. Can be made.

  In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) compared to the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the light amount is weak. An effect may be performed using the light reaching the front end.

  In other words, it is not visible through the connecting plate portion 521c, but can be seen through the front side end portion 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500). Then, by setting the expectation degree of the jackpot for the effect high, the position of the player's eyes can be moved to the side farther from the game board 13 than the front end of the right panel unit 500. Thereby, the degree of tiredness of the player's eyes can be reduced, and the player can play a long game without stress.

  Here, the light incident on the region KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, while being viewed by the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Accordingly, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, but the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

  As a result, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed while the player who is cheating is not noticed, so that the player who is cheating escapes. Can be prevented.

  In addition, by reversing the left and right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the region KE may be visible only to the player and not visible to the store clerk.

  115 (a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 along the CXVb-CXVb line in FIG. 115 (a).

  The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end face (thickness: about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The front end of the light guide member 540 (the portion farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the horizontal width dimension is the same gradient over the entire vertical direction. to shrink.

  Therefore, the front side end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a side than the end face of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end face becomes longer, the taper is further reduced and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thinner. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a difference between the light emission mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.

  Here, in this embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the upper and lower portions of the support hole 531b and disposed at a position recessed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the vicinity of the support hole 531b are arranged. Due to the shadow produced by the above, the portion near the support hole 531c is more easily seen darker than the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end surface of the light guide member 540 at the portion disposed opposite to the support hole 531c is compared to the end surface of the light guide member 540 at the portion disposed opposite to the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed to be large, it is possible to secure a large area of the surface that emits light upon receiving light irradiated from the LED 512a.

  Therefore, among the plurality of LEDs 512a, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531c is increased, and the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531b is increased. It is possible to relieve the difference in distance in the front-rear direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows. Thereby, the front side end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 is the frontmost surface, and the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front side end portion of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform vertically (the difference in strength is reduced). )can do.

  FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the support plate portion 510 is not shown, and the light guide member 540 is visible. In addition, in FIG. 116, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It spreads and progresses to the outside.

  On the contrary, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved. Therefore, the light emission mode (roughness, lightness and darkness) can be made different on both surfaces of the light guide member 540 while the arrangement of the LEDs 512a that generate the light incident on the light guide member 540 is constant. In other words, the player can visually recognize light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

  Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is not directly beside the player side because the inner lens member 530 is curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b). (See the imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115B. The imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115B shows an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). Thereby, it can be made easy to make a player visually recognize light, and the production effect of a light emission effect can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 100 and FIG. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) disposed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. And a unit that is supported from below and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14.

  117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410. An electric decoration unit 401 disposed on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410; a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e; Is mainly provided. 117 and 118, illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

  The illumination unit 401 is a unit in which a model name or the like is decorated on the front side surface, and includes a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. When the included LED emits light, an effect by light is performed.

  The electric decoration unit 401 includes a main body portion 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wave shape on the rear outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending in a horizontally long plate shape from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion protruding in a tubular shape from the waved wall portion 403 to the back side above the plate-like portion 404 and inside the tubular shape A cylindrical portion 405 having a shape penetrating the corrugated wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 402 and fastened with screws inserted into the upper frame member 410. Is mainly provided.

  The main body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear plate-like members overlap the open side, and a space is formed inside. The included LED is disposed on an electronic board, and the electronic board is fixed to the main body 402.

  The wavy wall 403 meshes with the wavy wall 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the work of assembling the electric decoration unit 401 to the upper frame member 410 This is a part that improves the performance.

  The plate-like portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the wave-like wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. In addition, a laterally long groove shape that sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 vertically is formed in the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 so as to be recessed.

  The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED included in the main body portion 402 is disposed is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

  The electrical decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by screws being fastened to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space that encloses the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 14e and the inner side access. It is formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

  119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411 The left corner support member 430L is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and is fitted to the main body member 411 from the back side to the position protruding from the opening 414 to the front side. The lens member 440 that is inserted and pressed from the back side by the right corner support member 430R from the back side is regulated and constitutes the electric decoration portion 8033. Provided.

  The body member 411 is an elongated member on the left and right sides where openings for allowing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450 to pass are formed on both the left and right sides, and the speaker cover 27 is disposed to cover the openings. Thus, on the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wave shape in a top view, and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the tubular portion 405 of the electrical decoration unit 401, than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405 It mainly includes a support through-hole 413 that is formed to penetrate in a slightly larger inner shape, and an opening 414 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

  The wavy wall 412 is formed in a wave shape substantially the same as the wavy wall 403 of the electrical decoration unit 401. Thereby, the position alignment of the left-right direction at the time of fitting the electrical decoration unit 401 in the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper side frame member 410 can be performed easily.

  The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted through the support through-hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). Accordingly, the wiring extending through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, since the other end of the wiring whose one end is connected to the electronic substrate included in the electrical decoration unit 401 can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, the front frame 14 is closed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

  The support through-hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. Thereby, the support through-hole 413 can be used for positioning with respect to the upper frame member 410 of the electrical decoration unit 401.

  The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be viewed in front view. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) is provided with an LED 14e2 at a position coinciding with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, and the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the LED 14e2 through the opening 414.

  The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 that is formed in a wave shape in a top view on the back side, a supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side on the lower right corner bottom surface, and a recessed groove from the back side on the lower left corner bottom surface. A supported groove 418, a fastening portion 419 that is disposed in a symmetrical position in the vicinity of the upper end portion and can be screwed in, and a second screw that can be screwed in a position closer to the top and bottom. The fastening part 419b is mainly provided.

  The wavy side 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall 422 formed at the lower edge front side end). Thereby, positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

  The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitting state (see FIG. 86). ), A load (weight, etc.) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 through the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

  The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the electric decoration portion 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 via the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. It is comprised so that the load (weight etc.) given from can be provided to the electrical decoration part 8031. FIG.

  The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where a screw inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape to a position where it does not reach the tip portion from the base portion. The enlarged rib 419a is provided.

  As will be described later, the enlarged rib 419a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419 by screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a, so that the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e are connected to the main body frame 14a. (See FIG. 125A), details will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are provided with three identically shaped ribs at 120 ° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of the screws to the fastening portion 419.

  The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) includes the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 122) at a lower position of the main body member 411. Is formed at a position that coincides with the recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the main body member 411. Details will be described later.

  The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a corrugated wall portion 422 formed in a wave shape in a bottom view at the lower edge front side edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, the L-shaped extending portion 423 extending upward from the extending end portion and having an L-shaped cross section, and the main body plate portion 421 It is mainly provided with an opening portion 424 that is disposed at a position that is equidistant from the left and right center position (the upper end position of the curved shape) and that includes a plurality of small-diameter through holes that penetrate vertically.

  In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in front and back, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface. A part of the L-shaped extending portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at a position where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut on each other, and the strength can be improved.

  In the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123), the opening 424 is an opening through which vibration waves (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 are passed (released to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 that are circular openings that allow vibration generated toward the front side in the speaker assembly 450 to pass therethrough.

  The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally-long rectangular through hole 430R2 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. The light irradiated to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 414.

  121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is shown by an imaginary line for easy understanding.

  The speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted through the connection holes 469, and left and right ends. The lower end portion is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Since the speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having substantially symmetrical shapes, the speaker assembly 450R will be described, and the description of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

  The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-type speaker) 451 that is an acoustic device that converts an electric signal into an audible sound wave and can be heard, and the speaker 451 is inserted through a through-hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 is provided. A front assembly 460 that is fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, and forms a space between the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). Side assembly 480.

  The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to block the through-hole 466 of the front assembly 460 and emits a production sound related to the game. One end of the speaker 451 is connected to the speaker 451 and extended. The speaker connection wire 453 (for example, an electric wire made of a copper wire and a covering portion covering the copper wire) passes through a through-hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102) and passes through the end of the speaker connection wire 453. The connector is configured to be connected to the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) by being connected to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102).

  The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 in a state where the front surface portion is aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

  Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is received. Can be reproduced and output with high sound quality. Further, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front surface portion of the speaker 451 without causing deterioration in sound quality.

  The front assembly 460 has a main body portion 461 that is formed in a cup shape that is long in the left and right direction and the back side is opened, and a plurality of concave portions that are recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the upper and lower width. And the extended plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 from the upper and lower width outside. A wiring passage recess 464 that is recessed from the rear side end of the main body portion 461 to the front side, a light passage through hole 465 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body portion 461, and A through hole 466 that is circularly inserted through the speaker 451 on the right side, a plurality of passage-forming ribs 467 extending from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and a rear side Screws inserted into the side assembly 480 A plurality of fastening portions 468 to be connected and fixed, a connection hole 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), and a lower end of the distal end side body portion 461T And a front recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back side toward the front side.

  The main body portion 461 is divided into left and right directions as a region divided into a base end side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a center side in the left and right direction of the base end side main body portion 461B (FIG. 121). It mainly includes an intermediate main body portion 461M provided on the left side and a front end side main body portion 461T provided on the central side in the left-right direction of the intermediate main body portion 461M (left side in FIG. 121). Note that the base end side main body 461B, the intermediate main body 461M, and the distal end side main body 461T are continuously formed with spaces formed between the rear assembly 480 and the rear end assembly 480.

  The main body portion 461 includes a rear side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in front view. The rear side wall portion 461H includes an edge portion that does not turn back on the inside (an edge portion on which no flange or the like is formed).

  The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Is done.

  The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screws inserted through the through holes 463a are inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the co-tightening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e. It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

  That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted into the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a is screwed into the main body member 411, so that the extension plate 463 is tightened as the screw is tightened. Pressed against the rear assembly 480. Accordingly, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

  According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material sandwiched therebetween). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

  The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The recessed width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453. Accordingly, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 that passes through the wiring passage recess 464, and a gap can be prevented from being generated between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. 121 and 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess portion 464 is visible.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. Therefore, when the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are assembled, The speaker connection line 453 that is connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. Thereby, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

  The light passage through hole 465 is a through hole through which light irradiated from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes.

  The passage forming rib 467 is in contact with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap in the front and rear, and is bent a plurality of times in a space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). It is a rib which forms. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front side end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being generated on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

  The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (a little outside the outer shape).

  The rear assembly 480 has a body portion 481 that is formed in a cup shape that is long in the left and right direction and is open on the front side, and is recessed in a semicircular shape from the top and bottom edges of the body portion 481 toward the center of the top and bottom width. A plurality of recessed portions 482 and an extending plate extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 from the vertical width outside 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting to the front side of the main body portion 481, a light passage through hole 485 formed penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body portion 481, and a cup-like shape of the main body portion 481 A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side, and through-holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to the fastening portions 468 of the front assembly 460 and the front-rear direction. Through holes 488 and front assembly In the corresponding position in the longitudinal direction a front recess 471 of the 60 to the side recess 491 after being recessed toward the front side to the rear side, mainly comprising a.

  The main body 481 extends in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer periphery of the main body 481 at a position moved inward by the thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 with respect to the outer shape of the back side plate. The front side wall part 481H formed from the shape fitted inside the inner side surface of the rear side wall part 461H of the rear side wall part 461H.

  The speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion that is fitted by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire circumference of the outer periphery thereof, so that air can be prevented from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction that an acoustic effect is reduced by the sound leakage from an outer peripheral position can be suppressed.

  The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary convex portions protruding from the front side of the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at a position where the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is sandwiched between the left and right sides with an interval through which the speaker connection line 453 can pass. 481Ha is provided.

  The auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are a pair of convex portions that prevent the position of the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage concave portion 464 from being displaced when the rear side assembly 480 is assembled to the front side assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are tapered so as to extend to the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connection line 453 extends from the wiring passage concave portion 464. Even if it comes off and shifts to the left and right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

  As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 during the assembly process, and the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

  The recessed portion 482 is configured to have the same outer shape as that of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed part, Comprising: It utilizes for positioning between fastening part 14e1.

  The extending plate 483 includes a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screws inserted through the through holes 483a are inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the co-tightening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and pass through the through-holes 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

  That is, the speaker assembly 450R extends from the back side of the main body frame 14a to the extent that the screw is tightened by screwing a screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

  The wiring pressing convex part 484 is provided along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body part 481 and is formed with a width that fits in the wiring passage recessed part 464, and more than the recessed depth of the wiring passage recessed part 464. The speaker connection line 453 is projected with a projecting length that is slightly shorter than the outer peripheral diameter of the covering portion.

  That is, by passing the speaker connection line 453 through the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion 464, the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion are compressed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the opening formed surrounded by 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction that an acoustic effect falls by the sound leakage from the opening for letting the speaker connection line 453 pass can be suppressed.

  The light passage through hole 485 is a through hole through which light irradiated from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passing through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape whose sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side, and in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). ), The light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

  The passage forming rib 487 is formed at the same position as the passage forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, and is in contact with each other without a gap between the front assembly 460 and a plurality of spaces in a space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. It is the rib which forms the bending channel | path (refer FIG. 123) which turns around. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

  The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is formed at the front and rear end portions and the surface position of the front side wall portion 481H. That is, the rear side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the rear side plate of the main body portion 481. This prevents a gap from being formed on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

  Here, the passage-forming rib 487 is designed with a dimension such that a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction at the front end thereof in contact with the passage-forming rib 467. That is, the passage forming rib 487 is loaded with a compressive force toward the back side from the passage forming rib 467, and the compressing force blocks the gap between the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 while elastically deforming in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 124 (b)).

  At this time, if the left and right rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 is weak and may bend to the left and right, there is a possibility that the compression force does not work well and the gap cannot be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased in the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (further, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)). The strength can be strengthened by the side wall portion 461H. Therefore, the rigidity in the left-right direction of the passage forming rib 487 can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be prevented from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 467 is satisfactorily closed. Can do.

  The rear recessed portion 491 is formed in a shape that is reversed in the front-rear direction with the front recessed portion 471, and forms an opening jointly with the front recessed portion 471. The opening is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (a little outside the outer shape), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening 424 It is arranged at a position surrounding the outer shape.

  123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. FIG. In FIG. 123 (a) and FIG. 123 (b), for easy understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated with an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 that face each other are opposed to each other. The figure is shown in a state where is expanded toward the front side of the drawing. That is, the contact positions of the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 can be obtained by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) vertically drawn at the center of the paper. Can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

  In the assembled state of the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), an acoustic chamber is provided inside the speaker assembly 450 on the back side of the base end side main body portion 461B of the front side assembly 460. Is formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as a base end, an acoustic path as a passage path of the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the distal end side main body 461T. The acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are alternately shifted up and down toward the left side. And rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e disposed at a plurality of locations (5 locations in the present embodiment).

  By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and Further, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being sandwiched between the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480.

  Since each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body part 461 and the back side wall part 461H, the rigidity of the main body part 461 is enhanced by each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e. Can do.

  Each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e forms a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back side of the speaker 451 passes in cooperation with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480.

  Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 travels linearly. In this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws is avoided by avoiding the passage formation rib 467. Will progress.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123A as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is generated on the left side (arrow) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is disposed on the L side and is closest to the left-right direction is disposed on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrows L and U directions).

  On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is disposed on the left side (arrow L side) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the lower side (for example, the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b)). When the rib portion 467c) is disposed on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (the direction of the arrows L and D).

  Accordingly, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e are alternately arranged up and down as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent up and down, The traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws can be ensured longer than the left and right width of the space.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily adjust the traveling path length until the vibration wave Ws passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471 and 491, and the generation of the stationary wave due to the vibration wave Ws is suppressed. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 467 can be caused by the recessed portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted in the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). It is possible to proceed in the direction of arrows L and U.

  Accordingly, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the assembly.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage-forming rib 487 is formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to the wiring pressing convex portion 484 that holds the wiring, and at a plurality of locations (mainly) in the vertical direction toward the left side. In the embodiment, rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are provided at five locations).

  Since each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected with the main body part 481 and the front side wall part 481H, the rigidity of the main body part 481 is enhanced by each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e. Can do.

  Here, each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed in a shape that coincides with each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction, and is in an assembled state (FIG. 100). In the front-back direction).

  In addition, since the effect | action of each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is similar to the effect | action of the rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e mentioned above, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 487 can be caused by the recessed portions 482 and 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed between the recessed portion 482 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have the effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

  Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced in width as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is once narrowed at a position where the recessed portions 462 and 482 and the recessed portions 463b and 483b are aligned vertically. In addition, the vertical width is expanded at a distance from the speaker 451, and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471,491. Thereby, an acoustic effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side main body 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480. The generated vibration wave Ws (voice) travels toward the distal end side main body 461T which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction in search of the exit. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the front end side main body 461T sequentially passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420. The sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

  That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass-reflex type speaker box, and the back surface portion of the speaker 451 has an opening and an opening 424 (an opening formed by the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 and the recessed portions 471 and 491 ( 120), it is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010, so that the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is reproduced and output with high sound quality without causing the sound to be heard. Can do.

  The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase thereof, so that the sound having the same phase as the sound output from the front surface of the speaker 451 is recessed 471,491. Sound can be emitted from the opening formed by the above. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel out with the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify heavy bass. Thereby, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can perform an effect full of a sense of reality, and can raise the player's interest and excitement in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is disposed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), so that the bass output from the back side of the speaker 451 is the speaker assembly. The inner space of 450 is used as an enclosure and discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). Thereby, the effect of the game by the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side can be appropriately provided to a player who plays a game on the front side of the front frame 14.

  The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 or setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in this embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws is a path that avoids the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. Is defined. Therefore, the vibration wave Ws (sound wave) can be obtained by individually setting the arrangement of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the extending length in the vertical direction. ) Can be tuned.

  In the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front side assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear side assembly 480 are provided in addition to the above purpose. The speaker assembly 450 is reinforced by being disposed at a portion to which a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed.

  For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are disposed in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by a load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are screwed.

  In addition, the extended plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125 (a)), and each of the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d and 487d are disposed closer to the extending plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing screws into the fastening part 468, the fastening part 419 inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a of the extension plates 463 and 483. When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the ribs 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other, so that the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly Deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 can be reinforced by the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d.

  Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portions 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e are aligned below in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is connected to the upper side plate member. In a state before being fastened and fixed to 14e, the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 are put on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450, from the fastening portion 14e1.

  Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are easily damaged. In this embodiment, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. The load applied to the portions 462 and 482 can be reinforced, and the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 can be improved.

  An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, a fraudulent attempt to illegally allow a wire, a piano wire, or the like to enter the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424. It can be easily suppressed.

  In such an illegal act, a wire, a piano wire or the like is illegally entered into the game area and a nail or the like is deformed. In this embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 has the front concave portion 471. In addition to the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 and The opening gap formed by the wiring pressing protrusion 484 is closed by the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like is made to enter the speaker assembly 450 through an opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491, the speaker assembly is passed through an opening different from the portion where the wire enters. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of the wire, the piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection line 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

  In addition, the through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection line 453 through the upper side plate member 14e is arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speakers 451. The distance between the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491, which is a portion where the speaker assembly 450 enters the speaker assembly 450, can be increased.

  Therefore, even when such a fraudulent act is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be reduced, and it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of fraudulent profits.

  124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (c). FIG. 124A is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124A, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124A. is there. In FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated with an imaginary line for easy understanding, whereas in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated. Is omitted.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (the lower surface in FIG. 124 (b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 is tapered so as to incline toward the back side. The outer side surface 481Ho (upper surface in FIG. 124 (b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 is tapered so as to be inclined inward toward the rear side, and fitted into the inner side surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said. Thereby, the work efficiency of the operation | work which inserts the front side wall part 481H of the rear side assembly 480 in the back side wall part 461H of the front side assembly 460 can be improved.

  In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is illustrated by a solid line, and the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c before assembly is illustrated by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. Since the compressive force acts from the rib part 487c toward the rib part 467c by the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, the gap between the rib parts 467c, 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the abutting rib parts.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body portion 461M has a shorter front-rear dimension than the base end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be reduced (squeezed) in the intermediate main body portion 461M as compared with the front end side main body portion 461T. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the front end side body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 is the interior of the intermediate body portion 461M. It is ensured greatly in a mode that bulges in the front-rear direction compared to the space. Thereby, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end side main body 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end side main body 461T and discharged at a low speed. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved, for example, it is possible to easily hear deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

  125 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e along the CXXVa-CXXVa line in FIG. 124 (a). FIG. 124B is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e along the line CXXVb-CXXVb in FIG. 124A.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has a front assembly 460, a rear assembly 480, and a screw that is inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a and fastened to the fastening portion 419. The upper side plate member 14e is a portion sandwiched between the main body frame 14a. In other words, the enlarged rib 419a is disposed at the front surface position of the extension plate 463, thereby preventing the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. The front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position that coincides with the recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450.

  The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (by passing through the recessed portions 462 and 482 without contacting with the fastening portions 462 and 482). The upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened and fixed without using the side assembly 480.

  The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together with the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is provided at the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

  In addition, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the back side is disposed inside). Thus, at the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the front side is disposed inside).

  In the present embodiment, since the left and right speakers 451 are arranged in the independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, reproduction output from the speakers 451 arranged in the counterpart speaker assemblies 450R and 450L. Thus, it is possible to reproduce the sound with high quality as a transparent sound without causing a conflict with the reproduced sound.

  In the present embodiment, the extension plate 483 and the upper side plate member 14e of the rear assembly 480 are brought into contact with each other on the upper surface of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125A), while the speaker assembly 450 In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper side plate member 14e is projected to the front side in a portion disposed opposite to the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480. The projecting portion and the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 does not have a configuration in which the speaker assembly 450 abuts (sticks) on the entire surface with respect to the upper side plate member 14e.

  In this case, the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and contacting the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper side plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin), but is not limited thereto. It is not what is done.

  For example, a metal member may be disposed between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be disposed, or a glass member may be disposed. Alternatively, a concrete member may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

  In particular, when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to employ cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel and the like. By using these metals, the thickness can be increased.

  Moreover, it is desirable that it is a member with high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (ceramics) and the like are applicable. When these members are used, the sound rising performance can be improved.

  Further, regarding the shape, it may be provided in a long plate shape, may be provided in a spike shape, or may be provided in a manner dotted in a rounded shape. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, and may be connected in a floating state.

  The arrangement of the portion functioning as an insulator described above is not limited to the back surface of the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450. For example, the back surface of the upper end portion of the speaker assembly 450, the back surfaces of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, or the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.

  For example, when arranged on the back surface of the upper end, the member functioning as an insulator is formed into a cylindrical shape, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. You may position by. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator can be dispensed with, and functions as the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator by tightening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the acoustic effect by adjusting the degree of contact with the member to be applied (the load applied to each other).

  At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is the same as the screw inserted into the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123A) or the connecting hole 469. The upper side of the through hole disposed on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction in the shape, or a screw inserted into the through-hole disposed at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through-hole is disposed Since it is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from being detached from the upper side plate member 14e.

  Further, regarding the fixing to the upper side plate member 14e of the upper side frame member 410, the upper side frame member 410 is inserted from the back side into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e in addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The screw to be tightened is fixed by being screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125B). As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, since the load is not applied to the speaker assembly 450, by firmly fastening the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from being detached from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted through the through hole 483a (adjusting the fastening condition).

  The same relationship as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above can be applied to the relationship between the main body frame 14a connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

  126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . In FIG. 127 (b), the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed is shown.

  First, in order to describe the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, a left end front support portion 12a and a left end rear support portion 12b are spaced apart from each other for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. Arranged.

  The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that is inclined rearward from the right end portion of the rear end surface disposed opposite to the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the left is formed. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 abut on the surface.

  The left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a cup shape with an outer shape formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a front end surface formed on one surface so as to be able to contact the back surface of the game board 13, and a central portion opened. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end portion disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

  The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in such a posture that the elastic support portion 12b1 projects to the front side as it goes to the left in a natural length state. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 forms a tapered shape that expands to the side (right side) on which the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction in cooperation with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a. Thereby, workability | operativity when an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

  128 (a) and 128 (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 taken along the line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127 (b), and FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b) show the board surface support device 600. 2 is a side view of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the game board 13. 128 and 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in time series, and in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 that has started to push the left end portion into the inner frame 12 is illustrated. 128 (b) and 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly to the inner frame 12, and FIG. 129 (b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In FIG. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding, a part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted.

  When the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, and the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent, and then the left end of the game board 13 is placed. The part is slid between the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid in a posture rotated around an axis directed in the vertical direction with respect to the inner frame 12, so that the left end front support on the near side is supported. Although there is a possibility that the part 12b and the game board 13 interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left end front support part 12a, the game board 13 and the left end front support part 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability | operativity can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the game board 13 is moved around the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the rear side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front surface of the game board 13). It is rotated so as to be close to the inner frame 12. In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed opposite to the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

  In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game bottom board 13 is in an assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1 that are supported from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface are provided in the left-right direction.

  With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 when viewed from above. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can proceed without delay by causing the game board 13 to ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side. . Therefore, the workability of the work of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

  The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 ° as an angle larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game shop. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rear inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. The workability when the board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the post-inclination at the time of installing the game store. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be made horizontal.

  In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 that are arranged one above the other and are released later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It contacts the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

  Here, in the released state, the board surface support device 600 has the claw member 620 before rotation and the claw member 630 before regulation (parts disposed on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to retreat from the route, the workability of the assembly work of the game board 13 can be improved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 to the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 600 is described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the state of the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 changes almost simultaneously.

  The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c and the vertical position is restricted. As shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b), the board surface support device 600 does not contact the lower end portion of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 (game). The board 13 is not pushed up by the board surface support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d can be stably attached and detached as the panel surface support device 600 is changed between the released state and the fixed state.

  Here, when the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 is pushed to the back side, the game board 13 rotates with the vicinity of the left end portion as a fulcrum, so that the post-rotation claw member 640 via the game board 13 according to the lever principle. The force required to apply a load to the game board 13 can be weakened by the long width of the game board 13, and even a less powerful operator can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

  When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported at two upper and lower positions by the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b (see FIG. 126). 13 is a case where the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 when the right end of 13 is insufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower panel support devices 600 is not fixed). However, the extent to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

  For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is caused by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12 to close it. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

  In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is fixed by the support portions 12a and 12b, the right end portion is fixed by the board surface support device 600, and the lower end portion is vertically positioned on the support bottom portion 12c. Be regulated.

  In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13 is arranged at the lower end on the back side of the game board 13 and is connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. And a floating connector 13a supported by the game board 13 so that the position of the game board 13 can be changed in the direction of the surface of the game board 13 and a control board disposed on the inner frame 12 near the lower board surface support device 600. A receiving connector 12d to which wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) or the like is connected on the back surface is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

  The floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d are arranged in a posture that inclines in a manner in which the connection direction is directed in a direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

  The inner frame 12 includes a panel support device 600 that is disposed in the vicinity of the right corner of the inner frame 12 such that a pair of upper and lower sides face each other. In addition, since a pair of upper and lower panel surface support devices 600 having the same configuration are disposed facing each other, only one panel surface support device 600 will be described, and the description of the other panel surface support device 600 will be omitted.

  130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. 130 (a) and 130 (b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the board support device 600 A release state in which the game board 13 is released is shown. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the U-shaped open side formed by the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board surface support device 600 is rotatable to a frame member 610 that is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, and a first shaft member P61 that is inserted and fixed to the frame member 610. A pre-rotation claw member 620 that is pivotally supported, and a pre-regulation claw member that is rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 that is disposed on the front side of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620. 630 and a post-rotation claw member 640 that is arranged on the back side of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 that is inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620.

  The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are opposed to each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed in a straight line through the plate portion 611a, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 at the upper front side of the support hole 612. An arc recess 614 that is recessed from below in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612, and is inserted into and fixed to the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. It is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by a rod-shaped regulating rod 615 and a screw extending from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and inserted into the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). A pair of fixing plates 616, mainly comprises.

  The support hole 612 is a through hole into which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-like member having an enlarged diameter at the proximal end side of the insertion, and after being inserted through the support hole 612, the end of the insertion distal end is pressed. , Fixed to the support hole 612. Since the fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, the description thereof is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

  Like the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 is a main body plate portion 621 in which a sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at a corner portion to form a T shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed in a straight line so as to penetrate the plate part 621a opposed to the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrate in a straight line at the upper front corner of the plate part 621a. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of supports that are formed in a straight line in the back side of the plate portion 621a and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. Hole 624 mainly.

  When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is simultaneously inserted into the supported hole 632 of the pre-restricting claw member 630, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the claw member 640 after rotation.

  The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is opposed to the left and right, and is a longitudinally long portion 621a1, and an extending portion 621a2 that extends vertically from the front end of the elongated portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T shape in a side view, a connecting plate portion 621b for connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, and a surface of the connecting plate portion 621b from the rear side end of the connecting plate portion 621b From the back side extended plate 621c extending downwardly inclined by about 45 degrees and the back side end of the extended portion 621a2, it extends perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a toward the opposite side plate portion 621a. A hanging back plate 621d provided and a front extending plate 621e extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate 621d to the front side with an inclination of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate 621d. And mainly.

  The drooping back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed to be at right angles to each other.

  The rear surface side extending plate 621c is disposed on the lower surface thereof so as to be in contact with the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is brought into contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134 (a)). By retracting above NBb, the torsion spring NBb starts to contact the main body plate portion 611.

  Thus, when the worker starts to push the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the operator side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the completion, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated on the operator side. That is, the momentum of rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600 while reducing the force required at the start of pushing.

  The drooping back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front-side extending board 621e functions as a guide for inserting the game board 13 into the back side of the hanging back board part 621d.

  A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates a biasing force in a direction in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d are brought close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates a biasing force in a direction that separates the lower end portion of the claw member 640 after rotation from the rear side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

  The pre-restricting claw member 630 is a body plate portion 631 formed in a shape of a side view when the sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at a corner portion, and a part of the body plate portion 631, which is opposed to the left and right And a pair of supported holes 632 that are formed in a straight line through the plate portion 631a and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connection plate 631b that connects the plate portion 631a and is inclined from the lower end portion to the front side. And an inclined extending plate 633 that extends and a curved surface 634 that is curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

  The inclined extending plate 633 is a plate portion that is disposed to face the front frame 14 and is a portion that is closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board surface support device 600 is released.

  The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the restriction rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), and thereby, a free posture change of the claw member 630 before restriction is restricted.

  The post-rotation claw member 640 has a main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when the sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at the corner portion, and a part of the main body plate portion 641, and is opposed to the left and right. From the lower end portion of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of supported plate portions 641a and the pair of supported holes 642 that are formed so as to penetrate the plate portion 641a in a straight line and are supported by the third shaft member P63, from the rear side. An inclined extending plate 643 that is inclined and extended is mainly provided.

  The front connecting plate 641b is a part that abuts on the back side of the game board 13 and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

  The inclined extending plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and has an inclination angle that contacts the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129 (a)). It is formed.

  134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b), the process of changing the board support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in time series. Further, in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b), it is fixed to the multifunctional cover member 171 and the panel surface support device 600 that are arranged close to the panel surface support device 600. The layout of the game board 13 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  That is, FIG. 134 (a) shows the released state of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 135 (b) shows the fixed state of the board surface support device 600. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is disposed directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the claw member 640 after rotation rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 only by pushing the claw member 640 after rotation to the rear side via the game board 13 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward relative to the first shaft member P61. Accordingly, the claw member 640 after rotation can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

  Here, as described above, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is applied with an urging force in a direction approaching the drooping back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force is applied, the pre-restricting claw member 630 is disposed close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, when the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 comes into contact with the regulation rod 615, a change in the posture of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is regulated.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b), the pre-rotation claw member 620 is changed as the panel support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state. While the front side on which the extended portion 621a2 is disposed is tilted, the front side of the claw member 630 before regulation rises in a manner of separating from the drooping back plate portion 621d.

  More specifically, the regulation rod 615 is a front side portion of the curved surface 634 and is in contact with the resistance portion 634a intersecting with a circle centering on the second shaft member P62 (see FIG. 134 (a)). 135 to (a)), the front-side end of the claw member 630 before regulation rises as the claw member 620 before rotation tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the movement direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

  On the other hand, a non-resistive portion 634b that is a portion that is connected to the back side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62 is disposed to face the restriction rod 615, When the restriction rod 615 and the curved surface 634 are not in contact with each other in the circular direction around the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the pre-restriction claw member 630 is released, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is moved to the inclined extending plate 633 side. The front end portion is disposed close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (see FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (b)).

  In the angle range (the range between FIG. 134A and FIG. 135A) in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises and operates, the front-side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 with respect to the pre-regulation claw member 630 Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting, is applied, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 when operating by the downward load is changed in the posture opposite to the downward load (in the rising direction) Posture change), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive, and the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 with respect to the downward load is restricted.

  In addition, the game board 13 is in contact with the back surface of the rear-side extending plate 621c, so that the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 as long as the game board 13 is not pushed into the back.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the nail | claw member 620 before rotation rotates by applying a downward load to the nail | claw member 630 before regulation. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied from the front frame 14 to the pre-restriction claw member 630, the pre-rotation claw member 620 can be prevented from tilting. In the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship in contact with the inclined extending plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 when the panel surface support device 600 is released. The shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length of the inclined extending plate 633, and the inclination angle are set.

  In the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side when the game board 13 abuts on the back side of the back side extension board 621c, the back side extension board is used. Rubbing friction occurs between 621 c and the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state of FIG. 134 (b). Therefore, when a lower board surface support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) by the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the panel surface support device 600, the front rotation claw member 620 is rotated by the load from the front frame 14. Depending on the manner in which the multifunctional cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 are in contact with each other, the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state, and the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stable at a halfway angle. May occur.

  If the board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in this state, the space between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 is assumed. This may shorten the distance of the game and hinder the game.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the multifunction which is arrange | positioned by the front frame 14 by employ | adopting the structure which suppresses that the nail | claw member 620 before rotation rotates with the load from the front frame 14 (refer FIG. 89). When the cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. Thereby, it can be made to notice the store clerk who was performing the operation | work which closes the front frame 14 that the board | substrate surface support apparatus 600 is not the fixed state.

  Recognizing this, the store clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunction cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the pre-restriction claw Depending on the manner of contact of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the case where the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state and the case where the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and stabilizes at a halfway angle (exclusively, The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multifunction cover member 171 projects to a position where it can come into contact with the claw member 630 before regulation, and in the state shown in FIG. The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured such that the posture is not regulated by the regulation rod 615.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear-side extending plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13. No.

  That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-restricting claw member 630 immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is in a fixed state, the front side end of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. Yes.

  As a result, when the game board 13 is arranged at a position immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the store clerk pushes the game board 13 slightly, the game board 13 is stabilized by 90%. In the case where the front frame 14 is not closed until the panel surface support device 600 is loaded from the multi-function cover member 171 disposed in the front frame 14. The board surface support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

  Therefore, the workability of the work of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be improved. In the present embodiment, the game board 13 is disposed on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extending plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact with each other (FIG. 134 (a )), The game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 back. That is, the game board 13 displaces the claw member 640 after rotation, and accordingly, the claw member 620 before rotation is rotated, thereby changing the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

  In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the front face of the game board 13 and the face of the board back support plate portion 621d facing the game board 13 are brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in this state, the game board 13 moves (tilts) while pushing down the drooping back plate 621d, so that the claw member 620 before rotation via the claw member 640 after rotation. The urging force of the torsion spring NBb given to the game board 13 is given as a resistance against the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 to the front side. Thereby, in the state shown in FIG. 135A, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board surface support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) by the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is disposed opposite to the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate 621d to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is the center. In the direction along the arc, the non-resistance portion 634b comes into contact with the regulation bar 615, and the resistance against the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 to the front side is increased accordingly.

  Thereby, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b) can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board surface support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) by the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the non-resistive portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is moved from the portion that contacts the restriction rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) toward the portion that contacts the restriction rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). A curved surface in which the radius around the biaxial member P62 is gradually increased is formed.

  Thereby, the inclined extending plate 633 is pushed to the back side by the multi-function cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), and the second shaft member P62 is displaced by rotating the claw member 620 before rotation. The non-resistance portion 634b and the regulation rod 615 are separated from each other for a moment. Therefore, the resistance applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is reduced for a moment, so that the pre-regulation claw member 630 is vigorously close to the drooping back plate 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and FIG. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

  Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (b), the multifunctional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship that separates from the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the inclined extending plate 633. However, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position immediately before the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunction cover member 171 is moved to the pre-regulation claw member 630 or the inclined extending plate 633. Then, the board surface support device 600 can be brought into a fixed state.

  In the present embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board surface support apparatus 600. That is, in the state where the back side surface of the back side extended plate 621c is not in contact with the game board 13 and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is connected to the multifunction cover member 171. (For example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 until the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when replacing the board). The work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

  When the board surface support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extending plate 633 is pulled upward and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is rotated against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, since the load received from the regulation bar 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulation bar 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotation direction), the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force and continues to rotate as it is. By doing so, the board surface support apparatus 600 can be brought into a released state.

  Note that when the board support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed out to the front side by the claw member 640 after rotation that is displaced (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of the work of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), in the released state, the upper end surface of the game board 13 comes into contact with the lower surface of the rear side extending plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. Thereby, when both the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 are in the release state, the possibility that the game board 13 falls to the front side can be solved.

  In addition, the upper and lower panel support devices 600 can perform an operation of switching between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth in accordance with the state change of the board support device 600 as in the present embodiment, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and back positions of the game board 13 are different from each other. The load applied to the game board 13 may be excessive.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-restriction claw member 630 that is operated when the board surface support device 600 is released, and the operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640. Does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member that support the game board 13 as compared to the amount by which the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced. The amount by which 640 is displaced is smaller.

  Therefore, the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 when the pre-restriction claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that the pre-restriction claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the restriction rod 615 is prevented from returning) Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front and rear positions of the game board 13 at the locations supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

  Moreover, the same effect also arises because the post-rotation claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation claw member 620. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the post-rotation claw member 640 resists the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb before the rotation claw member 620. And the claw member 640 after rotation can be displaced in the direction of widening the angle.

  Accordingly, since the amount of displacement of the gaming board 13 pushed out by the claw member 640 after rotation can be suppressed as compared with the amount of displacement of the claw member 620 before rotation, the gaming board at the place supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. Thereby, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136 to FIG. 139, the relationship between the panel support device 600 disposed on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

  136, the released state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in FIG. 137, and in FIG. 138, the board surface support device 600 is moved from the released state to the fixed state side by a predetermined angle (about 25 °). ) In FIG. 139, the rotated state is illustrated immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed, and the thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board surface support device 600 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Is done.

  136 to 139, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 and the opening / closing regulating part 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. In order to facilitate understanding, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 viewed in cross section in FIGS. 136 and 137 is illustrated by imaginary lines in FIGS. 138 and 139.

  As shown in FIG. 136, when the panel surface support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing regulating portion 159 and the panel surface support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening / closing regulating unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, it is allowed to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is detached, but the front frame 14 is closed when the game board 13 is arranged. Is regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 137, when the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing regulating portion 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, the game board 13 is arranged on the back side as compared with the arrangement when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, so that the operation board back member 155 above the game board 13 and the opening / closing regulating unit 159 is interfered. Is avoided. Therefore, when the board surface support device 600 is fixed, it is allowed to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

  As shown in FIG. 138, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, the front frame 14 is disposed at the closed position (see FIG. 138). The opening / closing restricting portion 159 interferes with the inclined extending plate 633 of the panel surface support device 600.

  Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load on the inclined extending plate 633 toward the back side, the rotation direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is caused by the action of the restriction rod 615. Since the reaction force becomes excessive when the rotation direction of the pre-restricting claw member 630 (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) is reversed (FIG. 138 clockwise direction), This is as described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

  Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, closing the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, in a state where the game board 13 is disposed, there is a possibility that the lower end portion on the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extending plate 621c may contact each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The action of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is strengthened.

  As shown in FIG. 139, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state just before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening / closing regulating portion 159 The inclined extending plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes.

  Further, in this state, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 is to be rotated by applying a load on the inclined extending plate 633 toward the back side, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is caused by the action of the restriction rod 615. As described above, the direction (FIG. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the pre-restricting claw member 630 (FIG. 138 counterclockwise direction) are not reversed and can be easily pushed in with a normal load. Yes (see FIG. 135 (a)).

  Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be pushed in via the opening / closing restriction part 159, and the board surface support device 600 can be set in a fixed state. Therefore, it is allowed to close the front frame 14.

  140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. 140 and 141 show a state in which the cover member for closing the rear surfaces of the ball launch unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

  The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launch unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launch unit 112a. FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. 143 (a) shows a state where the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) shows a state where the ball receiving member 731 is reversed after being disassembled. . That is, in FIG. 143 (b), only the ball receiving member 731 is shown on the back side.

  As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball launching unit 112a includes a base member 710 formed of metal or die-casting and a base member centered on the right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. A shaft is rotatably supported between a closed state in which the front surface of 710 is partially covered (see FIG. 142 (a)) and an open state in which the front surface of the base member 710 is opened (see FIG. 23 (a)). And a ball feeder 720 having a cover member 721.

  The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721 and is locked to the base member 710 with a hook that elastically deforms. The base member 710 is disposed on the front side of the base member 710 and is formed of a synthetic resin or the like. In order to regulate the attitude of the launch solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, the launch rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 launched by the launch solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731 A plurality of fastening portions 716 that are cylindrically projected to the front side at a middle position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges straight from the base member 710 to the front side, and into which screws for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 are screwed. Mounting holes 718 and a plurality of positioning projections 719 are mainly provided.

  The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the rod-like portion 722 is inserted at the right corner, and a locking portion 713 that is formed to be able to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction. In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), the convex portion 714 that protrudes to the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713 is disposed opposite the attracting force generation solenoid 741. And a defect determination convex portion 715 that is provided in a projecting manner.

  The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), and the left inner side of the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. A facing flat surface 714a that is disposed to face the side surface 724c and is parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface that is opposite to the facing flat surface 714a and that is inclined to the right as it goes to the back surface side. A surface 714b.

  When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the failure determination convex portion 715 is not in contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741 but is loosely fastened ( In the state of being lifted from the cover member 721), it is in contact with the cover member 721, and is formed with a convex height that restricts the rotation of the cover member 721.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening of the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosened, and by forming a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, It can be noticed that the fastening of the generating solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before the failure of the ball launch unit 112a occurs, repair (fixing and fixing the suction force generation solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed in advance.

  The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 that is rotatably supported by the base member 711, a restriction state that restricts the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the cover member 721, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144). And a switching device 740 that is controlled so as to change its state depending on an allowable state in which the flow down to the firing rail 730 is allowed.

  The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the back side (the front side in the drawing in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) is opened from a light-transmitting resin material, and a pair of loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. The rod-shaped portion 722, the hook portion 723 formed in a bowl shape on the opposite side of the rod-shaped portion 722, and the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) pass at a position displaced from the hook portion 723 to the rod-shaped portion 722 side. A ball passage opening 724 drilled in the front-rear direction with a possible size, and a cutting metal member 725 disposed in a positional relationship protruding slightly upward from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passage opening 724, And a shaft bar portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.

  The switching device 740 is an adsorption force generation solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726, and the adsorption force generation solenoid 741 generates magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 whose posture changes depending on whether or not, a metal plate 743 that is a sheet metal member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and that is attracted to the attracting force generation solenoid 741, and a ball A guide inclined portion 744 that is a part of the guide arm member 742 and that is disposed below the ball passage opening 724 and inclines downward as it moves away from the ball passage opening 724, and can accommodate the ball P8 upward from the base of the guide inclination portion 744. And a regulation projecting portion 745 that is extended by an appropriate distance and whose extending end projects toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to the shaft rod portion 726.

  The sphere passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage capable of guiding the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144), and a falling plate portion 724a that is inclined downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotational radial direction; A rib portion 724b that is opposed to the upper side of the flow-down plate portion 724a and extends downward in a rib shape from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724, and the extending tip end surface is inclined downward toward the back side, and the flow-down plate portion 724a A left inner side surface 724c that is provided continuously with the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction is mainly provided. With these configurations, the sphere P8 that has flowed into the sphere passage opening 724 flows downward and toward the right.

  In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), when the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the sphere passage opening 724, the sphere P8 contacts the inclined surface 714b, and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, since the sphere P8 flows down from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, the sphere P8 and the cutting metal are disposed while the cutting metal member 725 is arranged in a manner to project inside the sphere passage opening 724. A collision with the member 725 can be prevented.

  The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends upward from the intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 is disposed which is arranged with a space shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

  The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 is parallel to the elongated direction and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a that is formed as a long long hole along the direction and allows a fastening screw to pass therethrough, and is in a straight line (a straight line that passes through the through hole 731a and faces the long hole direction of the through hole 731a) like the bulging portion 716a And a regulating groove 731b formed with a groove width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

  When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, when the position of the through hole 731a to be fastened together with the fastening portion 716 is selected, the bulging portion 716a expands the ball receiving member 731. It can be slid along the straight line to be drawn, and thereby the standby position (separation distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, it is possible to easily adjust the firing strength of the ball P <b> 81 (launch strength when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount). Since the restriction groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be made unchanged.

  The firing rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, a rolling plate portion 730a formed in a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and extending obliquely upward to the left, The mounting plate portions 730b and 730c are suspended from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a, and a base is formed by screws inserted into mounting holes 732 formed in a plurality (two in this embodiment) in the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c. Attached to member 710.

  Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c, so that sound, vibration, etc. caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball are generated. It is suppressed.

  The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and comes into contact with two front and rear locations on the circumferential surface of the sphere P8 (see FIG. 146 (b)) to move the sphere P8 upward. Configured to guide.

  FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the ball sending state by the ball feeding device 720 in time series. In FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c), the cover member 721 is not shown for easy understanding.

  In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the switching device 740 is in a restricted state (a state where the supply of power to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guiding arm member 742 is descended by gravity). The restriction overhanging portion 745 is disposed at a position corresponding to the back-side open end of the ball passage opening 724, abuts against the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back-side open end. Is regulated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (power is supplied to the attracting force generation solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the restriction overhanging portion 745 is changed. Retreats above the sphere and the flow restriction of the sphere P8 is released, so that the sphere P8 flows into the upper portion of the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the sphere P <b> 8 is in contact with the front side wall of the base member 711, so that the further flow is restricted, and the ball P <b> 8 stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), when the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the restricted state again, the ball P8 on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. Is done. Thereby, the sphere P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744 and is guided to the firing rail 730.

  Note that the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), so that the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 is also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Is controlled. Accordingly, the balls can be supplied to the firing rail 730 one by one. The sphere P8 entering the sphere passage opening 724 is a sphere supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a sphere stored in the upper plate 17. is there.

  FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721. The cutting metal member 725 includes a through hole 725a through which a screw that is screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a falling plate portion 724a. The lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower blade portion 725b has a sharp cut at the tip, and the same plate as the base end side plate of the lower blade portion 725b And an upper blade portion 725c extending from the main body.

  The upper blade part 725c is formed such that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back side with respect to the lower blade part 725b, and the lower side projects upward from the flow-down plate part 724a. In addition, the lower side of the upper blade part 725c is inclined downward toward the base end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade part 725b is inclined upward as it goes toward the base end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape in front view.

  The cut between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to the sphere. Next, with reference to FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the ball P8 and enters the ball P8 will be described.

  146 (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 146 (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit 112a in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). ) Is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the yarn Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball launch unit 112a, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 after the launch of the ball P8. In FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, illustration of some components of the ball launch unit 112 a is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the ball P8 guided to the firing rail 730 remains in contact with the lower left edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)). In this state, a current is applied to the firing solenoid 701, and the plunger 702 projects vigorously, whereby a launch force is applied to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (FIG. 147 (a)). )reference).

  Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the yarn Y8 left at hand is moved and the yarn Y8 is pulled while the ball P8 is placed in the game area. An illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening by loosening is known.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the sphere P8 is configured to be cut using the momentum of the sphere P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is disposed at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the yarn Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a posture toward the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

  When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the ball P8 that rolls on the firing rail 730 through the lower side of the falling plate portion 724a, and the middle portion of the yarn Y8 is in the middle of the falling plate portion 724a. Since the yarn Y8 moves along the upper surface, the yarn Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade part 725c protruding above the flow-down plate part 724a, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade part 725b and the upper blade part 725c. .

  When the player holds the front end (the other end) of the yarn Y8, a load associated with the firing of the ball P8 is applied to one end of the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8, so that the yarn Y8 is applied to the yarn Y8. A large tensile force is applied. As a result, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, an illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening can be prevented.

  If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the yarn Y8 will not be cut because sufficient tension is not applied to the yarn Y8. In this case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area, It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the yarn Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to prevent an illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

  Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the rendering operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal motion device 800 is visible from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The configuration is substantially the same.

  An effect operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is disposed on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advancing / retreating operation unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100, and the like.

  The advancing / retreating operation unit 900 moves the petal operation device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advancing / retreating operation, that is, an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, And a petal motion device 800 is connected to one end of the petal motion device 800 and the other end of the design display device 81. The drive-side arm member 910 that is pivoted by the driving force of the drive motor 921 being transmitted through the arm gear 924 and the end portion of which is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100, and the drive-side arm member 910 are driven. A drive motor 921 that generates a drive force, and a transmission means 920 that includes a plurality of gears that transmit the drive force of the drive motor 921 to the drive-side arm member 910; A thin plate-like slide plate 930 that slides in the left-right direction in conjunction with the turning operation of the drive side arm member 910, and a thin plate-like second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, In addition, on the opposite side of the drive side arm member 910, a long plate-like driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal operation device 800 is mainly provided.

  Next, the structure of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 along the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. In FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

  The petal operating device 800 is configured by supporting a member such as a petal 802 on a support base 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and the overall shape is hidden in other members and does not appear in the figure. And a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-like portion.

  A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position to the right of the upper end of the central body portion of the support base material 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 moves forward through a small gap formed in the support base material 801. The first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

  An opening 801P is drilled at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central body portion of the support base 801. The opening 801P is disposed on the right side of the opening 801P and extends rearward into a pair of cylinders. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and having a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, there is a donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which a detection arc plate 880d of a loose fitting device 880 described later can pass. It is formed.

  An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the central motor 804 of the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

  A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening a vertically long, roughly oval area in the center. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion that constitutes the upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion that constitutes the region below the upper portion.

  In the present embodiment, the support base 801 has a shape that extends a little longer in the vertical direction as a whole, but the petal motion device 800 is disposed so as to be movable up and down as will be described later. It is possible to reduce the operation space when 801 is formed in a shape that is long in the vertical direction, rather than in a shape that is long in the left and right direction.

  At this time, since the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively linked and linked to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G that are concentrically arranged so as to overlap the position of the opening 801P as described later, The outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G can be disposed at any position as long as they do not interfere with each other. However, in the present embodiment, the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G respectively. It arrange | positions at the right side (refer FIG. 156).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, collecting the weight in the right half of the petal motion device 800 supported in a slightly tilted position toward the front side prevents the left half on the opposite side from drooping downward. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an interval between the support base 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base 801 from being opened. Thus, the driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801.

  FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In FIGS. 155 and 156, the support base material 801 is not shown for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, the petal 802 is made of a resin that is formed by imitating the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, constituting the flower of the hibiscus as a whole. And a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 is provided on the back side.

  FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803, and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803, and the slide member 820.

  Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arc-shaped front shape extending in the radial direction in the arrangement state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer periphery (see FIG. 154). ).

  On the surface of the petal 802, irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed, and the periphery also has an irregular shape in front view. Strictly speaking, the five petals 802 do not have the same shape and have slightly different irregularities, but are roughly formed in the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge portion is not particularly formed with a boundary between the inner region and the specific color (red) is darkened. Coloring is done.

  Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802 </ b> S extending in a cylindrical shape rearward and having a screw hole inside at two locations, the vicinity of the outer periphery on the rear side of each petal 802 and the central portion in the radial direction. Yes.

  The petal 802 has a rear side portion 802a that is located closer to the flat plate member 803 than a rear side portion 802a that is disposed on the rounded front end side (counterclockwise in front view, right side in FIG. 157 (a)). The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharpened tip side (clockwise in front view, left side of FIG. 157 (a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is disposed closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

  The front side portion 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side portion 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the rear side portion 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other. The petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are gathered toward the same center.

  The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced from each other in the front-rear direction, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are overlapped in the front-rear direction at the gathering position (see FIGS. Since the positional relationship can be matched, the difference in shape (size difference) in the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made significant.

  The five petals 802 have a disc-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 at the center as a whole (see FIG. 155).

  As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat plate member 803 is a long plate-shaped resin member that is fixed to the five petals 802 and separated from each other.

  Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending in a substantially rectangular shape from the center to the outer peripheral side in the arrangement state, and further has a shape in which an outer peripheral edge portion extends forward.

  Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner periphery) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of screwed portions 803S extending in a cylindrical shape rearward and having screw holes inside are provided in the circumferential direction (flat plate). It is integrally formed at a position separated in the short direction of the member 803.

  The screw-in portions 803S are formed so as to be substantially surface positions on both side walls in the circumferential direction (short direction) of each flat plate member 803, and a pair of screw-in portions are formed along the side walls of the flat plate member 803. Slide ribs 803a that are perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extend rearwardly from the rear side of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape extend to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S. Thus, it is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (b), on the rear side of each flat plate member 803, there are screw insertion holes inside at two locations corresponding to the screwed portions 802S of the petals 802, and the petals 802 on the front side A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

  A screw insertion portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 is brought into contact with the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 from the front side, and a screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is inserted into the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

  FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are referred to as appropriate. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slit member 810 is disposed on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-like member having a front shape in which the same five shape portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the center portion. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the periphery of the circular opening 811 in both the front and rear directions.

  Returning to FIG. The rear peripheral wall 813 has a cylindrical shape in the front and rear, respectively, in two places adjacent to each other in five places that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and one in the middle of the three places excluding the two places. A screw-in portion 813S having a screw hole inside is integrally formed, and a positioning boss 813a is extended from the tip edge of the above-mentioned five locations where the screw-in portion 813S is not formed. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screwing portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One purpose of the bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. Each of the central slits 814 is formed so as to linearly extend outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 to the outside, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the central slit 814 has an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (about 15 ° in the pachinko machine 8010). It extends along the inclined direction D12.

  Both side slits 815 are formed on both sides of the central slit 814 so as to extend in parallel with a slight gap.

  In this way, a set of three slits of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 on both sides thereof is formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals). In addition, each edge part of the center slit 814 and the both-side slit 815 may be formed in the front view round shape (semicircle shape), and may be formed in the rectangular shape.

  In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the both-side slit 815 located on the outermost side in the set of these three slits, that is, the two corners on the small diameter side among the four corners of the three slits are both-side slits. In the extending direction of 815, the shape is a little rectangular (a rectangular cut is formed). This rectangular extension part (cut) is for inserting the slide rib 803a in the flat plate member 803.

  The slit member 810 is connected to the side end portion of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side end portions of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815. Is provided with an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

  Thereby, the circular plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

  Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the set of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. Five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged closer to each other so as to face inward, and this also makes the outer shape of the slit member 810 compact.

  In other words, it is assumed that five sets of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. However, when arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 can be more densely laid out. The outer peripheral shape can be made smaller.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slide member 820 is disposed in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin-made member having a long plate-like front shape. The slide member 820 has a small thickness at both end portions of the slide member 820, and the tip portion has a semicircular shape when viewed from the front. An extended portion to be molded, a central portion that is larger than the effect portion at a position between the extended portions, a screw insertion hole 821 formed in the extended portion, and the center of the slide member 820 A guide pin 822 that protrudes from the front side to the center slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to penetrate back and forth in a manner of protruding from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side, Is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 has a posture in which the extending direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 820 and the longitudinal direction intersect at right angles. And it arrange | positions so that it may extend over the both-side slits 815.

  On the other hand, the threaded portion 803 </ b> S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted into the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810 from the front side. In the fully inserted state, the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, a screw with a washer (washer head screw) 824 is inserted into the screw insertion hole 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and is screwed into and fixed to the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803.

  Thereby, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost along the corresponding outer edge of the side slits 815 of the slit member 810. Inserted without gaps.

  As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 does not rotate around the guide pin 822 and the body posture faces a certain outward direction. It is regulated by the slide rib 803a so as to slide.

  FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. FIG. In FIG. 161 (a), the fourth gear 880G is not shown. In the description of FIGS. 160 and 161, FIGS. 155 and 156 are referred to as appropriate.

  As described above, the rotary plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side in the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disc having a circular pivot support opening 831 at the center.

  As shown in FIG. 160, the rotary plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 that extends forward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 and is formed around the peripheral wall on the front surface side.

  The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall extends in a shape of an elongated loop in front view along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830. The rotating plate 830 is integrally formed.

  The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot support opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap of play. The ridge corner portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed to drop.

  The guide rail 832 extends from the position in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 to the clockwise direction in the front view along the direction substantially in the middle between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831. Further, it extends to a position in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while curving in an arc shape toward the clockwise direction of the front view from the middle direction (see FIG. 175 (a)).

  The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 at the end on the side of the pivot opening 831, that is, the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the center end is formed so as to be continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end portion projects from the front end portion of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 to the front side.

  Four other guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall of the peripheral edge of the pivot support opening 831 in the same manner as described above. It extends so as to spiral from the periphery to the outside.

  On the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830, as shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the periphery of the pivot support opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and having teeth on the outer periphery thereof is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is disposed so as to mesh with the first gear 804G and is driven to rotate by the central motor 804.

  As shown in FIG. 154, the rotating plate 830 is attached so as to externally fit the pivot opening 831 to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear end portions of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174 (c)).

  Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 in the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, it is linear rather than planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830. As a result, the pivot support opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotating plate 830 is pivoted smoothly and smoothly.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), a third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter than the second gear 830G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is disposed and fixed on the rear side of the second gear 830G. The oil damper 805 is disposed so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G.

  A circular pivot opening 810a is formed in the center of the third gear 810G. Around the pivot opening 810a, there are three places on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156). Screw insertion holes 810b are formed at positions corresponding to the screw-in portions 813S, and positioning holes 810c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

  The third gear 810G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G that is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is positioned relative to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. 813a (see FIG. 156) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 810c, and is fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screwing portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

  As a result, the slit member 810 is linked and linked to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G is prevented from coming off and the rotating plate 830 Is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be detached.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotation device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 fastened and fixed to the support base 801 (see FIG. 154) and a loosely fitting device 880 that is loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

  162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of a cylindrical peripheral wall is cut along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852. And a flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to expand in diameter at the front end, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

  A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, there are a front screw portion 857 having screw holes inside at two positions on the left and right sides of the lumen portion 856, and the lumen portion 856 side from the front screw portion 857. A holding portion 858 that is drilled toward the back surface in a shape having a counterbore at a position shifted to the back, and two support protrusions 859 that extend in a columnar shape slightly forward are formed integrally with each other. . The front-side front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base portion of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

  The inner circumferential surface of the lumen portion 856 extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing positions, and extends further to the rear than the rear side end of the shaft portion 852. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. In addition, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from both rear screwing portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the LED board 861 is disposed on the front side of the central shaft member 851. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate having a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

  The LED board 861 is formed with a screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 at positions corresponding to the front screwing portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851.

  By positioning the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 by inserting it into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861, and screwing the screw into the front screwing portion 857 of the central shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. The LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

  The LED board 861 is provided with an insertion hole 864 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 so that the screwed portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 can be fitted therein.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the front side surface of the LED board 861 has a central location and a number of locations arranged on the concentric circles extending in multiples (double) around the one location at an equal interval. The LEDs 865 are respectively arranged and fixed, and emit light toward the front.

  In the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861, lateral LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a number of locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED substrate 861. It is supposed to be. Note that the lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. A connector connecting portion 867 is disposed and fixed rearward on the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861.

  A central decorative member 868 is disposed on the front side of the LED substrate 861. The central decorative member 868 is formed of a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but almost transparent, and extends in a columnar shape from the long plate-like base to the back side, and can be screwed into the central portion. A pair of screw-in portions 869 are formed in which screw holes are formed.

  The screwing portion 869 is disposed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861. A threaded portion 869 that has passed through the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861 is brought into contact with the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 across the LED substrate 861 from the front side, and a screw is threaded into the threaded portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retaining member for the LED board 861.

  The loose-fitting device 880 has a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an inner peripheral surface having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. And a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter A main body cylindrical member 883 that is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and is loosely fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 so as to be rotatable relative to each other.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 883S extending in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear, and having a screw hole in the inside, at one of two locations out of four at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a is extended from the tip edge of the place where the screw-in part 883S is not formed among the four places described above.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four locations corresponding to the screwing portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is protruded in a rib shape in the outer diameter direction at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with a protruding length similar to that of the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a, and in the axial direction. A sliding rib 883b is formed extending over.

  The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED substrate 861, and the decorative member 884 that covers the LED substrate 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149) and the decorative member 884 are externally attached. A back cover 886 that is fastened and fixed near the diameter, forms a cup shape with a bottom that rises to the front side of the outer peripheral side of the fastening portion, and comes into contact with the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the back side to be fastened and fixed. Are disposed.

  The back cover 886 is entirely plated on the front and back surfaces (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010), so that the side surface is mirror-like. Therefore, for example, a light emission effect can be performed by reflecting the light of the lateral LED 866 disposed on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

  The decoration member 884 is a member that produces a light emission effect by irradiating light from the LEDs 865 and 866 disposed on the LED substrate 861. The decoration member 884 forms a hibiscus flower shape and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed from a resin material having a property, and a back side plate portion formed from a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, forming a disk shape with a peripheral wall rising to the back side on the back side. And an opening 885 is formed in the central portion so that the central decorative member 868 can be inserted.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G disposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

  On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), a fourth gear 880G slightly smaller in diameter than the third gear 810G and larger in diameter than the pivot opening 831 is disposed and fixed concentrically. It is engaged with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the support base 801 and mesh with each other.

  In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshed with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the reverse direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

  A circular pivot opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and a screw insertion hole is formed around the pivot opening 880a at positions corresponding to the two screw-in portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a.

  The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G that is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotation device 850, and is positioned relative to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by being inserted into the positioning hole 880c, and is fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw-in portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b.

  As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and being slit. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

  The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d that extends to the back side in an arc shape around the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. The detection arc plate 880d has five identically-shaped plates arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  The detection circular plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) in the assembled state (see FIG. 154), and is a photo arranged to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. It is detected by a coupler type detection sensor 801C. In other words, in the present embodiment, the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72 °) of the arcuate plate 880d for detection can be detected (minimum angle) regardless of the posture at which the fourth gear 880G starts to rotate. 72 ° detection can be performed, and a rotation of 72 ° or more can be secured by detection).

  The assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 on which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, the respective rear ends protrude slightly rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

  A rear positioning boss 854 that protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning, and also from the rear end of the shaft portion 852. Further, the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear screw-in part 853 protruding rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion part 801S in the support base material 801 and screwing it.

  At this time, a wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wiring is led backward through the inner cavity 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

  With the mounting structure described above, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward with respect to the support base member 801, and the slit member 810 is fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 as shown in FIG. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted, and the front peripheral wall portion 812 is attached to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

  At this time, since the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is swelled locally by the screwing portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b at eight locations along the circumferential direction, the rear peripheral wall portion of the slit member 810 813 is linearly contacted with the inner peripheral surface of 813 instead of planarly, and as a result, the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is It is pivoted smoothly and freely.

  FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800, the driving side arm member 910, and the driven side arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the back plate 1100. The petal operation device 800 moves up and down (advances and retreats) when a load in the vertical direction is applied from the drive side arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIGS. 150 to 152 are referred to as appropriate.

  The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member fastened and fixed to the innermost deep part of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13. A support column 1110 protruding in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear accommodating portion 1120 in which a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side above the support column 1110, and a straight line in the vertical direction at the left and right central positions A rail fixing portion 1130 disposed on the support pillar 1110, and a support long hole 1140 drilled as a long hole that is inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the opposite side of the support pillar 1110 across the rail fixing portion 1130; Is mainly provided.

  The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that pivotally supports the drive side arm member 910 and is a pair of holes arranged on the left and right sides in the vicinity of the outer periphery at the front side end portion thereof, so that screws can be screwed in. And a positioning boss 1112 extending to the front side in a pair of upper and lower sides on the same surface as the tip edge of the screwed portion 1111.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the drive side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-like main body member bent in a U shape when viewed from the back, and is formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at one end and is also a support column. A rotation shaft hole 911 that is pivotally supported by 1110, a connecting convex portion 912 that protrudes in a stepped columnar shape on the front side at a position near one end of the long body member, and a long A transmission elongated hole 913 that is formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the long body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the petal operation device 800 is supported at the other end of the long body member. And a support portion 914.

  The drive-side arm member 910 includes a rotation of an arm gear 924 that includes an inner fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted in the transmission elongated hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that projects radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction with this, the support column 1110 is rotated about the axis.

  The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a concave portion that accommodates the gear of the transmission means 920, and is configured by three circular concave portions that are continuously provided while slightly intersecting. The gear accommodating portion 1120 is disposed on the left end side and accommodates the motor gear 922. The first housing portion 1121, the second housing portion 1122 connected to the first housing portion 1121, and the drive-side arm member disposed opposite to the first housing portion 1121 across the second housing portion 1122 And a third housing portion 1123 in which an arm gear 924 to be fitted to 910 is housed.

  The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked in front and back and supported so as to be slidable up and down. And a positioning boss 1132 that fits the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Arranged on the line. The posture of the petal operating device 800 is maintained constant by the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R.

  The support long hole 1140 is a long hole that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° in a front view. An extending wall 1141 extending to the front side is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the driven-side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the back. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported by the support long hole 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a support portion 952 that supports the petal motion device 800 at the other end.

  The supported convex portion 951 is loosely fitted with a cylindrical collar, and a screw is fastened to a screwed portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state where the collar is fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. Thus, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported on the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the width of the support long hole 1140.

  FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940. is there.

  The slide plate 930 is supported by the side base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right by a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) supported long holes 931 drilled in the front-rear direction in the shape of a long hole extending left and right. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the driving side arm member 910 by a base end side long hole 932 drilled in the front-rear direction in the shape of a long hole extending in the up-down direction provided on the left end side, and provided on the right end side. Then, it is connected to the second effect member 940 through a front end side insertion hole 933 that is formed in the front-rear direction.

  The base end side long hole 932 is extended vertically downward from a lower end of the stopping portion 932a, and a stopping portion 932a formed along a trajectory in which the connecting convex portion 912 rotates around the support column 1110 at the upper end portion. The displacement part 932b is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a cylindrical portion disposed in a substantially triangular shape in front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 in front view, and has a screw-in portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed into the tip. A plate-like member fastened and fixed to the supporting pillar portion 1150 having a fastening plate portion 1001S which is disposed at a position corresponding to the supporting pillar portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted; and a slide plate 930 The supporting projections 1002S are provided in a cylindrical shape toward the back side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported long holes 931, and are formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right corner when viewed from the front. In addition, a shaft support hole 1003S for rotatably supporting the second effect member 940, a circular arc recess 1004S formed in a circular arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and the center of the shaft support hole 1003S are also provided. And the same center A convex portion 1005S which is projectingly provided on the front side along the circular arc shape, mainly comprises.

  The support convex portion 1002S is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported long hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S and the supported long hole 931. In this state, the slide plate 930 is configured so as to be slidably supported by being screwed in from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S.

  The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc concave portion 1004S and the ridge portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotation operation of the second effect member 940. This is the part. The protrusion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is in the regular position, but is formed with a convex height that can be abutted when displaced from the regular position or bent. Is done.

  The second effect member 940 has a main body portion that is formed with a lower end portion that is divided into two forks and an upper end portion that is formed in a circle centered on the pivoted column portion 941. A supported column portion 941 that is provided in a cylindrical shape and is supported by a shaft support hole 1003S with a collar interposed therebetween, and an auxiliary projection that is disposed close to the supported column portion 941 and protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side. Part 942 is mainly provided.

  The supported column 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed into the tip. An insertion portion 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). The threaded portion 941a in a state where a disc-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is disposed at the tip end with the shaft support column portion 941 inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S with the collar interposed therebetween. When the screw is screwed into the lid member 945, the lid member 945 plays a role of retaining. Thereby, the 2nd production member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

  The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the distal end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular and resin collar is fastened and fixed to the distal end, thereby preventing the auxiliary convex portion 942 from coming out of the slide plate 930. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked with each other by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal end side insertion hole 933.

  The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that displaces near the center of the width of the arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc concave portion 1004S. Thereby, even if the 2nd production member 940 seems to bend, the auxiliary | assistant convex part 942 contact | abuts to the circular arc recessed part 1004S, and it can suppress a bending deformation by producing resistance.

  This will be described with reference to FIG. The back plate 1100 has three screwed portions 1161 configured to allow screws to be screwed when a plate-like support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921 is fastened, and an outer diameter direction within a predetermined angle range from the arm gear 924. A detection sensor 1162 for detecting the flange 926 overhanging the shaft, a shaft column 1163 on which a collar for guiding the coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal motion device 800 is rotatably supported, and a support slot A cover support portion 1164 disposed in a triangular shape so as to be able to support the substrate cover 1000C at the lower right of 1140, a wiring stopper 1165 disposed close to the cover support portion 1164 and concealed from the substrate cover 1000C in front view; And a screwing portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed.

  Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes screw-in portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is disposed in the moving direction of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 disposed at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even if the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use and the portion that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 from the front is missing, the screwing portion 1006S 2 The displacement of the effect member 940 can be regulated.

  In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the back plate 1100 that are stacked and fixed to each other and fastened to each other. 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. Thereby, even when the heavy apparatus such as the petal operation apparatus 800 is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910, vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S can be easily suppressed. Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 168 to FIG. 173, description will be given of the ascending / descending operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900. FIGS. 168, 170 and 172 show the petal operation device 800, the advance / retreat operation unit 900 and the back plate. FIG. 169, FIG. 171 and FIG. 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

  168 and 169 show a state in which the drive side arm member 910 is disposed on the upper end side of the movement range, and in FIGS. 170 and 171, the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 164). ) Is disposed at the connecting position of the retaining portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the proximal end side long hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the driving side arm member 910 is disposed on the lower end side of the moving range. The state is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in the state where the drive side arm member 910 is disposed at the end of the movement range, the transmission long hole 913 of the drive side arm member 910 is the inner fitting convex part 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151), and extends in the tangential direction of the circle around the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced and a range in which the drive side arm member 910 maintains the posture (a range in which the drive motor 921 rotates idly) is generated, so that the resistance at the start of the drive motor 921 is reduced. can do.

  In FIGS. 170 and 171, the petal motion device 800 is slightly lowered as compared with the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates in advance of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

  From FIG. 170 and FIG. 171, in the range of FIG. 172 and FIG. 173, the driving side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are interlocked so that the petal operating device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized. Can be made.

  Here, when the second effect member 940 moves in a manner of projecting toward the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, the second effect member 940 operates as if following the petal motion device 800. Can be visually recognized.

  Next, the collecting and rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 will be described. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

  175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 176 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

  177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 177 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 178 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

  179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 179 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal motion device 800 is lowered and moved to the lowest position as shown in FIG. 172, the initial position (concentration position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 is expanded from the initial position shown in FIGS. 176 and 177. Through the intermediate position, an expansion operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, and further a rotation operation (second operation) is performed at the fully open position. (Operation) and return to the initial position (concentration position).

  In the initial position (concentration position), as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is the inner end of the central slit 814 in the slit member 810 (the end on the circular opening 811 side). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 174 and FIG. 175, the five petals 802 are in the most concentrated position toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, and the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole is located. It is in the concentrated state that makes up the flower.

  When the petal 802 is in the initial position (concentrated position) as described above, if the first gear 804G is rotated counterclockwise as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. When the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)) is interlocked with the second gear 830G, the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back as indicated by an arrow A10.

  At this time, as described above, since the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 through the pivot support opening 831 with a small frictional resistance, the rotation plate 830 can easily surround the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above. On the other hand, as described above, the slit member 810 is interposed via the third gear 810G. Since braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the above-described rotating plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque that is small enough to cause the rotating plate 830 to move initially.

  Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, only the rotating plate 830 is first rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

  When the rotary plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front as indicated by the arrow A11 as shown in FIG. Accordingly, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

  At this time, since the movement of the slide pin 823 is regulated by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 linearly extends from the inner end to the outer side along the central slit 814. Move as guided by.

  At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that a slight torque is applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque, and accordingly With the slit member 810 held in a stopped state, the slide pin 823 moves linearly outward along the central slit 814 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.

  Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start an expanding operation that radially expands outward from the gathering position. In this widening operation, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is inclined by an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. 177. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves outward. On the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to this inclination. Get faster.

  That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin 830 is driven by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotating plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the petal 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

  Here, for example, if it is assumed that there is no inclination and the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the above case, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 is relatively slow. Further, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. Any decrease is even more pronounced.

  At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the center end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. 177. After this, it extends outwardly while curving in an arc shape in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front direction D15, and extends outwardly with five guide rails 832 so as to spiral outward as a whole. .

  As the guide rail 832 is inclined in the clockwise direction in front view as described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. Further, as the guide rail 832 is arcuately curved in the clockwise direction from the front direction D15, both the load on the slide pin 823 and the movement speed are more remarkable.

  That is, in the case of the above-described central slit 814, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by inclining counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by being inclined in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front and further curved in an arc.

  In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is formed in a groove shape by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, when a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. Therefore, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced while reducing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 at the expense.

  On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little possibility of deviation. For this reason, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is configured.

  In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, it is possible to prevent problems such as deviation and ensure the power transmission, while increasing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 with the central slit 814. The role is divided.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end which is the outer movement limit in the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five sets of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It expands radially and is in a fully open state, and the expansion operation ends.

  In this fully opened state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 are moved so as to be radially dispersed, so that the positions are continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 in a front view. A petal 802 is disposed on the surface. Thereby, compared with the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 are integrally viewed like a hibiscus flower that is slightly larger (see FIG. 178 (b)).

  When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end which is the outer limit of movement in the central slit 814 and cannot move further beyond this, the slide pin 823 is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814 thereafter. Therefore, the rotating plate 830 cannot further rotate in the same direction as before due to a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805. Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state after the expanding operation can be maintained.

  When the expansion operation is completed, the rotational power in the same direction as that from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotating plate 830. When the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction in front view as indicated by an arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830. Thus, after the expanding operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in the front view in the fully opened state as indicated by the arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

  At this time, if the rotation power is continuously applied to the rotating plate 830 without stopping the central motor 804 after the expansion operation, the expansion operation immediately continues so that the rotation operation is not interrupted. Can be migrated.

  When the petal 802 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front in the fully opened state as indicated by the arrow A13, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) as indicated by the arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, compared with the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the single petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 becomes larger. The rotation speed can be made faster than the actual rotation speed.

  When the rotation operation is finished and the first motor 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the back as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the slit member 810 is moved. While being braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, only the rotating plate 830 is first rotationally driven in the clockwise direction as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b). Are assembled in the opposite direction.

  That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end which is the outer movement limit in the central slit 814 to the inner end which is the inner movement limit, and at the same time, the five sets of petals 802 are moved from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 at the center. As a result, they are gathered and returned to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to return to the gathering state, and the gathering operation is completed.

  After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800. However, the central motor 804 is continuously operated without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When the first motor 804G is rotated again in the clockwise direction as viewed from the back as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b) with the central motor 804, the petal 802 becomes as shown by an arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b). Rotate in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front in a concentrated state.

  When the petal 802 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view in the concentrated state as indicated by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in the front view) as indicated by the arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, compared with the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the single petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 becomes larger. The rotation speed can be made faster than the actual rotation speed.

  From this concentrating operation to the rotating operation, by controlling the central motor 804 as described above, the operation may be stopped once and then transferred, or may be transferred immediately so as to be continuous. It can also be.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal motion device 800 is rotating.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the passage formation unit 140 and the plate member 14d with walls closed on all sides. However, the passage formation in the ninth embodiment is described. The unit 9140 is configured in such a manner that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. A difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

  FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball launch unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 is different from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment in that the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145, and the front The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door-side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

  That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end portion of the passage formation unit 9140 toward the back side in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . The sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 having a thin plate shape in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent to the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

  The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the end portion of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recessed direction, and the depth of the recessed portion is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

  The upper surface of the thin blade portion 9153 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper stopper convex portion (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) to the back side, and the upward direction generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. Configured to withstand loads.

  This thin blade portion 9153 allows the yarn Y8 to pass through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the yarn Y8 to illegally manipulate the ball inside the game area and to obtain illegal profits. This is arranged for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, possible frauds will be described.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, the ball firing unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with the cutting metal member 725 for cutting the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the sphere by utilizing the launching moment of the ball. When the firing momentum is weak, the yarn Y8 is cut. A ball could be fired without it.

  On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, and is discharged to the lower plate 50 through the foul ball passage portion 145. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball directly enters the game area.

  On the other hand, for example, when considering the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the yarn Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the yarn Y8 is weakly launched, and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146 to the other end of the yarn Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the yarn Y8 is disposed on the back side (the firing solenoid 701 side) of the cutting metal member 725. Therefore, even if the ball P9 is driven out vigorously, Y8 is not cut into the cutting metal member 725.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is struck out vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The ball P8 fired in advance passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

  Therefore, a person who performs an illegal act can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2) or the like can be repeated, and illegal profits can be obtained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when an illegal act is performed using the yarn Y8 with the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends, the thin blades are inserted into the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the yarn Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

  That is, when a person who performs an illegal act pulls the yarn Y8, the yarn Y8 is rubbed against the thin blade portion 9153, so that the yarn Y8 is damaged, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in this embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin blade portion 9153 is formed closer to the front side, that is, on the side where the yarn Y8 is brought closer when the yarn Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the yarn Y8 is pulled, the yarn Y8 can be disposed inside the notch 9145b, and the yarn Y8 can be rubbed against the thin blade portion 9153.

  Further, as described above, the thin blade portion 9153 abuts on the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145, thereby increasing the resistance to an upward load. Thereby, when the yarn Y8 is pulled, the thin blade portion 9153 is prevented from warping or bending when the thin blade portion 9153 is given a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the yarn Y8 toward the thin blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the yarn Y8.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin blade portion 9153. Thereby, since it can prevent that the thin blade part 9153 collides with the ball | bowl P8 and it breaks, it can improve the durability of the thin blade part 9153.

  Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is disposed below the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the payout ball. That is, since the person who performs the cheating is afraid of detecting the cheating, after gripping the ball P8, the ball P8 is placed near the body (for example, a pocket of a pants) in order to prevent the store clerk from being suspicious. ), And it is easy to perform an illegal act of pulling or loosening the thread 8. In this case, the state in which the yarn Y8 extends to the player side through the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (in contact with the upper surface) is maintained. At this time, the yarn Y8 is stretched through a position about the diameter of the sphere above the bottom surface of the sphere guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

  When the award ball is paid out in this state, the ball discharged from the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 to the lower tray 50 collides with the lower tray 50 and jumps around the ball guide opening. 53, the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down to the right while stepping on the yarn Y8 arranged on the front side of 53 and hitting the yarn Y8. Flows down through. That is, by disposing the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the rising limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower dish It is possible to increase the possibility that the ball discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 will come into contact with the yarn Y8 and damage the yarn Y8, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

  Third, on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142, a right inclined surface 9142a that is inclined downward toward the right is formed. The right inclined surface 9142a can easily give a rightward speed to the sphere discharged from the sphere guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142.

  Thereby, the ball can be directed toward the yarn Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 decreases. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly give a velocity component in the right direction (facing the foul ball passage portion 9145) to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower plate 50. It is possible to increase the proportion of balls that step on the yarn Y8 or hit the yarn Y8.

  In addition, fourthly, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, The lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining region (region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) in the right portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the climbing restriction step portion is located at the boundary. 9053a is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restriction step portion 9053a includes a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142, and a foul disposed on the right side thereof. It connects with the left end part (left end side) of the lower bottom part near the exit of the bulb | ball channel | path part 9145, and it is comprised as a plane part extended in a perpendicular direction.

  A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed above the ride restriction step portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 and the foul ball passage portion are formed by the space V9. 9145 communicates. Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 before flowing through the sphere guide opening 53 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the sphere can be easily brought close to the yarn Y8.

  In addition, the vertical width of the climbing restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere. Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the ball that rolls on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and contacts the climbing restriction step portion 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. In other words, the climbing restriction step 9053a allows the passage of the sphere in the space V9 in the left-right direction in one direction (the direction from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (the direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the passage formation unit 140 and the plate member 14d with walls closed on all sides. However, the passage formation in the tenth embodiment is described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

  FIG. 184 to FIG. 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. In FIG. 184, a state where the passage formation unit 10140 is viewed from the upper right is illustrated, and in FIG. 185, a state where the passage formation unit 10140 is viewed from the upper left is illustrated, and in FIG. 186, the passage formation unit 10140 is illustrated at the left. A state viewed from obliquely below is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 is different from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

  That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 includes a notch 10145c that is recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. And the sheet-metal member 10150 is provided with the thin plate-shaped thin-plate blade parts 10153 and 10154 extended to the front side in the aspect which covers the downward direction of the notch 10145c.

  The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the end portion of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recess direction, and the recess depth is approximately the same as twice (diameter) the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180). The In addition, the notch 10145c includes a through hole formed in the front and rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d through which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a. The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

  In this embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has an outer shape in a front view shape of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. The auxiliary convex part 14d2 which protrudes toward the back side from the side surface of the back side is provided. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is not illustrated in FIG. 186.

  The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)), and thereby the length in the front-rear direction in which the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is spherical. The radius Ra is about P8. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sphere flowing down the foul sphere passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are cracked or chipped by colliding with the sphere P8. This can be prevented, and the durability of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

  The convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex part 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the back side as it goes toward the foul ball receiving part 146 (to the right). Accordingly, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-rear width) of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 becomes wider as it approaches the passage portion 145a. As a result, the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a can be easily put into the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 which is a gap in which the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

  The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the rear side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is the first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 is a portion that constitutes a forked blade portion, and extends to the left in such a manner that it slightly tilts upward from the right end of the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. As a result, an acute-angle concave portion 10155 having a deep concave portion is formed between the first thin-plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin-plate blade portion 10154.

  The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members disposed for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8, similarly to the thin blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

  The acute angle recess 10155 is disposed on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the back side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the yarn Y8 enters the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, the yarn Y8 can enter the acute-angle concave portion 10155, and the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged.

  The second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side compared to the first thin plate blade portion 10153, so that the yarn Y8 pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person who performs an illegal act. Can easily enter the deep portion of the acute-angle recess 10155.

  A plate-like portion provided to the right of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is configured to abut against the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

  The extending end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged facing the left and right opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 is bent in the left and right reverse direction. The That is, at these two points, the yarn Y8 is pulled in the opposite directions.

  For example, a person who commits cheating tries to avoid the detection of cheating by releasing the ball P8 that has come out, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage 10145 and is discharged through the game area. However, according to the present embodiment, a load in the left-right reverse direction is applied to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation where the backflowing sphere P8 is caught by the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stopped.

  As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 remain inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the time for the thread Y8 to be exposed to the game area is lengthened, so that the detection of the fraud can be accelerated.

  Note that an adhesive member (such as glue or tri-mochi) may be disposed in the deep portion of the acute angle recess 10155 so as to adhere to the yarn Y8 that has entered the acute angle recess 10155. In this case, even when the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that came to the person who performs the fraud is cut, the thread is adhered to the adhesive member disposed in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is played in the game area. Since the thread Y8 is not discharged and is maintained on the spot, the unauthorized detection using the thread Y8 can be accelerated.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) whose launch intensity is weak and has not reached the game area is discharged to the lower dish 50. However, the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment uses a foul ball. A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

  As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of a resin material so as to have an arc shape similar to that of the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. The guide member formed to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship in which the sphere has a gap V11 that allows the sphere to flow between the tip member 2062a that is formed and disposed in proximity to the ball launch unit 112a. 2062b.

  A foul ball passage 2062c communicated with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner inside the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is formed downstream of the gap V11. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through, and a spare of the return ball preventing member 68 is disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c.

  In the present embodiment, the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower dish passage portion 162 is disposed in the above-described embodiment. Formation is omitted. That is, a ball paid out from a payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 is supplied to the upper plate 17 exclusively via the main body side upper plate passage portion 161. When the ball of the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown) that is arranged to project inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the dispensing device The payout of the ball from 133 is configured to stop.

  That is, in the present embodiment, both the balls that have passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the balls that are paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, as described above, when a sphere is adhered to both ends of the thread Y8 and one of the balls passes through the foul ball path 2062c, the thread Y8 is inserted into the game area along the foul ball path 2062c. In addition, the action of damaging the yarn Y8 by hitting the paying ball against the yarn Y8 can be caused regardless of the accumulation state of the balls of the upper plate 17. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily cut early.

  FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball preventing member 68 disposed at the upper part of the foul ball path 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. In the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 is referred to as appropriate.

  The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 with a long metal screw B11 in a posture in which the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilted gate member 68a is disposed on the near side.

  Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back side of the return ball preventing member 68. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the back side to the front side of the guide member 2062b and has a screw groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed into the inner wall. A blocking plate 2062b4 for closing the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is brought into contact with the front end of the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68b1 is in contact with the front surface of the closing plate 2062b4 in advance. The long screw B11 is inserted into the through hole drilled as the mounting hole and the through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 so as to match the position of the through hole. In this state, the long screw B11 is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2. As a result, the return ball preventing member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

  The closing plate 2062b4 is formed such that the upper surface and the left surface that are in contact with the guide member 2062b have the same shape as the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

  The gradient increasing portion 2062d is a gradient that descends toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface constituting the outer frame of the game area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the straight line L11 extending to the tip member 2062a side along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is below the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) constituting the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, And about 1/3 lower than the diameter of the sphere) and intersects the tip member 2062a.

  With this configuration, when a ball is launched toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower tip of the gradient increasing portion 2062d collides with the ball. You can avoid that. On the other hand, when the ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball that rolls on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball moves the gap V11 to the left and right. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball launching unit 112a side.

  A front side surface 2062d1 of the gradient increasing portion 2062d can form a notch 2062b1 between the closing plate 2062b4 and a width (approximately 2 [mm] in this embodiment) that is less than the diameter of the sphere and into which the thread can enter. It is recessed to the back side to a certain position. The place where the cut 2062b1 is formed is a place where the path of the ball to be driven into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

  The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side when viewed from the front is provided with a semicircular cutout 2062b3 on the front side of the side surface 2062d1 and on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

  Thus, since the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in the front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the cuts 2062b1 are formed, similarly to the method described in the ninth or tenth embodiment, It is possible to cause the yarn Y8 to rub against the long screw B11 in the case of an illegal act performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends of the foul ball passage 2062c.

  That is, from the arrangement of the notches 2062b1, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep part of the notches 2062b1 when receiving a load pulled at both ends (see FIG. 190 (a)). In this state, the yarn Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, so that rubbing occurs with the long screw B11 and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

  In the present embodiment, the cut 2062b1 is disposed on the front side of the position through which the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cut 2062b1 from being disposed at a position where the ball to be fired contacts the outer rail 2062 (the vertical lower part of the center of the ball), so that the cut 2062b1 collides with the ball to be fired. It is possible to prevent the direction of the sphere from being affected.

  In addition, a person who performs an illegal act through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the yarn Y8 that protrudes to the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). 18), the position of the ball P9 in the game area is adjusted, so that the yarn Y8 approaches the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 close to the player side. Therefore, by arranging the cuts 2062c closer to the front side, the yarn Y8 can easily enter the cuts 2062c than when the cuts 2062c are arranged closer to the rear side.

  In the hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b, a button type switch SW11 having a detection portion protruding downward is disposed. The button type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed in with a load extremely weaker than a load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, the possibility that the button type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the posture of the gate member 68a, and is disposed so as to be able to be switched on and off when the posture of the gate member 68a changes.

  190 (a) and 190 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190 (a), the weight 68a2 side of the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68 is tilted toward the foul ball path 2062c with the weight of the weight 68a2, and in FIG. 190 (b), The state in which the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used for fraud is illustrated for reference and the button type switch SW11 is turned on, and in FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch is illustrated. It is shown that SW11 is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball preventing member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing sphere, and gives a resistance enough to hold the sphere passing through the foul sphere passage 2062c. Not. This is because the sphere flows away by its own weight, and even if the width of the foul sphere passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening / closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) is restored until the next time when the ball is guided to the foul ball passage 2062c (at the shortest, 0.6 seconds later). Because it can.

  On the other hand, the return ball preventing member 68 is a great resistance against an object that does not flow away like a sphere, for example, an object that travels while filling a passage like an endoscope. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraud.

  For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball through the foul ball passage 2062c to reach the inside of the game area, and tries to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, Bending a nail (not shown) to be planted on the game board 13, holding a ball and placing it in a winning opening, using the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or emitting a laser from the leading end It is possible to cheat (cut the nail).

  FIG. 191 is a partially enlarged front view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 191, the outline of an apparatus such as an endoscope that illegally enters is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  In the present embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the sphere, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is moved forward. Become. Here, when the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is rejected by the distal end portion of the endoscope) is shifted to the state shown in FIG. 190A, the state is connected to the distal end portion of the endoscope. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still disposed below the weight portion 68a2, and is maintained in a state where the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up. Therefore, it is difficult to eliminate the opening / closing portion 68a1, and the distal end portion of the endoscope can be prevented from proceeding further.

  Here, when the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the interior, it is impossible to prevent fraud. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, when the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time, control is performed so as to sound an alarm. , Can detect fraud early.

  Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in an OFF state, control may be performed so that the ball payout from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. (See FIG. 190 (a)), the period during which the dispensing of the ball from the dispensing device 133 stops can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state where the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

  Note that the member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is not necessarily the return ball preventing member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in the present embodiment, when the return ball prevention member 68 on the side disposed on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, the early stage Can be exchanged. Thereby, compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, the effect of being able to play a role of preventing fraud before the replacement and the trouble of searching for the storage location can be saved. The effect that can be produced. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire configuration of the return ball preventing member 68. For example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported on a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be provided).

  Whether the return ball prevention member 68 breaks or bends and is replaced, whether or not the above-described fraud prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of breakage of the return ball prevention member 68. If the person who commits fraud does not know whether or not the exchange has been carried out, and even if it has been exchanged, the degree of damage may not be maintained, so that the deterrence of fraud can still be maintained. it can.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only at the gathering position or the fully open position has been described. However, the petal operating device 2800 according to the twelfth embodiment can perform the rotating operation even at the expanding position. It is comprised by the aspect. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose-fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the back cover 2886 of the loose-fitting device 2880 includes a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment, And a restricting portion 2888 that protrudes from the extended front end of the flange portion 2887 to the back side. The loose-fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment is different from the loose-fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment only in the back cover 2886, and the other parts are the same as the loose-fitting device 880. .

  The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 can protrude from the front side portion 802b to a position where it can not come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

  In the present embodiment, a case where a single flange portion 2887 and a single restricting portion 2888 are arranged will be described. However, they may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886. Next, operations of the flange portion 2887 and the restriction portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

  FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. FIG. . In addition, in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194, the operation example of the petal motion apparatus 2800 is illustrated in time series, and in FIG. 193 (a), FIG. 194 (a), FIG. 193 (b), and FIG. This state is shown in the figure.

  Further, in FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in section for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed in section in the same section. Moreover, in FIG. 193, the petal 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 is outlined (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the pair of screwed portions 2803S arranged inside the both-side slits 815 are formed on the surfaces facing each other on the other side screwed portions with the screw insertion portion 803H as the center. An inclined surface 2803T that is inclined in a manner away from 2803S is provided.

  The inclined surface 2803T is formed with an inclination of about 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The operation of the restriction unit 2888 on the petal 802 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is disposed outward in the radial direction along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( When the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the restricting portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 abut, and the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888.

  When the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888 and the petal 802 is further slid (the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 receives the load. In order to change the posture.

  At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is in a normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a) (a posture in which the longitudinal direction is oriented in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the posture can be changed to an inclined posture inclined with respect to the central slit 814 and the side slits 815. The petal 802 undergoes a posture change as much as possible.

  Thus, while the slide member 2820 and the petal 802 change their postures, the load from the restricting portion 2888 is received, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

  In other words, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), the slide member 2820 only has the narrow slide rib 803a in contact with the both-side slits 815, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed, and the slide member 2820 has slits 814 and 815. It is possible to move smoothly in the longitudinal direction.

  In contrast, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 is in contact with the slits 815 on both sides of the slide rib 803a on the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T on the inner inner wall. (Pushing) increases the frictional resistance. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in the frictional resistance becomes significant. In addition, since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-side slit 815 from both directions in the short direction of the both-side slit 815, an increase in frictional resistance occurs regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. .

  Accordingly, in the tilted posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 reaches the end of the slits 814 and 815 by increasing the resistance to movement of the slide member 2820 in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815. Without waiting, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the slide member 2820 in a normal posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a size between the movement resistance of the sliding member 2820 in the inclined posture).

  In this case, the slit member 810 starts to rotate together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) by shaking off the braking by the oil damper 805. That is, rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is started from the state shown in FIG. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 is separated from the restricting portion 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 from the restricting portion 2888 can be released.

  FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal motion device 2800. FIG. 195 shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated at a position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise in front view). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so the position during the expansion is maintained. In this state, the petal 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

  196 (a), 196 (b), and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. FIG. 196 (a), 196 (b), and 197 illustrate the movement of the petal 802 from the expanding position to the concentration position in time series.

  In FIG. 196 (a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 195, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the restricting portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), the restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the postures of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 become normal postures. Returned.

  Further, when the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 from the slide pin 823. The rotational movement of 802 is stopped, and the petal 802 slides toward the gathering position.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the petal 802 can be automatically rotated at the position where the petal 802 is being expanded and then returned to the concentration position.

  Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is expanded at a position where it abuts on the restriction portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view). Therefore, the contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided, so that the petal 802 can be moved to the fully open position and can be rotated at the fully open position.

  Further, the arrangement of the restricting portion 2888 is such that the position of the petal 802 is slightly changed even if it is in contact with the petal 802 that rotates in the fully open position or in a position that does not contact the petal 802 in the concentrated position or the fully open position. By setting the position where the restricting portion 2888 can pass through and can receive the load, the restricting portion 2888 can be prevented from obstructing the rotation of the petal 802 in the fully open position.

  Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it is a mark as to whether it passes through a position close to the star-shaped pattern or a distant position. The difference in distance can cause a difference in whether the petal 802 expands to the maximum and performs a rotation operation, or performs a rotation operation with the expansion to the middle.

  Then, for example, by performing an effect with different jackpot expectations depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of perspective between the star-shaped pattern and the petal 802. The pattern of the mold can function as a production part. Thereby, the restriction part 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

  The restricting portion 2888 may be disposed at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the viewpoint of design, the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

  It may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the magnitude of the big hit expectation) that the petal 802 is in contact with the restriction portion 2888 and slightly changes its posture in the fully open position. In this case, depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or rotating while causing a slight change in posture in contact with the restricting portion 2888, the meaning content transmitted to the player can be changed. .

  In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 contacts the restricting portion 2888 is the tip position. However, if the position where the petal 802 comes closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the position of the petal 802 is changed. The degree of expansion varies. Therefore, even when the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the posture of the petal 802 is changed can be changed in a plurality of types.

  Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates along with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanding position has been described. However, the petal operation device according to another example of the twelfth embodiment. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be switchable between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates along with the rotary plate 830 and a case where the rotary plate 830 rotates independently depending on the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 show an example of the operation of the petal operating device 3800 in the time series when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a). Moreover, in FIG. 198 (a), FIG. 198 (b), FIG. 199 (a) and FIG. 199 (b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  When the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), a load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. Since the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate together with the resistance exceeding the resistance, the description is omitted here.

  In FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, for convenience, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed in cross section in the same cross section.

  Here, when the rotating plate 830 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, since the slide pin 823 is inserted into the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). In the present embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815b are formed on the side that receives the sliding member 2820 that is displaced in this manner.

  That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the width of the central slit 814 is widened to the wall portion on the clockwise side when viewed from the front among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814. Of the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a and the both side slits 815 arranged on the front side clockwise direction of the central slit 814, both side slits 815 are provided on the wall portion on the front side clockwise direction. Of the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the clockwise-side recessed portion 3815a that is recessed in a manner that widens the width in the short-side direction, and the both-side slits 815 that are disposed on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. Among them, the wall portion on the clockwise side when viewed from the front mainly includes a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in such a manner as to widen the width of the slit 815 in the short direction.

  The clockwise concave portion 3815a is disposed to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).

  In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central recessed portion 3814a continues from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side (lower side of FIG. 198 (a)) of the slit member 3810. Formed.

  The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

  In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is located on the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803 (lower side in FIG. 198 (a)). Formed continuously.

  The counterclockwise concave portion 3815b has a concave depth deeper than that of the clockwise concave portion 3815a and a radial length longer than that of the central concave portion 3814a.

  The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal motion device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise in front view will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), when the rotating plate 830 starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are moved downward in FIG. 198 (a) (the right end slide rib 803a is clockwise). It moves in the direction of entering the rotation side recessed portion 3815a (see FIG. 198 (b)).

  Accordingly, the contact between the wall portion of the both-side slit 815 on the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

  When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are brought into contact with the clockwise concave portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member). Rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front, with the first contact point with 3810 as a fulcrum (see FIGS. 199 (a) and 199 (b)).

  Since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b have a deeper depth than the clockwise concave portion 3815a, the guide pin 822 during the rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 described above is used. Contact with the central recessed portion 3814a and contact between the screw-in portion 2803S and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b are avoided.

  Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a concave depth so that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not contact the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A rotation-side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

  Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is less than the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . Thereby, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate together.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (b), in the process of reaching the posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwed portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal, When the slide rib 803a on the center side in the radial direction accommodated in the both-side slits 815 on the clockwise side contacts the wall portion of the both-side slit 815, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum. Rotates counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise concave portion 3815a moves more counterclockwise than the concave base end of the clockwise concave portion 3815a.

  That is, since the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (see FIG. 194 (a)), the rotary plate 830 is continuously rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, so that the slide member 2820 and The flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the radial center.

  Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slit member 3810 rotates along with the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830. The rotation plate 830 can be independently rotated to switch the case where the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

  Thereby, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the flat plate member 2803 can be made to perform operations that could not be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

  In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 194 (b) )), And rotating the petal 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 (rotating with the slit member 3810) until the changed posture is restored. Rotation operation) (see FIGS. 195, 196 (a) and 196 (b)).

  On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 198 ( a)), the posture of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in front view (see FIG. 199 (b)). That is, the rotating operation (rotating operation that rotates along with the slit member 3810) of the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is returned. Can be omitted.

  Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 198 (a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) clockwise in front view, the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture) are obtained. From the position of the petal 802 to be fastened and fixed, the movement of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 toward the gathering position can be started. As a result, after the plate member 2803 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 rotate (see FIG. 198 (a)) during the expansion (see FIG. 195), the concentrated position Since the arrangement of the petals 802 when performing the concentration operation toward (see FIG. 197) can be diversified, the operation of the petal operation device 3800 can be diversified.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate without an opening has been described. However, the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment is configured such that the lower frame member 8320 is curved. A plurality of through-holes 8326a to 8326c are formed to penetrate through the wall 8326. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202 (a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202 (b) illustrates the tilting device 310 as the first state. A state in the middle of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment is different from the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments in that the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is not described. In addition, the other configurations are almost explained in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments. Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the rest of the configuration will be described with some supplementary explanation.

  The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion that is disposed to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is drilled in a substantially egg shape at the left and right center positions. In the left and right sides of the first through-hole 8326a and the vibration device 5400, the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined with a horizontally-long rectangular cross-sectional shape as viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310. A pair of second through-holes 8326b that are drilled along the upper surface and the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at the surface position, and a pair of third holes that are drilled in a cross-sectional shape of a vertically long rectangle in front view at the left and right corners. And a through hole 8326c.

  Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c has a purpose of facilitating passage of the liquid such as the above-described drinking water and a purpose of facilitating removal of coin-like foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. Is a through-hole. The coin-shaped foreign object is, for example, for a player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is an obstacle to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or is meaningless by an interested player, and the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. It may be inserted into gaps V13 and V14 between the members 330.

  Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, a slight gap V13, V14 is formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing this, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but the possibility that foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 increases.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate about the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) disposed at the rear side end, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Therefore, as the length of the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction is longer, the position of the tilting device 310 is more easily displaced (deformed) to the left and right near the front end. In addition, this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misregistration using rattling caused by adding design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, or misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (Deformation) is included.

  Therefore, it is a case where it is designed so that the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 does not become a gap V13 enough to insert a coin-like foreign object (for example, 1 yen coin) during normal use. In addition, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the left and right sides (for example, the left side), the gap V13 that can be formed on the other side (for example, the right side) is the upper frame member 330 on the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. A gap V13 having a size obtained by adding up the gap V13 formed between the two and the like can be large enough to insert a coin-like foreign matter.

  That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 during normal use and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-like foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right, a coin-like foreign object can be inserted.

  In addition, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also generated in the tilting device 310 by using the backlash near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310. If the position is shifted (deformed) by applying a load toward the back side, the gap V14 can be easily enlarged, so that a coin-like foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14.

  In the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 tilts in a state where a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the left-right gap V13 or the front-rear gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, the coin There is a possibility that a foreign object enters the lower frame member 8320.

  In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202 (a) and 202 (b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured to be constricted in the left and right sides toward the center in the vertical direction, it is easy to fit the fingers of the player. While a good operational feeling can be created, a portion in which the coin-like foreign matter fitted into the gap V13 projects outward from the constriction of the case body 311 in the second state (see FIG. 202 (a)). A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320, and it becomes easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

  If the tilting device 310 is operated in a state where coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14, the operation resistance becomes excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem occurs in driving the tilting device 310. In addition, rubbing between the coin-shaped foreign matter and the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate the translucency of the protective lens member 311i, which may hinder the light emission effect.

  In the first place, if a coin-like foreign object is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the operation device 8300 cannot perform the intended effect, and the coin-like foreign object is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. When it is detected, it is desirable to remove it as soon as possible. However, in a state where the through hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, it is necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 in order to remove the coin-like foreign matter.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove coin-like foreign matters through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

  203 (a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203 (b) is a side view of the operation device 8300 in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. FIG. 203D is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203D is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 along the line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203A, and FIG. 203E is a view in FIG. 203A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device 8300 in a CCIIIe-CCIIIe line.

  The first through-hole 8326a has a horizontal center that is the same as the horizontal center of the vibration device 5400, and is drilled with a lateral width that is greater than the horizontal width of the vibration device 5400 (refer to the first housing portion 5431 of FIG. 58). The Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the center of the left and right of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibration device 5400. The liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

  The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is disposed below the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. For this reason, when a coin-like foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (left and right as viewed in the vertical direction in the second state) An inclination D81 that is downwardly inclined toward the left and right center in the first state of the tilting device 310 by being curved toward the front, and an inclination D82 that is downwardly inclined toward the front side due to the tilting device 310 being tilted, As shown in FIG. 201, coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through-hole 8326a.

  Accordingly, the size required for the size of the first through hole 8326a can be suppressed to the minimum necessary while easily removing the coin-like foreign matter, so that the design freedom of the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily ensured as compared to the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be widened to the left and right.

  In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is assumed to be a coin-like foreign material in the upper part of the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. The size is larger than the size of the target object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a left-right width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

  Note that the first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 connected to the left and right and upper and lower sides of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (a member subjected to mirror finishing). The light passing through the spherical shell 313 is reflected.

  With this arrangement, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state using the first through-hole 8326a, there is a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visible to the player. In particular, by removing the resin member that weakens the amount of light by the first through-hole 8326a, the central portion in the left-right direction can be viewed brightly.

  When the coin-shaped foreign matter is disposed at a position that partially closes the first through-hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player is coin-shaped. It becomes weaker than the case where there is no foreign matter (coin-like foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to easily recognize that the coin-like foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 using the light amount or the shadow of the coin-like foreign matter as a clue, so the coin-like foreign matter is not noticed. The possibility of continuing to remain in the member 8320 can be reduced. This effect is not limited to the case of being visually recognized through the first through hole 8326a, but is the same as that of being visually recognized through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

  The second through-hole 8326b is configured as a through-hole that can discharge a coin-like foreign material that falls on the bottom plate portion 321 in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. Therefore, in this embodiment, the right and left width of the second through-hole 8326 is about 30 [mm] and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size that can discharge the largest possible coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 500-yen coin). The width in the normal direction is about 2 [mm].

  Since the second through-hole 8326b is disposed near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, it is easy even after a coin-like foreign object has fallen downward along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321. Coin-like foreign matter can be removed.

  Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, for example, a liquid such as drinking water that flows along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibration device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be used to discharge outwardly before.

  The third through-hole 8326c has a central axis arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203 (a)), and the coin-like foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310, It is formed as a through hole that can be removed in an upright state (posture).

  That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be formed so as to be able to discharge coin-like foreign matter as viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. In the present embodiment, The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is about 30 [mm] when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

  When removing the coin-like foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c only by removing the covering cover 370 and exposing the operation device 8300 in front view (see FIG. 92). The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw through which a fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body bending portion 371 is inserted in the front-rear direction, and a hanging portion 372 is recessed with a screw inserted in the up-down direction. Since it is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the installation portion 15a is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 opened (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the work time can be kept short.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to easily remove the coin-like foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 without disassembling the operation device 8300.

  The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that is opened to the right outward at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203B). Including the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 to transmit and receive signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

  Therefore, even if a coin-like foreign matter cannot be taken out, it is easy to operate by removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353 after removing the screws that fasten the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14. Therefore, if the replacement of the normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which a coin-like foreign object is sandwiched can be quickly replaced with the normal operation device 8300.

  Thereby, even if the operation | movement of the pachinko machine 10 stops because normal operation | movement is not performed and the operation | movement of the pachinko machine 10 stops because a coin-like foreign material enters into the operation device 8300, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted quickly.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the load from the front frame 14 is not received when the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described. However, the board surface support device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment has the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arrange | positioned in the aspect which receives the load from the front frame 14 via the front-back displacement member 2652 arrange | positioned so that contact | abutting is possible. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment along the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 204A shows a state in which the front frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and in FIG. 204B, the front frame 14 has the inner frame 12. Is shown closed. In FIG. 204A, the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified, and in FIG. 204B, the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is disposed so that the front side of a plate portion (plate portion disposed on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 can be displaced vertically. A longitudinal displacement member 2652 that is disposed so as to be able to contact the lower end of the vertical displacement member 2651 and is supported so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, a locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the longitudinal displacement member 2652, and a longitudinal displacement A portion that sandwiches the member 2652 from the upper and lower sides so as to be displaceable at two positions in the front and rear, is in contact with a support portion 2654 that is fixed to the plate portion 611a, and the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653. And an urging member 2655 such as a coil spring for applying an urging force toward the rim.

  The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state in which it is separated. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), it retracts from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), it contacts the torsion spring NBb. The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a position where the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 is slightly spaced from the torsion spring NBb at the lower position. Is set.

  The front / rear displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)) and pushed by the front frame 14 and pushed backward. And a rear position (see FIG. 204B).

  Here, an inclined surface 2652a which is inclined downward toward the distal end side is formed at the rear distal end portion of the longitudinal displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a extends from a vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is disposed at the front position to a vertical downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is disposed at the rear position. It is an inclined surface connected continuously.

  The inclined surface 2652a has an inclination angle and a forming range so that the vertical displacement member 2651 is at a lower position at a front position of the front / rear displacement member 2652 and the vertical displacement member 2651 is at an upper position at a rear position of the front / rear displacement member 2652. Is set.

  With the configuration described above, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is disposed at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is increased by the thickness in the front-rear direction. be able to.

  As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 from the back side by the claw member 640 after rotation can be increased, and the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate part 621d before the claw member 620 before rotation can be easily maintained. The distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

  Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board support device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses and fixes the game board 13 to the drooping back plate part 621d.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, and therefore, a spring having a lower elastic coefficient is employed for the torsion spring NBb than the spring employed in the eighth embodiment. can do.

  Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, and is necessary when the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operator's degree of freedom of selection and workability.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment is described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, against the injustice in which the reverse cup portion 178 is melted with a heated piano wire and enters the inside as it is, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are wound above the reverse cup portion 178, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated. In the fifteenth embodiment, the fraud detection device 2280 is detected when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted with a heated piano wire. While detecting the heat | fever, it is comprised so that the burnout of harness HN1-HN3 may be prevented.

  205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. FIG. 205B illustrates a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape, and FIG. 205C illustrates a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 has returned to a tensile shape (stored shape) by application of heat. Is done. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is viewed in cross-section at the front-rear intermediate position of the main body box portion 2281.

  Fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape having an opening on the back side and the bottom side, and is overlapped on top of reverse cup portion 2178, and the back side so as to cover the back side opening of body box portion 2281. A back cover member 2282 attached to the main body box, and a space is formed between the main body box portion 2281 and the back cover member 2282.

  The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner portion, extends to contact the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of the reverse cup portion 2178, and narrows the opening upward from the lower corner portion. A constricted portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, a projecting portion 2285 projecting upward from the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the constricted portion 2284, and a left side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281 are recessed from the back side. A first conductive portion 2286 that has one end protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and a right side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. It is housed in a recess that is recessed from the back side, one end projects outside the main body box portion 2281, the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and contacts the upper surface of the first conduction portion 2286. Touchable The second conductive portion 2287 formed in the above-described manner, the torsion spring SP15 that generates a biasing force that presses the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286, and the upper surface of the constricted portion 2284 are supported by the protruding portion 2285. And a shape memory spring 2288 disposed below the second conducting portion 2287.

  The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. The first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are connected to a portion projecting outside the main body box portion 2281 by one end of separate wirings by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is the main controller. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conduction part 2286 and the second conduction part 2287 is released from the state where the first conduction part 2286 and the second conduction part 2287 are brought into contact with each other (see FIG. 205B) (FIG. 205 ( c), the continuity is cut off, and the error signal is output with the fact that the continuity is cut off as an input.

  When an error signal is output from the main control device, a warning is output at a loud volume from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Thus, it is controlled so that it is impossible to play a game.

  Details of fraud detector 2280 will be described. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left and upper sides of the reverse cup portion 2178. Here, in the reverse cup portion 2178 in this embodiment, compared with the eighth embodiment, the place where the wall portion 2178a is formed is shifted to the left, and the extending portion 2283 is provided between the long cover member 173 and the reverse cup portion 2178. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

  The extension portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire remains on the long cover 173 as it is. It is possible to prevent penetration.

  According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and further advances is guided to the narrowed portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 disposed in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. Guided.

  The shape memory spring 2288 is formed of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, and maintains the shape after deformation in a low temperature state, and has a characteristic of returning to a previously memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In the present embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to a temperature (about 80 °) approximately equal to the melting point of the reverse cup portion 2178, and a tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance. .

  Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conduction portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conduction portion 2286 and the second conduction portion. The connection with 2287 is released and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of fraud can be achieved.

  An extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted through a guide long hole 2282a formed in the longitudinal direction of the back cover member 2282 in the front-rear direction, and on the front side. Overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the low temperature state after the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tension state, the operator pushes the extending portion 2288a downward to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce the shape memory (see FIG. 205B). ) Again. That is, even after a fraud is detected, it can be used repeatedly for early detection of the fraud.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, even when the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, by forming the light guide member 540 in a curved manner, a difference is caused in the traveling direction of the light emitted to both surfaces. However, the right panel unit 2500 according to the sixteenth embodiment includes concave portions having different shapes for each region. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upward concave shape that is recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206C schematically shows a downward concave portion 2543c provided in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206A. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 represented schematically, and FIG. 206 (d) is a guide schematically showing a downward concave portion 2543d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206E is a partially enlarged perspective view of the optical member 2540, and FIG. 206E is an upward concave portion 254 that is recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206A. The e is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 represented schematically. In FIG. 206A, the support plate 510 is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically in line with the shape of the light guide member 2540.

  The concave portions are formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment. In this embodiment, the shape of the concave portion 2543 is formed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

  That is, with reference to the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530, the region CCVIb disposed above and on the inner lens member 530 side, the region CCVIc disposed above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and the lower and inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between the region CCVId disposed on the side and the region CCVIe disposed below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (b), an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in the region CCVIb. The upward concave portion 2543b is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing the sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b is in a posture in which a plane is arranged on the lower side and the front side (opposite side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

  Here, since the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction at the position. Therefore, when the upward concave portion 2543b refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550, the emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVIb and is emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a direction that is inclined upward as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (c), a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the region CCVIc. The downward concave portion 2543c is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing the sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c has a posture in which a plane is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530, and the emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 206 (d), a downward concave portion 2543d is formed in the region CCVId. The downward concave portion 2543d is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing the sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has a posture in which a plane is arranged on the upper side and the front side (opposite side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the rear side, The convex part used for is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the downward concave portion 2543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550, the emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 206 (e), an upward concave portion 2543e is formed in the region CCVIe. The upward concave portion 2543e is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing the sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e is in a posture in which a plane is arranged on the upper side and the front side (opposite side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the upward concave portion 2543e refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530, the emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVIe and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a direction that is inclined upward as shown in FIG.

  The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of about 1 mm conical shape). For this reason, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down and travels substantially in the horizontal direction.

  According to the present embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), the light travels toward the inner lens member 530 in the direction of collecting light, and the light travels toward the outer lens member 550. Can be made. That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in a flat plate shape, it is possible to make a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540. The effect can be improved.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 281. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the bottom surface of the lower dish unit 15 is formed flat has been described. However, in the pachinko machine 10010 according to the seventeenth embodiment, a convex portion is formed on the bottom surface of the lower dish unit 6400. Thus, the transportability of the front frame 10014 provided with the lower dish unit 6400 is improved. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10010 according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the front side of the page is the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is the rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 shown in FIG. 207, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 includes an operation device 10300 in which the swinging device member 10310 is disposed in the upward position in FIG. 207, and a front surface disposed below the operation device 10300. A lower pan unit 6400 that covers the lower side of the frame 10014, a horizontal effect device 6700 that covers the left and right parts of the front frame 10014, and that mainly performs a light-emitting effect, and an upper part of the front frame 10014 that mainly covers light-emitting effects and An upper production device 6500 that performs an audio production is mainly provided.

  In addition, the glass unit 16 mentioned above is arrange | positioned in the area | region enclosed by the horizontal production | presentation apparatus 6700 and the top production | presentation apparatus 6500, and the above-mentioned each game area where a game ball flows down is comprised on the back side of the glass unit 16. This is the same as the embodiment. In FIG. 207, the illustration of the state of the back side of the glass unit 16 is omitted in FIG. 207, and the illustration of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is shown in FIG. Omitted, the inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) is visible from the opening in which the glass unit 16 is disposed.

  FIG. 209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In FIG. 209, a direction view along the longitudinal direction of the lever member of the operation device 10300 (for example, the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)) (a radial view of the rotation axis of the lever member of the operation device 10300) is illustrated. The

  The operation device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 that are formed in a thin plate shape and are flexible enough to be deformable. As shown in FIG. 209, the housing recess 17a is formed as a substantially left-right symmetrical recess in which the degree of depression toward the back side increases toward the left-right center, and the left-right center of the housing recess 17a and the operation device The left and right centers of 10300 are arranged so as to coincide with each other.

  The rear side ends of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves to the back side as it approaches the left and right center. In other words, the fitting position moves to the main body frame (metal main body portion 10014a) side of the front frame 10014 as it approaches the left-right center.

  Therefore, at the center position of the left and right where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be large, the vertical displacement of the fitting position is suppressed by shortening the front and rear positions from the metal main body portion 10014a to the fitting position. Thus, the operation device 10300 can be prevented from being displaced in the vertical direction (load direction).

  On the other hand, in the left and right positions (positions left and right away from the center) where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be small, the operation is performed even if the front and rear positions from the metal main body portion 10014a to the fitting position are lengthened. Since there is no hindrance to the effect of suppressing the vertical displacement of the device 10300, and by arranging the fitting position in this way, a space can be formed between the fitting position and the metal main body portion 10014a. A wide arrangement area for the upper plate 17 and the frame button 22 can be secured.

  FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. 210 shows a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11 with the left end portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19 as the center.

  The front frame 10014 includes a rod-shaped portion that is pivotally supported by the hinge 19, and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be detachable from the hinge 19. The front frame 10014 can be separated from the inner frame 12 by removing the rod-shaped portion from the hinge 19. Since the newly described configuration is disposed in the front frame 10014, the following description will be given focusing on the front frame 10014.

  211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 212 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014. 211 and 212 show a state where the lower pan unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are detached from the front frame 10014.

  The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member that forms a skeleton, and includes a metal main body portion 10014a configured integrally with the front door mounting bracket 58. The lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 include the metal main body portion 10014a. Fastened and fixed to. That is, both the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are configured with a fastening portion (female screw forming portion) that opens to the metal main body portion 10014a side (rear side), and the metal main body portion 10014a includes a fastening portion. A through hole is formed at a position corresponding to. The lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014 by inserting a fastening member (male screw) from the back side of the metal main body 10014a through the through hole, screwing it into the fastening portion, and fastening.

  As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operation device 10300 is held in a state of being sandwiched between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400. That is, the upper plate 17 holds the operation device 10300 from the upper rear side of the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 holds the operation device 10300 from the lower front side of the operation device 10300. Hereinafter, a configuration in which the operation device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be described in order.

  213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 214 is an exploded front view of the front frame 10014. In FIGS. 213 and 214, the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower dish unit 6400 are not shown. Further, in FIG. 213, the operation device 10300 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a and is shown in a direction view from the back side, and for easy understanding, insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and its An assembly direction line connecting the fastening portion is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  When the operation device 10300 is assembled to the front frame 10014 so as to be fitted from the front side, the bottom surface of the bottom member De disposed below the inner case member 10330 protrudes in a plate shape on the front side of the front frame 10014. It abuts on the upper surface of the convex portion T10.

  A bottom member De that is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below is disposed below the operation device 10300. The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) that is open to the front side, and a recessed portion De2 that is open on the side opposite to the inner case member 10330 (lower side) and on the back side. Prepare.

  The recessed portion De2 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the back with the lower part opened, and is formed in a size that can be fitted to the plate-like convex portion T10. That is, the concave portion De2 is recessed with the plate-like convex portion T10. By fitting with the part De2, the operation device 10300 can be aligned with the front frame 10014. Further, since the plate-like convex portion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the vertical position of the operation device 10300 can be maintained by the rigidity of the plate-like convex portion T10. In addition, the fitting here should just be able to position the bottom member De with respect to plate-shaped convex part T10 irrespective of the presence or absence of a clearance gap.

  At the tip of the plate-like convex portion T10, a pair of left and right protrusions are formed so as to protrude in a thin cylindrical shape toward the front side, and a fastening screw can be screwed in between the pair of cylindrical protrusions. A female screw hole is formed.

  The pair of columnar projecting portions are inserted into a recess recessed in the corresponding wall portion (front side wall portion) of the recessed portion De2 for the purpose of aligning the plate-like convex portion T10 and the bottom member De. The fastening screw screwed into the female screw hole is inserted into an insertion hole drilled at a corresponding position of the recessed portion De2, and the plate-like convex portion T10 is tightened by tightening the fastening screw. The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

  As described above, the recessed portion De2 formed in the rear half of the bottom member De rides on the plate-like convex portion T10, while the front half on the opposite side (see FIG. 215 (a)) has a plate-like support. The portion 6426 is disposed above the flat plate-like portion 6426a. That is, the front half of the bottom member De is disposed so as to be opposed to the flat plate-like portion 6426a in the vertical direction with the resin member 6427 interposed therebetween, and is formed so as to be able to contact the resin member 6427.

  In addition, the situation where contact is possible is not limited in any way. For example, the operation device 10300 may normally be in contact with the resin member 6427 by its own weight, or the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De are usually separated from each other, while a load is applied to the operation device 10300, The resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be in contact with each other when the operation device 10300 is displaced downward by executing a vibration effect.

  After the operation device 10300 is fitted into the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300 is fixed to the front frame 10014 by fastening fastening screws inserted from the back side into the front frame 10014.

  That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operation device 10300 is covered with a plurality of (three in this embodiment) fastening portions 10333 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed and one of the fastening portions 10333. And a metal plate portion 10334 that is provided with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted and that can receive a compressive force upon fastening and fixing.

  The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the edge portion of the insertion hole H10a formed with a diameter capable of inserting a fastening screw into the metal main body portion 10014a. An intermediate plate made of a hard resin is disposed on the front side of the metal main body 10014a. However, a through hole is formed in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 is inserted through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal main body 10014a.

  Here, in the periphery of the insertion hole H10a corresponding to the fastening portion 10333 where the metal plate portion 10334 is disposed, the through hole of the intermediate plate is made larger than the other insertion holes H10a. The shape of the through hole is designed to be a size that does not interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 that is covered on the back side of the fastening portion 10333.

  Accordingly, the metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal main body portion 10014a as the operation device 10300 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main body portion 10014a can be electrically connected, the same role as a so-called ground wire can be provided. Thereby, the safety of the player who operates the operation device 10300 can be ensured.

  Further, by disposing the metal plate portion 10334 in between, the metal plate portion 10334 can have a washer function. Thereby, the operation device 10300 can be firmly fixed to the metal main body 10014a.

  In addition, the shape of the metal plate part 10334 is not limited to this embodiment, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, instead of forming the through hole, a pair of claws straddling the screw hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, when the claw is formed so as to be displaced forward and backward, the function of a spring washer can be provided, and the fastening strength can be increased.

  The portions where the operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 are concentrated on the back side except for the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L. By concentrating the places necessary for fastening on the back side, the design freedom on the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

  On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing on the back side is a problem since the operation device 10300 is likely to be displaced downward when a load in the sinking direction (downward) is applied to the front side of the operation device 10300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted that suppresses the sinking displacement on the front side of the operation device 10300 while concentrating the fastening portion on the back side. This will be described in turn below.

  First, the operation of the fitting recess De1 will be described. In the operation device 10300, the fitting recess De1 formed on the lower front side is fitted with the fitting portion 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, the front side portion of the operation device 10300 is restricted from moving in the vertical direction by the fitting portion 6426d, and the sinking displacement is suppressed.

  Next, operations of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 include a plate-like protruding portion on the back side edge of the upper half portion disposed on the back side of the swing operation member 10310.

  That is, the left front cover 10321 includes a plate-like projecting portion 10321c that projects in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half, and a plurality of partial projecting portions 10321d that project further from the plate-like projecting portion 10321c. Is mainly provided.

  Similarly, the right front cover 10322 includes a plate-like projecting portion 10322c that projects in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half. The right front cover 10322 is not formed with a portion corresponding to the partial overhanging portion 10321d, and the periphery of the plate-like overhanging portion 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

  The plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c and the partial overhanging portion 10321d are configured as portions that are inserted into and fitted into the housing recess 17a. Here, the structure of the accommodation recessed part 17a of this embodiment is demonstrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the housing recess 17a includes a lower edge overhanging portion 10017b with a lower edge overhanging the left and right sides of the housing recess 17a with a substantially equal overhang width, and a left and right side of the housing recess 17a. On both sides, the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b is arranged opposite to the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b in a manner of protruding to the front side at a position slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c below the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b. A plurality of opposing overhanging portions 10017c forming grooves between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and a plurality of positioning holes 10017d whose upper side is drilled in the front-rear direction as a long hole in the surface position with the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b. And a relief hole 10017e drilled in the front-rear direction at a position side by side with the right facing overhanging portion 10017c.

  When the operation device 10300 is assembled to the housing recess 17a, the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are inserted into the grooves between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the opposing overhanging portion 10017c, and a plurality of partial overhanging portions 10321d. Are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, whereby the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a.

  In this case, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are displaced in the vertical direction by fitting the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c into the groove between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the opposing overhanging portion 10017c. Is suppressed.

  In addition, the plurality of partial projecting portions 10321d are inserted (fitted) into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, respectively, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily aligned with respect to the housing recess 17a. It is possible to suppress the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

  Further, the housing recess 17a is formed in an open arch shape on the front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are abutted and housed inside the arch, so the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are accommodated. Can be prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction or the rear side direction.

  With this configuration, the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is set to the upward position, and the position shift of the operation device 10300 when the player applies a backward load to the swing operation member 10310 is suppressed. (Return to the original position at an early stage).

  Here, when the player operates the swing operation member 10310, it is mainly operated with the left hand. In a general gaming posture (a posture facing directly to the pachinko machine 10010), the left and right centers of the pachinko machine 10010 are arranged. In operating the operation device 10300 to be arranged, the left hand is stretched diagonally right forward, and therefore it is rare that the load during the operation does not have a horizontal component.

  Therefore, since a load in the left and right direction is applied to the swing operation member 10310 at the same time as the load in the rear direction, the operation device 10300 may be displaced in the rear and left and right directions.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 is surrounded by the arched portion of the housing recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are disposed therebetween, so that the operation device 10300 is displaced. The deformation restoring force of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 that can be generated is generated in the direction of returning the operation device 10300 to the original position in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. Thereby, even if position shift arises in the operation device 10300, a position can be returned at an early stage.

  From the above configurations, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the housing recess 17a. That is, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the operation device 10300 with respect to the housing recess 17a.

  The escape hole 10017e functions as a through hole through which a fixed assembly portion 6802 (described later) of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be disposed at a position where the fixed assembly portion 6802 projects outward from the plate-shaped projecting portion 10321c.

  Next, the periphery of the operation device 10300 will be described. First, an outline of the internal structure of the operation device 10300 will be described. 215 (a), 215 (b), 216 (a), and 216 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 10300 along the CCXVa-CCXVa line in FIG.

  FIG. 215 (a) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at an upward position (initial position in the present embodiment). In FIGS. 215 (b), 216 (a), and 216 (b), the state is illustrated. A state in which the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at a downward position (a push-down position in the present embodiment) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b), the operation device 10300 includes a lever support shaft on which a lever member 10340 that supports the swing operation member 10310 with a shaft support rod 10363 is fixed to the inner case member 10330. It is pivotally supported at 10331d1. Therefore, the swinging operation member 10310 that can be operated by the player is centered on the shaft support rod 10363 and the displacement accompanying the movement of the shaft support rod 10363 disposed on the arc locus centering on the lever support shaft 10331d1. Displacement is possible in a manner combined with displacement in the rotational direction, and the displacement is generated by a player's operation.

  That is, by grasping the swing operation member 10310 disposed at the upward position and applying a load toward the rear, the swing operation member 10310 can be pushed in a manner of rotational displacement around the pivotal support rod 10363. (Push-in operation).

  Further, by grasping the swing operation member 10310 disposed at the upward position and applying a load toward the lower side on the front side, the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down in a manner of rotational displacement about the lever support shaft 10331d1. (Push-down operation).

  In the state where the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at the downward position, the swing operation is performed by the action of the posture correcting device 10312 (the action of applying a load in the direction away from the wall member 10322b to the swing operation member 10310). It is assumed that the member 10310 is pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 (reverse posture, a posture rotated backward by an angle θ17y with respect to the lever member 10340 from the initial position). Therefore, since the angle of the posture change of the swing operation member 10310 is smaller than the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, it is possible to suppress the change in the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 due to the rotation displacement of the lever member 10340. .

  Further, when an operation (push operation) is performed to push the lens member 10317 supported by the swing operation member 10310 so as to be displaceable in a state where the swing operation member 10310 is disposed in the downward position, the head swings due to a load at the time of the operation. The operation member 10310 is rotationally displaced about the shaft support rod 10363 and is displaced in a manner that it is tilted forward, so that the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 can be changed to the direction Y17c (see FIG. 216 (b)).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the swing operation member 10310 is configured to be able to apply loads for operation from a plurality of directions. If the load mode is different, the displacement mode of the swing operation member 10310 is also changed. Can be configured differently.

  The lever member 10340 is driven to rotate about the lever support shaft 10331d1 by a drive motor. Thus, even if the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down and disposed at the downward position, the swing operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position by controlling the rotation of the lever member 10340 by the drive motor.

  A vibration device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is disposed at the tip of the lever member 10340. The vibration of the vibration device 10366 is applied to the lens member 10317 by direct or indirect contact. Configured to be communicated.

  The vibration device 10366 is a device that moves a pair of members close to and away from each other in a linear direction by electromagnetic force. The vibration device 10366 is a bobbin member (arranged on the lever member 10340 side) that is a cylindrical member around which a copper wire is wound. And a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member and a cylinder whose inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member are arranged coaxially and And a pressing member to be connected (a member disposed on the lens member 10317 side). The pressing member is made of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction in the inner cylinder.

  The vibration device 10366 is configured to generate linear vibration along a direction Y17a along a straight line passing through the center of the shaft support rod 10363. In addition, in the present embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to coincide with the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317.

  Accordingly, the lens member 10317 can be vibrated (displaced) by making maximum use of the vibration energy of the vibration device 10366, and the presentation effect by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be improved.

  Next, details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described in order. FIG. 217 is a front perspective view of the operation device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 10300.

  As shown in FIG. 217, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 are disposed behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are curved at the outer end (the end opposite to the swing operation member 10310), and the center of the curvature radius of the curved surface is disposed on the swing operation member 10310 side. The Accordingly, a large space can be secured around the swing operation member 10310, so that the movable range of the swing operation member 10310 can be secured and the player can hold the swing operation member 10310. Space for inserting fingers can be secured.

  Moreover, since the curvature of the end portion is configured in a series so as to surround the swing operation member 10310, the design can be improved and the deformation of the curved shape portion can be generated as a whole. The allowable range of deformation of the curved portion can be increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6801R and 6801L that are formed in the front-rear direction so that fastening screws fastened to the left and right ends of the housing recess 17a can be inserted. A fixing assembly 6802 for fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from the inner case member 10330 so as not to be separated from each other by a fastening screw.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the housing recess 17a by insertion holes 6801R and 6801L arranged at both left and right ends. The left and right ends are locations farthest from a load (mainly a load along a plane passing through the center in the left-right direction and perpendicular to the left-right direction) applied to the operation device 10300, and the load is not easily transmitted. Generation | occurrence | production of the loosening of the fastening screw inserted by 6801R and 6801L and fastened and fixed to the accommodation recessed part 17a can be suppressed.

  The fixed assembly 6802 is formed on the boundary surface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG. 218, the formation position of the fixed assembly 6802 is the center of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the left-right direction ( The plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322c are located at positions shifted to the right from the most rear side. That is, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed to be disassembled at the left and right centers, the left front cover 10321 is formed from the left and right centers to the right side, and the right front cover 10322 is formed on the right side of the left and right centers. Stay in position. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed in a wider range than the right front cover 10322.

  In the present embodiment, the boundary on the rear side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is shifted from the center in the left-right direction, so that one member (the book) is placed in the central portion (the portion located on the rearmost side) of the housing recess 17a. In the embodiment, since the left front cover 10321) can be inserted to complete the alignment with the housing recess 17a, the assembly can be facilitated as compared with the case where the alignment is performed by both members.

  Further, by shifting the position of the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the load transmitted when operating the operation device 10300. Here, at the positions on the back side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the swing operation member 10310 as a position operated by the player can be disposed close (especially disposed close at the upward position (see FIG. 218)). Therefore, the fastening screw may be loosened due to transmission of a load when the operation device 10300 is operated. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the fixed assembly 6802 is shifted from the left and right center where the load during operation is maximized to the left and right, thereby reducing the transmitted load compared to the load during operation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws in the fixed assembly 6802.

  In this way, by shifting the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the left and right center to the left and right and similarly shifting the boundary between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the assembly efficiency can be improved, and the fastening screws can be loosened. It can be made difficult to occur.

  Note that both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not fastened and fixed directly to the inner case member 10330 at the fixed assembly 6802. That is, in the fixed assembly portion 6802, the fastening screw inserted through the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321.

  However, for inner case member 10330, fixed assembly portion 6802 is inserted through a through hole formed in the upper plate portion of inner case member 10330 (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 220) and its upper plate portion. The fixed assembly portion 6802 remains sandwiched from both sides (see FIG. 218). By comprising in this way, the fastening location formed in the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be reduced compared with the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are each fastened to the inner case member 10330.

  Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided with a lot of fastening portions, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are hardly bent due to the rigidity of the fastening screw, and may be easily damaged.

  On the other hand, the thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be reduced in order to make it easier to bend while maintaining the fastening portion. In this case, however, the durability is deteriorated or illegal acts are caused. There is a risk that.

  On the other hand, by reducing the number of fastening points as in this embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be sufficiently bent without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screw. Accordingly, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without excessively reducing the thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.

  219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operation device 10300, and FIGS. 220 and 222 are exploded rear perspective views of the operation device 10300. As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be disassembled to the left and right in an integrated state with the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is fastened to the left cover member 10323, and the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the right cover member 10324 at one point (adjustment elongated holes 10323a and 10324a) in the front-rear direction. Is done.

  Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the left front cover 10321 can move relative to the left cover member 10323, and the right front cover 10322 can move relative to the right cover member 10324, respectively. Thus, the assembly position of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily adjusted. This will be described below.

  The operation device 10300 is disposed on the front side of the inner case member 10330 in such a manner that the back side is formed in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 10344 and 10345 (see FIG. 215) and the left and right edges of the cover members 10344 and 10345 are hidden. The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right directions.

  The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are respectively provided with adjustment long holes 10323a and 10324a which are formed in the front upper and lower ends and are elongated in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction.

  The adjustment long holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, respectively, and are elongated in the left-right direction, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are formed due to molding variation or the like. Even when the shapes vary, the left and right positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 relative to the swing operation member 10310 can be easily adjusted.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the adjustment elongated holes 10323a and 10324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces facing in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 has a fitting recess 10322a that is recessed in the right direction from the end surface of the right front cover 10322 that contacts the left front cover 10321, and the fitting recess 10322a is prevented from coming off in the front-rear direction. A wall member 10322b mounted in a manner, and in a state where the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (see FIG. 217), the wall is prevented by moving to the left by the end face of the left front cover 10321. The member 10322b is held inside the fitting recess 10322a.

  With such a configuration, when replacing the wall member 10322b, the wall member 10322b can be replaced simply by removing the right front cover 10322 (the wall member 10322b is a load from the posture correcting device 10312 (see FIG. 215)). ) Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

  First, the procedure of the assembling work will be described. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are respectively assembled to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 (corresponding to shifting from FIGS. 221 and 222 to FIGS. 219 and 220). After the fastening and fixing, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are aligned by fastening the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330, and then the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened. Fixed.

  Here, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot move relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10323 are bothered when the positional deviation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is corrected. It is necessary to make corrections by loosening the fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 and shifting the arrangement of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324.

  In anticipation of this, when the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are determined by tightening and fixing the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 rather than the main case, the left front cover 10321 is determined. Then, after the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed (downstream of the assembly procedure), the return of the work procedure occurs in which the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 (upstream of the assembly procedure). However, since the work itself becomes complicated, it is not preferable in terms of simplification of the work.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be moved relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, so that the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are disposed on the inner case. After the fastening to the member 10330, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted. Therefore, the assembling work can be simplified.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 respectively include shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R in which the front edge portion is opposed to the guide portion 10344a of the upper cover member 10344. The shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R have a role of closing a gap generated between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), and a piano wire enters the gap to enter the pachinko machine 10010. As a countermeasure against an illegal act to be attempted or a mischievous act of pouring liquid, the gap between the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small (in this embodiment, the clearance is designed to be 0.3 mm).

  On the other hand, if the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a is shifted due to the influence of an operation load (impact) and the gap is closed, the guide portion 10344a and the shielding plate portion are operated during operation of the operation device 10300. 6803L and 6803R may be rubbed and resin shavings may be generated. Resin shavings have little effect as long as they are small, but if a large amount of clogging occurs in the detection groove of a light transmission type switch represented by the so-called photocoupler type, shavings may block the light and induce false detection. It is thought that there is. Therefore, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of selection of switches that can be adopted is limited.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fixed assembly portion 6802 as the fastening position of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is in the left-right center position (the place where the load during operation or the load during operation occurs at the maximum). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impact and load transmitted to the fastening location, and to prevent the fastening screw from loosening.

  Thereby, since it can suppress that the positional relationship of shielding board part 6803L, 6803R and guide part 10344a shifts, generation of resin shavings can be prevented, and false detection can be controlled. In the present embodiment, a photocoupler type detection switch FC is arranged on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.

  The detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation in the reverse direction of the swing operation member 10310, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

  When the swing operation member 10310 is pushed in the backward direction, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is shielded. Therefore, it is determined that the push operation has been performed. be able to. In the present embodiment, since no load is applied to the detection switch FC and the metal plate MB, durability can be improved as compared with the case where a load is applied.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R formed as continuous curved surfaces on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R, and fan-shaped in front view below the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R that are continuously formed as the plate portions are mainly provided.

  The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have curved shapes (that is, lever support shafts 10331d1 (FIG. 215) whose surfaces on the back side can come into contact with curved portions on the upper front side of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324. A circular arc shape having a central angle of about 90 degrees with reference to the center.

  The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R include a protruding interference portion 6805a that protrudes from the back surface to the back surface. The protruding interference part 6805a is disposed slightly inside the inner edge Rm1 of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the left-right direction, and the front side surface of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction. It is formed so as to protrude to the back side.

  As a result, the protruding interference portion 6805a causes the left and right outer displacements to move to the inner edge in the state where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are assembled (see FIG. 220). Regulated to Rm1. Therefore, since the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from being displaced outward in the left-right direction, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from being disassembled in a manner that they are separated from each other.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are portions that connect the outer peripheries of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, respectively. Bending portions 6806L and 6806R are provided.

  The left front cover 10321 includes fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L that are formed at the right end portion so that fastening screws can be screwed in and are arranged in a plurality of directions. The right front cover 10322 includes a plurality of insertion holes 6802R, 6807R, and 6808R that are provided at the left end portion so as to allow a fastening screw to be inserted therethrough.

  The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by a plurality of fastening portions and insertion holes that are distributed in the vertical direction (the direction along the operation direction of the operation device 10300). Thereby, the load and impact accompanying operation of the operation device 10300 can be disperse | distributed to each fastening part, and generation | occurrence | production of the loosening of a fastening screw can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment at the position of the break between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is possible to suppress the design portion that is easily visible to the player (especially, it is easily visible in the front view). It is possible to prevent the performance as the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R and the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R (see FIG. 207) from being deteriorated. These fastening portions and insertion holes have different roles. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

  The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner that the insertion hole H23a drilled in the left-right direction is sandwiched in a portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and is fixed with the inner case member 10330 sandwiched by fastening screws. . In addition, it is not the so-called “co-fastening” mode, but is fastened and fixed in such a manner that the tip of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L contacts the left surface of the plate portion where the insertion hole 6802R is formed. . In other words, the compression load is not generated in the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed by fastening.

  In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even when the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to a load applied to the operation device 10300, the operation of the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can be made independent as long as the gap is within the above-described gap. Therefore, when the minute displacement that may occur in the inner case member 10330 occurs, it is possible to avoid the fixed assembly portion 6802 from being displaced in the same manner.

  It should be noted that the extending length of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened so that a compression load is applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed during fastening. . In this case, since the restoring force of the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled increases the fastening force, it is possible to avoid loosening of the fastening screws in the fixed assembly 6802.

  The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole H23b that is drilled in the left-right direction in a portion that protrudes to the front side of the inner case member 10330 is screwed. The left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing in the fastening screws. In the present embodiment, the place where only the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed is only the fastening place by the fastening portion 6807L and the insertion hole H23b.

  The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole through which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to a fastening portion T23a formed so as to be screwable along the left-right direction in a portion protruding to the front side of the inner case member 10330. The right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing the fastening screws. Note that, in the present embodiment, only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed is the fastening portion by the fastening portion T23b and the insertion hole 6807R.

  The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are portions that are directly fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. In the present embodiment, the place where only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed is only the fastening place by the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R.

  Thus, in this embodiment, although a fastening part and an insertion hole are formed in multiple places along the formation direction of the facing part of left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322, in each place, the combination of the object to be fastened is formed. Configured differently. Accordingly, in assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at a time, so that the assembling work can be facilitated. The assembly procedure will be described below.

  First, if one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fastened and fixed even at one place, one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is prevented from being detached from the inner case member 10330. be able to.

  In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When the left front cover 10321 is attached first, the left front cover 10321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing in a manner in which a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b. When the cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing in a manner in which a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R.

  Next, if the other of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and is similarly fastened and fixed at one place, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are independently fastened to the inner case member 10330. it can.

  After this, although there is no designation in the order, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be integrally fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing the fastening screws into the fixing assembly 6802 and fastening them. Further, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other by screwing and fastening the fastening screws in the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R.

  In this way, compared to the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled to each other only by fastening the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330 by forming a portion for fastening the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to each other, The number of fastening points can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the fastening operation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the fastening screws are all inserted from the right to the left. Therefore, the efficiency of the fastening operation can be improved as compared with the case where the insertion direction of the fastening screw is configured in both the left and right directions.

  The screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are unified in the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. In the operation device 10300, the operation direction of each operation unit is a direction along a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. Therefore, the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is the operation unit of the operation device 10300. This is a direction orthogonal to the operation direction. That is, when a load or impact during operation occurs along the operation direction, a component in the screwing direction of the fastening screw does not occur. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being loosened due to a load or an impact when the operation device 10300 is operated.

  In this embodiment, the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of operation parts (including a part that is operated by an operation. For example, the swing operation member 10310, the lens member 10317, the lever member 10340, and the like). Since it is designed to operate in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

  On the other hand, when the operation portion does not move on a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, when there is an operation portion that pushes in the left-right oblique direction), A direction (for example, an intermediate angle direction) found as a balance (average) of operation directions may be set as a fastening direction, or an operation part with a high frequency of operation instructions is targeted (operation instructions rarely occur) The direction of fastening may be set by ignoring the operation part to be performed.

  223 (a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223 (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a gap for arranging the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220) between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. Except for the part to be formed and the part in which the fitting recess 10322a is formed, they are in contact with each other over a plurality of surfaces arranged opposite to each other.

  In the contact portion, a plate-like portion extends rightward from the left front cover 10321 on the side that is not visually recognized by the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate portion 6803L includes a lower overlapping portion 6803La extending rightward along the lower surface thereof (see FIG. 223 (a)).

  Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported by the lower overlapping portion 6803La, the shielding plate portion 6803R is restricted from being displaced downward with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L. Thereby, it can prevent that a clearance gap produces between shielding board part 6803R, 6803L, and can suppress that a liquid passes between shielding board parts 6803R, 6803L.

  In the present embodiment, the inner case member 10330 disposed below the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L (see FIG. 218), the lever member 10340 in which the back side portion is accommodated, and the lever member 10340 are driven. It is possible to prevent the liquid from touching the drive motor, a transmission mechanism such as a cam or gear that transmits the drive force of the drive motor, or an electric system (substrate or the like) that drives the drive motor.

  In addition, the cuts of the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the left and right center of the swing operation member 10310, while the cuts (joint surfaces) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 are the swing operation members. It is arranged on the same surface as the center position of the left and right 10310. Therefore, even when the liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, it is possible to prevent the liquid from immediately reaching the break between the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340 is disposed closer to the left side with respect to the left and right center of the inner case member 10330 (in the bulging portion from the inner case member 10330 to the left). Corresponding, see FIG. 218), even when the lower part between the shielding plate parts 6803R, 6803L is wet, it is possible to flow the liquid that wets the part down the right outer surface of the inner case member 10330, It is possible to prevent the drive motor from getting wet.

  Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapping portion 6805Lb that extends to the right along the back surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the lower plate portion 6805R is supported from behind by the rear overlapping portion 6805Lb, the lower plate portion 6805R is restricted from being displaced rearward with respect to the lower plate portion 6805L. Thereby, it can prevent that a clearance gap produces between lower board part 6805R, 6805L, and can suppress that a liquid passes between lower board part 6805R, 6805L.

  The liquid that has passed below the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-like support portion 6426 (see FIGS. 232 and 234), and when a large amount of liquid continues to pass, the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 and the lower plate There is a possibility of passing through the body box portion 6421 of the forming member 6420 and flowing toward the through-hole 6412 or flowing along the recessed shape portion 6414. In particular, when the liquid flows downward from the through-hole 6412, the liquid flows downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014 and may hit the player or wet the thousand boxes.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, since the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower dish forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430, it is easy to prevent the passage of liquid by sandwiching without any gap. As in the embodiment, by suppressing the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid is applied to the player or wets the thousand boxes. A pachinko machine 10010 that can be played comfortably can be configured.

  As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are streak-like in a mode of being pushed out from the front side to the back side. A streak-shaped portion D23 is formed. The streak-shaped portion D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and a convex portion on the rear surface from the formation mode.

  The streak portion D23 serves as a portion for adjusting the rigidity of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R. That is, as compared with the case where it is formed as a thin mere plate, the rigidity in the direction in which the streak portion D23 is formed is maintained (or reduced) while maintaining the rigidity in the direction orthogonal to the streak portion D23. Improve (anisotropic). This will be described using the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as an example.

  The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are disposed between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a (see FIG. 213), and serve as a portion that fills the gap. Here, the operation device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be able to be displaced downward by a slight amount due to a load or impact during operation in order to prevent an excessive reaction force returned to the player during operation. On the other hand, for the purpose of making the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the housing recess 17a is configured to be undisplaceable.

  That is, a gap may be generated between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a when the operation device 10300 is operated. In the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are extended in the vertical direction (elastically deformed and bent), so that it is possible to cope with a change in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a. Can be prevented.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the streak-shaped portion D23 is formed along the vertical direction in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are deformed (direction in which the load during operation is mainly directed), thereby reducing the vertical deformation resistance. Since it is increased (because the rigidity is increased), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of vibration at the time of shape restoration or the deformation more than necessary. As described above, the design of the streak portion D23 in the present embodiment is performed for the purpose of taking measures against problems that may occur during operation of the operation device 10300.

  Since the streak portion D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, when a downward load is applied at the center, it will endure upward (a tensile force is generated) on both the left and right sides. . That is, even when a downward load is applied during operation of the operation device 10300 and a displacement occurs, the displacement can be returned early.

  On the other hand, even if a load is generated in the direction orthogonal to the streak-shaped portion D23, the load transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 disposed on the downstream side is caused by the allowable deformation based on the flexibility of the resin. Can be reduced.

  The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R include an end streak portion D24 formed in a streak shape so as to be extruded from the front surface side to the back surface side. The streak-like portion D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the back surface from the formation mode.

  The end streak portion D24 mainly includes a left and right streak portion D24a formed on the left and right sides and a central streak portion D24b formed on the center side, and is formed as a measure against loads in different directions.

  The left and right streak portion D24a is a streak portion disposed on the upper side of the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portions on the front side), and is formed in a shape that is inclined downward toward the back side. This downward inclination corresponds to the direction of the load such as an operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swing operation member 10310 (along the direction of the load). That is, by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a by the left and right muscle portions D24a, the resistance force to the operation load can be improved.

  In addition, as for the inclination angle of the left and right stripe part D24a, the angle with respect to the front-rear direction is formed in a stepwise manner when the one arranged on the left and right side is larger than that arranged on the left and right center side. That is, the streaks extend in a plurality of directions. Thereby, regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load when the lens member 10317 is operated.

  In addition, the formation width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is shorter in the one arranged on the left and right sides than in the one arranged on the left and right center side. That is, since the forming width is shortened toward the side corresponding to the force with a large inclination with respect to the front-rear direction (left and right side), the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is reduced and the resistance force is increased. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve resistance to a load in a direction with a large inclination with respect to the front-rear direction as a direction in which the load during operation tends to increase (the direction in which the hand is swung down).

  On the other hand, the central streak portion D24b is a streak portion disposed on the lower side from a position equivalent to the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portions on the front side) and has a shape that rises and slopes toward the back side. Formed from. This rising inclination corresponds to the direction of the load when the operation device 10300 (the inner case member 10330 thereof) tilts forward.

  In other words, by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the central muscle portion D24b by the central muscle portion D24b, the inner side of the operation device 10300 (inside of the operation device 10300) is caused by the load during the tilting operation around the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. It is possible to improve the resistance against the case member 10330) from being tilted forward and displaced.

  Further, the central streak portion D24b is formed by seven in total, one at the center and three on the left and right sides, and the left and right central streak portions D24b are inclined toward the left and right central sides as they go to the back side. As a result, even when the operation device 10300 (the inner case member 10330) is tilted forward by a load at the time of the tilting operation around the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if a displacement in the left-right direction occurs, Resistance to displacement (resistance in the left-right direction) can be improved.

  The central muscle portion D24b is formed more densely than the left and right muscle portions D24a. Thereby, particularly in the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, the bending in the left-right direction (deformation expanding and contracting along the left-right direction) is more significant than the bending in the vertical direction (deformation expanding and contracting along the vertical direction). It becomes a big deflection.

  Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower dish unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212) and the lower edge of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is pushed down by the V-shaped design member 6450 (position of the lower edge) When the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are deformed in such a manner that the upper and lower edges of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are deformed downward, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are deflected in the left and right directions. It is possible to release the load (stress) applied to the substrate (stress concentration can be avoided).

  Even in such a case of bending deformation, the lower edge overhanging portion is formed so that the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c continuously formed from the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are surrounded from the back side to the left and right front sides. 10017b and the opposite overhanging portion 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214), and the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are formed longer in the front-rear direction, so the left front cover 10321 is formed. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for a gap to be formed between the right front cover 10322 and the housing recess 17a.

  Further, by making the bending ease of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R different depending on the direction, the downstream side of the load generated by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 and the operation of the operation device 10300 (V-shaped design member 6450, see FIG. 232), it is possible to change the ease of transmission to the direction of vibration or load.

  That is, vibration along the vertical direction and operation load can be easily transmitted to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and the lower plate 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, while vibration and operation in the horizontal direction can be performed. A load (for example, a load generated when a hand holding the ball collides with the swing operation member 10310 when the ball is transferred from the lower plate 50 to the upper plate 17) is transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50. Can be difficult. This prevents vibrations and loads from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50 until the player unintentionally applies a load to the swing operation member 10310, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. it can.

  Further, the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are continuously formed on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, and the plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322c formed on the upper edges thereof are elongated in the left and right directions. The lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the opposing overhanging portion 10017c are inserted (see FIG. 214).

  Here, in the comparison between the shape of the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c and the shape of the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the opposed overhanging portion 10017c, the vicinity of the left and right end portions is shifted in the front-rear direction due to a molding error or the like. (For example, when the front upper ends of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R protrude from the front side of the housing recess 17a), the curved portions of the plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322c are loosened (the left and right end portions are displaced to the back side). It is preferable that it is possible to cope with a molding error by deforming as shown in FIG.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the streak portion D23 is formed along the top and bottom of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, the lateral rigidity of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R is compared with the vertical stiffness. Is lowered. Therefore, when the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are deformed to the side where the curve is loosened, the deformation of the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c can be assisted by the deformation of the bending plate portions 6804L and 6804R. In addition, the deformation width of the plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322c can be increased. Therefore, the size of the molding error that can be handled can be increased.

  As described above, the streak portion D23 takes measures against problems that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled by not improving (weakening) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the formation direction (left and right direction). be able to.

  For these reasons, the streak portion D23 causes a problem that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled (same as when the operation device 10300 is assembled; see FIG. 213), and a problem that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated. And both.

  Returning to FIG. 212, description will be made. In the present embodiment, a flat planar plate portion (a plate-like portion in which a ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 214) is formed) along the metal main body portion 10014a in the lower left front portion of the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014. And a plate-like upper plate portion extending to the front side so as to be bent at the upper end portion configured to be inclined downward toward the right, of the upper portion of the flat plate portion. A back cover portion 10014b formed from a resin material in this manner is disposed. That is, the back cover portion 10014b has a substantially L-shaped cross section in a plane orthogonal to the straight line along the arrow LR.

  The back cover portion 10014b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower plate 50. That is, the lower plate 50 is brought into contact with (connected to) the flat plate portion at the rear end portion thereof, and is brought into contact with (connected to) the upper plate portion at the right end portion thereof. In the area (space) formed on the side where the lower plate 50 and the back cover portion 10014b are opposed to each other, balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 or so-called foul balls are stored. Will be. Next, details of the lower plate unit 6400 constituting the lower plate 50 will be described.

  FIG. 224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower dish unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower dish unit 6400. In FIG. 225, each part of the lower dish unit 6400 is illustrated at an angle looking up from below.

  As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lower dish unit 6400 is an overlaid cover that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a in a manner that covers the front side of the metal main body 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIG. 211 or 212). A base plate 6410, a lower plate forming member 6420 fitted to the covering base member 6410 from the upper side to form the lower plate 50, and a plate-shaped device attached to the covering base member 6410 from the lower side. The ball discharging device 6430 fastened and fixed to the forming member 6420, and the left end portion of the covering base member 6410, which is assembled to the covering base member 6410 in such a manner that the lower plate forming member 6420 can be prevented from coming off from the back side. The intermediate holding member 6440 fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a on the opposite side (rear side), and the covering base member 6410 A V-shaped design member 6450 formed from disposed on a side upper resin material viewed from the front V-shaped, mainly comprises.

  The covering base member 6410 has a main body portion 6411 formed in a substantially box shape with a lower bottom surface formed in a substantially flat shape and opened on the back surface and an upper surface, and a slight skeleton portion on the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411. A through hole 6412 that is formed to be left through, a projecting shape portion 6413 that protrudes downward from the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 on the center side in the left-right direction of the main body portion 6411 with respect to the through hole 6412, and the protrusion On the back side of the provided shape portion 6413, a recessed shape portion 6414 that is recessed so that the plate thickness of the protruded shape portion 6413 is substantially equal to the other part of the main body portion 6411 is mainly provided.

  By forming the recessed shape portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large in the vicinity of the protruding shape portion 6413, so that the yield of resin molding is improved and stress concentration occurs in the protruding shape portion 6413. This can be suppressed. The projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 have a plurality of advantageous effects at a place where the operation device 10300 is held from below, and will be described in detail later.

  The through hole 6412 has a size substantially the same as the size of the bottom surface shape of the lower plate 50 described later, and is formed to be much larger than the size of the bottom surface port 6432 that is opened by sliding the ball removal lever 52.

  In this way, by forming the through-hole 6412 in advance in advance, the ball discharging speed from the lower plate 50 can be matched to the game play realized by the pachinko machine 10010 without replacing the covering base member 6410. It is possible to correspond to the discharge speed of the ball to be played.

  That is, the discharge speed of the spheres from the lower plate 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom face port 6432. For example, when the size of the through hole 6412 is the same size as the bottom face port 6432, the discharge speed of the spheres is reduced. I can't make it bigger. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the through hole 6412 is formed large in advance, if the size of the bottom surface port 6432 is changed or the arrangement of the bottom surface port 6432 is changed within a range not exceeding the through hole 6412 ( If the design of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 is changed), the discharge speed (discharge mode) of the balls from the lower plate 50 can be changed without replacing the covering base member 6410. In other words, the discharge speed (discharge mode) of the sphere can be changed without changing the appearance of the lower dish unit 6400 visually recognized by the player (without changing the design).

  The demand for changing the ball discharge speed is not limited to the case where the playability of the pachinko machine 10010 is changed. For example, in a game store, when the pachinko machine 10010 is installed in a mode that requires the payout ball to be transferred to a thousand box, and when it is installed in a mode that does not require the payout ball to be transferred to a thousand box (so-called “personal”) In the case of).

  If it is necessary to transfer the payout ball to the Thousand Box, the ball is likely to overflow from the Thousand Box if the ball is discharged at high speed, so the ball discharge is designed to be slower than the specified speed. It is desirable that

  In the present embodiment, the bottom surface port 6432 is formed from a circular opening having a diameter of about 35 [mm]. From the comparison between the opening area and the shape of the sphere (spherical shape having a diameter of about 11 [mm]), The upper limit of balls discharged simultaneously from the opening is limited to about seven.

  On the other hand, when it is not necessary to transfer the payout sphere to the thousand-thousand box, there is no concern about the overflow of the sphere from the thousand-thousand box, so that the upper limit of the desired discharge speed of the sphere greatly changes in the increasing direction. In such an installation mode, the dispensed ball flows into an automatic counter disposed in each pachinko machine 10010. Therefore, as an example of the upper limit of the discharge speed, it is built in the automatic counter. The operating speed of the ball sink device is illustrated.

  Thus, by forming the through-hole 6412 large, there is an advantage that the discharge speed of the sphere can be changed without changing the design in front view, but the strength of the main body portion 6411 may be reduced. There is. In particular, the bottom surface portion of the main body portion 6411 is a portion to which a load (mainly a downward load) when a player operates the operation device 10300 may be transmitted. However, there is a possibility that the load is limited to the extent that it can withstand the load during operation.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 are assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a manner that compensates for the strength reduction due to the through hole 6412. The lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other with the lines illustrated by the imaginary lines in FIGS. 224 and 225 as fastening directions in a manner of sandwiching the covering base member 6410 from above and below. The edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430. Thereby, the surrounding part of the through hole 6412 (for example, a frame part elongated in the left and right positions behind the through hole 6412) can be reinforced with the strength of the lower dish forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430.

  In addition, the design aspect by which the edge part of the through-hole 6412 is pressed down by the lower plate | board formation member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 is not limited at all. For example, the design may be such that the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 abuts the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 before the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 are fastened (in a state of being arranged at the fastening preparation position). (See FIG. 233), gaps are generated before fastening, but a design mode in which pressure can be applied by filling the gaps by tightening the fastening screws.

  Further, the pressed portion does not have to be the entire circumference of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, and may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, particularly in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 (the right side portion in the vicinity of the projecting shape portion 6413) and the back side portion (the long plate portion disposed behind the through hole 6412) that may be subjected to an impact every time it is opened and closed. Since a large load is likely to be generated, it is preferable to adopt a design mode for pressing.

  Thus, by sandwiching the edge portion of the through hole 6412 between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430, the strength of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be sufficiently ensured, so that the bottom surface port 6432 is formed. The bottom opening 6432 can be arranged at an arbitrary position without worrying about the strength reduction due to the operation. That is, the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the bottom surface port 6432 can be improved.

  The lower plate forming member 6420 includes a main body box portion 6421 formed in a substantially box shape in which the lower plate 50 has an open upper surface, a discharge port 6422 opened in the vertical direction on the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421, and a main body box portion. An L-shaped plate portion 6423 projecting in an L-shape when viewed from the bottom surface of the bottom surface of 6421, and a ball discharge device 6430 projecting in a cylindrical shape downwardly on the inner side (front side) of the range surrounded by the L-shaped plate portion 6423. A plurality of fastening portions 6424 to which fastening screws for fastening are fastened, a pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in the left-right direction with the edge of the discharge port 6422 as a base end, and a main body box portion 6421 A plate-like support portion 6426 extending rightward from the right end portion of the plate, and a flexible resin member 6427 placed on the upper surface of the plate-like support portion 6426.

  The discharge port 6422 is formed at a position that is the front end and the right end of the lower plate 50. The bottom upper surface of the lower plate 50 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the discharge port 6422, and the ball that has flowed into the lower plate 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flows down toward the discharge port 6422. Since the outlet 6422 is disposed on the front side close to the player, the balls can be smoothly taken out from the lower plate 50 even when the number of balls stored in the lower plate 50 is small.

  The discharge port 6422 is formed in the vicinity of the plate-like support portion 6426 that is likely to generate a load from the operation device 10300, and is considered to be affected by a decrease in strength due to the configuration of the through hole. However, details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 225, the protruding length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is different in the left and right positions, but this corresponds to the inclination of the lower plate 50. That is, the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411 is formed in a substantially flat shape, while the lower plate 50 is formed to be inclined downward as the lower surface of the lower bottom portion moves to the right. In order to make contact with the upper surface of the edge portion of 6412, the protruding length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 needs to be shortened toward the right side, which corresponds to that. With this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end portion (lower end portion) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is brought into contact with the edge portion of the through hole 6412 (contacted by line contact or surface contact). )

  The fastening portion 6424 is formed at two positions on the front side end portion where a load from the player is likely to be generated and at one position on the rear side end portion where the load is likely to be generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed. By providing a fastening part preferentially at a place where a load is likely to occur, it is possible to prevent the position of the lower plate forming member 6420 from being displaced due to the fixing being shifted when the load is generated while limiting the fastening part. .

  Further, since the fastening portion 6424 is disposed in the vicinity of the L-shaped plate portion 6423, the fastening portion 6424 is fastened inside the through-hole 6412 (that is, the through-hole for positioning the fastening screw to be passed through the main body portion 6411 is separately provided. It is possible to easily maintain the contact between the L-shaped plate portion 6423 and the edge portion of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 (while fastening is performed without forming) (to facilitate maintaining the relative position). Is possible). Therefore, it is possible to improve the positional stability of the lower dish forming member 6420 while making it unnecessary to form through holes other than the through holes 6412.

  The guide rib 6425 is used for both the purpose of guiding the movement of the ball removal lever 52 and the purpose of reinforcing the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50. In particular, in this embodiment, it is considered that the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50 is formed from a long plate shape on the left and right sides, and reinforcement along the left and right direction is necessary. Therefore, the movement guide of the ball removal lever 52 and the reinforcement of the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50 are suitably realized.

  Since the guide ribs 6425 are formed as a pair as described above, the applied load can be dispersed. Moreover, even if one is damaged, there is no problem in use as long as the other remains, so that the service life of the lower tray unit 6400 can be extended.

  The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or another flexible member having an appropriate repulsive force (shape restoring force).

  The ball discharge device 6430 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 on which the above-described ball removal lever 52 is disposed, a circular bottom surface port 6432 formed through the main body plate portion 6431 in the vertical direction, and a lower plate forming member. A plurality of fastening holes 6433 which are arranged at positions that overlap with the fastening parts 6424 of 6420 and are fastened by screwing fastening screws into the fastening parts 6424, and a rectangular frame shape surrounding the fastening holes 6433, Is mainly provided with a fitting frame portion 6434 formed to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410.

  The ball release lever 52 includes a gripping portion 52a that projects forward so that the player can operate in a manner that slides left and right, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). And a pair of rib-like portions projecting upward from the upper surface of the closing plate portion 52b and extending in the left-right direction, and guided ribs 52c guided by the guide ribs 6425, and Are integrally molded from a hard resin material.

  The bottom surface port 6432 is disposed to face the discharge port 6422 of the lower dish forming member 6420 in the vertical direction, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball removal lever 52 is disposed therebetween. As described above, since the ball removal lever 52 is disposed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom surface port 6432 when not operated, the degree to which the strength is reduced by forming the opening is determined. This can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

  As a result, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom surface port 6432 can be prevented from becoming fragile, and therefore, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom surface port 6432 are arranged near the lower part of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300) as in this embodiment. While adopting the arrangement), it is possible to prevent the durability of the lower dish unit 6400 from being lowered.

  The detail of the fastening mode of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 will be described. The main body plate portion 6431 includes a flange portion 6431a that projects outward from the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (a plane side and left and right both sides) excluding the front side. When the fitting frame portion 6434 is fitted into the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 with a gap in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), and the ball discharge device 6430 is fitted into the through hole 6412 as it is, The portion 6431 a abuts on the lower surface portion of the edge portion of the through hole 6412.

  On the other hand, the inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be contacted in the front-rear and left-right directions from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434, and the lower end portion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is As described above, it contacts the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction.

  In this way, the ball discharging device 6430 can be positioned on the covering base member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball discharging device 6430, and are fastened after the positions of the respective components are aligned. Each component can be fixed by tightening a fastening screw through the hole 6433. Therefore, assembly work can be facilitated.

  The intermediate holding member 6440 is a portion through which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the covering base member 6410 is inserted, and is provided in a plurality of through holes 6441 provided on the front side, and a metal main body portion 10014a (see FIG. 211). A portion where screws inserted through the formed through holes are fastened and fixed, and a plurality of fastening portions 6442 protruding on the back side, and a portion that interferes with the left upper end portion of the covering base member 6410 in the front-rear direction. And an interference portion 6443 formed in a plate shape.

  226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower dish unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower dish unit 6400. 226 and 227 show a state in which the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled from FIGS. 224 and 225.

  The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape in which the back side is opened and the opening width is narrowed toward the left and right center, and the V-shaped main body portion 6451 is disposed downward toward the left and right center; A plurality of insertion holes 6452 formed as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted into the lower edge of the main body portion 6451, a positioning portion 6453 formed in the vicinity of the center of the lower edge of the main body portion 6451, and the left and right sides of the main body portion 6451 A plurality of overhang fastening portions 6454 are formed in the vicinity of the end portion so as to be able to be screwed into the back side, and are formed in a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 at the right side portion of the main body portion 6451. The plurality of right-side reinforcing ribs 6455 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6451, and the main body portion 64 formed in a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the left side portion of the main body portion 6451. 1 with a plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 aligned in the longitudinal direction, mainly comprises.

  The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed with higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. Thereby, the person who performs a fraudulent act can limit the location where the through hole is easily formed in order to allow the unauthorized member to enter the pachinko machine 10010. That is, compared with the case where a through hole is made in the V-shaped design member 6450, the degree of difficulty is lower in the case where a through hole is made in the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. The front right cover 10322 can be opened.

  For this reason, it is possible to reduce the number of points that are regularly checked to find fraud. That is, according to the present embodiment, since the through hole is highly likely to be formed in the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is not necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450. Thereby, compared with the case where it is necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450 and the cover 10321 and 10322 equally, a check burden can be reduced.

  The main body portion 6451 is formed of a thin wall and can be bent and deformed in a direction of narrowing the groove width (can be bent and deformed in a state of being crushed up and down). Since the V-shaped design member 6450 is fitted to the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 of the operation device 10300, the vertical displacement that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated is via the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. Communicated. When the vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 is bent and deformed in the direction of narrowing the groove width of the main body 6451, so that at least a part of the vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 is caused by the deflection of the V-shaped design member 6450. Can be absorbed.

  That is, after operating at least a part of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 by deformation of the V-shaped design member 6450, the load can be transmitted downstream (for example, the covering base member 6410). Therefore, since the load transmitted to the main body 6411 of the covering base member 6410 disposed below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, the amount of displacement of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 is determined by the operation. In addition, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

  The positioning portion 6453 includes a fastening portion 6453L formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the left side with respect to the left and right center, and a plate-like projecting portion projecting in a plate shape on the back side on the opposite side of the fastening portion 6453L. 6453R.

  The insertion hole 6452 is a portion that is fixed to the covering base member 6410 when a fastening screw is screwed in a state where the fastening portion of the covering base member 6410 enters from the front side into a recess formed on the front side. is there. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled in a manner approaching from the back side of the covering base member 6410 (an example of the movement trajectory of the V-shaped design member 6450 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 226 and 227).

  It should be noted that at least a part of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (in the present embodiment, the lower right insertion hole 6452) is invisible in the assembled state when viewed from the insertion direction of the fastening screw in the lower plate forming member 6420 (FIG. 230 (b)). That is, in a state in which the lower plate forming member 6420 is assembled to the covering base member 6410, the fastening screw inserted into at least a part of the insertion holes 6452 cannot be loosened, and the V-shaped design member is removed from the covering base member 6410. Since it is necessary to disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420 as a step before disassembling 6450, the number of steps required to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450 can be increased.

  In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is drilled in the front-rear longitudinal portion 6426c, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction, and a fastening screw that is screwed into the lower left fastening portion 6453L is inserted, and the lower right fastening portion 6453L is inserted by the screwing. And an insertion portion 6426c1 to be fixed. In addition, the operation device 10300 is disposed in such a manner that the insertion portion 6426c1 is shielded in a rear view (see FIG. 232).

  Therefore, as a premise for disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operation device 10300 and move the insertion portion 6426c1 from a position where it is shielded. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, it is possible to increase the necessary man-hours such as removing the operation device 10300 and disassembling the lower dish forming member 6420. Thereby, the V-shaped design member 6450 can be removed illegally, and an illegal action entering the inside through the created gap can be suppressed.

  The plate-like projecting portion 6453R abuts on the upper surface of the front vertically long portion 6426c of the plate-like support portion 6426 in the assembled state (see FIG. 230 (b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-like protruding portion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-like support portion 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-like supporting portion 6426 is suppressed by the plate-like protruding portion 6453R.

  Thereby, for example, even when the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is given a load in the lifting direction from the player, the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 219) and the fitting portion 6426d of the operation device 10300 are provided. And the front side portion of the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced in the upward direction as the operation device 10300 is displaced in the upward direction.

  Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-like projecting portion 6453R, the upward displacement of the operation device 10300 can be suppressed.

  The left and right overhang fastening portions 6454 are portions into which fastening screws inserted through resin intermediate members (not shown) fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014 are screwed. The rear side of the fastening portion 6453L (the side close to the metal main body 10014a).

  The right-side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left-side reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs for reinforcing the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and are thinly deformable by themselves so that the displacement is transmitted downstream due to their own deformation. It also has a function as a buffering means (displacement transmission suppressing means) for suppressing the above. As shown in FIG. 227, the left reinforcing rib 6456 is arranged denser than the right reinforcing rib 6455. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

  228 (a) is a schematic sectional view of the right reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the left reinforcing rib 6456. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 228 (a) and FIG. 228 (b), the cross section in the plane which divides the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 in the thickness direction is illustrated. The reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are formed to have a common thickness, and are designed to change the dimension in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction corresponding to the groove width of the main body portion 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a typical example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the right reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-like portion extending from the groove bottom portion of the main body portion 6451 to the back side, and is a coupling portion coupled to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. 6455a, an upper facing portion 6455b that is disposed opposite and parallel to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap, and an aspect in which the separation width increases toward the back side with respect to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. And a lower facing portion 6455c opposed to each other in an inclined manner.

  The upper facing portion 6455b is a portion to which the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6455b are disposed substantially in parallel, it is possible to avoid contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point, and the load can be distributed at the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load resistance of the right reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322. Accordingly, the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 after fitting can be prevented from being separated from the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and can be prevented from colliding with each other and being rubbed. Therefore, generation | occurrence | production of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

  Since the lower facing portion 6455c is closer to the side closer to the operation device 10300 (the back side, the side on which the displacement of the right front cover 10322 tends to increase), the separation width with the lower plate of the main body portion 6451 is increased. The allowable amount of downward displacement of the rib 6455 itself can be increased, and collision (contact) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 can be avoided when the displacement occurs.

  Therefore, since the right reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a buffer member, the ratio of the displacement and load transmitted through the right front cover 10322 to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the downstream side (lower right side) of the right reinforcing rib 6455 starting from the right front cover 10322, but the right reinforcing rib 6455 plays a role as a buffer member to operate the right reinforcing rib 6455. The rate at which loads, displacements, and vibrations associated with the operation and driving of the device 10300 are transmitted to the operation handle 51 can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to secure a gameability in which the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without feeling uncomfortable.

  As shown in FIG. 228 (b), the left reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-like portion extending from the groove bottom portion of the main body portion 6451 to the back surface side, and is a coupling portion coupled to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. 6456a, an upper facing portion 6456b that is disposed in parallel with the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap, and an overhanging portion 6456c that projects to the back side from the rear side edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. And a lower facing portion 6456d that is opposed and arranged in parallel to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap.

  The upper facing portion 6456b is a portion to which the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6456b are disposed substantially parallel to each other, it is possible to avoid contact with the left front cover 10321 at one point and to distribute the load at the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load resistance of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321. Accordingly, the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 after fitting can be prevented from being separated from the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and can be prevented from colliding with each other and being rubbed. Therefore, generation | occurrence | production of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

  The overhanging portion 6456c includes an upper edge portion that inclines in a direction (downward) away from the upper surface portion of the main body portion 6451 toward the back side. Accordingly, the overhanging portion 6456c is not a portion that always contacts the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 but is formed as a portion that first contacts when the downward displacement amount of the left front cover 10321 is increased to some extent. That is, the overhanging portion 6456c can function as a portion (fail safe) for suppressing the displacement when the amount of displacement of the left front cover 10321 becomes abnormally large.

  Note that the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6456c may be formed at the surface position of the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, since the length of the front-rear position where the load transmitted through the left front cover 10321 can be dispersed can be increased, the load resistance of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

  The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the back cover portion 10014b when the back cover portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 is inserted between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. It is. Since the lower facing portions 6456d of the plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 are in contact with the back cover portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed, and the amount of downward displacement of the back cover portion 10014b can be reduced. .

  Thereby, since the arrangement of the back cover portion 10014b can be easily maintained, a space above the lower plate 50 (a space in which a ball is stored and a space in which a player can put a hand) is formed. Narrowing can be prevented.

  That is, the back cover portion 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 via the V-shaped design member 6450, but a load transmitted from the operation device 10300 side via the left front cover 10321 displaces the back cover portion 10014b. Can be suppressed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the surface constituting the lower plate 50 is displaced and collides with the game ball to generate abnormal noise.

  As described above, the left reinforcing rib 6456 is densely arranged on the right reinforcing rib as compared to the arrangement interval 6455. Therefore, it is configured to be able to cope with a larger load. In the present embodiment, the weight of the player's hand touching the ball stored in the upper plate 17 disposed on the left side is likely to be applied, and load unevenness tends to occur on the left and right sides. It is possible to deal with uneven loads.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, different shapes of loads can be accommodated by making the right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 different in shape. That is, in the right reinforcing rib 6455, a sufficient gap is formed between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower facing portion 6455c to interrupt the transmission of the load, so that an instantaneous load or impact via the operation device 10300 can be prevented. Can be prevented from being transmitted to the operation handle 51, while the left reinforcing rib 6456 supports the load by distributing the load, so that even when the weight is applied for a long time via the upper plate 17, It is possible to prevent the covering portion 10014b from being displaced. Thus, in the present embodiment, the shape of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is designed so as to cope with a load mode that is likely to cause a problem.

  229 (a) is a top view of the lower dish unit 6400, FIG. 229 (b) is a front view of the lower dish unit 6400, and FIG. 230 (a) is a bottom view of the lower dish unit 6400. 230 (b) is a rear view of the lower dish unit 6400, FIG. 231 (a) is a right side view of the lower dish unit 6400 in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 231 (b) is a lower dish unit. It is a left view in the arrow R direction view of 6400.

  As shown in FIGS. 229 (a) and 230 (b), the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower dish forming member 6420 is arranged in a manner straddling the recessed shape portion 6414 of the covering base member 6410 from side to side. The plate-like support portion 6426 is placed so as to be in surface contact with the upper surface of the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411, while being arranged away from the recessed shape portion 6414. Hereinafter, details of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 will be described.

  The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are portions of a portion that bulges (extends) downward from the lower surface, similarly to the deformation when pressing a part of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 from above. It is a part which comprises the front and back, and one shape of the front and back and the other shape are similar. In other words, the bottom view of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the inner shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 in the top view are formed as shapes whose scales are changed by an amount that can ensure the plate thickness of the main body portion 6411. The Therefore, the other shape can be easily imagined from one shape.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (a), the protruding shape portion 6413 gradually increases in the left-right width toward the front side. As shown in FIG. 229 (a), the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower dish forming member 6420 is arranged closer to the front side than the center in the front-rear direction of the recessed shape portion 6414. The plate-like support portion 6426 can be supported at a location where the left and right widths of the 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are large. As a result, when the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced in such a manner that it sinks downward, the main body portion 6411 can be partially bent sufficiently, but details will be described later.

  Here, in a game-enabled state, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-like support portion 6426, and the plate-like support portion 6426 can be displaced up and down as the player operates the operation device 10300. In relation to this displacement, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are made of a resin material, and a load is generated between the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410, There is a possibility that shavings may be generated by collision or rubbing.

  When the shavings are generated around the operation device 10300, for example, the shavings enter into the gap and the clearance cannot be secured, so that a malfunction may occur, or the shavings enter the detection area of the detection sensor and cause false detection. Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, generation of shaving powder can be suppressed or the generation amount thereof can be reduced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing the displacement of the plate-like support portion 6426 from being directly transmitted to the main body portion 6411.

  That is, when a load in the push-down direction is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414, thereby the main body portion 6411. The displacement of other parts such as can be made unnecessary.

  On the other hand, when a load in the lifting direction is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced upward, the displacement is received by the plate-like projecting portion 6453R (see FIG. 232), and the V-shaped design member Since it is converted into the deformation of 6450, the displacement of other parts such as the main body 6411 can be made unnecessary.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operation device 10300 is only indirectly transmitted to the main body portion 6411. With such a configuration, the main body portion 6411 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged.

  As shown in FIGS. 231 (a) and 231 (b), the lower surface of the protruding portion 6413 is formed as a plane along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 is the front side. It is formed as an inclined plane that rises toward the top. This configuration works favorably when, for example, the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

  When the front frame 10014 is stored alone, it is generally considered that the front frame 10014 is often placed on the floor of concrete or flooring in such a manner that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 is in contact with the floor. At this time, it is considered that it is preferable that the entire lower surface is in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoiding load concentration. However, in this case, there is a possibility that floor stains adhere to the entire lower surface. Although the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is a position that is difficult for a player to see, it is preferable to avoid the adhesion of dirt as long as it is a product.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the projecting shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that rises upward toward the front side. When the installation shape portion 6413 comes into contact with the floor surface, a gap is generated between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411. Therefore, the location where the dirt comes into contact with the floor surface is limited to the projection shape portion 6413. can do. Accordingly, when the game store side installs the front frame 10014 in a playable state, it is only necessary to wipe off the dirt of the protruding shape portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. .

  Further, the projecting shape portion 6413 also functions as a finger hook portion for hooking a finger when carrying the front frame 10014. Conventionally, since the lower plate portion is arranged at the center of the left and right of the front frame, it is easy to hang a hand on the lower plate portion and lift the front frame and assemble it to the back frame (outer frame 11, inner frame 12). Although it was possible, in the front frame 10014 of the present embodiment, the lower plate 50 is disposed on the left side in the left-right direction (opening / closing axis side), so it is difficult to lift and assemble the front frame 10014 by hooking on the lower plate 50. It is made into the composition.

  On the other hand, if the front frame 10014 is lifted by catching the hand on the operation handle 51, the weight of the front frame 10014 is applied to the base side of the operation handle 41, which may damage the operation handle 51. Is not preferred.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the protruding shape portion 6413 that also functions as a finger-hanging portion is disposed at the left and right central positions so that it can be recommended that the front frame 10014 be lifted by placing a hand on the bottom surface of the lower dish unit 6400. An operator can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the rear frame by catching the protruding shape portion 6413 to lift the front frame 10014 and pivotally supporting the front frame 10014 on the rear frame.

  Then, by adopting an operation procedure in which an operation of wiping off the dirt before and after the time when the finger is put on is performed, it is possible to make the worker aware of the location where the dirt needs to be wiped off in connection with the carrying operation. Therefore, forgetting to wipe off the dirt can be prevented.

  Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured as a gap that is not excessive or deficient in correspondence with the amount of deformation expected in the projecting shape portion 6413. More specifically, the gap between the main body 6411 and the floor surface increases from the shape of the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 toward the front side. This increases in width as the protruding shape portion 6413 moves toward the front side. This corresponds to an increase in the deformable amount (deflection amount) due to the load.

  That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor surface, even when the projecting shape portion 6413 is bent and deformed by the weight of the front frame 10014, it is easy to secure a gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor. Can do. On the other hand, when the projecting shape portion 6413 is bent and deformed to the limit, and there is no gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface, the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 may easily come into contact with the floor surface. Therefore, the weight of the front frame 10014 can be supported by the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411.

  Accordingly, even if the front frame 10014 placed on the floor surface is heavier than expected or an excessive load is applied to the front frame 10014 placed on the floor surface, a part of the main body 6411 It is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on.

  In addition, the deformable amount is formed larger toward the front side of the projecting shape portion 6413. It works well even during game execution. For example, when exchanging a thousand boxes, a store clerk of the amusement shop slides the thousand boxes back and forth on the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the lower side of the projecting shape portion 6413. At this time, the thousand boxes and the lower surface of the front frame 10014 are moved. May collide. If the impact or load caused by the collision is accumulated in the component member as fatigue, the component member is destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, and it may be difficult to continue the game. There is.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the deformation | transformation amount of the projecting shape part 6413 may become large, so that it goes to the front side which is easy to collide with a thousand-car box. Therefore, it is possible to easily release the impact and load caused by the collision with the car box by deformation (deflection deformation), and the breakage of the projecting shape portion 6413 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

  In addition, on the left and right sides of the projecting shape portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed so as to rise toward the front side (see FIG. 231 (a)). Thereby, the possibility that the thousand box and the main body part 6411 collide with each other on the left and right sides of the projecting shape part 6413 when the thousand box is replaced can be reduced. Thereby, since possibility that the lower bottom face of the main-body part 6411 will be damaged can be made low, it can be made easy to maintain a player's comfortable game environment.

  FIG. 232 is a rear view of the lower dish unit 6400. In FIG. 232, the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 is illustrated, and the outer shape of the other operation device 10300 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edge portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 are the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 of the V-shaped design member 6450 (upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b (FIGS. 228 (a) and 228 (2)). supported by b))).

  The main body portion 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape when viewed from the back, and the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are plate-shaped extending in the groove width direction of the main body portion 6451, so that the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 Is directed in a direction (upward oblique direction) having a directional component that returns the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 back to the left and right centers. For example, the restoring force from the bending deformation of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed in the upward oblique direction.

  Accordingly, not only the vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 but also the horizontal displacement can be dealt with. For example, even when the movement direction of the operation portion (for example, the swing operation member 10310) of the operation device 10300 does not have a horizontal component as in the present embodiment, the downward load applied by the player is left and right. When the load is applied, the entire operation device 10300 may be displaced downward and may be slightly displaced (vibrated) in the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 can respond to the lateral displacement of the operation device 10300 by bending and deforming based on their curved shape (absorbing the lateral displacement or restoring force) Further, the operation device 10300 can be returned to the position before the displacement at an early stage when the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed upward and toward the left and right center. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the design (see FIG. 207) in the front view of the front frame 10014.

  FIG. 233 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower pan unit 6400 along the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229 (a), and FIG. 233 (b) is a lower pan unit 6400 along the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. FIG. 233 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit 6400 along the CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc line of FIG. 229 (a). In FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), the vicinity of the edge of the through-hole 6412 in the cross section is shown enlarged.

  As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), in the assembled state of the lower dish unit 6400, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 protrudes from the lower dish forming member 6420 (in the rear side portion, the protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423). It is pressed against the installation end portion (lower end portion) and the ball discharge device 6430 (the flange portion 6431a thereof). Thereby, the surrounding part of the through-hole 6412 can be reinforced with the strength of the lower dish forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430.

  The inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can contact in the front-rear and left-right directions from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 (see FIG. 224). As described above, the lower end portion of the plate portion 6423 is in contact with the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 233 (c)). Thereby, since the edge part of the through-hole 6412 can be reinforced, the design freedom of the through-hole 6412 can be improved.

  As described above, since the ball removal lever 52 is disposed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom surface port 6432 when not operated, the degree to which the strength is reduced by forming the opening is determined. It can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b (see FIG. 233 (b)).

  As a result, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom surface port 6432 can be prevented from becoming fragile, and therefore, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom surface port 6432 are arranged near the lower part of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300) as in this embodiment. While adopting the arrangement), it is possible to prevent the durability of the lower dish unit 6400 from being lowered.

  As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed such that the width is increased and the recessed depth is increased toward the front side. That is, the concave shape portion 6414 is formed to be more easily bent toward the front side.

  Accordingly, sufficient bending performance can be imparted to the recessed shape portion 6414 in the vicinity of the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operation device 10300 is likely to be large. Generation | occurrence | production of the situation where the covering base member 6410 which supports the operation device 10300 with a load is damaged (for example, it breaks) can be suppressed. This will be described in detail.

  As described above, the operation device 10300 is a device that can be operated in a plurality of operation modes. An operation timing and an operation mode are notified by a display device or the like, and the player has a role of operating the operation device 10300 in accordance with the notification to draw the player into the game. Here, the frequency for each operation mode in the notification is not constant.

  For example, as an example of control, the swing operation member 10310 is controlled to stop at the initial position from the start of the game until the specific reach effect is executed (see FIG. 215 (a)). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 during business hours.

  In this state, the player performs a push-in operation (push operation) of the lens member 10317 for an operation in response to a notification for prompting an operation in the display effect (notification such as “Press the button!”), A stage change, or the like. The Therefore, most of the load generated by the operation is a load generated when the lens member 10317 is pushed in, and is a load along the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215 (a)). Since the occurrence frequency of notification is high, the occurrence frequency of this load is increased.

  On the other hand, when a specific reach effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is drive-controlled so as to displace the swing operation member 10310 up and down. For example, the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at a downward position. In such a state (see FIG. 215 (b)), notification for prompting the operation is executed.

  The operation direction in this case is a direction Y17b (see FIG. 215 (b)) further inclined by an angle θ17y in the front-rear direction compared to the state in which the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at the upward position, and the direction Y17b Along the load. Since the occurrence of notification is limited to the execution of a specific reach production, the occurrence frequency is low.

  That is, the load occurrence frequency along the direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the load occurrence frequency along the direction Y17b. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is a mode in which the width is increased and the recessed depth is increased toward the front side, the load is increased toward the front side. It is formed so that the corresponding performance of can be improved.

  In other words, compared to the case where the shape is common in the front-rear direction, it can be configured so as to be able to cope with the difference in the frequency of occurrence of the load in the right place, resulting in excessive deformation or insufficient deformation due to the applied load. It can be made easy to avoid being easily damaged.

  Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, the side closer to the player and the side where the frequency of occurrence of the load during operation is high are both on the front side, so that the concave shape portion 6414 becomes wider toward the front side. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the initial position of the swing operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of load generation during operation is reversed, and in this case, the concave shape becomes wider toward the back side. Compared to a common shape in the front-rear direction, by forming in the deep bottom, it can be configured so that it can cope with the difference in load occurrence frequency in the right place, and too much deformation due to the applied load It can be made easy to avoid the occurrence of damage or insufficient deformation due to insufficient deformation.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (b) corresponding to the central cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-like portion 6426 b is vertically contacted with the main body portion 6411 at positions on the left and right outer sides than both left and right width ends of the recessed shape portion 6414. Touch.

  Thereby, compared with the case where drooping plate-shaped part 6426b contact | abuts on the upper edge part of the recessed shape part 6414, the ratio transmitted to the recessed shape part 6414 of the load from the operation device 10300 can be made low. . Thereby, it can suppress that the recessed shape part 6414 is damaged by the load at the time of operating the operating device 10300.

  Further, as a response to the load, not only the bending of the recessed shape portion 6414 but also the bending of the plate portion from the upper edge portion of the recessed shape portion 6414 to the contact position of the hanging plate shape portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 is used. Therefore, the allowable load can be increased.

  FIG. 234 is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit 6400 taken along the CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV line of FIG. 229 (a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 includes a flat plate-like portion 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed, and downward from the left and right and rear edge portions of the flat plate-like portion 6426a. A drooping plate-like portion 6426b that hangs down in a plate shape, and a front vertically long portion that is coupled to the front side edge of the flat plate-like portion 6426a and is formed taller than the flat plate-like portion 6426a and is opened downward. 6426c and a fitting portion 6426d that extends from the front vertically long portion 6426c to the back side and is fitted with the operation device 10300. In the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 are referred to as appropriate.

  The flat plate-like portion 6426a is formed wider than the left and right widths of the recessed shape portion 6414, and is configured to cover the front half of the recessed shape portion 6414. A drooping plate-like portion 6426b is formed between the flat plate-like portion 6426a and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 (up and down). That is, the flat plate-like portion 6426a does not abut the main body portion 6411, and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the bottom (see FIG. 225), and the extended end portion of the hanging plate-like portion 6426b abuts the main body portion 6411. The position of the flat plate-like portion 6426a with respect to the covering base member 6410 is determined.

  As described above, the flat plate-like portion 6426a and the drooping plate-like portion 6426b are not formed in a block shape, but are formed in a box shape having an open bottom, so that the flat plate-like portion 6426a and the drooping plate-like portion 6426b are easily bent and deformed. It is supposed to be configured. Accordingly, not only the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 are bent and deformed by a load via the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 211), but also the flat plate-like portion 6426a and the hanging plate-like portion. 6426b can be bent and deformed, and a plate-like support portion 6426 and a covering base member 6410 (a main body portion 6411, a protruding shape portion 6413, and a recessed shape portion 6414) disposed below the operation device 10300 are provided. Further damage can be prevented.

  The hanging plate-like portion 6426b extends to the top surface of the bottom of the main body portion 6411, but does not extend until it enters the recessed shape portion 6414. That is, a space is generated between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed shape portion 6414 (see below the rear end portion of the flat plate-like portion 6426a in FIG. 234). Thereby, since the state without a framework can be maintained inside the recessed shape portion 6414, the deformation of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being hindered.

  Further, the space between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even when liquid enters from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower dish unit 6400, the liquid that has traveled behind the plate-like support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, the flow of liquid entering the back can be weakened. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy for the liquid to enter the front frame 10014.

  The front-side vertically long portion 6426c is a portion that receives a load via the operation device 10300 by a fitting portion 6426d extending to the back side, and the lower portion on the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. Thus, the load applied to the operation device 10300 from the player can be distributed not only to the main body portion 6411 but also to the V-shaped design member 6450, so that the load applied to each component can be weakened. it can.

  In addition, a space is also generated between the front vertically long portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414. Thereby, since the state without a framework can be maintained inside the recessed shape portion 6414, the deformation of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being hindered.

  Further, the space between the front vertically long portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even when liquid enters from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower dish unit 6400, the liquid that has traveled behind the plate-like support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, the flow of liquid entering the back can be weakened. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy for the liquid to enter the front frame 10014.

  The fitting portion 6426d is a portion that is elongated in the lateral direction so as to be fitted with the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) and receives a load from the operation device 10300. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-like reinforcing ribs 6426d1 coupled to the lower surface and the front vertical portion 6426c formed on the extending base end side.

  Since the reinforcing rib 6426d1 can suppress the vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting portion 6426d, the rigidity of the fitting portion 6426d can endure even when a load is applied to displace the operation device 10300 downward. As a result, the displacement of the operation device 10300 can be prevented from occurring excessively.

  Here, the operation member 10300 is placed on the upper side of the resin member 6427. Therefore, the load caused by the operation or vibration of the player's operation member 10300 is transmitted to the plate-like support portion 6426 via the resin member, and is transmitted to the covering base member 6410 disposed downstream thereof. The support portion 6426 is supported by the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

  In the present embodiment, since the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes toward the front side (see FIG. 234), the front and rear in the direction of the load transmitted from the operation member 10300 to the main body portion 6411. The direction component can be directed to the front side (the load can be released to the front side).

  That is, it is possible to avoid a problem that may occur when the load generated from the operation device 10300 is transmitted to the back side (the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is shaken, affecting the flow-down mode of the launched ball, or the board is cracked by the load being transmitted to the board boxes 100 to 104 and the electronic board. Can be prevented.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 235 to FIG. 264, the upper effect device 6500 will be described. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. 235 and 236 show the state where the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 described above are omitted, and the upper effect device 6500 is disassembled forward from the metal main body 10014a.

  As shown in FIG. 235, the top effect device 6500 is a device that covers the front side of the acoustic device 6610 arranged in a pair of left and right, and an electrical decoration board 6570 in which light emitting means such as LEDs are arranged. In addition, each of the constituent members that serve as an intermediary for delivering the light emitted from the LED to the player is disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (plate spring) 6584d that generates an urging force in the separation direction with respect to the metal main body portion 10014a is disposed on the back side of the upper effect device 6500. Thereby, the fastening force of the fastening screw which fixes the upper production | presentation apparatus 6500 to the metal main-body part 10014a can be increased (it clamps and fixes stably).

  237 is an exploded front perspective view of upper rendering device 6500, and FIG. 238 is an exploded rear perspective view of upper rendering device 6500. 237 and 238 illustrate a state in which the upper lid member 6510 of the upper effect device 6500 is disassembled upward.

  The upper production device 6500 includes a plate-like upper lid member 6510, front units 6520 to 6550 that occupy the front portion below the upper lid member 6510, and rear units 6560 to 6550 disposed behind the front units 6520 to 6550. 6580.

  The upper lid member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the upper effect device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and is configured as a semi-elliptical plate-like portion obtained by dividing a long ellipse on the left and right. Portion 6511, a plurality of insertion holes 6512 that are vertically drilled in the vicinity of the front side edge of main body plate portion 6511 and configured to allow fastening screws to pass therethrough, and extend downward from the back side portion of main body plate portion 6511 A female screw hole is formed from the back surface of the extended tip, and a plurality of fastening parts 6513 configured to be able to fasten a fastening screw inserted into the female main body part 10014a are mainly provided.

  The upper lid member 6510 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a at the back side portion where the fastening portion 6513 is extended, and the other components of the upper effect device 6500 are supported by fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6512. That is, the mechanical displacement of the upper lid member 6510 can be used to suppress the downward displacement of the front end side portion of the upper rendering device 6500.

  The fastening portion 6513 includes a plate-like plate portion 6513a connected to the main body plate portion 6511 on the front side thereof. Thereby, it can suppress that the main body board part 6511 deform | transforms in the aspect which falls forward, or is displaced.

  The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is disposed to face the front surface of the plate in which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see the corresponding FIG. 125 (a) described above, the fastening portion 419 corresponds to the fastening portion 6513 and the plate portion 6513a corresponds to the enlarged rib 419a), the upper cover member 6510 includes the acoustic device 6610 and the metal main body portion 10014a. Can be prevented from coming off.

  The upper lid member 6510 is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface side, and a concavo-convex shape portion 6514 formed so as to protrude downward from the lower surface is formed as a decoration on the entire surface. The uneven-shaped portion 6514 can increase the force that resists the load in the direction perpendicular to the plane as compared to the case where the upper cover member 6510 having the same thickness is formed of a flat plate member having a smooth surface (maintaining the shape). Can be made easier).

  239 is an exploded front perspective view of upper rendering device 6500, and FIG. 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of upper rendering device 6500. In FIGS. 239 and 240, the upper lid member 6510 of the upper effect device 6500 is not shown, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are disassembled in front of the rear units 6560 to 6580. In the present embodiment, the front stage units 6520 to 6550 are moved in an obliquely downward front direction (the direction in which the extended plate portion 6552 is formed, the direction along the surface) with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580, so that the upper effect device 6500 is moved. Is configured to be disassembled, details will be described later.

  In this embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 have a role of receiving, refracting, and transmitting light emitted from light emitting means such as LEDs, and the rear units 6560 to 6580 emit light such as LEDs. It has a role as a means and a role of supporting an electric decoration board on which a light emitting means such as an LED is disposed. First, the rear units 6560 to 6580 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 241 (a) is a front view of the rear units 6560-6580, FIG. 241 (b) is a front view of the electrical decoration board 6570, and FIG. 242 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear units 6560-6580. FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear units 6560-6580.

  As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the rear units 6560 to 6580 have a plurality of partition members 6560 formed in a manner of partitioning the internal space into a plurality of front views, and a plurality of LEDs that irradiate the partition member 6560 with light. A pair of the electric decoration board 6570 to be disposed and a pair of layers arranged on the back side of the partitioning member 6560 and having a slight gap with respect to the electric decoration board 6570 in the inner region of the outer shape and surface-supporting in the outer portion. The back support member 6580 is mainly provided.

  Note that surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the electric decoration board 6570 can be maintained, and the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are supported so as to be displaceable back and forth by the gap. Means that.

  The partition member 6560 is arranged to face and oppose the front side of the electrical decoration board 6570, and is configured to partition the light emitted from the respective illumination units 6574 to 6576 of the electrical decoration board 6570 from the vicinity of the electrical decoration board 6570. The By dividing in this way, the light emitted from each illumination unit 6574-6576 can be visually recognized for each division, and the light emission mode of the light emitted from each illumination unit 6574-6576 is greatly different. However, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced.

  The partitioning member 6560 includes a counter plate portion 6561 arranged to face the electric decoration board 6570, a central light hole 6562 formed in the left and right central portion of the counter plate portion 6561, and holes formed in the left and right lower portions of the counter plate portion 6561. Left and right light holes 6563 provided, a plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted through the back surface support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of large diameter cylindrical portions 6565 extending to the back surface of the opposing plate portion 6561 A central cylindrical portion 6566 extending to the front side of the counter plate portion 6561 in a rectangular tube shape surrounding the central light hole 6562 and a long cylindrical shape surrounding the left and right light hole 6563 to the front side of the counter plate portion 6561 A plate-like coupling that is formed from an extended left and right tube portion 6567 and a plate-like portion that is T-shaped in front view, and that connects the counter plate portion 6561, the central tube portion 6666, and the left and right tube portion 6567 on the front side of the counter plate portion 6561. Part And 568, a mainly includes.

  The opposing plate portion 6561 includes flange portions 6561a to 6561c that protrude in a left-right elongated shape from the upper edge portion to the back side. The first flange portion 6561 a is formed above the central light hole 6562. The second flange portion 6561b is formed as a pair of left and right, and extends from the left and right ends of the first flange portion 6561a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564 from a position where a break is made. The third flange portion 6561c is formed as a left and right pair, and extends from a position opposite to the end portion of the second flange portion 6561b across the fastening portion 6564 to the vicinity of the left and right end portions of the plate-like coupling portion 6568.

  Each of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c has a role as a shielding plate that prevents light from entering and exiting between the partition member 6560 and the electric decoration board 6570, and the cut is disposed at least on the electric decoration board 6570. It is comprised in the location where the light irradiated from LED to be leaked is hard to leak. In other words, this place is a place where even if light is incident from the outside, the light is not easily mixed with the light emitted from the LED.

  The discontinuity between the first flange portion 6561a and the second flange portion 6561b is formed at a location between the central light hole 6562 and the left and right light hole 6563. The place where it is not arranged is a cut. Therefore, since there is no LED that causes light leakage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which light leaks from a break.

  The break between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is formed at a place where the fastening portion 6564 is disposed, and the place where the alternative part that blocks light is arranged is intentionally a break. It is a thing. That is, even if light travels to a break, light that attempts to pass through the break is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so that occurrence of an event of light leaking from the break can be suppressed.

  Here, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c can be configured as a series of unbroken portions, but in that case, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c cannot sufficiently secure rigidity, and the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 It is necessary to counteract only the force generated by the fastening screw that fastens and fastens the fastening portion 6564 to the downward load applied to the member arranged in front of the partitioning member 6560, assuming gravity or a load given by the player. Occurs. In this embodiment, as the number of the fastening portions 6564 increases, not only the number of work steps for fastening the fastening screws increases, but also the surface area of the electrical decoration board 6570 decreases, and the locations where the LEDs can be arranged are limited. This reduces the design freedom of 6570.

  On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6561a to 6561c into a length that can ensure the rigidity, it is possible to counter the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 with the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. Therefore, the number of fastening portions 6564 can be limited, and the number of work steps can be reduced and the degree of freedom in designing the electrical decoration board 6570 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction is designed according to the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. In the present embodiment, the shape of the upper rendering device 6500 is formed from a semi-elliptical shape in which the width in the front-rear direction becomes longer toward the left and right center when viewed from above (see FIG. 237). In general, since a load (for example, a hanging load) given by the player is applied at the front side end of the upper effect device 6500, the load given by the player at the left and right central portion of the upper effect device 6500 is maximum. And gradually decreases as it approaches the left and right ends.

  On the other hand, the lengths of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are different from each other. More specifically, the left and right lengths of the second flange portion 6561b disposed on the left and right sides of the first flange portion 6561a formed on the center portion where the load is maximized are made longer, In addition, the third flange portion 6561c disposed on the left and right sides of the second flange portion 6561b is longer than the left and right lengths of the second flange portion 6561b. That is, the left and right lengths are shortest at the left and right central portions, and gradually become longer as they approach the left and right end portions. Thereby, a counter force can be generated without excess or deficiency in the load applied to the upper effect device 6500.

  Thereby, since the deformation | transformation and displacement of the division member 6560 can be suppressed, the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the division member 6560 and the electrical decoration board 6570 can be maintained stably. Note that the maintenance of the relative relationship (positional relationship) is not limited to the case where the force for holding the electric decoration board 6570 is reduced due to the deformation or displacement in the separation direction, and the electric decoration board 6570 is prevented from being displaced, but the deformation in the approaching direction is also maintained. It also includes a case where a load in the compression direction is generated on the electric decoration board 6570 due to or displacement and the electric decoration board 6570 is prevented from being broken or deformed.

  The central light hole 6562 and the left and right light hole 6563 are a plurality of through holes that are formed in correspondence with the pattern of the LEDs arranged on the electric decoration board 6570. The central light hole 6562 is configured as a set of through holes slightly larger than the outer shape of a single LED, while the left and right light holes 6563 are configured as a set of through holes having a size surrounding a plurality of LEDs. .

  The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back support member 6580, and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed to protrude from the fastening portion 6564 to the back side. Accordingly, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are aligned.

  The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 includes a front-side cylinder portion that extends to the front side in the shape of a cylinder having the same diameter, and includes an insertion hole 6565a that is drilled through the bottom of the tip so that a fastening screw can be inserted. A fastening screw that passes from the back side to the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the insertion hole 6565a, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to a partition unit 6540 described later. With this configuration, the process of inserting the fastening screw into the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed in the assembled state of the rear units 6560 to 6580 (see FIGS. 239 and 240). it can.

  The central cylinder portion 6566 and the left and right cylinder portions 6567 are extended until they reach the rear side end portions of the front units 6520 to 6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central tube portion 6566 and the left and right tube portions 6567 is incident on the front units 6520 to 6550.

  The plate-like coupling portion 6568 is a portion to which the load is transmitted via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the upper effect device 6500, and the central cylinder portion 6566. The upper surface is disposed at a position slightly higher than the upper end of the. As a result, the plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 takes charge of the load prior to the central cylindrical portion 6566, so that occurrence of a situation where a load is applied to the central cylindrical portion 6566 can be suppressed, and the central cylindrical portion 6566 is deformed or displaced. Can be easily avoided.

  The plate-like coupling portion 6568 is extended downward until the plate-like portion reaches the left and right cylindrical portions 6567. Accordingly, when a load is transmitted to the plate-like coupling portion 6568 via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the load is also resisted by the resistance force generated by the plate-like portion reaching the left and right cylindrical portions 6567. can do. In this case, since it is formed of a plate-like portion, a counter force can be generated by the bending deformation of the plate-like portion itself, so that the displacement and deformation of the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 can be suppressed.

  The electrical decoration board 6570 is a so-called printed board, and is a plate-like board portion 6571 and a portion that is drilled or notched in the board portion 6571 and is fastened through the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560. An insertion portion 6572, a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 through which the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is inserted, and a plurality of LEDs (FIG. 241 (FIG. 241) b) a first illuminating part 6574 formed from a uniform rectangle) and a plurality of LEDs arranged symmetrically with respect to the first illuminating part 6574 as a reference, and a vertical center of the substrate part 6571. A second illuminating part 6575 arranged near the part, a third illuminating part 6576 arranged symmetrically along the lower end of the substrate part 6571, and a connector for connecting electrical wiring (not shown). And 6577, a mainly includes.

  As shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and 241 (b), each illumination unit 6574-6576 is formed of a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light to the front side along the front-rear direction, and is relative to the partition member 6560. It is arranged according to the general positional relationship. That is, the first illumination unit 6574 is located at a position corresponding to the central light hole 6562, the second illumination unit 6575 is located at a position surrounded by the left and right light hole 6563, and the third illumination unit 6576 is below the partition member 6560. They are respectively arranged at positions below the edge. Thereby, each illumination part 6574-6576 makes the separate area | region divided by the division member 6560 shine. The first illumination unit 6574 and the second illumination unit 6575 illuminate the area inside the partition member 6560, while the third illumination unit 6576 illuminates the area outside the partition member 6560.

  Note that the third illumination unit 6576 is illustrated as being partially shielded by the partition member 6560 in front view. As will be described later, since the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 travels obliquely downward by the light receiving member 6558, the situation where the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 is blocked by the partition member 6560 is avoided. Accordingly, the third lighting unit 6576 and the partition member 6560 can be arranged to overlap at least partially in the front-rear direction.

  The thickness of the base plate portion 6571 is designed so that the fastening force in the fastening between the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 does not act on the fastening insertion portion 6572. That is, the electric decoration board 6570 is supported between the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 without being fastened and fixed.

  The fastening insertion portion 6572 is formed from a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape) in a front view. As a result, the assembly efficiency can be improved, but details will be described later.

  The back support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side, and is a pair of members that are substantially symmetrical with each other. A flange portion 6582 extending from the upper edge of the plate portion 6581 to the front side, an upper plate portion 6583 having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6582 and extending in a plate shape to the back side, and a front plate A rear box portion 6584 formed in a box shape connected to the left and right edge portions (edge portions on the opposite side of the pair of members facing each other) and the lower edge portion of the portion 6581 and opened to the back side; A lower surface box portion 6585 which is a portion of the portion 6584 and has a smooth upper surface on the side close to the rear surface box portion 6584 of the other party and is opened downward, and the lower surface box portion 6585 and the front plate portion A plate-like portion connected to 6581 A counter plate portion 6586 arranged to face the mating member (back support member 6580), and a notch portion 6587 which is a notch penetrating vertically between the counter plate portion 6586 and the lower surface box portion 6585. Prepare for.

  The front plate portion 6581 has a plurality of fastening supports in which an oblong rib that can support the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 6564 is inserted. A through hole formed in a vertically long oval shape with a left and right width slightly longer than the diameter of the portion 6581a and the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560, and is disposed at a position overlapping the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the front and rear direction. A plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c that are mainly drilled in the lower edge portion that constitutes the boundary between the plurality of positioning holes 6581b and the rear box portion 6584, and through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front units 6520 to 6550 can be inserted; Similar to the screw insertion portion 6581c, a plurality of holes are formed in the shape of a long hole along the lower edge portion that forms the boundary with the rear box portion 6584, and are used for positioning the front units 6520 to 6550. A-decided Me slots 6581D, is drilled at a location corresponding to the connector 6577 of the illuminations substrate 6570 mainly includes a wiring hole 6581e that can be passed back and forth electrical wiring, the.

  The ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a have the inner width in the left-right direction constituting the minor axis slightly longer than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560, while the outer width in the left-right direction is the electric decoration board 6570. It is made longer than the left-right width of the fastening insertion part 6572. Accordingly, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening portion 6564 is inserted into the inside of the oval rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the electric decoration board 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the oval rib. (See FIG. 244 (a)).

  The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and are opened along the moving direction of the front units 6520 to 6550. That is, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side (see FIGS. 244 (a) and 246 (b)).

  The front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the inclination direction in which the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed, and the fastening screws are screwed in along the descending inclination direction. (See FIG. 247).

  Thereby, compared with the case where it opens in the front-back direction, it becomes easy to avoid interference with the front units 6520-6550 and the electrical decoration board 6570, and the position of the screw insertion part 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d is brought close to the electrical decoration board 6570. Therefore, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed with the same size, a wide arrangement area of the electric decoration board 6570 can be secured, and when the electric decoration board 6570 is formed with the same size. A region where the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed can be narrowed (can be formed compactly).

  The flange portion 6582 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surfaces of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c of the partition member 6560. When a downward load (hanging direction load) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion that suppresses the forward tilt of the partition member 6560.

  The upper plate portion 6583 is provided at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 6513 (see FIG. 238), and includes a plurality of fitting recessed portions 6583a that are recessed to be fitted to the fastening portion 6513. The fitting recessed portion 6583a is open at the top and rear and is formed in a rectangular shape in the left-right direction (a shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513).

  The rear box portion 6584 includes a projecting portion 6584a projecting to the front side of the front plate portion 6581, a sound transmission unit 6584b made of punching metal covering an opening formed in the projecting portion 6584a, and a right member. A light receiving portion 6584c formed of a light-transmitting member disposed at the right end of the overhang portion 6584a, and an upper end portion disposed at a position closest to the center (a position closer to the front plate portion 6581) and assembled. In FIG. 207, a pair of plate-like metal spring members 6584d formed so as to be able to generate a biasing force in a direction repelling from the metal main body 10014a, and an insertion hole 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are inserted. And a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which fastening screws are fastened.

  The overhanging portion 6584a has an upper edge portion formed in a shape along the lower edge shape of the electric decoration board 6570 (see FIG. 241), and an upper surface thereof constitutes a guide surface for guiding the front units 6520 to 6550.

  The sound transmission unit 6584b is a part through which a sound wave generated from the acoustic device 6610 (see FIG. 235) passes. The sound transmission unit 6584b is disposed at a position facing the vibration film 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610.

  The light receiving portion 6584c receives light emitted from the illumination portion 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed of a single LED disposed in the upper right corner of the front frame 10014, and shows the player as a light emitting effect. It is. In the present embodiment, the illumination unit 10014c is controlled to emit light in a manner different from the illumination board 6570. That is, while the lighting effect of the illumination board 10070 is executed at the time of a fluctuation effect with a high probability of occurrence, a normal fluctuation effect and a reach effect, a demonstration effect, or the like, the light emission effect of the illumination unit 10014c has a probability of occurrence. It is executed when a production that is extremely low and extremely advantageous to the player occurs. Therefore, the player's attention to the lighting unit 10014c can be improved.

  The lower surface box portion 6585 is a portion into which the front units 6520 to 6550 enter from the lower side, and includes a fastening portion 6585a to which a fastening screw inserted into the metal main body portion 10014a from the back side is fastened.

  The notch portion 6587 is one side of a through hole through which sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 formed vertically on the lower surface of the left and right center portion of the acoustic device 6610 (the portion farthest away from the vibration film 6611). Form. That is, the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through a through hole formed by the support plate part 10014d and the notch part 6587 that support the back side of the acoustic device 6610.

  The sound that passes through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as the sound that goes to the back side with the vibration of the vibration film 6611, contrary to the sound that goes to the front side with the vibration of the vibration film 6611. The sound is emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 to the outside through the internal cavity of the acoustic device 6610 (corresponding to the bass reflex speaker duct). By providing a plurality of paths for emitting sound in this way, sounds having different timbres can be generated simultaneously.

  FIG. 244 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the electrical decoration board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa line of FIG. 241, and FIG. 244 (b) is the CCXLIVb of FIG. -It is a fragmentary sectional view of division member 6560, electrical decoration board 6570, back support member 6580, and acoustic device 6610 in CCXLIVb line, and Drawing 245 (a) is division member 6560, electrical decoration board in CCXLa-CCXLVA line of Drawing 241 6570 is a partial cross-sectional view of the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610, and FIG. 245 (b) shows a partition member 6560, an electrical decoration board 6570, a back support member 6580, and an acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLVb-CCXLVb line of FIG. FIG. 246 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view. FIG. 246 is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the electrical decoration board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line of FIG. 241, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional view of an electrical decoration substrate 6570, a back support member 6580, and an acoustic device 6610.

  In FIGS. 244 (a) to 246 (b), the periphery of the flange portion 6582 is shown enlarged. As can be seen from this enlarged view, a slight gap is formed between the upper end of the electrical decoration board 6570 and the lower edge of the flange portion 6582. Accordingly, even when the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to suppress the electrical decoration substrate 6570 from vibrating (vibration width) due to the vibration of the back support member 6580. .

  As shown in FIGS. 244 (a) and 245 (a), the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a of the back support member 6580 is screwed into the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 with the electric decoration board 6570 in between. By being inserted, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the electric decoration board 6570. That is, the electrical decoration board 6570 is only fixed to the fastening part 6564 with the fastening insertion part 6572, and is not fixed to the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at the fastening part.

  Further, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a are in contact with the back surface of the electric decoration board 6570, while the partition member 6560 is separated from the electric decoration board 6570 at the front and rear positions thereof. That is, in this embodiment, since the electric decoration board 6570 is not sandwiched between the front and rear positions, the electric decoration board 6570 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (for example, tilted displacement).

  Further, the lower edge portion of the electric decoration board 6570 is not supported by the back support member 6580 or the partition member 6560. The same applies to FIGS. 244 (b) to 246 (b) described below.

  As shown in FIG. 244 (b), the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted through the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the electrical decoration substrate 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the back support member 6580. Here, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape so that a gap can be formed below the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565. Similarly, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an oval shape to the extent that a gap can be formed below the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 244 (a)). It will be described that the formation of the partition member 6560 to the back support member 6580 is facilitated by forming in this way.

  For example, when the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a are formed in an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening portion 6564 as in the prior art, the partition member 6560 in a state where the vertical and horizontal positions are aligned with respect to the back support member 6580. Need to be assembled.

  However, in this embodiment, since the electric decoration board 6570 is disposed between the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 in an unfixed state, the back surface support member 6580 of the electric circuit board 6570 is assembled when the partition member 6560 is assembled. It is also necessary to align the position with respect to, and there is a possibility that the operation becomes difficult.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b are vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape) as described above. Therefore, even if the vertical alignment is not accurate, it can be assembled.

  As an example of the assembly order, first, the decoration board 6570 is attached to the division member 6560 so that the large-diameter cylindrical part 6565 of the division member 6560 is inserted into the large-diameter insertion part 6573 of the decoration board 6570. At this time, the arrangement of the electric decoration board 6570 with respect to the partition member 6560 is not necessarily determined in the longitudinal direction of the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 and may be at an arbitrary position.

  In the present embodiment, the flange members 6561a to 6561c are formed at positions where they can be brought into contact with the electrical decoration board 6570, so that the partition member of the electrical decoration board 6570 is assembled when the electrical decoration board 6570 is assembled to the partition member 6560. The positional deviation with respect to 6560 is greatly suppressed.

  Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is inserted inside the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a of the back surface support member 6580. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening portion 6564 with respect to the fastening support portion 6581a is not necessarily determined in the longitudinal direction of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and may be at an arbitrary position. That is, it is sufficient to perform rough positioning (for example, positioning that allows the connector 6577 (see FIG. 243) to pass through the wiring hole 6581e (see FIG. 242), positioning with a sufficiently long vertical allowable width). The working efficiency of inserting 6564 into the inside of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a can be improved.

  Next, the partition member 6560 is moved in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a with respect to the back support member 6580, and the fastening portion 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a are aligned. Then, a fastening screw is screwed (see FIG. 244 (a)).

  In this state, even if the position of the electric decoration board 5670 is shifted, the partition member 6560 is lowered by its own weight to a position where the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 is supported by the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 (see FIG. 244 (b)). And the back support member 6580.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is generally difficult to align the electric decoration board 6570 in which the electric decoration board 6570 is disposed between the partition member 6560 and the back support member in an unfixed manner. By forming the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b in a vertically long oval shape (or a shape in which the oval shape is halved) while being an assembly mode. As a result, the assembly efficiency can be improved. In addition, even if the electric decoration board 5670 is displaced, it is configured to be corrected to the original position by its own weight. Therefore, the effect of the light emission effect during the game is prolonged due to the positional deviation of the electric decoration board 5670. It is possible to prevent the decrease.

  With reference to FIG. 245 (b), the enlarged hole 6562a will be described. The central light hole 6562 is arranged in an inverted T-shape at the left and right central portions (4 locations, see FIG. 241), and an enlarged hole 6562a is arranged in a substantially bowl shape (substantially bowl shape) on the outside thereof. (See FIG. 241, arranged at 8 locations) and a direct entry hole 6562b. The direct entry hole 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through-hole that allows light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 to pass therethrough, and a portion forming the outer edge is raised to the front side, and the inner wall is on the front side (side away from the light source). It is formed so as to be inclined in such a manner that the facing interval widens as it goes toward.

  Thereby, the irradiation width of the light radiate | emitted from the 1st illumination part 6574 can be prescribed | regulated. That is, how the light is shown to the player can be changed according to the design mode of the enlarged hole 6562a (inclination angle of the inner wall, raised height, etc.).

  In the present embodiment, the tip of the portion raised to the front side of the enlarged hole 6562a is raised to a position where it abuts against the closing portion 6521c of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (see FIG. 263). Thereby, the light that has passed through the enlarged hole 6562a can be incident on the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 without leaking.

  246 (a) shows a screw insertion portion 6581c, and FIG. 246 (b) shows a positioning slot 6581d. As described above, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are arranged along the inclined direction. 6580 and fastened and fixed.

  Since the front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled along the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the constituent members can be improved as compared with the case where they are assembled in the front-rear direction.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), the electric decoration board 6570 can be positioned to the extent that it covers the area on the front side of the screw insertion portion 6581c, so that the size of the electric decoration board 6570 can be ensured. . On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front units 6520 to 6550 can be widely used, the size of the rear box portion 6584 and the acoustic device 6610 accommodated can be secured.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides where the vibration membrane 6611 of the speaker is disposed. Can be formed (see FIGS. 235 and 246).

  As shown in FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the positioning long hole 6581d are inclined downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is in the front-rear direction. Is formed along (not inclined) because the resin mold used in manufacturing the back support member 6580 is in the front-rear direction.

  In other words, in order to simply configure the resin mold (consisting of two resin molds separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are for fastening formed on the back support member 6580. It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same pulling direction as the support portion 6581a, the fitting recessed portion 6583a, and the like. In the present embodiment, the shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d is an irregular shape because the pulling direction is set in the same front-rear direction as the forming direction of the fastening support portion 6581a and the fitting recessed portion 6583a. (Shape whose shape changes in the hole formation direction (depth direction)).

  In particular, the screw insertion portion 6581c is a through-hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the back-side fastening portion 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a portion that receives a load generated due to fastening. The shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c is such that the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which a load accompanying fastening is applied is made thinner toward the center portion of the hole, so that the load imbalance between the upper edge and the other portions There is a risk that the fastening screw will loosen depending on the state of use and years of use.

  In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw with a large head diameter may be adopted, but this results in high costs due to the difference in quality required for fastening screws used in other fastening locations. . That is, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the fastening location in question, the fastening screw cannot be made into a common part, resulting in high costs, but a fastening screw with a large head diameter at all fastening locations. If this is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will increase, and this will increase the cost in terms of material costs.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610 that is opposed to the head of the fastening screw inserted through the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed in a recess shape on the front wall 6620 ( A retaining plate portion 6621 formed as a plate upper portion that is a part of a portion that is formed to be recessed and is parallel to the plate portion on which the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed.

  The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure an area where the head of the fastening screw can be arranged between the back support member 6580 and the back plate supporting member 6580. Further, when the fastening screw is loosened, the retaining plate portion 6621 is arranged in a direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced. Therefore, the further progress of the fastening screw is restricted, and the fastening screw falls off. Can be prevented.

  The retaining plate portion 6621 is formed to have a size that is slightly spaced from the head of the screw when the fastening screw is not loose. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted through the head of the fastening screw.

  On the other hand, when the fastening screw is loosened, the advancement of the fastening screw is regulated by contact, so that the gap between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, when sound is output from the acoustic device 6610, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

  Further, the front wall 6620 includes a plurality of contact avoidance recesses 6622 that are recessed at the back surface position of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a (see FIG. 242) in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). The contact avoidance recess 6622 has a slight gap between the contact avoidance recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a and screwed into the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243). (Dimensions that can be).

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the fastening screw. In addition, since the axial direction of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a is the same front-rear direction as the resin mold drawing direction, the thickness of the plate portion to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the hole direction, and is sufficient. A fastening force can be generated. Therefore, it is unlikely that the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a is loosened. However, if the fastening screw is loosened, the same function as that of the retaining plate portion 6621 described above is avoided. The recess 6622 can be generated.

  That is, when the fastening screw is loosened, the advancement of the fastening screw is regulated by contact, so that the gap between the contact avoiding recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, when sound is output from the acoustic device 6610, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

  As described above, it is possible to grasp the transmission of vibration generated when the head of the fastening screw comes into contact with the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoiding recess 6622 due to the loosening of the fastening screw. The occurrence of looseness can be noticed, and the situation where the fastening screw is left loose can be easily avoided.

  For example, it is exemplified that noise is generated by vibration transmission or that vibration is detected.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 244 (a) to 246 (b), in this embodiment, the electrical decoration board 6570 is disposed in the vicinity of the back support member 6580, but is not fixed to the back support member 6580. Is done. Accordingly, the acoustic device 6610 and the electrical decoration board 6570 can be disposed close to each other with the back support member 6580 interposed therebetween, while the vibration of the back support member 6580 resulting from the vibration of the acoustic apparatus 6610 is transmitted to the electrical decoration board 6570. It is possible to avoid the substrate 6570 from being broken.

  Here, the partition member 6560 is connected to the back support member 6580 at a position excluding the effect portion (that is, the illumination units 6574 to 6576) of the electric decoration board 6570, and the ratio of the effect portion on the surface of the electric decoration board 6570 is calculated. In order to ensure a large size, the area of the connecting portion between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is likely to be narrowed.

  Therefore, the problem that the fixing of the partition member 6560 is likely to be insufficient is likely to occur, and without the countermeasure, the partition member 6560 may transmit the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580. When 6560 vibrates, there is a possibility that the production effect may be poor, the fastening portion may be loosened, or the partition member 6560 itself may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, suppression of the vibration of the partition member 6560 is aimed at by fixing the partition member 6560 from another direction. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the upper effect device 6500. In FIG. 247, the fastening location, the fastening direction, and the fastening direction of each component of the upper effect device 6500 are schematically illustrated. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is indicated by a T-shape, the T-shaped horizontal line indicates the head of the fastening screw, and the vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the screw portion of the fastening screw.

  As shown in FIG. 247, the upper rendering device 6500 is configured in such a manner that the front units 6520 to 6550 surround the front and lower surfaces of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are supported by the upper lid member 6510. However, the upper lid member 6510 is only fastened to the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and is not fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560.

  Thereby, it is avoided that the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 is reinforced. In this embodiment, since the upper lid member 6510 is formed from a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted through the back support member 6580, the upper lid member 6510 is moved in the thickness direction ( It is easy to be displaced (deformed) in the vertical direction.

  With this displacement (deformation), the front-rear direction width of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened. For example, when the upper lid member 6510 is deformed so as to be bent with respect to the front-rear center, the front-rear interval of the insertion holes 6512 formed away from the front and rear is shortened. Thereby, the load which displaces the division unit 6540 to the back side arises, and the compression load to the front-back direction can be applied with respect to the division member 6560.

  That is, since the partition member 6560 can be sandwiched between the back support member 6580 and the partition unit 6540 and a load can be applied, even if the partition member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration can be suppressed. Can do.

  Here, even if the front-rear direction width of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened, when the lower side of the partition unit 6540 is displaced to the front side (displaced to the side away from the partition member 6560), the partition unit 6540 gives to the partition member 6560. The load applied is likely to be insufficient, and the effect of suppressing the vibration of the partition member 6560 may be insufficient.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the displacement in the front-rear direction of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 is regulated by the guided unit 6550, the lower side of the partition unit 6540 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side. As a result, a sufficient load can be secured from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560.

  At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed at the end of the guided unit 6550 in the direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552 (see FIG. 254 (a)), the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580 is used. The direction in which the vibration is transmitted can be the direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552.

  Thereby, the curved deformation of the guided unit 6550 can be suppressed, and the front and rear fastening locations can be suppressed from moving in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even when vibration is transmitted to the guided unit 6550, it is possible to sufficiently secure the function of suppressing the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 247, by devising the fastening part, the electric decoration board 6570 is placed in a non-fixed state close to the acoustic device 6610 where vibration is likely to occur, while preventing the electric decoration board 6570 from being damaged. It is possible to suppress the vibration of the partition member 6560 due to the vibration being transmitted to the partition member 6560 that prevents the electrical decoration board 6570 from being separated from the acoustic device 6610 (or the back support member 6580) by an allowable amount or more.

  That is, it is possible to improve the shape maintaining performance of the top effect device 6500 while improving the durability of the electric decoration board 6570 disposed in proximity to the acoustic device 6610.

  Further, one purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in the present embodiment is to deal with the amount of displacement of the upper lid member 6510. In other words, the upper lid member 6510 has a configuration in which the back side is fixed by the fastening portion 6513 and is extended in a thin plate shape in the front and rear directions, and thus the upper lid member 6510 is easily curved and displaced in a manner in which the displacement amount on the front side is larger than that on the back side. It is for things.

  For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end portion of the upper lid member 6510, the center of the curvature radius is arranged below the upper lid member 6510 from the shape of the upper lid member 6510, starting from the rear end portion. It can be curved and displaced. In this case, a tensile load in the front-rear direction is applied to the upper lid member 6510 itself, while a compressive load is applied to the other members disposed below the upper cover member 6510 itself.

  Since the direction of this compressive load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, it is along the front-rear direction on the back side, which is the base end side, but with respect to the front-rear direction as the displacement increases (towards the front side). It comes to follow the direction which inclines and descends toward the front side.

  In the present embodiment, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate portion 6547 is a direction inclined downward toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction, the fastening direction of the fastening screw and the top cover The direction of the compressive load generated with the displacement of the member 6510 can be brought closer.

  As a result, the resistance to the compression load can be sufficiently generated at the fastening position, and the component of the compression load given in the shearing direction of the fastening screw (direction orthogonal to the fastening direction) is reduced, so that the fastening screw is broken. Can be suppressed.

  A fastening screw whose fastening direction is formed so as to incline downward toward the front side is used for fastening the plate guide unit 6550, and the plate guide unit 6550 is disposed close to the lower side and the back side of the electric decoration board 6570. (Refer to the screw insertion portion 6581c and the like in FIG. 246 (a)). In the present embodiment, the electric decoration board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed manner and is easily displaced, but the plate guide unit 6550 can limit the displacement allowable amount of the electric decoration board 6570. That is, even if the electric decoration board 6570 is displaced, excessive displacement of the electric decoration board 6570 can be restricted by making it possible to contact the plate guide unit 6550 when the displacement amount is excessive.

  In addition, since the plate guide unit 6550 is disposed close to the back side of the electric decoration board 6570 (the side where the acoustic device 6610 is arranged), the displacement of the electric decoration board 6570 to the back side can be particularly suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that the electrical decoration board | substrate 6570 approaches the acoustic apparatus 6610 as a vibration generation source.

  In this embodiment, the fastening portions (fastening support portion 6581a, insertion hole 6565a, etc.) whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction are gathered on the left and right center sides (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction descends toward the front side. Fastening portions (screw insertion portion 6581c, insertion plate portion 6547 and the like) along the inclined direction are gathered on the left and right outer sides (see FIGS. 242 and 256), and they are not arranged close to each other.

  Thereby, the influence which the deformation | transformation (displacement) which arises in one fastening part has on the other fastening part can be suppressed. In other words, even if the fastening portion along the front-rear direction is loosened and the displacement in the front-rear direction occurs, the affected part can be limited to the fastening portion along the front-rear direction, so that it tilts downward. It can avoid that the load of the direction which inclines with a fastening direction (it follows the front-back direction) with respect to the fastening part which follows a direction arises. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the loosening of a screw can be suppressed.

  In addition, by fixing a portion that is long in the front-rear direction, that is, the left and right center side, by a fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction, it is possible to improve the resistance of the top effect device 6500 to a load in the push-down direction.

  On the other hand, the fastening portion along the direction in which the fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side is considered to have a lower resistance to the load in the push-down direction than the fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, by disposing the fastening portion along the direction in which the fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides that are formed short along the front-rear direction, the resistance force against the load in the push-down direction is reduced. An arrangement area of the electric decoration board 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 can be secured while minimizing the influence of this.

  FIG. 248 is a cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII line in FIG. 241 (a). The specific portion is shown in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIG. 248, in the electrical decoration board 6570, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 comes into contact with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 in the left-right direction. In addition, the front and rear surfaces are in contact with the left and right side portions of the partition member 6560 and the left and right side portions of the back support member 6580, respectively, and the contact positions thereof are formed so as not to coincide with each other.

  With this configuration, it is possible to improve the durability of the electric decoration board 6570 and adjust the ease of occurrence of displacement. This will be described in turn below. First, the improvement in durability of the electric decoration board 6570 will be described.

  Here, when the front and back surfaces of the electrical decoration board 6570 are in contact with the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 respectively at the same position in the front and back, for some reason (such as an error during resin molding or a fastening failure) When the distance between the contact portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is shorter than the thickness of the electric decoration board 6570, a compression force is applied to the electric decoration board 6570, and if the applied load is large, There is a risk of the decorative substrate 6570 breaking.

  Further, even when a compression force is not applied to the electric decoration board 6570 at the time of assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the moving acoustic device 6610, thereby causing a load (for example, a load in the compression direction). May be applied, and the electric decoration board 6570 may be broken by this load.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the positions of the front and rear surfaces of the electrical decoration board 6570 that contact the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 do not match front and rear (there is a position that contacts at a shifted position). Even if a load is applied to the electric decoration board 6570 in the above-described manner, the load is not a load that compresses the electric decoration board 6570 but a load that curves the electric decoration board 6570. Therefore, since it can cope with the electric decoration board | substrate 6570 being bent and deform | transforming, possibility that the crack of the electric decoration board | substrate 6570 will arise can be made low.

  Next, adjustment of the ease of occurrence of displacement of the electrical decoration board 6570 will be described. In the electric decoration board 6570, the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) of the partitioning member 6560 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 are inserted to prevent misalignment. (See FIG. 243).

  In addition, since the electric decoration board 6570 is in contact (contact) with the large-diameter cylindrical part 6565 in the left-right direction, the contact resistance between the electric decoration board 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical part 6565 is ensured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a larger diameter than the fastening portion 6564, it is a matter of course that the contact area is increased and a sufficient frictional resistance can be ensured.

  Accordingly, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of displacement of the electrical decoration board 6570 in the vicinity of the left and right center portion of the electrical decoration board 6570. Therefore, even when a peripheral member vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of the light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574 of the electrical decoration board 6570 can be easily maintained.

  On the other hand, since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 and the fastening portion 6564 are not arranged on the left and right sides (particularly the lower side) of the electric decoration board 6570, a load that is compressed from the front and rear is not generated. Compared with the left and right center portion of 6570, it is possible to easily generate a displacement.

  Therefore, when peripheral members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of light emitted from the second lighting unit 6575 and the third lighting unit 6576 of the electrical decoration board 6570 can be easily changed.

  In this embodiment, since the acoustic devices 6610 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, the vibration mode of the electric decoration board 6570 changes based on the vibration mode of each acoustic device 6610. That is, when the sound is output only from the right acoustic device 6610 and the right side of the lighting board 6570 is preferentially vibrated, the sound is output only from the left acoustic device 6610 and the left side of the lighting board 6570 is preferentially vibrated. And the case where the sound is output from both the left and right acoustic devices 6610 and the left and right sides of the electric decoration board 6570 are vibrated, the electric decoration board 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different vibration modes.

  Next, the front units 6520 to 6550 will be described. FIG. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of the front units 6520 to 6550, and FIG. 250 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front units 6520 to 6550. Note that in FIGS. 249 and 250, the reference numerals of the detailed configurations are omitted for easy understanding.

  In FIGS. 249 and 250, a light transmission unit 6520 that transmits light incident from the first illumination unit 6574 of the illumination board 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame that is formed so as to surround the light transmission unit 6520 and forms an outer frame. A state in which the member 6530, the partitioning unit 6540 that abuts the partitioning member 6560 in the front-rear direction and similarly partitions the light, and the guided unit 6550 guided to the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is illustrated. The

  In the case of the light emission effect via the front units 6520 to 6550, the light transmission unit 6520 receives the light from the first illumination unit 6574, the partition unit 6540 receives the light from the second illumination unit 6575, and the guided unit 6550 receives light from the third illumination unit 6576. Next, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 will be described in detail.

  251 (a) is a front view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251 (b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 252 (a) is a partition. FIG. 252 (b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540, FIG. 253 (a) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550, and FIG. 253 (b) is a plate guide. It is a rear view of the unit 6550.

  FIG. 254 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 along the line CCLIVa-CCLIVa in FIG. 251 (b), and FIG. 254 (b) is along the line CCLIVb-CCLIVb in FIG. 251 (b). It is sectional drawing of the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG.254 (c) is sectional drawing of the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 in the CCLIVc-CCLIVc line | wire of FIG. 251 (b).

  FIG. 255 is an exploded front perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550.

  The partition unit 6540 is formed of a milky white light-transmitting resin material and formed in a substantially inverted triangle in a front view. The partitioning unit 6540 is formed to penetrate through the central part of the milky white member 6541 in the front-rear direction. A through-hole 6542 formed so that the rear side portion can be inserted, a pair of fastening portions 6543 that are portions projecting inward of the through-hole 6542 and to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and an outer frame member 6530 A plurality of insertion holes 6544 that are pierced to allow fastening screws to be fastened and fixed, and a pair of post-guide fastening portions to which fastening screws that extend in a cylindrical shape toward the back side and pass through the insertion holes 6565a of the partition member 6560 are fastened. 6545, a pair of box-shaped light receiving portions 6546 formed in a box shape opened to the back side along the left and right lower edges of the milky white member 6541, and the box-shaped light receiving portion 65 A plurality of plate-like portions extending downward from the lower edge of 6 and having insertion holes 6547b through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the partition unit 6540 to the plate guide unit 6550 can be inserted. And a transparent covering member 6548 that is formed from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material in a shape that covers the front side of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and is fitted and supported by the milky white member 6541. Prepare for.

  The partition unit 6540 is formed in a curved shape in which the front side edge portion swells to the front side in a top view like the upper lid member 6510, is formed in a substantially inverted triangle in the front view, and is centered on the back side in the side view. (See FIG. 254 (a)).

  The milky white member 6541 includes a pair of fastening portions 6541a to which a fastening screw inserted through an insertion hole 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 is fastened. The fastening portion 6541a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

  The front side of the through hole 6542 is formed to be inclined downward toward the back side in correspondence with the inclination of a contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) of the optical transmission unit 6520 described later. Accordingly, the front side end portion of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) can be brought into contact with each other, thereby preventing the posture of the optical transmission unit 6520 from changing. Can do.

  The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole directed to the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed from the front side. Further, the post-guidance fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole directed to the back side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed from the back side.

  The box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is a portion disposed opposite to the second illumination portion 6575 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the electric decoration board 6570. The box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is disposed on the back surface of the front bottom portion and the upper surface of the lower plate portion. A jagged decoration with a short left and right width is formed. This jagged shape is formed by a concavo-convex shape in which the protrusions having a triangular cross section are closely aligned.

  With this shape, light incident from the back side can be scattered (diffused), so that the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front surface thereof can emit light uniformly in a front view.

  In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

  The insertion plate portion 6547 includes a U-shaped wall portion 6547a formed in a U-shape opened upward in the rear view shape, an insertion hole 6547b drilled in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. And a projecting rib 6547c projecting to the front side in a semi-oval shape surrounding the main body.

  By aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547a with the front side fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550, the partition unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550.

  The insertion plate portion 6547 is a portion that receives a load generated by fastening by being formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the screwing portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) is inserted. The shape of the insertion hole formed in the insertion plate portion 6547 is related to the resin mold drawing direction (in this embodiment, the front-rear direction). The thickness is reduced toward the center of the hole (see FIG. 254 (b)).

  In this case, load imbalance is likely to occur between the upper edge portion and the other portions. Therefore, when a small misalignment occurs repeatedly between the partition unit 6540 and the plate guide unit 6550, the fastening screw may be loosened. is there.

  In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw with a large head diameter may be adopted, but this results in high costs due to the difference in quality required for fastening screws used in other fastening locations. . That is, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the fastening location in question, the fastening screw cannot be made into a common part, resulting in high costs, but a fastening screw with a large head diameter at all fastening locations. If this is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will increase, and this will increase the cost in terms of material costs.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the position shift of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the division unit 6540 may be prevented in several places. That is, first, the screw-in portion 6554a of the plate guide unit 6550 is supported by the protruding rib 6547c of the partition unit 6540, thereby preventing the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced downward (FIGS. 247 and 254). (See (b)).

  Secondly, the upper end of the front side of the plate guide unit 6550 is configured to engage in the front-rear direction with the lower end of the back side of the transparent covering member 6548 that is locked to the milky white member 6541 by the locking convex portion 6548b. (See FIG. 254 (b)). Thereby, the displacement to the front side with respect to the division unit 6540 of the plate guide unit 6550 can be prevented.

  Third, the lower end portion of the insertion plate portion 6547 comes into contact with the upper surface of the main body resin member 6551 of the plate guide unit 6550 (see FIG. 254 (b)). Thereby, the upward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 relative to the partition unit 6540 can be prevented.

  Since the displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 relative to the partition unit 6540 can be suppressed mainly by the first to third contact structures, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the screwing portion 6554a is suppressed. Can do.

  The transparent covering member 6548 is formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front, and has a lower edge plate-like portion 6548a extending in a plate shape toward the back side at the lower edge connecting portion of the V shape, and a back surface from the upper edge portion. A plurality of locking projections 6548b protruding in a plate shape to the side. The left and right central portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are cut out from the back side to the front side, and the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a enters so as to fill this gap.

  A jagged decoration is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548 a in the same manner as the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. Thereby, even if the central portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to be cut out, the cut-out portion can be supplemented with the decorative shape of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a, so that the transparent covering member 6548 extends in the left-right direction. Can emit light uniformly.

  In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

  Here, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom plate-like portion is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes toward the back side as the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 moves toward the back side (see FIG. 254 (c)). In order to form 6548a at the lower bottom surface and the surface position of the guided unit 6550, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes toward the back side in the same manner as the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550. .

  If this inclined surface is to be formed by the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, the mold drawing direction for forming the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 becomes complicated. In other words, the removal direction is the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the through-hole 6542, and the direction in which it rises and tilts toward the back side in the vicinity of the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, so that the difficulty of mold design only increases. In addition, the manufacturing process may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed by the milky white member 6541, but is formed by the transparent covering member 6548 instead (see FIG. 254 (c)). Furthermore, in the assembled state, the white partition member 6560 is disposed opposite to the lower side plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 constituting the inclined surface, so that the transparent covering member 6548 is provided to the player. Can be visually recognized with a uniform color (white).

  Thereby, the drawing direction of the molding die of the milky white member 6541 is unified in the front-rear direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 covered on the front side of the milky white member 6541 is inclined to the side that interferes in the front-rear drawing direction. While the shape (the shape of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 is inclined so as to enter the inside of the partition unit 6540 in a front view), the transparent covering member 6548 emits light in a uniform light emitting mode. Can be visually recognized.

  In other words, while the partition unit 6540 is tapered toward the back side (up and down intervals are narrowed), the back surface portion of the milky white member 6541 and the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 that are adjacent to each other. Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface portion (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), a light emission effect with a uniform light emission mode can be performed.

  In this case, although it becomes difficult to set the direction of removing the molding die of the transparent covering member 6548 to the front-rear direction, the transparent covering member 6548 does not necessarily have a portion formed along the front-rear direction. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a (the direction of rising inclination) as the molding direction of the molding die, a manufacturing process in which the molding direction is resin-molded with a mold in the front-rear direction (one direction); The transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured by a manufacturing process that does not change at all.

  Therefore, the milky white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6548 can be easily manufactured, and the portion visually recognized through the transparent covering member 6548 can be made to emit light uniformly.

  The locking convex portion 6548 b is a portion that is locked to the upper edge of the bulging portion toward the front side at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541. That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is assembled to the milky white member 6541, the locking convex portion 6548 b is locked to the milky white member 6541.

  The guided unit 6550 is formed from a colored opaque resin material in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front, and is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580, and the main body resin member 6551. An extending plate portion 6552 extending in a plate shape on the back side along the lower edge of the left and right center portion, and a pair of left and right exhaust pressure through holes 6553 formed at the back side end portion of the extending plate portion 6552. A plurality of front side fastening portions 6554 which are arranged along the left and right upper edge portions of the main body resin member 6551 and are arranged to face the insertion plate portion 6547 of the partition unit 6540 and to which fastening screws are fastened and fixed, and left and right sides of the main body resin member 6551 A plurality of back side fastening portions 6555 to which fastening screws arranged along the lower edge and passing through screw insertion portions 6581c (see FIG. 241 (a)) of the back support member 6580 are fastened. A plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 protruding in a rib shape between the back side fastening portions 6555 and inserted into positioning long holes 6581d (see FIG. 241 (a)) of the back support member 6580, and drilled in the front-rear direction in the left and right arms. It mainly includes a plurality of through-holes 6557 provided and a pair of light-receiving members 6558 formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material and fitted and fixed in the plurality of through-holes 6557.

  In the guided unit 6550, the direction in which the guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is the die removal direction. That is, each component is formed along an inclination direction that rises and inclines toward the back side or a direction perpendicular to the inclination direction.

  The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 reaches the player after passing through the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553.

  The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is not formed as a single large hole in the range facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235), but is formed in a plurality of small hole shapes (dividing the range into small portions). Formed). Thereby, the fraud which makes thin wire materials, such as a piano wire approach, can be suppressed.

  Further, the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed so that the hole width is narrowed toward the end of the hole and toward the back side. Thereby, since the fine wire can be clogged in the hole, after entering the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553, the fine wire is further advanced to the back, or when a load is applied to a specific member, The movement resistance of the fine wire can be increased. Thereby, since the time required for fraud can be extended, fraud can be suppressed.

  The front side fastening portion 6554 includes a screwing portion 6554a to which a fastening screw is fastened, and a positioning wall portion 6554b formed in a pair of wall shapes on the left and right sides of the screwing portion 6554a. The positioning wall portions 6554b are arranged to face each other at an interval slightly longer than the width of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be aligned by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b.

  The light receiving member 6558 is a portion guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along the direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and a cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction is formed in an L shape. Guided portion 6558a, a plurality of rear surface box-shaped portions 6558b that are formed in a box shape that is bulged on the front side of the guided portion 6558a and that is open on the back side, and can be fitted into the through holes 6557, and guided And an upper edge extending portion 6558c extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the upper edge of the center side end portion (the end portion on the side where the pair of light receiving members 6558 is opposed) of the portion 6558a.

  The light receiving member 6558 is a member that receives light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the electrical decoration board 6570. On the inner surface of the rear box-like portion 6558b, the above-mentioned decorative jagged shape is formed. Thus, the light can be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, so that the number of LEDs corresponding to the through holes 6557 is small (1-2 in FIG. 241 (b)). However, it can be visually recognized as uniform light over the entire rear box-shaped portion 6558b. Therefore, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (the feeling of the point light source can be diminished).

  Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in a posture that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction (an attitude in which the light traveling direction is in line with the assembly direction of the plate guide unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is the plate guide unit 6550). Therefore, light emitted along the front-rear direction from the LEDs disposed in the third illumination portion 6576 of the electrical decoration board 6570 on the back side of the light receiving member 6558 is received. The light can be refracted when the member 6558 passes, and can be advanced in a direction inclined obliquely downward toward the front side of the light receiving member 6558.

  In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

  The rear box-like portion 6558b is formed so that the bulging length to the front side is shorter in the object disposed on the left and right outer sides than in the object disposed on the left and right inner sides. Accordingly, the front surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be formed along the curved shape of the front side edge of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 connected to the lower side thereof.

  The upper edge extending portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the partition member 6560. The main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550 arranged to face the partition member 6560 is formed in a planar shape particularly in the extended plate portion 6552 at the center portion, and is not partitioned, so that the alignment with the partition member 6560 is performed. It's hard to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper edge extending portion 6558c serves as a partition that partitions the region above the extending plate portion 6552, so that the partition member 6560 can be easily aligned.

  Returning to FIG. In the description so far, the portions that receive the light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 6576 arranged on the left and right have been described. Hereinafter, the light transmission unit 6520 that is a portion that receives light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 will be described.

  FIG. 257 (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, FIG. 257 (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. FIG. 258 is an exploded front perspective view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258B is an exploded rear perspective view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530.

  The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed from a colored (orange in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, and has a main body portion 6531 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and the main body portion 6531. An opening 6532 that is drilled in the front-rear direction in a substantially bowl shape (substantially bowl shape) at the center, and a projecting rib 6533 that projects along the lower edge of the main body 6531 in a rib shape on the back side And a plurality of fastening portions 6534 that are disposed at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and are formed so that the fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6544 can be screwed therein.

  Since the main body portion 6531 does not transmit light to the outer frame member 6530, a portion that transmits light inside the outer shape is limited to the opening 6532. The shape of the opening 6532 corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the first illumination unit 6574. In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed from a shape (enlarged shape) similar to the shape surrounding the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 in front view (see FIG. 241 (a)).

  The light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 passes through the transparent cylindrical member 6521, but the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed so that the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 differs depending on the front and rear positions. The player who visually recognizes the light having a pattern different from the arrangement pattern of the first illumination unit 6574 can be viewed.

  For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed so that the lateral width becomes longer as the opening 6532 is approached (the left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction). The light that is visually recognized from the front of the opening 6532 in the vicinity of the position overlapping the upper plate portion in the front-rear direction is visually recognized in a pattern that spreads laterally compared to the arrangement pattern of the first illumination unit 6574.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to narrow the arrangement range of the first illumination unit 6574 that emits light behind it while expanding the range of light visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing light in a wide range while suppressing the size of the first lighting unit 6574 (or the electric decoration board 6570). Details of the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 will be described later.

  The protruding rib 6533 is notched at a position corresponding to the locking projection 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent covering member 6548, and is disposed at a location where the formation of the locking projection 6548b is omitted. In the present embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking projection 6548b are formed on the same curve in front view (formed on the same shape as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other). )

  FIG. 259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The light transmission unit 6520 includes a transparent cylindrical member 6521 formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin, and a plane disposed in the middle of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. A flange portion 6522 extending outward in a flange shape along the outer periphery, and a cup-shaped member 6523 formed in a cup shape covered with a transparent cylindrical member 6521 from a colorless and light-transmitting resin. A shielding member 6524 formed in a cylindrical shape so that the opposite side of the side covered with the cup-shaped member 6523 is formed from a colored (white in this embodiment) and light-impermeable resin material, and the shielding member 6524 A contact plate portion 6525 formed as a flat plate surface portion that can come into surface contact with the flange portion 6522 at the front side end portion, and an outer side that extends to the front side along the left and right edges and the lower edge of the contact plate portion 6525 Frame extension And 526, mainly it comprises.

  The bottomed cylindrical member 6521 is a member that extends in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear direction, has a shape in which the left and right wall portions are bent inward, and the LED disposed in the first illumination unit 6574 and the front and rear A rear outer portion 6521a formed from the outer shape overlapping each other, a plurality of light receiving protrusions 6521b protruding from the rear outer portion 6521a to the back side at a position facing the LED, and a region surrounded by the rear outer portion 6521a A plate-like blocking portion 6521c, a plurality of light passage holes 6521d drilled in the blocking portion 6521c at positions opposed to the LEDs, and at least the left and right widths of the upper wall and the distance between the left and right wall portions to the front side A main body cylinder portion 6521e that becomes longer toward the main body and a frame-like extension portion 6521f that extends to the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main body cylinder portion 6521e are mainly provided.

  The light receiving protrusion 6521 b is a portion that is inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partition member 6560. That is, by reducing the interval between the partition member 6560 and the electrical decoration board 6570 (see FIG. 263), the first illumination unit is provided on the light receiving protrusion 6521b without leaving a gap as much as the thickness of the opposing plate portion 6561 of the partition member 6560. Light can be incident from 6574 LEDs. As a result, total reflection can be easily generated.

  As described above, the light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 is incident at a close distance, and is totally reflected and travels to the front side. Thus, the light of the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 6576 described above. The light emitted from the LED travels in the air by a region inside the recessed portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the rear box-shaped portion 6558b that is recessed toward the direction away from the LED, and the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the front side wall portion of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b are caused to emit light. Therefore, compared with the light irradiated from the 1st illumination part 6574, the light irradiated from the 2nd irradiation part 6575 and the 3rd irradiation part 6576 has a low light quantity, and makes a player visually recognize it as uniform light. it can.

  Further, the partition unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is formed is formed from a light-transmitting milky white resin material, and the light-receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed is from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material. Since it is formed, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 can be changed stepwise.

  The frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is generally formed in a similar shape to the rear outer shape portion 6521a, but the outer shape of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is compared with the outer shape of the rear outer shape portion 6521a due to the relationship through the main body cylindrical portion 6521e. And enlarged.

  Therefore, compared with the size of the area where the LEDs in the first lighting unit 6574 are arranged, the player can visually recognize the light as a light that illuminates a large area.

  The shape of the extending tip of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is such that each portion is arranged at substantially the same distance from the bottom rear side surface (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523. That is, depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523, the shape of the extending tip of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is designed. Thereby, the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f can be illuminated in a uniform light emission mode.

  The flange portion 6522 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6522a that are drilled in a size that allows the circular threaded portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540 to be inserted.

  The cup-shaped member 6523 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape that can support the fastening portion 6543 at a position overlapping the insertion hole 6522a in the front-rear direction, and is fastened with a fastening screw that is inserted into the bottom portion. A pair of terminal fastening portions 6523a to which the portion 6543 is fastened and fixed, a decorative shape portion 6523b in which a light diffusion shape (decorative shape made of a protrusion having a triangular cross section) is formed on the cup-shaped back bottom, and a decorative shape portion thereof A flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat surface shape in a region surrounding the periphery of 6523b.

  The decorative shape portion 6523b diffuses and reflects the light irradiated from the back surface to the cup-shaped member 6523. Thereby, the player who views the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front side can be visually recognized as surface emitting, so that the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 in the front view can be improved.

  Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region opposite to the frame-like extension portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the light that has passed through the thick inside of the frame-like extension portion 6521f is not reflected irregularly. Can be passed to the side. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the light traveling through the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f as clear light.

  The shielding member 6524 has a rear side end portion formed in the same shape as the central cylindrical portion 6566 of the partition member 6560, and is recessed with a size capable of guiding the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540. A pair of left and right guide recesses 6524a.

  The contact plate portion 6525 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6525a drilled in a size that allows the circular threaded portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540 to be inserted.

  The outer frame extending portion 6526 is formed from an inner shape slightly larger than the flange portion 6522 so that the flange portion 6522 can be accommodated, and the extending length is determined by the thickness of the flange portion 6522 and the back surface of the cup-shaped member 6523. The length is equal to or greater than the length of the edge of the side plate-like portion.

  That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the flange portion 6522 and the plate-like portion of the cup-shaped member 6523 are accommodated inside the outer frame extending portion 6526 (see FIG. 258 (a)). The assembled state can be stably maintained. Further, since the circular threaded portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540 is inserted through the insertion hole 6525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the end fastening portion 6523a in this order, the light transmission unit is fastened. The assembly state of 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

  According to the light transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear side end face of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylinder portion 6521e and advanced forward, and the front side end portion of the frame-like extension portion 6521f The cup-shaped member 6523 can be irradiated with the light. Since the gap between the cup-shaped member 6523 and the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is set to be short, a line-shaped (at the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523 is provided to the player who sees light from the front side of the cup-shaped member 6523. It can be visually recognized in a light emitting mode that shines along the outer shape of the outer shape. Thereby, since the difference between the light emission mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emission mode seen in the transparent covering member 6548 described above can be emphasized, a sharp light emission effect can be executed. This will be described in detail below.

  FIG. 261 shows a six-sided view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows a six-sided view of the optical transmission unit 6520 in the assembled state. Since the optical transmission unit 6520 is configured symmetrically, the left side view is not shown.

  261 (a) is a front view of the transparent tubular member 6521, FIG. 261 (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 261 (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member 6521. FIG. 261 (d) is a right side view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG. 261 (e) is a rear view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.

  262 (a) is a front view of the light transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262 (b) is a top view of the light transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262 (c) is a bottom view of the light transmission unit 6520. 262 (d) is a right side view of the optical transmission unit 6520 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 262 (e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. In FIG. 262 (e), the illustration of the decorative shape portion 6523b is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 261 (b) and 261 (d), the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the lower bottom surface are inclined so that the left and right widths and the vertical width gradually increase toward the front side. It is said. On the other hand, the portion that interferes with the resin mold in the drawing direction cannot be formed as an inclined surface because the drawing direction of the resin mold is set in the front-rear direction.

  For example, even if the outer surface of the main body cylinder portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the back side resin mold is moved in the drawing direction (backward), but the inner surface of the outer shape portion 6521a formed on the rear side portion. If the same inclination is assumed, interference occurs when the resin mold on the back side is moved, so that the inner surface of the outer portion 6521a is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction (see FIG. 263). ).

  Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body cylinder portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the front-side resin mold is moved in the drawing direction (front), but the frame shape formed on the front side portion thereof. If the outer surface of the extended portion 6521f has the same inclination, it interferes when the resin mold is moved. Therefore, the outer surface of the frame-like extended portion 6521f is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 263).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the boundary between the front-side resin mold that is pulled out forward and the rear-side resin mold that is pulled out backward is configured by the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522, and the above-described inclination on the one side before and after that When the non-inclined surface is formed on the other side, the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522 have a length in the front-rear direction of the non-inclined surface compared to the length in the front-rear direction of the inclined surface. And formed on the shorter side.

  This makes it possible to suppress the change in the plate thickness due to the change in the front-rear position while making the transparent cylindrical member 6521 have the gradually increasing shape as described above. It is possible to suppress a change in the front-rear position of the traveling mode. Therefore, when light is incident on the inside of the wall and total reflection occurs at the boundary where the light first reaches, the total reflection can be easily repeated thereafter until reaching the front end of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who sees the transparent tubular member 6521 from the front side see enough light.

  The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed so that the vertical width becomes smaller (tapered) toward the front side. Accordingly, when the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partition unit 6540 are assembled (see FIGS. 249 and 250), the fastening portion is connected to the guide recess portion 6524a as compared with the case where the vertical width is formed in the front-rear direction. Since 6543 (refer to FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the difficulty of assembly can be reduced.

  FIG. 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, the acoustic device 6610, and the optical transmission unit 6520 along the line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. In FIG. 263, for convenience of explanation, a state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the acoustic device 6610 are arranged at the assembly position with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 263, the light receiving protrusion 6521b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed with a size that causes a slight gap when inserted into the direct insertion hole 6562b of the partition member 6560, and the tip thereof is the opposing plate portion. It is inserted to the surface position of 6561. Thereby, the distance between the 1st illumination part 6574 and the light-receiving protrusion part 6521b can be set, without being influenced by the plate | board thickness of the opposing board part 6561. FIG.

  The light receiving projecting portion 6521b is formed in a plate shape in which the direction along the shape of the back outer shape portion 6521a is the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the short direction intersecting with the longitudinal direction is set to be substantially equal to the width dimension of the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 arranged to face each other.

  Thus, in the short direction of the light receiving projection 6521b, only light that travels substantially straight from the first illumination unit 6574 to the front side (light having a very small angle with respect to the optical axis) is incident, and other light is incident. Can be prevented.

  The incident light easily travels to the front side through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and the angle formed by the transparent cylindrical member 6521 and the light direction is small even when reflected at the boundary. Since total reflection is likely to occur, it is possible to suppress the light from being weakened before reaching the front side end of the transparent tubular member 6521.

  The dimension in the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b is set to be approximately twice the dimension in the short direction. Therefore, regarding the spreading direction of the surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 and having a large angle from the optical axis is compared with the case described in the thickness direction of the surface. Is also allowed to enter the light receiving protrusion 6521b.

  On the other hand, the rear outer shape portion 6521a coupled to the longitudinal direction of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b is not in contact with the opposing plate portion 6561 and is arranged with a slight gap. Thereby, the light (light having a large angle between the optical axis and the traveling direction of light) incident from the end surface of the back outer shape portion 6521a among the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 is reflected to the player. Visual recognition can be avoided.

  That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize only the light passing through the light receiving protrusion 6521b and proceeding through the thickness of the main body cylinder portion 6521e, and cut the other light (weak light). In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle with respect to the optical axis of the light incident on the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.

  The light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 that is not arranged to face the light receiving projection 6521b passes through the inside of the enlarged hole 6562a and passes through the light transmission hole 6521d (see FIG. 260) of the transparent tubular member 6521. Pass through and irradiate the cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260). This light does not pass through the thickness of the member but travels in the air, so that the player can visually recognize it as uniform light.

  Note that the raised tip of the enlarged hole 6562a and the blocking portion 6521c are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, light can be prevented from leaking from the gap between the raised tip and the blocking portion 6521c.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the appearance of light that has passed through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 of the light transmission unit 6520 will be described. FIG. 264 (a) is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the arrangement of the first illumination unit 6574, and FIG. 264 (b) schematically illustrates the arrangement of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. In the description of FIG. 264, FIGS. 261 and 263 are referred to as appropriate.

  First, as described above, since the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed so that the width gradually increases toward the front side, it passes through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (with total reflection). The light (light emitted from the eight edge light emitting portions 6574a on the left and right outer sides) is visually recognized in a shape in which the shape (substantially saddle shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting portions 6574a is enlarged.

  In addition, as described above, the light in the thickness direction of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 proceeds to the front side end portion without being weakened, and therefore corresponds to the arrangement of the edge light emitting portion 6574a even in the front view of the light transmission unit 6520. The position where the light is emitted emits strong light (light emission like a point light source).

  Here, the distance between the light sources is longer than the distance L17b between the strong light emission positions in the front view of the light transmission unit 6520, as compared with the actual distance L17a between the edge light emitting units 6574a. However, the visual effect of light tends to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the distance L17b between the strong light emission arrangements of the visible light becomes longer than the actual arrangement distance L17a of the edge light emitting portion 6574a, so the number of LEDs actually arranged is increased. It is difficult to solve the problem even if the interval between the LEDs is reduced.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the light from the edge light emitting portion 6574a is caused to travel radially in the direction along the side surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (the longitudinal direction of the light receiving projection 6521b). The light emitted from the adjacent LEDs overlaps to reinforce the intensity of the light visually recognized at the position between the light sources.

  Thereby, even in a portion where the LEDs of the first illumination unit 6574 are not disposed (between the LEDs), the line-shaped light can be seen in front view of the light transmission unit 6520 (imaginary line in FIG. 264 (b)). reference). Therefore, it is possible to improve the state where light is visually recognized as a point.

  In particular, the two left and right LEDs arranged at the lower end of the first illumination unit 6574 are arranged at the boundary position between the side surface 6521e1 and the bottom surface 6521e2 of the main body cylinder portion 6521e (see FIG. 262 (e)). Therefore, the light traveling on the upper side of the optical axis overlaps with the light of the LED above it, and the light traveling on the lower side of the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2, thereby lowering the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f. Overlapping at the left and right center.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 264 (a), the light transmission unit 6520 is connected as shown in FIG. 264 (b) even though the LED is not arranged at the left and right center of the lower end of the first illumination unit 6574. Then, the line-shaped light is visible at the lower left and right centers.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, while reducing the arrangement space of the first illumination unit 6574, the shape formed by the light visually recognized through the light transmission unit 6520 is increased, and in addition, the light becomes a point. The degree of visual recognition is weakened, and clear line-shaped light can be visually recognized.

  Note that when the light transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the inside is made difficult to see due to the decorative shape applied to the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523, so the light traveling inside the wall of the transparent tubular member 6521 It is difficult to grasp the position where the crossing points. Therefore, even if the position where the light intersects is indefinite, it is possible to prevent the effect of the light emission effect from being lowered.

  Further, if the position where the light overlaps is near the tip of the frame-like extending portion 6521f, it can be visually recognized as if a new point light source is disposed between the LEDs of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. In other words, since it is possible to make an illusion that more LED light sources are provided than the actual number of LEDs, even a small number of LEDs emit light to the same extent as when a large number of LEDs are used. The production effect of the production can be improved.

  The light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b (four LEDs on the left and right center sides of the first illumination portion 6574) disposed inward of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 in front view is inward of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. Pass through. Here, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b does not travel within the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and in addition to the shape of the enlarged hole 6562a disposed oppositely (see FIG. 245 (b)). It progresses radially along.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit 6574b is visually recognized as a planar light spreading as a region A17 centering on the LED of the surface light emitting unit 6574b in the front view. Further, the light is diffusely reflected by irradiating the decorative shape portion 6523b (see FIG. 260) having a jagged shape on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523, and is visually recognized as planar light in a front view.

  That is, the decorative shape portion 6523b on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523 is not limited to the region (see the imaginary line in FIG. 264 (b)) where the light emitted radially from the surface light emitting portion 6574b reaches. An area to be formed (for example, an area between the area A17 and the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f in front view) can be brightly illuminated.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be viewed as light having different impressions, ie, edge-shaped light and planar light. In addition, it is possible to prevent the boundary from becoming dark by configuring the boundary between the edge-shaped light and the planar light to be irradiated with the irregularly reflected light. Therefore, it is possible to change the impression of the visually recognized light stepwise and continuously.

  Here, various aspects are exemplified as a change in visually recognized light impression. For example, it may be a change in the impression of light emission such as light and dark or blinking, or a change in the color of light.

  In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

  As described above, the partition unit 6540 that is visually recognized from the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 has a curved shape that swells to the front side in the front view and the side view. Therefore, the light that is visually recognized on the left and right of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left-right and up-and-down directions (the direction in which the light is diffused with respect to the point on the back side).

  Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 arranged at the lower left and right of the partition unit 6540 is such that the light passing through the light receiving member 6558 is from the position that the front side edge is located on the back side toward the outer side of the left and right sides. , Proceeds in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left and right and up and down directions (a direction of diffusion with respect to the point on the back side).

  This makes it possible to give the player an impression that the light increases as the player gets closer to the player as compared with the case where the light is advanced only along the front-rear direction. Can be improved.

  Next, the horizontal effect device 6700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 281. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 266 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700.

  In addition, in FIG. 265, illustration of the top effect device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 is omitted, and the direction view from the right oblique front in the state where the horizontal effect device 6700 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a is illustrated. FIG. 266 shows a directional view of the horizontal effect device 6700 from the diagonally left front.

  As shown in FIG. 265 and FIG. 266, the horizontal effect device 6700 is an effect device that is disposed on the front side of the left and right vertically long portions of the metal main body 10014a, and divides the vertically long oval shape in half in a side view. Formed from the shape.

  In the horizontal effect device 6700, a pair of devices having similar shapes are arranged on the left and right sides, but the internal configuration is the same. Therefore, the right horizontal effect device 6700 will be described in detail, and the left horizontal effect device 6700 will be described. Description is omitted.

  As shown in the upper end portion of FIG. 266, the horizontal effect device 6700 is provided so as to cover the front side of the base member 6710 on the front side of the base member 6710 fitted to the metal main body 10014a. It is comprised in the aspect by which the units 6730-6760 are arrange | positioned.

  The fastening between the base member 6710 and the metal main body 10014a will be described. When the base member 6710 is assembled to the metal main body portion 10014a, positioning is performed by inserting a positioning convex portion (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the base member 6710 into a positioning concave portion 10014e formed in the metal main body portion 10014a. Then, a fastening screw inserted into the through hole of the metal main body 10014a is fastened and fixed to a fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the base member 6710.

  Of the constituent members of the horizontal effect device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a. In other words, there is no component member that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a except for the base member 6710 among the component members of the lateral effect device 6700.

  As shown in FIG. 266, on the side toward the game area, the position where the main body bending portion 6751 of the bending plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (the position that is the surface position with the rear end portion of the base member 6710). Is formed. As shown by the left unit in FIG. 265, the rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 is disposed in close proximity to and in front of the glass unit 16.

  Because of this arrangement, it is easy to produce an effect in which the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the back side of the glass unit 16 can be visually recognized. can do.

  FIG. 267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700, and FIG. 268 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700. 267 and 268 illustrate a state in which the covering units 6730 to 6760 are disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 267, an electric decoration board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 configured to emit light is mounted is disposed on the front side of the base member 6710, and the electric decoration board 6720 is arranged on the electric decoration board 6720 from the front side. The covering units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to the base member 6710 in a covering manner.

  That is, the horizontal effect device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports the electrical decoration board 6720 controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 and the electrical decoration board 6720. A light emitting side unit composed of a base member 6710, and a light receiving side unit composed of covering units 6730-6760 that receive light emitted from the light emitting side unit and make the player visually recognize the light. . First, the light emission side unit will be described.

  269 (a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the illumination board 6720, FIG. 269 (b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (c) is a right side of the base member 6710. 269 (d) is a top view of the base member 6710, FIG. 269 (e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (f) is a plan view of FIG. 269 (a). It is sectional drawing of the base member 6710 and the electrical decoration board | substrate 6720 in a CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line | wire.

  As shown in FIG. 269 (a) to FIG. 269 (f), the base member 6710 is disposed so as to face the electric decoration board 6720, and is disposed on the back side of the electric decoration board 6720. A frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 projecting to the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape along the outer shape of the decorative substrate 6720, and a positioning projecting portion projecting to the front side from the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 6713, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 that are pierced so that fastening screws can be inserted at positions outside the electrical decoration board 6720 and close to the electrical decoration board 6720 in a front view; A pair of fastening portions 6715 to which a fastening screw to be inserted is fastened, and a portion of the support plate portion 6711 (a step portion of the outer frame plate portion 6717) on the right side of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 (surrounds the game area). The other side of the window, glass A plurality of alignment holes 6716 that are formed as long holes that are vertically long in the region on the opposite side of the unit 16, and an outer frame that extends in a stepped plate shape from the right edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back side. It mainly includes a plate portion 6717 and an inner frame plate portion 6718 extending in a plate shape from the left edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back surface side.

  The projecting tip of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 is disposed so as to face the back surface portion in the vicinity of the outer shape portion of the electric decoration board 6720 and is in surface contact with the electric decoration board 6720. Accordingly, a gap is provided between the back side of the portion excluding the vicinity of the outer shape portion of the electric decoration board 6720 and the support plate portion 6711 (see FIG. 269 (f)). Therefore, an air layer (heat insulating layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the electrical decoration substrate 6720.

  Thereby, even if the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a and the heat transmitted to the metal main body 10014a can be transmitted to the base member 6710, the amount of heat transmitted to the electrical decoration board 6720 Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions such as malfunction of the electric decoration board 6720 due to high temperature.

  The positioning protrusion 6713 is a part for positioning the electric decoration board 6720 with respect to the base member 6710 by being inserted into positioning holes 6722 formed in two places of the electric decoration board 6720. That is, the positioning board 6720 has a positioning hole 6722 at a position corresponding to the positioning protrusion 6713 with reference to the arrangement of the base member 6710 and the lighting board 6720 in the assembled state (see FIG. 269 (a)). Established.

  The insertion hole 6714 includes a cup-shaped portion in which the fastening portion 6744 of the flat plate member 6740 of the covering units 6730 to 6760 and the fastening portion 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 can be fitted from the front (see FIG. 268). It is a through-hole through which a fastening screw that is formed and can be fastened and fixed is inserted.

  The fastening portion 6715 is fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and is formed so that a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6736 can be screwed. The light receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to two upper and lower fastening portions 6715.

  The alignment hole 6716 is a hole through which the projecting portions 6743 and 6766 (see FIG. 268) of the covering units 6730 to 6760 are inserted. The covering units 6730 to 6760 are formed in a substantially cup shape in which a pair of thin plate-like members (a flat plate member 6740 and a curved plate member 6750) are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right sides (see FIG. 268). ), And fixed to the base member 6710 at the back side (edge-shaped portion).

  Here, the coupling portion between the base member 6710 and the covering units 6730 to 6760 is located at a portion (outer shape portion) that can be touched by the player, and a load applied by the player (for example, a collision of the player) It can be displaced by the load generated by doing so. As described above, since it is fixed to the base member 6710 at the thin-walled rear side end, it is deformed when a load is applied in the thickness direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750. Or misalignment with respect to the base member 6710 may occur. In order to prevent this, the number of fixing points (fastening points) between the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the base member 6710 may be increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the increase in the number of the fixed portions is suppressed, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are inserted into the base member by inserting the protruding portions 6743 and 6766 into the plurality of alignment holes 6716. It is possible to suppress the position shift (position shift in the left-right direction) with respect to 6710.

  In addition, since the inner side surface (left side surface) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 is disposed in close proximity to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, the player leaves the flat plate member 6740 on the left side. Even if a load in the direction is applied, the flat plate member 6740 comes into contact with the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 on the surface, so that the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, the covering units 6730 to 6760 can be prevented from being deformed or displaced with respect to the base member 6710.

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the lateral rendering device 6700 while suppressing an increase in the number of assembly work steps. Note that the main body plate portion 6741 can disperse the load by providing the concave-convex forming portion 6741a in which a fine concave-convex shape is formed in a contact range with the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712. Details will be described later. .

  The outer frame plate portion 6717 is disposed so as to face the right side surface of the metal main body portion 10014a and is in surface contact with and covers (covers) the right side of the metal main body portion 10014a. Thereby, it can prevent that the metal main-body part 10014a is visually recognized from a player.

  The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes a support recessed portion 6717a that is recessed from a part of the alignment holes 6716 in the front-rear direction. The support recess 6717 a is recessed along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716, and is recessed along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the back side of the alignment hole 6716.

  The support recessed portion 6717a is formed to have a size that fits with the projecting portion 6743 or is opposed to each other with a slight gap in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, compared to the case where the projecting portion 6743 is supported only by the alignment hole 6716, the area capable of supporting the projecting portion 6743 can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a). The 6740 can be prevented from being displaced with respect to the base member 6710. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported with respect to the base member 6710.

  The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion facing the main body bending portion 6751 of the bending plate member 6750, and is formed in a planar shape facing the game area side (inner side).

  The electrical decoration board 6720 is a so-called printed board, and a main body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape, positioning holes 6722 formed in two places of the main body plate portion 6721, and an arbitrary shape in the main body plate portion 6721. It mainly includes LED chips D1 on which a plurality of patterns are mounted.

  The main body plate portion 6721 is held by the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, the positioning protrusion 6713 (see FIG. 269 (c)) is inserted into the positioning hole 6722 to restrict the left / right / up / down movement, and the forward / backward movement is controlled by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 280). The movement is regulated by being sandwiched between

  The LED chip D1 in the present embodiment is mounted with the same chip, but in relation to the region illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 269 (a) as the boundary of the region indicating the configuration of the light receiving side units 6730 to 6760. There are two types.

  That is, the LED chip D1 includes an edge light emitting portion D1a disposed inside the imaginary line frame shown in FIG. 269 (a) and a surface light emitting portion D1b disposed outside the imaginary line frame. Prepare mainly. The difference between the light emitting portions D1a and D1b is that light emitted from the light emitting portion D1a is easily visible as line-shaped (edge-shaped) light, whereas light emitted from the light emitting portion D1b is easily visible as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode to be visually recognized by the player, which will be described later in detail.

  Next, covering units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) arranged on the front side of the electrical decoration board 6720 will be described. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760.

  As is apparent from the state shown in FIGS. 267 and 268 and exploded from FIGS. 270 and 271, the covering units 6730 to 6760 are made of light-transmitting resin and pass through the inside. The light receiving member 6730 that can be refracted and covers the electric decoration board 6720 from the front side is provided, and the front thereof is covered with other constituent members.

  FIG. 272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272 (b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. 273 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIa in FIG. 272 (a), and FIG. 273 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb in FIG. 272 (b). is there.

  274 (a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 274 (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274 (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. is there.

  FIG. 272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the left side, FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the right side, and FIG. FIG. 274 is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 viewed from the right side, and FIG. 274C is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 viewed from the left side. Further, in FIG. 272 (b), the covering units 6730 to 6760 are collectively illustrated for easy understanding.

  The light receiving member 6730 is a member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed in a flat plate shape with an outer shape equivalent to the outer shape of the electrical decoration board 6720 and is disposed opposite to the electrical decoration board 6720, An inner extending portion 6732 extending to the back side so as to be bent from an inner edge (left side edge in FIG. 272) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207), and an outer edge of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state An outer extending portion 6733 that extends to the back side so as to be bent from (the right edge in FIG. 274), and a plurality of (in this embodiment) protruding in the form of long ribs from the back surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 The long ribs 6734 and the base ends of the long ribs 6734 (the side to be coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731) and the front and back of the light receiving surface portion 6731 are extended in the form of long fins. A plurality of (in this embodiment, five) fins 6735, a plurality of insertion holes 6736 through which fastening screws arranged at upper and lower ends and fastened to fastening portions 6715 (see FIG. 269 (a)) are inserted, and a curved plate It mainly includes a fitting portion 6737 formed from a shape that can be fitted to the decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) of the member 6750.

  The light receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts the light emitted from the LED chip D1, and a decorative pattern with a complicated cut is formed on the back side. The decorative pattern is formed with long protrusions arranged along a plurality of concentric circles having different diameters, centering on a portion facing the surface light emitting portion D1b (see the enlarged view of FIG. 274 (b)). ). Here, the outer peripheral surface of the small-diameter projection at the position opposed to the surface light emitting portion D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which light irradiated from behind is refracted outward along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731). The outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter protrusion is similarly inclined (the light traveling along the surface of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is refracted to the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731). (See FIG. 275 (b)).

  Therefore, after the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is refracted in the vicinity of the shaft portion of the long protrusion and proceeds to the outer diameter side of the long protrusion, the large diameter further away from the axis of the long protrusion. A wide range of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 can emit light by being refracted at a location and traveling toward the front side.

  Furthermore, on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731, a basic shape that is triangular in front view and whose substantially central portion swells to the front side is regularly and closely aligned, and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is a surface light emitting portion. A decorative recessed portion 6731a that is recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape is provided at the front side position of D1b.

  By the decorative recessed portion 6731a, it is possible to increase or decrease the surface light emission in the light receiving surface portion 6731 (a stepwise intensity can be applied). That is, since the light is collected on the center side of the concave portion due to the shape of the decorative concave portion 6731a, the decorative concave portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a stronger light emission mode than other portions.

  The inner extending portion 6732 and the outer extending portion 6733 are configured such that the extending end portions are in contact with the electrical decoration substrate 6720 in the front-rear direction, and the extending end portion of the inner extending portion 6732 extends over the entire top and bottom. While being in contact with the electrical decoration substrate 6720, a portion that is not in contact with the extending end portion of the outer extending portion 6733 is formed.

  That is, the outer extending portion 6733 includes a separation end portion 6733a that is formed so that the extending length is as short as the thickness of the electric decoration board 6720 and is not in contact with the electric decoration board 6720. In the present embodiment, the separation end portion 6733a can improve the entry and exit of air with respect to the region between the electrical decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730, so that heat can be prevented from being trapped.

  Further, like the inner extending portion 6732, when contacting the electric decoration board 6720 across the entire upper and lower sides, the LED chip D <b> 1 disposed so as to protrude from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the electric decoration board 6720 is arranged on the inner side. It cannot be arranged behind the extending portion 6732. Therefore, the region where the LED chip D1 is disposed is limited as the plate thickness of the inner extending portion 6732 is increased.

  On the other hand, since a gap is formed between the separated end 6733a of the outer extending portion 6733 and the electric decoration board 6720, the LED chip D1 is placed behind the separated end 6733a of the outer extending portion 6732. Can be arranged. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum arrangement area of the LED chip D1 while sufficiently securing the plate pressure of the outer extending portion 6733.

  The left and right wall portions of the outer extension portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the left side of the inner extension portion 6732 (on the side opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) is densely provided with a semicircular cross-sectional protrusion. The concavo-convex shape is formed in such a manner that it is aligned with each other. Thereby, the light emitted to the left through the inner extending portion 6732 emits light (spreads radially), and it is possible to make the player easily recognize uniform light.

  As will be described later, when a part of the light emitted from the electric decoration board 6720 to the front side passes through the inner extending portion 6732, the intensity of the light changes for each region. That is, at the peripheral position of the end portion of the fin 6735, the light D1m in which both the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and traveling through the long rib 6734 and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b are combined is visually recognized. However, at a position away from the fin 6735, the light traveling through the long rib 6734 does not reach and the light D1p emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized, and the light D1m is more light than the light D1p. Is also visually recognized as strong light (the intensity of the light corresponds to the length of the arrow).

  Thereby, the magnitude of the intensity of light visually recognized via the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed for each region arranged vertically. In addition, the difference in the mode of the light visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

  For example, by changing the color of the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the color of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b, the color of the light viewed through the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed up and down. It is possible to make it visually change by changing each area.

  The long rib 6734 is disposed on the front side of the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265), and is formed with the same thickness without tapering back and forth. It is mainly provided with a plurality of linear ribs 6734a formed in a substantially straight shape when viewed from the back, and a V-shaped rib 6734b which is bent when viewed from the back and formed into a substantially V shape.

  The side surface of the long rib 6734 is formed as a smooth surface. That is, unlike the case where the surface of the long rib 6734 is knurled on the line, when light reaches and passes through the side surface of the long rib 6734, it does not spread (does not emit light) and is unidirectional. Proceed to. Accordingly, since it is possible to avoid the side surface of the long rib 6734 from emitting light uniformly, when the horizontal effect device 6700 is viewed from the left-right direction, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit It is possible to reduce the degree that the light emitted from D1b is mixed and visually recognized.

  In other words, the long rib 6734 is formed as a portion that is long in the vertical direction and can be seen in the left-right direction, and suppresses light that has passed through the long rib 6734 from reaching the player's eyes in a surface-emitting manner. Therefore, the player who visually recognizes the horizontal effect device 6700 from the left and right can easily recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b.

  In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

  The straight ribs 6734a are arranged in two pieces at the top and bottom, and are formed in such a manner that the straight ribs 6734a extend in a direction inclined toward the upper and lower central positions toward the left (the center side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265). 6734a1 is connected to the inner extension 6732, while the right end 6734a2 is spaced from the outer extension 6733.

  Therefore, the light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can enter the inner extending portion 6732 directly through the left end portion 6734a1, while the light passing through the right end portion 6734a2 can be incident on the outer extending portion 6733. Light energy decreases in the gap between the two.

  Thereby, the brightness visually recognized in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a is different. That is, the part visually recognized through the inner extension part 6732 is viewed brightly, and the part visually recognized through the outer extension part 6733 is visually recognized darkly.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right directions is deteriorated, while passing through the left end portion 6734a1 of the linear rib 6734a. Then, the light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extending portion 6732.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction only when the light enters the inner extending portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1. That is, in the vicinity of the left end portion 6734a1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at a position away from the left end portion 6734a1 (position between them), the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is observed. Since it can be visually recognized by color and brightness, a player who visually recognizes the horizontal effect device 6700 from the left-right direction can visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

  The V-shaped rib 6734b is disposed at the center position in the vertical direction, and is connected to the inner extending portion 6732 by the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 near the bent position, while the both end portions 6734b2 are separated from the outer extending portion 6733. The reason why the bent position and the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly shifted is that the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) is disposed opposite to the bent position.

  That is, by shifting the position where the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is received from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the light (main light) irradiated linearly in the front-rear direction from the edge light emitting portion D1a is moved to the connecting position. Since incidence can be suppressed, loss of light incident on the fin 6735 from the V-shaped rib 6734b can be reduced.

  The V-shaped rib 6734b has a function similar to the function of the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b can be directly incident on the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, while light passing through the both end portions 6734b2 is allowed to enter the outer extending portion 6733. Light energy decreases in the gap between the two.

  Thereby, the brightness visually recognized in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b is different. That is, the part visually recognized through the inner extension part 6732 is viewed brightly, and the part visually recognized through the outer extension part 6733 is visually recognized darkly.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right directions is deteriorated, while the intermediate connection portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b is provided. The light that passes through and enters the inner extension portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction only when the light enters the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1. That is, it is visually recognized by the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a in the vicinity of the intermediate coupling portion 6734b1, and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is located at a position away from the intermediate coupling portion 6734b1 (position between them). Since it can be visually recognized by color and brightness, a player who visually recognizes the horizontal effect device 6700 from the left-right direction can visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

  The fin 6735 is formed so that the thickness decreases from the extending proximal end toward the distal end side, the distal curved fin 6735a corresponding to the linear rib 6734a, and the distal bent fin 6735b corresponding to the V-shaped rib 6734b. Is mainly provided.

  The front curved fin 6735a is curved at the upper and lower inner edges, and a triangular wave (notch-shaped) notch is densely formed on the left side surface (inner side surface of the front frame 10014) to form a light diffusion portion. The right side surface (the outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

  The tip bending fin 6735b is provided with an inclined surface in which the extended tip is inclined to the back side as it goes from the upper and lower ends to the center in the vertical direction, and intersects on the front side of the bent position of the V-shaped rib 6734b. The light diffusing portion is formed by densely forming triangular wave-shaped (notch-shaped) notches on the inner surface of 10014, and the right side surface (the outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

  These fins 6735 are formed so that the extending length becomes shorter toward the left surface side. In particular, since the end portion on the left surface side of the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, a large amount of light (mainly emitted from the edge side light emitting portion D1a and emitted from the front side end portion of the tip curved fin 6735a). Light) is emitted from the fin 6735 in the vicinity of the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, the light can reach the inner extending portion 6732 side (back side, root side), and the left side of the light receiving member 6730 can be easily brightened.

  In addition, the long rib 6734 and the inner extending portion 6732 are coupled behind the position where the distal curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, and the inner extension is also caused by the light passing through the inner side of the long rib 6734. The installation portion 6732 can be illuminated. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, it is possible to perform a light emission effect by combining the light passing through the long rib 6734 and the light passing through the tip curved fin 6735a. It is possible to improve the production effect of the light emission effect.

  In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

  The passage mode of light passing through the side surface can be changed from the difference in the formation mode between the left side surface and the right side surface of the fin 6735. In other words, the light that passes through the left side can be seen as uniform light because of the surface light emission effect due to the notch, while the light that passes through the right side does not have the surface light emission effect, so it passes through the right side. Can be visually recognized as local light. Needless to say, the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 function as reinforcing portions for reinforcing the base member 6710 because of their shapes.

  The insertion hole 6736 is in a state where one place is exposed in the assembled state (FIG. 266) of the horizontal effect device 6700, and only two places are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730. Therefore, the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced by loosening the fastening screw inserted through the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  Thereby, when the positional relationship between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 and the edge light emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 is deviated (for example, deviated due to vibration caused by the player's operation or vibration caused by opening / closing the front frame 10014). In this case, the maintenance work for returning the position can be performed without disassembling the horizontal effect device 6700, so that the maintainability can be improved (the difficulty level is low and the time is shortened).

  The fitting portion 6737 is recessed in the left-right direction with an inclined shape that tapers toward the back side, and alignment and posture alignment between the light receiving member 6730 and the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. And a single concave portion 6737a provided so as to be further recessed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the light receiving member 6730 and the light receiving member 6730 are arranged while limiting the number of locations where the recesses 6737a on the inner extension portion 6732 side (locations where the fastening portions 6753 are disposed) to one. In addition, the positional deviation and the positional deviation with respect to the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 are suppressed. This will be described in detail below.

  Here, in the case where the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal effect device 6700 are fastened and fixed, the fastening screws do not transmit light, so that the more fastening points there are, the more likely the shadows are to be generated. Therefore, even if the surface area of the horizontal effect device 6700 is formed to be large, the light is divided at the fastening portion, and the effect effect of the light effect may be lowered. On the other hand, if the number of fastening points is reduced, the supporting force is reduced, and there is a possibility that the possibility that the horizontal effect device 6700 is deformed from the base due to a load given by the player or a load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed may be increased.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the fastening portion is limited to the concave portion 6737a, but the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative protruding portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) are fitted to maintain the supporting force. ing.

  Thereby, the fastening part (in this embodiment, between the main body bending portion 6751 and the lighting board 6720 as the light effect part) of the horizontal effect device 6700 on the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) side. The durability of the side effect device 6700 can be improved while reducing the number of fastening points).

  In the present embodiment, the light is formed so as to be able to travel to the back side through the recess 6737a. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  275 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal effect device 6700 along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274 (b), and FIG. 275 (b) is a diagram of the light receiving member 6730 along the CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb line in FIG. 274 (b). It is sectional drawing.

  As shown in FIG. 275 (a), the recess 6737a is disposed in the same cross section as the intermediate coupling portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b disposed to face the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG. 281), and a striped decorative portion 6751e is formed via a fastening portion 6753 fitted into the concave portion 6737a. The main body bending portion 6751 is formed so that light can travel to the back side portion. That is, light is formed so as to be able to travel toward the back side of the electric decoration substrate 6720 (the side opposite to the light irradiation direction).

  Here, the fastening portion 6753 is a place where the fastening screw is fastened, and the fastening screw is likely to be a shadow, so it is considered unsuitable for a light-emitting effect, but in this embodiment, intermediate coupling is provided on both upper and lower sides of the fastening portion 6753. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light can avoid the fastening screw up and down so that the player can visually recognize the light while suppressing the influence of the fastening screw. That is, by making light travel from both the upper and lower sides of the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw visually recognized by the player can be eliminated (thinned).

  In FIG. 275 (b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is shown enlarged. Of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, the light traveling in a direction having a small angle with respect to the optical axis along the front-rear direction enters the light receiving surface portion 6731 while being gently refracted, and passes through the decorative recessed portion 6731a. At this time, it is further refracted and collected. Thereby, the emitted light intensity of the light visually recognized through the decorative recessed part 6731a can be increased.

  As described above, the light emission mode on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731 is centered on the decorative recessed portion 6731a where the light intensity is increased by condensing, and the light intensity increases as the distance from the decorative recessed portion 6731a increases. It is set as the aspect which becomes low.

  At this time, since the light is collected in the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the light is gathered closer to the optical axis side as compared with the case where the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized as a single item. Compared with the case where the light emitted from D1b is viewed without the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of the visible light can be increased.

  That is, due to the action of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is higher than the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b (light that is visible near the decorative recessed portion 6731a). The light intensity is gradually reduced to light having a lower intensity than directly viewing the light, and the player can visually recognize light having different intensities through the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  Returning to FIG. 270, the member that covers the light receiving member 6730 will be described. On the front side of the light receiving member 6730, a cup-shaped member having an open back side is disposed. The flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760 that constitute the cup-shaped member will be described.

  276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. FIG. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760.

  After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left and right directions and combined by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled and fitted from the front side, whereby each member is fixed inseparably.

  The flat plate member 6740 is a member formed from a colorless and transparent and light-transmitting resin, and a main body plate portion 6741 formed from a flat plate having a shape obtained by dividing an oval shape, and the main body plate portion 6741 are formed. A flat plate portion disposed on a plane parallel translated from the plane to the left side, and a fitted plate portion 6742 connected to the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6741 with a step, and a rear side end portion of the main body plate portion 6741 A plurality of projecting portions 6743 projecting from the rear surface to the back side, a plurality of fastening portions 6744 arranged at positions spaced from the projecting portion 6743 and configured to allow fastening screws to be screwed from the back side, The plate portion 6741 mainly includes a plurality of insertion holes 6745 that are formed in a size that allows the fastening screws to be inserted.

  The main body plate portion 6741 is provided with a decorative shape that is recessed leftward from the left side surface, and protrudes rightward from the right side surface corresponding to the recessed portion, and the right end portion of the main body plate portion 6741 is , Which coincides with the right surface of the main body plate portion 6741.

  Concavity and convexity forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure in such a manner that it is filled with hexagonal pyramids arranged to taper to the left, and has an effect similar to that of a reflector. Accordingly, the strength of the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6741 (the portion that can come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, so that an external force is applied. It can be prevented from cracking or hanging. In addition, contact friction can be reduced when the base member 6710 is slid in order to assemble the assembly of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760.

  Therefore, the outer frame plate portion 6717 is damaged when the player receives an impact after the horizontal effect device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014 or when a load is applied when the front frame 10014 is opened or closed. In addition to being able to improve durability by making it difficult, assembly of the lateral effect device 6700 can be facilitated.

  The to-be-fitted plate portion 6742 has a plurality of groove portions 6742a that are notched as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction on the right side surface, and a front-rear direction that is drilled in a direction along the groove portion 6742a between the main body plate portions 6741. Hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the front / rear direction hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, details of which will be described later.

  The protruding portion 6743 is a portion that is inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. It is a part fastened and fixed by the fastening screw which passes through.

  Further, the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are disposed at positions close to the outside of the right edge of the electrical decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. In particular, the fastening portion 6744 is arranged in a manner of entering into the recesses of the electric decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIGS. 269 (a) and 274 (b)), and therefore the electric decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member with respect to the flat plate member 6740. 6730 position shift can be suppressed.

  The insertion holes 6745 are through holes through which fastening screws that are screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are arranged at four locations in the vertical direction. Since the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fastened to the flat plate member 6740 at the four fastening positions, the fixing force is insufficient even when the number of fastening portions 6753 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750 is small. Can be avoided.

  The curved plate member 6750 is disposed so as to face the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740, is curved so as to swell leftward toward the back side, is formed to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730, is colorless and transparent, and transmits light. Main body bending portion 6751 having a plurality of stripes formed on the inner side surface thereof, and a curved plate portion that is arranged to be translated from the main body bending portion 6751 to the right side, on the front side of main body bending portion 6751 Corresponding to a to-be-fitted plate part 6752 that is connected with a step on the edge and arranged to face the to-be-fitted plate part 6742, a plurality of fastening parts 6753 that can be fastened with fastening screws from the back side, and an insertion hole 6745 A plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in at positions where the fastening screws are inserted, and a plurality of insertions formed so that fastening screws can be inserted in the front-rear direction at the front side edge of the main body bending portion 6751 And 6755 mainly includes a plurality of through holes 6756 which fastening screws are drilled to be inserted in the longitudinal direction in the front side edge portion of the fitting plate portions 6752, a.

  The main body bending portion 6751 has a triangular shape that tapers toward the back side in a region including the fastening portion 6753 at the center of the upper and lower sides, and a decorative protruding portion 6751a that protrudes rightward from the right side surface, and the decorative protruding portion 6751a. A front-rear direction hole 6751b drilled in the front-rear direction, a flat partitioning part 6751c for partitioning the stripe shape with a flat surface, and a central flat part 6751d formed from a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at the vertical center position And a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin strip shape on the inner surface near the rear end portion.

  The decorative projecting portion 6751 a is configured as a portion that fits with the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730. Further, the front-rear direction hole 6751b has a function of aligning the connection extending portion 6863 and the curved plate member 6750.

  As a result, the decorative projecting portion 6751a can be configured as a portion having both a function as a decorative portion and a function as a portion for aligning with the light receiving member 6730. Thereby, even if it is the structure where only one fastening part 6753 is arrange | positioned in the up-and-down center part like this embodiment, it can suppress that the curved board member 6750 wobbles.

  The flat partitioning portion 6751c is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge portion of the distal curved fin 6735a (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the front-rear direction view and the side view. Thereby, when the light emitted from the front edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the flat partitioning portion 6751c, so that the clear light is visible. Can be made.

  On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735a is irregularly reflected by the plurality of striped portions partitioned by the flat partitioning portion 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is viewed from the side surface, the light emission mode of the light can be set to surface light emission, and the light can be blurred and viewed.

  The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the front edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the front-rear direction view and the side view. Thereby, when the light emitted from the front edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, so that the clear light is visible. Can be made.

  On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735b is irregularly reflected by the plurality of striped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bending fin 6735b is viewed from the side surface, the light emission mode of the light can be set as surface light emission, and the light can be blurred and viewed.

  Similarly to the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, the fitted plate portion 6752 is a step between a plurality of groove portions 6752a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction on the left side surface and the main body bending portion 6751. And a front-rear direction hole 6752b drilled in a direction along the groove portion 6752a. The groove portion 6752a and the front / rear direction hole 6752b have a function of aligning the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, details of which will be described later.

  The fastening portion 6753 is a portion that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw that passes through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. The fastening portion 6773 is arranged at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the electric decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view, and is arranged in a manner of entering the recesses of the electric decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 269). a) and FIG. 274 (b)), it is possible to suppress displacement of the electric decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750.

  The fastening portion 6754 is a portion into which a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6745 is screwed, and is disposed at a position (four locations) corresponding to the insertion hole 6745. Since a plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, the flat plate member 6740 is firmly fixed to the base member 6710 by the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744. Therefore, when the number of the fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is reduced, the curved plate member 6750 is provided. It is possible to suppress wobble. As a result, the number of the fastening portions 6753 in the vicinity of the rear side end portion of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced. As a result, the number of places where the light is blocked by the fastening screws can be reduced. As a result, the light emission effect can be visually recognized without blocking the light. A large area can be secured.

  The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through-holes through which fastening screws can be inserted from the back side, and guide wall parts 6755a and 6756a for guiding the fastening parts 6774 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front side. It is formed (see FIG. 277).

  The guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a are formed such that an inner surface having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6774 of the cover member 6760 is opposed to the right side (side adjacent to the flat plate member 6740) of the fastening portion 6774. Is done. Accordingly, the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state (see FIG. 265) of the horizontal effect device 6700 can be restricted by the fastening portion 6774 of the cover member 6760, so that the curved plate member 6750 is inadvertently used. It can be prevented from being removed.

  The cover member 6760 is assembled to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 as the fastening portion 6774 slides back and forth in a manner along the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 is bent at the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6761 and the main body plate portion 6761 that covers the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and is covered by the curved plate member 6750. A curved plate portion 6762, which is a curved plate portion shaped to cover the fitting plate portion 6742 from the left side, and the left and rear sides of the curved plate portion 6762 are extended from two positions spaced apart from each other by an approximately equal distance from the vertical center position. A plurality of connection extending portions 6663 connected at the end portions and a plurality of fastening screws disposed on the back surface of the curved plate portion 6762 and inserted into the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the curved plate member 6750 so as to be screwable. Fastening portion 6774 and a base end fastening portion formed at the back side end portion of the upper end portion of curved plate portion 6762 so as to be screwed into a fastening screw inserted through insertion hole 6714 near the upper end portion of base member 6710 6 65 (see FIG. 279), and a plurality of projecting portions 6766 which are protruded to the rear side from the rear end of the main plate portion 6761, mainly comprising a.

  The main body plate portion 6761 is slidable inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and protrudes leftward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6761a are provided.

  The projecting rib 6761a is formed to project rearward from the rear side edge of the main body plate portion 6761, and this projecting portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6742b. In other words, the overhanging portion is disposed to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and the movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the flat plate member 6740 from being displaced to the left with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

  The curved plate portion 6762 is configured to be slidable inside the groove portion 6752a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6752a of the curved plate member 6750, and protrudes rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6762a.

  The protruding rib 6762a is formed so as to protrude rearward from the rear side edge portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and the protruding portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6752b. That is, the overhanging portion is disposed opposite to the right side surface of the main body bending portion 6751, and the movement of the main body bending portion 6751 can be restricted. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the lateral effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

  The connecting extension portion 6673 includes a protruding rib 6863a that protrudes rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the front-rear direction hole 6751b.

  The projecting rib 6673a is formed to project rearward from the rear side edge portion at the coupling position of the coupling extension portion 6763, and the projecting portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6751b. That is, the overhanging portion is disposed to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the main body bending portion 6751 can be restricted. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the lateral effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

  As described above, the fastening portion 6774 is configured as a portion that can restrict the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Inadvertent removal can be prevented.

  Thus, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left and right. That is, the rightward movement of the curved plate member 6750 is restricted by the relationship between the protruding ribs 6762a and 6673a and the front and rear direction holes 6751b and 6752b, and the curved plate member is defined by the relationship between the fastening portion 6768 and the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a. The movement of 6750 to the left is restricted. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

  The proximal end fastening portion 6765 is disposed at the rear side end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and a fastening screw inserted into an insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end portion of the base member 6710 can be screwed. Formed. That is, a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710 is screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765, and the base end fastening portion 6765 is fastened and fixed to the base member 6710.

  The protruding portion 6766 is a portion inserted through the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. In addition, the protruding portion 6766 and the base end fastening portion 6765 are provided on the electrical decoration board 6720 and the cover board 6760 that is disposed in a position close to the right edge or upper edge of the light receiving board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in front view. The positional deviation of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 280 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illumination board 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 along the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line in FIG. 272 (b), and FIG. 280 (b) is a diagram of CCLXXXb in FIG. 272 (b). FIG. 280 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the electrical decoration board 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 in the line -CCLXXXb, and FIG. 280 (c) shows the base member 6710, the electrical decoration board 6720, and the light reception in the CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line in FIG. FIG. 10 is a sectional view of a member 6730.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (a), the longitudinal distance between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is suppressed to a height at which the LED chip D1 rises from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721. Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can be incident on the long rib 6734 without omission, and the inside of the long rib 6734 can be totally reflected (refer to FIG. 281) to easily advance to the front side. .

  Further, in a place where the long rib 6734 is not disposed, the front-rear distance between the surface light emitting portion D1b and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained to be equal to or larger than the front-rear width (formation length) of the long rib 6734. Therefore, the area as a location where the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be increased.

  Thus, according to this embodiment, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b are based on the premise that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially. This makes it easy to distinguish and distinguish the light.

  That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel as clear light that travels by being totally reflected inside the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, or through the long rib 6734. On the other hand, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is uniform light (light light) via the light refracting surface portion of the light receiving surface portion 6731 and the inner extending portion 6732. ).

  Thereby, as compared with the production mode in which the lens for condensing the light emitted from the illumination board 6720 is disposed opposite to the illumination board 6720 and the gorgeous light is visually recognized with a small area, as in the conventional example. According to the above, it is possible to visually recognize light (planar light) spreading in the area of the electric decoration board 6720 while visually recognizing gorgeous light (line-shaped light) in a small area. And it can perform easily the effect which makes these different lights visually recognize only one or both visually. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in producing the light effect.

  Therefore, for example, even when the same LED chip is employed for the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit D1b, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b By varying the color and brightness of the light, it is possible to execute a light emission effect rich in gradation (light emission effect of different colors and brightness).

  As shown in FIG. 280 (b), on the side surface in the plate thickness direction of the fin 6735, the right side surface (outer side surface of the front frame 10014) is the surface position in the front-rear direction with the long rib 6734, and the left side surface (front frame 10014). The inner side surface is an inclined surface that tapers toward the front side end (closes to the right side). Therefore, the normal line on the left side does not face right side (a direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the electrical decoration board 6720, that is, a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction), but a direction having a component facing the front side. Facing. Thereby, the light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 can be directed not only to the side but also to the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (c), since the long rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D 1 a and incident on the long rib 6734 is directed to the inner extending portion 6732. Can proceed. The progress of this light will be described using a schematic diagram.

  FIG. 281 is a schematic diagram of a base member 6710, an electric decoration board 6720, and a light receiving member 6730 schematically showing the cross section of FIG. 280 (a). In FIG. 281, arrows L <b> 23 a to L <b> 23 e that indicate light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D <b> 1 a are schematically illustrated.

  The intensity of light emitted from the LED decreases as the angle between the surface of the electric decoration board 6720 and the axis X23 orthogonal to the surface increases, but the light itself is irradiated radially. In the present embodiment, the subsequent arrival positions differ depending on the traveling direction of light.

  An arrow L23a indicates the traveling direction of light that enters the end portion of the long rib 6734, travels by being totally reflected inside the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, and reaches the front-side end portion of the fin 6735. . Since the light that has reached the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a is totally reflected and travels, compared to the case where the light is partially transmitted (emitted) from the side surfaces of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735. , Can reduce light energy loss. Therefore, even when the distance from the edge light emitting unit D1a is long, it is possible to make the player easily recognize light with sufficient brightness.

  The arrow L23b indicates the traveling direction of light emitted from the left side (inside the front frame 10014) before reaching the front end of the fin 6735. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed to have a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

  An arrow L23c indicates a traveling direction of light that passes through the long rib 6734 and proceeds directly to the inner extending portion 6732 and emitted from the surface thereof. Since this light enters the long rib 6734 and no refraction occurs at the end face, and energy loss of light is suppressed, it can be viewed brightly. In addition, since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed to have a jagged shape, light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

  An arrow L23d indicates a traveling direction of light that cannot be propagated into the fin 6735 and is reflected after reaching the light-receiving surface portion 6731 as a coupling position between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735. That is, as described above, the fin 6735 is formed so that the length in the thickness direction is shorter than the long rib 6734 toward the front side, and on the left side (the inner side of the front frame 10014), Since the jagged recess portion is formed, the long rib 6734 partially protrudes from the fin 6735 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, even if the light travels in the front-rear direction in the same manner, it cannot enter the fin 6735 at all the coupling positions of the long rib 6734 and the light receiving surface portion 6731, and a part (particularly, the long rib). In the region in the vicinity of the left side surface of 6734, entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed, and light that reaches this region is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  Thereafter, the arrow L23d reaches the inner extending portion 6732 and is emitted. Note that the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed to have a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in a surface-emitting manner.

  Here, as illustrated in FIG. 281, the light indicated by the arrow L <b> 23 d includes light traveling to the back side of the electrical decoration substrate 6720. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the back side part of the electrical decoration board | substrate 6720 can be light-emitted by the electrical decoration board | substrate 6720 which equips the front side with LED chip D1 which irradiates light to the front side (at least electrical decoration). Light can travel to the back side of the substrate 6720 (see FIG. 281).

  Then, the inner surface of the rear side end portion of the curved plate member 6750 arranged on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed in a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross sections are arranged vertically in the rear view (see FIG. 276). Thereby, the light that travels in the direction of the arrow L23d and reaches the end on the back surface side of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted leftward in a uniform manner up and down, and the light can illuminate the glass unit 16 with this light.

  Therefore, since the light effect can be executed by combining the light irradiated toward the glass unit 16 from the irradiation device arranged on the back side of the glass unit 16 and the light proceeded by the arrow L23d, the light effect The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  Note that according to the present embodiment, the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d can be reduced. That is, at the time of incidence on the long rib 6734, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is brighter than the light indicated by the arrow L23c because of the difference in angle with the axis X23, but is indicated by the arrow L23. Since the light that is transmitted is reflected by the light-receiving surface portion 6731, energy loss is caused by the amount of light that is transmitted. Therefore, when the light reaches the inner extension portion 6732, it is visually recognized as light having substantially the same brightness. Thus, the difference in the brightness of the light accompanying an irradiation direction can be relieved, and the brightness of the inner side extension part 6732 can be made uniform easily back and forth.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the configuration of the horizontal effect device 6700 disposed on the left side, the configuration of the right horizontal effect device 6700 is mostly formed in a substantially bilaterally symmetric shape (or similar shape). As a special portion that is not symmetrical, the formation of the long rib 6734 (projection on the back surface) is omitted (the formation of the fin 6735 is maintained). Thereby, the mode of the light effect is adjusted for each range of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

  This adjustment is an adjustment for ensuring the visibility of the player. In other words, the effect of causing the light to travel to the fin 6735 is desired to be maintained on the left side, but on the other hand, it is intended to suppress the light from traveling toward the game area due to the light traveling on the long rib 6734.

  That is, the intensity of light emitted from the lateral effect device 6700 to the inside (the game area side) is reduced in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the place where the launch ball enters the game area on the left side of the game area. Is aimed at. Thereby, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the fired ball due to the dazzling light effect, and it can be prevented in advance that it is difficult to adjust the launch intensity and confirm the launch of the game ball.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the game area, the ball fired with the right strike (the strongest firing strength) almost always flows down, and it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize the ball to adjust the firing strength. . In addition, since a number of game balls gathered in a short time will flow down continuously in a narrow area, by directing light to the spot and reflecting it to the game ball, the effect of producing effects using light Can be improved easily. Therefore, it is not necessary to weaken the light intensity on the right side of the game area, and by making it easier to emit light from the horizontal effect device 6700 to the game area (see the glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) as in this embodiment. It is possible to improve the production effect.

  An arrow L23e is light emitted in a direction intersecting with the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734 and is irradiated in a direction having a large angle with the axis X23 (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). Indicates the direction of travel. This light is reflected on the inner side surfaces of the left and right extending portions 6732 and 6733 or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 to emit light, but the long rib 6734 is very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a. Because of the extension to the position, the intensity of the light traveling by the arrow L23e is very small in the first place, so that it can be configured as light that is hardly visible to the player.

  Therefore, the light traveling effect along the arrow L23e can be visually recognized mixed with the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, thereby preventing the light effect from being lowered.

  Returning to FIG. 280 (a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emission effect in the vicinity of the fitting portion 6737 will be described. The V-shaped rib 6734b is connected to a recess 6737a formed inside the fitting portion 6737 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, similar to the contents described above with the arrows L23c and L23d, part of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through both wall portions of the recess 6737a and reaches the left surface of the fitting portion 6737.

  The concave portion 6737a is configured as a concave portion in which a fastening portion 6753 (see FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth, and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6753, so that the fastening screw is lighted in the vicinity of the concave portion 6737a. Therefore, there is a possibility that the effect of producing the light emission effect is lowered.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, sufficient alignment (prevention of misalignment) can be performed by matching the shapes of the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a, so that the light receiving member 6730 and the LED chip D1 The number of fastening screws can be reduced while preventing misalignment, and the number of places where the effect of the lighting effect is reduced can be reduced.

  In addition, the concave portion 6737a is disposed in the vicinity of the fastening screw so as to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and the light passing through the concave portion 6737a is emitted from the surface of the inner extending portion 6732, whereby the fastening screw is provided. It prevents the neighborhood from becoming too dark. Thereby, the grade of the fall of the production effect of a light emission effect can be suppressed.

  Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 284. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the electric decoration board 6570 is disposed on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 above the front frame 10014 has been described. However, the pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment is the right of the operation device 10300. By providing the rendering device 18800 including the illumination board 18830 below, it is possible to execute the light emission rendering even in the lower part of the front frame 18014. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 282 is a front view of a pachinko machine 18010 according to the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 283 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 18010. Unlike the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, the pachinko machine 18010 is different from the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment in that the front frame 18014 is provided with an effect device 18800 in contrast to the front frame 10014 in the seventeenth embodiment. Only the device 18800 will be described, and description of other components will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283, the rendering device 18800 is a device for light emission rendering in which the back side and the top surface side are coupled to the covering base member 6410 on the front side of the lower dish unit 6400, and the operation device 10300 It is disposed between the operation handle 51.

  The effect device 18800 is configured so that the appearance of the light emission effect changes depending on whether or not the operation device 10300 participates in the operation effect by structural ingenuity. Next, in order to explain the structural device, the internal structure of the rendering device 18800 will be described.

  284 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering device 18800 along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and FIG. 284 (b) is an electrical decoration board 18830 of the rendering device 18800 in the direction of the arrow CCLXXXIVb in FIG. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 284 (b), the support aspect of the electrical decoration board | substrate 18830 is typically shown.

  As shown in FIG. 284 (a), the rendering device 18800 is arranged with a coupling base member 18810 coupled to the lower dish unit 6400 and a planar gap on the front side of the coupling foundation member 18810. An intermediate fixing member 18820 that is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the coupling base member 18810, an electrical decoration board 18830 disposed in a gap between the coupling base member 18810 and the intermediate fixing member 18820, and the electrical decoration board 18830 The light receiving member 18840 is formed so that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can travel inside and is fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and the covering member 18850 that is attached to cover the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840. And mainly.

  The joint base member 18810 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward as the wall surface on the front side facing the electric decoration substrate 18830 moves toward the back side. The inclination angle of the inclined surface is determined by the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 when the swing device member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is disposed at the upward position and is in the pre-operation posture. The inclined surface is formed at an inclination angle that is parallel to the inclined surface.

  The electrical decoration substrate 18830 is disposed in parallel with the front wall surface of the coupling base member 18810. Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the electrical decoration substrate 18830. The electrical decoration substrate 18830 mainly includes an LED chip D1, a long hole 18831 that is formed in a vertically long shape, and a plate spring 18832 that generates an upward biasing force.

  The long hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted in order to support the electrical decoration substrate 18830. Therefore, the difference (length) between the length in the vertical direction of the long hole 18831 and the diameter of the fixing portion 18821 is designed as a length (allowable length) that allows the electrical decoration substrate 18830 to be mechanically displaced.

  The LED chip D1 is arranged in an arbitrary pattern (in this embodiment, a pentagonal apex) on the front side of the decorating substrate 18830, and irradiates light in the normal direction of the surface of the decorating substrate 18830. Therefore, the light irradiated from the LED chip D1 is irradiated in a direction that descends toward the front side. On the other hand, the light receiving member 18840 that receives this light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light in a direction along the front-rear direction.

  That is, the player visually recognizes the light whose traveling direction has been changed by the light receiving member 18840, and therefore the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is inclined downward toward the front side (the player's line of sight). The direction effect of the light effect can be prevented from being lowered even in the direction away from the head.

  The light receiving member 18840 is formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, and is configured to have a plate-like portion 18841 configured to close the opening on the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a plate-like shape from the back surface of the plate-like portion 18841. And a plurality of extending plate portions 18842 that extend to the main body.

  The intermediate fixing member 18820 is formed in a container shape whose front side is opened from a resin material having low light transmittance, protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the coupling base member 18810 side, and is fastened and fixed to the coupling base member 18810. 18821 and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 drilled at positions and sizes capable of receiving the extended plate portion 18842 at the bottom on the back side.

  In the present embodiment, the extending plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape having the same cross section in the left-right direction, because the drawing direction of the resin mold of the light receiving member 18840 is set in the left-right direction. For this reason, the LED chip D1 is arranged at the apex of the pentagon, whereas the LED chips D1 arranged on the left and right at the intermediate position and the lower position can be associated with the common extended plate portion 18842. Thereby, the extended board part 18842 can be formed as a plate-like part with three different widths. Similarly, the insertion holes 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 are also drilled in shapes having different widths at the upper and lower portions.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extended plate portion 18842 is formed in a curved plate shape that gently bends although it begins to extend along the normal direction of the plate-like portion 18841. Although the curvature radius of the curvature can be arbitrarily set, in this embodiment, the curvature is such that the total reflection can be continued until the light irradiated from the LED chip D1 of the electrical decoration substrate 18830 reaches the plate-shaped portion 18841. Designed with a curved shape with a large radius. Thereby, the light incident on the extended tip (back side end) of the extended plate portion 18842 can easily reach the plate-like portion 18841 while maintaining the strength.

  The covering member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage at a part where the light effect is not desired on the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840, and can be realized in various modes. For example, a light shielding tape (insulating tape) formed so as to be capable of being pasted may be used, or a member formed in a cup shape from a resin material may be used.

  In this embodiment, the covering member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member that can be fitted from the front side, and a pentagonal shape based on the arrangement of the LED chip D1 is provided at the bottom of the cup that is disposed on the front side. A plurality of through-holes 18851 are formed at the apex position for passing light.

  Note that the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not have to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chips D1, and can be a similar shape having a slightly different size as described above. Considering the traveling mode of the light emitted from the LED chip D1, the formation mode of the light receiving member 18840 is more important in designing the layout of the through holes 18851 than the layout of the LED chip D1. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is designed so that the through-hole 18851 is formed at a position that matches the position of the base of the extended plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 in front view.

  The operation of the rendering device 18800 will be described. As described above, the illumination board 18830 is movable in the first displacement direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is disposed with an allowable width corresponding to the long hole 18831, and the first displacement direction is determined by the operation. This coincides with the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 of the device 10300.

  That is, when the operation device 10300 performs a vibration effect, the electric decoration board 18830 is configured to be slidable by the vibration. When the illumination board 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extended plate portion 18842 is shifted, so that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 does not easily enter the extended plate portion 18842.

  In this case, even when light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the light hardly travels through the extended plate portion 18842, and thus the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as dark. That is, it cannot be determined whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light. On the other hand, in the operation device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operation member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes in a direction different from the first shift direction.

  In this case, the influence on the electric decoration board 18830 by the vibration of the operation device 10300 is suppressed, and the electric decoration board 18830 is returned to the initial position (upper position) by the urging force of the leaf spring 18832. At the initial position of the illumination board 18830, the LED chip D1 and the rear side end of the extended plate portion 18842 are arranged to face each other, and the light emitted from the LED chip D1 enters the extended plate portion 18842, and then totally reflected. It is formed so that it can proceed to the front side.

  That is, even when the operation device 10300 performs a vibration effect in a state where light is emitted from the LED chip D1, even when the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as dark, by pushing the swing operation member 10310, The through hole 18851 can be viewed brightly.

  Therefore, when the vibration effect is performed and the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as dark, it is grasped by operating the swing operation member 10310 whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light. Can do. Here, for example, the LED chip D1 is controlled to emit light when a big hit occurs or when a transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). Thus, the player's interest in whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light can be improved.

  Thereby, since the player's willingness to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased, when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's willingness to participate is increased, and the player is actually The head operation member 10310 can be directed to operate.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the electrical decoration board | substrate 18830 was arrange | positioned on the outer side of the covering base member 6410 was demonstrated, it is not restricted to this. For example, the electric decoration board 18830 may be disposed in a manner of penetrating the covering base member 6410 and entering the inside thereof, and may be brought into contact with the operation device 10300.

  In this case, the vibration of the operation device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the electric decoration board 18830, and the electric decoration board 18830 slides and moves not only with the vibration but also with the pushing operation (push operation) to the lens member 10317. It can be constituted as follows.

  In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing at which a push instruction as a notification effect is generated. When the lens member 10317 is pushed in at a timing when the LED chip D1 emits light (push operation), it is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to grasp the presence or absence of light emission of the LED chip D1 in a front view.

  In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pushed in (push operation) at a timing other than the notification, the notification advantageous to the player can be easily overlooked. Since it is possible to easily suppress the pushing operation to the lens member 10317 at a timing other than the timing at which the pushing instruction is generated, the operation device 10300 breaks down early, or the operation device is operated many times to generate noise. Annoying acts can be suppressed.

  Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operation device 10300 are formed so as to be divided into right and left has been described. However, the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment are formed so as to be divided into front and rear. Yes. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 285 is a side view of the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 285, in this embodiment, the upper cover 19321 and the lower cover 19322 are disposed so as to surround the swing operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). The main configuration of the covers 19321 and 19322 has substantially the same shape as the above-described covers 10321 and 10322, and will be mainly described as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

  Covers 19321 and 19322 are formed so as to be split on a split surface that coincides with reference line X19 shown in FIG. 285, and are inserted into insertion holes 19321a formed in upper cover 19321 in a direction perpendicular to the split surface. The cover 19322 is formed so as to be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322.

  Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before the swing operation member 10310 is in the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is orthogonal to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to the impact of vibration.

  Further, since the swinging operation member 10310 has the same vibration direction Y17a as the pushing operation direction (push direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216 (a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw. Since the fastening direction is orthogonal to the side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being loosened by an impact generated by the operation of the lens member 10317.

  Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a flat dish shape in cross-sectional view, and the plate thickness is substantially constant in the inclined portion. The protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 in the embodiment are formed with a slight inclination toward the vertical direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 286 is a cross-sectional view of the lower pan unit 16400 in the twentieth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb line of FIG. 229. As shown in FIG. 286, in this embodiment, the slopes of the left and right ends of the protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 are compared with the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described above in the seventeenth embodiment. Is set to the up and down direction.

  In addition, a lower end portion of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the seventeenth embodiment) and an upper end portion (corresponding to the recessed shape portion 6414 of the seventeenth embodiment) ( And a concave base end) are arranged on the same line in the vertical direction (vertical direction).

  The hanging plate-like portion 6426b of the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is brought into contact with and supported by the proximal end portion (the upper surface of the main body portion 6411) of the recessed shape portion 16414. Since a sufficient support thickness in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of 6411 can be ensured, deformation of the main body portion 6411 due to a load during operation of the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 207) can be suppressed.

  In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where the inclination of a right-and-left end part was changed compared with the protruding shape part 6413 and the recessed shape part 6414, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, there is no inclination at all, and the left and right outer surfaces of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in a cross-sectional view). Even in this case, a sufficient support thickness of the main body portion 6411 can be ensured.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the direction of deformation when the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 receive an external force is formed by inclining in the shape of a reverse letter C when viewed in cross section. Can be easily directed. Thereby, compared with the case where it can deform | transform in both right and left directions, the degree of fatigue given by external force can be made low, and the plate part which forms the projecting shape part 6413 and the recessed shape part 6414 breaks early. This can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower dish unit 6400 can be improved.

  Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 301. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the supply of electricity to the lower dish unit 6400 is not necessary has been described. However, the lower dish unit 21400 according to the twenty-first embodiment is configured to vibrate so as to be vibrated by electrical conduction. The apparatus 21500 is provided, and electricity supply to the lower dish unit 21400 is required. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 287 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300, and the lower dish unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment. In FIG. 287, the upper half of the front frame 10014 is not shown, and the lower dish unit 21400 and the operation device 10300 are shown in a direction view from the back side after being disassembled from the metal main body 10014a. .

  In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, assembly direction lines that connect the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and the fastening portions thereof are illustrated by imaginary lines, and further, electric wiring 21513 connected to the vibration device 21500 so as to be able to supply electricity. The arrangement relationship with respect to the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300, and the lower dish unit 21400 is partially illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 287, the bottom member 21 De whose design is changed from the above-described bottom member De is fastened and fixed to the lower bottom side of the operation device 10300. In addition to the configuration of the above-described bottom member De, the bottom member 21De includes an overhanging portion De3 that is formed to protrude to the right side.

  The overhanging portion De3 has both a function of applying a load to the vibration device 21500 and a function of regulating displacement of the electric wiring 21513 connected to the vibration device 21500. That is, as shown in FIG. 287, the electric wiring 21513 is routed so as to crawl under the overhanging portion De3, so that the electric wiring 21513 and the right front cover are removed when the lower plate unit 21400 is removed for maintenance. It is possible to prevent rubbing with 10322.

  The overhanging portion De3 is formed in such a manner that the back side is inclined so as to become narrower toward the overhanging end, while the front side forms a plane parallel to a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gap with the metal main body 10014a on the back side of the overhanging portion De3 while ensuring the rigidity of the overhanging portion De3.

  This gap allows the electrical wiring 21513 having a length necessary for removing the lower tray unit 21400 during maintenance (the wiring having a length that fills the length away from the metal main body portion 10014a) to the lower tray unit 21400. This is effectively used as an area to be loosened and arranged when not removed (when fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a). Thereby, compared with the case where the electric wiring 21513 is tightly arranged when the lower dish unit 21400 is not detached, the load that the electric wiring 21513 receives from the surroundings can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 287, the operation handle 51 is supported by being fitted into a handle support plate 21051, and the handle support plate 21051 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a. In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 and the right side edge of the lower plate unit 21400 are overlapped in the front-rear direction. The fastening portion is not formed, and the connection with the lower plate unit 21400 is performed not by fastening but by engagement (fitting by fitting in the front-rear direction).

  Therefore, the lower plate unit 21400 and the handle support plate 21051 are not mechanically fixed, and are configured to be relatively displaceable in the front-rear direction.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the right side edge of the lower plate unit 21400 and the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 are fastened and fixed over the entire region, the right side edge of the lower plate unit 21400 is displaced in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the left edge portion of the handle support plate 21051 from being displaced in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration device 21500 described later from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 via the handle support plate 21051.

  That is, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be configured to be transmitted from the lower plate unit 21400 to the player. For example, the transmission path of vibration transmitted to the player holding the operation handle 51 is not a route through the operation handle 51, but the lower tray unit with which the finger or arm of the player holding the operation handle 51 comes into contact. The route can be limited to the route via the right side surface of 21400.

  FIG. 288 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower dish unit 21400, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower dish unit 21400. In FIG. 288 and FIG. 289, the portions corresponding to the fixing locations of the covering base member 21410, the lower dish forming member 21420, the V-shaped design member 21450, and the vibration device 21500 are illustrated in association with imaginary lines.

  In addition to the configuration of the above-described covering base member 6410, the covering base member 21410 includes a plurality of (in the present embodiment, a pair of fastening screws) that can be screwed in the region on the right side of the recessed shape portion 6414. ) Fastening portion 21415. The fastening portion 21415 is screwed with a fastening screw inserted through a pair of insertion portions 21535 provided on the right side of the vibration device 21500. That is, the right insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the covering base member 21410.

  In addition to the configuration of the lower plate forming member 6420 described above, the lower plate forming member 21420 includes a support hole 21428 that is formed in a plate-like portion that extends upward from the upper surface of the front vertical portion 6426c in the front-rear direction. The fastening hole 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 that is a connecting portion between the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibration device 21500 is inserted into the support hole 21428.

  In addition to the configuration of the V-shaped design member 6450 described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 is projected in a columnar shape to the back side as an alternative to the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R (see FIG. 227), and can be screwed into the fastening screw. A fastening portion 21457 formed, and a connecting plate-like portion 21458 that is formed in a plate shape and connects between the fastening portion 21457 and the insertion hole 6452 are provided.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the fastening portion 21457 is inserted into the support hole 21428, and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion portion 21535 on the left side of the vibration device 21500 is screwed in and fixed. That is, the left insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the lower plate forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450.

  Therefore, the vibration device 21500 is not fastened and fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members (the covering base member 21410, the lower plate forming member 21420, and the V-shaped design member 21450). Thereby, the fastening strength of these members can be reinforced by the vibration device 21500.

  Here, in the V-shaped design member 21450, as described above, the overhang fastening portion 6454 disposed at the left and right ends is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a via the intermediate member. Therefore, it is configured in a substantially bag shape that opens to the back side, and is structurally harder than the covering base member 21410 that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a mainly at the back side edge.

  That is, the covering base member 21410 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a at a plurality of positions at the lower end on the back side and the left end, while the number of fastening positions at the upper and right edges is suppressed (is not Even if it is limited to a small number), it is formed in a thin, substantially box-like shape (substantially bag-like), so that it has a structure with a high degree of freedom of displacement (low resistance) particularly at the right edge.

  Further, since the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened and fixed to the front upper edge of the covering base member 21410, the vertical displacement (vertical direction) displacement of the covering base member 21410 can be suppressed by the V-shaped design member 21450. The degree of freedom of displacement of the covering base member 21410 can be improved in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). Thereby, when the covering base member 21410 is displaced, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the lower plate 50 is displaced vertically and the ball stored in the lower plate 50 jumps.

  According to this embodiment, using the rigidly configured V-shaped design member 21450 as a base (reference), the laying foundation member 21410 that is more flexible (having a higher degree of freedom in displacement) than the V-shaped design member 21450 is vibrated. Therefore, the right side portion of the covering base member 21410 can be vibrated intensively (strong vibration) by driving the vibration device 21500.

  In addition, since vibration transmission to the V-shaped design member 21450 and the lower dish forming member 21420 can be suppressed, the operation device 10300 vibrates due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500, or the sphere stored in the lower dish 50 vibrates. It can be avoided that the device 21500 vibrates due to the vibration of the device 21500. From this, it can be said that the right side portion of the covering base member 21410 can be vibrated intensively (strong vibration) by driving the vibration device 21500.

  The connecting plate-like portion 21458 is formed in a long plate shape along the longitudinal direction of a shell-like overhang portion 21541 described later. Accordingly, the connecting plate-like portion 21458 and the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 can be brought into contact with each other in the longitudinal direction of the shell-like overhanging portion 21541, and a large load generation area can be secured. Stress concentration at the time of pressing can be avoided.

  In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is configured in a dimensional relationship that abuts (presses) the connecting plate-like portion 21458 (see FIG. 298). Therefore, vibration can be received through at least the contact position between the shell-like projecting portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458.

  This configuration is effective in a configuration in which the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members as in the present embodiment. In other words, compared with the case where the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members, there is a possibility that the deviation from the design size of each member may be stacked, compared to the case where the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members. Deviation tends to increase. For this reason, the arrangement of the vibration device 21500 becomes unstable, and it becomes difficult to stabilize the vibration transmission intensity.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, in anticipation of the possibility of dimensional deviation, no matter how the dimensional deviation occurs (whatever the size is within the limit value), the shell By designing the dimensions such that the protruding portion 21541 contacts the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 (when the interval is short, the protruding portion 21541 contacts while being deformed so as to be crushed), it is stably formed into a shell shape. The overhanging portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore, vibration can be stably received.

  In the present embodiment, the contact direction of the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458 is set in the front-rear direction as in the screwing direction of the fastening screw. Therefore, even when the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced downward by the operation of the operation device 10300 as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced so as to slide with respect to the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541. Thus, it is possible to avoid the transmission of the push-down displacement. Therefore, the vibration device 21500 can be suppressed from being pushed down by the operation of the operation device 10300.

  In this embodiment, since the place where the vibration device 21500 is disposed is a flexible place of the covering base member 21410, the outer shell of the pachinko machine A10 is broken to enter the inside (for example, a thin metal wire) It is a place that is easily broken in the event of fraud. That is, in the present embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is disposed at a place where a person who performs an illegal act can easily select as an intrusion route.

  Therefore, when the covering base member 21410 is broken, the vibration device 21500 may be broken or disconnected at the same time. In this case, the electrical wiring 21513 is disconnected from the vibration device 21500. When the sound lamp control device 113 detects this, control is performed so that an error signal is output, thereby making it possible to detect fraud early.

  In addition, a device that outputs an error signal may be provided instead of the vibration device 21500. However, in the present embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is intentionally provided, and vibration is generated when an illegal act has not occurred. It can be used for production. That is, the vibration device 21500 can be used for both the vibration effect and the discovery of fraud (can be configured as a multi-functional device), so that the installation space of the device can be reduced.

  290 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device 21500, and FIG. 291 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration device 21500. As shown in FIGS. 290 and 291, the vibration device 21500 includes a vibration motor 21510 that can generate vibration by being controlled so that the eccentric weight 21512 rotates, and a soft resin material (silicon resin or the like). The covering member 21520 that covers the vibration motor 21510 and a material harder than the covering member 21520 (for example, a resin material or a metal material) and partially covers the covering member 21520 from the back side. A covering cover member 21530 formed in a shape capable of being covered, and a flat plate-like counter plate member 21540 disposed to face the covering cover member 21530 with the covering member 21520 interposed therebetween.

  The covering cover member 21530 and the counter plate member 21540 hold the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 so as to surround from the front and back, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws. That is, the covering cover 21530 includes a plurality of (two in this embodiment) insertion holes 21532 through which the screw portions of the fastening screws can be inserted, and the opposing plate member 21540 is screwed with the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 21532. A plurality of fastening portions 21542 formed in a possible manner are provided. Hereinafter, the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 that are the objects to be held will be described first, and then the details of the covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 will be described.

  292 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, FIG. 293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, and FIG. 294 is a front perspective view of the covering member 21520. is there. In FIG. 294, a perspective view of the covering member 21520 as viewed from the upper front side is shown.

  The vibration motor 21510 includes a main body portion 21511 whose shaft portion is rotationally controlled by energization, a fan-shaped eccentric weight 21512 that is fixed to the shaft portion and has a center of gravity disposed at a position different from the shaft portion, and a lower surface of the main body portion 21511. And an electrical wiring 21513 extending downward (electrically connected to a terminal formed on the lower surface).

  The covering member 21520 includes a cylindrical main body portion 21521 formed in an inner cylindrical shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510, and a ridge extending vertically along the back surface of the cylindrical main body portion 21521. A pair of protrusions 21522 formed as a plate, a plate-like protrusion 21523 projecting in a plate shape in the left-right direction along the lower surface of the cylindrical main body 21521, and a bottom view length from the lower surface of the cylindrical main body 21521. A projecting portion 21524 that is circular and projects downward is provided.

  The overhanging portion 21524 is formed in an oval shape having a size that surrounds the connection position between the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 and the electric wiring 21513 in a bottom view, and the upper surface side is recessed so as to receive the electric wiring 21513.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 294, the overhanging portion 21524 is formed in a vertical direction in a recessed portion 21524a that is recessed downward from the lower surface side of the cylindrical main body portion 21521 and a region sandwiched by the recessed portion 21524a. A wiring through hole 21524b to be drilled and a pair of preliminary holes 21524c to be drilled in the vertical direction at a position opposite to the wiring through hole 21524b across the recessed portion 21524a.

  With the above configuration, the electrical wiring 21513 is guided to the wiring through hole 21524b while being held in the recessed portion 21524a, and is guided in the opening direction (downward) of the wiring through hole 21524b. That is, in the present embodiment, the covering member 21520 can be provided with the function of preventing and holding the electric wiring 21513 from dropping due to its own weight, the function of bundling the electric wiring 21513, and the function of guiding the electric wiring 21513. Thereby, the number of required binding bands can be reduced, and material cost can be reduced and manufacturing man-hours can be reduced.

  Further, when the covering member 21520 is not assembled, a gap is generated between the covering cover 21530 and the counter plate portion 21540, so that it is possible to prevent the person who performs the assembling work from forgetting to attach the covering member 21520. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress forgetting to assemble a member for holding the electric wiring 21513 as compared to a case where a binding band is separately prepared and the electric wiring 21513 is held.

  In the present embodiment, the electrical wiring 21513 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). That is, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 is configured as a part of the other device 228, and is vibration-controlled by the control signal transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  The preliminary hole 21524c is formed at a position corresponding to the connecting position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511 in the vertical direction. That is, even when the electric wiring 21513 is about to come out of the main body portion 21511, the electric wiring 21513 can be pushed into the main body portion 21511 side by inserting a thin rod through the spare hole 21524c and pushing in the electric wiring 21513. it can. As a result, the electrical wiring 21513 can be prevented from falling off from the main body portion 21511.

  In the present embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is disposed in the lower dish unit 21400 (see FIG. 287). Since the lower plate unit 21400 is formed to be detachable from the metal main body 10014a, if an operator who performs maintenance work accidentally removes the lower plate unit 21400 from the metal main body 10014a, the lower plate unit 21400 is connected to the electric wiring 21513. An excessive load may be applied and there is a risk of disconnection. In addition, when an excessive load is applied to the electric wiring 21513 when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is generated, there is a risk of disconnection.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the overhanging portion 21524 is formed so as to cover the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511, the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511 is excessive. Displacement can be prevented.

  Further, since the length of the electrical wiring 21513 held in the recessed portion 21524a is secured in front of the wiring through hole 21524b, this length can prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from being disconnected. Yes (can afford) Further, even when a load is applied to the electric wiring 21513, it is not the connecting direction of the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511, but the length direction of the electric wiring 21513 held in the recessed portion 21524a (that is, the extension portion 21524). Since a load is applied along the longitudinal direction), it is possible to avoid the electrical wiring 21513 falling off the main body portion 21511.

  In addition, as described above, even if the electric wiring 21513 falls off the main body portion 21511, it is possible to easily reconnect the electric wiring 21513 to the main body portion 21511 if a thin stick is inserted through the spare hole 21524c. it can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the maintenance work including the step of removing the lower dish unit 21400.

  In the step of inserting (assembling) the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the electric wiring 21513 is disposed on the covering member 21520 side with respect to the main body portion 21511. Therefore, simultaneously with the operation of inserting the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the operation of inserting the electric wiring 21513 into the wiring through hole 21524b can be performed, so that the efficiency of the assembling operation can be improved.

  FIG. 295 is a front view of the covering cover member 21530. In the description of FIG. 295, FIGS. 290 and 291 are referred to as appropriate. The covering cover member 21530 includes a main body 211531 that forms a frame whose front side and lower side are opened, the above-described insertion hole 21532, and a receiving recess 21533 that is recessed on the front side of the main body 21153 and receives the vibration motor 21510. A plurality of protrusions 21534 protruding inward from the left and right inner surfaces of the receiving recess 21533 and extending in the front-rear direction, and formed in the front-rear direction at the vertical position of the insertion hole 21532. A covering base member 21410, a lower plate forming member 21420, and a plurality of insertion portions 21535 through which fastening screws fastened and fixed to the V-shaped design member 21450 (see FIGS. 288 and 289) can be inserted.

  The receiving recess 21533 includes a weight receiving recess 21533a that receives the eccentric weight 21512, a main body receiving recess 21533b that receives the main body portion 21511, and the weight receiving concave portion 21533a and the main body in such a manner that the rotation axis of the main body portion 21511 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction. And a bearing receiving recess 21533c for connecting the receiving recess 21533b.

  The main body receiving recess 21533b is recessed on the right side with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c by an extra length compared to the left side. On the contrary, the protruding portion 21534 is provided with an extra length on the right side compared to the left side, so that the protruding end of the protruding portion 21534 is substantially left and right with respect to the bearing insertion recess 21533c. Arranged at symmetrical positions.

  Thus, as a holding mode of the covering member 21520, the vibration motor 21510 is held at the projecting tip of the protrusion 21534 in the non-excited state (stopped state), while the vibration motor 21510 is held in the excited state (vibrated state). Deformation (displacement, flow) of the covering member 21520 can be accommodated by a deep recess formed on the right side of the receiving recess 21533b (a recess formed between the protrusions 21534 arranged in parallel vertically). Thereby, it can prevent that overload is given to covering cover member 21530, and can improve durability of covering cover member 21530.

  Since the protrusion 21534 is formed along the front-rear direction, the displacement of the covering member 21520 that is supported in contact with the protrusion 21534 on the left and right is affected by the engagement with the protrusion 21534 and the biting in. Therefore, it tends to occur in the front / rear and left / right (horizontal direction), and is suppressed in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, even when the eccentric weight 21512 is disposed at the upper end of the main body portion 21511 and the main body portion 21511 tends to tilt with the lower end as a fulcrum when vibration occurs, the vertical component of the vibration is suppressed. The displacement direction of the vibration motor 21510 can be corrected in the horizontal direction.

  The protruding portion 21534 has an aspect in which the protruding length increases as it approaches the intermediate portion 21531a side (rear side) formed in a planar plate shape having a vertical width half that of the left and right side portions in the left and right intermediate portion of the main body portion 21551. Therefore, the covering member 21520 can be supported from the left and right sides and the back side.

  In addition, the ridge portion 21534 includes a back inclined portion 21534a that rises from the ridge portion 21534 that is closest to the lower surface of the intermediate lower surface 21531b toward the intermediate lower surface 21531b below the intermediate lower surface 21551b that constitutes the lower surface of the intermediate portion 21551a.

  The distance between the rear inclined portion 21534a and the protrusion portion 21534 just above it becomes narrower toward the back side. Therefore, when the vibration motor 21510 is displaced to the back side and the covering member 21520 is deformed in the excited state of the vibration motor 21510, compared to the case where the interval between the upper and lower protrusions 21534 is not narrowed, the rear inclined portion It is possible to increase the load (reaction force) applied to the portion of the covering member 21520 that enters between the 21534a and the protrusion 21534 just above it. Thereby, it can prevent that the covering member 21520 is displaced too much to the back side.

  The protrusion 21534 is not completely symmetrical and is partially displaced vertically. This makes it easier to avoid applying a load to the covering member 21520 from both the left and right directions on the same horizontal plane, as compared with the case where the protrusion 21534 is disposed at a completely bilaterally symmetrical position. The compression load applied to the covering member 21520 can be reduced.

  In addition, you may arrange | position the protrusion part 21534 completely left-right symmetrically. In this case, it is preferable to select a material that is not brittle as the material of the covering member 21520.

  The lower half of the back side wall portion of the main body portion 21551 is omitted. Therefore, as a holding mode of the covering member 21520, the upper half portion of the main body portion 21551 restricts the displacement of the covering member 21520, while the lower half portion of the main body portion 21551 allows the displacement of the covering member 21520.

  Therefore, when the covering member 21520 is displaced to the back side in accordance with the excitation of the vibration motor 21510, the upper half portion of the protruding portion 21522 that is regulated by the upper half portion of the main body portion 21231, and the lower half portion that is allowed to be displaced. However, both of them can be deformed so as to proceed (flow) to an open area in the lower half of the main body 211531, and work to improve the vibration effect of the vibration device 21500. Details will be described later.

  The plate-like protrusion 21523 of the covering member 21520 is supported on the right side by the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530 from below. Further, the left side portion is open to the covering cover member 21530 and is supported by the support extending portion 21543 of the opposing plate member 21540 (see FIG. 291). Thereby, in addition to being able to support the own weights of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, an open portion accessible from the outside can be formed on the lower side of the covering member 21520.

  That is, the covering cover member 21520 supports the lower surface of the covering member 21520 in such a manner that the covering cover member 21530 covers the lower part from the rear right side and the opposing plate member 21540 covers the lower part from the front left side. The left rear part of the lower part of the member 21520 can be opened as an open part. The opening portion functions as a portion that ensures contact between the overhanging portion De3 and the covering member 21520.

  The opposing plate member 21540 is a plate-like member disposed to face the covering cover member 21530 from the open portion side of the covering cover member 21530, and is formed as a shell-like overhanging portion 21541 formed to protrude to the front side. The fastening portion 21542 described above and a support extending portion 21543 extending from the lower left end portion to the back side are provided.

  The shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is formed to be thin like the counter plate member 21540, and a gap is formed between the tip of the overhanging portion and the covering member 21520, so that the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 has a gap. Even if a load in the direction to be pushed in (backward direction) is given and the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is deformed, it can be avoided that a large load is transmitted to the covering member 21520.

  296 (a) is a top view of the lower dish unit 21400, FIG. 296 (b) is a sectional view of the lower dish unit 21400 along the CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb line in FIG. 296 (a), and FIG. FIG. 298 is a rear view of the dish unit 21400, and FIG. 298 is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit 21400 along the line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII in FIG. 296 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 296 (b), the ridge portion 21522 of the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3 of the bottom member 21De are in a dimensional relationship, and the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state). ), The protruding portion De3 slightly bites into the protruding portion 21522 (the protruding portion 21522 is slightly deformed).

  By applying a load from the projecting portion De3 to the protruding portion 21522, the arrangement of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 in the vibration device 21500 can be moved to the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 from unintentionally stopping at a position approaching the back side.

  FIG. 299 (a) is a partial top schematic view of the lower dish unit 21400 schematically showing the lower dish unit 21400, and FIG. 299 (b) is a lower dish unit in the direction of the arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299 (a). Fig. 300 (a) is a schematic partial side view of the lower plate unit 21400 schematically showing the lower plate unit 21400, and Fig. 300 (b) is a schematic diagram of Fig. 300 (a). It is a partial side surface schematic diagram of the lower pan unit 21400 in the arrow CCCb direction view.

  299 (a) and 299 (b) illustrate a state in which the vibration device 21500 is disposed at the front limit position of the vibration displacement, similarly to the non-excited state of the vibration motor 21510, and FIG. 300 (a) and FIG. FIG. 300B shows a state in which the vibration motor 21510 is in an excited state and the vibration device 21500 is disposed at the rear side limit position of vibration displacement. That is, when the vibration motor 21510 is excited and the eccentric weight 21512 rotates to generate vibration, the vibration device 21500 is repeatedly displaced between the state shown in FIG. 299 and the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 300, the eccentric weight 21512 is in contact with the main body 21531 in the front-rear direction, and vibration is directly transmitted.

  A vibration transmission mode of the vibration device 21500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 and 300. As described above, in the vibration device 21500, a plurality of parts are intentionally fastened and fixed to members having different rigidity. This is intended to effectively generate vibration of the vibration device 21500 in a specific part.

  Specifically, if the member to which the entire vibration device 21500 is fixed is too hard, the vibration is excessively suppressed. On the other hand, if the member is too soft, the vibration may be excessively attenuated. Is fixed to a hard member, and the soft member fixed to the other part of the vibration device 21500 is vibrated with the fixed position as an axis. Thereby, the part fixed to the other part of the vibration device 21500 can be sufficiently displaced.

  That is, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side of the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to the V-shaped design member 21450 (hard side) and the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is brought into contact with the connecting plate-like portion 21458, while the vibration An insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side of the device 21500 is fastened and fixed to the covering base member 21410 (soft side).

  Therefore, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is applied so that the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotated) with the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side as a fixed reference (vibration axis). By being transmitted to 21410, a position close to the finger of the player who holds the operation handle 51 can be vibrated.

  When the vibration device 21500 is displaced to the back side in accordance with the vibration of the vibration device 21500, the protruding portion 21522 of the covering member 21520 is pressed against the projecting portion De3 (see FIG. 300). As a result, the protruding portion 21522 receives a load from the overhanging portion De3 toward the front side, so that the vibration device 21500 returns to the front side as compared with the case where the overhanging portion De3 is not formed. Can be increased.

  Further, when the vibration device 21500 is displaced in a manner of rotating backward with the left end portion as an axis along with vibration, the left plate-like protrusion 21523 is pressed against the left side surface of the bottom member 21De along with this displacement (FIG. 300). (See (a)). Accordingly, the plate-like protrusion 21523 receives a load from the bottom member 21De toward the right side, and the momentum of the vibration device 21500 returning to the front in the rotation direction with the left end portion as an axis can be increased.

  When the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are displaced to the back side, the volume of the covering member 21520 whose displacement is restricted by the intermediate portion 21551 of the covering cover member 21530 can flow downward from the intermediate lower surface 21551b. Therefore, since the covering member 21520 can be partially hardened by concentrating the resin material constituting the covering member 21520 between the overhanging portion De3, the reaction force received from the overhanging portion De3 is increased. Can do. In addition, since the bottom member 21De provided with the overhanging portion De3 is not a member assumed to be displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to assume a situation where the covering member 21520 is deformed due to the displacement of the overhanging portion De3.

  Thereby, the load generated between the vibration device 21500 and the overhanging portion De3 can be limitedly increased in the excitation state of the vibration motor 21510. In this case, when the vibration device 21500 is not excited when the operation device 10300 is operated or when the vibration device 10366 (see FIG. 216) of the operation device 10300 is vibrated, the vibration device 21500 and the overhanging portion De3 While the vibration generated between the vibration device 21500 and the overhanging portion De3 is generated in the excited state of the vibration motor 21510, the load generated between the vibration device 21500 and the vibration device 21500 can be suppressed. By increasing the load, the action of assisting the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be increased.

  Therefore, in the non-excited state of the vibration device 21500, the load transmitted to the vibration device 21500 through the covering member 21520 can be sufficiently suppressed (while the flexibility of the covering member 21520 is sufficiently exhibited). In the excited state of the vibration device 21500, the load (reaction force) transmitted to the vibration device 21500 via the covering member 21520 can be increased by causing the protrusion 21522 to undergo compression deformation (strain).

  On the other hand, since the protrusion 21522 is a protrusion formed from a flexible resin material, the protrusion 2122 can be prevented from being displaced due to the protrusion 21522 being pressed. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress vibration from being transmitted to the overhanging portion De3, it is possible to avoid vibration from being generated in the operation device 10300 due to vibration of the vibration device 21500.

  When the vibration device 21500 is displaced to the back side in accordance with the vibration of the vibration device 21500 and then displaced so as to return to the front side, the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is pressed against the connecting plate-like portion 21458. As a result, the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 receives a load from the connecting plate-like portion 21458 toward the back surface side, so that the vibration device 21500 is connected to the back surface as compared with the case where the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is not formed. The momentum of returning to the side can be increased.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the vibration device 21500 is configured to assist displacement in both the front and rear directions, the vibration device 21500 is in an excited state until the vibration becomes strong enough to be experienced by the player. This period can be shortened.

  In the above description, the state where the vibration device 21500 is de-energized when the operation device 10300 is operated or when the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 is vibrated is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the operation of the operation device 10300 may be executed while the vibration device 21500 is vibrating.

  In this case, the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3 increases, but the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the overhanging portion De3 accompanying the operation of the operation device 10300 and the covering member 21520 are increased. Since the direction of the load generated between the projecting portion De3 and the projecting portion De3 intersects, the interaction between the load generated from the vibration device 21500 and the load applied to the operation device 10300 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid occurrence of a situation (adverse effect) in which the vibration device 21500 and the operation device 10300 break down due to the simultaneous generation of loads from the vibration device 21500 and the operation device 10300.

  FIG. 301 is a partial top schematic view of the lower dish unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower dish unit 21400. In FIG. 301, the state where the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 is restricted to the right end portion of the bearing insertion recess 21533c of the covering cover member 21530, that is, the state where the vibration motor 21510 is disposed at the right limit position of the displaceable region. Illustrated.

  In this embodiment, since the vibration motor 21510 is held by the covering cover member 21530 via the covering member 21520, the vibration motor 21510 can be displaced with respect to the covering cover 21530 by deformation of the covering member 21520 or the like. ing. Further, as described above, the vibration device 21500 is displaced (rotated) by the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side with the left insertion portion 21535 (see FIG. 290) as a reference (vibration axis). The force is loaded to the right.

  That is, when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 becomes intense, the vibration motor 21510 is displaced rightward by the centrifugal force generated in the vibration device 21500 (see FIG. 301). Since the protrusion 21534 formed on the right side of the covering cover 21530 is formed in a curved shape that moves toward the left at the rear side end (see FIG. 295), the vibration motor 21510 moves toward the right. The resistance received from the covering cover 21530 when the motor 21510 is displaced to the back side increases. Thereby, the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

  Therefore, according to this embodiment, even when the vibration of the vibration motor 21510 becomes excessive, the vibration is suppressed by the vibration motor 21510 being displaced in a direction crossing the main vibration direction (front-rear direction). Since the action occurs, the vibration can be suppressed without controlling the vibration motor 21510 (for example, before the vibration motor 21510 is stopped by the control). Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction by the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the vibration can be suppressed by the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 accompanying the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510, the arrangement of the detection sensor for detecting the displacement due to the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510 can be eliminated. . As a result, the product cost of the lower dish unit 21400 in this embodiment can be reduced, and heat generated from the vibration motor 21510 can be dissipated through the wiring that is vacated by omitting the arrangement of the detection sensor. It can be used effectively as a space for doing things.

  Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 381. Although the gaming machine frame has been mainly described in the first embodiment, the operation unit A300 visually recognized through the window portion 14c will be described in the twenty-second embodiment.

  FIG. 302 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 according to the twenty-second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the game board A13 includes a base plate A60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), a rail 61 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit A80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1).

  The base plate A60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display unit A80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and are tapped screws from the front side of the game board A13. It is fixed by etc.

  The front center portion of the game board A13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board A13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board A13, and the belt-like metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner circumference 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board A13, and the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member A73 connecting the rails (a winning opening etc. are provided and fired) in front of the game board A13. Area where the falling sphere flows).

  In this embodiment, the strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73 is enhanced by incorporating a metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308) into the outer edge member A73. Details will be described later.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the aim of disposing the general winning opening 63 is different for each arrangement. This will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, in a normal game, the ball is launched aiming at winning a ball to the first winning port 64 through a route passing through the left side of the third symbol display device 81. A part of the sphere flowing down the left area of the first winning opening 64 without reaching the opening 64 wins the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. In other words, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area is arranged for the purpose of affecting the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning a prize at the general prize opening 63, the easier it is to generate a larger number of times of winning at the first prize opening 64 with a smaller number of balls during normal times.

  On the other hand, in a game in which the time is shortened or the probability is changing, the ball is launched aiming at winning the ball to the second winning port 640 through the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81. A part of the sphere flowing down the area on the right side of the second prize opening 640 without reaching the prize opening 640 wins the general prize opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. In other words, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged for the purpose of influencing the game during the probability change or the short time. For example, the higher the possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 63, the more the ball loss during probability change or shorter time can be suppressed.

  Suppressing the loss of the ball, the next jackpot is won before the ball held on the upper plate 17 disappears, even if the game is not played in a firing mode that stops the ball firing in a timely manner during probability change (even if it is not hit) Therefore, it is possible to reduce stress (fatigue) experienced by the player with the game. Therefore, even when the number of rotations to the next big hit frequently increases during the probability change (for example, 100 rotations or more), it is possible for the player to play the game comfortably.

  In the game in the special game state, the ball is launched with the aim of winning the ball to the specific winning opening 65a through the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but on the right side of the second winning opening 640. A part of the sphere flowing down the area flows down to the general winning port 63 side (right side) instead of the specific winning port 65a side (left side) and wins the general winning port 63a. The winning ball accompanying the winning at the general winning opening 63 is paid out as a winning ball different from the winning ball at the specific winning opening 65a, so that the player can change the special gaming state by the special gaming state. In addition to the prize balls based on the number of prizes awarded to the specific prize opening 65a planned, prize balls based on the quantity awarded to the general prize opening 63 can be obtained.

  In other words, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged for the purpose of increasing the number of payout prize balls that can be obtained by the player in the special game state. Here, as the number of winnings in the general winning opening 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning in the specific winning opening 65a decreases, so that the elapsed time until the special gaming state ends tends to increase. In other words, the number of rounds and the number of counts in the special gaming state (the number of prizes awarded per round) are the same in terms of control, depending on the location, number and upstream flow path design of the general winning opening 63. However, it is possible to vary the time required for the end of the special gaming state (long or short) and the number of award balls (slightly) to be paid out to the player.

  In addition, the display mode in the case of displaying the number corresponding to the number of payout prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 in the special game state is not limited at all. For example, the number of payout winning balls based on winning in the specific winning opening 65a and the number of paying out winning balls based on winning in the general winning opening 63 may be displayed separately, or payout based on winning in the specific winning opening 65a. A total number of the number of winning balls and the number of payout winning balls based on winning in the general winning opening 63 may be displayed, or a combination thereof may be displayed.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Accordingly, during normal times, the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, so that the first winning opening 64 without the electric winning combination is reached. Toward the left of the variable display unit A80 so that the ball passes (so-called “left-handed”). It is advantageous for the player to aim to be.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to set the state and aim to win the 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine A10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is asymmetrical, and it is required that the ball be struck right and left according to the gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be symmetric (see FIG. 302). In this case, it is possible to aim at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or aim at the second winning port 640 by “left-handed”. Therefore, depending on the game state (whether it is probable, short-running, or normal), the player can change the way the ball is fired between left-handed and right-handed. Can be made unnecessary. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  In this embodiment, an input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively (see FIG. 4). The other device 228 includes a drive motor AMT1, a drive motor AMT2, a drive motor for moving the rendering unit A 710 up and down, and the like.

  303 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 showing a state in which the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the inner frame 12, and FIG. 304 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 with the front frame 14 removed. FIG. 304 shows a state where the game board A13 is separated from the inner frame 12. In FIGS. 303 and 304, reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board A13 are omitted for convenience.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 305 to 323, the structures of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 will be described. 305 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600, and the operation unit A300, and FIG. 306 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600, and the operation unit A300. FIG. In FIGS. 305 and 306, a part of the right side surface of the game board A13 is enlarged. In the description of FIGS. 305 and 306, FIG. 302 is referred to as appropriate.

  The center frame A86 is an annular member that is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, is fitted from the front side to a through hole 13a formed in the game board A13, and is fastened and fixed near the peripheral edge. A covering part 86h that is covered with the upper part, a distribution extending part 86a that extends from the covering part 86h to the front side so that the ball can be distributed on the left side, and a downward slope from the upper end to the left A left inclined portion 86b extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a shape to be inclined, and a right inclined portion 86c extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a shape inclined downward from the upper end portion to the right. And a right flow path forming wall portion 86d extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a manner extending downward from a position where it is connected to the lower end portion of the right inclined portion 86c and opposed to the return rubber 69. The flow path as a ridge extending across the front and rear width of the right flow path forming wall 86d The flow of the region between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73 in a positional relationship that is alternated with the horizontal ridge portions 86e projecting to the (right side). A plurality of front protrusions 86f protruding from the covering part 86h to the flow path side (front side) as protrusions extending over the width of the road, and a through hole extending downward from the lower end of the right flow path forming wall part 86d The lower right corner part of 13a is mainly provided with the separation wall part 86g comprised so that separation from other parts is possible.

  307 (a) is an enlarged front view of the game board A13 in the range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board A13 along the line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307 (a). .

  When the player turns the operation handle 51 rightward and plays a right-handed game, the ball flows down between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. As shown in FIG. 307 (a), the interval between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73 is an interval at which the sphere can flow (the diameter of the sphere is 11 mm, whereas the interval is about 16 mm). Therefore, the sphere flows down while contacting the right flow path forming wall portion 86d or the outer edge member A73.

  More specifically, the ball that has reached the return rubber 69 is rebounded to the left and right center side of the game area by the reaction force from the return rubber 69 and collides with the right flow path forming wall portion 86d. Since the right flow path forming wall portion 86d is formed as an inclined wall that slopes downward as it goes to the right, the sphere flowing down by its own weight tends to flow down the right flow path forming wall portion 86d.

  In the process of flowing down, the ball rides on the lateral ridge 86e. In this embodiment, the projecting length of the lateral protrusion 86e is designed to be about 2 mm (a length that is less than 20% of the diameter of the sphere), and the arrangement interval is 16 mm (the same length as the flow path width). Therefore, it is possible to achieve a good balance between the deceleration of the flowing ball and the prevention of the occurrence of clogging.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the front protrusion 86f is formed with a protrusion length (2 mm) similar to that of the horizontal protrusion 86e at an intermediate position between the plurality of horizontal protrusions 86e. Accordingly, it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of clogging of the balls while improving the speed reduction effect by setting the interval between the protrusions to be half of the channel width.

  Normally, when the pachinko machine A10 is installed in an amusement store, the pachinko machine A10 is laid from the vertical state to the back side slightly (about 1 degree). Therefore, the covering portion 86h is arranged as an inclined wall that is inclined downward toward the front side, and the sphere that flows down by its own weight tries to flow down so as to roll on the covering portion 86h. Since it is configured in this way, compared to the case where the protruding portion is formed from the glass unit 16 side (front side) toward the flow path, the front protrusion 86f protruding from the covering portion 86h, The collision with the sphere can be generated satisfactorily. In FIG. 307 (b), in order to make it easy to grasp the inclination, the inclination angle of the game board A13 is shown larger than usual (about 5 degrees).

  The separation wall portion 86g is a wall portion arranged to face the lottery unit A600, and has a role of closing and separating a region where the lottery unit A600 is disposed in the region of the through hole 13a. Hereinafter, the assembly of the lottery unit A600 to the game board A13 will be described.

  In the region where the lottery unit A600 is arranged, the through hole 13a of the game board A13 has a small recess 13b protruding rightward from a substantially circular portion that receives the center frame A86, and a lower right below the small recess 13b. An overhanging large recess 13c is formed. In this way, a plurality of independent through holes are formed by forming the small concave portion 13b and the large concave portion 13c as the arrangement region of the lottery unit A600 as concave portions connected to the open portion that receives the center frame A86 of the through hole 13a. Compared with the case of forming (occupying an area required as the width of the portion forming the boundary), it is possible to secure a wide area that can be used as the arrangement area of the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600. Details of the lottery unit A600 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, the operation unit A300 has a back surface formed in a box shape whose front side is open from a bottom wall portion A311 and an outer wall portion A312 standing from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion A311. Case A310 is provided.

  The back case A310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening A311a at the center of the bottom wall portion A311. The opening A311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

  The operation unit A300 includes a plurality of first operation units A400 that are arranged in an internal space of the back case A310 in such a manner that a movable device having substantially the same configuration covers the upper peripheral edge of the internal space, and the first operation unit A400. The second operation unit A700 disposed on the lower side where the above arrangement is omitted is accommodated, and is configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the first operation unit A400 is located on the bottom wall portion A311 of the rear case A310 at the position above the opening A311a and the left and right sides, and the second operation unit A700 is located at the position below the opening A311a. Arranged. 305 and 306 show a state where the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 are attached to the back case A310.

  The back case A310 extends as a flat plate along the back of the game board A13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front side end of the outer wall part A312 and faces the game board A13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 304). A support plate A313 is provided for support.

  The support plate portion A313 is a columnar portion that protrudes from the back surface to the back surface side of the game board A13, and protrudes in a shape capable of positioning a fastening convex portion 13d in which a female screw portion is formed at the center. A positioning projection A313a is provided, and the positioning projection A313a is inserted at a substantially center position (a position matching the female screw of the fastening projection 13d) with a size that allows a fastening screw to be inserted into the fastening projection 13d to be inserted. A hole A313b is formed.

  That is, the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 can be integrally fixed by positioning the fastening projection 13d with the positioning projection A313a and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening projection 13d. The rigidity of the A13 and the operation unit A300 as a whole can be improved.

  In addition, the shape of positioning convex part A313a is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, a convex portion having an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening convex portion 13d (circular in the present embodiment) may be used, and the support plate portion A313 is formed in consideration of workability during assembly. The convex part along the ellipse shape along the direction formed may be sufficient. In addition, when the fastening convex portion 13d is formed in a rectangular column shape, it is naturally assumed that the positioning convex portion A313a has a shape along the rectangular shape correspondingly.

  As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, in this embodiment, a large number of support plate portions A313 are arranged on the left and upper sides of the back case A310, and the formation of the support plate portions A313 is reduced on the right and lower sides. This is a result of designing in consideration of a balance between improvement in rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 as a whole and space efficiency.

  That is, when the game board A13 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material as in the present embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board A13 is visible through the game board A13. The entire back side of the game board A13 is effective as an effect area to be arranged. On the other hand, in the place where the support plate portion A313 is formed, the inner space of the back case A310 is eroded inward by the area in the front view of the support plate portion A313. The area | region which can be arrange | positioned will become narrow. Therefore, if it is possible to maintain the strength problem even if the support plate portion A313 is omitted, it is possible to avoid limiting the arrangement range of the movable member by omitting the support plate portion A313. That is.

  In the present embodiment, the large number of support plate portions A313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the back case A310, which is related to the range of the area where the player can visually recognize the launched ball, such as the game area. That is, the support plate portion A313 is formed at a place other than the range where the fired sphere is visually recognized.

  More specifically, in this embodiment, a ball launched from the launching device 112a (FIG. 304) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and passes through the return ball prevention member 68 to enter the game area. Introduced and thereafter configured to flow down the gaming area. In the ball game, the place where the most attention is likely to be gathered is the place where the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area opposite to the third symbol display device 81 with the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 in between ) Is usually low.

  Therefore, as a range where the sphere cannot reach, the lower left and upper left with respect to the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right with respect to the upward convex arc It is thought that the player's attention to the will be low.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the above-described outer edge member A73 and the surfaces of the outer rail 62 at the lower left portion and the upper left portion with respect to the outer rail 62 are formed along the outer rail 62 and disposed on the front side of the game board A13. Since the block-shaped member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material, the back side of the game board A13 cannot be viewed from the front side of the game board A13 via the outer edge member A73 or the block-like member 74. It is configured as follows.

  In the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is preferentially disposed at a place where these attentions are low or a place where the attention is not visible. In fact, the support plate portion A313 is formed near the corner portion of the back case A310, avoiding the central portion as the overhanging end portion of the outer rail 62, even in the left side portion and the upper portion where the support plate portion A313 is formed in a large amount. Is done.

  In other words, by selecting a location where space is eroded by forming the support plate portion A313 from a location with low visibility (low performance capability), the rigidity of the motion unit A300 and the game board A13 as a whole is selected. While exhibiting the effect of securing, it is still possible to ensure a wide area for entering the field of view of the player who focuses on the ball.

  From this point of view, there is a common configuration in pachinko machines that rolls the ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a along the outer rail 62 and introduces it into the game area. It is easy to ask for the part and the upper right part. On the other hand, it is difficult to specify a common range in which the sphere does not flow down on the downstream side of the return rubber 69 as a portion that absorbs the kinetic energy of the sphere and adjusts the subsequent flow mode.

  That is, in the downstream of the return rubber 69, not only the relationship with the member forming the outer edge of the game area, but also the flow path of the ball changes depending on the configuration and state of the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. Until the specifications on the game board A13 side are determined, the placement location of the support plate portion A313 cannot be determined.

  Since the operation unit A300 can be freely designed as compared with the configuration of the game board A13 related to the ball-off performance of the pachinko machine A10, the design of the operation unit A300 proceeds earlier than the design of the game board A13. As a result, the internal structure of the operation unit A300 can be carefully designed. If the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13 occurs in the final stage of the development schedule, if the position of the support plate A313 is changed accordingly, not only the rear case A310 but also the internal space of the operation unit A300 This leads to a change in the design of other devices arranged in the above, and increases the cost of the design change.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the formation of the support plate portion A313 is omitted at a position corresponding to the downstream side of the return rubber 69. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is changed due to the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13.

  In addition, in the area downstream of the return rubber 69, the internal space of the back case A310 is avoided from being eroded by the support plate portion A313, and a sufficient space for arranging the first operation unit A400 for production is secured. In addition, the path through which the ball flows down and the range in which the first motion unit A400 is disposed can overlap each other, so that the first motion unit A400 naturally enters the field of view of the player who focuses on the ball. Can be made.

  In the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 formed at the back position of the outer edge member A73 is formed on the inner side (left side) of the outermost right end of the outer wall portion A312. On the other hand, support plate part A313 formed in the left side part of back case A310 is formed in the outer side (left side) rather than the left outermost short of outer wall part A312. That is, the form of formation of the support plate part A313 (formation direction with respect to the outer wall part A312) is left-right asymmetric.

  Thereby, compared with the distance between the left outermost end of the outer wall portion A312 and the left end of the game board A13, the distance between the right outermost end of the outer wall portion A312 and the right end of the game board A13 can be shortened. Therefore, the right end of the inner space of the back case A310 can be brought close to the right end of the game board A13.

  The right outer wall portion A312 is not formed with a surface opposed to the game board A13 except for the support plate part A313, and the front edge is in contact with the back surface of the game board A13. In other words, the right outer wall portion A312 contacts the game board A13 by line contact.

  A substantially lower half portion of the right outer wall portion A312 is provided with a cutout portion A312a that is cut out (formed with a cutout) toward the back side. The notch A312a is notched below the upper edge of the lottery unit A600, and forms a gap with the game board A13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 304).

  By forming the notch A312a in this way, the following effects can be obtained. For example, the gap formed by the notch A312a can be made to function as a wiring passage through which the wiring connected to the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65 passes outside the back case A310. Thereby, compared with the case where wiring is drawn up and down, possibility that a wiring will interfere with the 1st operation unit A400 and the 2nd operation unit A700 side can be made low.

  Further, the gap formed by the notch A312a can be used as an arrangement space of a configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. In addition, as a configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65, for example, a solenoid for generating a driving force, a flow path for flowing a ball, a substrate for a light emitting effect, a detection sensor for detecting a ball, Other structures are exemplified. In the present embodiment, the discharge path ER through which the ball won in the second winning port 640 of the lottery unit A600 is discharged passes through the gap between the notch A 312a and the game board A13 (FIG. 317). reference).

  Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED in the vicinity of the notch A312a, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means as light with a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case A310 is connected to the game board A13 (when the boundary of the light irradiated from the back side of the game board A13 is formed along the shape of the back case A310). Thus, the boundary of the light visually recognized through the game board A13 can be made ambiguous. Thereby, it can avoid that the boundary of the light visually recognized through game board A13 depends on the shape of back case A310, and can improve the freedom degree of light emission effect.

  The formation length (vertical direction length) of the notch A 312a is not limited at all. For example, the notch A312a may be formed over the entire region (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions A313.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the fastening with the game board A13 is omitted on the right side of the back case A310, the rigidity on the right side of the game board A13 is considered, and the rigidity of the operation unit A300 is relied on. I can't.

  As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, a metal plate member 75 made of metal is disposed on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board A13. Hereinafter, the metal plate member 75 will be described.

  FIG. 308 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73, and the metal plate member 75, and FIG. 309 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73, and the metal plate member 75. Note that in FIG. 308 and FIG. 309, for ease of understanding, the game board A13 is shown as a single unit, and illustration of other members disposed on the game board A13 is omitted.

  The outer edge member A73 is formed of a resin material, and includes an arc wall portion 73a that forms an upper side and an inner side surface having an arc shape, and extends in a thin wall shape downward from a lower end portion of the arc wall portion 73a. A vertical wall portion 73b, and an inclined wall portion 73c formed with an upper surface that is inclined downward from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b toward the left. Thus, by configuring the outer edge member A73 with a single member that covers substantially the entire vertical direction, the outer edge member A73 is formed of a plurality of members that are divided vertically. Assembling steps to the game board A13 can be reduced.

  The vertical wall portion 73b is bent and formed in a U-shape in a vertical view from the front side edge portion of the right surface portion and a plurality of plate-shaped protrusion portions 73b1 protruding in a plate shape toward the back side along the right surface portion. A plurality of bent portions 73b2, a columnar projecting portion 73b3 projecting in a columnar shape toward the back side at the joint portion of the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c, and the columnar projecting portion 73b3. And a fastening portion 73b4 formed so as to be screwable.

  The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arrangement interval of the plate-like projecting portions 73b1. Thereby, in relation to the metal plate member 75 described later, the holding force of the metal plate member 75 against the vertical wall portion 73b while suppressing the number of seam penetration portions 75c formed in the metal plate member 75. Can be improved.

  In other words, compared to the case where only the three plate-like projecting portions 73b1 resist the bending of the metal plate-like member 75, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 of the metal plate-like member 75. Since a resistance force against bending can be generated, a load generated at one place can be reduced. In addition, since the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 are arranged at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-like member 75 is bent can be evenly assigned. An excessive load can be prevented from occurring.

  The metal plate-like member 75 is folded back to the left at the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a and the main body plate portion 75a formed with no folds in the longitudinal direction, while the short side direction is folded a plurality of times. A plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c that are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the joints between the bent portion 75b, the main body plate portion 75a, and the bent portion 75b, and the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Through-hole 75d, and an insertion hole 75e that is provided in the plate portion provided with the through-hole 75d and stepped to the front side so that a fastening screw can be inserted therethrough.

  The metal plate-like member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way of folding the main body plate portion 75a. Therefore, the vertical wall part 73b can be efficiently reinforced by arranging it integrally with the vertical wall part 73b that is easily bent in the longitudinal direction.

  The joint penetration part 75c is formed in a size that allows the plate-like projecting part 73b1 of the vertical wall part 73b to be inserted. In the present embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 through the joint penetration portion 75c.

  When the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled so as to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and the cylindrical projection is provided. The portion 73b3 is inserted through the through hole 75d. As described above, the metal plate member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned with respect to each other at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

  From the above configuration, the metal plate member 75 is disposed over the vertical wall portion 73b, so that the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the columnar projecting portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate through the metal plate-like member 75 and extend to the back side, and the front end portion engages with the game board A13. Hereinafter, the engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board A13 will be described.

  The game board A13 receives a plurality of recessed portions 13e that are recessed so as to receive the plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1 on the right edge of the front surface, and the cylindrical protruding portions 73b3 on the upper side and the lower side of the recessed portions 13e. And a plurality of positioning holes 13f that are formed as long holes that are vertically long.

  When the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 are integrated with the game board A13, the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 is received in the recessed portion 13e, and the circular protruding portion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. And positioned. That is, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the circular projecting portion 73b3 are used not only for positioning with the metal plate-like member 75 but also for positioning with the game board A13. Thereby, the number of positioning can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the bending of the vertical wall portion 73b. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the vertical wall portion 73b with sufficient rigidity, and the vertical wall The portion 73b can be formed thin enough to be easily bent in the left-right direction by itself.

  Furthermore, since the deformation of the game board A13 can be suppressed by the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 (the rigidity can be improved), the game board can be used even when the game board A13 and the rear case A310 (see FIG. 306) are separated from each other. The shape of A13 can be maintained. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 309, the formation of the fastening protrusion 13d can be omitted at the right end position of the game board A13.

  Therefore, the right edge of the small recess 13b or the large recess 13c can be arranged at a position where the distance from the right end of the game board A13 is short (position very close to the right end). Accordingly, the right limit positions of the through hole 13a, the small recess 13b, and the large recess 13c with respect to the game board A13 can be moved to the right side, and the opening shape can be increased.

  In this case, when the game area is formed using the game board A13 having the same vertical and horizontal width and the center frame A86 having the same opening size, the right end of the game area with respect to the game board A13 is set to the right. Therefore, the area on the left side of the center frame A86 can be expanded. That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of design of the path through which the game ball flows down when left-handed (design freedom of the position of the nail, the position of the ball guide channel, the position of the ball passage, etc.).

  Further, a distribution device (not shown) that causes the ball to flow down in the right-handed game (for example, a device that switches the flow in the order of arrival of the ball and flows down), the lottery unit A600, and the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 305). Since a large arrangement area can be secured, it is possible to improve the degree of design freedom of the distribution device (not shown), the lottery unit A600, and the variable winning device 65.

  FIG. 310 is an exploded front perspective view of the lottery unit A600, and FIG. 311 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit A600. The lottery unit A600 has a second prize opening 640 that switches between a state in which a ball can pass and a state in which the ball cannot pass depending on whether the above-mentioned electric combination 640a is in an open state or a closed state. It is the assembly which comprises.

  The lottery unit A600 includes a main body member A610 that is formed through the second winning port 640 and forms a flow-down path through which a ball flows down to the front side and is fastened and fixed to the game board A13 (see FIG. 305), and the rear surface of the main body member A610. An engagement member A620 that is pivotally supported on the side and engages with the electric accessory 640a, a drive unit A630 that generates a drive force for operating the engagement member A620, and a front side of the main body member A610. A covering member A650 that defines the flow path of the sphere, a main irradiation device A660 that radiates light to a region corresponding to the flow path of the sphere that is disposed on the back side of the main body member A610, and a back surface of the main body member A610. An auxiliary irradiation device A670 that irradiates light to a region that is provided and is made less visible by the covering member A650 and that is different from the flow path of the sphere.

  The main body member A610 includes a main body plate portion A611 having a plane parallel to the front of the game board A13 on the front side, and a left extending wall portion extending in a wall shape from the left edge portion of the main body plate portion A611 to the front side. A612, a right extending obstacle wall portion A613 extending in a wall shape from the position including the right edge portion of the main body plate portion A611 to the front side, and a rectangular frame shape surrounding the second winning port 640 in the back view. An extended rectangular frame A614 that extends to the back, a protruding receiving portion A615 that protrudes to the back side above the second winning opening 640 inside the extended rectangular frame A614, and the right side of the extended rectangular frame A614 A main light emission holding frame A616 extending to the back side in a frame shape including a portion, and an auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 extending to the back side in a frame shape on the left side of the extension rectangular frame A614.

  A through gate 67 is inserted and fixed at the upper end position of the main body plate portion A611. That is, in the present embodiment, at least a part of the sphere that is about to enter the lottery unit A600 flows downstream through the through gate 67.

  The left extending wall portion A612 is a wall portion disposed to face the separation wall portion 86g (see FIG. 305) of the center frame A86. That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 304), the separation wall portion 86g of the center frame A86 and the left extending wall portion A612 are engaged (contacted) to ensure rigidity. As a result, the through hole 13a can be stably held in such a manner that the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 are prevented from being displaced while the through-hole 13a is formed in a sufficiently large shape so that both the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 can be formed.

  The right extending obstacle wall portion A613 is a wall portion constituting a rolling surface of a sphere. That is, the sphere flowing down the lottery unit A600 rolls on the upper surface of the right extending obstacle wall A613 and flows downstream.

  The extended rectangular frame A614 includes a shaft support hole A614a drilled as a portion for rotatably supporting the engaging member A620, and the extended edge thereof can receive the front side end of the drive unit A630. Formed from shape. That is, the driving device unit A630 is fixed to the extending rectangular frame A614 by fastening in a state where the front end of the driving device unit A630 is assembled to the extending end of the extending rectangular frame A614.

  The protrusion receiving portion A615 is configured to be able to come into contact with the engaging member A620 and the operation member A632 of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL as the driving device of the driving device unit A630, and is a part that defines the movement end position. Will be described later.

  The main light emission holding frame A616 is a frame constituting an outer frame of light emitted from the main irradiation device A660, and an insertion hole A616a through which a fastening screw is inserted is bored. The fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole A616a is screwed into the fastening portion A652a of the covering member A650. As will be described later, the fastening portion A652a overlaps the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 in front view. Formed in position. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole A616a to be visually recognized in a front view, and to avoid impairing the design of the lottery unit A600.

  The auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 is a frame constituting an outer frame of light emitted from the auxiliary irradiation device A670, and is formed at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 when viewed from the front.

  The engagement member A620 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole A614a of the extending rectangular frame A614, and is configured such that the claw-like portion A622 disposed at the rotation tip portion and the electric accessory 640a are engaged. . Thereby, it is comprised so that the state (an open state or a closed state) of the electrically-driven accessory 640a may arise with the change of the attitude | position of engagement member A620. Next, details of the engagement member A620 will be described with reference to FIG.

  3A is a side view of the engaging member A620 viewed from the direction of the rotation axis J1, and FIG. 312B is an engaging member as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. 312A. 3A is a front view of A620, and FIG. 312C is a cross-sectional view of the engaging member A620 along the line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc in FIG. 312B.

  The engaging member A620 is formed of a resin material having flexibility, and includes a pair of rotating arm portions A621 formed of a plate-like portion that intersects (orthogonally) the rotation axis J1, and a rotation tip of the rotating arm portion A621. A claw-shaped portion A622 formed in a C-shaped claw shape, a pair of projecting shaft portions A623 projecting from the rotating arm portion A621 in a columnar shape around the rotation axis J1, and a rotation base of the rotating arm portion A621 A base-side connecting rod portion A624 formed in a U-shape in a front view in a mode of being joined after being bent toward the mating side at the extended end, which is a rod-like portion extending in the radial direction from the end side. And a rod-like portion extending in a direction parallel to the proximal end side connecting rod portion A624 from the rotating distal end side of the rotating arm portion A621, and coupled after being bent toward the other side at the extending end portion. A front end side connecting rod portion A625 formed in a U shape in front view That.

  The pair of rotating arm portions A621 are arranged to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the sphere. Thereby, since the flow path of the sphere can be formed so that the sphere passes between the rotating arm portions A621 (see FIG. 313), the degree of freedom in designing the flow path of the sphere configured by the lottery unit A600 is improved. be able to.

  The base end side connecting rod portion A624 protrudes toward the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 at an intermediate position between the main body rod portion A624a formed from substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the rod and the main body rod portion A624a. And a projecting restriction portion A624b. The protrusion restricting portion A624b is configured as a portion for restricting over-rotation of the engaging member A620, but will be described in detail later.

  The distal end side connecting rod portion A625 is formed such that the cross sectional shape of the rod-like portion A625a extending in parallel with the rotation axis J1 is different from that of the proximal end side connecting rod portion A624. In other words, the rod-shaped portion A625a is formed in a flat surface on the side facing the rotating arm portion A621 so as to maintain a distance from the rotating arm portion A621, while the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm portion A621 is the rotation tip. It is formed as an inclined surface A625b that is inclined toward the direction away from the rotating arm portion A621 as it goes to the side. That is, the rod-shaped portion A625a is formed such that the thickness increases and the rigidity becomes higher (the deformation resistance increases) toward the rotation tip side.

  In addition, the rod-like portion A625a is concave in such a manner that the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm portion A621 is inclined toward the surface on the side facing the rotating arm portion A621 as it goes to the center side in the rotation axis J1 direction. It is formed as a recessed surface A625c provided.

  The recessed surface A625c is recessed along the inclination of the inclined surface A625b. That is, when viewed from the inclined direction of the inclined surface A625b, each point of the recessed surface A625c is different only in the thickness direction of the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 (the width direction of the surface facing the rotating arm portion A621). Visible as a point.

  The recessed surface A625c is recessed corresponding to the shape of the operating member A632 so that the operating member A632 of the driving device unit A630 can be received. Details will be described later.

  FIG. 313 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member A610, the engaging member A620, and the drive unit A630. FIG. 313 shows a state in which the engaging member A620 is pivotally supported in the pivotal support hole A614a of the main body member A610.

  Assembling of the engaging member A620 to the main body member A610 is performed by fitting the engaging member A620 inside the extending rectangular frame A614 in a state in which the engaging member A620 is subjected to a compressive force and deformed. It is executed by removing the load and releasing the deformation in a state where the position with the installation shaft portion A623 is matched.

  In other words, the engagement member A620 is grasped so as to be pinched by the fingers from the direction of the rotation axis J1, and a compressive force is applied to deform the arrangement shaft portion A623 so that the arrangement width becomes shorter than the inner width of the extended rectangular frame A614. The engaging member A620 can be assembled to the main body member A610 by allowing the engaging member A620 to enter inside the extended rectangular frame A614, aligning the positions, and releasing the finger.

  In the present embodiment, the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are formed so as to be coupled by a proximal end side connecting rod portion A624 and a distal end side connecting rod portion A625 that are narrower and easier to deform than the rotating arm portion A621. Therefore, most of the deformation in the case of applying a load for assembly can be caused in the base end side connecting rod portion A624 and the distal end side connecting rod portion A625. Therefore, deformation of the rotating arm portion A621 related to the function of opening and closing the electric accessory 640a can be suppressed, so that the engagement member A620 can be prevented from malfunctioning due to deformation during assembly.

  In addition, since the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are connected not by a single rod-like portion but by a pair of rod-like portions (base end side connecting rod portion A624 and distal end side connecting rod portion A625), the load is released. After that, it can be easily avoided that the postures of the rotating arm portions A621 are shifted.

  Furthermore, by disposing a rod-shaped portion that is wider than the rotating base end side on the rotating distal end side where the load during operation tends to increase among the pair of rod-shaped portions (see FIG. 312 (c)), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL It is possible to prevent the postures of the rotating arm portions A621 from shifting when they are operated by the driving force.

  In addition, by narrowing the width of the rod-like portion on the rotation base end side (see FIG. 312 (c)), the deformation of the engaging member A620 required at the time of assembly is brought near the protruding shaft portion A623 on the rotation base end side. It can be generated intensively. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the engagement member A620 while realizing a stable operation using the engagement member A620.

  As shown in FIG. 313, the front end of the engaging member A620 is in contact with the lower end of the projecting receiving portion A615, so that further rotation is restricted. As described above, the engaging member A 620 is a part for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, and there is a possibility that the ball enters the second winning opening 640 in the open state of the electric accessory 640a. The ball that has entered the second winning port 640 is a surface that constitutes the engaging member A620 and the extended rectangular frame A614, and is disposed so as to face the engaging member A620. The inclined surface is inclined downward toward the back side. Flows down to the lower bottom inclined surface A614b formed as follows, and flows into the drive unit A630.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the rotating arm portion A621 is disposed with a longer interval than the diameter (11 mm) of the sphere, the sphere can flow between the opposing rotating arm portions A621. As a result, the engaging member A620 can be disposed in such a manner as to surround the flow path of the sphere from above, so that the engagement member A620 and the flow path of the sphere can be compactly disposed.

  The drive unit A630 is held by a box-shaped main body box A631 whose front side is connected and fixed to the rear side end of the extending rectangular frame A614 of the main body member A610, and an upper portion of the main body box A631. An electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, an operating member A632 that slides forward and backward by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, a coil spring A633 that applies a biasing force to the operating member A632, and a lower portion of the main body box portion A631. And a detection sensor A634 for detecting passage of a sphere.

  When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state, the operating member A632 is disposed at the front side position (see FIG. 314 (a)) by the biasing force of the coil spring A633, and when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is excited, the coil spring A633 is The operation member A632 is driven against the urging force and is disposed at the rear side position (see FIG. 314 (b)). The front side position of the operating member A632 is configured as a position in a state where a disk-shaped disk portion A632a fixed to the tip of the operating member A632 comes into contact with the protruding receiving portion A615. Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the transmission path of the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL will be described.

  FIGS. 314 (a) and 314 (b) are side views of the electric accessory 640a, the engaging member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. In FIG. 314 (a) and FIG. 314 (b), only the electric component 640a, the engaging member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL are illustrated for easy understanding, and other configurations for holding these members are illustrated. The illustration is omitted.

  Further, FIG. 314 (a) shows a non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (closed state of the electric combination 640a), and FIG. 314 (b) shows an excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (opening of the electric combination 640a). State) is illustrated.

  When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state and the operating member A632 is disposed at the front side position, the engaging member A620 is in a downward inclined posture (see FIG. 314 (a)), and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in an excited state. Then, when the operation member A632 is disposed at the back side position, the engagement member A620 is in the upward inclined posture (see FIG. 314 (b)).

  The electric accessory 640a includes an eccentric projecting portion 640b that is rotatably supported by the shaft columnar portion A653 of the covering member A650 and projects from the position eccentric to the rotation shaft to the back side. The eccentric projecting portion 640b is disposed so as to be vertically contactable with the claw-shaped portion A622 of the engaging member A620, and the eccentric projecting portion 640b is displaced in conjunction with the claw-shaped portion A622. The state of the electric accessory 640a changes.

  In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is composed of a single blade-like member. However, as can be seen from the fact that there are two sets of claw-like portions A622 of the engaging member A620, the electric accessory 640a is mutually connected. You may make it comprise from a pair of blade-shaped member which faces each other. In this case, the engaging member A620 of this embodiment can be used.

  Returning to FIG. 310 and FIG. The covering member A650 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and is disposed on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric accessory 640a interposed therebetween, and the main body plate portion A611 of the main body member A610. A main body plate portion A651 that constitutes a flow path of the sphere, a restriction wall portion A652 that protrudes in a wall shape toward the back side of the main body plate portion A651, and a rear surface of the main body plate portion A651. And a shaft columnar portion A653 that protrudes in a columnar shape to the side and rotatably supports the electric accessory 640a.

  The main body plate portion A651 includes a high transmission range A651a in which the back side is easily visible in a front view, and a low transmission range A651b in which the light transmission is lower than the high transmission range A651a and the back side is difficult to see.

  In the present embodiment, a high-permeability range A651a and a high-permeability range A651a are attached to the front side of the main body plate portion A651 by sticking a seal whose print surface is designed in a form that configures a range with high transparency and a range with low transparency. The low transmission range A651b is configured, but the method is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A651 may be manufactured by resin two-color molding, or the main body plate portion A651 may be cut to roughen the surface to form a low-permeability range.

  In the present embodiment, the high transmission range A651a is formed on the front side (mainly the right side) of the sphere flow path, and the low transmission range A651b is provided with a regulation wall portion A652 that regulates the flow of the sphere. On the other side (mainly the left side). Thereby, while ensuring the visibility of the flow path of the ball, the field of view can be blocked so that the internal structure is not visually recognized by the player in a range where the ball does not flow down.

  The restriction wall portion A652 includes a fastening portion A652a into which, for example, a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A616a is screwed for fastening and fixing to the main body member A610. Since the fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening part A652a is made of metal and non-transparent, it is easy to make a shadow in a front view. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the fastening portion A652a is arranged outside the ball flow path, it prevents the shadow caused by the fastening screw from entering the ball flow path and giving the player an uncomfortable feeling. can do. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the flow-down mode of the ball from being scraped by the shadow of the fastening screw.

  The main irradiation device A660 includes a diffusion plate A661 housed in the main light emission holding frame A616 of the main body member A610, an electric decoration board A662 in which light emission means A663 such as an LED is disposed on the diffusion plate A661 side, A rear lid portion A664 that is formed in an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the electrical decoration substrate A662, and is fastened and fixed to the rear side end portion of the main light emission support frame A616.

  The diffusing plate A661 is a plate-like member having a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape of the main light emission holding frame A616, and having a diffusing shape for diffusing light on both the front and rear sides, from the outer edge toward the back side. A plurality of extending portions A661a extending in a plate shape are provided. The extending portion A661a is a posture maintaining portion for preventing the diffusion plate A661 from tilting in a state where the diffusion plate A661 is accommodated in the main light emission holding frame A616. When the diffusing plate A661 is about to tilt, any one of the extending portions A661a comes into contact with the inner side surface of the main light emission holding frame A616, and resistance is generated in a direction to return the tilt, so that the posture of the diffusing plate A661 is maintained.

  In the state where the main irradiation device A660 is assembled to the main body member A610, the front surface of the electric decoration board A662 comes into contact with the extended end portion of the extended portion A661a, so that the diffusion plate A661 is prevented from coming out to the back side. .

  The outer shape of the electric decoration board A662 is substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the outer surface of the main light emission holding frame A616, and the outer shape of the rear cover portion A664 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the electric decoration board A662. . In other words, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge portion of the electric decoration board A662 is held in such a manner as to be sandwiched from the front and rear by the main light emission holding frame A616 and the rear lid portion A664 (held by contact on the surface).

  Thereby, even if the thickness of the rear lid portion A664 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid portion A664 alone is low, the illumination board A662 can be stably held by utilizing the rigidity of the main light emission holding frame A616. it can.

  Here, an insertion hole A616a through which the fastening screw is inserted is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A661. Therefore, in order to remove the fastening screw, it is necessary to remove the diffuser plate A661 from the main light emission holding frame A616. Therefore, mischief can be suppressed by increasing the man-hours required to remove the fastening screw.

  Further, as described above, the fastening screw is non-transparent and easily shadows. However, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of light emitting means A663 and light emitted from the light emitting means A663 on the back side of the fastening screw. A diffusion plate A661 capable of diffusing the light is disposed. Therefore, the shadow of the fastening screw can be thinned (diffused) by the diffused light, and the shadow of the fastening screw can be made inconspicuous.

  In particular, the light emitting means A663 is disposed at a position where the insertion hole A616a does not overlap on the optical axis directed along the front-rear direction (a position where the outer shapes projected in the front-rear direction do not overlap). Thereby, the shadow of a fastening screw can be made thin (a shadow is skipped), and the effect which can make the shadow of a fastening screw inconspicuous can be made more remarkable.

  As described above, the main irradiation device A660 is disposed on the back side of the sphere flow path, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 is irradiated to the sphere flow path. Light reaches the flow path. Therefore, it is possible to obtain light that is light and broader than light emitted from the light emitting means A663 without passing through the diffusion plate. Thereby, the fatigue feeling given to the eyes of the player who pays attention to the flow path of the ball can be reduced.

  The auxiliary irradiation device A670 is arranged on the back side of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 and is arranged on the back side of the electrical decoration board A671, and on the back side of the electrical decoration board A671. And a rear lid portion A673 formed from an outer shape substantially the same shape as the outer shape.

  The electrical decoration board | substrate A671 is fixed in the holding | maintenance aspect similar to the holding | maintenance aspect of electrical decoration board | substrate A662. That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge portion of the electric decoration board A671 is held in such a manner that it is sandwiched from the front and rear by the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 and the rear lid part A673 (held by contact on the surface).

  Thereby, even if the thickness of the rear lid portion A673 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid portion A673 alone is low, the electric decoration board A671 can be stably held using the rigidity of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617. it can.

  Here, unlike the main irradiation device A660, in the auxiliary irradiation device A670, the diffusion plate is not disposed on the front side of the electric decoration substrate A671. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is applied to the main body member A610 while maintaining the light emission intensity without being diffused.

  Although light is irradiated in such a manner, in this embodiment, since the light emitting means A672 is disposed at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b in front view, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is low. It is visually recognized by the player through the transmission range A651b. Therefore, since the player visually recognizes the light weakened in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to avoid giving the player an excessive feeling of fatigue when he / she sees the light.

  In addition, by setting the light to maintain the emission intensity, it is possible to prevent light from being completely blocked in the low transmission range A651b. Thereby, for example, when a character corresponding to the pachinko machine A10 is drawn in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to execute an effect of brightly illuminating the character with the light emitted from the light emitting means A672.

  FIGS. 315 (a) and 315 (b) are cross-sectional views of the lottery unit A600 along the line corresponding to the line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc in FIG. 312 (b). In FIG. 315 (a), the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, that is, the closed state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314 (a)) is illustrated, and in FIG. 315 (b), the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is illustrated. That is, the open state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314 (b)) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 315 (a), in the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the lower end portion of the disk portion at the tip of the operating member A632 and the recessed surface A625c of the engaging member A620 are in contact. Here, the disk portion of the operating member A632 advances to the front side to the extent that it is disposed opposite to the vicinity of the intermediate position in the width direction of the recessed surface A625c, and the longitudinal direction in which the recessed surface A625c moves the operating member A632. , The load applied from the engagement member A620 to the operation member A632 is mainly a load in the vertical direction (direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction).

  Therefore, it is difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620 by moving (withdrawing) the operating member A632 with a load from the engaging member A620, and therefore, the piano wire from the gap of the pachinko machine A10 can be made difficult. Thus, it is possible to take measures against an illegal act of changing the wire rod 640a into an open state by applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

  Here, conventionally, pachinko machines have a function of outputting an error notification when an illegal act is detected, but an electromagnetic solenoid is provided by improperly applying a load to the movable accessory 640a visible from the front side. When the movable accessory 640 can be opened regardless of the state of the ASOL, the deterrence against fraud has not been sufficient.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine A10 of this embodiment, even if a load is applied to the movable accessory 640 and the state is likely to change, the movable accessory 640a and the movable accessory 640a are connected via the eccentric protrusion 640b of the movable accessory 640a. Since the engagement member A620 is engaged (see FIG. 314 (a)), in the configuration of this embodiment in which it is difficult to change the posture of the engagement member A620, a load is applied to the movable accessory 640a. It is also difficult to open the movable accessory 640a.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the concave surface A625c is formed so that the rod-shaped portion A625a becomes thicker toward the rotation tip side of the engagement member A620 in response to the above-mentioned fraudulent act that applies a load to the movable accessory 640a. When the engaging member A620 is forcedly displaced from the state of FIG. 315 (a) (for example, while deforming the distal end side connecting rod portion A625) from the state shown in FIG. The contact position of the portion A625a shifts to the thick side (rotating tip side), and the tip-side connecting rod portion A625 becomes difficult to deform.

  Therefore, every time the engaging member A620 is raised and displaced, the load necessary for further displacing the engaging member A620 can be increased, so that a load is applied to the movable accessory 640a. It is possible to suppress an illegal act of opening the movable accessory 640a.

  Further, the flat surface on the opposite side of the recessed surface A625c of the rod-shaped portion A625a is an inclined surface that is inclined downward as it goes to the front side. Accordingly, in the state shown in FIG. 315 (a), when the rod-like portion A625a is bent and deformed in the thickness direction by the load received from the operating member A632, the reaction force applied to the operating member A632 is inclined upward as it goes to the front side. Can be directed to.

  Thereby, the load in the front-rear direction applied from the rod-shaped portion A625a to the operating member A632 can be generated as a load on the front side, and the operating member A632 is prevented from retracting backward due to the load from the rod-shaped portion A625a. Therefore, the rising displacement of the engagement member A620 can be regulated more reliably.

  As shown in FIG. 315 (b), when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in an excited state, the lower end of the disk portion of the operating member A632 and the protrusion restricting portion A624b of the engaging member A620 are brought into contact with each other, whereby the main body box of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. Before colliding with the portion, the further reverse operation (operation in the rising direction) of the engagement member A620 is restricted. In other words, since the rotation of the base end side connecting rod portion A624 can be restricted without causing a collision with the main body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the base end side connecting rod portion A624 is used as the main body box of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. It is possible to avoid problems such as cracking or bending due to collision with the part.

  316 (a) is a top view of the operation unit A300, FIG. 316 (b) is a side view of the operation unit A300 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302, and FIG. 317 shows the game board A13 and the operation unit. It is a rear view of A300.

  As shown in FIGS. 316 (a) and 316 (b), the front end surface of the first operation unit A400 is disposed so as to protrude to the front side from the front end of the rear case A310. When the game board A13 is formed from a plywood board while the first operation unit A400 is arranged in this way, it is necessary to form a recess or hole to avoid interference with the first operation unit A400 on the back side of the game board A13. However, in this embodiment, since the game board A13 is formed from the resin base plate A60, if the mold is manufactured by designing in advance in a shape that can avoid interference with the first operation unit A400, The game board A13 can be easily formed in a shape that avoids interference.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the front plate of the first operation unit A400 is recessed from the back side to the front side along the left and right and top surfaces of the base plate A60 of the game board A13 (see FIG. 306). Interference between the game board A13 and the first operation unit A400 can be easily avoided while being configured to project to the front side of the front end of the back case A310. Thereby, since arrangement | positioning of 1st action | operation unit A400 can be brought close to the player side, the production effect of the production | presentation which makes 1st action | operation unit A400 visually recognized can be improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 316 (b) and 317, the support plate portion A313 disposed on the upper portion of the back case A310 is disposed on the inner side (lower side) than the outer surface (upper surface) of the outer wall portion A312. As a result, as compared with the case where the support plate portion A313 is disposed outside the outer wall portion A312 while the outer wall portion A312 at the center of the left and right sides where the support plate portion A313 is not disposed is moved further outward (upward). Thus, the upper end position of the back case A310 can be lowered.

  That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in disposing the back case A310 with respect to the game board A13 while improving the degree of freedom in disposing the first operation unit A400 (or the second operation unit A700) with respect to the back case A310.

  In addition, as described above, the left and right positions where the support plate portion A313 on the upper side of the back case A310 is disposed are located outside the game area in the front view, so that the support plate portion A313 is located below the outer wall portion A312. The influence (disadvantage) exerted on the game by being placed in can be suppressed to a minimum.

  As shown in FIG. 317, unlike the left surface side, the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the right surface side of the back case A310 except for the upper end position. That is, the space occupied when the support plate portion A313 is disposed below the upper end position can be omitted, and accordingly, the outer wall portion A312 of the back case A310 is brought closer to the right end of the game board A13. Can do.

  FIG. 318 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 along the line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII in FIG. 302. As shown in FIG. 318, the base plate A60 is a region on the inner side of the outer edge extending portion 60a and at least a game region compared to the outer edge extending portion 60a extending to the back side along the outer edge. In the region where the portions overlap in the front-rear direction, the center overhanging portion 60b that protrudes toward the back side is formed with a shorter front-rear width.

  Since the front end surface of the base plate A60 is formed on substantially the same plane, the front side of the rear side end of the center overhang 60b is arranged on the front side rather than the rear side end of the outer edge extending portion 60a. Thus, interference between the base plate A60 and the first operation unit A400 is avoided.

  A recessed portion 60c that is recessed toward the front side is formed between the outer edge extending portion 60a and the center overhanging portion 60b. In the formation range of the recessed portion 60c, the base plate A60 is It is formed thinner than the outer edge extending portion 60a and the center overhanging portion 60b. That is, the degree of decrease in the energy of light passing through the base plate A60 can be made lower than that of the outer edge extending portion 60a and the center overhang portion 60b in the formation range of the recessed portion 60c.

  When the center frame A86 is covered on the front side of the base plate A60, the covering portion 86h of the center frame A86 is formed with a gap between the outer edge member A73 as shown in FIG. The gap is disposed at a position overlapping the recessed portion 60c when viewed in the front-rear direction. That is, the effect of suppressing the energy reduction of light passing through the base plate A60 can be maintained on the front side of the base plate A60.

  The light in which the energy reduction is suppressed is used for the effect of illuminating the sphere by irradiating the sphere flowing down between the center frame A86 and the outer edge member A73. Thus, in this embodiment, since the light used in the effect of irradiating light on the sphere can reduce the degree of energy reduction when passing through the game board A13, it is effectively effective with weaker light. An effect of shining a sphere can be executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 318, since the inner side surface of the outer edge member A73 is disposed outwardly from the inner side surface of the outer edge extending portion 60a of the base plate A60, the flow path of the sphere is recessed. It can be easily arranged at a position overlapping with the installation portion 60c in the front and rear. Accordingly, it is possible to easily irradiate the sphere with the light passing through the recessed portion 60c.

  As shown in FIG. 318, the bent portion 75b of the metal plate member 75 is sandwiched between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60. As a result, the outer edge member A73, the base plate A60, and the metal plate member 75 can be configured to assist each other integrally and from the viewpoint of rigidity.

  Moreover, the light emission intensity between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60 can be locally increased by utilizing the fact that light is reflected on the metal when the bent portion 75b is irradiated with light. The light emission with locally increased intensity occurs at a position where the inner end (left end) in the width direction of the bent portion 75b can be visually recognized through the outer edge member A73. It can be limited to the formation range of 73b (see FIG. 308) (the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c can be excluded).

  Thereby, even in the case of irradiating light from the back side toward the entire upper and lower sides of the metal plate member 75, the portion where the emission intensity is locally increased is limited to the vertical length range of the vertical wall portion 73b. Therefore, it is possible to easily concentrate the player's line of sight on the lottery unit A600 arranged to face the vertical wall portion 73b and the formation range of the channel above it.

  319, 320, 321, and 322 are front views of the operation unit A300. In the description of FIG. 319, FIG. 320, FIG. 321, and FIG. 322, the descriptions of all the first operation units A400 and the plurality of first operation units A400 are five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, It means A400C, A400D. Further, the first operation unit A400 may be described as a representative of configurations and functions that can be commonly used for the five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D.

  FIG. 319 shows a state in which all the first operation units A400 and the second operation units A700 do not project to the third symbol display device 81 side and maintain the retracted state in which they are retracted. In FIG. The state in which the operation unit A400 is excited and protrudes toward the third symbol display device 81 is illustrated, and the second operation unit A700 is maintained in the retracted state.

  FIG. 321 shows a state in which all the first operation units A400 maintain the retracted state, and the second operation unit A700 is in an overhanging state projecting toward the third symbol display device 81 side. The first operating units A400B and A400C are in the retracted state, the other first operating units A400, A400A and A400D are in the extended state, and the second operating unit A700 is maintained in the extended state. The

  As shown in FIGS. 319 to 322, the plurality of first operation units A400 are formed in a conspicuous color to the player in a range defined by colored (group blue in this embodiment) cover member A591. The front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 (in this embodiment, the front surface is gold-plated) are configured to be mainly visually recognized, and the edge of the first displacement member A440 on the third symbol display device 81 side Is disposed so that the portion is closest to the adjacent first operation unit A400.

  That is, the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 are arranged in a posture along the radiation that spreads from the inside (center) to the outside of the 3rd symbol display device 81, so The player's line of sight can be concentrated toward the inside of the third symbol display device 81.

  Since the side surface on the third symbol display device 81 side of the first displacement member A440 is closest to the adjacent first displacement member A440, as shown in FIG. 319, the lateral surface of the first displacement member A440 (next side) The side surface including the side surface adjacent to the first displacement member A440 is chamfered so as to taper toward the tip side (the third symbol display device 81 side). This avoids interference with the adjacent first displacement member A440.

  Although the chamfering start point is not limited in any way, in this embodiment, a straight line extending along the lateral surface of the first displacement member A440 extends from the adjacent first displacement member A440 in the same manner. Chamfering is not performed until just before the intersection that intersects with the straight line, but chamfering is performed immediately before the intersection. Thereby, the range which can visually recognize 1st displacement member A440 is securable, avoiding interference of 1st displacement member A440.

  As shown in FIG. 319, in the retracted state of the first motion unit A400, the first displacement member A440 is wide in the front-rear direction so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is arranged with the posture which becomes. Therefore, compared to the case where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is limited to the posture in which the light emitting side surface (the surface facing the front side in FIG. 320) is directed to the front side, the area occupied by the first displacement member A440 in the front view. Can be suppressed, and the visual change can be increased while suppressing the amount of displacement in the front view.

  This configuration is effective when there is a situation where the range available for displacement of the first displacement member A440 is limited in the rotation angle range of the drive gear AMG1 (see FIG. 335) rotated by the drive motor AMT1. Details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 320, in the extended state of the first operation unit A400, the second displacement member A490 is disposed at the extended position, while the first displacement member A440 is in the extended position (the third symbol display device 81). (Position away from).

  More specifically, the first displacement member A440 is arranged in a posture that is wide in the front-rear direction so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second displacement member In order to allow the movement of the second displacement member A490 from the state of interfering with the movement locus of A490 (the retracted state of the first operation unit A400), it is closer to the game board A13 side and is arranged on the front side than the second displacement member A490. The state is changed to a state in which the first operation unit A400 is extended.

  Thereby, the first displacement member A440 transmits light to the player side without being blocked by the second displacement member A490 regardless of whether the first operation unit A400 is in the retracted state or the extended state. It is possible to perform an emitted light emission effect. In particular, in the extended state of the first displacement member A440, the light emission mode of the long hole A412a (see FIG. 325) arranged around the third symbol display device 81 can be switched, and the line of sight to the third symbol display device 81 is visible. The details are described later.

  As shown in FIG. 321, in the second operation unit A700, the rendering unit A710 can move up and down toward the center of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the second operation unit A700 includes a rotating body A720 configured to be operable regardless of the vertical position of the rendering unit A710, and executes a light emitting effect in which light travels in multiple directions by the rotation of the rotating body A720. Although it is possible, details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 322, since each of the plurality of first operation units A400 includes an individual driving device, each first operation unit A400 can perform state change and state maintenance independently. That is, the combination that configures the retracted state and the extended state in the first operation unit A400 is not limited to that illustrated in FIG. 322, and can be arbitrarily set.

  For example, it is possible to execute only the state change of any one of the first operation units A400, or it is possible to execute the state change by the first operation units A400 that are different in order. For example, the state change can be executed in order clockwise from the lower left first operation unit A400, or the state change can be made in both directions from the third first operation unit A400B clockwise from the lower left. It can also be executed. As described above, various effects can be executed using the first operation unit A400.

  In addition, for example, in the case where the second displacement member A490 of the first operation unit A400B, A400C in the retracted state in FIG. 322 is arranged at the extended position so as to interfere with the second operation unit A700. The first operation units A400B and A400C that may interfere with the second operation unit A700 may be in the retracted state, and the other first operation units A400, A400A, and A400D may be in the overhanging state. Thereby, compared with the case where all the 1st operation units A400 operate synchronously with the same drive device, the variation of the combination of operation | movement (state) of 1st operation unit A400 and 2nd operation unit A700 can be increased. it can.

  FIG. 323 is a front view of the operation unit A300. In FIG. 323, the outer shape of the game board A13, the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are illustrated by imaginary lines. As shown in FIG. 323, the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400 is arranged so that the game area can be effectively decorated. This will be described below.

  First, when a game area is defined as an area in which a ball passing between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 flows down, a section in which the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are opposed to each other and guide the ball (ball launch unit) The section from the 112a side to the ball return prevention member 68 (see FIG. 302) is not included in the game area, and the outer frame of the game area is the inner rail 61 in this section. Therefore, the outer end portion of the front cover A410 of the first operation units A400, A400A (from the lower left to the second one) disposed on the back side of the inner rail 61 is disposed in the vicinity (outside) of the inner rail 61. (It is not necessary to extend to the outer rail 62).

  On the other hand, the outer frame of the game area in the area after the ball passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (particularly, the area where the right-handed ball flows down) is the outer rail 62. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operation units A400B, A400C (third and fourth from the lower left) arranged on the back side of the outer rail 62 is in the vicinity of the outer rail 62 (outside). Placed in.

  Further, the outer frame of the game area in the area where the outer rail 62 is interrupted and the outer edge member A73 is disposed becomes the outer edge member A73. Therefore, the outer end portion of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400D (first lower right one) arranged on the back side of the outer edge member A73 is arranged near the inner side surface (outward side) of the outer edge member A73. . In the present embodiment, this is feasible because the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is omitted in the right middle portion of the back case A310 and the right end portion of the back case A310 is brought close to the right end portion of the game board A13. It will be.

  That is, by forming the inner area of the back case A310 close to the right end of the game board A13 in front view, the first operation unit A400D can be arranged close to the right end of the game board A13. As a result, a channel disposed near the right end of the game board A13 as a channel through which the right-handed ball flows down (a channel sandwiched between the right channel forming wall 86d and the outer edge member A73, see FIG. 302). The first operation unit A400D can be arranged in such a manner that the outer side end portion of the front cover A410 is arranged on the outer side (right side).

  In other words, like a general right-handed machine (for example, a pachinko machine that is not a left-right symmetric machine), the right-handed channel is extremely narrow compared to the left-handed channel, and is moved toward the right end of the game board A13. In this case, as in the present embodiment, the rear surface of the game area can be configured by arranging a movable device such as the first operation unit A400 right-justified in the inner area of the rear case A310. A movable device can be arranged on the entire side.

  On the other hand, on the left side of the back case A310, a guide portion sandwiched between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is formed in a front view, and the player's line of sight concentrates on this guide portion. Since it is difficult, even if the support plate portion A313 is provided on the left side of the back case A310 as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of improvement in the decoration of the game area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is disposed on the left side of the back case A310, and the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the right side of the back case A310. It can be said that it is a choice.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 323, since the plurality of front covers A410 are effectively arranged in the game area, the patterns and figures to be visually recognized by the player who pays attention to the game area are visually recognized through the game board A13. A plurality of front covers A410.

  This makes it unnecessary to decorate the game area by sticking a sticker or the like on which a character or the like is printed on the surface of the game board A13. In addition, the area where the front cover A410 is disposed is configured to be changeable in appearance depending on the arrangement of each displacement member and the light emission mode of the light emitting means as a part of the first operation unit A400. The variation of the aspect which decorates a game area | region can be increased compared with the case where a sticker etc. are affixed on game board A13. Details of the change in appearance will be described later.

  Since the outside of the game area is hidden by the block-like member 74 (see FIG. 305), even if a portion where the structure is exposed or a driving device is arranged here, it can be avoided that the appearance is deteriorated. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 323, the adjacent first operation units A400 are arranged close to each other with a slight gap therebetween, and the cover member A591 arranged in the middle connects the first operation units A400 adjacent to each other. Fastened and fixed to one operation unit A400. That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of (five in the present embodiment) first operation units A400 arranged around the third symbol display device 81 are coupled to each other to form an integrated structure.

  Further, the outer side surface of the first operation unit A400 is disposed close to the inner side surface of the back case A310 (see FIG. 324). Accordingly, the rigidity of the entire first operation unit A400 can be improved, and the deformation of the back case A310 can be assisted by the rigidity of the first operation unit A400, so that the above-described back case A310 is reinforced. It is possible to avoid overly relying on the metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308). Therefore, since the strength (rigidity, plate thickness) required for the metal plate member 75 can be reduced, the design freedom of the metal plate member 75 can be improved.

  Thus, it is possible to easily design a shape that facilitates noise suppression and grounding (see FIGS. 303 and 304) by contacting the inner surface of the inner frame 12 as the original function of the metal plate member 75. it can.

  FIG. 324 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit A300. FIG. 324 illustrates a state in which a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) first operation units A400 are removed from the rear case A310 on the front side, and the second operation units A700 are attached to the rear case A310.

  Each of the first operation units A400 is configured to be operable in a substantially common operation mode, and a plurality of the first operation units A400 are disposed so as to surround a part of the inner space of the back case A310. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, each first operation unit A400 moves in the direction toward the center of the inner space of the back case A310 (direction along the radiation emitted from the center of the inner space of the back case A310). Configured to move in.

  Therefore, for example, since the influence exerted by gravity can change in each first operation unit A400, in this embodiment, the configuration is devised so that the operation can be realized without depending on gravity, but details will be described later. To do. As described above, since each first operation unit A400 has a substantially common configuration, the first operation unit A400 disposed in the lower left will be described in detail, and the other first operation units A400 will be described. Omitted.

  FIG. 325 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 326 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit A400. As shown in FIGS. 325 and 326, the area of the first operation unit A400 is a substantially rectangular area covered with the front cover A410 in a front view, and a main body area A400b in which a light emission effect is mainly executed, and its main body It is comprised from the side area | region A400v side by side attached to the edge part of area | region A400b.

  The side area A400v is not an area that is assumed to be visually recognized by the player in the assembled state. In particular, a blind cover member A591 is covered on the center side that may be visually recognized by the player, and the back side of the cover member A591 is configured to be invisible to the player.

  In this side-by-side area A400v, a configuration (for example, a drive motor AMT1, a detection sensor A426 for detecting a position, a wiring, a connector, and the like) that inevitably accompanies an effect executed in the main body area A400b is not intended for the player to visually recognize. By disposing, the main body region A400b can be utilized to the maximum extent for disposing the members assuming that the player can visually recognize the main body region A400b. That is, the main body region A400b can be prevented from being eroded by a configuration that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player, so that a large member can be arranged by making full use of the width of the main body region A400b.

  FIG. 327 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 328 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit A400. 327 and 328 show a state in which the front cover A410 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 327 and 328, the first operation unit A400 includes a front cover A410 and a front unit FU including a first displacement member A440 that can be displaced in a manner of entering between the front cover A410 and the front cover A410. And a rear unit BU disposed on the back side of the front unit FU.

  The front cover A410 is formed of a shape in which a thin plate is bent in a U-shape so as to cover the front side of the front unit FU on the front side of the front unit FU, and is fastened and fixed to the rear unit BU. And a plurality of through holes A412 drilled at positions defined by the relationship with the front unit FU, and a guide part A413 for guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

  The front cover A410 has the above-described configuration, and has a function of making a specific area visible through the through hole A412 while concealing most of the area of the front unit FU from the player, and a first displacement member of the front unit FU. The main function is to guide the displacement of A440.

  FIG. 329 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover A410, and FIG. 330 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front cover A410. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the front cover A410 is arranged to be stacked on the back side of the production center part A411a of the main body part A411, and is disposed to face the production center part A411a, and has the shape of the production center part A411a. A diffuser plate A415 formed of a light-transmitting resin material in a plate shape having a corresponding outer shape, and an LED having an optical axis directed to the diffuser plate A415 side facing the diffuser plate A415 (a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 329) And a board fixing plate that is disposed opposite to the lighting board A416, fixes the lighting board A416, and is fastened and fixed to the front unit FU. A417 is mainly provided.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of the diffusion plate A415, the electrical decoration substrate A416, and the substrate fixing plate A417 and the fact that the positional shift is suppressed by the configuration will be described.

  The diffuser plate A415 is not fastened by a fastening screw or the like, but is supported by being sandwiched between the main body A411 and the substrate fixing plate A417 from the front and rear directions, and the axis corresponding position A415a disposed opposite to the light emitting means A416a on the back side. A wave pattern formed from protrusions having a shape concentrically extending around the center is formed, and is formed as a recessed portion A415b recessed inward from the outer edge and a through hole having a smaller diameter than the light emitting means. A plurality of small-diameter holes A415c and a plurality of protruding plate portions A415d protruding in a plate shape from the sides constituting the upper and lower ends to the back side.

  The ridge that forms a wave pattern on the back side of the diffuser plate A415 is refracted by irradiating light irradiated to the axis corresponding position A415a side, and then proceeds in the radial direction of the circle centering on the axis corresponding position A415a. It is formed from a shape that advances to the front side. That is, the light incident on the axis-corresponding position A415a side is visually recognized by the player at a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a (outside in the radial direction), but not vice versa. That is, it is formed so as to prevent the light incident on the position away from the axis corresponding position A 415 a from traveling to the axis corresponding position A 415 a side.

  The recessed portion A415b is a cutout formed in order to avoid interference of members, and in this embodiment, the purpose of avoiding interference with the screw head of the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the electric decoration board A416 to the board fixing plate A417. Formed with.

  The small-diameter portion 415c is a position that does not face the through hole A412 of the main body portion A411 (a position that faces the plate portion of the main body portion A411) in order to make it difficult to see in the front view, and is an insertion column shape of the substrate fixing plate A417. This is a through-hole formed at a position corresponding to the portion A417f, and is used for alignment of the diffusion plate A415, the electrical decoration substrate A416, and the substrate fixing plate A417. Details will be described later.

  The projecting plate portion A415d is formed in the notch portion A417h of the substrate fixing plate A417 so that the diffusion plate A415 can be positioned with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417. The protruding plate portion A415d has a protruding length of about 4 mm and a width of about 10 mm, and has a certain degree of rigidity. Therefore, it has a certain degree of rigidity, so that a load generated during assembly or maintenance (for example, with other members) It is possible to prevent the projecting plate portion A415d from being bent or broken due to a load caused by collision, rubbing, etc., and the alignment function can be maintained for a long time.

  The diffusing plate A415 has a wave pattern formed in the entire area on the back side and can perform a light diffusing function in the entire area, but is clearly divided into a first area AC1 and a second area AC2 from the production aspect. That is, the first area AC1 is an area that overlaps with the electrical decoration board A416 when viewed from the front, and the second area AC2 is an area that does not overlap with the electrical decoration board A416 when viewed from the front.

  In the first area AC1, the optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the electric decoration board A416 passes, and it is possible for the player to visually recognize the light emitting mode as a strong light emitting effect. On the other hand, the second region AC2 corresponds to a region formed so as to protrude from the right side wall A417a3 of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the outside (right side) of the substrate fixing plate A417, and the light emitting means A416a of the electric decoration substrate A416. The optical axis does not pass and the light from the light emitting means A 416a arrives weakened.

  On the other hand, although 2nd area | region AC2 is equipped with the function which improves an effect effect in the light emission effect by 1st displacement member A440 of front side unit FU, the detail is mentioned later.

  The illumination board A416 includes the above-described light emitting means A416a, a recessed portion A416b recessed inward from the outer edge, a plurality of large diameter holes A416c formed with a large diameter for positioning, and a small diameter through hole. A plurality of set fastening holes 416d arranged as a set of holes, a plurality of connectors A416e arranged on the front and back sides and connected to the ends of the wires, and an electric wiring FC (this book) for supplying electricity to the first displacement member A440 The embodiment mainly includes an intermediate connector A416f to which a flat (flat) cable) is connected.

  The light emitting means A416a is a position where the intensity of light visually recognized by the player is easily maximized. In this embodiment, the light emitting means A416a is preferentially disposed at a position that matches the position where the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 is formed in the front-rear direction. The Thereby, it is possible to easily secure the intensity of light visually recognized by the player through the through hole A412.

  The recessed portion A416b is a notch formed to avoid interference with the screw head of the fastening screw inserted through the through hole A417b in order to fasten and fix the board fixing plate A417 to the front unit FU.

  The large diameter hole A416c is a through hole formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outermost diameter of the insertion columnar portion A417f of the substrate fixing plate A417, and is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar portion A417f. By inserting the insertion columnar part A417f through the large-diameter hole A416c, the electric decoration board A416 can be aligned with the board fixing plate A417.

  The group fastening portion A416d is composed of a pair of small-diameter through holes arranged vertically. Maintenance efficiency is improved by configuring the fastening screw to be inserted into the upper through hole of the pair of through holes.

  For example, for maintenance, the main body A411 and the diffusion plate A415 are removed in a state where the first operation unit A400 is fixed to the back case A310, the failed electric decoration board A416 is removed from the board fixing board A417, and a normal electric decoration board is obtained. When an operation of attaching A416 to the board fixing plate A417 is assumed, the electric decoration board A416 is tilted forward by its own weight before fastening and fixing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper through hole (the side on which the displacement to the front side due to forward tilting is large) of the pair of upper and lower through holes of the set fastening portion A416d is fixed with the fastening screw. It is possible to return the posture in the backward fall direction with the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the posture of the electric decoration board A416 from being erroneously fixed at the time of maintenance fastening.

  In addition, the lower through hole in the set fastening portion A416d is inserted into the columnar portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c protruding from the front side of the substrate fixing plate A417, and the positioning of the electrical decoration substrate A416 and the electrical decoration substrate A416. It has a function to perform temporary fixing. That is, even before the fastening screw is fastened, the lower through hole is hooked on the columnar part of the board fastening part A417c, so that the electric decoration board A416 can be prevented from falling by its own weight.

  The connector A416e is arranged on the front side, and has a first connector A416e1 to which power supply and wiring for performing light emission control of the light emitting means A416a are connected, and wiring connected to the detection sensor A426 fixed to the front unit FU. It mainly includes a second connector A416e2 to be connected, and a third connector A416e3 to which a wiring connected to a second displacement member A490 disposed in the rear unit BU is connected.

  In these connectors A416e, the position of the mating member to which the wiring is connected is fixed (first connector A416e1, second connector A416e2), and there is a sufficient distance between the connectors even if the mating member is movable ( For the reason of the third connector A416e3), it can be arranged at an arbitrary position. In the present embodiment, in a position corresponding to the lower end portion of the electrical decoration board A416 and included in the side area A400v so that interference with other members hardly occurs and there is no possibility of being visually recognized by the player. Has been placed.

  On the other hand, the first displacement member A440 as a mating member to which the intermediate connector A416f is connected by wiring is an area on the opposite side of the electric decoration board A416 with the board fixing board A417 (the board fixing board A417 and the guide plate portion A430 (FIG. 335)), the distance between the connectors (front-rear distance) is shortened. If the connector is misplaced, an excessive load is placed on the wiring. There is a risk of giving.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the connector A 416e (in this embodiment, the wiring is connected to the connector A 416e from below), the intermediate connector A 416f is positioned in the first unit FU. The direction A416x, which is the moving direction of the displacement member A440, and the direction in which the electric wiring FC can be expanded and contracted (a flat (flat) cable band extends, can be easily bent, and is less likely to break) are aligned. It is set.

  The board fixing plate A417 has a main body part A417a that is formed in a box shape that is open on the front side and can accommodate the electrical decoration board A416, and a protrusion that receives the fastening part of the front unit FU on the back side of the main body part A417a. And a plurality of through-holes A417b configured to allow insertion of a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening part, a fastening part into which the fastening screw is screwed, and a plane common to the front end surface of the fastening part to the front side. And a plurality of substrate fastening portions A417c configured by a set of protruding small-diameter columnar portions.

  The main body A417a of the substrate fixing plate A417 is parallel to the plate-like deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1 connected to the rear end portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c and the deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1, and the front surface is the substrate fastening portion A417c. And a shallow plate-like portion A417a2 formed on the same plane as the front end surface of the fastening portion.

  That is, the back surface of the electric decoration board A416 can be surface-supported by the front end surface of the fastening part of the plurality of board fastening parts A417c and the shallow plate-like part A417a2.

  The substrate fixing plate A417 has a sharply projecting portion A417d that projects from the deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1 to the front side with a sharp tip, and the vertical width of the sharply projecting portion A417d at the lower left portion of the sharply projecting portion A417d. And an insertion hole A417e drilled in a rectangular shape with the same width.

  The sharp overhanging portion A417d is disposed at the lower left portion of the intermediate connector A416f in the assembled state, and has a triangular cross-section in such a manner that the electrical wiring FC, which is a flat cable, is spaced apart from the electrical decoration board A416 by a thickness. It is formed as a linearly extending protrusion, and the extending direction of the protrusion intersects (perpendicularly) with respect to the direction A416x in a front view. Since the wiring connected to the intermediate connector A416f is routed to the back side through the insertion hole A417e, the electric wiring FC connected to the intermediate connector A416f is connected to the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protruding portion A417d. It is sandwiched between.

  In this way, by sandwiching and supporting the electric wiring FC between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharply extending portion A417d, a portion that receives the displacement of the electric wiring FC due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is provided in the intermediate connector A416f. The position can be shifted from the end position of the connected electrical wiring FC to a position sandwiched between the substrate fixing plate A417 and the sharp extension A417d. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring FC is dropped from the intermediate connector A416f.

  The substrate fixing plate A417 includes a plurality of insertion columnar portions A417f protruding in a columnar shape from the shallow bottom plate-like portion A417a2 to the front side at positions corresponding to the large-diameter holes A416c, the shallow bottom plate-like portion A417a2, and the shallow bottom plate-like portion. The protruding plate portion A415d of the diffusion plate A415 can be received by the plurality of through holes A417g formed through the boundary between the A417a2 and the deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1 and the side wall A417a3 extending from the outer shape of the main body portion A417a to the front side. A plurality of notched portions A417h formed with a width and a plurality of protruding pieces A417i protruding toward the inside of the main body A417a along the front side end portion of the side wall A417a3 formed obliquely on the right side when viewed from the front. And comprising.

  The insertion columnar portion A417f has a diameter slightly larger than the inner diameter of the large-diameter hole A416c of the electric decoration board A416c, exceeds the thickness of the electric decoration board A416, and protrudes from the flat surface formed by the tip of the side wall A417a3. And a small-diameter tip portion protruding from the tip of the large-diameter base portion with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the small-diameter hole A415c of the diffusion plate A415.

  Thereby, alignment of the electric decoration board | substrate A416 and the surface support of the diffusion board A415 can be performed in a large diameter base part, and alignment of the diffusion board A415 can be performed in a small diameter front-end | tip part. That is, the diffusing plate A415 is aligned at the small-diameter tip, and is supported by the side wall A417a3 and the tip of the large-diameter base of the insertion columnar portion A417f. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that the attitude | position of diffuser plate A415 shift | deviates, although it is the aspect which is not fastened and fixed directly.

  Through-hole A417g has a function which forms the passage of air and suppresses heat_generation | fever of electrical decoration board | substrate A416. In the present embodiment, the diffuser plate A415 is arranged in a manner that closes the front side of the light emitting means A416a of the electric circuit board A416, and since it is difficult to form an air passage to the front side, the through hole A417g on the back side. Is forming. Thereby, heat_generation | fever of the electrical decoration board | substrate A416 can be suppressed, without making the production effect by light emission means A416a low.

  The notch A417h receives the protruding plate portion A415d of the diffusion plate A415 and engages in the direction along the side wall A417a3. As a result, even if the narrow diameter tip portion of the insertion columnar portion A417f breaks due to deterioration over time or the narrow diameter tip portion falls off due to poor manufacturing, the diffusion plate A415 protrudes from the substrate fixing plate A417. It is possible to prevent displacement in the longitudinal direction of the plate portion A415d (the direction along the formation direction of the side wall A417a3, the upper right direction). Therefore, in the support mode in which the diffusion plate A415 is not fastened and fixed as described above, it is possible to prevent the diffusion plate A415 from being displaced.

  The protruding piece A417i is formed in a thin plate shape into which the electric decoration board A416 can enter between the shallow plate-like portion A417a2. In the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the protruding piece A417i is formed with a protruding length that interferes with the electrical decoration board A416 when viewed from the front, and the protruding piece A417i is downward (obliquely downward) from the side wall A417a3. ), Even when the electric decoration board A416 is subjected to a load in the direction of falling forward due to gravity or the like, the protruding piece A417i is inclined to the tip end side (upper right side) of the electric decoration board A416. Is stopped (stopped from the front side), so that the electric decoration board A416 can be prevented from falling forward.

  The protruding piece A417i is formed inside the inner space of the operation unit A300, and restricts displacement of the electric decoration board A416 to the front side (suppresses fluttering). Therefore, the electric decoration board A416 can be stably fixed while omitting the arrangement of the fastening screw inside the inner space of the operation unit A300. Thereby, while avoiding the reduction of the light emitting effect by disposing the fastening screw inside the internal space of the operation unit A300 where the player's attention is likely to be high (caused by the fastening screw to cause a shadow) The illumination board A416 can be stably fixed to the board fixing plate A417.

  When assembling the electric decoration board A416 to the board fixing plate A417, the right edge of the electric decoration board A416 is inserted deeply into the shallow plate-like portion A417a2 and the protruding piece A417i, and inserted into the back. As a starting point, the electric decoration board A416 can be smoothly assembled by pushing it backward. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332.

  FIG. 331 (a) is a front view of the electric decoration board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and FIG. 331 (b) is a drawing of the electric decoration board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 along the CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb line in FIG. 331 (a). FIG. 332 (a) is a front view of the electric decoration board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and FIG. 332 (b) is an electric decoration board A416 along the line CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb in FIG. 332 (a). It is sectional drawing of board | substrate fixed board A417.

  331 (a) and 331 (b) illustrate a state in which the electric decoration board A416 is inserted into the board fixing plate A417. In FIGS. 332 (a) and 332 (b), the electric decoration board A416 is illustrated. Is shown assembled to the substrate fixing plate A417.

  The electrical decoration board A416 includes chamfered portions A416g and A416h that are chamfered from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the board body. The formation mode of the chamfered portions A416g and A416h corresponds to the length from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the adjacent cutout portion A417h. That is, in response to the fact that the length to the notch A417h at the lower end is shorter than the length to the notch A417h at the upper end of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417, Compared with the first chamfered portion A416g at the upper end, the second chamfered portion A416h at the lower end is formed with a shorter distance from the right side of the electrical decoration board A416.

  FIG. 331 shows a state in which the electric decoration board A416 is displaced upward along the inclination of the left side of the board fixing plate A417, as compared with the state shown in FIG. The extent of this displacement is such that the upper limit of the length of the space formed between the upper surface of the substrate fixing plate A417 by the first chamfered portion A416g is the first chamfered portion A416g in the state of FIG. The edge part of this enters the gap formed by the notch A417h.

  In contrast to the state illustrated in FIG. 331, when the electric decoration board A416 is displaced downward, the upper limit of the length of the space formed between the lower surface of the board fixing plate A417 by the second chamfered part A416h is set. As shown in FIG. 332, the electric decoration board A416 can be shifted downward, and the edge portion of the second chamfered portion A416h enters the gap formed by the cutout portion A417h in the downwardly shifted state.

  As described above, by forming the chamfered portions A416g and A416h on the electric decoration board A416, the degree of freedom of the position of the electric decoration board A416 when the electric decoration board A416 is inserted into the board fixing plate A417 can be improved. In other words, even if the right side of the electric decoration board A416 and the right side of the board fixing plate A417 are not in the positional relationship as shown in FIG. 332, a slight vertical shift is allowed and the electric decoration board A416 is fixed to the board. Can be inserted into plate A417. Thereby, the electrical decoration board | substrate A416 can be easily inserted in board | substrate fixed board A417.

  In order to change from the state shown in FIG. 331 to the state shown in FIG. 332, the electric decoration board A416 may be tilted so as to approach the board fixing plate A417 with the right side as the axis of inclination. At this time, as shown in FIG. 331, as can be seen from the insertion columnar portion A417f of the substrate fixing plate A417 through the large-diameter hole A416c of the electric decoration substrate A416, the tapered insertion columnar portion A417f (FIG. 329) is seen. The large-diameter hole 417c is guided by (refer to FIG. 3B), so that the positional deviation in the vertical direction of the electric decoration board A416 is corrected, and the state shown in FIG. Therefore, since the vertical shift of the electric decoration board A416 is corrected without intentionally correcting the vertical movement of the electric decoration board A416, the electric decoration board A416 can be easily assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

  The notched portion A417h is fitted with the projecting plate portion A415d in the assembled state (see FIG. 325) to fill the gap. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the electric decoration board A416 from entering the notch A417h after assembly. That is, while the notched portion A417h has a function of widening the gap at the time of assembling the electric decoration board A416, after the assembled state, the arrangement of the electric decoration board A416 is maintained by filling the gap. Can have a function.

  As shown in FIG. 332 (b), in the state where the electric decoration board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417, the projecting piece A417i protrudes to the front side of the electric decoration board A416 to prevent the electric decoration board A416 from coming off. Since the interference occurs, it is possible to prevent the right side of the electric decoration board A416 from falling off the board fixing plate A417.

  By preventing the falling off of the decoration board A416 with such a retaining structure, in the present embodiment, the board fastening portion A417c is configured not to be disposed near the right side of the decoration board A416 and the board fixing plate A417. (The arrangement of fastening screws is omitted.) Thereby, it is possible to secure an arrangement area of the light emitting means A416a in the vicinity of the right side of the electric decoration board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and it is possible to avoid a shadow from being generated by the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect in the vicinity of the right side of the electric decoration board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.

  At the time of maintenance work in which the decoration board A416 becomes defective and the decoration board A416 is replaced, the decoration board A416 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 332 (b) to the board fixing plate A417 as shown in FIG. 331 (b). Need to tilt. At this time, since the board A416 is surrounded by the board fixing plate A417, it is difficult to directly tilt the board A416. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first connector A416e1 is disposed on the front side, and the wiring board connected to the first connector A416e1 is pulled forward, so that the electric circuit board A416 can be easily attached. It can be tilted with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417.

  Furthermore, since the first connector A416e1 is disposed at a position opposite to the right end (the end disposed opposite to the side wall A417a3), which is the starting point of the attitude change of the electrical decoration board A416, the first connector The electric decoration board A416 can be efficiently rotated and displaced by a load applied to the wiring connected to the A416e1. In other words, the moment of the force applied to the electric decoration board A 416 due to the load applied to the wiring can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive (excessive) load to the electric decoration board A 416 and the wiring during the maintenance work.

  FIG. 333 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU, and FIG. 334 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. As shown in FIGS. 333 and 334, the rear unit BU is formed in a box shape whose front side is opened, and is fixed in such a manner that the front unit FU covers the opened front side. That is, the second displacement member A490 disposed on the front side of the rear unit BU is configured to be able to advance and retreat through the gap between the rear unit BU and the front unit FU.

  As shown in FIG. 333, only one drive motor AMT1 is provided in each first operation unit A400. The driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU and the second displacement member A490 of the rear unit BU, so that the movable effect of the first operation unit A400 is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the units that can be disassembled as a unit are simply called the front unit FU and the rear unit BU, and when performing a movable effect, the configuration of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. Do not work independently, but work in conjunction. For example, the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the front unit FU, while the transmission gear A461 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the rear unit BU.

  FIG. 335 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 336 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operation unit A400. is there. 335 and B11 are exploded perspective views of the first operation unit A400 with the front cover A410 removed. In FIG. 335 and FIG. 336, illustration of the wiring HC and the like is omitted. First, the outline of the configuration of the first operation unit A400 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 335 and FIG. 336, the first operation unit A400 constitutes the front unit FU, and is a support plate formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive and colored (black in this embodiment) resin material. The first displacement member A440 is formed on the front side of the support plate portion A420 with a space through which the first displacement member A440 can advance and retreat, and is fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420. Guide plate portion A430, a first displacement member A440 that is guided by a gap between the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A420 to advance and retreat (slide displacement, see FIGS. 339 to 344), and the first displacement member A440 1 is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor AMT1 to the displacement member A440, and is fastened to the slide link A450 that is displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and the support plate portion A420. A drive gear AMG1 to be fastened to a fixed driven motor AMT1 and its drive motor AMT1, mainly comprises.

  Further, the first operation unit A400 constitutes the rear unit BU, and is in mesh with the drive gear AMG1, and the transmission gear group A460 in which each component rotates in accordance with the rotation of the drive gear AMG1, and its transmission A gear box A460 is rotatably supported, and a support box portion A470 formed in a box shape in which a front side is opened from a light-transmitting colored (black in this embodiment) resin material, and a light-transmitting and colorless A rear plate portion A480 that is formed of a resin material and is provided with a gap on the back side of the support box portion A470 and fastened and fixed to the support box portion A470, and a gap (support) formed on the front side of the support box portion A470. A second displacement member A490 that moves forward and backward (rotation displacement, rotational displacement, see FIGS. 356 to 358) in the gap between the plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470, and a drive mode on the second displacement member A490. Rack and pinion A510 and which is fastened to the rear side of and supporting box section A470 rack-pinion mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the AMT 1, mainly comprises.

  As described above, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 have a transmission mechanism on the back side across the plate-like portion (the bottom of the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470) disposed on the back side thereof. (Slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) are provided, and both slide link A450 and second displacement member A490 are placed in the gap between support plate portion A420 and support box portion A470. Arranged.

  That is, the displacement member A440, A490 and the transmission mechanism (slide link A450, rack pinion A510) are arranged in the front-rear direction with the plate-like portion interposed therebetween, and the front-side first displacement member A440 is arranged. As compared with the case where the slide link A450 as the transmission mechanism and the second displacement member A490 are arranged in the front and rear independent gaps, the arrangement of the plate members for forming the independent gaps is omitted. Therefore, the front-rear width occupied by the displacement mechanism portion of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be suppressed. Thereby, since another production | presentation mechanism part can be arrange | positioned in the front-back clearance which can be formed in the part which can suppress the front-back width, the production effect of 1st action | operation unit A400 can be improved.

  Next, each configuration of the first operation unit A400 will be described in detail. As described above, the first operation unit A400 includes the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 having different displacement modes, and the configuration necessary for each displacement is partially different. A configuration necessary for realizing the displacement of the displacement member A440 will be described, and the remaining configuration necessary for the displacement of the second displacement member A490 will be described later.

  The support plate portion A420 constitutes a framework of the first operation unit A400 and is a portion that guides the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440, and is a main body plate configured in a rectangular plate shape to which the drive motor AMT1 is fastened and fixed. A portion A421, a plurality of guide holes A422 formed as long holes extending in parallel with the direction A416x, a through hole A423 provided as a similar long hole in one of the guide holes A422, and parallel to the direction A416x A plurality of guide ridges A424 projecting on the front side as the ridges, and the main body plate portion A421 is recessed from the right side edge of the main body plate portion A421 along the direction A416x so that the recessed end portion faces the front side. A detection center for detecting that the recessed portion A425 formed as an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the right edge of the first displacement member A440 and the first displacement member A440 are disposed at the initial position. A main body at a position corresponding to the arrangement of A426, a shaft supporting part A427 projecting from the main body plate part A421 to the back side in a circular shape capable of supporting the shaft support hole A452 of the slide link A450, and the transmission gear group A460. It mainly includes a plurality of retaining cylindrical portions A428 that protrude in a cylindrical shape from the plate portion A421 to the back side.

  The guide hole A422 includes a first guide hole A422a that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and a plurality of second guide holes A422b that guide the displacement of the guided projecting portion A455c of the slide link A450.

  The extraction hole A423 is a through hole through which the spring hooking portion A455d of the slide link A450 passes toward the front side, and the spring hooking portion A455d projects to the front side of the main body plate portion A421 and is coil spring ASP1. Lock the end of the.

  The other end of the coil spring ASP1 is locked (hooked) to the lower left corner of the main body plate portion A421, and the coil spring ASP1 generates a biasing force in the contracting direction (lower left direction).

  The guide protrusion A424 spans the guide groove A441g of the first displacement member A440 and has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440. The recessed portion A425 is formed to guide the bending of the electric wiring FC coupled to the first displacement member A440, and details thereof will be described later.

  The detection sensor A426 is a photocoupler type sensor that is disposed so that it can be determined that the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the initial position. In the present embodiment, the detection sensor A426 does not directly detect the position of the first displacement member A440, but detects the position of the detected plate portion A455e of the slide link A450.

  In the present embodiment, the sensor arranged to determine the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is the detection sensor A426, and the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are in the extended position. The arrangement of the detection sensor for determining the arrangement is omitted.

  As a result, the member cost can be reduced and the space for disposing other displacement members can be twisted, while the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are already disposed at the extended position. In spite of this, it is also assumed that there is a problem that the drive motor AMT1 does not stop. On the other hand, even when the drive motor AMT1 does not stop, measures are taken to avoid overloading at locations related to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and to maintain the arrangement of the first displacement member A440. Details will be described later.

  The retaining cylindrical portion A428 protrudes in a cylindrical shape formed with an inner diameter that is substantially half the outermost diameter of the transmission gear A461 of the transmission gear group A460, and the protruding tip has a slight gap therebetween to transmit the transmission gear. Opposite the group A460. That is, the retaining cylindrical portion A428 has a function of suppressing the transmission gear A461 from being displaced in the axial drop-off direction.

  In the present embodiment, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the shaft support portion of the transmission gear A461 (not shown). Therefore, as long as the screw is not loosened or dropped, it is possible to restrict the transmission gear A461 from being displaced in the shaft-side dropping direction by the screw. As described above, in this embodiment, the screw and the retaining cylindrical portion A428 are configured to prevent the transmission gear A461 from coming off in two stages, so that the transmission gear A461 can be surely removed from the shaft. Can be prevented.

  The guide plate portion A430 has a plate-like main body plate portion A431 that is disposed so as to face the right edge of the main body plate portion A421 in a posture parallel to the surface formed by the main body plate portion A421. A plurality of elongated recesses A432 recessed in a long rectangular shape along the direction A416x on the back side of the main body plate portion A431, and toward the lower left along the direction A416x on the right edge on the front surface of the main body plate portion A431. It corresponds to the width of the inclined surface A433 formed so as to be inclined toward the front side and configured to assist the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (rear cover portion 443) and the recessed portion A425 of the support plate portion A420. And a guide plate portion A434 formed in the shape of a long plate along the direction A416x.

  The main body plate portion A431 includes a plurality of insertion hole portions A431a through which fastening screws are inserted in the peripheral portion. The left side edge of the main body plate portion A431 is supported by a surface (side) on the side wall portion A421a raised to the front side from the left side edge of the main body plate portion A421 of the support plate portion A420, so the left side of the main body plate portion A431. The guide plate portion A430 can be stably fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420 while the insertion hole portion A431a provided at the edge portion is one place.

  Further, in the right edge portion of the main body plate portion A431 as a position passing through the front and back when the first displacement member A440 moves forward and backward, only one insertion hole portion A431a is arranged at a substantially central position of the vertical width. Compared with the case where the insertion hole portion A431a is disposed at a biased position, the gap between the right edge portion of the main body plate portion A431 and the support plate portion A420 can be suppressed over the entire right edge portion. At the same time, the degree of freedom in designing the first displacement member A440 can be improved as compared with the case where a plurality of insertion hole portions A431a are arranged.

  The long concave portion A432 is a concave portion that guides in a direction A416x that is a direction in which the displacement stop protruding portion A441e of the first displacement member A440 is displaced, and the displaceable length of the displacement stop protrusion portion A441e of the first displacement member A440. It is recessed with a length approximately equal to that. That is, the first displacement member A440 is not only guided on the back side into the guide hole A422 of the support plate portion A420 but also guided on the front side by the elongated recess A432.

  The guide plate portion A434 includes a plurality of claw portions A434a disposed on the right edge side with a gap slightly wider than the thickness of the electric wiring FC formed of a flat cable, and between the claw portions A434a. The electric wiring FC whose end is connected to the first displacement member A440 is passed through the gap and temporarily fixed. By this. One end of the bending displacement of the electric wiring FC that is deflected by the displacement of the first displacement member A440 can be set as the position of the claw portion A434a, and the position of the electric wiring FC on the left side of the claw portion A434a can be stabilized. .

  Therefore, the electric wiring FC composed of a flat cable can be maintained in a state of being close enough to contact with the guide plate portion A434, so that the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the front side of the guide plate portion A434. When the electric wiring FC is similarly displaced (see FIG. 346), it is possible to avoid the interference between the first displacement member A440 and the electric wiring FC. The first displacement member A440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338.

  FIG. 337 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 338 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member A440. In FIG. 338, for the sake of convenience of explanation, it is shown in a different direction view from FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the first displacement member A440 is colored with a guided plate portion A441 that is a plate-like portion guided along the direction A416x between the support plate portion A420 and the guide plate portion A430. It is a plate-like portion that is made of a light-impermeable resin material (in this embodiment, gold-plated), is pivotally supported by the guided plate portion A441, and is displaced in conjunction with the guided plate portion A441. It is formed in a plate shape from an interlocking plate portion A442, a rear lid portion 443 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the interlocking plate portion A442 and forms a gap between the interlocking plate portion A442, and a colorless light-transmitting resin material. A diffusion plate A444 disposed opposite to the back surface side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and an outer shape substantially opposite to the outer shape of the diffusion plate A444 disposed opposite to the back surface side of the diffusion plate A444, and disposed opposite to the rear lid portion 443. Electric board A44 And, mainly includes the.

  Here, since the interlocking plate portion A442, the rear lid portion 443, the diffusion plate A444, and the electrical decoration substrate A445 are fixed together, they will be described first. That is, the plurality of positioning pins A442a protruding from the back surface of the interlocking plate portion A442 are inserted into the plurality of insertion holes A444a of the diffusion plate A444, so that the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444 are positioned with respect to each other, and the diffusion plate A444. A plurality of positioning pins A444b protruding from the back surface of the LED board are inserted into the plurality of insertion holes A445a of the electric decoration board A445, whereby the diffusion plate A444 and the electric decoration board A445 are positioned relative to each other.

  The fastening plate that has passed through the plurality of insertion holes 443a of the rear lid 443 is fastened and fixed to the plurality of screw-in portions A442b of the interlocking plate A442, whereby the diffusion plate is interposed between the interlocking plate A442 and the rear lid 443. A444 and the electrical decoration board A445 are held in such a manner as to allow displacement (displacement less than the height of the positioning pin) to the extent that the positioning pins A442a and A444b do not drop off. Thereby, the diffusion plate A444 and the decoration board A445 can be stably fixed without directly inserting the fastening screw into the diffusion board A444 or the decoration board A445.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of projecting ribs 443b projecting to the front side in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear lid portion 443 abut against the electrical decoration substrate A445 and press against the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444. It is formed in a dimensional relationship that causes a load. By this pressing force, the diffusion plate A444 and the electrical decoration substrate A445 can be stably fixed to the interlocking plate portion A442.

  The electrical decoration substrate A445 includes a plurality of light emitting means A445b such as LEDs (illustrated in a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 337) whose optical axis is directed to the diffusion plate A444 side on the front side.

  The diffusing plate A444 is formed with a wave pattern formed on the back side from a protrusion having a shape concentrically extending around an axis corresponding position A444c disposed opposite to the light emitting means A445b, and the outer edge of the wave pattern is an interlocking plate portion. It is formed at a position corresponding to the opening A442c of A442.

  On the front side of the diffusion plate A444, there is formed a fitting portion A444d projecting to the front side with an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442. In the assembled state, the fitting portion A444d is fitted into the opening A442c. It is.

  With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b and the light that has passed through the opening A442c among the light that has passed through the diffusion plate A444.

  The electrical decoration board A445 includes a connector A445c that is disposed on the back side and to which an electrical wiring FC composed of a flat cable is connected. The electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is connected to the connector A445c from the rotating front end side of the interlocking plate portion A442. As a result, the bending position of the electrical wiring FC can be configured on the rotating front end side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the degree of the bending can be moderated.

  The rear lid portion 443 is provided with a ventilation opening 443c formed at a position corresponding to the connector A445c and a circuit configuration device (not shown) (capacitor, resistor, etc.), and in the direction of the direction A416x with respect to the ventilation opening 416c. A through hole A443d formed to penetrate therethrough.

  The tip of the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is disposed in the ventilation opening 443c where the connector A445c is located. The electrical wiring FC passes through the through hole A443d and is routed to the back side of the rear lid portion 443. . As a result, the electric wiring FC can be sandwiched between the thin-diameter bar-shaped portion 443e that partitions the ventilation opening 443c and the through-hole A443d and the electric decoration board A445, so that the electric wire FC is electrically connected between the connector A445c and the small-diameter rod-shaped portion 443e. It is possible to prevent the wiring FC from being displaced. Note that the through hole A443d also has a role of forming a space in which the electric wiring FC is disposed, and the electric wiring FC is compared with a case where the through hole A443d is not formed with a sufficient length along the direction A416x. Can be reduced.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the small-diameter bar-like portion 443e is formed so as to project toward the electric decoration board A445 side in the same manner as the protruding rib 443b. Therefore, the space | interval between the thin diameter rod-shaped part 443e and electrical decoration board | substrate A445 is narrowed. From such a configuration, it is possible to limit the point at which a load is applied from the rear lid portion 443 to the electrical decoration substrate A445. That is, only the projecting rib 443b and the small-diameter bar-like portion 443e are configured to apply a load from the rear lid portion 443 to the electrical decoration board A445.

  Thereby, even if the electrical wiring FC is displaced due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to avoid the electrical wiring FC from being disconnected from the connector A445c.

  Next, a connection mode between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 and details of the guided plate portion A441 will be described. The interlocking plate portion A442 includes a support shaft portion A442d projecting in an outer circular shape, a pivoted support hole A442e that is a circular opening coaxial with the center axis of the support shaft portion A442d, and the center axis of the support shaft portion A442d. A roller member A442f that is a resin member that is pivotally supported by the interlocking plate portion A442 so as to be rotatable about a parallel axis, and is formed in an outer circular shape.

  The guided plate portion A441 includes a main body plate portion A441a formed in a long plate shape from a resin material, a support shaft portion A441b protruding in an outer circular shape from an upper end portion of the main body plate portion A441a, and a A shaft support hole A441c formed in a circular shape coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft portion A441b and formed at the lower end of the main body plate portion A441a, and a long straight line from the front to the front side of the main body plate portion A441a. A plurality of guide protrusions A441d to be provided, a plurality of displacement stop protrusions A441e to be projected to the front side in a long shape along the direction intersecting (orthogonal) the guide protrusion A441d, An inclined surface A441f that inclines toward the outside (lower left side) toward the front side at a position facing the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the decorative board A445, and a direction A on the back side of the main body plate portion A441a. A plurality of guide grooves A441g formed as narrow grooves along 16x, a recessed portion A441h recessed along the direction A416x from the upper right side edge of the main body plate portion A441a, and the back side of the main body plate portion A441a. A fastening portion A441i protruding in a manner capable of fastening the fastening screw.

  The support shaft portion A441b and the pivoted support hole A441c are used for connection with the interlocking plate portion A442. As an assembly method, after the interlocking plate portion A442 is arranged so that the pivoted support hole A442e of the interlocking plate portion A442 is arranged in the shape of the shaft of the support shaft portion A441b, the interlocking plate portion A442 is covered along the axis. By moving with respect to the guide plate portion A441, the support shaft portion A441b can be inserted into the supported shaft support hole A442e, and the support shaft portion A442d can be inserted into the supported shaft support hole A441c, thereby forming a support state. Note that the supported shaft support hole A442e and the support shaft portion A441b, and the supported shaft support hole A441c and the support shaft portion A442d are configured to have a size in which a slight gap is formed between them.

  In this embodiment, after the pivoting state of the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 is configured by the above method, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the support shaft portion A441b, and the screw Is configured to be larger than the inner diameter of the pivot support hole A442e, so that the interlocking plate portion A442 is prevented from coming off the guided plate portion A441.

  The guide protrusion A441d is a small diameter portion for narrowing the contact area with the back surface of the guide plate portion A430. Thereby, the frictional force generated between the main body plate portion A431 of the guide plate portion A430 can be reduced, and the guided plate portion A441 can be smoothly displaced.

  The displacement preventing projection A441e is formed with a width slightly shorter than the width of the long concave portion A432 of the guide plate portion A430, and enters the long concave portion A432 when the first operation unit A400 is assembled (see FIG. 324). It is formed with a protruding length.

  When the guided plate portion A441 is disposed at the end of displacement, the formation position of the displacement preventing projection A441e is designed so that the displacement preventing projection A441e is disposed at the longitudinal end of the long recess A432. Is done. Therefore, even when the guided plate portion A441 does not stop normally at the end of displacement, the displacement of the guided plate portion A441 is regulated by locking the displacement stop protruding portion A441e with the long concave portion A432. be able to.

  The inclined surface A441f is a plane for receiving and guiding the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the electrical decoration board A445. By forming it at an inclination, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the electrical wiring FC along with the displacement of the guided plate portion A441. In addition, the deformation | transformation aspect of the electric wiring FC comprised from a flat type (flat) cable is mentioned later.

  The guide groove A441g is a groove straddling the guide protrusion A424 of the support plate portion A420, and is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness of the guide protrusion A424. It has an overhanging part that projects in a circular shape. The distance between the tips of the overhang portions is slightly longer than the thickness of the guide protrusion A424. Thereby, the frictional force generated between the guide groove A441g and the guide protrusion A424 can be reduced while suppressing the extending direction of the guide groove A441g from deviating from the longitudinal direction of the guide protrusion A424.

  The recessed portion A441h is a relief portion that is recessed in order to avoid interference with a portion that is used for fastening by a fastening screw that is inserted into the insertion hole A431a on the right side of the guide plate portion A430. Thereby, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the right end part of the to-be-guided board part A441 can be arrange | positioned on the right side rather than insertion hole part A431a.

  The fastening portion A441i is inserted into the first guide hole A422a of the support plate portion A420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 324) and is connected to the displacement side long hole A453 of the slide link A450. That is, when the driving force is transmitted to the fastening portion A441i via the slide link A450, the first displacement member A440 including the guided plate portion A441 is displaced.

  Returning to FIG. 335 and FIG. The slide link A450 is a long link A451 that is rotatably supported by the shaft support A427 of the support plate A420, and a deformed slide member that is connected to the long link A451 and supported so as to be movable in parallel along the direction A416x. A455.

  The long link A451 is a member formed in the shape of a long bar, and a shaft support hole A452 drilled with a diameter that allows the shaft support portion A427 to be inserted, and a long side with reference to the shaft support hole A452. Displacement side long hole A453 formed in a long hole shape along the long direction at the end, and a long hole shape along the long direction at the end opposite to the side where the displacement side long hole A453 is disposed And a transmission side long hole A454 which is formed in the outer periphery.

  The odd-shaped slide member A455 is disposed in the recessed portion A421b of the main body plate portion A421 that is recessed in front of the base end surface on which the shaft support portion A427 of the support plate portion A420 protrudes, and the main body plate portion A421 and the long link A451. A plate-like main body plate portion A455a sandwiched between the main body plate portion A455a and a projecting projecting portion A455b projecting in a circular shape on the back side of the main body plate portion A455a and inserted into the transmission-side long hole A454 of the long link A451. A plurality of guided projecting portions A455c that project in a circular shape to the front side of the main body plate portion A455a and are inserted through the second guide holes A422b of the support plate portion A420, and the front end toward the front side of the main body plate portion A455a. A spring hooking portion A455d that protrudes in a hook shape and is inserted into the hole A423 of the support plate portion A420 and the end of the coil spring ASP1 is hooked (locked), and a detection sensor A42. Comprising of a plate to be detected portion A455e formed thin plate capable enters the detection gaps, and irregular the transmission unit A456 which the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear group A460, the.

  The transmission gear group A460 includes a pair of gears rotatably supported by the support box portion A470, and a pair of transmission gears A461 in which one gear meshes with the drive gear AMG1, and the pair of transmission gears A461. On the other hand, a gear A462 with a pin engaged with the opposite side of the drive gear AMG1 and an in-phase member A465 that follows the pin gear A462 in phase with each other are provided.

  The pin-equipped gear A462 has an arcuate shape centering on the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 with the transmission projection A463 projecting from the eccentric position to the front side in a circular shape and the transmission projection A463 as a base end. Arc wall part A464 formed as a wall part.

  The arc wall portion A464 has a central angle of about 230 degrees, and the length formed on the front side is shorter than that of the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, as will be described later, both the transmission protrusion A463 and the arc wall portion A464 are portions that transmit the load to the deformed portion A456 in the same manner, but their load occurrence points are different in the front-rear direction. That is, the load generation position via the transmission protrusion A463 (the intermediate point or the average point when a load is generated at a plurality of points) is more on the front side than the load generation position via the arc wall A464. It becomes. Since the displacement aspect of the first displacement member A440 can be described with the above-described configuration, the displacement aspect of the first displacement member A440 will be described below.

  339 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 339 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 339 (c) is a first operation on the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. It is a fragmentary sectional view of unit A400.

  In order to facilitate understanding, in FIG. 339 (a), the guide plate portion A430 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 339 (b), the transmission gear A461 and the electric wiring FC are not illustrated, and a pinned gear is provided. As for A462, only the transmission projection A463 and the arc wall A464 are shown, and in FIG. 339 (c), the front cover A410 is shown by an imaginary line. Also, in FIGS. 339 (a) and 339 (b), the illustration of the rear unit BU is omitted except for the case where it is specifically described. The same applies to FIGS. 340 to 345 below.

  339 (a) to 339 (c) illustrate a state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the retracted position before the excitation of the drive motor AMT1. In this state, the deformed slide member A455 is disposed on the outermost (left side), and the length of the coil spring ASP1 is the shortest. Therefore, the biasing force applied to the deformed slide member A455 from the coil spring ASP1 is shortened. Becomes the weakest.

  As shown in FIG. 339 (b), the deformed transmitted portion A456 is a portion that engages with the pin-equipped gear A462, and is rearward from the main body plate portion A455a on the protruding position (upper right) side of the transmission protrusion A463. The projecting plate portion A456a projecting in a plate shape to the side and the projecting plate portion A456a opposed to the projecting plate portion A456a with an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission projecting portion A463 on the retracted position (lower left) side And an insertion gap A456c formed between the protruding plate portion A456a and the opposing arrangement portion A456b.

  The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A456a is formed longer than the length of the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the same direction. In the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the protruding length is larger than the transmission protruding portion A463 and the arc wall portion A464. Can be contacted in the moving direction.

  The opposing placement portion A456b can be contacted (overlaps) in the movement direction with respect to the transmission protrusion A463a, while it is not contacted (overlaps) in the movement direction with respect to the arc wall portion A464. That is, the opposing placement portion A456b and the arc wall portion A464 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-rear gap.

  The insertion gap A456c is configured to receive the transmission projection A463, and an escape portion A456d formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission projection A463 is formed on the open end side. With this escape portion A456d, the forward and backward displacement of the transmission protrusion A463 with respect to the insertion gap A456c can be performed smoothly (with low resistance).

  In FIG. 339 (b), the transmission gear A461 is not shown. However, in the actual assembly state (see FIG. 324), the pair of transmission gears A461 having the same shape includes the drive gear AMG1 and the pinned gear A462. The driving force of the driving gear AMG1 is transmitted to the pinned gear A462.

  As shown in FIG. 339 (b), the first displacement member A440 guided by the first guide hole A422a and the deformed slide member A455 guided by the second guide hole A422b are connected by a long link A451. . In other words, the first displacement member A440 and the deformed slide member A455 are displaced in opposite directions parallel to the direction A416x by the long link A451 that is rotationally displaced about the shaft support portion A427.

  As shown in FIG. 339 (b), the detected plate portion A455e enters the detection gap of the detection sensor A426 in a state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 339 (c), in the first displacement member A440, a roller member A442f is disposed between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410, and this roller member. Since the arrangement of A442f is regulated between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410, the interlocking plate portion A442 is pivoted in accordance with the sliding displacement of the guided plate portion A441. It is configured to rotate around A442e. Action diagrams for explaining the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 in time series will be described.

  340 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 340 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 340 (c) is a first operation on the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. It is a fragmentary sectional view of unit A400.

  In FIG. 340 (a) to FIG. 340 (c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f is in the same position as viewed in the front-rear direction with respect to FIG. 339 (c). A state where A471b is in contact with the bent corner is illustrated.

  The pinned gear A462 is rotated from the initial angle d0 by the first angle d1 until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 340. With this rotation, the transmission projection A463 pushes the projection plate A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. The As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the opposed arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 340 (b)).

  In the present embodiment, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 at the initial angle d0 is configured to be parallel to the direction A416x, but is not limited thereto. .

  For example, a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 at the initial angle d0 is inclined by 10 degrees with respect to the direction A416x (only 10 degrees in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the pinned gear A462). It may be formed as a straight line. In this case, the section of 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be configured as a section that does not apply a load in the traveling direction to the projecting plate portion A456a, so that an excessive driving resistance occurs immediately after the start of rotation. It can be avoided.

  That is, a section corresponding to 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be used as a running section, and the projecting plate portion A456a can be pushed forward after rotating 10 degrees from the initial angle d0. Suppression can be achieved. Further, when driving in the direction returning to the initial angle d0, a section of 10 degrees can be used as a deceleration section.

  341 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 341 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 341 (c) is a first operation on the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. It is a fragmentary sectional view of unit A400.

  341 (a) to 341 (c) illustrate a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f is in contact with the intermediate portion of the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470.

  The pinned gear A462 is rotated from the initial angle d0 by the second angle d2 until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. With this rotation, the transmission projection A463 pushes the projection plate A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. The As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the opposed arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 341 (b)).

  FIG. 342 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 342 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 342 (c) is a first operation along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of unit A400.

  FIG. 342 (a) to FIG. 342 (c) show a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 is substantially perpendicular to the direction A416x.

  The pinned gear A462 is rotated from the initial angle d0 by the third angle d3 until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 342. With this rotation, the transmission projection A463 pushes the projection plate A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. The As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the opposed arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 342 (b)).

  In the present embodiment, in the state where the first displacement member A440 starts sliding movement along a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction (see FIG. 342), the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 and the displacement direction of the deformed slide member A455. Since the configuration is such that (the direction parallel to the direction A416x) is substantially orthogonal, the slide displacement in one direction (same plane) of the first displacement member A440 can be executed smoothly.

  That is, the direction of the load applied from the displacement side long hole A453 to the fastening portion A441i is set to one side (the lower side in the present embodiment) based on the displacement direction of the deformed slide member A455 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). It can be limited. Accordingly, the first displacement member A440 is compared with the case where the load applied to the first displacement member A440 is reversed in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 during the slide displacement of the first displacement member A440. It is possible to suppress rattling of the slide displacement.

  FIG. 343 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 343 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 343 (c) is a first operation along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of unit A400.

  In FIG. 343 (a) to FIG. 343 (c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f extends from the state of FIG. 342 (c) to the extended position of the first displacement member A440 (see FIG. 344 (c)). The state of being arranged at a substantially middle position of the displacement until reaching the state of () is shown.

  The pinned gear A462 is rotated from the initial angle d0 by the fourth angle d4 until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 343. With this rotation, the transmission projection A463 pushes the projection plate A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. The As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the opposed arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 343 (b)).

  FIG. 344 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 344 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 344 (c) is a first operation on the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of unit A400.

  FIG. 344 (a) to FIG. 344 (c) show a state where the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated and the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the overhang position (also referred to as an overhang state).

  The pin-equipped gear A462 rotates by the fifth angle d5 from the initial angle d0 until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. With this rotation, the transmission projection A463 pushes the projection plate A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. The As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the opposed arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 344 (b)).

  When the pinned gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 starts to be displaced in the opposite direction with respect to the direction A416x. Here, since the arc wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a are formed in a dimensional relationship that abuts in the direction A416x, the arc wall portion A464 is present even after the transmission projection A463 is separated from the projecting plate portion A456a. The displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted in a state in which is in contact with the projecting plate portion A456a.

  The contact point between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a is arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, since the load applied from the protruding plate portion A456a to the arc wall portion A464 passes through the rotation shaft of the pinned gear A462, the pinned gear A462 is rotated by the load from the protruding plate portion A456a. Can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the arc wall portion A464 is formed in a curved shape, the contact area between the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a can be suppressed (theoretically, the contact area can be set as line contact). Is 0). Therefore, when the pinned gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344, the frictional force generated between the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a can be reduced (theoretically, it should be set to zero). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the necessity of an extra driving force for restricting the displacement of the deformed slide member A455. That is, the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 can be restricted only by the driving force necessary to rotate the pinned gear A462.

  In addition, if the deformation due to wear of the resin material constituting the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a is taken into consideration, the contact area increases over time, and the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a It is thought that the frictional force generated in On the other hand, a countermeasure may be taken by applying a low friction seal to the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a or applying a lubricant (such as grease). In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be countered with a low friction seal or a lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of countermeasures can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 344 (b), the outer surface of the transmission protrusion A463 and the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 are formed in the same circular shape coaxial with the rotational axis of the pinned gear A462, It can be made difficult for the player to grasp the timing of transition from the contact state with the projection A463 to the contact state with the arc wall portion A464.

  FIG. 345 is a rear view of the front unit FU. FIG. 345 shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the extended position, and the transmission protrusion A463 is in contact with the deformed transmitted portion A456.

  The pin-equipped gear A462 is rotated from the initial angle d0 by the sixth angle d6 (360 degrees or more) until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 345 (see FIG. 360). After the state of FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 does not push the protruding plate A456a and displaces without contact with other members. Further, as shown in FIG. 345, the protruding plate portion A456a is restricted in displacement by contacting the arc wall portion A464 and maintained in the state of FIG. 344 (b) (displacement in the return direction is restricted). ). That is, the contact between the transmission protrusion A463 and the deformed transmission portion A456 occurs in a state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the overhang position.

  As shown in FIG. 345, the contact position between the transmission protrusion A463 and the deformed transmission part A456 is a position on the projecting position side of the first displacement member A440 with respect to the insertion gap A456c. That is, a portion where the load is applied to the deformed transmission portion A456 due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (insertion gap A456c) is different from a portion where the load is applied to the deformed transmission portion A456 in FIG. As a result, even if the pinned gear A462 unintentionally over-rotates and an overload occurs in the transmission protrusion A463 and the deformed transmission part A456, the shape of the insertion gap A456c is prevented from changing. Can do. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is affected after an overload occurs.

  In the state of FIG. 345, the direction of the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 to the deformed slide member A455 is the direction toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 (upper right direction). Since the deformed slide member A455 is disposed at the end of the moving range in this direction, the deformed slide member A455 is prevented from being displaced by the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463.

  In this way, while avoiding the displacement of the deformed slide member A455, the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 can be relieved by the elastic deformation (deflection or expansion / contraction) of the opposed arrangement portion A456b.

  As shown in FIG. 345, the location where the transmission projection A463 abuts is the side wall on the detected plate portion A455e side of the opposed arrangement portion A456b, and the transmission projection A463 applies a load to the detected plate portion A455e by the contact. ing. The present embodiment is configured such that the detected plate portion A455e is preferentially broken when an overload is generated in the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to excessive rotation of the pin-equipped gear A462. That is, the detected plate portion A455e is configured to be weaker than the transmission protrusion A463.

  As a result, it is possible to avoid the destruction of the structure related to the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 in the structure of the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to the load caused by the excessive rotation of the pin-equipped gear A462. Therefore, the durability of the deformed slide member A455 can be improved.

  When the detected plate portion A455e is folded, the detected plate portion A455e is not detected by the detection sensor A426 even when the first displacement member A440 returns to the retracted position. Therefore, based on the detection failure of the detected plate portion A455e. The possibility of over-rotation of the pin-equipped gear A462 can be assumed, and timely maintenance can be performed.

  In addition, the design aspect of detected plate part A455e is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, each time a series of displacement operations of the first displacement member A440, the transmission protrusion A463 contacts the deformed transmitted portion A456, and the drive motor AMT1 is controlled to be excited until a slight load is applied. It may be designed such that the detected plate portion A455e is folded by accumulation of a load having a contact frequency similar to the number of times of the durable operation of the location where the occurrence of the error is likely to occur (for example, the transmission protrusion A463). In this case, in addition to the possibility of occurrence of over-rotation of the pin-equipped gear A462, it is possible to notify the replacement timing of the transmission protrusion A463, so that timely maintenance can be performed.

  346 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A400 along the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339 (a), and FIG. 346 (b) is a first operation along the line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb in FIG. 344 (a). It is sectional drawing of unit A400. FIG. 346 (a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted position (also referred to as the retracted state), and FIG. 346 (b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is in the extended position (also in the extended state). Is shown).

  As shown in FIGS. 346 (a) and 346 (b), the electrical wiring FC formed as a flat cable is connected to the connector A445c of the first displacement member A440. The electrical wiring FC is loosely disposed in the space between the guided plate portion A441 and the rear lid portion 443.

  As shown in FIG. 346 (a), the inclined surface A441f of the guided plate portion A441 is formed so as not to contact the electrical wiring FC. That is, the upper edge of the inclined surface A441f is drawn to a position slightly deeper than the end of the inclined surface A433 of the guide plate portion A430 (the end facing the first displacement member A440) (the side away from the first displacement member A440). The gap between the inclined surface A441f and the electric wiring FC can be secured.

  The electrical wiring FC is retracted from the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490 in the extended state of the first displacement member A440, while being placed in the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490 in the retracted state of the first displacement member A440. The As a result, the space VE, which will be described later, can be used both as a space into which the electric wiring FC enters and a space into which the second displacement member A490 enters, so that the space necessary for arrangement can be reduced.

  The electrical wiring FC is arranged in a space VE formed on the back side of the first displacement member A440 in the retracted state of the first displacement member A440. Accordingly, the first displacement member A440 functions as a shielding unit that shields the field of view to the electric wiring FC, and it is possible to prevent the electric wiring FC from being visually recognized when viewed from the front, rear, left, and right. The space VE will be described.

  In the space VE, the first displacement member A440 is inclined so that the surface on the side to be visually recognized by the player (the surface on which the opening A442c on the interlocking plate portion A442 side is formed) is directed toward the third symbol display device 81 side. It is the space behind that is formed along with the construction. Thus, the space VE is configured in an inclined posture that is easy to show to the player in the retracted state in which the first displacement member A440 is formed in a plate shape and the first displacement member A440 is wide in the front-rear direction. Can be easily formed.

  On the other hand, this space VE is also a space into which a second displacement member A490, which will be described later, enters due to displacement. Therefore, it is preferable that the visibility in the front view can be widely maintained in consideration of the visibility of the second displacement member A490. Since the field of view in front view widens with an angle centering on the player's eyes, the outer space of the space VE is preferably formed so as to be inclined away from the third symbol display device 81 toward the back side. In the embodiment, for ease of manufacturing, the outline of the space VE (the boundary surface far from the third symbol display device 81) is formed as a non-inclined surface in the front-rear direction.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the space VE generated for improving the visibility of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is effectively used as a region where the wiring is loosened and arranged. Thereby, when the slack portion of the electric wiring FC is disposed on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 at the overhang position, the region necessary for loosening the wiring (in other words, The securing of the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310 and the region between the first displacement member A440) can be made unnecessary.

  Therefore, compared with the case where the slack portion of the electrical wiring FC is disposed on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 in the extended position, the electrical wiring FC is placed inward of the rear case A310. While being able to be accommodated, the displacement end of the first displacement member A440 can be brought close to (closed to) the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310.

  As shown in FIG. 346, in the first displacement member A440, the front surface of the interlocking plate portion A442 is disposed on the front limit line FL at the extended position (see FIG. 346 (b)), and the retracted position (FIG. 346 (a)). In the displacement process up to (see), at least a part (mainly the protruding position side portion) of the interlocking plate portion A442 protrudes to the front side from the front limit line FL. This overhang is completed in the process in which the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position, and the change in the posture of the first displacement member A440 is completed from the state where the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 339). 342 (c)), the first displacement member A440 can project to the front side beyond the front limit line FL, particularly on the retracted position side (left side of FIG. 346) of the first displacement member A440.

  Therefore, since it is necessary to form a space for avoiding a collision with the first displacement member A440 on the front side of the front limit line FL, the arrangement of the electric decoration board A416 is excessively separated from the first displacement member A440 (front side). However, in the present embodiment, the space for the first displacement member A440 to protrude by not forming the electrical decoration substrate A416 on the retracted position side (left side in FIG. 346) of the first displacement member A440. Is forming. In addition, by forming only the diffusion plate A415 on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440, an area where the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a disposed on the electrical decoration board A416 is visually recognized is provided. This avoids being limited to the formation range of A416.

  Thus, while limiting the formation range of the electrical decoration board | substrate A416, the diffusion plate A415 protrudes from the outer edge of the electrical decoration board | substrate A416, and the front-back space | interval of arrangement | positioning with the electrical decoration board | substrate A416 and 1st displacement member A440 is formed. While narrowing, it is possible to ensure a sufficient range for visually recognizing the light emission effect by the electric decoration board A416.

  With reference to FIG. 347 to FIG. 352, changes in the external appearance of the first operation unit A400 caused by the displacement of the first displacement member A440 will be described from the viewpoint of the light emission effect. This change in the appearance is a change that occurs because the first displacement member A440 is configured to be partially visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 in a state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the extended position (position after excitation). is there.

  347 (a), 347 (b) and 348 are front views of the first operation unit A400. In FIG. 347 (a), the retracted state of the first displacement member A440 is illustrated, and in FIG. 347 (b), the first displacement member A440 is disposed in the middle of the displacement section (position illustrated in FIG. 342). The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 348, the overhanging state of the first displacement member A440 is illustrated. In FIG. 347 (b) and FIG. 348, the shape of the portion hidden by the front cover A410 of the first displacement member A440 is shown by hidden lines.

  On the back side of the front cover A410, a diffusion plate A415 for diffusing light emitted from the light emitting means A416a provided on the illumination board A416 is provided. The diffusion plate A415 is provided in the first area AC1 described above. And the second area AC2 (see FIG. 330).

  The first displacing means 440 is disposed at least on the back side of the diffusion plate A415 at the extended position, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b (see FIG. 337) and having passed through the opening A442c travels toward the diffusion plate A415. Here, although the opening A442c of the first displacing means 440 is displaced to a position overlapping the first area AC1 when viewed from the front, since the electrical decoration board A416 is disposed in the first area AC1, the opening A442c has passed through the opening A442c. The light is shielded by the illumination board A416.

  Therefore, the light that has passed through the opening A442c can reach the diffusion plate A415 in the second region AC2. In other words, in the second region AC2, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) disposed on the electric decoration board A416 and diffused to the diffusion plate A415, and the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement means 440. (See FIG. 337) can be visually recognized in a mixed state with the light irradiated.

  If it demonstrates in detail, the aspect of 2nd area | region AC2 will light the light emission means A416a, the light emission means A445b will be light-extinguished, the light emission means A416a will be light-extinguished, and the light emission means A445b will be lighted, and the light emission means A416a and light emission means. It is configured to be switchable in at least four different modes: a mode in which both A445b are turned on and a mode in which both the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b are turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the aspect of the second area AC2 is visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410. The front cover A410 serves as the through hole A412 and the edge on the third symbol display device 81 side of the front cover A410. A plurality of long holes A412a formed at three locations on a straight line along the portion are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 348, among the plurality of long holes A412a, the central long hole A412a is disposed opposite to the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440, and the long holes A412a on both sides thereof are disposed outside the opening A442c. (Do not face each other.) Thereby, compared with the case where it visually recognizes through the long hole A412a of both sides, the direction of the case where it visually recognizes through the central long hole A412a can improve the visibility of the light irradiated from the light emission means A445b.

  For example, in a state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the overhang position, the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is visible through the central long hole A412a, but not visible through the long holes A412a on both sides. It can be constituted as follows. Thereby, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b is visually recognized through the central long hole A412a, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a is visually recognized through the long holes A412a on both sides. (The light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is difficult to visually recognize).

  Here, the mode (emission color, brightness, etc.) of the front cover A410 depends on the emission mode of the light emitting unit A416a (see FIG. 329) while the light emitting unit A445b of the first displacement member A440 is turned off. . Therefore, even in the state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 348), if the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the influence on the light emission effect by the light emitting means 416b can be reduced. That is, it is possible to displace the first displacement member A440 to the extended position without causing a change in the form of the front cover A410 when viewed from the front.

  On the other hand, when the light emitting means A445b is turned on in the state of being arranged at the overhanging position 440, the long hole A412a formed at a position close to the third symbol display device 81 side in common with each first operation unit A400. Since the light emission mode changes, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third symbol display device 81 side.

  In addition, the effect of the change of the aspect visually recognized through through-hole A412 is not limited to this. For example, in a state where the first displacement member A440 of the first operation unit A400 disposed in a set of five is disposed at the extended position, first, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 disposed at the lower left is turned on. Then, at the timing when the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent next to the first displacement member A440 is turned on and turned off at the next timing. The light emitting means A445b of the displacing member A440 may be lighted in such a manner that the light emitting means A445b is sequentially lighted in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front.

  In this case, by leaving the light emitting means 416b to be lit, the brightness of the front cover A410 itself is maintained, and only the aspect of the light that is visually recognized through the long hole A412a is sequentially changed clockwise. Can be executed.

  Here, the light emission mode of the other first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D will be described. The first operation unit A400A is the second unit clockwise from the lower left when viewed from the front, the first operation unit A400B is the third unit clockwise from the lower left when viewed from the front, and the first operation unit A400C is The first unit A400D is the fifth unit clockwise from the lower left of the front view. The main differences between the first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D from the first operation unit A400 are the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 and the shape of the opening A442c. Therefore, the openings corresponding to the openings A442c of the first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D are illustrated as the openings WA, WB, WC, and WD, respectively, and the other configurations are the same as those of the first operation unit A400 for convenience. The symbol is attached.

  349 (a) and 349 (b) are front views of the first operation unit A400A. 349 (a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at a midway position (the same position as the position shown in FIG. 342). In FIG. 349 (b), the first displacement member is shown. A state in which A440 is arranged at the overhang position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 349 (a) and 349 (b), unlike the first operation unit A400, the first operation unit A400A is configured such that the opening WA overlaps the long holes A412a at both ends in front view. Furthermore, since the width of the opening WA changes along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 (the retracted position side is longer), the opening WA and the both ends of the opening WA are closer to the extended position. The area overlapping with the long hole A412a can be increased. Thereby, arrangement | positioning of 1st displacement member A440 and the appearance of the light visually recognized through the long hole A412a can be changed interlockingly.

  350 (a) and 350 (b) are front views of the first operation unit A400B. 350A shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342). In FIG. 350B, the first displacement member A440 is shown. A state in which A440 is arranged at the overhang position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 350 (a) and 350 (b), the first operation unit A400B is different from the first operation unit A400 in that the opening WB may overlap the long holes A412a at both ends in front view. In addition, the width of the opening WB is configured to change so as to repeat enlargement and reduction along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. Thereby, the area where the central long hole A412a and the opening WB overlap while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position is maximized in the state shown in FIG. 350 (a). It can be configured to decrease once with the displacement of A440 and increase again in the state shown in FIG. 350 (b). Thereby, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, a change in the appearance of light visually recognized through the central slot A412a can be configured in two directions (enlargement direction and reduction direction).

  FIG. 351 (a) and FIG. 351 (b) are front views of the first operation unit A400C. FIG. 351 (a) shows a state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at a midway position (the same position as the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 351 (b) shows the first displacement member. A state in which A440 is arranged at the overhang position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 351 (a) and 351 (b), unlike the first operation unit A400, the first operation unit A400C is configured such that the opening WC may overlap the elongated holes A412a at both ends in front view. In addition, the width of the opening WC is configured to change so as to repeat enlargement and reduction along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. That is, the opening WC is widened in a tapered shape in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 near the upper end.

  As a result, the area where the left and right elongated holes A412a overlap with the opening WC while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position is once decreased and increased again with the displacement of the first displacement member A440. It can be constituted as follows. Thereby, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, a change in the appearance of light visually recognized through the long hole A412a at both ends can be configured in two directions (enlargement direction and reduction direction).

  FIGS. 352 (a) and 352 (b) are front views of the first operation unit A400D. FIG. 352 (a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at a midway position (the same position as that shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 352 (b) shows the first displacement member. A state in which A440 is arranged at the overhang position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 352 (a) and 352 (b), unlike the first operation unit A400, the first operation unit A400D has a shape in which the opening WD branches in front view. That is, the opening WD has a shape that branches in a manner that widens toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 near the lower end.

  Thereby, it is possible to divide a range where the central long hole A412a and the opening WD overlap while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, the mode of light that is visually recognized through the central slot A412a is divided into a plurality of ranges from the mode in which the entire center slot A412a emits light uniformly (see FIG. 352 (a)). And can be changed to a mode of emitting light (see FIG. 352 (b)).

  In the first operation unit A400D, the case where the central long hole A412a is divided by the edge of the opening WD has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, for the entire three long holes A412a, a range where light can be visually recognized may be divided. That is, when the three long holes A412a and the opening WD overlap and the uniform light can be visually recognized through the three long holes A412a, the opening WD has a central long hole A412a among the three long holes A412a. By overlapping only with the long hole A412a at both ends, the range in which the light can be visually recognized is divided into the central long hole A412a and is limited to the long hole A412a on both sides. Also good.

  Returning to FIG. 335 and FIG. The support box part A470 has a main body box part A471 formed in a box shape whose front and upper right sides are open, and a shaft hole through which the rotation shaft of the gear A462 with pin of the transmission gear group A460 is drilled. A472, a shaft support hole A473 that can be pivotally supported by the second displacement member A490, a notch A474 that is formed by cutting along a circular arc centered on the shaft support hole A473, and the notch A fastening portion A475 that protrudes in a columnar shape in the vicinity of the notch portion A474 and has a tip formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the through hole A482 of the rear plate portion A480 can be screwed in, and a slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510 A rack support portion A476 that slidably supports and a pinion A517 that meshes with a slide rack A511 supported by the rack support portion A476. It comprises a pinion supporting unit A477 for lifting.

  The main body box portion A471 is provided with a protruding wall portion A471a that protrudes in a wall shape from the back bottom edge portion to the back surface side, and a wall shape that protrudes in a wall shape from the front upper edge portion to the front side, and the first operation unit A400 is assembled. In the state (see FIG. 324), the guide wall portion A471b disposed to face the roller member A442f and the projecting wall portion A471a opposite to the shaft hole A472 (see FIG. 335) across the notch portion A474. Wiring guide part A471c.

  Although the detailed shape of the guide wall portion A471b will be described later, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is guided in such a manner that the roller member A442f abuts on the edge portion of the guide wall portion A471b and slides or rolls (FIG. 339). To FIG. 344).

  The wiring guide part A471c is designed so that the shape of the wiring HC, which will be described later, can be appropriately corrected, the details of which will be described later.

  The second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 of the rack and pinion A510 are connected through the shaft support hole A473 and the cutout portion A474. In particular, the notch A474 is formed to be wide as a region through which the wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 passes, details of which will be described later.

  The rack support portion A476 is a pair of columnar portions projecting to the back side of the main body box portion A471, and the support columnar portion A476a inserted through the support hole A512 of the rack pinion A510 and the slide rack A511 of the rack pinion A510. A stepped portion A476b extending in the slide movement direction (a direction parallel to the direction A416x) and formed in a stepped shape extending toward the back side from the surface on which the support columnar portion A476a is disposed. Prepare.

  The pinion support part A477 has a wall shape (plate) from the bottom part of the main body box part A471 to the back side along an arc centered on the pinion axis A477a on which the pinion A517 of the rack pinion A510 is rotatably supported and the pinion axis A477a. Arc wall part A477b extended in the shape.

  Through the shaft hole A472, the pinned gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 and the phase member A465 are coupled. Here, with reference to FIG. 353, the connection aspect of the gear A462 with a pin and the phase member A465 is demonstrated.

  FIG. 353 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the phase member A465, and FIG. 353 (b) is a front perspective view of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the phase member A465, and the right side. It is a back perspective view of gear A462 with a pin and phase member A465. In FIG. 353 (a), the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same phase member A465 are illustrated in a posture in which the side where they are connected to each other is in front.

  As shown in FIG. 353 (a), the pin-equipped gear A462 includes a plurality of phase matching circumferential protrusions A462a that protrude from the surface facing the phase member A465 toward the phase member A465. Prepare.

  The phase member A465 includes a phase matching diameter projection A465a projecting from the surface facing the pinned gear A462 toward the pinned gear A462, and an outer circular shape from the eccentric position to the back side. A projecting transmission protrusion A466 is provided, and an arcuate wall A467 formed as an arc-shaped wall centering on the rotation axis of the phase member A465 with the transmission protrusion A466 as a base end. Compared with the transmission protrusion A466, the arc wall A467 is formed shorter on the back side.

  The phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a and the phase matching diameter protrusion A465a will be described. The phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a is formed with a plurality of arc-shaped wall portions by cutting along the axial direction in a circular wall portion around the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462.

  The phase matching diameter protrusion A465a includes a protrusion protruding radially outward from a cylindrical protrusion having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the phase alignment peripheral protrusion A462a. It is formed so as to coincide with an angle (phase) at which a cut is made in the mating circumferential protrusion A462a. The gear A462 with the pin and the phase member A465 with the pin can be connected in a state where the phase of the phase member A465 with respect to the gear A462 with the pin is matched by allowing the ridge to enter the notch of the phase alignment circumferential protrusion A462a. The pinned gear A462 and the phase member A465 can be fixed by inserting the fastening gear along the central axis of the pinned gear A462 and screwing it into the tip end portion of the phase matching diameter projection A465a.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the angle between the cuts of the phase alignment circumferential protrusion A462a is not equalized (120-degree interval if divided into three as in the present embodiment), but unequal, The pin-equipped gear A462 and the phase member A465 are configured to be connected only in a specific angular relationship (see FIG. 353 (b)).

  That is, by combining the angles between the cuts of the phase alignment circumferential protrusion A462a at 100 degrees, 120 degrees, and 140 degrees (by making them non-uniform), an angle at which the pinned gear A462 and the same phase member A465 can be connected. The relationship can be limited to one type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the incisions (phase matching diameter protrusions A465a) of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a are formed at three positions has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be one or two, or may be a plurality of four or more, and can be appropriately selected in consideration of the rigidity in the assembled state of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same phase member A465.

  Returning to FIG. 335 and FIG. The rear plate portion A480 includes a main body plate portion A481 formed in a plate shape from a colorless light-transmitting resin material, and a fastening that is drilled in the main body plate portion A481 and screwed into a fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. A plurality of alignment protrusions A483 that protrude toward the outer peripheral side of the through hole A482 through which the screw is inserted and the arc wall part A477b of the support box part A470, and are used for alignment by contacting the outer peripheral side. And a plurality of projecting plate portions A484 projecting from the main body plate portion A481 to the front side so as to be in a plate shape along the outer shape of the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510.

  The outer edge (the left edge in FIGS. 335 and 336) of the rear plate part A480 is in contact with the rear side end of the protruding wall part A471a of the main body box part A471. Only the installation plate portion A484 functions.

  On the other hand, in the inner edge portion (the right edge portion in FIGS. 335 and 336) of the rear plate portion A480, a plurality of directions (up and down, left and right directions) are caused by the contact between the alignment projection A483 and the arc wall portion A477b. Can be aligned. As a result, it is possible to secure a wide space near the outer edge portion by excluding the alignment portion from the vicinity of the outer edge portion while favorably aligning the rear plate portion A480 with the support box portion A470. In the present embodiment, this secured space is used as an arrangement space for the wiring HC (see FIG. 356 (a)), details of which will be described later.

  The projecting plate portion A484 is disposed so that the projecting tip thereof is close to the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 (abuts or has a slight gap so that the wiring cannot pass) and is opposed to the rack pinion A510. It functions to divide the movement range of the slide rack A511 and the outer area. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 from entering the moving range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510. Details will be described later.

  FIG. 354 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member A490, and FIG. 355 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member A490. As shown in FIGS. 354 and 355, the second displacement member A490 includes a supported plate A491 formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material and supported by the shaft support hole A473 of the support box A470, A cover formed by an inner shape similar to the outer shape of the supported shaft A491, fitted to the supported shaft A491 in a manner covering the supported shaft A491 from the front side, and formed of a colorless light-transmitting resin material. A mounting member A492, and a light-emitting portion A493a composed of an LED or the like, and an illuminated board A493 accommodated in the pivot support plate A491 and the covering member A492.

  The supported shaft A491 protrudes in a circular shape on the back side and is inserted into the supported shaft hole A473, and has a shorter projecting length than the supported shaft projection A491a. A fastening protrusion A491b, a plurality of insertion holes A491c that are pierced so that a fastening screw can be inserted, and a long hole A491d that is formed in a long rectangular shape along the radial direction of the pivot support protrusion A491a. A plurality of circular support portions A491e projecting to the front side in a circle (arc) shape centering on the insertion hole A491c, and projecting to the front side in a narrow projecting shape along the side wall portion forming the outer periphery. And a plurality of narrow protrusions A491f.

  The circular support portion A491e and the narrow protrusion A491f are in contact with the outer peripheral edge portion of the electrical decoration board A493 in the assembled state of the second displacement member A490 (see FIGS. 335 and 336). Support from.

  In particular, the narrow projection A491f is formed at a location where the shape of the electrical decoration board A493 to be accommodated is constricted, that is, at a place where the outer peripheral side wall of the pivoted support plate A491 is recessed inward, so the electrical decoration board. A portion where the shape of A493 can be confined can be selectively supported. Thereby, suppression of the deformation | transformation of the electrical decoration board | substrate A493 in the constricted location where it is assumed that rigidity becomes easy to fall because a width dimension becomes short can be aimed at, and it can avoid that the electrical decoration board | substrate A493 fractures | ruptures. .

  The covering member A492 is inserted into the supported portion A493b of the electric decoration board A493, and a plurality of fastening portions A492a into which fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes A491c are screwed, and a radial direction on the base side of the fastening portion A492a On the side wall portion that forms the outer periphery at a position that forms a plurality of projecting support portions A492b projecting to the plate-like portion of the covering member A492 and the narrow projecting portion A491f of the pivot support plate A491. And a plurality of narrow projections A492c that project toward the back side in a narrow projection shape.

  With the above configuration, the outer periphery of the electric decoration board A493 is supported by the narrow protrusions A491f and A492c, and is supported by the circular support part A491e and the protrusion support part A492b around the fastening screw. Thereby, electrical decoration board | substrate A493 can be favorably fixed with respect to the to-be-supported support plate A491 and the covering member A492.

  In addition, the support aspect of electrical decoration board | substrate A493 is not limited at all. For example, the electric circuit board A493 may be fixed by being applied with a load along the fastening direction, or a dimensional relationship that does not cause a compressive load (for example, the distance between the front and rear of the thin protrusions A491f and A492c is the electric circuit board. It is also possible to maintain the arrangement of the electric decoration board A493 without causing a load by being formed with a dimensional relationship equivalent to the thickness of A493).

  The electrical decoration board A493 is provided on the back side with a plurality of light-emitting portions A493a, a plurality of supported portions A493b that are drilled or recessed so as to be non-interfering with the fastening portion A492a when viewed in the front-rear direction. And a board-side connector A493c to which an end portion (connector) of the wiring is connected.

  The board-side connector A493 is fixed in such a manner that the wiring extends along the long direction of the long hole A491d of the pivot support plate A491. The long hole A491d is long from the inner edge on the short side. A partition extending portion A491d1 extending in a direction intersecting the direction until the distance from the opposite inner edge portion becomes shorter than the width dimension of the board-side connector A493c (or a connected wire bundle), and the partition extending portion A491d1 As a reference, a ridge A491d2 is formed which is wide and protrudes from the opposite edge of the board-side connector A493c to the back side.

  A board-side connector A493c is arranged on the viewing area side (left side of FIG. 355) of the third symbol display device 81 with the partition extending portion A491d1 as a reference, and the wiring connected to the board-side connector A493c on the opposite side is long. Passes through hole A491d. That is, the wiring connected to the board-side connector A493c is sandwiched and supported between the partition extending portion A491d1 and the electrical decoration board A493.

  Thereby, even if the second displacement member A490 is displaced, the displacement of the wiring between the board-side connector A493c and the partition extending portion A491d1 can be suppressed, so that the board-side connector can be displaced when the second displacement member A490 is displaced. The possibility that the wiring is disconnected from A493c can be reduced.

  The protruding portion A491d2 is formed with a protruding length enough to enter the cutout portion A474 of the support box portion A470. As a result, the wiring HC whose end is connected to the board-side connector A493c can be routed so as to rise toward the back side of the pivoted support plate A491 (in the projecting direction of the ridge A491d2). Can be prevented from contacting the notch portion A474 as compared with the case where the wire HC is disposed close to the back surface of the pivot support plate A491 and routed to the back surface of the support box portion A470. Therefore, disconnection of the wiring can be avoided.

  In addition, since the protrusion A491d2 protrudes at a right angle with respect to the back surface of the pivoted support plate A491, the rising angle of the wiring HC can be brought to the right side, and contact with the wiring HC is avoided. Therefore, the width of the cutout portion A474 can be suppressed. Thereby, since the area | region (area) by the side of fastening part A475 of main body box part A471 can be ensured largely, while the rigidity of main body box part A471 can be ensured, the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of fastening part A475 is improved. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 335 and FIG. The rack and pinion A510 meshes with a slide rack A511 that is slidably supported along the direction A416x and a gear portion of the slide rack A511, and is pivotally supported by the pinion shaft A477a of the support box A470. The pinion A517 rotates in synchronization with the sliding movement of the pinion A517, and the reinforcing arm A518 meshes with the pinion A517 and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the pinion A517.

  The reinforcing arm portion A518 is connected and fixed to the second displacement member A490 described above, whereby the second displacement member A490 is supported by the support box portion A470 so that it cannot be pulled out. That is, the reinforcing arm portion A518 is fastened to the pivot support protrusion A491a of the second displacement member A490 at the rotation center position, and is fastened to the fastening protrusion A491b at the rotation tip side portion of the reinforcing arm portion A518 (see FIG. 355). . Therefore, rotational displacement of the reinforcing arm portion A518 is synonymous with rotational displacement of the second displacement member A490.

  The slide rack A511 is formed in a plate shape along a pair of support holes A512 formed in a long hole shape extending along the direction A416x with a size that allows the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470 to be inserted. A supported plate portion A513, a projecting plate portion A514 projecting in a plate shape toward the front side at a position away from the support hole A512 in the longitudinal direction of the support hole A512, and the same phase member A465 so as to face the same phase. And a deformed part A515 to which a driving force is transmitted from the member A465.

  In the support hole A512, the distal end small diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470 is inserted, and the large diameter portion on the base end side is formed with a diameter larger than the width of the support hole A512. By disposing the large diameter portion on the front side of the support hole A512, even if the slide rack A511 is likely to be displaced to the front side, the displacement can be prevented by the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a. . As described above, the slide rack A511 is arranged so that the plate-like portions are opposed to each other with a gap of at least the height of the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a between the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 and the interval between them. It is configured to be slidable along the direction A416x while being maintained.

  The supported plate portion A513 is disposed to face the rear side end portion of the stepped portion A476b of the support box portion A470 with a slight gap, and the protruding plate portion A514 is slightly spaced from the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471. Are arranged opposite each other. That is, even if the slide rack A511 is likely to be displaced to the front side, the supported plate portion A513 and the protruding plate portion A514 can prevent the displacement.

  In addition, various things are illustrated as a cause which slide rack A511 displaces to the front-back direction. For example, a case where a player gives an impact to the pachinko machine A10 (so-called “sticking”), a case where a minute particle is clogged in a gap, and the tooth resistance becomes excessive and an excessive load is generated at the tooth position, etc. The

  FIG. 356 (a), FIG. 356 (b), FIG. 357 (a), FIG. 357 (b), and FIG. 358 are rear views of the rear unit BU. In FIG. 356 (a), FIG. 356 (b), FIG. 357 (a), FIG. 357 (b), and FIG. 358, the rear plate portion A480 is not shown and the deformed cover is omitted for easy understanding. A state in which the plate portion of the slide rack A511 is broken so that the transmission portion A515 can be visually recognized is illustrated. In FIG. 358, the phase member A465 and the deformed part A515 are shown in an enlarged manner for easy understanding.

  356 (a), 356 (b), 357 (a), 357 (b), and 358, the second displacement member A490 is extended from the retracted position (see FIG. 356 (a)) (see FIG. 356). 358) is shown in time series.

  The second displacement member A490 is fixed to the reinforcing arm portion A518. When the phase member A465 rotates, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the slide rack A511 along with the rotation. When the slide rack A511 is pushed forward, the driving force is transmitted to the reinforcing arm portion A518 via the pinion A517. Thus, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is caused by the rotation of the same phase member A465.

  The phase member A465 rotates in the same phase as the pinned gear A462 as described above. Therefore, in synchronization with the rotation of the in-phase member A465 described with reference to FIGS. 356 (a), 356 (b), 357 (a), 357 (b), and 358, the above-described FIGS. The rotation of the pin-equipped gear A462 will occur, and these relationships will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 356 (b), the deformed transmitted portion A515 is a portion that engages with the same phase member A465, and the transmission projection A466 can enter and move independently (loading the slide rack A511). A non-transmission concave portion A515a that is recessed to be movable without being provided), a connection concave portion A515b that is a concave portion of the same depth connected to an end of the non-transmission concave portion A515a, and narrower than the connection concave portion A515b. The insertion clearance A515c, which is a recess having the same depth, connected to the opposite side of the non-transmission recess A515a with respect to the connection recess A515b, and the front from the slide rack A511 on the retracted position (lower left) side of the transmission protrusion A466. Projecting plate A515d that projects in a plate shape to the side and forms the left side surface of the insertion gap A515c, and the protruding position (upper right) of the projecting plate A515d They arranged to face the protruding plate A515d with an interval of at least the diameter of the transmission projection A466 you are, and a facing portion A515e constituting the right surface of the insertion gap A515c.

  The projecting length of the projecting plate portion A515d is formed longer than the length of the opposing arrangement portion A515e in the same direction. In the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the projecting plate portion A515d is longer than the transmission projecting portion A466 and the arc wall portion A467. Can be contacted in the moving direction.

  The opposing placement portion A515e can be contacted (overlaps) in the movement direction with respect to the transmission protrusion A466, while it is not contacted (overlaps) in the movement direction with respect to the arc wall portion A467. That is, the opposing placement portion A515e and the arc wall portion A467 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-rear gap.

  The side surfaces of the projecting plate portion A515d and the opposing placement portion A515e are configured as planes orthogonal to the moving direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) of the slide rack A511.

  The connecting recess A515b has a function similar to that of the escape portion A456d of the deformed transmitted portion A456. That is, the connecting recess A515b is configured to receive the transmission protrusion A466, and the side connected to the non-transmission recess A515a is formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A466. Thereby, the forward / backward displacement of the transmission protrusion A466 with respect to the insertion gap A515c can be performed smoothly (with low resistance).

  Although not shown in FIG. 356 (a), FIG. 356 (b), FIG. 357 (a), FIG. 357 (b), and FIG. 358, the same phase member A465 is similar to the pin-equipped gear A462. The driving force of the AMT1 is transmitted by the driving gear AMG1 and the pair of transmission gears A461 to rotate (see FIG. 335). Hereinafter, a displacement mode in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and the drive gear AMG1 rotates and the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position toward the extended position will be described in time series.

  In FIG. 356 (a), before the drive gear AMG1 is rotated, the slide rack A511 is arranged at the end of the moving range at the retracted position side, and accordingly, the second displacement member A490 is disposed at the retracted position. The resulting state is illustrated.

  In this state, the transmission protrusion A466 is not in contact with the deformed transmission part A515 in the movement direction (direction A416x), while the arc wall part A467 is in contact with the protruding plate part A515d. At A467a, it comes into contact with the projecting plate portion A515d from the upper right (the projecting position side) along the moving direction (direction A416x). Thereby, since the displacement of the projecting plate portion A515d can be regulated by the arc wall portion A467, the slide rack A511 is unintentionally displaced by an external force applied when the drive motor AMT1 is not excited (not driven). Can be prevented.

  The contact point between the arc wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d is arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the phase member A465 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, since the load applied from the protruding plate portion A515d to the arc wall portion A467 passes through the rotation shaft of the same phase member A465, the same phase member A465 is rotated by the load from the protruding plate portion A515d. Can be prevented.

  Further, since the arc wall portion A467 is formed in a curved shape, the contact area between the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d can be suppressed (theoretically, the contact area can be set as line contact). Is 0). Therefore, when the same phase member A465 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 356 (a), the frictional force generated between the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d can be reduced (theoretically, it is reduced to 0). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the necessity of an extra driving force for restricting the displacement of the slide rack A511. That is, the displacement of the slide rack A511 can be regulated only by the driving force necessary to rotate the phase member A465.

  In addition, if the deformation due to wear of the resin material constituting the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d is taken into consideration, the contact area increases over time, and the gap between the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d is increased. It is thought that the frictional force generated in On the other hand, a countermeasure may be taken by attaching a low friction seal to the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d or applying a lubricant (such as grease). In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be countered with a low friction seal or a lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of countermeasures can be suppressed.

  Examples of the external force include gravity, a load generated by vibration during an earthquake, and a force generated when a player strikes or swings the pachinko machine A10.

  FIG. 356 (b) shows a state where the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 starts to enter the connection recess A515b. The in-phase member A465 is rotated from the initial angle d10 by the first angle d11 until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 356 (a) to the state of FIG. 356 (b), but the transmission protrusion A466 is still deformed. Part A515 is not in contact with the moving direction (direction A416x).

  On the other hand, the arc wall portion A467 is still in contact with the protruding plate portion A515d at the contact portion A467a from the upper right (the protruding position side) along the movement direction (direction A416x). As shown in FIGS. 356 (a) and 356 (b), since the contact portion A467a is formed on the outer surface of the arc wall portion A467, the contact portion A467a moves in the direction of movement of the slide rack A511 (direction A416x). Does not displace. Therefore, also in the state of FIG. 356 (b), as in the state shown in FIG. 356 (a), the arrangement of the slide rack A511 is maintained at the end of the moving range on the retracted position side.

  As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A467 and the opposed arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A515e in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 356 (b)).

  FIG. 357 (a) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 starts to enter the insertion gap A515c. The phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the second angle d12 until the state changes from the state of FIG. 356 (a) to the state of FIG. 357 (a), and the transmission protrusion A466 contacts the protruding plate part A515d. Touch.

  In FIG. 357 (a), the straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission projection A466 and the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x) are parallel. That is, the transmission protrusion A466 has a portion farthest from the rotation center of the same phase member A465 and abuts the protruding plate A515d. Therefore, when the same phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. The restriction by the phase member A465 is released, and the slide rack A511 can be displaced to the protruding position side (upper right side).

  As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A467 and the opposed arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A515e in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 357 (a)).

  FIG. 357 (b) shows a state where the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 enters the insertion gap A515c. Until the state of FIG. 356 (a) is displaced to the state of FIG. 357 (b), the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the third angle d13. With this rotation, the transmission projection A466 pushes the opposing placement portion A515e, so that the slide rack A511 slides and the slide displacement is transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via the pinion A517.

  In FIG. 357 (b), the straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission projection A466 is orthogonal to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the second angle d12 from the third angle d13 is 90 degrees.

  As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A467 and the opposed arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A515e in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 357 (b)).

  In FIG. 358, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the transmission projection A466 pushes the opposing placement portion A515e, the slide rack A511 is placed at the end of the movement position, and the second displacement member A490 is stretched. The state of being placed in the extended position is illustrated.

  The phase member A465 rotates by the fourth angle d14 from the initial angle d10 (rotates one or more times) until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 356 (a) to the state of FIG. 358. With this rotation, the transmission projection A466 pushes the opposing placement portion A515e, so that the slide rack A511 slides and the slide displacement is transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via the pinion A517.

  In FIG. 358, the straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission projection A466 and the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x) are parallel. That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the third angle d13 from the fourth angle d14 is 90 degrees.

  As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A467 and the opposed arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A515e in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 358).

  In FIG. 358, the transmission protrusion A466 has a portion farthest from the rotation center of the phase member A465 in contact with the opposing arrangement portion A515e. Therefore, when the phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. A511 may be displaced to the retracted position side (lower left side). In the present embodiment, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 358, in a state in which the slide rack A511 is disposed at the end portion on the side of the extension position of the movement range, it is allowed from the arrangement of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358). Up to the angle dd1, the same phase member A465 is configured to be allowed to rotate.

  That is, since the transmission protrusion A466 and the protruding plate A515d are in contact with each other only after the in-phase member A465 is rotated by the allowable angle dd1, the transmission protrusion A466 and the protrusion are protruded until the rotation of the allowable angle dd1. Since the mounting plate portion A515d is not in contact with the load and no load is transmitted, the arrangement of the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end of the movement range on the extended position side.

  Accordingly, in the series of displacement modes illustrated in FIGS. 356 to 358, in the control for stopping the rotation of the in-phase member A465 at the fourth angle d14, the actual in-phase member A465 is rotated beyond the fourth angle d14. Even if the rotation angle exceeds the permissible angle dd1, the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end of the movement range on the extended position side, and the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the extended position. it can.

  In other words, even if the accuracy of the stop position of the in-phase member A465 is not strict (even if there is an error of the allowable angle dd1 or less), the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the extended position. With a simple configuration, it is possible to increase the rotational speed of the in-phase member A465 and to achieve a highly accurate displacement of the second displacement member A490 (the second displacement without suddenly decelerating and stopping the in-phase member A465). The member A490 can be rapidly decelerated and stopped at the extended position).

  In addition, when the rotation angle exceeding the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14 is deliberately generated, the excess is driven toward the retracted position by the second displacement member A490 (when the driving direction is reversed). It can be used as a run-up section.

  Further, when the transmission protrusion A466 of the same phase member A465 is arranged at the position of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358), the transmission protrusion A466 and the opposing arrangement part A515e are moved in the direction of movement of the slide rack A511 (direction A416x). By abutting in the parallel direction), it is possible to prevent the slide rack A511 from returning to the retracted position side (bound displacement).

  Thereby, since the rotation of the pinion A517 can be regulated in the state of FIG. 358 (return rotation can be prevented), it is fastened and fixed to the reinforcing arm portion A518 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 engaged with the pinion A517. The second displacement member A490 can be prevented from rotating back from the overhang position (see FIG. 358).

  FIG. 359 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit BU along the CCCLIX-CCCLIX line in FIG. 356 (a). In FIG. 359, in order to facilitate understanding, the alignment protrusion A483 of the rear plate portion A480 is not shown, and the shape of the main body plate portion A481 is mainly illustrated.

  Hereinafter, the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 will be described with reference to FIG. In the description of the wiring HC, FIGS. 356 to 358 are referred to as appropriate. The wiring HC is an electrical wiring composed of a plurality of cables having a round cross section connected to the board side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490, and is a space surrounded by the support box part A470 and the rear plate part A480. It is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 359, the portion of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c passes between the partition extension part A491d1 and the electrical decoration board A493, and extends along the protruding part A491d2 to the support box part A470. And a space surrounded by the rear plate portion A480.

  As described above, since the protruding portion A491d2 is formed with a protruding length enough to enter the cutout portion A474 of the support box portion A470, the wiring HC is guided so as to be separated from the cutout portion A474. Contact with the notch A474 is avoided. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the wiring HC from rubbing against the notch A474.

  On the other hand, when the wiring HC is guided to the protrusion A491d2, the wiring HC is guided so as to be close to the rear plate portion A480. Without measures, the wiring HC may rub against the rear plate portion A480 and may be disconnected in a short period of time. However, in this embodiment, the intermediate portion HCa of the wiring HC is appropriately inserted between the rear plate portion A480 and the friction with the rear plate portion A480 is suppressed. This will be described in detail below.

  In the present embodiment, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. More specifically, the wiring HC extending from the third connector A416e3 of the electric decoration board A416 (see FIG. 330) is wound around a winding portion A471a1 formed so that the binding band KB can be wound around an intermediate position of the protruding wall portion A471a. The side of the second displacement member A490 connected to the board side connector A493c is wound around the fastening portion A475 once around the binding position KB, and the tip thereof is connected to the board side connector A493c. .

  Even when the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 and relaxed (see FIG. 356 (a)), the wiring HC is away from the fastening portion A475 (the direction in which the wiring HC bound by the binding band KB extends). The amount of displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced without forming a large gap above the fastening portion A475.

  In the present embodiment, the place where the wiring HC is wound is the fastening portion A475, which is advantageous in terms of ease of assembly. That is, in the assembly process of fastening and fixing the rear plate portion A480 to the support box portion A470, after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion A475 through the rear plate portion A480. In this case, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from dropping from the fastening portion A475 before the fastening and fixing are completed by the fastening screw in the middle of screwing.

  In addition, at the time of fastening and fixing, the back side of the support box part A470 (the side where the fastening part A475 protrudes) faces upward, and the wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475, and then the rear plate part A480 is mounted on the support box part A470. Since the assembly can be performed while preventing the wiring HC from drooping in the direction of gravity in the main body box portion A471, the assembly can be completed easily. . That is, as compared with the case where the fastening portion A475 is designed to be forced to be assembled in a downward posture, the assembly of the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480 is facilitated by winding the wiring HC around the fastening portion A475. Can be.

  Since the winding part A471a1 is formed on the projecting end side of the projecting wall part A471a, the wiring HC temporarily secured by the binding band KB is guided (adjusted) to the rear plate part A480 side. Thereby, when the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the wiring HC comes closest to the rear plate portion A480 in the upper part of the fastening portion A475 that is closest to the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 359).

  Then, the wiring HC is extended toward the board-side connector A493c while leaving a margin in the length of the wiring HC so that a tensile load is not applied to the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, and the wirings HC intersect each other. In the position, the end portion of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c is wound in such a manner that the end portion of the wiring HC is slid between the already disposed wiring HC and the support box portion A470.

  Thus, it is possible to configure a state in which the intermediate portion HCa abuts from the rear plate portion A480 side of the wiring HC on the board side connector A493c side (see FIG. 356 (a)), and the wiring HC is connected to the rear plate by the protrusion A491d2. The degree of proximity to the part A480 side can be suppressed.

  A displacement mode of the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced will be described. The position of the wiring HC is not fixed between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 by the support box part A470 and the rear plate part A480. Therefore, the displacement (deflection) corresponding to the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is generated using the entire length of the wiring HC between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490. Since the load (fatigue) associated with can be made uniform, it can be avoided that a large load is locally generated in the wiring HC.

  The board-side connector A493c is in a retracted position as compared to the pivot support protrusion 491a that functions as the rotation shaft of the second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 formed on the protruding position side of the second displacement member A490. Arranged on the side. In other words, when the second displacement member A490 is disposed at the retracted position, the substrate side of the support plate portion 420 that shields the line of sight toward the second displacement member A490 (see FIG. 346 (a), right side) Connector A493 is provided.

  Thereby, possibility that the wiring HC will protrude outside the outer shape of the support plate part A420 and the support box part A470 can be reduced. That is, by arranging the pivot support protrusion A491a and the reinforcing arm A518 close to the protruding position side (the third symbol display device 81 side), the wiring amount is secured while ensuring a large protruding amount of the second displacement member A490. It is possible to avoid the HC being visually recognized by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 356 (a), the board-side connector A493c is configured to be able to receive the end of the wiring HC along the radial direction of the circle centered on the pivoted protrusion A491a. Then, the board-side connector A493c is arranged on one side with respect to a straight line connecting the center of the pivoted protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475 (lower right side, see FIG. 356 (a)). The case of being arranged on the other side (see the upper left side, see FIG. 358) is switched by the displacement of the second displacement member A490.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a difference in the displacement mode of the portion of the wiring HC on the side connected to the board-side connector A493c in the forward path and the return path of the second displacement member A490. Thereby, since the fluctuation | variation of the load applied to the wiring HC can be suppressed, the disconnection of the wiring HC can be prevented.

  Further, the displacement mode of the portion of the wiring HC on the side connected to the board-side connector A493c can be easily shifted to the straight side connecting the center of the pivoted protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475. The amount can be reduced, and the absolute value of the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced. This will be described in detail below.

  FIG. 357 (b) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced from the retracted position to the extended position and is rotated about 45 degrees. In this state, the direction in which the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c extends is substantially parallel to a straight line connecting the center of the pivoted protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

  In other words, in this embodiment, fastening part A475 is arrange | positioned on the bisector of the rotation angle of 2nd displacement member A490 which passes along the center of to-be-supported protrusion part A491. In other words, the fastening portion A475 as a position where the wiring HC is loosely wound is set at an intermediate position of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490, so that the deformation amount (deflection amount) of the wiring HC can be minimized. .

  In comparison with the retracted state (see FIG. 357 (a)), the local displacement of the wiring HC will be described. The portion that is in contact with the upper portion of the fastening portion A475 and the portion that is disposed below the fastening portion A475. It has risen slightly. Further, the intermediate portion HCa is disposed at a position where it does not interfere with the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c in the front-rear direction.

  That is, when the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357 (b) to the overhanging position side, the wiring HC on the board side connector A493c side is between the intermediate portion HCa and the rear plate portion A480. While the effect of entering is not obtained, the second displacement member A490 can be displaced at high speed without rubbing the wirings HC.

  Here, as the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state of FIG. 357 (b) to the overhanging position shown in FIG. 358, the wiring HC on the side connected to the board side connector A493c is in a posture along the left-right direction. Become. Therefore, as a load applied to the wiring HC, a load for maintaining the posture along the left-right direction is generated, which is compared with the case where the second displacement member A490 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 357 (a)). Thus, the influence of the load applied by the protrusion A491d2 on the arrangement of the wiring HC is reduced.

  Therefore, even if the intermediate portion HCa does not enter between the rear plate portion A480, an excessive frictional force is prevented from being generated between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480. That is, in this embodiment, the intermediate portion HCa is provided between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c only when there is a possibility that an excessive frictional force is generated between the rear plate portion A480 and the rear plate portion A480. An action of separating the wiring HC from the rear plate portion A480 is generated.

  On the other hand, when the possibility of excessive frictional force is low, as shown in FIG. 357 (b), by eliminating the overlap between the intermediate portion HCa and the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c, It is possible to prevent excessive resistance from being generated in the displacement of the second displacement member A490, and it is possible to achieve high-speed displacement of the second displacement member A490.

  In the extended state of the second displacement member A490 (see FIG. 358), the local displacement of the wiring HC will be described in comparison with the state shown in FIG. 357 (b), and the second displacement member A490 is disposed above the fastening portion A475. The part is slightly lowered, and the part disposed below the fastening part A475 is slightly raised. That is, the displacement of the wiring HC is a displacement in a mode of approaching to the straight line connecting the center of the pivoted protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

  As shown in FIG. 358, in a state where the second displacement member A490 is disposed at the extended position (that is, a state where the second displacement member A490 is rotated 90 degrees from the retracted position), the wiring HC comes into contact with the wiring guide portion A471c, thereby arranging the second displacement member A490. Is corrected. The wiring guide part A471c is designed for the purpose of reducing the load applied to the wiring HC in the corrected arrangement.

  Specifically, in the extended state of the second displacement member A490, an arc that passes through the board-side connector A493c and contacts the lower end of the wiring guide portion A471c is a fastening portion A475 that is a passage way of the wiring HC, and a protruding wall portion A471a. Configured to pass between. Thereby, it is possible to avoid an excessive load being applied to the wiring HC, and it is possible to improve the durability of the wiring HC.

  FIG. 360 is a schematic diagram showing the rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the same phase member A465 with reference to the initial angles d0 and d10. In the description of FIG. 360, the angles d0 to d6, d10 to d14, and dd1 indicate the rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the same phase member A465 unless otherwise described.

  As described above, the first displacement member A440 continues to be displaced from the initial angle d0 to the fifth angle d5 and stops after the fifth angle d5, while the second displacement member A490 has the initial angle. While it stops from d10 to the second angle d12, it continues to be displaced from the second angle d12 to the fourth angle d14.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 360, a gap of 10 degrees is formed between the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotational angle range of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the phase member A465 that generate the driving force for displacing the first displacement member A440 and the driving force for displacing the second displacement member A490 are used. An angle range in which no driving force is generated is inserted between the rotation angle range of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the phase member A465 for generation. Thereby, 1st displacement member A440 and 2nd displacement member A490 can be driven stably.

  In addition, the setting mode of the angle range is not limited to this. For example, the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12 may be configured with the same angle. In this case, the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced from the stopped state at the same time as the first displacement member A440 is switched from the state in which the displacement is continued to the stopped state. Therefore, since it is comprised so that the timing which simultaneously displaces the 1st displacement member A440 and the 2nd displacement member A490 with the drive force of drive motor AMT1 may not arise, several member (1st displacement member) with single drive motor AMT1. While adopting a configuration for driving A440 and second displacement member A490), the load received by drive motor AMT1 can be reduced (it can be kept at a load applied from a single member).

  For example, the second angle d12 may be arranged between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5. In this case, the section in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are configured to simultaneously generate the driving force of both the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is formed. It can be limited to between the second angle d12 and the fifth angle d5.

  According to the present embodiment, the member that causes the displacement at the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12 is switched. Therefore, the pin-equipped gear A462 is used in an angle range on one side with respect to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12. And the same phase member A465 is reversed and rotated, so that one member (first displacement member A440 or second displacement member A490) is stopped and the other member (second displacement member A490 or first displacement member). A440) can be reversed.

  As described above, it is configured so that it is not necessary to add a large driving force in order to stop one member (first displacement member A440 or second displacement member A490). That is, at the contact position for restricting the displacement of one member, the members are contacted (rubbed) with each other by line contact, so that theoretically no frictional force is generated. Thereby, since the driving force required for the drive motor AMT1 can be suppressed, a small drive device can be selected as the drive motor AMT1.

  Further, by driving to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, stopping, and rotating the drive motor AMT1 in reverse, only the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is generated, and the second displacement member A490 is maintained in the retracted state. The drive mode of performing is also possible.

  As shown in FIG. 360, the sixth angle d6 is set as an angle that does not exceed the angle obtained by adding the allowable angle dd1 to the fourth angle d14. Therefore, the rotation of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same phase member A465 is mechanically restricted when the sixth angle d6 rotates before the fourth angle d14 rotates by the allowable angle dd1 (see FIG. 345). . Accordingly, since the rotation does not exceed the allowable angle dd1, the second displacement member A490 is low even when the in-phase member A465 has a low accuracy of stopping at the fourth angle d14 and is easily overrotated (control mode). Can be maintained in the overhang position (see FIG. 358).

  The numerical value of the sixth angle d6 is not limited to this. For example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle that slightly exceeds the angle obtained by adding the allowable angle dd1 to the fourth angle d14 (for example, it may be set as an angle that exceeds the fourth angle d14 by about 20 degrees). good). In this case, the pinned gear A462 and the phase member A465 are allowed to rotate beyond the fourth angle d14 by the allowable angle dd1, but continue to rotate beyond the allowable angle dd1 to the sixth angle d6. When it reaches, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 can be stopped immediately due to mechanical restriction.

  As a result, the second displacement means A490 does not reach the overhang position by performing stop control with an allowable amount (that is, an angle (allowable amount) slightly exceeding the fourth angle d14) with respect to the stop timing shift of the drive motor AMT1. Avoiding the second displacement means A490 can be stopped at the extended position), and when the deviation of the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 is unintentionally large, the second displacement member A490 is accidentally damaged. Can be prevented.

  As described above, the arc wall portion A464 is formed with a central angle of about 230 degrees, so even when the rotation angle reaches the sixth angle, the position that restricts the first displacement member A440 (the position of the fifth angle d5). Since the arc wall portion A464 is disposed up to the position where the first displacement member A440 comes into contact with the first displacement member A440, the displacement restriction at the projecting position of the first displacement member A440 can be maintained.

  Note that the state in which the arc wall portion A467 of the phase member A465 contacts the protruding plate portion A515d corresponds to the state in which the detection plate portion A455e is detected by the detection sensor A426 and is controlled to stop. There is little probability that the shift of the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 is unintentionally large in the vicinity of the angular state in which the wall portion A467 is in contact with the protruding plate portion A515d. For this reason, the arc wall portion A467 has an angle smaller than the arc wall portion A464 (this embodiment) as a minimum angle range required to maintain the second displacement member A490 in the retracted position from the initial angle d10 to the second angle d12. Then, it is formed at about 210 degrees. Thereby, the material cost required for circular arc wall part A467 can be suppressed.

  Next, the second operation unit A700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 381. FIG. 361 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700 and the back case A310. As shown in FIG. 361, the second motion unit A700 is formed with a left-right width that exceeds the left-right width of the display visual area of the third symbol display device 81, and is below the display visual area of the third symbol display device 81. Placed in.

  FIG. 362 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700, and FIG. 363 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700. As shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the second operation unit A700 includes a lift unit A701 that includes a lift unit A702 that is held by a rectangular plate member that is elongated in the left-right direction and that can be moved up and down, and a lift unit. It includes an effect unit A710 configured to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position by an elevating operation of A702, and configured to be operable (effect possible) in a plurality of modes.

  The elevating unit A701 supports a left and right elongate elevating part A702 on the left and right, a pair of arm members A703 that are rotatably supported around the left and right end parts, and an arm member A703 via a drive mechanism (not shown). And a pair of drive motors A704 that transmit the driving force to the motor.

  As a mechanism for transmitting a driving force from the drive motor A704 to the arm member A703, for example, a gear tooth is formed at the end of the arm member A703 on the rotating shaft side, and the gear tooth is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704. A gear transmission mechanism in which the gears mesh with each other is exemplified.

  In addition, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a rotating body is provided which protrudes in the axial direction at a position where the pin inserted through the long hole is eccentric and has gear teeth formed on the outer periphery. A gear link transmission mechanism in which the gear teeth of the body and the gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 mesh with each other may be used.

  Further, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a pin formed at the end of the auxiliary arm member (not shown) fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 is inserted into the long hole. A link transmission mechanism that transmits a driving force from the auxiliary arm member to the arm member A703 may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the drive motor A704 is left and right in correspondence with the shape of the back side of the game board A13 arranged opposite to the front side of the second operation unit A700 (see FIG. 306). It is asymmetric. That is, by inserting the drive motor A704 into the gap (space) of the back side configuration of the game board A13, the front-rear width necessary for the arrangement of the game board A13 and the second operation unit A700 is suppressed.

  As described above, since there is a circumstance that it is desired to set the arrangement of the drive motor A704 in accordance with the shape of the game board A13, in the present embodiment, a gear link transmission mechanism or a gear transmission mechanism is employed rather than a link transmission mechanism. Is preferred.

  FIG. 364 is a front exploded perspective view of the rendering unit A710, and FIG. 365 is a rear exploded perspective view of the rendering unit A710. In FIGS. 364 and 365, an annular front cover A711 that defines the rendering range of the rendering unit A710, a skirt-shaped upper cover A712 that is disposed below the annular front cover A711 and fastened and fixed to an upper lid portion A740, which will be described later, A state in which the skirt-shaped lower cover A713 arranged on the back side below the upper cover A712 and being fastened and fixed to the lifting part of the lifting unit A701 is disassembled and separated to the front side is illustrated.

  In FIG. 364 and FIG. 365, an annular rear cover A714 that is formed in an annular shape that is substantially equivalent to the annular front cover A711 in the front-rear direction and forms an annular internal space IE between the annular front cover A711 is fixed to the upper lid portion A740. A rotating body A720 that is rotatably disposed at the center of the circle of the annular rear cover A714 is illustrated.

  The rotating body A720 is configured such that a member having a size that fits in a front view in a circle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the annular front cover A711 is rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and is fixed to the annular rear cover A714. It is possible to receive light emitted from light emitting means A715a such as LEDs disposed on the plurality of electrical decoration boards A715. Three light emitting means A715a are arranged at equal intervals in the side direction on one side of the pentagon formed by the electric decoration board A715.

  In the present embodiment, the illumination board A715 is composed of three LEDs arranged at equal intervals in one side of the pentagon, similarly to the light emitting means A715a, and directs the optical axis to the front side. Pre-light emitting means A715b is provided. The front light emitting means A715b causes the annular front cover A711 to emit light by irradiating the back side of the annular front cover A711 with light. That is, the player can visually recognize the light-emitting effect through the light-transmitting portion partially formed on the annular front cover A711.

  In the present embodiment, each of the five flat plate-shaped electric decoration boards A715 constitutes one side of the pentagon, the electric decoration board A715 above the rotating body A720 is in a horizontal posture, and the electric decoration boards below the left and right The light emitting means A715a is arranged in such a manner that the lower end portion of A715 faces the rotation axis side and the optical axis is directed in the normal direction of the inward surface of each electric decoration board A715. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a is emitted toward the center of the pentagon so as to intersect near the center of the pentagon.

  Therefore, when the rotator A720 rotates, the rotation outer portion of the rotator A720 can be configured to cross the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. Thereby, since the traveling direction of the light when the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a is reflected by the rotating body A 720 can be changed with the rotation of the rotating body A 720, a gorgeous effect can be executed. .

  In the present embodiment, plating (gold plating, silver plating, or the like) is applied to the outer surface of the rotating body A720 in order to make the light easily reflected by the rotating body A720. The aspect of the outer surface is not limited to plating and can be various other aspects. For example, a tape with a color that easily reflects may be attached.

  As described above, since the rotator A720 rotates about the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, the light traveling on the rotation axis is on the rotation axis of the rotator A720 regardless of whether the rotator A720 is rotated. The same spot is irradiated. In the present embodiment, the light passing recess A722a is formed at that location, so that the upper part of the rotating body A720 is opened and light passes therethrough. Details will be described later.

  The annular front cover A 711 and the annular rear cover A 714 are provided to surround the concave portions A 711 a and A 714 a that constitute the window portion through which the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a passes and the rotation shaft of the rotating body A 720. Semicircular recessed portions A711b and A714b that are recessed in a semicircular cross section are provided.

  The inner peripheral surface of the ring excluding the window portion constituted by the recessed portions A711a and A714a and the other outer surface are plated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a and reflected by the rotating body A 720 can be reflected by being further applied to the annular front cover A711 or the annular rear cover A 714, so that a plurality of lights emitted from the same light emitting means A 715a can be reflected. The player can visually recognize the light traveling (reflecting) from the point. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of the light emitting means A 715a provided while performing a gorgeous effect.

  In this respect, it is possible to secure a wider area for reflecting other light (area where plating is performed) by forming the window necessary for transmitting the light from the light emitting means A 715a as small as possible. It is advantageous because it can be done. In the present embodiment, the shape of the window portion constituted by the recessed portions A711a and A714a is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the LED constituting the light emitting means A715a, and the brightness of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is increased. A wide area for reflecting light can be secured without loss.

  FIG. 366 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotator A720 of the effect unit A710, and FIG. 367 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotator A720 of the effect unit A710. In FIGS. 366 and 367, the illustration of the annular front cover A711, the upper cover A712, and the lower cover A713 of the rendering unit A710 is omitted.

  Rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members, and is a set of members that are respectively supported by a plurality of support portions A730 that support the plurality of rotating members, and have a pair of substantially hemispherical outer shapes. A first rotating member A721 and a second rotating member formed of a pair of members formed from a colored (blue in this embodiment) light-transmitting resin material in a shape that allows the outer side of the first rotating body 721 to rotate. A728.

  The first rotating member A721 has a pair of shell parts A722 that are divided into front and rear parts and are formed from a resin material having low light transmittance and having a substantially hemispherical shell-like skeleton, and are fastened and fixed to the support part A730 at the lower side. And an annular gear member A723 that is rotatably supported by an annular concave portion formed on the back side of the front shell portion A722, and gear teeth are engraved on the back side; The gear teeth A724a arranged on the back side of the annular gear member A723, rotatably supported in a manner sandwiched between the pair of shell portions A722, and engraved on the shaft portion are gear teeth and teeth of the annular gear member A723. And a central rotating member A724 to be joined.

  The pair of shell portions A722 includes a light passage recess A722a that is recessed in a direction away from each other at the upper portion thereof. At least in the shell A722 on the front side, the light passage recess A722a is formed on both the upper and lower sides of the annular gear member A723, and most of the annular gear member A723 enters the front side of the recessed end of the light passage recess A722a. Are arranged in such a manner.

  That is, even if the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a is viewed from the top, most of the annular gear member A723 is not visually recognized in the direction view, and therefore the central rotating member A724 disposed inside the annular gear member A723. Can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the light traveling in the vertical direction passes through the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a, the annular gear member A723 can be prevented from blocking the light, and the light is transmitted to the central rotating member A724. Can be reached. Here, with reference to FIG. 368, the outline | summary of the operation | movement aspect of 1st rotation member A721 is demonstrated.

  FIG. 368 is a rear view of the first rotating member A721. In FIG. 368, in order to make the inside visible, illustration of the shell A722 on the back side is omitted, and for convenience of explanation, a fixed gear SG that is non-rotatably disposed above the support A730 is an annular gear. The member A723 is shown in mesh with the member A723.

  An outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the first rotating member A721 is configured to rotate around a rotating shaft (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) extending in the vertical direction. When this rotation occurs, the relative position between the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG disposed inside the first rotating member A721 changes, and accordingly, the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG are relative to each other. Displaces (the meshing relationship changes).

  In the present embodiment, the fixed gear SG is fixed to the tip of the shaft rod portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750 so as not to rotate, so that the relative displacement with the fixed gear SG is ensured by the rotation of the annular gear member A723. . When the annular gear member A723 rotates, the central rotating member A724 engaged with the annular gear member A723 rotates with the rotation. Since the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 extends in a direction (perpendicular direction) intersecting with an axis extending in the vertical direction (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) as the rotation axis of the first rotation member A721, As the shell A722 of the one-rotation member A721 rotates (lateral rotation of the vertical axis), the central rotation member A724 rotates in a different manner (vertical rotation of the horizontal axis). The relationship between the rotation directions will be described later.

  The rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 continues to change in the same plane as the shell A722 rotates (synchronized with the rotation angle). Can appear to rotate. Accordingly, by causing the shell A 722 to rotate in one direction, the central rotating member A 724 can be rotated in a plurality of directions.

  In the present embodiment, the number of teeth of the gear teeth A 724a and the number of teeth of the fixed gear SG are the same number (both are 10 teeth), so the absolute value of the rotation angle of the shell A722 and the central rotation member A 724 The absolute value of the rotation angle is synchronized. As a result, during rotation of the shell A722, each time the shell A722 is in a posture in which the ring shape is visible in front view as shown in FIG. As shown by 368, the disk portion is directed to the front side (returns). Therefore, the reproducibility of the rotation effect can be maintained.

  Returning to FIG. 366 and FIG. The second rotating member A728 is composed of a pair of substantially symmetrical shapes that are fastened and fixed to the support portion A730 below the first rotating member A721, and the first rotating member A721 from the lower side of the first rotating member A721. A rod-shaped extending portion A728a formed in a rod shape extending upward in such a manner that the first rotating member A721 is reached from the upper side through the outside of the first rotating member A721.

  The rod-like extending portion A728a is formed to be narrower than the outer shape of the first rotating member A721, and when the part of the first rotating member A721 is hidden due to the difference in arrangement, the rod-shaped extending portion A728a is formed outside the first rotating member A721. The case where it can be seen (the case where it hardly overlaps with the first rotating member A721) can be configured, and details will be described later.

  The outer shapes of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are configured to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the annular rear cover A714, and the vertical gap is shortened. As a result, the annular rear cover A714 functions as a retainer for the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, and the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are moved in a state where the annular rear cover A714 is disposed. Inadvertent disassembly of pulling upward (disassembling) can be prevented.

  As described above, the rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members (first rotating member A721 and second rotating member A728) fastened and fixed to the support portion A730, and these rotate with the rotation of the support portion A730. To do. Next, the support portion A730 will be described.

  FIG. 369 (a) is a front exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 369 (b) is a front exploded perspective view of the second support portion A735. FIG. 370 (a) is a rear exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 370 (b) is a rear exploded perspective view of the second support portion A735.

  As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370, the support portion A730 includes a first support portion A731 whose body is formed in a cylindrical shape from a colored (white in the present embodiment) and light-impermeable resin material, and is colorless and light. A second support portion A735 is formed from a permeable resin material in a cylindrical shape whose inner diameter is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the main body of the first support portion A731, and is configured as a set of divided bodies that are divided into two in the radial direction. A shaft rod portion A751 fixed to a box-shaped portion A750, which will be described later, is inserted inside the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735, and a deformed shaft is formed at the tip side portion of the shaft rod portion A751. Is supported by a metal ring-shaped C-ring C1 and a fixed gear SG that cannot be removed.

  The first support portion A731 has a cylindrical main body portion having a through hole A731a that has an inner diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the shaft rod portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750 and can be inserted into the shaft rod portion A751. A plurality of support plate portions A732 extending in a plate shape in both directions on a straight line from the upper end portion of the portion and formed with through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted, and projecting downward from two positions at the lower end of the main body portion And a pair of projecting portions A733.

  The projecting portion A733 is disposed at a position corresponding to a notch portion A772a of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 described later, and is a portion that enables transmission of force in the rotational direction by fitting, and is formed with a width different from each other. The Thereby, compared with the case where the width of the pair of projecting portions A733 is the same, it is easier to perform the angle matching between the cylindrical extension portion A772 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 and the first support portion A731 at the time of fitting. can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 369 (b) and 370 (b), the second support portion A735 includes a half cylinder portion A736 constituting a cylindrical portion and a plate extending in both directions on a straight line from the upper end portion of the half cylinder portion A736. And a plurality of semi-supporting plate portions A737 formed with through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

  The semi-cylindrical part A736 is provided with a recessed fitting part A736a that is recessed in a rectangular shape upward from the lower end at the center position of the arc at the lower end side part, and a rectangular shape protruding radially outward from the end of the arc. And a protruding fitting portion A736b.

  The concave fitting portion A736a is a concave portion that fits into an inner protrusion A762d (see FIG. 373) of an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 described later, and the protruding fitting portion A736b is formed in a notch A762c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. It is a protrusion to be fitted.

  At the fitting position of the recessed fitting portion A736a, the wall portion around the recessed fitting portion A736a is disposed opposite to the inner wall of the cylindrical protruding portion A762b, and the inner wall is radially outward of the semi-cylindrical portion A736a. When the protrusion fitting part A736b is fitted to the notch part A762c, the divided body constituting the second support part A735 can be supported indivisiblely.

  Further, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b are fitted in such a manner that the cutout portion A762c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the shaft rod portion A751 are in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of rotation. Accordingly, the rotation of the large-diameter gear LG12 also functions as a transmission unit for transmitting the rotation to the second support unit A735. Therefore, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b can function both for preventing the division of the second support portion A736 and for transmitting the rotation to the second support portion A736.

  A groove portion A735a that is recessed along the circumferential direction is formed on the inner surface of the semi-cylindrical portion where the semi-support plate portion A737 is formed. The contact area between the inner surface of the second support portion A735 and the outer surface of the first support portion A731 can be reduced by the groove portion A735a, and the generated frictional force can be reduced.

  In particular, in the place arrange | positioned between half-support plate part A737, there exists a possibility that the load at the time of fastening fixation of 2nd rotation member A728 may arise, and an internal diameter may be tightened compared with the dimension at the time of design. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the groove portion A735a is formed at a position between the semi-support plate portions A737, contact is made at a place where sliding friction is likely to occur between the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731. The area can be reduced. Thereby, the frictional force generated between the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731 can be effectively reduced while minimizing the decrease in rigidity due to the formation of the groove portion A735a.

  The semi-supporting plate portion A737 includes a pair of assembling projections A737a projecting to the opposite side of the counterpart member along the direction in which the second support portion A735 is divided, and a pair of positions projecting from one divided body. Fastening of the alignment protrusion A737b, the insertion hole A737c formed in the other divided body as a through-hole having a size through which the alignment protrusion A737b can be inserted, and the second rotating member A728 formed in the thickness direction A portion A728b (see FIG. 367) is provided with a pair of fastening holes A737d formed in a size that allows insertion.

  The semi-support plate portions A737 are aligned with each other by inserting the alignment protrusion A737b through the insertion hole A737c, and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) assembled from the outside in the division direction is fastened to the fastening portion A728b. Are coupled with each other by screwing and fixing. That is, since the fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the second rotating member A728 can also be used for fastening and fixing the semi-support plate portion A737, the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

  The assembly protrusion A737a is inserted into a recess formed at a corresponding position of the second rotating member A728 and used for positioning, and the protrusion interval is a pair of divided bodies constituting the second support part A735. Different from each other. In other words, the interval between the assembling projections A737a arranged on the divided body arranged on the front side is wider than the interval between the assembling projections A737a arranged on the divided body arranged on the back side.

  By forming the assembly protrusions A737a at different intervals, each of the pair of members constituting the second rotation member A728 can be assembled from the correct direction of the second support portion A735. That is, only when assembled from the correct direction, the assembly protrusion A737a and the second rotation member A728 can be appropriately fitted. When the direction is incorrect, the assembly protrusion A737a Since the position of the two-rotating member A728 with the concave portion is not aligned and cannot be assembled, an error in the assembling direction can be noticed.

  In addition, the second rotating member A728 is largely different in the presence or absence of the fastening portion A728b, and other configurations are substantially the same. Therefore, it is intended to assemble with a pair of members at the time of handling, There is a risk that an error in assembling two members of one set will occur. According to the present embodiment, since the formation interval of the assembly protrusion A737a is different (since it is not a common mode), both of the members of the second rotation member A728 assembled to the second support portion A735 are one member (combination of combinations). An error to be assembled as a member on one side can be noticed before the fastening screw is inserted.

  Since the second support portion A735 is restricted from being separated in the radial direction by the cylindrical protrusion A762b of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 before disassembly (see FIG. 366), the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 are assembled. The projection A733 is notched A772a, the concave fitting A736a is the inner projection A762d (see FIG. 373), and the projection is fitted by the parallel movement in the axial direction. The mating part A736b is fitted into the notch part A762c. Here, the second support portion A735 is first assembled from the shape, and the first support portion A731 is assembled in that state.

  Here, because of the shape relationship with the mating member to be assembled, the posture when the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 are assembled together is not an arbitrary posture and is limited to a specific posture. Therefore, when assembling the first support portion A731, there is a possibility that the second support portion A735 may block the field of view and make it difficult to assemble the first support portion A731.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second support portion A735 is formed from a light transmissive resin material, and the first support portion A731 is formed from a light non-transmissive resin material. After the assembly, the inside of the second support portion A735 can be visually recognized. In addition, the cylindrical extension part A772 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 for assembling the first support part A731 is extended and disposed above the upper cover part A740, so that the protruding part A733 of the first support part A731 is fitted. The position to be hidden is not hidden by the upper lid part A740, and can be configured to be easily visible.

  Therefore, when the first support portion A731 is assembled, it can be easily adjusted to a suitable posture, so that the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 can be easily assembled.

  Here, a through hole A741 that surrounds the central axis of the support portion A730 is formed in the upper lid portion A740 that arranges (accommodates) an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and a lower layer transmission mechanism A770, which will be described later, between the box-shaped portion A750. Therefore, in order to disassemble the upper lid portion A740 and to modify the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, the upper lid is removed to remove the shaft rod portion A751 fixed to the box-shaped portion A750 from the through hole A741. It is necessary to displace the part A740 upward with respect to the box-shaped part A750.

  At this time, if the support portion A730 is still assembled, the support plate portion A732 and the semi-support plate portion A737 interfere with each other and the upper lid portion A740 cannot be displaced upward. Therefore, it is necessary to disassemble the support portion A730 before disassembling the upper lid portion A740. As described above, in order to disassemble the support portion A730, it is necessary to disassemble the C ring C1 and the fixed gear SG, and the fixed gear SG is disposed inside the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 368). ), It is necessary to disassemble the rotating body A720 in order to disassemble the fixed gear SG.

  As described above, in order to access the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, it is necessary to disassemble a plurality of members in order, so that the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are illegally accessed. It is possible to make it easy to prevent fraudulent acts that cause malfunctions by tampering with the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

  371 and 372 are front exploded perspective views of the upper lid part A740 and the box-like part A750. In FIG. 371, a directional view looking down from above is illustrated, and in FIG. 372, a directional view looking up from obliquely below (direction view inclined 22.5 degrees with respect to the vertical direction) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, the upper lid portion A740 includes a through hole A741 that is vertically drilled at the center of the left and right, and supports the transmission members of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 on the lower surface facing the box-shaped portion A750. A shape (shape such as irregularities) is formed.

  The box-shaped portion A750 is formed in a box shape disposed below the upper lid portion A740 and opened at least on the upper surface side, and an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and a lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are disposed at the opened position. A metal rod (in this embodiment, brass) shaft rod portion A751 fixed to the bottom plate portion A750a of the upper lid portion A740 and extending coaxially with the central axis of the through hole A741 of the upper lid portion A740, and the upper surface side of the box-shaped portion A750 The first detection sensor A752 composed of a detection device configured by a photocoupler system disposed on the second side, and the second detection sensor composed of a detection device configured by a photocoupler system disposed on the lower surface side of the box-shaped portion A750. A753, a drive motor AMT2 whose main body projects to the bottom surface side and is fastened and fixed, a drive gear AMG2 that is rotated by excitation of the drive motor AMT2, and a bottom plate A75 And a connecting plate A754 that a wiring connected to arranged sensors A752, A753 and the drive motor AMT2 like downward is relayed.

  373 and 374 are exploded front perspective views of the box-shaped portion A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770. FIGS. 373 and 374 show the state in which the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is separated from the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 in the up and down direction, FIG. It is illustrated in a direction view looking up.

  The upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are both configured by meshing four gears, and each gear is limited to two types (sizes) of gears. That is, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a drive gear AMG2, a small small-diameter gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2, a small-diameter gear PG2 of the same shape meshed with the small-diameter gear PG1, and the small-diameter gear PG2. And a large-diameter gear LG1 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2.

  The upper layer transmission mechanism A760 includes a large-diameter gear LG11 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2, a large-diameter gear LG12 having the same shape meshed with the large-diameter gear LG11, and a small-diameter meshed with the large-diameter gear LG12. A small-diameter gear PG11 having the same shape as the gear PG1 and a large-diameter gear LG13 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2 meshed with the small-diameter gear PG11.

  Detection pieces A763 and A773 detected by the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 are respectively formed on the large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1 arranged on the most downstream side with the drive gear AMG2 side as the upstream.

  In the process of transmitting the driving force of each of the transmission mechanisms A760 and A770, the small-diameter gear is interposed, but since the large-diameter gear is disposed again on the downstream side, both the large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1 rotate. The absolute value of the rotation angle in the case of the drive gear AMG2 is equal to the absolute value of the rotation angle of the drive gear AMG2.

  In this embodiment, detected pieces A763 extending radially outward from the umbrella portion covering the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG13 from above are formed at two equal intervals on the circumference (180 degree intervals). The detected pieces A773 extending in the axial direction from the umbrella portion that covers the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG1 from below are formed at four locations (90-degree intervals) at equal intervals on the circumference. From the state in which the detected pieces A763 and A773 are detected by both the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 (see FIG. 372), the drive gear AMG2 rotates 180 degrees, so that the first detection sensor again. It will return to the state by which the to-be-detected piece A763 and A773 are detected by both A752 and 2nd detection sensor A753. Thus, in the present embodiment, the detection timings of the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 can be related.

  On the other hand, the reason why the plurality of detection sensors of the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 are provided is because the timing at which only one of the detection sensors functions is generated, but details will be described later. .

  In the detailed description of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, since the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is supported by the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 at a plurality of locations, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 will be described first for ease of understanding. . The lower layer transmission mechanism A770 is a transmission mechanism that is disposed in the lower layer of the box-shaped portion A750 and is configured by the four gears AMG2, PG1, PG2, and LG1 meshed with each other as described above.

  On the upper surface side of the drive gear AMG2 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, a plurality of fitting recesses A771 are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and a protrusion A771a that protrudes radially inwardly in one recess A771 is formed. Is done. Thereby, it forms so that the internal shape of one recessed part A771 may differ from the internal shape of the other recessed part A771.

  The small-diameter gear PG2 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a cylindrical extension A772 that extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the upper surface so as to surround the shaft rod A751. A pair of cutout portions A772a that are cut out in a rectangular shape at a symmetrical position with the shaft rod portion A751 in between are formed at the upper end portion of the cylindrical extension portion A772. This notch A772a is a part that fits with the protruding portion A733 of the support portion, and is formed as a notch having a different width corresponding to the formation mode of the protruding portion A733.

  The large-diameter gear LG1 is disposed below the intermediate plate portion A750b formed in an upper layer than the bottom plate portion A750a of the box-shaped portion A750, and upward extraction is restricted by the intermediate plate portion A750b. That is, in order to extract the large-diameter gear LG1, it is necessary to remove the second detection sensor A753 that interferes when viewed in the vertical direction. Therefore, the number of steps required to extract the large-diameter gear LG1 can be increased. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid that the large diameter gear LG1 is inadvertently extracted.

  Further, since the intermediate plate portion A750b divides the region, it is possible to easily avoid contact between the large-diameter gear LG1 and the constituent members of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the transmission of the driving force between the large-diameter gear LG1 and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 (on the downstream side of the driving force transmission path).

  Next, details of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 will be described. The upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is a transmission mechanism that is disposed on the upper layer of the box-shaped portion A750 and is configured by the four gears LG11, LG12, PG11, LG13 that are engaged with each other as described above.

  The large-diameter gear LG11 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 transmits a driving force only when it rotates in one direction (clockwise as viewed from above) by a one-way clutch housed therein, and in the opposite direction (counterclockwise as viewed from above). When rotating, it is configured to idle, and includes a plurality of protrusions A761 protruding downward from the lower surface of the one-way clutch.

  The protrusion A761 is a curved wall-shaped protrusion that fits into the recess A771 of the drive gear AMG2, and the corresponding part A761a corresponding to the protrusion A771a has entered the radially inner side (radially outward). A linear shape with suppressed overhang). As a result, it is possible to configure so that the protrusion A771a of the drive gear AMG2 and the corresponding portion A761a of the large-diameter gear LG11 can be assembled only.

  The large-diameter gear LG12 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is provided with a through hole A762a having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrically extending portion A772 of the small-diameter gear PG2 at the center, and protrudes into a large-diameter cylindrical shape from the upper surface side. A cylindrical protrusion A762b provided, and a pair of notches A762c formed in a rectangular cutout at opposite positions across the central axis of the shaft rod A751 at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protrusion A762b, A pair of inner projections projecting along a straight line passing through the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751 and orthogonal to the straight line passing through the center axis of the shaft rod portion A751 with respect to a straight line passing through the cutout portion A762c and the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751. Part A762d.

  The cylindrical protrusion A762b is a part that receives the lower end of the second support part A735 (see FIG. 366) and restricts the displacement of the second support part A735 in the dividing direction. The notch part A762c and the inner protrusion A762d. Are portions that are configured to be fitted to the projecting fitting portion A736b and the recessed fitting portion A736a of the second support portion A735, respectively, so that the driving force can be transmitted.

  The large-diameter gear LG13 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is formed over the pair of detected pieces A763 and the axial direction with the formation of the umbrella portion omitted from the detected pieces A763 in the same direction and at the same angular deviation. And a cylindrical functional portion A765 that is disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG13 so as to be coaxially rotatable and is configured to be relatively rotatable with the large-diameter gear LG13.

  The columnar functional portion A765 includes a pair of rotation restricting protrusions A765a that are disposed at symmetrical positions across the rotation axis and are supported by a support groove A750c formed in a groove shape on the upper surface of the box-shaped portion A750. Here, a functional device that functions as a so-called torque limiter (safety clutch) with respect to the large-diameter gear LG13 is accommodated in the cylindrical functional portion A765.

  That is, when the load generated between the large-diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional portion A765 is smaller (small) than the reference, torque transmission is maintained, and the large-diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional portion A765 When the load generated between them is excessive, the transmission of torque is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 idles to shut off the drive force transmission to the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. A torque limiter is used to generate resistance for ensuring the prevention of rotation of the motor. Therefore, from this point of view, it functions in the same manner as a resistance member that always generates resistance or a member that generates viscous resistance such as a damper gear.

  On the other hand, when the driving gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from above and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the driving force is transmitted through the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. Thus, the transmission of torque is interrupted, and the resistance from the large-diameter gear LG13 side can be reduced, so that the load applied to the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed and the heat generation of the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed.

  Here, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from above and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the torque limiter is in a state of transmitting torque at the start of rotation. After the rotation is continued to some extent (after a certain degree of rotation), the state is switched to the state where the torque transmission is released. Therefore, a large load is generated between the small diameter gear PG11 and the large diameter gear LG13 before the switching occurs.

  In the present embodiment, an elongated gear tooth A764 is formed as a portion that receives this large load. That is, the posture of the large-diameter gear LG13 when the drive gear AMG2 starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from above is limited to the posture in which the detected piece A763 enters the gap of the first detection sensor A752 (see FIG. 373). By controlling in this way, the gear teeth that mesh with the small-diameter gear PG11 when the drive gear AMG2 starts rotating clockwise when viewed from above can be limited to specific gear teeth.

  By forming the specific gear teeth as long gear teeth A764 in the axial direction, it is possible to reduce the load generated per unit length in the axial direction. Thereby, durability of the large diameter gear LG13 can be improved.

  The first detection sensor A752 can detect a plurality of targets by detecting the detected piece A763 of the large diameter gear LG13. First, when the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 rotates to transmit the driving force and then stops, it can be detected that the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 has stopped in an appropriate posture (angle).

  Second, when the one-way clutch disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 is idled to release the driving force transmission to the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 (when the driving gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from above) ), It can be detected that the release of the driving force transmission functions well. That is, for example, when the driving force transmission is not sufficiently interrupted (idle) due to damage to the internal structure of the one-way clutch, or when the torque generation function of the torque limiter is insufficient due to a malfunction. When the driving force transmitted to the diameter gear LG13 exceeds the resistance of the torque limiter, the large diameter gear LG13 rotates.

  When the drive gear AMG2 is controlled to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from above, the first detection sensor A752 is notified by an error signal when the first detection sensor A752 detects that the detected piece A763 is displaced. Can be used to find problems occurring in one-way clutches and torque limiters.

  Note that the mechanism for supplementing the cancellation of the driving force transmission using the one-way clutch with the function of the torque limiter as described above is effective when the transmitted driving force is directed horizontally as in this embodiment. is there. That is, in the present embodiment, the driving force is transmitted by a plurality of transmission members that rotate about a rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction, but in this configuration, gravity cannot be used.

  When the transmitted driving force has a component in the gravitational direction, it is possible to use a structure that suppresses the movement in the direction in which the driving force transmission is released using the weight of the member to which the driving force is transmitted. In the embodiment, the self-weight cannot be used, and there is a possibility that the driving force may be transmitted even by a weak load generated in the idle direction in the releasing direction of the one-way clutch.

  In addition, as a structure that suppresses displacement due to idling, it is conceivable to generate friction with other members. However, in this case, it is necessary to drive the member by generating a driving force that is greater than friction, so another problem occurs. May occur. From this point of view, the present embodiment employs a torque limiter so that release of driving force transmission accompanying switching of the driving direction can be reliably generated.

  FIG. 375 (a) is a top view of the upper lid portion A740, the box-shaped portion A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and FIG. 375 (b) shows the upper lid portion A740, the box-shaped portion A750, and the upper layer transmission mechanism. It is a front view of A760 and lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

  With reference to FIGS. 375 (a) and 375 (b), transmission of the driving force of the driving motor AMT2 will be described. When the drive gear AMG2 is rotated by the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, the protrusion A761 (see FIG. 374) fitted to the recess A771 (see FIG. 373) of the drive gear AMG2 is also rotated.

  When the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, as described above, the one-way clutch housed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates idle, and the ridge A761 and the large-diameter gear LG11 rotate relative to each other. Thus, even when the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large-diameter gear LG11 maintains the state as it is.

  In other words, the driving force is transmitted only in the lower transmission path DL1 transmitted through the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and the driving force transmission in the upper transmission path UL1 transmitted through the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is blocked. Accordingly, only the cylindrical extending portion A772 rotates out of the cylindrical extending portion A772 and the cylindrical protruding portion A762b fitted to the support portion A730 (see FIG. 369), and the cylindrical protruding portion A762b remains as it is. maintain.

  Thereby, in the assembly state of the rendering unit A710 (see FIG. 362), the first support portion A731 (see FIG. 369) fitted into the cylindrical extension portion A772 out of the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735. ) Rotate and the second support portion A735 is maintained as it is, so that the first rotation member A721 (fastened to the first support portion A731 among the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728) ( Only the second rotating member A728 is maintained as it is.

  On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is clockwise when viewed from above, as described above, the drive force is sufficiently transmitted by the one-way clutch housed in the large-diameter gear LG11, and the protrusion A761 and the large-diameter The gear LG11 rotates synchronously (integrally). That is, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates in the same manner.

  That is, the driving force is transmitted not only in the lower transmission path DL1 but also in the upper transmission path UL1. Accordingly, both the cylindrical extending portion A772 and the cylindrical protrusion A762b that fit into the support portion A730 (see FIG. 369) rotate.

  Thereby, in the assembly state of the rendering unit A710 (see FIG. 362), both the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 369) rotate, and the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735. Both the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367), which are fastened and fixed respectively, rotate.

  Here, the rotation directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 will be described. First, the second rotation member A728 (see FIG. 367) rotates by the drive transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from above, the large diameter gear LG11 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from above, and the large diameter gear LG12 meshing with the large diameter gear LG11 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from above. Since it rotates, the rotation direction of the second rotation member A728 is counterclockwise when viewed from above.

  Next, the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) rotates by the drive transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, the small diameter gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and the small diameter gear PG2 meshed with the small diameter gear PG1 (FIG. 373). Since the rotation of the first rotation member A721 is clockwise, the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721 is clockwise.

  That is, the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728 is the reverse direction with the shaft rod portion A751 as the rotation axis. Thereby, compared with the case where the rotation direction of 1st rotation member A721 and 2nd rotation member A728 is the same direction, it can make a player visually recognize that it is rotating at high speed (with a big angle change). Or the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 can be made to appear as if they are rotating independently.

  FIG. 376 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376 (b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376 (a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376 (d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376 (c).

  376 (a) and 376 (b) show the initial state of the first rotating member A721, and in FIGS. 376 (c) and 376 (d), the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is in the initial state. A state (first state) after being rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above is shown.

  FIG. 377 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377 (b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377 (a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377 (d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377 (c).

  FIG. 377 (a) and FIG. 377 (b) illustrate a state (second state) after the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the top surface as viewed from above. FIG. 377 (c) and FIG. 377 (d) show a state (third state) after the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the top surface as viewed from the top.

  FIG. 378 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378 (b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378 (a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378 (d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378 (c).

  FIGS. 378 (a) and 378 (b) illustrate a state (fourth state) after the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the top view from the third state. 378 (c) and FIG. 378 (d) show a state (fifth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the fourth state in the top view.

  FIG. 379 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379 (b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379 (a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379 (d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379 (c).

  FIGS. 379 (a) and 379 (b) illustrate a state (sixth state) after the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the top surface in the fifth state. FIG. 379 (c) and FIG. 379 (d) show a state (seventh state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from above in the sixth state.

  When the shell portion A722 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above in the seventh state, the first rotating member A721 returns to the initial state. That is, FIGS. 376 to 379 illustrate one section (one cycle) of the rotation of the first rotating member A721.

  In the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 376 (a)), the side that is visible in the front view of the shell A722 will be described as the front shell A722F, and the opposite side will be described as the back shell A722B. Similarly, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721, the side viewed from the front of the central rotating member A724 will be described as the member front surface A724F, and the opposite side will be described as the member back surface A724B.

  In FIGS. 376 (a), 376 (c), 377 (a), 377 (c), 378 (a), 378 (c), 379 (a) and 379 (c), FIG. The optical axis KJ of the LED that constitutes the light emitting means A715a of the electric decoration board A715 (see FIG. 364) is shown in phantom lines, and FIG. 376 (b), FIG. 376 (d), FIG. 377 (b), FIG. d), FIG. 378 (b), FIG. 378 (d), FIG. 379 (b) and FIG. 379 (d) show a predetermined virtual plane VS. The optical axis KJ passes through the virtual plane VS.

  In addition, in FIGS. 376 (d), 377 (d), 378 (d), and 379 (d), arrows HL and VL schematically showing the light reflection direction are shown. The arrow HL indicates the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a disposed on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 is reflected by the shell A722 and the arrow VL is on the upper side of the central rotating member A724. The direction in which the light irradiated from the light emission means A715a arrange | positioned reflects with the center rotation member A724 and advances is represented.

  As shown in FIG. 376 (d), FIG. 377 (d), FIG. 378 (d) and FIG. 379 (d), in response to the first rotation member A721 rotating once counterclockwise in top view, The direction of the arrow VL changes by one rotation clockwise when viewed from above. In other words, in the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a disposed above the central rotating member A 724 is radiated in the radial direction of the circle around the rotational axis of the first rotating member A 721 via the central rotating member A 724. And the direction can be changed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721.

  This is difficult to achieve with, for example, a configuration in which the light emitting means is disposed on the side surfaces of the shell portion A722 and the central rotating member A724. For example, when the light emitting means is disposed on the side surface of the shell A722, the change in the direction of light emitted from the light emitting means changes in the same rotation direction as the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721.

  Further, for example, since the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 always faces the front side when the first rotating member A721 rotates, the surface normal line when the light emitting means is disposed on the member front surface A724F or the member rear surface A724B. The change in the traveling direction of the light irradiated in the direction is not a change around the rotation axis of the first rotation member A721 (a change in the rotation direction having the rotation axis in the front-rear direction).

  Therefore, an unexpected light emission effect can be executed as compared with the case where the light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the first rotating member A721 to adopt the light emission effect. For example, the rotation direction of the change in the traveling direction of the light and the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721 are reversed, so that the player can feel as if it is rotating at a higher speed than the actual rotation speed. You can feel it.

  As shown in FIGS. 376 to 379, the central rotating member A724 also rotates with the rotation of the first rotating member A721, but the surface visually recognized by the player is limited to the member front surface A724F. Therefore, even if the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the central rotating member A724 is exposed on the back side (see FIG. 368), the fastening screw can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

  That is, the member back surface A724B of the central rotating member A724 can be configured not as a region for the player to visually recognize, but as a region for another purpose, regardless of its appearance (in this embodiment, the light is transmitted). It is possible to select a configuration that more easily achieves the purpose of reflection. For example, in the present embodiment, it is possible to cause light reflection utilizing the gloss of the surface of the fastening screw member by exposing the fastening screw.

  In addition, the aspect of the member surface of a fastening screw can be set arbitrarily. For example, the fastening screw member surface may be painted black to make it easier to make a shadow, the fastening screw member surface may be painted in color to reflect the color, or the fastening screw may be LED A light emitting means such as the above may be attached.

  The effect | action of the light irradiated to 1st rotation member A721 is demonstrated. In the following description, FIG. 364 is appropriately referred to. As described above, the electrical decoration board A715 including the light emitting means A715a that irradiates the first rotating member A721 with light is arranged so as to constitute each side of the pentagon, and is orthogonal to each side (inclined with respect to each other). The optical axis KJ is arranged along the direction of The electrical decoration board | substrate A715 (refer FIG. 364) arrange | positioned above 1st rotation member A721 first is demonstrated, and the electrical decoration board | substrate A715 arrange | positioned at the left and right of 1st rotation member A721 is demonstrated later.

  The illumination board A715 disposed above the first rotation member A721 is irradiated with light downward from the light emitting means A715a. Regardless of the state of the first rotating member A721, this light passes through the light passage recess A722a and reaches the central rotating member A724. That is, by irradiating light from the light emitting means A715a disposed on the electric decoration board A715 disposed above the first rotating member A721, it is possible to always keep the light on the central rotating member A724.

  In the light emitting means A715a, when three LEDs are arranged side by side, the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can change depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, in the initial state (see FIG. 376 (b)), since the light passage recess A722a is formed in the same direction as the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a is also It is easy to reach the central rotating member A724.

  On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 377 (b)), the light passing recess A722a does not extend in the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, and the light irradiated from the left and right light emitting means A715a Since it is difficult to enter A722a, among the light emitted from the illumination board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724, the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is mainly the light emitted from the central light emitting means A715a. Become. Therefore, the difference in the state of the first rotating member A721 can be associated with the difference in the emission intensity of the central rotating member A724.

  In this viewpoint, in the initial state or the fourth state in which the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is easily visible in a front view, it is irradiated from the electrical decoration board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724 and reaches the central rotating member A724. In the second state and the sixth state where the intensity of the light to be maximized and the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is difficult to visually recognize in front view, the center is irradiated from the electrical decoration board A715 disposed above the central rotating member A724. The intensity of the light reaching the rotating member A724 can be minimized. That is, the visibility of the central rotating member A724 in front view and the intensity of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed correspondingly.

  The electrical decoration board | substrate A715 arrange | positioned at the right and left of 1st rotation member A721 is equipped with the light emission means A715a by which the optical axis KJ is arrange | positioned on the plane (virtual plane VS) which passes along the rotating shaft of shell part A722. Light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a toward the first rotating member A721, but the location where the light reaches differs depending on the state of the first rotating member A721.

  That is, the shell A722 is disposed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a (initial state (see FIGS. 376 (a) and 376 (b)) or the fourth state (FIG. 378 (a) and In FIG. 378 (b))), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the shell A722, and does not reach the central rotating member A724.

  The shell portion A722 is curved in such a manner that the width becomes smaller toward the radially outer side at the outer peripheral edge portion, and a connecting portion A722b that connects the edges of the opening of the shell portion A722 with a deformed arch-shaped bridge is provided. Prepare. Therefore, even in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a to the shell portion A722 is bent at the outer peripheral edge portion of the shell portion A722 or the arch of the connecting portion A722b. It can be made to advance toward the player by reflecting on the curvature of the player.

  In addition, the shell A 722 reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a toward the player in a state between the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A 721 (reflected along the arrow HL). Therefore, the difference between the amount of light traveling to the player side in a state slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state and the amount of light in other states can be emphasized. That is, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 is visually recognized in a dark (pulse-like) state, and when the first rotating member A721 is slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state, the central rotating member A724 is moved. It is possible to execute a light emission effect of switching to a brightly visible state.

  On the other hand, in the state between the initial state and the fourth state in the rotational displacement of the first rotating member A721, not all of the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a and the shell part A722 overlap, so at least a part thereof Of the light reaches the central rotating member A724.

  Thus, the state where the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the electrical decoration board A715 arranged on the left and right of the first rotating member A721 reaches the central rotating member A724 and the state where the light does not reach the central rotating member A724. It can switch in the state of 1st rotation member A721. Accordingly, it is possible to execute a light emission effect that allows the light reaching the central rotating member A724 to be visually blinked without controlling the light emission mode (for example, the flashing mode) of the light emitting unit A715a.

  For example, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a can be visually recognized as blinking at different lighting or extinguishing times by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while maintaining the lighting state ( It can be visually recognized as a light emission effect with a different blinking cycle).

  In this case, when the central rotary member A724 cannot be followed as a still image and is driven so that the central rotary member A724 rotates at a speed exceeding the speed (for example, 20 [rps]) at which an afterimage is generated, Regardless of the speed, the central rotating member A724 is visually recognized as if it has stopped, but the flashing cycle of the light applied to the central rotating member A724 can be varied depending on the difference in speed.

  That is, the higher the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721, the shorter the interval until the first rotating member A721 reaches the initial state or the fourth state, and the light emitting means A715a (center) by the shell A722. Since the period in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the rotating member A724 is blocked can be shortened, the blinking period of the light irradiated on the central rotating member A724 can be shortened. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotation member A721, it is possible to produce an effect of changing the blinking cycle of the light irradiated to the center rotation member A724.

  In the present embodiment, as illustrated in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 is in a state where the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a and the shell portion A722 are opposed to each other. The longitudinal direction overlaps the shell portion A722 when viewed in the rotational axis direction (or viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a). In this embodiment, the longitudinal direction of the central rotating member A724 is parallel to the member front surface A724F and the member rear surface A724B (for example, the arrow LR direction, the arrow UD direction, or the arrow FB in FIG. 376 (a)). And the short side direction is defined as the direction connecting the member front surface A724F and the member back surface A724B (the direction of the arrow FB in FIG. 376 (b)).

  In other words, the central rotating member A724 has a longitudinal direction that is the thickness of the shell A722 when viewed in the rotational axis direction (or viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a) in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotating member A721. It will be inward (contained) posture. Thereby, the light shielding effect of the shell A722 in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 can be improved. That is, by shielding the light with the shell portion A722, it is possible to easily prevent the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a from reaching the central rotating member A724. For example, the light from the light emitting means A715a , While the central rotating member A724 is not illuminated.

  When the first rotating member A721 is rotated at a constant speed, the total (ratio) of the time during which the first rotating member A721 is maintained in the initial state or the fourth state with respect to the time during which the rotation is continued is the rotational speed. It is the same regardless of whether Thereby, the brightness of 1st rotation member A721 visually recognized by a player can be prevented from changing because the rotation speed of 1st rotation member A721 changes. That is, when the first rotating member A721 is rotated at a high speed, it can be avoided that the first rotating member A721 is visually recognized darkly.

  In the present embodiment, the blinking cycle of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed by rotating the first rotating member A721 while the light emitting means A715a is turned on. According to this, it is possible to eliminate the need for forming a circuit for causing the light emitting means A 715a to blink while achieving the same effect as the case where the light emitting means A 715a itself blinks. Therefore, size reduction of the electrical decoration board | substrate A715 can be achieved.

  As described above, the light emitting means A715a that emits light from above the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a that emits light from the left and right of the central rotating member A724 are first in relation to the state of the first rotating member A721. It is comprised so that it may differ how the rotary member A721 is illuminated. Therefore, the light emission effect illustrated below can be performed by controlling separately.

  For example, in the initial state (see FIGS. 376 (a) and 376 (b)) or the fourth state (see FIGS. 378 (a) and 378 (b)) of the first rotating member A721, the upper side of the central rotating member A724. The light emitting means A 715a disposed in the center is turned off, and the light emitting means A 715a disposed on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A 724 are controlled to be turned on or blinking, so that the central rotating member A 724 is visually recognized darkly and the shell A 722 is brightened. Illuminating light effects can be executed.

  Further, for example, only the light emitting means A715a (the central light emitting means A715a) disposed above the central rotating member A724 is turned on or blinked, and the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 is turned off. By controlling, it is possible to execute a light effect that brightly illuminates the central rotating member A724 and visually recognizes the shell A722 darkly.

  Further, for example, light is irradiated from both directions in the left-right direction, but light is irradiated only from one side direction (upper side) in the vertical direction (reflected from the central rotating member A724 to the front side every half rotation). And a case where the light is reflected to the back side) can be used to execute a complicated light emission effect. For example, it is configured to emit blue light from the light emitting means A 715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A 724, and to emit red light from the light emitting means A 715a arranged above the central rotating member A 724, A player who is visually recognized from the front is switched between a situation where it is visually recognized with blue light and a situation where the blue light and the red light are mixed and seen every half rotation of the first rotating member A721. Can do.

  In this case, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while executing the control to continuously turn on without blinking the light, the cycle in which the appearance of the light changes can be arbitrarily changed. .

  An example of stop control of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the driving force for rotationally driving the first rotating member A721 is transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1 (see FIG. 375 (b)), and the large-diameter gear LG1 disposed in the lower transmission path DL1. Since the detected piece A773 (see FIG. 374) is detected by the second detection sensor A753 at intervals of 90 degrees, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is rotated each time the first rotating member A721 rotates by 90 degrees. The occurrence of rotation can be determined. This determination is divided according to the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721, the results are accumulated, and the accumulated result is separately determined, whereby the state of the first rotating member A721 can be determined.

  That is, for example, each time the detected piece A773 is detected by the second detection sensor A753 when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotational direction (positive direction) in which the shell A722 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above. When the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotational direction (reverse direction) in which the shell A722 rotates clockwise in a top view, the detected piece A773 is the second detection sensor. Each time A753 is detected, 1 is subtracted from the value of the cumulative counter.

  If the value of the cumulative counter is a multiple of 0 or 4, it is the initial state, if it is (a multiple of 0 or 4) +1, it is the second state, and if it is (a multiple of 0 or 4) +2, the second state. If it is 4 states and (0 or a multiple of 4) +3, it can be determined that the state is the sixth state.

  Therefore, according to this embodiment, even when the rotation angle of the drive motor AMT2 cannot be specified, the numerical value of the cumulative counter is determined and the stop control of the drive motor AMT2 is performed, so that the initial state, The first rotating member A721 can be stopped in any of the second state, the fourth state, and the sixth state.

  Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect so that the posture in which the first rotating member A721 stops has different meanings. For example, it can be used as a production means for notifying a difference in the degree of jackpot expectation or notifying time information (for example, the stop posture changes every 2 hours).

  In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where the to-be-detected piece A773 was formed in four places at equal intervals, it does not necessarily restrict to this. The arrangement of the detected pieces A773 may be non-uniformly spaced, may be formed at three places, at a plurality of five or more places, or may be formed at one place.

  FIG. 380 (a) is a front view of the effect unit A710, FIG. 380 (b) is a top view of the effect unit A710 in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380 (a), and FIG. FIG. 380 (d) is a front view of the effect unit A710, and FIG. 380 (d) is a top view of the effect unit A710 when viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380 (c).

  381 (a) is a front view of the rendering unit A710, FIG. 381 (b) is a top view of the rendering unit A710 in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381 (a), and FIG. 381 (c) FIG. 381D is a front view of the effect unit A710, and FIG. 381D is a top view of the effect unit A710 when viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381C.

  In FIGS. 380 and 381, the state of rotation of the rotating body A720 is illustrated in time series. That is, the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotating direction that rotates counterclockwise as viewed from above, and in FIGS. 380 (a) and 380 (b), the initial state of the first rotating member A721 is shown in FIGS. In FIG. 380 (d), the first state of the first rotating member A721 is shown, and in FIGS. 381 (a) and 381 (b), the second state of the first rotating member A721 is shown in FIGS. 381 (c) and 381 (d). ) Shows the third state of the first rotating member A721.

  When the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotational direction that rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1 as described above, and therefore the second rotating member A728 also performs the first rotation. Reverse rotation is performed at the same rotation angle as member A721.

  That is, FIGS. 380 (a) and 380 (b) illustrate an initial state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-like extending portion A728a is disposed on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 380 (c). 380 (d) shows the first state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-like extending portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the initial state, as shown in FIGS. 381 (a) and 381 (b). Fig. 381 shows the second state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-like extending portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the first state as viewed from the first state. In Figs. 381 (c) and 381 (d), the rod-like extending portion is shown. A third state of the second rotating member A728 in which the part A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the top surface from the second state is illustrated.

  Since the pair of rod-like extending portions A728a are formed in a substantially rotationally symmetric shape, the second rotating member A728 returns to the initial state by further rotating 45 degrees clockwise from the third state as viewed from above. To do.

  In FIG. 380 (b), FIG. 380 (d), FIG. 381 (b) and FIG. 381 (d), the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 are schematic views (simple shape diagrams) for easy understanding. ) As an imaginary line.

  Note that in FIGS. 380 (a), 380 (c), 381 (a), and 381 (c), the outer shape of the electric decoration board A715 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and FIGS. 380 (b) and 380 (d) are illustrated. 381 (b) and 381 (d), the virtual plane VS is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 380 and 381, the second rotating member A 728 is accompanied by an electrical decoration board A 715 (two boards arranged on the left and right sides) arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A 721. It passes through the optical axis of the light irradiated from. Therefore, similarly to the first rotating member A721, the traveling mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the electrical decoration board A715 can be changed corresponding to the rotation of the second rotating member A728.

  Here, unlike the shell part A722 of the first rotating member A721 formed from a resin material having low light transmission, the second rotating member A728 is formed from a light transmitting resin material. Instead of shielding light when passing through the optical axis, it acts to cause a change in the light refraction mode and the color of the light. In the present embodiment, since the second rotating member A728 is formed of a blue resin material, the light that reaches the first rotating member A721 at a timing when the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis is a color closer to blue. (Color mixed with blue).

  In the present embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rod shape that extends in the direction along the rotation axis and bends along the circumferential direction of rotation, and the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A724. It is configured not to overlap with all of the optical axes.

  For example, in the state shown in FIG. 380 (d), the optical axis of the light emitting means A 715a disposed on the electric decoration board A 715 disposed on the left and right upper sides of the central rotating member A 724 and the second rotating member A 728 overlap, The optical axis of the light emitting means A 715a disposed on the electric decoration board A 715 and the second rotating member A 728 do not overlap, but on the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. The optical axis of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the electric decoration board A715 and the second rotating member A728 overlap, and the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the other electric decoration board A715 and the second rotating member A728. Does not overlap. In the state shown in FIGS. 380 (b) and 381 (b), the second rotating member A728 is configured not to overlap the optical axis of any of the light emitting means A715a.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the optical axis of all the light emitting means A 715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A 724 and the second rotating member A 728 are switched between overlapping or not overlapping, the central rotating member A 724 is changed. It is possible to increase the types of light modes that arrive. That is, the mode in which the light that has passed through the second rotating member A728 reaches the central rotating member A724, the mode in which only the light that reaches from the left and right upper side passes through the second rotating member A728, and the light that only reaches from the left and right lower side It can increase to the aspect which passes 2nd rotation member A728.

  In this case, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned on and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned off, or conversely, the second rotating member A728 and the optical axis. Depending on whether the light emitting means A715a where the light axis overlaps and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned on, the appearance of the central rotating member A724 can be changed. That is, it is possible to switch whether the central rotating member A724 emits light in a mode in which the colors of the second rotating member A728 are mixed or whether the central rotating member A724 emits light regardless of the color of the second rotating member A728.

  In addition, since the direction of the optical axis overlapping the second rotating member A728 can be changed from the left and right upper side to the left and right lower side by the arrangement of the second rotating member A728, the color of the second rotating member A728 is similarly changed. The part of the central rotating member A724 that emits light in a mixed mode can be switched.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIGS. 380 and 381, the second rotation member A728 is configured not to overlap the light passage recess A722a in a top view. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed above the central rotating member A724 does not depend on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728, and does not pass through the second rotating member A728. Head to A722a.

  Therefore, for example, it is configured such that only light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a disposed above the central rotating member A 724 is turned on, and the light emitting means A 715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A 724 are turned off. It can be avoided that the color of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is changed by the second rotating member A728.

  If this is to be realized by the light emitting means A 715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A 724, the light emitting means A 715a is turned on at a timing when the second rotating member A 728 does not intersect the optical axis of the light emitting means A 715a, and the second rotating member A 728 is turned on. Although control (synchronization with rotation of 2nd rotation member A728) of turning off light emission means A715a at the timing which intersects with an optical axis is needed, in this embodiment, it is arranged above central rotation member A724. Such control can be made unnecessary by the action of the light emitting means A715a.

  The second rotating member A728 partially hides the central rotating member A724 from the player's field of view in a posture where the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is not facing the front and the rendering function of the central rotating member A724 is lowered. (Refer to FIG. 381 (a)), and the light refracted by the second rotating member A728 is configured to easily travel to the player. Thereby, the fall of the presentation function of rotary body A720 during rotation can be suppressed.

  Here, since the rod-like extending portion A728a of the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rotationally symmetrical shape, the shape (outer shape) in the front view is switched at intervals of 180 degrees. That is, the shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 shown in FIG. 381 (a) is equivalent to the shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a). .

  On the other hand, the first rotating member A721 rotating inside the second rotating member A728 does not become the same state at intervals of 180 degrees. That is, when the first rotating member A721 rotates 180 degrees from the second state (see FIG. 377 (a)) shown in FIG. 381 (a), the sixth state (see FIG. 379 (a)) is obtained. In the present embodiment, as described above, in a posture (see FIG. 381 (a)) in which the second rotating member A728 is disposed before and after the first rotating member A721, the second rotating member A728 causes the first rotating member to be disposed. Since A721 is partially hidden, it can be made difficult for the player to determine whether the first rotating member A721 is in the second state or the sixth state.

  Then, from the state in which the second rotating member A728 is arranged as shown in FIG. 381 (a), the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are rotated 45 degrees in synchronization with each other. When the member A721 is in the second state (see FIG. 377 (a)), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724. Is the direction facing the front side (see arrow VL in FIG. 377 (d)), while the central rotary member A724 is brightly visible to the player, while the first rotary member A721 is in the sixth state (FIG. 379 (a)). In the case of reference), the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724 is the direction toward the back side (see FIG. Arrow VL reference) next to 79 (d), the central rotary member A724 is viewed darkened player.

  That is, changing the appearance of the first rotating member A721 (brightness of the central rotating member A724) while making the outer shape of the second rotating member A728 visible to be equal to each other changes the lighting mode of the light emitting means A715a. It can occur without change. In this case, the second rotating member A728 in the state of FIG. 381 (a) is associated with the difference between whether the central rotating member A724 looks bright or dark by, for example, the level of expectation of the jackpot of the special symbol lottery. Can stop, the expectation with respect to the subsequent operation | movement aspect can be raised, and the attention with respect to the rotary body A720 can be improved.

  In this case, the second rotating member A728 is rotated 90 degrees in synchronization with the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a). The member front surface A724F of the central rotation member A724 rotates 90 degrees from the upward posture to the front-back posture. Accordingly, until the rotation angle of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728 reaches 90 degrees, the direction of the light reflected through the central rotation member A724 gradually increases from the vertical direction to the front-rear direction. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728 reaches 90 degrees, the member front surface A724F moves in the front-rear direction. Since the light is directed (since there is no inclination with respect to the optical axis KJ from above), the front-rear direction component of the direction of light reflected through the central rotating member A724 is close to 0, and the light reflection direction returns to the vertical direction. .

  Thus, in synchronization with the rotation of the first rotating member A721 from the second state or the sixth state, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed above the central rotating member A724 is transmitted by the central rotating member A724. The component in the front-rear direction of the light when reflected is gradually increased. Accordingly, as the rotation time of the first rotation member A721 becomes longer, it becomes easier to determine whether the first rotation member A721 is in the second state or the sixth state, and thus the first rotation member A721 rotates. The attention to the first rotating member A721 can be kept high not only at the moment of starting the rotation but also after the rotation.

  In the present embodiment, from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a), the second rotating member A728 is stopped by driving the rotating body A720 in a direction in which the first rotating member A721 rotates clockwise when viewed from above. The first rotating member A721 can be rotated as it is. In this case, since the light reflected by the central rotating member A724 (light along the arrow VL) passes through the second rotating member A728 and easily reaches the player's eyes, the central rotating member A724 is easily colored and visually recognized. .

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 381 (a), the posture of the first rotating member A721 can be configured in two ways with an interval of 180 degrees, and is synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A728 from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a). The first rotating member A721 can be rotated and the second rotating member A728 can be maintained from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a) while only the first rotating member A721 is rotated. As a way of showing the rotating member A724 to the player, a total of four ways of showing can be executed.

  The light reflected through the central rotating member A724 not only functions to change the brightness of the central rotating member A724 itself, but also has a function of illuminating members arranged around the central rotating member A724.

  For example, when light is reflected to the left front side through the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 377 (d)), the left channel (game) in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13. When the center of the left and right width of the region is used as a reference, it can be used as light that illuminates the left region), and the light is reflected to the right front side via the central rotating member A724 (FIG. 376 (d)) includes a right channel in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13 (a channel formed in the right area with respect to the center of the left and right width of the game area, mainly the right It can be used as light that illuminates brightly the flow path through which the ball launched by hitting passes.

  In addition, for example, when light is reflected to the left rear side through the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 378 (d)), the first arranged on the left side on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It can be used as light for brightly illuminating the operation units A400, A400A, A400B, etc., and when the light is reflected to the right rear side through the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 379 (d)), the third The first operation units A400C, A400D and the like disposed on the front right side of the symbol display device 81 can be used as light for illuminating brightly. In this way, the light reflected through the central rotating member A724 can be switched in a direction toward a different member, so that the player's line of sight is guided to a different member (location) by switching the direction of the light. Can do.

  Further, the second rotating member A728 is configured with a vertical length that can divide the inner region of the annular front cover A711 in front view into left and right (see FIG. 381 (a)). Thereby, in a state where the second rotating member A728 is stopped, for example, in a state where the rendering unit A710 is disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 321), the inner side of the annular front cover A711. The display area of the 3rd symbol display device 81 visually recognized through the area can be partitioned so as to be divided into left and right. That is, the second rotating member A728 can be used not only as a member that performs an effect by a rotating operation, but also as a member that divides the display area of the display device when the second rotating member A728 is stopped.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the first rotation member A721 can be rotated while the second rotation member A728 is stopped. An effect of rotating the first rotating member A721 in a state where the display area of the display device is divided can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured to rotate only when the first rotating member A721 is driven in a counterclockwise rotation direction as viewed from above, and is rotated in the reverse direction (the first rotating member A721 is the upper surface). In the driving mode (clockwise rotation direction), the second rotation member A728 stops.

  In other words, in one rotation direction, the first rotation member A721 has an action of arbitrarily changing the blinking cycle of the light reaching the central rotation member A724 by passing through the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right. In the other rotation direction, in addition to the action of changing the blinking cycle, the light emission mode (color, light) reaching the central rotation member A724 by the second rotation member A728 passing through the optical axis arranged on the left and right Change in width, etc.).

  Thus, the visibility of the light emission effect can be changed by changing the direction of the rotational drive. Since the frequency with which the second rotating member A 728 passes the optical axis depends on the rotational speed of the second rotating member A 728, variations in the change in the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching the central rotating member A 724 are as follows. Depends on the resolution (number of switchable) of the rotational speed of the two-rotating member A728.

  The rotational speed of the second rotating member A 728 naturally has an allowable limit, and this allowable limit defines the limit of variations in the light emission mode. In this embodiment, the rotational direction is made different. Since the second rotation member A728 is switched between operating and stopped, even if the rotation speed is the same, the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) reaching the center rotation member A724 can be changed by changing the rotation direction. Can be different.

  Therefore, when the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 rotate only in one direction, or when the influence on the light does not change even if the rotating direction is different (for example, when the second rotating member A728 is not present, The change in the visibility of light reaching the central rotary member A724 is doubled compared to the case where only the rotational direction of the first rotary member A721 changes and the second rotary member A728 maintains its rotation). Therefore, variations in how the central rotating member A724 is visible can be increased.

  The details of how the central rotating member A724 is visible will be described. As described above, the central rotating member A724 repeats the operation of turning the member front surface A724F upside down while maintaining the posture in which the member front surface A724F faces the front side.

  Therefore, when the central rotary member A724 cannot be followed as a still image and is driven so that the central rotary member A724 rotates at a speed exceeding the speed (for example, 20 [rps]) at which an afterimage is generated, the central rotary member A724 is visually recognized as if the shape in which the top and bottom of the member front surface A724F are inverted is united in a front view. That is, in the present embodiment, the central rotating member A724 formed in a star shape having five corners is visually recognized as a star shape having ten corners.

  In the present embodiment, the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is formed in a vertically asymmetric shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 may be formed in a vertically symmetrical shape. In this case, since there is no difference between the shape visually recognized as an afterimage during rotation (the shape obtained by combining the vertically inverted shapes) and the shape of the member front surface A724F, it seems as if the central rotating member A724 is stopped. Can be visually recognized.

  In addition, for example, a characteristic shape or figure is formed on one of the upper and lower sides with the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 as a boundary, and another shape can be recalled by inverting this shape or figure and combining them. You may do it.

  For example, when the central rotary member A724 is rotated by drawing an equilateral triangle shape on the member front surface A724F in a mode in which one side overlaps the rotational axis in front view above the rotational axis of the central rotational member A724, the equilateral triangle is obtained. The diamond shape can be visually recognized by combining the upper and lower sides, and the lower part of the central rotary member A724 has a lower end overlapping the rotary shaft when viewed from the front above the rotary shaft of the central rotary member A724. By drawing the character (figure), when the center rotation member A724 is rotated, the inverted shape is merged at the top and bottom, so that the character (figure) of the numeral “3” can be visually recognized. Thereby, an unexpected production can be executed.

  In FIG. 382, an example of an effect using the second operation unit A700 will be described. FIG. 382 is a front view of the annular front cover A711 and the rotator A720. FIG. 382 shows a state in which the effect unit A710 is arranged at the overhang position (see FIG. 321), that is, a state in which the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720 are arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. The

  FIG. 382 shows the second state (see FIG. 381 (a)) of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, which is on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728. In the area inside the cover A711 (inside the circular opening), an image displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is shown.

  That is, the third symbol display device 81 displays the second rotating member A728V on the rotating display. Thereby, even in a state where the second rotating member A728 is stopped, it is possible to make the player visually recognize as if the second rotating member A728 is rotating.

  The means for displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display is not limited to the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the second rotating member A728. For example, a transmissive liquid crystal may be arranged on the front side of the second rotating member A728, and the state of the second rotating member A728 rotating with the transmissive liquid crystal may be displayed, or the front side or the back side of the second rotating member A728 may be displayed. The illumination plate may be arranged on the display plate, and the figure formed on the illumination plate may be combined with the image of the third symbol display device 81 so as to be visible as the second rotating member A728V on the display. You may make it display 2nd rotating member A728V on a display with the combination of the some display means containing a means.

  In this state, when the light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the electric circuit board A715, the player expects a light effect mode in the rotating state of the second rotating member A728, but the stopped state of the second rotating member A728. Since the light effect can be executed in the mode, it is possible to execute a highly unexpected effect.

  Further, this is not limited to the state in which the effect unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is stopped at the extended position, and the same is true while the effect unit A710 is displaced up and down. For example, the rendering unit A710 is configured so that the third symbol display device 81 cannot be viewed through the left and right positions of the rotator A720 at the retracted position (see FIG. 320), while the rotator A720 is at the extended position. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized through the left and right positions (see FIG. 321).

  That is, in response to the effect unit A710 moving upward toward the extended position, the inner side of the annular front cover A711 (inside the circular opening) on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728. The display area of the third symbol display device 81 that is visually recognized through the area) gradually increases. By displaying the above-described second rotating member A728V on the display in the region of the third symbol display device 81 that is gradually recognized, the rendering unit A710 is moved up while the second rotating member A728 is stopped. When the control is performed, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player feel that the second rotation member A 728 has started rotating sometime (the effect can be performed using an optical illusion).

  In this case, during the ascending operation of the rendering unit A710, the outer shape of the rotating body A720 that the player visually recognizes when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped. In the case where light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a, the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and the second rotating member A728 is stopped. The light emission mode (light reflection mode) of the rotator A720 to be visually recognized by the player can be changed. Thereby, a highly unexpected effect can be executed.

  Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a has been described, but in the twenty-third embodiment, the member that passes through the optical axis KJ extends in the front-rear direction. The slide member A2729 moves in parallel. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 383 is a schematic top view illustrating the first rotating member A2721 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 383, the slide member A2729 is configured to be slidable between a back surface side position intersecting the virtual plane VS and a front side position not intersecting the virtual plane VS.

  Therefore, even if the slide member A2729 is arranged at a position intersecting the optical axis KJ at the back side position, the intersection with the optical axis KJ can be eliminated by moving to the front side position, It is possible to change the way the light reaches the one rotation member A2721. Since the movement of the slide member A2729 is a slide movement in the front-rear direction, it is difficult for a player who visually recognizes the slide member A2729 from the front side to grasp that the slide member A2729 is moving.

  That is, the aspect of the first rotating member A2721 when the LEDs constituting the light emitting means A715a are turned on while maintaining (remaining) the shape (outer shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the slide member A2729 in the front view. (How to shine) can be changed. Thereby, an unexpected production can be constituted without performing control which changes LED to light.

  The material of the slide member A2729 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light transmissive resin material, may be formed from a light opaque resin material, or may be formed from a metal material.

  Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 of the pin-equipped gear A462 is formed in an arc shape along the movement locus of the transmission projection A463 has been described, but in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the pin-equipped gear A3462. Is provided with a plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 protruding in a semicircular cross section from the outer surface of the arcuate wall part A464 toward the radially outer side. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 384 is a rear view of the front unit FU in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 384, the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed at four locations that divide the length of the arcuate wall portion A464 in the circumferential direction into approximately five equal parts in the rear view.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the long holes (the first long hole A422a, the second long hole A422b, the displacement side long hole A453, and the transmission side long hole A454) formed to displace the first displacement member A440 are the first. The first displacement member A440 is configured to be displaceable beyond the displacement terminal end on the overhang position side in the twenty-second embodiment by being formed longer than the twenty-second embodiment.

  In the state shown in FIG. 384, the deformed slide member A455 comes into contact with the arc wall portion A464 and is restricted from moving, whereby the first displacement member A440 stops at the extended position. When the pin-equipped gear A 3462 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the back, the deformed slide member A 455 is pushed upward from the state shown in FIG. 384 every time the outer diameter protrusion A 3464 comes into contact with the protruding plate part A 456a. Accordingly, the long link A451 is rotated, and the first displacement member A440 can be configured to be displaced to the left from the overhang position.

  Accordingly, the first displacement member A440 can be configured to be displaced at the timing at which the second displacement member A490 is displaced (see FIG. 360).

  In FIG. 384, the size of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is shown at random, but is not limited thereto. For example, all of them may be provided with the same size, or outer shape protrusions A3464 of different sizes may be formed. In this case, it is not necessary that they are all different sizes.

  In the present embodiment, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is formed so that the two closer to the transmission protrusion A463 are larger than the two farther from the transmission protrusion A463. Accordingly, when the pinned gear A 3462 is continuously rotated after the first displacement member A 440 reaches the extended position, the displacement caused by the contact between the outer shape projection A 3464 and the deformed slide member A 455 is the two Compared to, the latter two times become smaller. That is, it is possible to produce an effect so that the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 after reaching the overhang position gradually falls.

  From this point of view, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be formed so as to become smaller from the transmission protrusion A463 side along the arc wall part A464, or vice versa. Thereby, the effect that the displacement width of the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 gradually changes can be executed.

  In addition, a recessed portion that is recessed radially inward from the arc wall portion A464 may be formed at a location where the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is formed. In this case, contrary to the description in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the deformed slide member A455 is attached to the coil spring SP1 in the lower left direction from the state shown in FIG. 384 every time the recessed portion is arranged to face the protruding plate portion A456a. The long link A451 is rotated with the force, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the right (retracted position side) from the extended position.

  The formation position of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be changed (shifted) in the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D (see FIG. 319). As a result, when the operation timings of the drive motors AMT1 configured in the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D are synchronized (the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 start operating at the same timing). In the case), the timing at which the first displacement member A440 is displaced can be varied depending on the relationship with the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, in the control mode in which the drive motors AMT1 are excited all at once, the displacement (small amount) generated in the first displacement member A440 in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 with a deviation width defined in advance by the arrangement of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. (Displacement) timing can be shifted.

  For example, the timing at which each first displacement member A440 of each first operation unit A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A400D (see FIG. 319) reaches the overhang position (see FIG. 320) and each second displacement member A490 are stretched. Displacement (minor displacement) generated in the first displacement member A440 in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 after the first displacement member A440 reaches the extended position, while the timing to reach the extended position (see FIG. 320) is the same. ) Occurrence timing can be adjusted so as to be sequentially generated clockwise from the first operation unit A400 arranged at the lower left in front view.

  Accordingly, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight paying attention to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Further, as described above, in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the mode of the light visually recognized through the long hole A412a (see FIG. 320), so that the player who visually recognizes the light can be changed. It is possible to easily guide the line of sight in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. For example, in the jackpot game (special game), an effect suggesting a right-handed run performed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like can be performed using the order of displacement of the first displacement member A440.

  Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. Although 22nd Embodiment demonstrated the case where 1st displacement member A440 displaces the back side of electrical decoration board | substrate A416, 25th Embodiment is equipped with decoration member A4550 displaced to the front side of electrical decoration board | substrate A416. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 385 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339 (a) of the first operation unit A4400 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 385 (b) is FIG. 344 (a). It is sectional drawing of 1st operation | movement unit A4400 in the line corresponding to the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line.

  As shown in FIGS. 385 (a) and 385 (b), the decorative member A4550 is provided on a side surface of the main body A411 and a plate-shaped decorative plate A4551 disposed so that the front side of the front cover A410 can be displaced. A pair of guided portions A4552 guided by a long hole A4411b drilled along a straight line parallel to the direction A416x, and these are integrated with a pair of connecting arm portions A4553 formed outside the front cover A410. Are connected and fixed.

  Since both of the pair of guided portions A4552 are inserted into the long hole A4411b, the guided portion A4552 is only allowed to be displaced along the long hole A4411b. Thereby, the attitude | position change of decorative board part A4551 can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the decorative plate portion A4551 is limited to sliding displacement in a direction parallel to the direction A416x, which is the extending direction of the long hole A4411b.

  The first displacement member A4440 includes a pair of projecting portions A4442g that project from the left and right ends of the interlocking plate portion A4442 to the front side, and is the same as the configuration of the first displacement member A440 except for this.

  In the present embodiment, the guided portion A4552 is formed so as to project inward of the front cover A410 to a position where it can contact the protruding portion A4442g in the displacement direction. As a result, the decorative member A4550 is interlocked with the first displacement member A4440 at the timing when the protruding portion A4442g and the guided portion A4552 abut while the first displacement member A4440 is displaced.

  The interlocking plate portion A4442 of the first displacement member A4440 is configured to be displaced with a change in posture while the guided plate portion A441 is displaced, and the protruding portion A4442g is provided between the guided portions A4552 with the change in posture. Is arranged so that the projecting portion A4442g can enter. As a result, the decorative member A4550 can be displaced in both forward and backward directions (in the left and right directions in FIG. 385 (a)) in conjunction with the forward and backward displacement of the first displacement member A4440.

  According to this embodiment, since the decorative plate portion A4551 is disposed on the front side of the front cover A410, it is possible to configure a timing for hiding the through hole A412 with the decorative plate portion A4551. Thereby, the light traveling through the through-hole A412 can be physically shielded.

  Further, unlike the first displacement member A4440 that is hidden behind the front cover A410 in the extended position, the decorative plate portion A4551 is arranged so as to be visible to the player without being always hidden by the front cover A410. Therefore, the decorative plate portion A4551 is configured such that the opening A442c of the first displacement member A4440 has a different shape in each first operation unit A4400, and these are configured so as to make a series of meanings in the retracted position. The hidden overhanging position can be used as a means for solving the problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize in a series of meanings, while also making it difficult to provide a sense of unity in the light emission mode.

  In other words, by similarly configuring the shape of the decorative plate portion A4551 of each first operation unit A4440 and the figure to be drawn, the first displacement member A4440 is arranged at the overhanging position and hidden by the front cover A410 (FIG. 385). A sense of unity between the first operation units A4440 in (b) can be created by the decorative plate portion A4551.

  Further, the light emitting means is previously placed at the same position on the first displacement member A4440 of the plurality of first operation units A4400 and visible through the through-hole A412 in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is disposed at the extended position. A445b is disposed, and the light emitting means A445b is turned on all at once by the plurality of first operation units A4400 in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is hidden as described above. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the long hole A4411b is formed using a gap region (region on the retreat position side of the first displacement member A4440) secured by not forming the electrical decoration substrate A416. That is, the space created by limiting the formation range of the electric decoration board A416 can be effectively used as a space for arranging a structure for realizing the displacement of the decoration member A4550.

  The displaceable range of the decorative member A4550 is limited to the formation range of the long hole A4411b. That is, not only the first displacement member A4440 but also the decoration member A4550 can be displaced within a space created by limiting the formation range of the electric decoration board A416. Therefore, the number of members to be displaced can be increased in a range where the electrical decoration board A 416 is not formed (a corresponding range in front view).

  In addition, before and after the displacement of the decorative member A4550, a change in posture (displacement in the front-rear direction) occurs in the first displacement member A4440. Therefore, a large displacement amount (displacement amount in the front-rear direction) of the first displacement member A4440 can be ensured in a range where the electrical decoration board A416 is not formed (a corresponding range in front view).

  In addition, the aspect of decoration member A4550 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material, may be formed from a resin material having low light transmission, or an LED or an electrical decoration substrate may be disposed inside. Moreover, you may make it form the through-hole drilled in the decoration member A4550 in the front-back direction. Thereby, the light irradiated from electrical decoration board | substrate A416 through the through-hole can be made visible.

  Next, a twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the twenty-second embodiment, the arcuate wall portion A464 is rotationally displaced along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion A463, thereby restricting the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 even after the transmission protrusion A463 is separated from the deformed slide member A455. In the twenty-sixth embodiment, a case where the displacement mode is not limited to rotation will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 386 (a) and FIG. 386 (b) are front views of the displacement device A5000 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 386 (a) illustrates a state in which the displacement member A5001 of the displacement device A5000 is being displaced, and FIG. 386 (b) illustrates a state in which the displacement member A5001 is disposed at the end of displacement.

  The displacement device A5000 is configured to be slidable along a straight line, and is displaced along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 that is biased to the left by a biasing member (not shown) (coil spring or the like). Transmission member A5002 to which a driving force for transmission is transmitted, a pivoted support member A5003 pivotally supported at the end of the transmission member A5002, and one end in the rotational direction from both ends of the pivoted support member A5003 A thin-walled portion A5004 that is extended and connected to each other, a roller member A5005 that is disposed at the end opposite to the end of the pivoted member A5003 that is pivotally supported, and a guide groove that guides the roller member A5005 A5006 and A5007.

  The guide grooves A5006 and A5007 are a first region A5006 extending along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 and a second region A5007 deviating from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 starting from the end of the first region A5006. Composed. In the present embodiment, the second region A5007 is configured in an arc shape, but may be any shape that deviates with respect to the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001, and is not limited to an arc shape.

  The operation of the displacement device 5000 will be described. While the roller member A5005 is guided through the first region A5006 of the guide groove, the displacement member A5001 is pushed to the end of the transmission member A5002 (see FIG. 386 (a)).

  On the other hand, at the stage where the roller member A5005 is guided in the second region A5007 of the guide groove (see FIG. 386 (b)), the portion that contacts the displacement member A5001 is switched to the thin portion A5004. In this state, the displacement member A5001 Can be controlled to the left.

  In addition, the outer shape of the thin portion A5004 is set such that the position of the displacement member A5001 remains unchanged in at least one section while the roller member A5005 displaces the second region A5007 of the guide groove (the contact position of the displacement member A5001 is the displacement member A5001). The displacement of the displacement member A5001 during the displacement of the transmitted member A5003 can be restricted in the one section described above.

  Further, when the thin portion A5004 is configured to be deformable so as to be crushed toward the supported member A5003, the repulsive force of the deformed thin portion A5004 and the biasing force applied to the displacement member A5001 are balanced. The displacement member A5001 can be maintained. Thereby, even after the contact between the pivot member A5003 and the displacement member A5001 is released, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 can be suppressed.

  Next, the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. In the twenty-second embodiment, the case has been described in which the wiring HC is loosely wound around the fastening portion A475 so that the wiring HC is supported so as not to drop off from the fastening portion A475. However, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the support is movably supported by the support box portion A470. A case where the wiring HC is supported by the wiring guide member A 6560 to be relatively displaceable will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 387 (a), 387 (b) and 388 are rear views of the rear unit BU in the twenty-seventh embodiment. In FIG. 387 (a), the state in which the second displacement member A490 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated, and in FIG. 388, the state in which the second displacement member A490 is disposed at the extended position is illustrated in FIG. A state in which the two displacement member A490 is disposed at an intermediate position between the retracted position and the overhang position (rotation position of about 45 degrees) is illustrated. In FIG. 387 (a), FIG. 387 (b), and FIG. 388, the illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted to facilitate understanding of the structure of the rear unit BU.

  As shown in FIGS. 387 (a), 387 (b) and 388, in this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 356) is not formed, and instead, the wiring guide member A6560 is connected to the support box portion A6470. It is supported between the rear plate portion A480 (see FIG. 359).

  The upper end portion of the wiring guide member A6560 is rotatably supported by at least one of the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480. In the present embodiment, the rear plate portion A480 is inserted in a through hole formed in the upper end portion of the wiring guide member A6506 with a support protrusion A6471d protruding in a cylindrical shape on the back side of the support box portion A6470. By fixing, the wiring guide member A6560 is pivotally supported by the support protrusion A6471d so as not to drop off.

  The wiring guide member A6560 is formed in a long plate shape, and is fronted from the main body plate portion A6561 disposed opposite to the back surface of the support box portion A6470, the lower end portion of the main body plate portion A6561 and the middle abdomen. And a plurality of projecting portions A6562 projecting to the side (supporting box portion A6470 side).

  The main body plate portion A6561 is disposed close to the rear plate portion A480. Thereby, since the space on the front side of the main body plate portion A6561 can be increased, a large space for arranging the wiring HC can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to avoid applying an extra load to the wiring HC.

  In addition, since the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 from rubbing. In particular, in the present embodiment, the wiring HC is guided toward the back side (rear plate portion A480 side) by the protrusion A491d2 and the binding band KB, and a position between them (position sandwiched in the left-right direction). Since the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed at the position where the wiring HC is closer to the rear plate portion A480, the main body plate portion A6561 can be disposed between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480. Rubbing with the plate portion A480 can be effectively suppressed.

  Further, by setting the position where the wiring HC is pressed to the rear plate portion A480 side at a position overlapping the main body plate portion A6561, the main body plate portion A6561 is displaced in the direction along the displacement in synchronization with the displacement of the wiring HC. It is possible to easily cause the situation to occur. In this case, since the absolute value of the relative displacement between the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 can be reduced, the occurrence of rubbing can be suppressed. Therefore, wear of the wiring HC can be prevented and durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

  A displacement mode of the wiring guide member A 6560 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 387 (a), the wiring guide member A6560 is disposed at the limit position on the retracted position side. In the state shown in FIG. 387 (b), although the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced, the board-side connector A493c has a small horizontal displacement and a large vertical displacement. It occurs in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring guide member A 6560 maintains the posture shown in FIG. 387 (a).

  In the state shown in FIG. 387 (b), the upward displacement of the wiring HC is defined by the upper protruding portion A6562. That is, the protruding portion A6562 can function as a portion that restricts the upper and lower displacement limit of the wiring HC.

  In the state shown in FIG. 388, the displacement of the board-side connector A493c occurs mainly in the left-right direction, so that the wiring HC is also displaced in the left-right direction. In this case, although the wiring HC is wound around the wiring guide member A 6560 with a margin, the lower limit of the displacement can be defined by the lower projecting portion A 6562. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from excessively entering (sagging) toward the pinion A517 or the reinforcing arm portion A518.

  As described above, the arrangement of the portion around which the wiring HC is wound is configured so that the arrangement of the portion where the wiring HC is wound (the protruding portion A6562 on the distal end side of the main body plate portion A6561) can be changed. Compared with the part A475 and FIG. 356 (a)), the design length of the wiring HC can be shortened.

  As a policy for changing the arrangement of the portion around which the wiring HC is wound (the protruding portion A6562 on the front end side of the main body plate portion A6561), in the displacement from FIG. 387 (a) to FIG. 387 (b), When the board-side connector A493c is displaced in a manner approaching the protruding portion A6552 (the wiring HC is displaced toward the protruding portion A6552), the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced toward the loose side. On the other hand, in the displacement from FIG. 387 (b) to FIG. 388, the board-side connector A493c is displaced in a manner of moving away from the protruding portion A6552 (the wiring HC is displaced to the side moving away from the protruding portion A6552). The portion wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced to the tightening side. In the present embodiment, the wiring guide member A 6560 is configured to be displaceable when the state changes between FIG. 387 (b) and FIG. 388.

  Therefore, when the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced toward the tightening side, the wiring guide member A6560 suppresses the displacement of the wiring HC toward the tightening side (to the side where the wiring HC is expanded). It can be said that it is configured to be displaceable to the (displace) side. As a result, it is possible to avoid an excessively small curvature radius of the portion wound around the protruding portion A6552 of the wiring HC, and it is possible to prevent excessive deformation (breaking, chipping, etc.) of the wiring HC. .

  According to the present embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 that is disconnected from the second displacement member A490 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the wiring HC. Therefore, for example, it is a member that works in conjunction with the wiring guide member A 6560 and is arranged so that the player can see in any of the states of FIGS. 387 (a), 387 (b), and 388 (for example, the third By providing a decorative member that can be extended to the symbol display device 81 side (right side of FIG. 387 (a)), it is possible to produce an effect with the decorative member that is displaced by the displacement of the wiring HC.

  In this case, as described above, the second displacement member A490 and the wiring guide member A6560 are not completely interlocked, and the wiring guide member A6560 stops while the second displacement member A490 rotates 45 degrees from the retracted position. Since the wiring guide member A 6560 is configured to be displaced when the second displacement member A 490 rotates further (because the timing of the displacement is shifted), it is as if the decorative member is the second displacement member A 490. It can be visually recognized as being displaced independently.

  For convenience of explanation, the wiring HC is shown in a mode of winding once (a mode in which the wiring passes twice between the pair of projecting portions A6562), but is not limited thereto. For example, the wiring HC may be configured to pass between the plurality of protruding portions A6562 only once (not wound).

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  Although the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force to return the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be covered by gravity, so that the torsion spring 315 can be dispensed with.

  Although the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the pushing end has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for production (for example, production of a “button that cannot be pushed” can be performed). it can).

  In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the operation end (end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap is generated between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably disposed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the impact sound of the collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and it is possible to realize that the state of the “button that cannot be pushed” is not reached until the tilting device 310 is pushed. it can.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be formed of a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact can be changed, so that the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. The degree to which the tilting device 310 is raised immediately after the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is changed can be changed. Therefore, more operating states of the tilting device 310 can be formed than in the first embodiment.

  Further, the operation state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (the rising end can be sequentially switched). As a result, it is possible to produce effects in a complicated operation mode in which the rising position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched while suppressing the deterioration of the drive motor 342 by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operation speed and the direction of the motion of the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It is not a thing. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operation speed and the direction of the operation of the tilting device 310. For example, the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation shaft until the tilting device 310 reaches the push-in end (while it is descending), and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately before starting to move upward after reaching the end. In this case, while pushing the tilting device 310 repeatedly, the repulsive force that pushes back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force that pushes back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward motion of the tilting device 310 can be increased. .

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the housing member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibration device 5400 may be operated inside the housing member 5430. When the housing member 5430 is fixed to the tilting device 310, for example, the projecting leg 5424 is disposed on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321, and the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end. By configuring the portion 5424 to be pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400 can be changed to switch whether the weight member 5412 can contact the housing member 5430. good.

  In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. Since the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when operating the tilting device 310, the flexible member 5420 is operated by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher. The deformation amount of the weight member 5412 can be increased to form a state in which the weight member 5412 is in contact with the housing member 5430. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed down to the end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at a high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. The variation of the production can be increased.

  For example, if the player is to operate the tilting device 310, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays “Press the button.” Or the like, but “Press the button. By displaying such as “Large chance”, it is possible to give the player an effect of specifying how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) by the specified pressing method is set as a condition for transmitting vibration to the player, so that the button (tilting device 310) is pressed by the specified pressing method. The player's willingness to operate can be increased, and the operation of the button (tilting device 310) can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  Note that the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be reversed from the magnitude of the pushing speed of the tilting device 310 and the magnitude relationship. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the deformation amount of the flexible member 5420 may be increased, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be in contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. Thereby, it can suppress that a player pushes in and operates the tilting device 310 by force, and the failure which generate | occur | produces by pushing the tilting device 310 in force can be prevented.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case has been described in which the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the weight member 5412 of the vibration device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to contact the housing member 5430 in a state where the tilting device 310 is not pushed, and the weight member is provided on the condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of movement. 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it can be disposed so as to be unable to contact the housing member 5430. In this case, in the state where the tilting device 310 is not operated, the vibration can be transmitted to the player and the effect can be lively, but the effect of the change in the effect mode (expectation) to the player in a way that is difficult to notice the surroundings, such as stopping the vibration when pushed. The difference in degree) can be recognized, so that it is possible to produce a premiere feeling that only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change in the production mode except for the surrounding players. it can.

  As a variation of the production, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot contact each other, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 continue. It is desirable to cause both of the arrangement and the arrangement that can be brought into contact with each other, but this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can be caused by the difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other due to the shaft cam 5344 being deformed by the shaft has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Absent. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is drilled partially extends in a direction close to the disc cam 5344, and is configured to come into contact with the disc cam 5344 when the shaft is tilted and deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not an operating part, a larger frictional force is generated between the disk cam 5344 and the disk cam 5344 than when the disk cam 5344 contacts the operable release member 346. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which both the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to contact the front frame 14, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only the upper or lower panel support device 600 may be configured to be able to contact the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, a portion of the multifunction cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not contact the board support device 600 disposed in the upper position.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that descends toward the front side, and the front side end portion of the board surface support device 600 in the released state is extended to the back side. You may comprise so that it may arrange | position below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is put on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extending plate 621c, and the game board is in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom. 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Accordingly, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or may be a combination of left and right bending. In this case, it is preferable that a long path is formed immediately behind the ball guide opening 53 because the discharge of the ball becomes smooth. In addition, since the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed by using a path that bends back and forth, the firing path and the foul ball passage portion 145 are prevented from interfering with each other. Can be made easier.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 is a concave surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is visually recognized lightly. In addition, the light guide member 540 does not need to bend vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straight extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

  Although the case where the path | route bent up and down was formed by the channel | path formation ribs 467 and 487 was demonstrated in the said 8th Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the direction of bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of top, bottom, left and right.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 contacts the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched and sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the speaker connection line 453 is pulled out of the speaker assembly 450 by the resistance of the sandwiching. Even when the load is applied, it is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from being disconnected from the speaker 451.

  In addition, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H in the range of the projecting length corresponding to the concave depth of the wiring passage concave portion 464, and more than that. In the length range, a step may be provided in the middle so as to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, the range in which the double wall is formed by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be held while suppressing sound leakage.

  In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the front end side main body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chamber, and the intermediate main body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the base body side 461B, the intermediate body part 461M, and the distal end side body part 461T jointly by expanding the width in the front-rear direction of the intermediate body part 461M to the same extent as the proximal end body part 461B and the distal end side body part 461T. A large speaker room may be configured.

  Further, the base end side main body portion 461B has been described as having a larger volume than the distal end side main body portion 461T. However, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the same volume may be used. The arrangement of the speakers 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, and may be the center in the left and right direction, or may be a position between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

  In the eighth embodiment, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (the base end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T are connected). Although the case where they do not overlap with each other in the direction in which they are connected and the direction in which the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 form an opening is described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may comprise so that adjacent rib parts (for example, rib part 467d and rib part 467c) may overlap in the left-right direction view. In this case, since the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze shape, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire is inserted from the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491. It is possible to suppress fraud by making it difficult to conduct fraud that causes the tip to enter the game area and prolonging the time required for the fraud. In addition, as suppression of fraudulent activity here, suppression of fraudulent act itself, suppression of obtaining an illegal profit by fraudulent act (successful fraudulent act), etc. are illustrated.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotating plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotary plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked, the loose fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 but also during the expansion operation and the concentration operation. Can be made. Thereby, the sliding operation of the petal 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed at the same time, and it is possible to improve the effect.

  The loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a structure that expands and contracts with the rotation of the rotating plate 830 may be used, or a structure that rotates on a shaft different from the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 830 may be used.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force via the slide plate 930 that slides by the operation of the driving side arm member 910 has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip of the second effect member 940 are connected, so that the second effect member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing regulating unit 159 when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state is described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing regulating unit 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end portion of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game). As the right side of the board 13 is tilted to the front side), the part of the game board 13 disposed opposite to the operation part back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 interfere with each other. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

  In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the board support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12. It is determined whether or not 600 is in a fixed state based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 that are arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board surface that is disposed above the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the front frame 14 can be restricted from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. Thereby, since the function which determines the state of the board | substrate surface support apparatus 600 installed in the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunction cover member 171, the freedom degree of design of the multifunction cover member 171 can be improved. it can. For example, the multi-function cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not contact the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of synthetic resin collides with the metal board surface support device 600, so that the possibility that the multifunctional cover member 171 is damaged can be reduced. Can be used for a long time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 in which the light applied to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 540 is disposed on the right end and the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, it is configured to be switchable between a state where one surface of the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side and a case where the other surface is disposed on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate around a certain axis), it is possible to switch the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86. In addition, by changing the correspondence between the mode of light radiated to the center frame 86 and the moving agent that projects inwardly of the center frame 86, it is possible to diversify the production.

  That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LED 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 is caused to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 has a state where one surface is arranged on the front side and the other surface is Consider switching between the case where it is arranged on the front side. When the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory disposed opposite to the portion corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (location closer to the end) emits light, while the outer cover member When the surface on the side of 560 faces the mobile agent side, the mobile agent that is disposed to face the wide area of the opening 565 (in a wider range than the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, the light emission location of the mobile accessory can be switched by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light.

  In this case, for example, the production effect can be improved by operating the moving accessory in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emission location. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving agent, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side changes on the moving agent side, while the surface changes on the outer cover member 560 side while shrinking and changing so as to fit in the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 The moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so that it expands (extends) in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500 at the timing of facing. Thereby, the change which changes the location which light-emits according to operation | movement of a moving accessory can be implement | achieved by switching the attitude | position of the right panel unit 500, making the change of LED512a which controls light emission unnecessary.

  In the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the luminance is increased, the light amount is increased, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is Diffused (lower brightness, lower light intensity, light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the light emission target (liquid crystal or mobile accessory).

  Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front side end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is directed to the moving accessory or liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the moving accessory or liquid crystal). In this case, the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a posture arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510). While irradiating, light can be emitted in a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving agent or the liquid crystal. As a result, only the details of the mobile agent and the liquid crystal can be emitted, and a wide range of light can be emitted from positions away from the mobile agent and the liquid crystal.

  In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the case where the yarn Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 disposed in the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, as a configuration in which the sheet metal member is partially broken due to a load from the yarn Y8, the configuration is so weak that the folded portion falls, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position that passes when the folded portion falls. Also good. In this case, due to the fact that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and control is performed so as to forcibly stop the launch of the ball. It is possible to minimize the profits (losses incurred by the gaming machine hall) that can be obtained by those who perform cheating.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, various configurations for improving the frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or a spike-like hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be disposed to make a resin. The operating resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

  Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can enter the wall portion of the both-side slits 815 arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T. The recessed portion may be formed. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance due to the inclined surface 2803T entering the recessed portion.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the light traveling direction is set to the direction for collecting light or the direction for spreading light. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is a direction inclined upward in all the areas CCVIb to CCVIe, so that the height of the line of sight of a person walking to select a machine to be played is selected. It is possible to make the light easily travel toward. As a result, the customer collection effect of the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

  Further, for example, downward concave portions 2543c are formed in regions CCVIc and CCVIe that are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530, and upward concave portions 2543b are formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId that are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. May be formed. In this case, since the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player who is playing the pachinko 8010 and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined in the upward direction, the machine body to be played is selected. The light can be easily advanced toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking on the other hand, while the light traveling to the player side and the light emitted to the inner lens member 530 tilts downward. Therefore, for example, it is possible to produce an effect in which the sphere stored in the upper plate 17 is illuminated with light to make the sphere look gorgeous. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who is playing the game while improving the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in the vicinity of the left and right centers has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the position may be changed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300.

  Further, both a device formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300 and a device formed near the left and right center may be provided. That is, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 for dealing with the operation load of the operation device 10300, and the protruding shape portion for dealing with problems (ease of holding, durability, etc.) of the front frame 10014 alone. 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be provided separately.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the operation device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is disposed above the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 so as to be assembled (replaceable). It is not limited to this. That is, anything that can be assembled (replaced) is acceptable. For example, an audio device such as a speaker box that outputs sound may be used, a vibration device that is configured so as not to be operated by the player and that produces a vibration effect, an electric circuit board that performs a light emission effect, or a board box It may be a thing that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a triangular or circular concave and convex portion may be formed in a top view. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount directed within the operation load of the operation device 10300 and the frequency with which the load is applied. May be.

  Moreover, even if it is the same groove shape, a several groove | channel may be formed. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while narrowing the width of the grooves, the same effect as in the case where one wide groove is formed with respect to reducing the contact area with the operation device 10300 can be obtained. Can do. In the case of forming a plurality of grooves, each groove does not necessarily have to follow the front-rear direction, and may be formed radially in a top view, for example.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding shape portion 6413 protrudes below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 so that it can be used as a finger rest when carrying the front frame 10014. It is not something that can be done. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed longer in the vertical direction than the operator's finger carrying the front frame 10014. In this case, since it becomes possible to put a finger into the gap between the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 (can be used as a finger hook portion), the front frame 10014 can be easily carried. .

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the resin member 6427 is disposed below the operation device 10300 and the transmission of the load of the operation device 10300 is reduced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a member (coil spring, torsion spring, etc.) that generates an elastic urging force may be used, or a device for damping vibration such as a damper may be used.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not flexible or flexible, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the operation device 10300 from being transmitted to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate unit 6400.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around the lever support shaft 10331d1 by the drive motor has been described, but various aspects of the drive motor are exemplified. For example, a load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 from a rotating gear rotated by a drive motor by a simple gear mechanism load transmission, or a mechanism (for example, a rotating cam) that does not depend on the gear mechanism is interposed in the transmission path. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 via the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b so that the lever member 10340 can be idle when an overload occurs.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in a direction orthogonal to the plane on which the operation device 10300 is subjected to an operation load. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when an operation part that does not move on the plane is provided (for example, when there is an operation part that pushes in a left-right oblique direction), the balance (average) of the operation direction of each operation part The direction to be found (for example, the intermediate angle direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or the operation part with a high frequency of operation instructions is targeted (ignoring the operation part with rare operation instructions). The direction may be set. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the fastening loosening by the load at the time of operation can be suppressed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are combined by fastening has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be combined with an adhesive, or may be combined by fitting with a matching shape.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the direction in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have high rigidity (the direction along the top and bottom) and the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 are along, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 may be the left-right direction. In this case, the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily changed by the generation of the vibration of the vibration device 10366, so that the design around the operation device 10300 can be dynamically changed when the vibration occurs. it can. Further, the mode of the vibration device 10366 is not limited at all. For example, a linear motion type represented by a voice coil motor or the like, a rotary type represented by a vibrator or the like, or a combination thereof may be used.

  Further, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed of a transparent resin material instead of an opaque resin. In this case, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are configured to be irradiated with light emitted from a predetermined irradiation device, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover are changed in accordance with changes in the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. It is possible to produce an effect so as to change the appearance of the light visually recognized through the cover 10322.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described in which bending is easily suppressed regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 by forming the left and right muscle portions D24a with different inclinations, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by making the inclination angle of the left and right muscle parts D24a the same regardless of the position, the degree of rigidity of the direction in which the rigidity is improved by the left and right muscle parts D24a and the direction in which the rigidity becomes weaker with respect to that direction. The difference can be increased.

  In this case, for example, the left and right front covers 10321 and the right front are caused by the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is disposed in the upward position by setting the formation direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a along the direction Y17a. While suppressing the bending of the cover 10322, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is disposed in the downward position is increased with respect to the bending. be able to. That is, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be changed by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.

  Conversely, the formation direction of the left and right stripes D24a may be a direction along the direction Y17b. In this case, when the swing operation member 10310 is disposed in the downward position, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are prevented from bending due to vibration generated by the vibration device 10366, while the swing operation member When the 10310 is disposed in the upward position, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be flexed greatly due to vibration generated by the vibration device 10366. That is, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be changed by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be detached from the inner case member 10330 and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached has been described. Is not something For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 may be integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be assembled thereto. In this case, when assembled to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily assembled by bending, and after the subsequent assembly to the front frame 10014, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are restrained from bending. By doing so, the displacement suppression effect by interference with the protrusion interference part 6805a and the inner edge part Rm1 can be made effective.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate-like projecting portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 is in contact with the plate-like support portion 6426 in the upper and lower directions is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a fastening portion into which a fastening screw is screwed in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-like projecting portion 6453R, and the fastening screw extends above the plate-like support portion 6426 corresponding to the fastening portion. You may comprise so that it may penetrate in the penetration hole formed in a part. In this case, not only when the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced upward, but also when the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced downward, the load that is the basis of the displacement can be transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450, and the load can be distributed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 is fitted to the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 into which the gap between the main body 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b is inserted. Although the case where it was formed with a possible thickness (a dimensional relationship with almost no gap) has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the thickness of the inserted cover 10321, 10322 may be shorter than the dimension of the gap (may be configured in a dimensional relationship in which a gap between members is formed during assembly). In this case, when the displacement of the covers 10321 and 10322 (the displacement of the operation device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, the contact (collision) between the covers 10321 and 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 is prevented. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the flange portion 6582 is formed in a flat plate shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it is formed in a bowl-shaped cross-sectional shape protruding downward from the front side edge of the flange portion 6582, and the opposing plate portion 6561 of the partition member 6560 is formed in a shape that meshes with the shape, so that they are fitted to each other when assembled. Anyway. In this case, it is possible to prevent the partition member 6560 from moving away from the back support member 6580 to the front side in a state where the partition member 6560 is positioned at the assembly position.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the opposite side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction in a cross-sectional view, but the point is that the interval increases toward the front side. It is not something that can be done. For example, only one side surface of both side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be formed in a curved shape.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, for a player who visually recognizes the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, a milky white member 6541 and a partition member 6560 are disposed behind the player. The case where the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a and the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are configured to be easily recognized as a series of regions has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a may be formed in milky white in advance by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with the fastening screw in the fastening direction that is inclined downward toward the front side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be fastened with a fastening screw in a fastening direction that is inclined downward toward the back side. This fastening direction can be arbitrarily set depending on the placement space required by the parts placed near the fastening position and the selection of the side on which displacement is desired to be suppressed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the configuration in which the compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 in accordance with the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the partition member 6560 may be configured to be driven in such a manner that its front-rear width can be changed, and the degree of compressive force that can be generated with the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 may be changed.

  That is, if the front and rear widths of the partition member 6560 are shortened in such a manner that the rear side edge of the partition member 6560 is displaced to the front side, even if the upper lid member 6510 is deformed, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 A gap can still be generated between them, and a compressive force can be hardly generated. Since the compression force is less likely to be generated, the degree of holding the electric decoration board 6570 can be lowered. Therefore, the degree of displacement of the electric decoration board 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 is similarly deformed.

  In other words, by controlling the front-rear width of the partition member 6560, the behavior of the electric decoration board 6570 in a situation where the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 can occur can be changed. Similarly, to the front side of the electric decoration board 6570 The appearance of the irradiated light can be changed.

  Note that the front-rear width of the partition member 6560 is shortened during normal times (a space between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is left), and the front-rear width is widened by drive control so that the partition member 6560 and the back support You may comprise so that it may be changed to the condition where a compressive force may arise between the members 6580.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 that are supported by sandwiching the electrical decoration board 6570 have been described as being stacked on the front side of the front frame 10014. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the electrical decoration board 6570 may be disposed below the back support member 6580, or the electrical decoration board 6570 may be fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560 (a member separated from the acoustic device 6610). The substrate 6570 may be inserted (fixed) into the light receiving protrusion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521 inserted through the partition member 6560. In any case, it is possible to suppress vibration from the acoustic device 6610 being transmitted to the electrical decoration board 6570.

  In addition, the back support member 6580 (and the acoustic device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 arranged on the back side of the front frame 10014, while the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 10014. Anyway. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 can be separated from each other, so that the front frame 10014 is sandwiched between the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 in a closed state. It is possible to easily replace the electric decoration board 6570 to be replaced or to return the positional deviation.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the fastening screw is loosened by arranging the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 so as to face the head of the fastening screw and transmitting vibrations and generating abnormal noise when the fastening screw is loosened. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the light travels near the head of the fastening screw and the fastening screw is loosened, the shadow of the fastening screw may be viewed from the front side. In this case, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw by checking the presence or absence of a shadow, so in a noisy environment, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw was found compared to when grasping with abnormal noise. Can be made easier.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case in which the fastening direction of the fastening screw is set to be a direction inclined up and down with respect to the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it is good also as a direction which inclines to the left and right with respect to the front-back direction, and the location which inclines up and down or right and left may be mixed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 are formed from a shape extending linearly in a front view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be formed in a shape extending in a curve, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a lattice shape.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the side surface of the long rib 6734 is a smooth surface, and the case where light from the side surface is prevented from diffusing has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a light shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the long rib 6734 to prevent light leakage from the side surface. In this case, it is possible to easily suppress a decrease in energy of light traveling to the fin 6735. Further, a light shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735. In this case, if the entire side surface is covered, the light on the front side edge can be emphasized, and if a part of the side surface is covered (for example, using a light-shielding tape with a polka dot hole), Since the player can visually recognize the light according to the shape of the light shielding tape, the effect of light traveling through the side surface of the fin 6735 can be improved.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, in the lateral effect device 6700 on the left side of the pachinko machine 10010, the case where the long rib 6734 is not extended to the back side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, although the long rib 6734 extends to the back side, it may be formed so as not to be coupled to the inner extending portion 6732 at the left and right ends. Even in this case, the intensity of light near the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, light traveling in the front-rear direction through the long rib 6734 is emitted from the front side end of the fin 6735, thereby improving the light effect in the front view of the fin 6735. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (notch or the like) for emitting at least a part of the light traveling through the fin 6735 from the side surface of the fin 6735 in the middle of the front-rear width of the fin 6735 may be formed.

  For example, as shown in the present embodiment, the side surface is inclined in such a manner that the thickness gradually decreases as the fin 6735 moves toward the front side, so that the light of the fin 6735 reaches the front end of the front side of the fin 6735. It may be configured such that light can be easily emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735 by being configured to easily reach the side surface repeatedly.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the number of fastening positions of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the base member 6710 is small, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be fixed by nail fitting or meshing based on the shape relationship. In this case, since the fastening screw can be eliminated, it is possible to prevent the light effect from being lowered due to the shadow of the fastening screw.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the electric decoration substrate 18830 slides due to the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a speaker box similar to the acoustic device 6610 may be disposed close to the back side of the coupling base member 18810, and the electric decoration board 18830 may be slid by vibration of the speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction (direction along the direction Y17a) of the operation device 10300 is different from the vibration direction (generally the front-rear direction) of the speaker box, the displacement mode of the electric decoration board 18830 can be complicated.

  In addition, by generating a sound with a frequency outside the audible range from the speaker, a silent effect that allows the player to hear the sound while maintaining the state in which the player cannot hear the sound can be performed. can do. At this time, by configuring the vibration of the electric decoration board 18830 to be transmitted to the operation device 10300, the player who touches the operation device 10300 can grasp the vibration derived from the sound output from the speaker. Accordingly, for example, by controlling so that the silent effect is executed when a situation change advantageous to the player occurs, interest in touching the operation device 10300 can be improved.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the electric decoration substrate 18830 is supported so as to be floatable (slidable) in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may make it support the electrical decoration board | substrate 6570 of the upper production | presentation apparatus 6500 so that floating is possible. In this case, the rod member fixed to the front frame 10014 and supported by the rod member extending to the front side from the gap between the pair of left and right acoustic devices 6610 may be supported in a floating manner, or the rod member fixed to the wall portion of the acoustic device 6610. It may be supported so that it can float. Further, the sliding direction is not limited to up and down, and may be left and right or oblique.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the reference line X19 is along the vibration direction Y17a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line X19 may be arranged along any one of the vibration directions Y17a, or between the vibration directions Y17a (for example, intermediate) The reference line X19 may extend along the direction of the angle.

  Further, the direction of the reference line X19 may be set in consideration of the frequency of occurrence of vibration and the operation frequency of the lens member 10317. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a and operation directions are set in the first direction and the other directions, the frequency of occurrence of vibrations and operations in the first direction is extremely high, and vibrations in other directions. When the occurrence frequency of the operation is low, setting the reference line X19 along the first direction can suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a. .

  In the twenty-first embodiment, the case where the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is configured not to be transmitted to the operation device 10300 side has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation device 10300 may be configured to transmit vibration to the same extent as vibration transmission to the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 21410. In this case, a plurality of objects can be vibrated by the vibration device 21500.

  In the twenty-first embodiment, the case has been described in which the front portion of the overhanging portion De3 to which the protruding portion 21522 is pressed in accordance with the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is formed by a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. It is not a thing. For example, you may form the front part of overhang | projection part De3 by the plane which inclines up and down with respect to the front-back direction. In this case, the direction of the load applied to the vibration device 21500 from the overhanging portion De3 (the normal direction of the front portion of the overhanging portion De3) is a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. A component in the direction (vertical direction) intersecting the front-rear direction can be added to the displacement at the time (particularly the displacement toward the front side). Accordingly, since the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction, in addition to the case where the eccentric weight 21512 and the covering cover member 21530 collide in the front-rear direction, the vertical direction (protruding portion) A mode of collision in a non-guide direction that intersects the guide direction of 21534 can be configured, and the mode of vibration can be complicated.

  In the twenty-first embodiment, the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530 is formed along the front-rear direction, which is the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 vibrates (the direction orthogonal to the rotational axis of the eccentric weight 21512). Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 21534 may be formed along a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, may be formed along a curved line, or may be formed along a line having an arbitrary shape. . Thereby, the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are guided by the protrusion 21534 when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is generated can be arbitrarily set.

  In the twenty-first embodiment, the case where the fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened through the support hole 21428 of the lower dish forming member 21420 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the length of the fastening portion 21457 may be slightly increased so that a fastening force is not applied to the support hole 21428. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult for the vibration of the vibration device 21500 to be transmitted to the lower plate forming member 21420 through the plate portion having the support hole 21428, and the balls stored in the lower plate 50 vibrate as the vibration device 21500 vibrates. Therefore, the vibration effect by the vibration device 21500 can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the support plate portion A313 is not formed on the side where the notch A312a is formed in the rear case A310 and the end surface is disposed opposite to the base plate A60 has been described. It is not limited. For example, the formation of the support plate portion A313 may be maintained on the side where the cutout portion A312a is formed. In this case, while maintaining the rigidity in the state where the base plate A60 and the back case A310 are assembled, it is possible to maintain the effect that the boundary of light visually recognized through the base plate A60 of the game board A13 can be made ambiguous. it can.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rear case A310 is formed in a box shape with the front side opened is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the back case A310 may be composed of a plurality of members (as an assembly of divided members), and the outer edge is composed of a columnar portion extending from the bottom on the back side to the front side (no wall portion is formed). ) May be configured as follows. In this case, it is possible to secure rigidity by fastening and fixing the rear case A310 to the third symbol display device 81 and other movable units (the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700).

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case has been described in which the portion adjacent to the game board A13 on the right side is formed in a linear shape instead of a plane, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the linear portion may be formed on the left side. Further, in the case where the linear portions are formed on both the left and right sides, the formation ratio (ratio) of one of the left and right sides may be made lower than the other.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the metal plate member 75 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the game board A13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the metal plate may be disposed on the inner side (game area side) of the outer edge member A73. In this case, the metal plate is formed along the inwardly curved shape of the outer edge member A73, so that the function of improving the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 with respect to the metal plate, and the game area are provided. And a function of guiding a sphere that flows down. Further, a gap may be provided inside the outer edge member A73, and a metal member may be provided in the gap.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case has been described in which the front protrusion A86f that can contact the game ball is projected from the back side to the front side of the game area, but is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, a flange portion that extends from the front end portion of the right flow path forming wall portion A86d of the center frame A86 to the game area side may be provided, and a protrusion may project from the rear surface side to the rear surface side of the flange portion. In this case, even when the game ball flows down at a position closer to the front side of the game area, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the game ball, so that the game ball can be efficiently decelerated.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the front surface of the electric decoration board A416 and the protruding piece A417i do not come into contact with each other and the gap is open in the state where the electric decoration board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the electric decoration board A416 and the protruding piece A417i may be in contact with each other, or another member (for example, a flexible rubber-like member) is provided between the front surface of the electric decoration board A416 and the protrusion piece A417i. ) May be interposed so that a load can be transmitted from the protruding piece A417i to the electrical decoration board A416. Thereby, electrical decoration board | substrate A416 can be supported stably.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the second area AC2 is arranged closer to the third symbol display device 81 side in the area of the diffusion plate A415 of the first operation unit A400, and the second areas of the plurality of first operation units A400 are arranged. Although the case has been described in which AC3 is configured to surround the third symbol display device 81 from above, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second region AC2 may be configured to be scattered around the third symbol display device 81, or may be configured to be displaceable so that the second region AC2 reaches the front and rear of the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured in any arrangement.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the electric decoration board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an electrical decoration substrate and a diffusion plate on which light emitting means such as LEDs that irradiate light to the front side may be disposed on the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A420. Thereby, it can comprise so that a light emission means may be hidden from a player by arrangement | positioning of 1st displacement member A440.

  Further, the first displacement member A440 may be configured to move on the front side of the electric decoration board A416 or the diffusion plate A415. Even if comprised in this way, there can exist the same effect. In this case, you may comprise so that the electrical decoration board | substrate A445 may not be arrange | positioned by 1st displacement member A440. For example, one or a plurality of through holes may be formed in the thickness direction of the first displacement member A440, and light may pass through the through holes. According to this, since the position of the through hole changes due to the different arrangement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the position where the light emitted to the back side of the first displacement member A440 leaks.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first displacement member A440 displaces one side of the electric decoration board A416 or the diffusion plate A415 (the electric decoration board A416 is not cut through in front view) is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It is not a thing. For example, it may be displaced so as to pass through (cut through) the electric decoration substrate A416 or the diffusion plate A415 in front view. The entire first displacement member A440 does not need to enter the back side of the diffusion plate A415 in front view, and a part of the first displacement member A440 does not reach the back side of the diffusion plate A415 in front view. May be.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the electric decoration board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the electrical decoration board | substrate A445 does not need to be arrange | positioned by 1st displacement member A440. In this case, by arranging an electric decoration board on the back side of the first displacement member A440 and irradiating light on the front side, the ventilation opening A443c of the rear cover part A443 and the opening A442c of the interlocking plate part A442 are arranged. It can be configured such that the player can visually recognize the light that has passed therethrough.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted by the arc wall portion A464 of the gear A462 with the pin even after the transmission protrusion A463 of the gear A462 with the pin is separated from the deformed slide member A455 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the arc wall portion A464 is not formed, the gear A462 with the pin is moved to the position where the arc wall portion A464 was supposed to be arranged as the transmission protrusion A463 is arranged at a position away from the deformed slide member A455. A shutter member configured as a separate member may be configured to protrude, and the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 may be regulated by contacting the shutter member.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case has been described in which the plurality of guided protrusions A455c arranged on the deformed slide member A455 are arranged shifted in the direction (left and right) intersecting the direction A416x. It is not limited. For example, the plurality of guided protrusions A455c may be arranged on the same straight line parallel to the direction A416x, or may be arranged so as to be shifted in a direction intersecting with the direction A416x. In any case, the posture of the deformed slide member A455 can be stabilized.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced at different timings has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the length of the arc wall portion A464 of the pin-equipped gear A462 from the transmission projection A463 is shortened (at the same time, the projecting plate portion A456a is lengthened so as not to interfere with the arc wall portion A464). By reducing the angular width at which the deformed slide member A455 is restricted by the arc wall portion A464, the first displacement member A440 is stretched in synchronization with the displacement of the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position toward the extended position. It can be displaced from the exit position to the retracted position side. At this time, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member are adjusted by adjusting the length of the arc wall portion A464 so that the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is accommodated in the section where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is maintained. Interference with A490 can be avoided.

  In this case, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side, does it abut against the transmission projection A463 or does it abut against the end of the arcuate wall portion A464 opposite to the transmission projection A463? Depends on the operation mode of the pinned gear A462, that is, the drive mode of the drive motor AMT1. That is, by controlling the drive speed of the drive motor AMT1 (which may be constant speed or variable speed) and the stop timing to be different, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side is The case where the deformed slide member A455 (the deformed transmitted portion A456) is in contact with the arc wall portion A464 and the case where the deformed slide member A455 is in contact with the transmitting projection A463 can be made different.

  Here, it is assumed that the deformed slide member A455 (the deformed transmitted portion A456) that transmits the driving force to the first displacement member A440 is in contact with at least one of the arc wall portion A464 or the transmission projection A463. It is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the arc wall portion A464 and the transmission protrusion A463 are in a predetermined arrangement, a fixed wall portion is formed that protrudes toward the deformed slide member A455 (the deformed transmitted portion A456) along the direction A416x. May be. In this case, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side comes into contact with the arcuate wall portion A464 and the transmission protrusion A463 when the deformed slide member A455 (abnormally transmitted portion A456) contacts. It is possible to make a difference between the case and the case of contacting the fixed wall portion.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is disposed on the outer side of the rotation shaft of the second displacement member A490 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rotation axis of the reinforcing arm portion A518 may be formed in a cylindrical shape, and the wiring HC may pass through the cylinder to reach the board-side connector A493c. In this case, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 can prevent the portion of the wiring HC disposed on the opposite side of the second displacement member A490 from being displaced (pulled) via the cylinder.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is wound around the fixed fastening portion A475 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a flexible member formed of a flexible material in the same shape as the fastening portion A475 may be fixed to the front side of the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC may be wound around the flexible member. Further, the number of flexible members need not be one, and may be plural. In this case, even if the wiring HC is excessively pulled and comes into contact with the flexible member, the load generated on the wiring HC can be reduced by the deformation of the flexible member.

  The wiring HC may be supported not by the fastening portion A475 but by a simple columnar portion (a portion not used for fastening). In this case, there may be a gap (a gap narrower than the width of the wiring HC) between the columnar part and the rear plate part A480. Further, a binding band that is loosely wound around a fixing portion separately formed on the main body box portion A471, the rear plate portion A480, the wiring guide member A6560, or the like may be used. In this case, since the displacement of the wiring HC can be absorbed by the displacement allowed for the binding band, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced.

  Further, the fastening portion A475 is not fixed and may be configured to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the wiring HC. In this case, the direction of displacement is not limited to this, and various modes are exemplified.

  Further, the displacement of the fastening portion A475 may be generated in synchronization with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490. For example, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from entering the player's eyes by causing the second displacement member A490 to move in the opposite direction as it approaches the overhang position.

  The fastening portion A475 may be displaced by a method in which the fastening portion A475 is supported in a long hole so as to be displaceable, or the fastening portion A475 may be configured to be tiltable with the main body box portion A471 side as a fulcrum. In this case, the rear plate portion A480 is preferably formed with a guide groove, a notch or an interlocking portion so as to allow displacement of the fastening portion A475 while maintaining a coupling state with the fastening portion A475.

  Further, although the fastening portion A475 has been described as a portion around which the wiring HC is wound, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be configured as a pair of support wall portions that are formed in a wall shape on both upper and lower sides of the wiring HC and restrict passage of the wiring HC. In this case, the width of the range in which the wiring HC can be displaced can be defined by the support wall portion.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, one end of the wiring HC is connected to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 from the back side, and the other end is disposed on the front side of the board-side connector A493c. Although the case where it is connected to the third connector A416e3 from the back side has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the substrate to which the other end is connected may be disposed inward on the side surface of the back case A310. In this case, since the wiring HC can be connected to the substrate by extending to the side surface of the back case A310, the length necessary for routing the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

  In addition, for example, the substrate to which the other end is connected may be disposed on the rear plate portion A480 disposed on the back side of the substrate-side connector A493c. In this case, the length necessary for routing the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, it is configured so as to be recessed from the end face of the detected plate portion A455e that contacts the transmission protrusion A463 toward the opposing placement portion A456b, and the rotation angle of the pinned gear A462 is allowed to exceed the sixth angle. You may comprise as follows. In this case, since the same phase member A465 can rotate from the fourth angle d14 beyond the allowable angle dd1, the second displacement member A490 is moved from the retracted position by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction. It can be displaced to the overhang position, and further returned to the retracted position side. Thus, by switching the driving (excitation) length of the drive motor AMT1, the displacement mode of the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position, and the arrangement is maintained and the tension is maintained from the retracted position. It can be switched between a mode in which it is further displaced back to the retracted position side after being displaced to the exit position.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the upper transmission path UL1 and the lower transmission path DL1 have been described as paths through which driving force is transmitted by gears, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a cam, a gear belt, or a linear slider may be used.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case has been described in which the electric decoration board A715 for irradiating light to the rotator A720 is formed from a flat member, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may comprise as a sheet-like board | substrate formed in a sheet form from a flexible material. In this case, the substrate having the light emitting means for irradiating light to the rotator A720 can be easily arranged on the circumference surrounding the rotator A720.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rotating body A720 is disposed at a position that is always visible from the player has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rotating body A720 may be configured to be movable to an invisible position where the player cannot visually recognize. In this case, in a state where the rotating body A720 is arranged at the invisible position, the first rotating member A721 is rotated horizontally on the vertical axis with respect to the second rotating member A728 (the second rotating member A728 is stopped), Synchronous rotation is started in this state, and the relative relationship between the rotating first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 can be noted by moving to a position where the player can visually recognize the rotation while continuing the rotation. . As a result, the rotation of the rotating body A720 is continued in the case where the effect of associating information (for example, the jackpot expectation) useful for the player with the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 at the time of stopping is executed. The attention to the rotating body A720 can be improved.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 operate independently has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the effect unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is configured to be tiltable forward from the lower end, and the effect unit A710 is moved up and down when the second displacement member A490 of the first operation unit A400 is in the extended position. You may comprise so that presentation unit A710 may change to a tilting posture by receiving contact load. In this case, it is possible to execute the effect of changing the posture of the effect unit A 710 by arranging the second displacement member A 490. In addition, the structure which can tilt down production unit A710 is not limited at all. For example, the production unit A 710 and the lift unit may be coupled with a flexible member, or may be configured to be pivotally supported by the lift unit.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the shell portion A722 is made of an impermeable material and the light irradiated toward the central rotation member A724 in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotation member A721 has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shell A 722 may have a light-transmitting portion. Thereby, the relationship between the attitude | position of 1st rotation member A721 and the light quantity of the light which reaches | attains center rotation member A724 can be adjusted finely.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the annular gear member A723 meshed with the fixed gear SG intersects the axis of the fixed gear SG has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the annular gear member A723 may have a rack shape that extends linearly (the radius of curvature is equivalent to infinity), and the rotation shaft of the gear member to be engaged may be arranged in parallel with the fixed gear SG. . Combining the first effect member in which the rotation axis of the gear member to be engaged intersects the axis of the fixed gear SG and the second effect member in which the rotation axis of the gear member to be engaged is parallel to the axis of the fixed gear SG. Thus, it is possible to execute a complicated production.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first area AC1 of the diffusion plate A415 is formed near the outside of the operation unit A300 has been described. However, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the first area AC1 is formed closer to the inside of the operation unit A300 and the second area AC2 is formed in the operation unit by forming the electric circuit board A416 in a C shape that is recessed from the outside to the inside in a front view. You may form in the position near the outer side of A300. In this case, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight to a position closer to the outside of the operation unit A300.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 is irradiated with light from the left and right and from above has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an illumination board is disposed below the rotating body A720, and light emitted from light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the illumination board is conducted to the second support part A735, and the second support part. The player may reach the second rotating member A728 supported by A735 and be visually recognized by the player after conducting the second rotating member A728. In this case, unlike the second support portion A735, the first support portion A731 that supports the first rotation member A721 is difficult to transmit light, so that the second rotation member A728 is lit without causing the first rotation member A721 to shine. Can be executed.

  This assumes an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. That is, the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is directed to the first rotating member A721, and the second rotating member A728 that can be disposed between the first rotating member A721 and the light emitting means A715a transmits light. Therefore, it is difficult to control so that the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a reaches only the second rotating member A728 and does not reach the first rotating member A721. Therefore, by causing the second support portion A735 to conduct and allowing the light to reach the second rotating member A728, it is possible to execute an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the first rotating member A721 supported by the first supporting portion A731 disposed inside the rotating shaft is supported by the second supporting portion A735 disposed outside the rotating shaft. Although the case where it arrange | positions inside the rotating shaft of A728 was demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, the first rotation member A721 is rotated so that the opposite side to the side supported by the first support portion A731 is extended to the outside of the rotation shaft, and the second rotation member A728 is covered from the outside of the rotation shaft from the extended end side. An extending portion may be formed in a direction parallel to the axis. In this case, the first rotating member A721 supported on the inner side of the rotating shaft can be configured to turn around the outer side of the rotating shaft of the second rotating member A728, and an unexpected effect can be executed.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case has been described in which the area of the central rotating member A724 changes when the central rotating member A724 is rotated and displaced, as viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the area of the central rotating member A 724 in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A 715 a is changed by expanding the central rotating member A 724 without changing its posture or by projecting a moving body from the inside. Also good.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the shell A722 interposed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the predetermined member may be configured to advance and retreat by direct movement (sliding movement) between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a. Further, the light emitting means A715a may be arranged on the predetermined member.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a is always directed to the central rotating member A724 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the light axis of the light emitting means A715a may be configured to swing around the central rotating member A724, and may be configured to face the central rotating member A724 at a predetermined timing.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the central rotary member A724 and the shell A722 are driven by the same drive source has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, separate driving may be used, or the timing of driving with the same driving source and the timing of separate driving may be switched.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 is configured not to overlap all the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, the second rotation member A728 may be configured by a plate-like member formed so as to cover a plane passing through the rotation axis when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, and may be configured to generate timing that overlaps all of the optical axes. In this case, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A724, the influence of the central rotating member A724 on the orientation of the second rotating member A728 can be increased.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, when the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is changed in posture by 180 degrees, the shape in the front view is different, but it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may form from the shape where the shape in the front view becomes the same when the posture is changed by 180 degrees. Thereby, it can be made impossible to recognize the second state and the sixth state of the first rotating member A721 from the difference in the shape of the shell portion A722.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the light emitting means A 715a is arranged with the optical axis KJ facing the virtual plane VS has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of planes on which the optical axis KJ is arranged may be set. In this case, the plane through which the optical axis KJ passes does not have to pass through the rotation axis of the rotator A720.

  In the twenty-third embodiment, the case where the slide member A2729 is displaced in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the first rotating member A2721 may be configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, or the light-emitting unit A715 may be configured to be displaceable. Alternatively, the virtual plane VS may be changed. In any case, the appearance of the first rotating member A2721 when the light emitting means A715 is turned on is changed while suppressing changes in the outer shape (shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the slide member A2729 in the front view. be able to.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the case has been described in which a plurality of contact positions of the pin-equipped gear A 3462 with respect to the deformed slide member A 455 are arranged in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protruding tip of the transmission protrusion A463 is formed to have a large diameter, so that the transmission protrusion A463 comes into contact with the deformed slide member A455, and the position where the outer protrusion A3464 comes into contact with the deformed slide member A455. May be configured to be displaced in the front-rear direction.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the case has been described in which the plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 of the pin-equipped gear A3462 are in contact with the deformed slide member A455 at the same position, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the protruding plate portion A456a is further extended along the longitudinal direction from the end in the longitudinal direction (the direction orthogonal to the direction A416x in the back view) (on the opposite side of the detected plate portion A455e), and is extended. The wall portion orthogonal to the side surface of the portion when viewed from the back may be configured to extend to the pinned gear A 3462 side.

  In this case, the orthogonal wall portion and the outer diameter protrusion A3464 are arranged so as not to contact the arcuate wall portion A464 but to contact the outer diameter protrusion A3464. At the time of contact, it is possible to generate a load in the rotational direction (load in the braking direction) on the pin-equipped gear A 3462 while suppressing displacement of the deformed slide member A455 in a direction intersecting the direction A416x.

  Furthermore, by deforming the second guide hole A422b so as to extend in the short direction at the end in the longitudinal direction (in an L shape), the deformed slide member A455 can be displaced in the direction intersecting the direction A416x, and the displacement The first displacement member A440 may be configured to be displaced in conjunction with the movement. That is, the deformed slide member A455 pushed by the outer diameter protrusion A3464 enters the portion extending in the short direction of the second guide hole A422b, whereby the transmission protrusion A455b intersects the direction A416x. The displacement may be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451.

  In this case, when the deformed slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the short direction of the second guide hole A422b, the deformed shape is obtained by engaging the second guide hole A422b and the guided protrusion A455c in the direction A416x. The displacement along the direction A416x of the slide member A455 can be restricted. Thereby, even after the contact between the projecting plate portion A456a and the arc wall portion A464 is released, the displacement along the direction A416x of the deformed slide member A455 can be restricted.

  The displacement generated in the first displacement member A440 when the deformed slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the short direction of the second guide hole A422b is not limited at all. For example, a displacement along the direction A416x may be generated, or a displacement in a direction intersecting the direction A416x may be generated.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has been described as a semicircular shape, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a rectangular shape, a triangular shape, a semi-elliptical shape, or an arbitrary shape may be used. On the other hand, considering the durability, it is preferable that the shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is configured to taper (the width does not increase) toward the outer diameter.

  The same applies to the case where a recess is formed instead of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, the shape may be an arbitrary shape, but is preferably configured to taper toward the inner diameter (not to increase in width).

  The shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be symmetric with respect to a straight line passing through the rotation axis, or may be asymmetric. In this case, when configured in an asymmetric shape, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each direction.

  For example, in the rear view of the outer shape protrusion A3464, the side surface on the extended distal end side of the arc wall portion A464 (the opposite side of the transmission protrusion A463 along the circumference of the arc wall portion A464) is the extended base end side. You may comprise so that the angle with respect to the outer peripheral surface of circular arc wall part A464 may become small compared with the side surface (the transmission protrusion A463 side along the circumference of circular arc wall part A464).

  In this case, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 caused by contacting the outer diameter protrusion A3464 under the condition of rotating the pin-equipped gear A3462 at a constant speed is the opposite side of the retracted position (exceeding the extended position) from the extended position. The speed when moving toward the retracted position can be made larger than the speed when moving toward the projecting side. That is, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each displacement direction.

  As a case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the opposite side of the retracted position, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is a protruding shape, the first displacement member A440 may be displaced beyond the protruding position to the opposite side of the retracted position. In the case where a recessed portion is formed instead of the outer shape protrusion A3464, the first displacement member A440 moves toward the retracted position as the deformed slide member A455 slides by the size of the recessed portion. After the displacement, the case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the projecting position as the deformed slide member A455 is pushed and slid on the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 is exemplified.

  In addition, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position side, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has a protruding shape, the deformed slide member A455 slides by an amount corresponding to the protruding dimension. After the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the opposite side of the retracted position, the contact between the outer diameter protrusion A3464 and the deformed slide member A455 is released, so that the deformed slide member A455 is slid to move to the first displacement. The case where the member A440 is displaced to the overhang position (retracted position side) is exemplified, and when the recessed portion is formed instead of the outer shape protruding portion A3464, the deformed slide member A455 is formed by the size of the recessed portion. A case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position side with the displacement is exemplified.

  In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed closer to the rear plate portion A480 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may be disposed at a position away from the rear plate portion A480 (position close to the support box portion A6470), and the protruding portion A6562 may be protruded toward the rear plate portion A480. . Further, the main body plate portion A6561 may be configured to be thin (for example, a sheet shape). In this case, a wide area where the wiring HC is displaced can be secured.

  Moreover, although the case where main-body board part A6561 was formed from elongate shape was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may have a wide plate shape. In this case, since a member can be disposed between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC in a wide range, the possibility that the rubbing can be suppressed by the displacement of the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 is increased. can do.

  In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the projecting portion A6562 is fixedly disposed on the main body plate portion A6561 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the projecting portion A6562 is held so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561, and the main body plate portion A6561A rotates in response to the displacement of the projecting portion A6562 by a load received from the wiring HC. May be. That is, for example, a long hole (groove) through which the protruding portion A6562 is inserted is formed in the main body box portion A471, and the long hole (groove) is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561. In connection with it, you may make it form in the shape which rotationally displaces main-body board part A6561. In this case, since the arrangement of the wiring guide member A 6560 can be appropriately changed according to the magnitude of the load applied from the wiring HC to the wiring guide member A 6560, the load generated between the wiring HC and the wiring guide member A 6560 Can be moderately reduced.

  Moreover, although the case where main-body board part A6561 was pivotally supported rotatably was demonstrated, it is not restricted to this. For example, a slide movement may be used, or a movement that combines rotation and slide may be used.

  In addition, although the case where the second displacement member A490 is reciprocally rotated and displaced has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second displacement member A490 may be slid, or the second rotation member A490 may be displaced more than one rotation.

  In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the wiring guide member A6560 is disposed on the back side of the support box portion A6470 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed on the front side of the support box portion A6470, while the through hole for guiding the protruding portion A6562 to the support box portion A6470 (an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the main body plate portion A6561). May be configured so that the protruding portion A6562 protrudes toward the back side of the support box portion A6470 through the through-hole. In this case, as compared with the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480, a space corresponding to the volume of the main body plate portion A6561 can be made free. Accordingly, it is possible to easily secure a space in which the wiring HC is displaced, and to improve the design freedom of the main body plate portion A6561 (for example, from the gap size between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480). Can also be configured as a thick member).

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Points where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front>
In an operation device having an operation means for a player to push in, the operation device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position where the operation means protrudes from the player in the first state. 2 states are provided, and biasing means for biasing the operation means from the first state toward the second state is provided, and the pushing direction of the operation means in the second state is from the back side to the player. A gaming machine A1 that is directed to the side.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the player performs an effect in a manner that increases the expectation of the jackpot for the player at the advanced position, so that the player can easily operate the operating means at the advanced position with a large acceleration. Therefore, it was necessary to design the strength of the operation means to be high. In this case, there is a problem that the operation means becomes heavy as a whole, and the drive means for driving the operation means is enlarged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is the direction from the back side to the near side for the player. In this case, the momentum of pushing can be released by generating a portion that cannot be divided into operations as a slip between the player's hand and the operation means.

  In addition, when the operation means is pushed in and operated around the shoulder and elbow based on the player's gaming posture, it is difficult to apply force in the forward direction, so the player can naturally weaken the force applied to the operation means. Can do.

  In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is configured to be rotatable about a shaft bar disposed on the back side for the player, configured to be tiltable up and down around the shaft bar, and includes the operation means. A gaming machine A2 comprising a tilting means, wherein the tilting means places the operation means in a direction opposite to the player in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured to rotate, and the operation means is arranged in the opposite direction of the player in the second state, so that in the second state, It is possible to prevent the user from performing an operation of hitting the operation means.

  In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with the position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be pushed in easily, so a new push-in operation method that is difficult to push acceleration can be provided. The operation device can be prevented from being damaged by the player's pushing operation.

  The new push-in operation method is, for example, by placing the outer side of the left hand little finger near the shaft and placing the hand in the vertical position so that the thumb is directed toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating in a tilted state, a method of operating in a mode in which the palm is dropped toward the operating means from a state where the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft rod and the palm is positioned facing the operating means Is done.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the second state while ensuring the operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent destruction by pushing in the state.

  In the gaming machine A3, the operation device is configured such that the operation means can be automatically operated, and includes a drive means for generating a drive force of the automatic operation. The drive force of the drive device is a push operation by the player. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it acts in a direction to play and does not work in the opposite direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so the driving force in the direction opposite to the player operating direction. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operation.

  For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the push-in operation of the button is possible, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being subjected to a high load by being pulled from the player in the reverse direction when performing the operation of retracting the button.

  In the gaming machine A4, it is possible to form a maintenance state in which the operation device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and further includes a maintenance unit that operates by the driving unit, and the driving unit includes the eccentric unit via the eccentric portion. The rotating means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, and the rotating means is capable of changing the phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase, while maintaining the maintaining means. In the first phase and the second phase, when the maintenance state is released, the range in which the operation means can move is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation is performed. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means remains in the maintenance state, and the movement to release the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. By using the means, it is possible to change the movement range in which the operation device moves by the biasing means. Accordingly, a plurality of operation modes by the urging means can be configured.

  In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means can be moved in the biasing direction of the biasing means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means is increased or decreased according to the rotation speed of the rotating means. A gaming machine A6 configured such that the operation means moves following the movement of the maintenance means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the movement in the direction of the urging force of the urging means was caused only by the urging force, so the mode of movement was limited to one way. Since the movement mode of moving following the maintenance unit can be added to the operation unit, the type of movement mode of the operation unit can be increased. Thereby, the attention degree of the operation device can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the game machine includes a light emitting means that is disposed inside the operation device and that emits light toward the player, and in the second state as compared with the first state. However, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that, from the player's viewpoint, the area of the operation means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means in the player's viewpoint compared to the first state. As the light irradiation range is expanded and the area of the operation means is reduced, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the light and improve the production effect, and it is difficult to push the operation means unless aiming By setting it as the aspect which is, it can reduce the player's power at the time of operation.

  In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-permeable material, and the operating means moves close to and away from the display means between the display means and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes. Characteristic gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-permeable material, and the operating means moves to and away from the display means between the display means and the light emitting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<Points that enable repetitive strikes but have low repulsion during normal times>
In an operation device having an operation means that allows a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, a first state and a second state in which an operation range to the terminal position is wide as compared to the first state And a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and a biasing means for generating the biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine B1 comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state in accordance with the player's operation.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the force for returning the operation means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the operation means is automatically operated by the drive motor. However, in this case, the return of the operation means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operation means does not follow the player's operation, so that it is difficult for the player to perform the continuous hitting operation. There was a problem.

  According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the urging force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means, while the return of the operating means is desired to be faster. Since the return can be speeded up by pushing back the operation means with the two drive means, the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

  The gaming machine B1 includes continuous hitting determination means for determining whether or not the continuous hitting operation is performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke operating means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is determined based on the detection value of the continuous hitting determination means. A game machine B2 that determines whether or not to drive.

  According to the gaming machine B2, since it is determined whether or not the second driving means is driven based on the detection value of the continuous hit determining means, the player is not performing a continuous hit operation (for example, a single press operation or a long press) It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing the hand back until the second driving means operates until the operation is performed.

  In the gaming machine B2, the end detection means for detecting the position of the operation means and detecting whether or not the operation means is arranged at the end position, and whether or not the operation means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position. A position difference detecting means for detecting, and a movement direction determining means for determining the direction of movement of the operating means from the time relationship between the detected value of the end position detecting means and the detected value of the position difference detecting means. The gaming machine B3, wherein the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the step is a direction returning from the pushing end to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction returning from the push-in end to the first state, that is, the player's hand is moved from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the second driving device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second drive means is constituted by a voice coil motor that is oscillated and displaced along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. A gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, it is possible to generate a driving force for moving the operating means by effectively using the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3 includes a support frame that supports the operation means, and the second drive means elastically supports the drive motor that rotates an eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A support means, and the support means has a driving force that moves the operation means from the position of the first state toward the position of the second state as the operation means approaches the end position. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame in a state where the operation means is disposed at the terminal position and generates a driving force.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By separately generating the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force applied to the operation means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

  In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means based on the fact that the operation means is arranged at the end position, and makes contact with the support frame. A gaming machine B6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame, so the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Thus, the drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (a direction close to the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points where VCM is used as a braking device and vibration production device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operation means is provided, the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, a measurement means for measuring the speed of the operation means from a detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measurement means A threshold value judging means for judging whether or not the measurement value measured by the above is a predetermined threshold value or more, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold value judging means The driving force generated by the repulsion means increases when the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the importance of being lightly operated by the player is emphasized, the operation resistance may be reduced and the operation means may be damaged by the player's operation. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility of the operation means being damaged can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the operation of the player increases, and the operation of the operation means becomes a burden for a less powerful player. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold determination unit determines whether the speed of the operation unit is equal to or higher than the threshold, and when the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsion unit is increased. Therefore, the operating means can be decelerated only when necessary while reducing the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold value. Therefore, operability can be improved and destruction can be prevented by the repulsion means.

  In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, and the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold. The voice coil motor is driven in advance before the control is performed to push the voice coil motor to the extended position and the operation means is disposed at a position where the operation means can contact the voice coil motor. A gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means is disposed at a position where it can contact the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before starting, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operation means and the voice coil motor.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the gaming machine C3 is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor are brought into contact with each other, the operation means is controlled by increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor. The degree of braking of the operating means can be gradually improved while suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact between the voice coil motor and the voice coil motor, and the discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1, the repelling means is disposed so as to be in contact with the operating means, and generates a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by movement of the operating means by spring elasticity. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the deformation amount by spring elasticity, so that the driving force can be driven without a time delay even when the movement speed of the operation means is high. Can be generated.

  In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the case where the value measured by the threshold determination means is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold with the case where the value measured by the threshold determination means is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold. Thus, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means opposite to the end in contact with the operation means is narrowed.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the movable region of the end of the repulsion means opposite to the side in contact with the operation means is narrowed. The elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased when the speed is high.

<Driving means is prevented from being damaged by interrupting transmission of driving force with a clutch>
In an operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device includes a drive means for generating a drive force for operating the operation means, a transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the operation means, Releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, and the releasing means outputs the driving force when a load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a possibility that a large load is generated in the drive system when the operation means is operated during the automatic operation when the operation means is automatically operated for the production. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the release means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the drive means and the operation means exceeds a predetermined amount via the transmission means. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means when the operation means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system is suppressed. it can.

  In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction that is opposite to the first direction, and is driving in the first direction, The game machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is in the second direction.

  Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be released depending on the operation direction of the driving means, the operation means is operated by the player when driving the driving means in the operation direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released. In such a case, a large load may be generated in the driving unit. For this reason, the degree of freedom in rendering when operating the operating means to produce is reduced.

  When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the release direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward, or the release member moves in the release direction. Switch whether to move in the reverse direction. In this case, it is possible to create two modes of button operation (two types of release pattern and non-release pattern), but in both cases it is necessary to discontinue the driving force.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means.

  An example of a method for releasing transmission is that the clutch moves in a direction that intersects the operation direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction means, for example, the purpose of excluding the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

  The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a biasing unit that biases the driving unit and the transmission unit to a state where the driving force can be transmitted, and the release unit is a contact portion between the driving unit and the transmission unit And engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force in a state where they are engaged with each other, and the engaging teeth have both surfaces opposite to the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. The gaming machine D3 is configured to have a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers away from each other.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the biasing means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the release means engages the driving force in the engaged state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, since the engaging teeth are inclined in such a manner that both surfaces facing the operation direction of the driving means taper away from the abutting surface, the transmitting means is separated from the driving means by the engagement of the engaging teeth. It can be made to separate, and thereby the transmission of the driving force can be released.

  Further, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the driving means and the transmission means, and when the transmission means is separated from the driving means, the urging force is applied in the operation direction of the driving means via the engagement teeth. A load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state where the driving force is transmitted and the state where the transmission is released.

  In addition, the size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmission unit as the transmission unit is further away from the driving unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission unit from becoming excessive when the phase difference between the transmission unit and the drive unit increases.

  In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically restored instead of completely disappearing. Thereby, when a player releases a hand, a button can be started to operate within a short time.

  In other words, when the button is driven as “production”, if the player holds the button, one phase of the button operation elapses. And if the player releases the hand on the way, moving from the end of the one phase will increase the period that the button is stopped, and reduce the feeling that the player has started to move because the load on the player has been released. Can be removed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling that the player has started moving because the player's load has been solved.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the engaging surface of the transmitting means and the releasing means is formed in a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage. That is, when the tip of the engagement surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means approach and separate from each other, the transmission means and the release means abut against each other and the transfer of the release means Stopping the movement along the direction approaching and separating from the means can be suppressed. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate at an early stage.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operation unit is different between the case where the driving unit is continuously operated in the forward direction and the case where the driving unit is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission is canceled without being limited to any of the operation modes. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine D5, the operation mode of the operation unit is the operation mode of the predetermined period from the start of the operation of the drive unit when there is a difference between whether the drive unit operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction. Similarly, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the predetermined period of time is different.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means, the operating mode of the predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is the same. Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operation means can be improved.

  Here, the difference in the operation mode of the operation means is entangled with information that will be beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation, so that the operation mode of the operation means to the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. Can watch over.

  In addition, since the difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the driving means, if the operation direction of the driving means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation without watching the operation of the operation means. Can do. However, the driving means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound, so the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance. Can observe the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the cam rotation>
In an operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device includes a drive means for generating a drive force for operating the operation means, a transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the operation means, A first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; Urging means for urging the operating means in the direction from the first position toward the second position; and operating means for moving from the first position toward the second position by the urging force of the urging means. And a terminal means for forming the movable terminal of the first and second movement terminals in a changeable manner, wherein the first means engages with the operation means to suppress a change in position of the operation means. 1 means of said operation Release load means for giving the first means a load for releasing the engagement with the means, and the release of the engagement by the release load means and the change of the movement end of the operating means in the end means are a single A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is performed by the driving means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operating means operated by the cam is fixed at the first position, and the fixing is released by the releasing load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is extended. There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging operation can be changed by a termination means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement amount of the extension operation of the operation means is changed depending on the cam phase at the time of unlocking, the cam phase at the time of unlocking is changed variously. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation operate with different driving forces. Accordingly, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the arrangement space of the driving means becomes large.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. As a result, the drive means for changing the end position of the operating means by the end means and the drive means for moving the release load means can be used together, so the number of drive means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E1, the change of the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detection means such as position sensors that detect the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of components can be reduced.

  As a method for switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is constituted by a cam and the release load means is constituted by a projection rotating coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation period between the cam and the projection, An example is a method in which the cam rotation and the projection rotation are out of synchronization when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and the cam rotation and projection rotation are synchronized in the other phases.

  In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by a load applied from the first means, and the release load means and the transmission means are operated by the release load means. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is switched whether or not to operate synchronously.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Therefore, the synchronous state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

  In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a first rotating member that rotates, the operation means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates second rotation. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation cycles.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but the rotation period is different, so the second rotating means Plural types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by contacting the first means with the phase.

  According to this configuration, since the operation of the first means is released from the state in which the operation means is maintained at the first position and a plurality of types of end positions can be prepared when moving toward the second position. , Can widen the range of production. For example, an effect of gradually separating the end position from the first position and an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In the operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device includes a first position of the operation means, and a second position reached by the operation means when the player operates from the first position. A gaming machine comprising: a vibrating means configured to move between and having a vibrating part that vibrates; and a receiving means arranged so as to come into contact with the vibrating part, wherein the operating means is arranged at the first position Then, while the vibrating part is in a separated state incapable of coming into contact with the receiving means, when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibrating part is brought into contact with the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 that is in a contact state.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with operating means that can be operated by a player and vibration means for transmitting vibrations to the player via the operating means or the casing of the gaming machine (for example, JP (See 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, when the vibrating means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the chassis of the gaming machine. Or, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the housing of the gaming machine, it is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means when performing the effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operation means. . Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the operation means, and an operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operation means at the moment when the operation means is pressed). In some cases, the start of vibration may not be in time before releasing the hand, and there is a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged at the first position or operated by the player and arranged at the second position. Therefore, even when the vibration unit is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operation means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibration part occurs before the player pushes in, the vibration part can be vibrated before the player releases his hand regardless of the player's mode of operation. The vibration can be transmitted to the person.

  In the gaming machine F1, in the separated state, the vibration means is arranged so as to project over an occupied area occupied when the operation means is arranged at the second position, and the operation means moves to the second position. Thus, the gaming machine F2 is changed to the contact state when the vibrating means is taken out of the occupied area.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operation means, so that the state changes from the separated state to the contact state. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibration part can be changed, and the intensity of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration with respect to the player's operation intensity can be performed by vibrating the vibration means in the same manner without any particular change in the driving mode.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via support means having spring elasticity.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the supporting means can position the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibration means can be separated from each other to prevent transmission of vibration, and displacement generated in the vibration means during vibration can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F3, in the contact state, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, it is possible to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means are brought into contact by using the elasticity of the supporting means. That is, momentum can be applied when the vibrating portion moves in a direction closer to the receiving means due to expansion and contraction of the supporting means.

  In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means is characterized in that the deformation resistance along the operation direction of the operation means is lower than the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operation direction of the operation means. .

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in deformation resistance of the supporting means, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be set finely. it can.

  Thereby, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operation means is slight, it is possible to make a difference in the amount of expansion / contraction of the support means, and it is possible to make a difference in the load generated between the vibration part and the receiving means. .

  In addition, as a method of varying the deformation resistance, when the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, a method of extending the rubber legs along the operation direction of the operation means, or the support means surrounds the vibration means. When the rubber member is composed of a rubber member, a method of changing the deformation resistance in each direction by manufacturing the rubber member by two-color molding, and a rail that guides the operation means in a direction along the operation direction Examples of the method include a coil spring that urges the vibration means along the operation direction of the operation means.

  In gaming machine F3, gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the portion with which the vibrating portion abuts is said receiving means, and said receiving means is configured as a means different from said operating means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, vibration is not transmitted to the player via the operating means, but vibration is transmitted to the player via the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibration means from being transmitted to the drive means via the operation means and the transmission means, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive means. Thereby, durability of a drive means can be improved.

  Further, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the player's hand operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration during the operation from stopping the operation.

  In addition, as a receiving means, for example, a part near the upper plate to which a game ball is supplied or an edge part of a glass frame, etc., without being conscious of the player during the game. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a housing part that partially surrounds the operating means, and the like.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) possible at the mounting part>
An operation device having an operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device is configured such that the operation means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, A driving unit that generates a driving force to be driven; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the operation unit. The transmission unit includes a deforming portion that is elastically deformed by an overload. A gaming machine G1 to play.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, operating means operable by a player, driving means for generating a driving force for driving the operating means, and transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means, There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the driving means is gripped and fixed by the player, if the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means, or the transmitting means There is a problem that loads are accumulated in the connecting portions between the driving means and the drive means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when an overload is applied to the operation device, the deformed portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, thereby connecting the operation means and the transmission means, or the drive means and the transmission means. It is possible to alleviate the load applied to the connecting portion.

  In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, and the deforming portion forms a connecting portion with the rotating shaft of the cam member, and the rotating portion is moved to the rotating shaft by the elasticity of the deforming portion. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that a fixed force is generated.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion has a role as a portion that bears elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means and a role as a portion that generates the supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft. Therefore, the structure of the transmission member can be simplified by sharing the function. For example, an individual fixing member such as an e-ring can be omitted.

  In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a protruding portion protruding in parallel with the rotation axis, the protruding portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is applied to the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotating shaft is inclined.

  Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can be performed, for example, by displacing the protruding portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it is difficult to configure the cam member and the projecting portion with a single member, which may increase the number of members.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deforming portion is in a mode in which the rotation shaft tilts with respect to the cam member. On the other hand, as compared with the case of sliding, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine G3, the elastic deformation resistance of the deforming portion is compared with the rotation shaft in comparison with a first rotation direction in which the cam member rotates about a straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the protruding portion. Deformation resistance is increased in the second rotation direction in which the second rotation direction is rotated about a straight line that is perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the protruding portion and the extending direction of the rotation shaft. G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G3, by changing the deformation resistance of the deformation portion for each direction, the state after the deformation portion is elastically deformed in the direction of the rotation axis direction, Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in a direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member moves, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means is reduced by the elastic deformation of the deformable portion. can do.

  In the gaming machine G3 or G4, the game machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the cam member changes its posture by elastically deforming the deforming portion. The gaming machine G5, wherein the cam member and the friction member abut.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformed portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member Therefore, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

  Any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, comprising a detecting means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is inclined and displaced with respect to the shaft.

  Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected by the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred based on the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the drive means for a predetermined period before the occurrence of the overload is detected. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is small, but the configuration of the detection means becomes complicated and expensive as the arrangement interval of the detection means is reduced. For this reason, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of overload at an early stage at low cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted with respect to the shaft. Thus, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detection means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the drive means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of detection means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the driving means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent ball goto with thread. Game machine H>
In a gaming machine including a foul ball passage through which a foul ball returning to the launching device can pass among the game balls launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows passage of the flowing down game ball. A gaming machine H1 comprising unidirectional obstruction means for obstructing the progress of a backflowing object.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an illegal act performed by placing a thread cutting blade inside a guide path for guiding a game ball from the upper plate to the launching device and driving the game ball connected with the thread into the game area There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (see, for example, JP-A-2015-024179). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth at the time of launch and the thread is cut with the tension generated at that time, if the launching strength of the game ball is weak, the game ball will not be able to cut the thread completely. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball. Therefore, for example, prepare a fraudulent tool with game balls connected to both ends of the thread, and launch one game ball connected to one end of the thread with low firing strength to flow into the foul ball path and return it to the player side. While holding one of the game balls, the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread is driven into the game area, so that the thread can be removed from the guide path and one through the foul ball path. The game ball and the other game ball can be connected to each other with a thread, so that the other game ball is placed in the game area by applying a load to the thread connected to the other game ball from the outside. There is a problem that there is a possibility that an illegal profit can be obtained.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the one-way blocking means can be used even when a fraudulent act that applies a load to the other gaming ball using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage is performed. However, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illegal profits by obstructing the movement of the yarn in the backward direction of the game ball.

  In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage includes a bent portion that bends the flow path of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the yarn guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the yarn can be cut early.

  In the gaming machine H2, the bending section includes a load unit that applies a load to the object that flows backward without applying a load to the flowing game ball on the inner corner side of the bending.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to an object (for example, a thread-like member) that flows backward by the loading means.

  In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is disposed in a recessed portion that is recessed with a width less than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H3, by preventing the gaming ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the loading means and the gaming ball are prevented from colliding, and the loading means is broken. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the gaming machine H5 is provided with regulation means for regulating movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball path is restricted by the restriction means, so that between the thread-like member and the load means When the load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage so that the load applied to the member on the yarn can be prevented from being weakened.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a payout ball is a portion that is provided with a receiving tray that is a tray that first arrives on the front side of the front door, and the receiving tray is a portion that discharges the game ball discharged from the payout device The gaming machine H6, wherein the ball discharge portion is disposed above the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball paid out from the paying device passes through the front of the discharge side outlet of the foul ball path, so that When an illegal act that applies a load to the other game ball using the thread guided to the game area is intentionally applied to the game ball to be paid out, the load is applied and the durability of the thread is reduced. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball discharge portion, which is a portion for discharging the game balls discharged from the payout device, to the receiving tray that is a tray that the foul ball reaches first on the front side of the front door is The gaming machine H7 is lower than the lower end of the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, an illegal act of applying a load to the other gaming ball using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage was performed. In some cases, it is possible to easily damage the yarn by the game balls to be paid out.

<Structure of the panel presser. Gaming Machine I>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side opposite to the game means and accepts the game means from the one side, and the receiving means includes the gaming means. It comprises state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to an usable state, which is a usable state, and the state changing means includes the gaming means in the use state. In this case, the gaming machine I1 is provided with proximity means that is close to the game means from the one side.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state in which the game board can be detached from the inner frame, which can be rotated in a rotation direction parallel to the front surface of the game board. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, JP-A-2005-230420). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the fixing means can be changed in state only after the game board is pushed into the use position, so that when the game board is pushed halfway, it is pushed again. Therefore, there is a problem in that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means includes the proximity means that comes close to the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is put into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means abuts against the game board and exerts an effect that the game board can be pushed to the position of use by adding a pushing force.

  In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side as the state changes to an unusable state that disables the gaming means. .

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, so that the gaming means is removed. There is an effect that the work efficiency of the work can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retreats to the outside of the gaming means as the gaming means is disabled. A gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means retreats outward from the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the gaming means removal work can be improved and Since this process is performed in accordance with the state of disabling the means, work efficiency can be further improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the state changing means includes a contact means that receives a load from the gaming means when the state changes to a usable state.

  According to the gaming machine I4, since the state change means changes to an available state when the contact means receives a load from the game means, the operation state can be used as a series of flows by pressing the game means against the state change means. The state can be changed.

  In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is configured such that one side of the receiving means is supported by a shaft and the other side is approached to be received by the receiving means, and the state changing means is the receiving means. It is arranged on the other side of the game machine I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I4, it is possible to efficiently apply a load to the contact means via the gaming means by utilizing the width dimension of the gaming means.

  Any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5 includes a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means, and the closing means cannot be used so that the state changing means cannot use the gaming means. When maintaining the state, a gaming machine I6, comprising a blockage restricting section that makes it impossible to block the opening on one side of the gaming means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means determines whether the gaming means can be used depending on whether the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. Whether or not to do so can be determined. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means is kept in an unusable state.

<Reverse cup and harness band prevent piano wire goto. Gaming Machine J>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side opposite to the game means and accepts the game means from the one side, and the receiving means includes the game means and the game means. A gaming machine J1 comprising an arrangement means arranged on a path communicating with the outside, and the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of locations.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against a fraudulent act of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573) ). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is only one place for preventing fraud and the effect of preventing fraud is not sufficient.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, since the arrangement means is arranged in a path in which the piano wire may be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, it prevents fraud. The effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different between a first means for suppressing entry of a member from the outside at a first location and a second means for suppressing entry of a member from the outside at a second location. A gaming machine J2 characterized in that it suppresses entry of members from outside by a method.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different in the first place and the second place because the method of suppressing the entry of members from the outside is different. As compared with the case where the number of the members is increased, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

  In addition, the method of suppressing the approach from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking a route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraud by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the placement means includes an intrusion restricting portion formed from a cup shape that opens toward the outside of the receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, whereby further intrusion of the invading member can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting an electrical wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry restricting portion in a path from the outside to the game means. Characteristic gaming machine J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, in addition to detecting the change (such as disconnection due to heat) that occurs in the wiring due to the high heat at the time of occurrence of fraud that penetrates the entry restriction portion due to the high heat, The effect which suppresses the approach of a member can be made easy to produce.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the placement means includes a cancellation means for guiding a member that has entered from the outside to a resolution area far from the gaming means.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the member that entered from the outside is guided by the placement means to the cancellation area far from the gaming means. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent a member entering from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of decorative plate with 5 sheets. Including fraud prevention. Gaming machine K>
A first means and a second means, which are opposed to each other along the first direction and have at least one side connected thereto, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. And a third means comprising a connecting portion for connecting the first means and the second means, and a connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting the first direction. A gaming machine K1 characterized by that.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means that are arranged opposite to each other and connected at at least one side are disposed between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a gaming machine provided with a third means (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing. When the first means and the second means are connected, the load along the first direction is the first. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by the three means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion that connects the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction is set to the third means. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the vehicle. This can prevent the third means from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine K1, the connecting portion is disposed apart from the third means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

  The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes connected means that is connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. The gaming machine K3 is connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction adjacent thereto and fitting them together.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the gaming machine K3 includes a coupled means coupled to the other side of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. Are connected and fixed by fitting that occurs by displacing the second means relative to the first means in the third direction adjacent to the connected means, so that the first means oriented in the direction intersecting the third direction and Resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3, since one side of the first means and the second means is arranged to be exposed to the outside, the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. Thereby, even if it is a case where the fraudulent act which destroys a fitting part and decomposes | disassembles a 1st means and a 2nd means arises, the detection of the fraudulent act can be accelerated.

  In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening and fixing direction is the same direction as the third direction. .

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction of the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

  In any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, the light irradiating means for irradiating light toward the first means or the second means and being fixed to the connected means, and one of the first means or the second means And a light guide unit configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiation unit into the inside of the game machine K6.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation between the first means and the second means and the light guiding means.

  In the gaming machine K6, the gaming machine K7 is provided with an abutting means for surface abutting in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K6, maintaining an interval corresponding to the size of the abutting means in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means. Can do. This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by receiving a load in the opposite direction. Can do.

  This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from changing even when the first means or the second means is illegally attempted to disassemble, even if a load is applied in the opposite direction. can do.

<Point L that utilizes light guiding means that bends. As point, it is not achieved>
A light guide means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in the irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projection means for projecting light that is disposed opposite to the light guide means and passes through the light guide means, The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means includes a concave facing portion that is disposed to face the concave portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion that is disposed to face the convex portion of the light guiding means.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end surface (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, it is necessary to change the intensity of incident light in order to partially change the intensity of surface emitting light. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection target device includes the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing even if the intensity of light incident on the light guide device is constant. The light emission intensity of the projection means can be changed by the unit.

  In the gaming machine L1, the projection means is configured such that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. A gaming machine L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion is consciously weakened so that the light emitted from the light guide means is collected at the concave facing portion. The production effect of the production by the light of can be improved.

  The gaming machine L2 includes an opposite projection unit that is disposed on the opposite side of the projection target unit with the light guide unit interposed therebetween, and that projects the light that has passed through the light guide unit. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion disposed opposite to the concave surface portion of the light means and a portion disposed opposite to the convex surface portion of the light guiding means are formed of substantially the same light transmittance.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, a portion of the back projection means that is disposed opposite to the concave surface portion of the light guide means and a portion that is disposed opposite to the convex surface portion of the light guide means are light Since the transmission is formed of substantially the same material, when the same light is incident on the light guide means, the light effect mode viewed through the projection means and the light effect mode viewed through the opposite projection means Can be different.

<Bus reflex speaker arrangement structure. Gaming Machine M>
A first means and a second means which are disposed opposite to each other and are fixed to each other and constitute an internal space in a fixed state; acoustic means disposed in a state where at least a part of the internal space enters the internal space; A gaming machine M1 comprising: bending means for forming a bending path in the internal space.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are arranged at both left and right end portions of a front frame, and an effect is produced by sound output from the speakers (see, for example, JP-A-2006-16088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave that travels to the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center position of the gaming machine, and is sent out of the gaming machine, so that an effect that makes the bass sound easy to be performed There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left and right width of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending path is formed in the internal space of the first means and the second means by the bending means, by configuring a path longer than the length of one piece, The regulation of the left-right width can be canceled and the vibration wave can travel at an arbitrary distance.

  In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in a manner in which a load is applied in the opposing direction, and the bending means is rib-shaped from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other. A gaming machine M2 comprising a projecting portion projecting from the projecting portion, and a projecting tip of the projecting portion abuts against the other of the first means or the second means.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, the projecting tip of the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means Is brought into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means as a result of fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap in the bending path.

  The gaming machine M1 or M2 includes an opening that connects the internal space and the outside, and the opening passes through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 that is blocked by the above.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member, A wall constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed with the passage member passing from the internal space to the outside.

  In the gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed closer to the acoustic means than the projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being sandwiched between the projecting portions and being disconnected. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and an effect means that is arranged below the support fastening means and produces an effect accompanying the game A gaming machine M5, wherein the production means supports the support fastening means from below.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the presentation means from below, so that the weight of the support fastening means is reduced without compressing the space used for the presentation. Things can be adopted.

<Moveable unit, flower that rotates in reverse. Petals that stop along the way. Game machine N>
A base member, first displacement means supported by the base member so as to be displaceable, drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state that is displaced in the displacement direction of the first displacement means, In a gaming machine comprising a second displacement means switchable between a non-following state that is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, at least when the second displacement means is in a following state, A gaming machine N1 comprising third displacement means that is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacing means is displaced in a direction different from the direction of expansion and contraction of the first displacing means (see, for example, JP 2011-229580 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first displacement means and the second displacement means have the same direction of displacement when the first displacement means expands / contracts, resulting in a slow performance and insufficient effect. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, so the displacement speed of the second displacement means is increased. The speed can be visually recognized with reference to the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels as a bodily sensation can be increased compared to the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

  The gaming machine N1 includes a resistance unit that generates a resistance against the displacement of the second displacement unit, and the resistance unit is configured to be able to change a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. A gaming machine N2.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1, due to the action of the resistance means, a follow-up state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and a non-follow-up state that deviates from the follow-up state. Since the switching point can be changed, the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means relative to the first displacement means can be increased. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by using a driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

  In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is disposed so as to be visible from the front.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible so that the player can visually recognize the resistance means with the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can be shared with the function as a production device.

  The gaming machine N4 includes rod-like shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means pivotally supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means so as to be rotatable coaxially. A gaming machine N5.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation shaft of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so the first displacement means, As the posture of any one of the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the posture of the other member or means also changes so as to prevent the displacement resistance from rising excessively. Can do.

<Utilization of shell buttons and punch holes. As point, it is not achieved>
A gaming machine comprising a first means and a storage means configured to be able to receive the first means, wherein the storage means is an opening that receives the first means when the first means is received. A gaming machine O1 comprising: one opening, and a second opening opened with a width equal to or greater than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes an operation means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operation means from below, and the operation means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, a special game machine). (See JP 2012-048970 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, there is a problem that the foreign object remains inside and may cause a malfunction. .

  On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 includes the second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the housing means and the first means, so that foreign substances are accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed outside the means. Thereby, the situation where a foreign material remains inside can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine O1, the storage means includes a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is disposed on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. A gaming machine O2.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the storage means includes a low water-resistant part with low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water-resistant part.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, before the water reaches the low water-resistant portion, the water can be discharged outward through the second opening. That is, it can be used both for the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are configured with a shape based on a shape projected with a different direction of the solid object. A gaming machine O4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are formed from shapes based on different shapes of solid objects. The solid object can be easily removed through the section.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is disposed closer to the player than the first means, the gaming machine O5.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visible to the player in a state where the solid object closes part of the second opening. Can be made. This makes it possible for the player to notice that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, and thus the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain can be reduced. .

<Points regarding the idea of the bottom shape of the glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine comprising a first means and a first support means for supporting the first means, wherein the first support means comprises a projecting shape portion projecting from a lower surface. P1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a glass frame (front frame) on which an operation handle is arranged is detachable from an outer frame on which a gaming board is arranged (for example, JP, A 2015-1559837). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed in a flat shape, there is a risk of slipping when holding the finger on the bottom surface, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of ease of handling. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the protruding shape portion protruding from the bottom surface of the first support means functions as a part for hooking the finger, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the situation where the first support means slides down from the hand. It can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

  In addition, the arrangement of the projecting shape portion is not limited at all, and may be any projecting shape as long as it projects outward from the first support means. For example, it may be projected in the vertical direction or may be projected in the front side.

  The gaming machine P1 includes the second support means for detachably supporting the first support means, and the protruding shape portion is separated from a support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means. A gaming machine P2 characterized by being arranged.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine P1, the protruding shape portion protrudes downward from the bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first support means is centrally applied as the supporting position. Therefore, the first support means can be further easily held. Thereby, the attachment or detachment operation | work to the 2nd support means of a 1st support means can be made easy.

  The position away from the support position is not limited at all. For example, it may be a position closer to the front side when the first support means is supported on the front side of the second support means, or the other side when the first support means is pivotally supported on one end by the second support means. It may be a position closer to the end, or may be a position on the opposite side of the pivot support position with respect to the tray that stores the game balls.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed shape portion that is recessed outward from the inside, and the first means opens the gap with the recessed shape portion. A gaming machine P3 that is disposed opposite to the recessed shape portion.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, a part of the support position between the first means and the first support means is a gap formed by the recessed shape portion, so that the first means Due to the displacement, it is possible to reduce the amount of powder (scrap powder, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first support means are rubbed. That is, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of powder and clogging of the movable part to cause malfunction, or the accumulation of powder at the detection location of the detection device and erroneous detection.

  In this way, the recessed shape portion is not only in operation (for example, when the glass frame is opened for error cancellation, during maintenance, or when the glass frame is replaced), but also during operation (for example, a game It is also effective in the middle or in the game waiting state (demo screen display state).

  In the gaming machine P3, the recessed shape portion is disposed inside a range in which the protruding shape portion is protruded.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P3, it is possible to prevent the portion where the recessed shape portion is formed from becoming extremely thin as compared to other portions and falling short of strength. it can. In addition, since the recessed shape portion is formed on the back of the protruding shape portion, the protruding shape portion can be deformed inward and outward, so that even if a large load is applied to the protruding shape portion, the protruding shape portion can be deformed. It is possible to suppress cracks in the shape portion.

  The load applied to the projecting shape portion may be, for example, the weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when moving the first support means, Examples include a load applied by a collision (such as a car box) that is moved by a player or a store clerk near the support means.

  In the gaming machine P4, the first means is supported in such a manner that the first means is a part of the first support means outside the recessed shape portion and is in contact with an overlapping portion overlapping the protruding shape portion in the inside and outside directions. A gaming machine P5, comprising: a contact means; and an operation portion configured to be positioned by the contact means and operable by a player.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, while maintaining the effect of the recessed shape portion, it is possible to sufficiently secure the support thickness of the overlapping position that supports the contact means. It is possible to prevent the first support means from being deformed during operation.

  In the gaming machine P5, the abutting means includes an impact attenuating means that is continuously formed between the operating portion and configured to be capable of attenuating an impact, and the impact attenuating means includes the concave shape portion. A gaming machine P6 that is formed with a width shorter than the width.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P5, in addition to being able to attenuate the impact transmitted from the operating portion to the contact means by the impact damping means, the distance between the impact damping means and the overlapping portion is increased. Thus, the impact can be attenuated also by the deformation (deflection) of the contact means.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an impact attenuation means. For example, a lump member formed of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device may be used.

  In any one of the gaming machines P3 to P6, the recessed shape portion includes a first portion facing the first means, and a second portion extending from the first portion, and the first portion The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that it is formed with a greater degree of recessing than the second part.

  According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is prepared in the first part where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared with the first part. By forming the space of the second portion, which is expected to have a small load, to be small, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the recessed shape portion while maintaining high durability.

  Examples of the degree of recessing include a recessing depth (the greater the degree of recessing, the deeper) and the width of the recess (the larger the degree of recessing, the wider).

  When the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the portion facing the first means is smaller than that of the other portions, the concave shape corresponding to the other portions is provided. You may form the recessed degree of a part large.

  Moreover, it is not limited to the magnitude of load, For example, you may design a recessed shape part based on the magnitude of the generation frequency of load. In this case, the occurrence frequency of the load may be based on the magnitude of the occurrence frequency in the entire game shop business hours, or the occurrence frequency in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a predetermined rendering state, a gaming state such as a specific gaming state). It may be based on the size of.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the protruding shape portion is formed along the front-rear direction below the bottom surface portion of the first support means, and the formation range becomes wider toward the front. A gaming machine P8.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the load resistance of the front portion where the load concentrates when the first support means stands alone can be improved. Even in a storage method in which the single support means is placed on the floor alone, the first support means can be stored for a long time without the first support means falling down.

  Note that the design of the projecting shape portion is not limited to the weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the projecting shape portion may be designed by considering the size of the load generated during the operation of the first means and the frequency of load generation.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the lower surface of the first support means is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes in a direction away from the second support means.

  According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be made easy to stand on its own, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the protruding shape portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid contamination of the portions other than the projecting shape portion.

<Points concerning deformation modes based on the support structure and shape of the collar>
A gaming machine comprising: operating means operable by a player; first supporting means for supporting the operating means; and second supporting means for supporting at least one of the first supporting means or the operating means. The gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that the first support means is configured to be deformable in a direction of narrowing a gap between the operation means and the second support means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which operation means such as a production button is supported by a glass frame (see, for example, JP-A-2006-106830). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, measures against misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means due to the load during operation of the operating means are insufficient, and measures against misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint.

  For example, when the player's weight is applied to the operation means and the operation means is lowered, the second support means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the lowering distance of the front side portion of the second support means tends to be longer than the lowering distance of the operation means. At this time, there is a possibility that a gap is generated between the operation means and the second support means in the front portion due to the difference in the descending distance.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second support means descends excessively, the first support means is deformed to prevent a gap from being generated between the operation means and the second support means. can do. That is, since it is possible to allow the operating means to descend excessively (sink), the support mode of the operating means can be simplified.

  The operation direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be a descending direction, an ascending direction, a pushing-in direction along the front-rear direction, a rotating (rotating) direction, or a combination thereof.

  Moreover, as an aspect contact | abutted from an operation direction, various aspects are illustrated other than the case where the normal line extended from a contact surface corresponds with an operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (cross-sectional V shape) with respect to the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be shifted toward the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, the reaction force increases as the distance toward the center of the bottom increases. Can be done automatically.

  Moreover, you may make it provide the common support means which supports a 1st support means and a 2nd support means in common. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be coupled (coupled or fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material, is configured to hold a support portion that supports the operation means, and a game ball, and the operation means via the first support means. And a game ball holding unit coupled to the game machine Q2.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the operation means and the gaming ball holding unit.

  In addition, when the first support means is constituted by a flexible member, or when the first support means is connected to the operation means or the game ball holding portion in a floating structure, the vibration when the operation means is operated is retained as it is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball held by the game ball holding unit from being displaced every time the operating means is operated and the generation of abnormal noise.

  Various structures are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, vibration transmission may be prevented in the first direction while vibration transmission is maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal sound and to perform an effect by sound.

  In the gaming machine Q2, the operation unit includes an operation unit configured to be operable by a player, and the first support unit is arranged so that the connection position with the game ball holding unit is farther from the operation unit. A gaming machine Q3, which is arranged on the side.

  In the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation unit, which is easily displaced due to the operation, the absolute amount of displacement is reduced by moving the connection position toward the rear side. While suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the ball holding portion and the first support means, by disposing the connection position on the front side (closer to the player) in the far side of the operation portion, which is a position that is difficult to be displaced with the operation. The design property can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operation means includes an operation portion configured to be operable by a player, a main body portion supported by the first support means, the operation portion, and the main body portion. A connecting portion to be connected, wherein the operating portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first support means is formed of a plurality of divided bodies, and is attachable / detachable in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. Even a gaming machine Q4 configured to surround the connecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the first support means can be easily assembled while sufficiently securing the size of the operation portion.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a method of fixing the 1st support means formed from a division body. For example, each of the plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, or one divided body connected to the operating means among the plurality of divided bodies and another divided body connected to the divided body. You may let them.

  Moreover, various aspects are illustrated as a fixed position and fixed aspect of a division body. For example, it may be done by fitting or fastening.

  In addition, when performing by fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation unit, it is possible to distribute and handle the impact generated when the operation unit is operated at a plurality of fixed positions, Since the durability of fixing the divided body can be improved, the occurrence of displacement of the first support means can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, by setting the fastening direction to a direction intersecting (for example, orthogonal) with the operation direction of the operation unit, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operation unit and the direction of tightening the fastening screw can be made different. It can suppress that a fastening screw loosens with the impact at the time of operation.

  In gaming machine Q4, gaming machine Q5, wherein the fastening direction of the fastening means for fastening the divided body intersects the operating direction of the operating portion.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load during the operation of the operation unit from being applied in the fastening direction. Can be prevented from being released.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a direction which cross | intersects with respect to an operation direction. For example, when the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction intersecting the operation direction is a direction intersecting a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined rotation axis). The direction along the rotation axis) is exemplified.

  Further, for example, when the operation direction is a direction along a predetermined straight line (in the case of a push-in operation or a pull-out operation), the direction intersecting the operation direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined straight line. The direction is exemplified.

  In this case, when a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction with a high rate (frequency) in operation) are assumed during the game, at least of the plurality of planes intersecting the respective straight lines. The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or the fastening direction may be set in a crossing portion of a plurality of planes, that is, in a direction crossing any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

  In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the fastening portion of the divided body is configured by a plurality of locations, and the first plane including one fastening location and the second plane including other fastening locations are configured as different planes. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even if a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is simultaneously applied to other fastening points. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the divided body from being displaced at the same time at both fastening locations and from being loosened.

  In addition, the fastening location of a division body may be arrange | positioned in the location where load concentrates, when an operation part is operated. Even in this case, since another fastening portion is arranged on a plane different from the plane on which the load is concentrated, it is possible to prevent the divided body from being displaced or loosened by the load during operation. Can be prevented.

  In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operation means includes detection means configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation of the operation unit, and the detection means is arranged at a position away from the division position of the divided body. A gaming machine Q7 that is provided.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the divided position, and the operation unit is moved when the operation unit is moved along with the operation of the operation unit at the divided position. Since there is a possibility that the divided body will rub and powder (dust etc.) may be generated, the detection means is arranged away from the division position, so that detection of powder (dust etc.) by the detection means is suppressed. can do. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of a misdetection can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, when the game is possible, the operation means interferes with the divided body in the divided direction view on the side separated in the dividing direction (proximity separation direction) of the divided body. A gaming machine Q8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the positional deviation in the dividing direction of the operating means relative to the divided body can be suppressed by the interference means.

  The interference means may be formed so as to interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but not interfere with the operating means before the assembled state, for example, during assembly work. For example, when the divided body is formed of a flexible material, the divided body can be bent at the time of assembling work, so that it is easy to avoid interference with the interference means and maintain ease of assembly. can do.

  Further, for example, even when the divided body is formed of a hard material, it may be configured not to interfere with the interference means during the assembly process. That is, you may form from the shape which becomes non-interfering by the assembly direction view before fastening (for example, the direction view of the direction which approaches a division body for assembly). In this case, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the divided body when the game is possible while ensuring the ease of assembly.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the second support means includes a receiving recessed portion that is recessed so as to receive the first supporting means.

  According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, since the first support means is received in the receiving recessed portion, the first support means is affected by the displacement of the operation means. Even when the position is shifted, the operating means and the first support means can be quickly returned to the original positions by the repulsive force from the receiving recessed portion.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle in which the center of the radius of curvature is disposed on the operating portion side of the operating means. Q10.

  According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, it is possible to secure a large area where the operation unit can be arranged, and in addition, when the player holds the operation unit, it is cramped Can prevent you from feeling. Thereby, the improvement of the designability of an operation part and the improvement of the operativity of an operation part can be aimed at.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a streak portion that is processed into a streak shape for reinforcement, and the extending direction of the streak portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A gaming machine Q11, which is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the extending direction of the streaks is different in each region, so that the first support means having anisotropic rigidity Can be configured.

  In addition, the design standard of the extending direction of a streak part is not limited at all. For example, it may be designed from the shape of the first support means as an extending direction with a good yield, or when the load generated during operation of the operation means acts in a different manner for each region, it is the best response to the load. The extending direction of the streaks may be designed as the direction.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the substrate>
A gaming machine comprising a vibrating means and a light emitting means arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and configured to emit light, wherein the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means. A gaming machine R1 to play.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, JP-A-2006-16088). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effects.

  Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, etc.) is arranged behind the speaker in order to prevent the substrate from receiving the vibration of the speaker, and the speaker is arranged. It becomes dark because it is not possible to produce a light emission at the place where it is done. In this case, in the front area where the gaming machine is easily visible, the area where the effect can be enjoyed is narrowed. In the first place, game machines represented by pachinko machines and the like are roughly sized according to the standards, so it is recognized that securing a light emitting effect area is an important issue.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, since the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means, the light emitting means can receive the vibration of the vibrating device, and the arrangement of the light emitting means can be changed to the vibration generating location of the vibrating means. Can be approached. Thereby, the front area can be viewed brightly regardless of the vibration occurrence location of the vibration means, and therefore it can be improved from the viewpoint of the light emission effect.

  In addition, the aspect of a vibration means is not limited at all. For example, acoustic means configured to be able to output sound may be used, or operation means incorporating a vibration device may be used. Further, the means is not limited to the means that can vibrate actively, and may be a means that can be vibrated (passively vibrated) with respect to a load of an external force.

  Various modes are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, a diaphragm provided in the speaker, a discharge port for discharging back pressure of the vibration of the speaker found in, for example, a bass reflex type speaker, a path connected from the vibration part to the discharge port, and the like are exemplified.

  As the vibration device, a vibration device (for example, a vibrator) by rotational driving may be used, or a vibration device (for example, a voice coil motor) that generates vibration by linear driving may be used.

  In addition, the aspect of proximity | contact arrangement | positioning is not limited at all, What is necessary is just an aspect which a player can visually recognize the light of a light emission means. For example, the light emitting means may be stacked on the vibration means. In this case, the stacking direction may be the front-rear direction, the direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, The direction may be inclined in the direction.

  The gaming machine R1 includes a plurality of the vibrating means, a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, and the light emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibrating means. .

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1, the light emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, displacement, etc.) due to the vibration generated when the vibration means outputs the sound. Where the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed, since the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be changed by changing the vibration means for outputting sound, the type of change in the effect mode of the light emitting means (variation ) Can be increased.

  Note that the number of light emitting substrates may be one or more. When there are a plurality of sheets, it is sufficient that at least one light-emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibration means. In this case, since the combination of the light emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibration generated from the vibration means and the light emitting substrate that is not displaced can be provided, the types of changes in the rendering mode of the light emitting means can be further increased.

  The gaming machine R2 includes holding means for holding the vibration means, and the light emitting substrate is not fixed in the stacking direction with respect to the holding means, and the holding means is configured to emit the light along the stacking direction. A gaming machine R3 that is configured to generate a load in a direction that suppresses displacement of the circuit board.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, it is possible to suppress the light emitting substrate from being displaced and the holding means from being displaced.

  The non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding unit are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected by screws, if the fastening force does not act (for example, a simple retaining), it can be said that the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not fixed.

  The expression “non-fixed” does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, the front and rear positions of the light emitting substrate are defined by fixing two plate members that define the front and rear positions of the light emitting substrate to the holding means (stable front and rear positions, and small vibrations are allowed). In addition, by encircling the direction orthogonal to the front and rear with a slightly larger frame-shaped frame member, displacement in a direction different from the front and rear direction (up and down and left and right) can be suppressed.

  This makes it possible to reduce the influence of the vibration generated from the vibration means on the light emission substrate as compared with the case where the light emission substrate is fixed to the holding means in the same manner as the vibration means. Can be increased.

  In the gaming machine R2 or R3, a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, a fixing unit that fixes the first member and the second member to the holding unit, Restricting means for restricting the moving direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction, and the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction. A gaming machine R4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not match the traveling direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the moving direction is restricted, even if the fixing means is loosened (even if some of the fixing means are loosened), it is compared with the displacement of the fixing means. Thus, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

  Thereby, the positional relationship between the first member and the second member can be easily maintained. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from being separated or approached more than expected.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect to advance. For example, a mode in which a rod-shaped member is inserted through the through hole or a mode in which a fastening screw is fastened in the screw hole may be used.

  In any one of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable and a second displacement region in which the displacement is suppressed compared to the first displacement region. A gaming machine R5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the change in the light emission mode when the light emitting substrate is displaced due to the influence of the vibration of the vibration means changes for each region of the light emitting substrate. Can be made.

  Thereby, it is possible to produce an excellent effect by designing the mode of the light emission effect in the first displacement region and the mode of the light emission effect in the second displacement region in different modes. For example, as the first refracting means for receiving and refracting the light irradiated from the first displacement region, the surface light emitting means for performing uniform light emission effect by surface emission is disposed, while receiving and refracting the light irradiated from the second displacement region. As the second refracting means, an edge light emitting means is provided that allows the player to show high-intensity light by totally reflecting light incident from one end (edge) and emitting it from the other end (edge). Thus, it is possible to perform a novel light emission effect with different light emission modes (for example, luminance) for each region.

  In addition, the aspect of suppression of displacement is not limited at all. For example, a suppression mode defined from the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibration means may be used, or a mode defined from the holding mode of the light emitting substrate may be used.

  For example, as the positional relationship between the plurality of vibration means and the light emitting substrate, the region that is equidistant from each vibration means is such that the influence from one vibration means is offset by the influence from the other vibration means. The displacement may be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R5, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing, and a facing portion disposed to face the head of the fastening screw are provided, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the head of the fastening screw A gaming machine R6, wherein the portion and the facing portion are arranged so as to be able to contact each other.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the fastening relationship is further deteriorated when the fastening screw is loosened by restricting the progress of the fastening screw by the facing portion. Can be prevented.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated about the response | compatibility after loosening generate | occur | produces in a fastening screw. For example, when looseness occurs in the fastening screw, it may be configured to be able to detect the looseness electrically, or the fastening screw may be loosened by forming the opposing portion on the surface of the vibration device. When it is vibrated, an abnormal noise may be generated and the looseness may be noticed, or a special notification may not be provided and the loosened part may be corrected by regular maintenance.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R6, comprising: a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate; and a connecting means fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member, The connecting means is configured in such a manner that the deformation in the direction intersecting the connecting direction is more easily generated as compared with the deformation in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. A gaming machine R7.

  Here, when the connecting means is configured in such a manner that the deformation in the connecting direction easily occurs, a change in both directions in which the interval of the connecting position extends or contracts occurs, and an advantageous effect and an adverse effect are periodically generated. This is not preferable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in the direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that only the side where the interval between the connecting positions is reduced is changed. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in a direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other.

  Accordingly, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only in a situation where the connecting means is deformed (for example, a situation in which a load is generated in the connecting means). While the load in the opposing direction of the member and the second member is set low, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the light emitting substrate is easily shaken by the vibration of the vibrating means, and the light emission Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the aspect in which a deformation | transformation arises easily in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed in a manner in which the thickness is different for each direction, or the magnitude of the load generated in the connecting means may be changed for each direction.

  Moreover, the load switching mode in the pressing direction is not limited at all. For example, a driving device that displaces either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be changed at an arbitrary timing by the control of the driving device.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, the vibration means is configured to be able to change the direction of vibration between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. Characteristic gaming machine R8.

  According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R7, a plurality of types of action of the vibration means on the light emitting means can be configured.

<Technology of the light emitting means on the side. Edge light travels to side or back of member>
A first light-guiding unit configured to guide light emitted from the light-emitting unit in a first mode; A gaming machine S1 comprising light guide means and second light guide means for guiding light emitted from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first aspect.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to cause LED light to be incident from an end portion of a plate-like member and to be emitted from the surface of the plate-like member (for example, JP-A-2015-159875). See the publication). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect.

  More specifically, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the light emission effect is performed with the LED board formed from a flat plate, the cost of the substrate can be reduced, so it is useful for reducing the cost. It was difficult to achieve both.

  That is, the production effect tends to be reduced due to a difference in light emission mode (brightness, darkness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between a position close to the LED and a position far from the LED. In order to eliminate this, the light emission mode is weak. The number of LEDs that tend to be (darker) may be increased, but in that case, the number of LED elements necessary for production increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, leading to a result of hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it is inevitable to select whether to improve the production effect or reduce the cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, the light guide means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, so that the effect is reduced even if the distance relative to the light emitting means is different. (Change) can be suppressed. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light guide means. For example, a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member may be used, or a member that emits light in a surface that is nearly uniform, such as rubbed glass, or formed by curing a resin of milky white material or the like. It may be a white member that is used, a member that allows light to pass through a gap, similar to screen doors and shoji screens, a display that is projected on the member itself, similar to transmissive liquid crystal, and others The member of the aspect may be sufficient.

  In the gaming machine S1, the light guide means is configured so that the way it shines changes step by step in accordance with the difference in distance from the light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1, the light guiding means is configured in a plate shape that forms a curved surface even when the substrate on which the light guiding means is disposed is formed from a flat plate. In this case, it is possible to execute an effect of causing the curved surface to emit light uniformly (uniformly).

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the game machine S1 or S2 includes a storage unit that stores the light-emitting unit, and a light-emitting substrate on which the light-emitting unit is disposed. The storage unit supports the light-emitting substrate, and the light guide unit Supporting means fixed at least in the first position, and shielding means configured to shield between the light guide means and the player, wherein the first position is outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A gaming machine S3 characterized by being arranged in the direction.

  In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened while the shielding means is still assembled, so that the position of the light guiding means relative to the supporting means can be easily achieved. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the misalignment between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintainability can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect of shielding by the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured so that a player can see while being shielded from touching the light guide means, or configured so that the player cannot touch or see the light guide means. You may do it.

  When the first position is formed at a plurality of locations, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions is You may make it arrange | position outside the external shape of a shielding means.

  In the gaming machine S3, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is the position of the light guide means. A gaming machine S4, which is arranged at an end in the longitudinal direction.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S3, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is arranged at the end in the longitudinal direction. By applying a load in the short direction of the light guide means, the positional deviation of the light guide means can be easily corrected.

  Specifically, the correction of the positional deviation of the light guide means is compensated by deformation in the short direction of the light guide means, or by slipping to give a strong load, so that one of the longitudinal directions is compensated. Even if the fixing is loosened only at the end and the fixing is maintained at the other end, the misalignment of the light guide means can be easily repaired.

  Further, in the case of the support mode in which the light emitting substrate is pressed against the supporting means by the light guiding means, the degree of supporting the light emitting substrate on the supporting means can be reduced with the bending deformation of the light guiding means. Therefore, even if the light guide means is not removed from the support means, the light guide means can be bent and deformed by loosening the fixing at the first position and bending the light guide means. Thus, the positional deviation of the light emitting substrate can be corrected.

  Note that the adjustment range of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, it is based on a design that is mechanically regulated so that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means from the outer shape of the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting substrate is not displaced so far as to be completely removed in the irradiation direction view. An adjustment width that corrects the positional deviation in the light source may be sufficient (small adjustment width), and the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means from the outer shape of the light emitting means on the basis of a design that ensures a large adjustment width in advance. It may be possible to adjust the position of the light guide means to a position that is completely out of sight (large adjustment range).

  In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means remain in the same structure, and the mode of the light emitting effect visually recognized at the same effect can be changed. In this case, for example, when a gaming machine having the same configuration is prepared to be playable with different game characteristics (for example, when configuring a gaming machine with different specifications), the mechanical configuration of each part is not greatly changed. Since the mode of the light emission effect can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guide means, it is possible to reduce the burden (for example, cost) related to the manufacture of the gaming machine.

  The non-fixed aspect is not limited at all. For example, aspects other than the case of being fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixed. Moreover, an edge part is the expression of the intention which avoids being limited to an edge. That is, the first position may be arranged at a position including the periphery of the longitudinal end.

  In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the support means, and the light guiding means and the shielding means are configured to prevent the positional deviation so that the relative positional deviation can be reduced as the mutual distance is shortened. A gaming machine S5, wherein the misalignment prevention portion includes a fixing portion with respect to the support means.

  Here, it is necessary to connect a wiring that conducts electricity to the light emitting substrate. Since the displacement or chipping of the wiring directly affects the malfunction of the light emitting means, the light emitting substrate is also used for the purpose of preventing it. It is preferable that the substrate and the supporting means are configured so that positional displacement does not easily occur.

  Considering the production effect, it is preferable that the light guide means be easily aligned when the positional deviation occurs, on the premise that the positional deviation from the light emitting substrate does not easily occur. It is also considered that it is good to hold it on the support means side. On the other hand, if a positional shift occurs between the light guide means and the shielding means, the light guide means and the shielding means may collide with each other, and the appearance may be deteriorated.

  Since the shielding means is a place that can be touched by the player, it is preferable that the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means serving as a base in consideration of strength. Thus, the support mode expected for each means was various.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S3 or S4, due to the action of the position shift prevention unit, the light guiding means and the shielding means can be easily aligned with each other without being directly fixed. In addition, it is possible to easily maintain the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the shielding means during the game.

  In addition, the aspect of a position shift prevention part is not limited at all. For example, the concave and convex portions that have the same shape and can be fitted may be used, and the concave and convex portions that can be fitted may have a shape that does not change along the assembling direction. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to an outer shape of the main body portion, a separation extending portion that extends from the main body portion toward the side away from the light emitting means, and the extension portion. And a counter-extended portion extending toward the light-emitting means in a cross-sectional shape, wherein the light-emitting means is disposed in such a manner that light incident on the counter-extending portion is totally reflected. A gaming machine S6 comprising a portion.

  According to the gaming machine S6, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light emitting part from entering the part other than the opposing extension part, so that the separation extension part and the opposing extension part, and other parts And the effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) can be executed at the short width boundary.

  In addition, the aspect of total reflection is not limited at all. For example, it can be specified by the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guiding means, and combinations thereof.

  In the gaming machine S6, the light guide means is formed from a cover portion that covers the light emitting substrate and an outer shape of the cover portion, and a frame shape that is similar to the outer shape of the light emitting substrate. A game machine S7, wherein the opposing extension portion extends from the cover portion and is coupled to the frame portion.

  According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S6, light can be incident on the frame portion from the coupling point, so that the effect of the light emission effect of the frame portion can be improved, and the opposing extension portion can be provided. By functioning as a reinforcing rib, the strength of the light guiding means can be improved.

  According to this, if the frame portion extends to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to produce an effect of shining the opposite side of the emission direction.

  In the gaming machine S7, the facing extension portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, and is coupled to the frame portion at one end portion in the longitudinal direction, and from the frame portion at the other end portion. A gaming machine S8 that is separated.

  According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S7, based on the design of the opposing extension portion, an end portion capable of entering light into the frame portion in the longitudinal direction and an end portion where the incidence is regulated are provided. Since it can comprise, the design freedom of the light emission effect using a frame part can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is disposed at a projection position of the opposing extension portion and the separation extension portion, and an inclination angle with respect to the light irradiation direction of the tip shape of the separation extension portion is set. The gaming machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the smaller, the closer to the end of the cross-sectional shape of the facing extension part and the separation extension part.

  According to the gaming machine S9, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emission intensity of the light emitting means can be obtained even when the tip shape of the separation extending portion is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate. It is possible to perform a light emission effect without giving the player a sense of incongruity. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separation extending portion can be made to emit light to the same extent.

<Technology of the top light emitting means. Points that change the way the light is emitted by the distance from the light emitting means>
A first light receiving unit configured to receive light emitted from the light emitting unit in a first mode; and a light receiving unit configured to be capable of receiving light, and a light receiving unit configured to receive light. A gaming machine T1 comprising: second light receiving means for receiving light emitted from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first aspect.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to cause LED light to be incident from the edge of the planar member and to be emitted from the surface of the planar member (for example, JP-A-2015-159875). See). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect.

  More specifically, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the light emission effect is performed with the LED board formed from a flat plate, the cost of the substrate can be reduced, so it is useful for reducing the cost. It was difficult to achieve both.

  That is, the production effect tends to be reduced due to a difference in light emission mode (brightness, darkness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between a position close to the LED and a position far from the LED. In order to eliminate this, the light emission mode is weak. The number of LEDs that tend to be (darker) may be increased, but in that case, the number of LED elements necessary for production increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, leading to a result of hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it is inevitable to select whether to improve the production effect or reduce the cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive light from the light emitting means in different manners, so that the effect is reduced even if the distance relative to the light emitting means is different (change) Can be suppressed. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light-receiving means. For example, a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member may be used, or a member that emits light in a surface that is nearly uniform, such as rubbed glass, or formed by curing a resin of milky white material or the like. It may be a white member that is used, a member that allows light to pass through a gap, similar to screen doors and shoji screens, a display that is projected on the member itself, similar to transmissive liquid crystal, and others The member of the aspect may be sufficient.

  In the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured so that the way it emits light changes step by step in accordance with the difference in distance from the light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, even when the substrate on which the light receiving means is disposed is formed from a flat plate, the light receiving means is configured in a plate shape that forms a curved surface. In addition, it is possible to execute an effect of causing the curved surface to emit light uniformly (uniformly).

  The gaming machine T1 or T2 includes a housing unit that houses the light emitting unit and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting unit is disposed, and the housing unit is disposed to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. The gaming machine T3 is characterized in that it comprises partition means for partitioning a region to be divided, and the light receiving means is configured to change the way the light is emitted for each region partitioned by the partition means.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the frame of the partitioning means is arranged at the boundary where the way of light receiving means changes, so that the way of light receiving means changes rapidly. This can reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player. Thereby, even when the number of light emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the effect of producing a light emission effect using the light emitting substrates.

  In the gaming machine T3, the gaming machine T4 is aligned by the partition means supporting the light emitting board in a direction opposite to a biasing force applied to the light emitting board.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work by facilitating the alignment of the light emitting board and the partitioning means, and the light emitting board during use. And the partition means can be prevented from being displaced.

  In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the partitioning means includes a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion disposed on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means is inserted through the through hole. A gaming machine T5 comprising a portion.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting part and the light receiving means can be reduced without being affected by the size of the partition means, and the light incident on the insertion part can be reduced. It becomes easy to totally reflect, and it can prevent that the intensity | strength of the light radiate | emitted from a light emission means falls.

  In the gaming machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-insertion through hole that is formed corresponding to the shape of the light emitting unit disposed on the light emitting substrate, and does not accept the insertion unit. The gaming machine T6 is formed in such a manner that the opening is enlarged as the distance from the light-emitting substrate increases, and the light-receiving means is abutted on the surface from the opposite side of the light-emitting substrate.

  According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T5, the through hole through which the insertion part is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting light emitted from the light emitting part at a wide angle, and in addition, a light receiving means The leakage of light can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the two.

  In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means is formed such that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape is larger on the side farther from the light emitting means than on the side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

  According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the area where the player can see the light through the light receiving means is made larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. Can do.

  In the gaming machine T7, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and a drawing boundary surface portion intersecting with the light conducting portion, the drawing boundary surface of the light conducting portion, A gaming machine T8 characterized in that the front-rear direction surface portion in the extending direction is disposed at a position shorter than the inclined surface portion.

  According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in a form in which the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front, it is a case where the punching boundary surface portion is formed. However, the thickness of the photoconductive portion can be easily made uniform. Thereby, total reflection can be easily maintained over the extending direction of the photoconductive portion.

  In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line shape including a base end portion of the insertion portion. Characteristic gaming machine T9.

  According to the gaming machine T9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means can be easily viewed as line-shaped light (light mixed with light from a point light source). Therefore, the feeling like a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs.

<Points composed of two directions where the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine comprising a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means includes a first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction, and the first And a second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction inclined with respect to the direction.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is configured by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws inserted in the front-rear direction (see, for example, JP-A-2016-41185). . However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the shape of the structure is defined in the arrangement of the fixing means, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure is low.

  For example, when a fastening screw that is inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted through the fixing means, a light emitting member such as an LED cannot be disposed at a position that interferes with the fastening screw in a front view in one cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. That is, since the region where the fixing means can be arranged substantially coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be arranged.

  In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light emitting substrate from the back side needs to be formed larger than the light emitting substrate by the amount of the fixing means. The size of the light emitting substrate is limited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, since the insertion direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction inclined with respect to each other, all the fixing means are along the front-rear direction. Compared to the case of being inserted, it is possible to ensure a wide production area on the side to be visually recognized by the player.

  In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means includes a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction on an outer surface. Game machine U2.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, so that even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is achieved. Force can be generated, and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the gaming machine U3 is characterized by comprising suppression means for suppressing a reduction in fixing force at at least one of the fixing points of the fixing means.

  Here, if the first means and the second means are formed of a resin molded product and the removal direction of the resin mold for production is one direction, the first direction or the second direction inclined with respect to each other, and the removal direction Since it will incline, there exists a possibility that fixing force may become weak by the 1st or 2nd fixing means corresponding to the inclining side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the fixing force by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is a common part. can do.

  In addition, the structure of the said suppression means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a loosening prevention means that prevents the loosening of the fixing from occurring, or a loosening restriction means that restricts further loosening when the loosening of the fixing occurs.

  In the gaming machine U3, the suppressing means includes a notifying means capable of notifying the fixing failure of the fixing means.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U3, the fixing means is informed by the notifying means, so that early detection of the looseness of the fastening screw can be achieved.

  In addition, the structure of an alerting | reporting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for notifying electrically such as a detection means such as a sensor, or a structural means for causing a change in appearance. As structural means, for example, transmission changing means for changing the transmission intensity of vibration generated inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine, light effect changing means for blocking the light emission from the inside and generating a shadow that can be seen in the appearance, Examples thereof include vibration notifying means for notifying the player by making contact with the vibration location of the vibration device and generating abnormal noise or strengthening vibration.

  In any one of the gaming machines U2 to U4, a third means is provided between the first means and the second means, and the third means includes a first surface and a second surface. A gaming machine U5, which is disposed between.

  According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U2 to U4, the first means and the second means have a plurality of directions in which a resistance force can be generated as a component direction of the fixing force of the fixing means. Therefore, the third means can be easily held safely.

  The configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured such that the player can visually recognize the first means side while the player does not visually recognize the second means side. In this case, the side on which the gap between the first surface and the second surface is widened is the first means side, and the narrowing side is the second means side. The area occupied by the configuration can be narrowed.

  The gaming machine U5 includes fourth means disposed on the opposite side of the third means across the first surface, and the first surface is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. A gaming machine U6.

  According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means in the front view can be made to interfere with each other, so the third means and the fourth means A large area can be secured.

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are each arranged in a set with a predetermined interval therebetween.

  According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in pairs with a predetermined interval therebetween. It is possible to avoid the deformation along the generation direction of the fixing force from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, since deformation in the direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid the loosening of the fixing means.

<Supporting the rigidity reduction of the game board by the notch (through hole) on the side of the back case>
In a gaming machine comprising a gaming board and opposing means whose edge is opposed to the gaming board, the opposing means is provided with a proximity portion arranged in proximity to the gaming board at the left and right edges. The gaming machine ZA1 is characterized in that the formation of the proximity portion is asymmetrical.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a gaming board that constitutes a gaming area and a back case on which a movable unit or the like is disposed (see, for example, JP-A-2006-77627). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the space for the movable unit or the like can be sufficiently secured because the internal space of the back case is eroded by the space occupied by the connection position between the game board and the back case. There was a problem that it became difficult.

  Especially in a right-handed machine that plays right-handed in a probabilistic state (high probability state) or jackpot game (special game state), the player's line of sight often concentrates on the right side of the game area. It has been required to secure the internal space of the back case on the back side of the flow path (the flow path on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the hit game ball flows.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZA1, since the formation of the proximity portion is asymmetrical left and right, the arrangement of the left and right edge portions of the facing means with respect to the game board can be asymmetrical, so either the left or right Instead of sacrificing the inner area of the opposite means, it is possible to easily secure the inner area of the left and right opposite means. As a result, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the opposing means with respect to the game board can be improved, the arrangement space of the movable unit and the like can be sufficiently secured, and the degree of freedom of effects that the player can visually recognize through the game board is improved. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the edge of the game board (for example, the right-handed channel) can be illuminated with the light emitting means of the moving agent or illuminated with the light emitted from the liquid crystal display device.

  In addition, the aspect of formation of the proximity portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, may be arranged away from the game board, or a combination thereof.

  In addition, the formation aspect of a proximity part is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to secure a region where the connecting portion (contact portion) used for connection with the game board is not formed in a wide range, or after suppressing the area occupied by the connecting portion (contact portion) ( You may make it arrange | position a contact part.

  Further, the left-right asymmetric aspect is not limited at all. For example, the area in which the proximity portion is formed may be asymmetrical, the direction of formation of the proximity portion may be asymmetrical, or the functional portion disposed in the proximity portion (the female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened and fixed) The formation position, the formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or other directions) or the number of formations may be asymmetrical.

  In the gaming machine ZA1, the facing means includes a placement portion in which the proximity portion is formed at an end portion on the game board side and is opposed to each other in the left-right direction, and the proximity portion has a left-right formation direction relative to the placement portion. A gaming machine ZA2 that is configured asymmetrically.

  According to the gaming machine ZA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZA1, the area between the placement portions can be configured to be asymmetrical with respect to the gaming board. In addition, the aspect by which a formation direction is left-right asymmetric is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed in the opposite direction (the same direction in the left and right) with respect to the left-right symmetric direction, or may be formed in the direction intersecting right and left (for example, the orthogonal direction).

  In addition, examples of the forming direction include an extending direction in which the plate-like portion is extended (a direction in which the plate-like portion is extended), a concave direction in which the concave portion is provided as a notch (a direction in which the material is cut), and the like.

  In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximity portion includes a facing surface that is a surface that faces the gaming board and a facing side that is a side that faces the gaming board, and is compared with a portion of the gaming board on the left side. The gaming machine ZA3 is characterized in that a portion of the gaming board with respect to the right side portion has a higher ratio of the facing side than the facing surface.

  According to the gaming machine ZA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the right and left width occupied by the proximity portion can be made narrower on the right side of the gaming board than on the left side of the gaming board.

  In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the gaming machine ZA4 is characterized by comprising suppression means for suppressing displacement of the gaming board or facing means in the facing direction.

  According to the gaming machine ZA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. In addition, the arrangement | positioning of a suppression means is not limited at all. For example, it may be disposed at a position away from the game board (including a position in contact with the facing means), or may be disposed at a position away from the facing means (including a position in contact with the game board). However, it may be disposed at a position between the game board and the facing means (including a position where it abuts at least one of the game board or the facing means).

  In the gaming machine ZA4, the suppressing means is disposed on the gaming board side.

  According to the gaming machine ZA5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength of the gaming unit as a whole (ensure rigidity) without providing a special member for the opposing means.

  In the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, the suppression means includes an overlapping portion that overlaps with the outermost surface of the opposing means in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine ZA6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent sacrificing the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming board, while ensuring a space for the right-handed flow path in the gaming area, It is possible to maintain the strength of the gaming unit as a whole (ensure rigidity).

  In any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the facing means includes a non-contact portion that is non-contact with the game board at an edge of the outermost surface in the predetermined direction on the game board side. Characteristic gaming machine ZA7.

  According to the gaming machine ZA7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the gaming board and the non-contact portion is used as an arrangement location of the driving device for the variable prize opening, or the driving device It can be used effectively by using a wiring path connected to a winning sensor or a light emitting device, or a place where the light emitting device is arranged.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the gaming board is formed of a resin material, and the facing means includes presentation means disposed between the gaming board, and the front end of the presentation means is A gaming machine ZA8 configured to be arranged in front of the front end of the facing means.

  According to the gaming machine ZA8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the arrangement space for the rendering means can be expanded to the front side.

<Various light emission modes for movable accessories>
A game comprising: light emitting means for irradiating light to a predetermined light emitting area; and displacement means configured so that at least part of the displacement section includes a first position at least partially overlapping with the light emitting area as viewed in a predetermined direction. The gaming machine ZB1 is characterized in that the light emitting area includes a possible area configured to be visible in a plurality of types of light emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that a light emitting unit and a displacement unit overlap each other when viewed from the front (see, for example, JP-A-2006-159178). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the light emitting means and the displacement means are only visually recognized separately, and the effect of using the overlapping is insufficient. That is, since the displacing means is arranged on the front side of the light emitting means, the light emitting means is hidden by the displacing means, and there is a problem that the rendering effect is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, since the light emitting means is configured to be visible in a different light emitting aspect in relation to the aspect of the displacing means, the production aspect can be diversified.

  In addition, as an aspect of a displacement means, the arrangement | positioning aspect of a displacement means, the displacement aspect of a displacement means, the direction (orientation) direction of a displacement means, the light emission aspect of the light emission means arrange | positioned at a displacement means, etc., for example. Illustrated. Examples of the arrangement of the displacement means include a case where a part of the displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means, and a case where the entire displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means. Examples of the displacement mode of the displacement means include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light emitting means, and a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light emitting means. The direction (orientation) of the displacement means is when the surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means, when the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means, or when the surface between them faces the light emitting means. Illustrated.

  As a light emitting mode of the light emitting unit, a mode in which a light emitting unit that emits light toward the displacement unit side is turned on, blinked, or turned off, a mode in which a light emitting unit that emits light toward the side away from the displacement unit is turned on, blinked, or turned off, etc. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine ZB1, the possible area includes a first state in which the displacement means is disposed at the first position and a second state in which the displacement means is disposed at a second position different from the first position. The gaming machine ZB2 can be configured to have a different light emission mode viewed from the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine ZB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZB1, the light emission mode can be varied by changing the position of the displacement means, so that the impression given to the player while the light emission mode of the displacement means alone remains the same. Can be changed suddenly.

  In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting unit includes a substrate on which a light emitting unit is disposed, and a refracting unit disposed to refract light emitted from the light emitting unit, and the substrate includes the predetermined unit. A gaming machine ZB3, which is disposed outside the possible region in a direction view, and wherein the refracting means includes a first refracting portion that overlaps the possible region in the predetermined direction view.

  According to the gaming machine ZB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the aspect of the light visually recognized through the first refracting part is a combination of light emitted from the light emitting part and color or brightness based on the displacement means Can appear.

  Further, by narrowing the formation range of the substrate, it is possible to secure a region where another component member, for example, a driving device that generates a driving force of the displacement means, and a space for the displacement means to be displaced are secured.

  In gaming machine ZB3, gaming machine ZB4 is characterized in that the displacement means has a larger displacement at a position overlapping the possible area when viewed in the predetermined direction than at other positions.

  According to the gaming machine ZB4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at a position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means is increased at a position where the space occupied by the light emitting means is small. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum degree of freedom of displacement of the displacement means while suppressing the space occupied by the light emitting means and the displacement means jointly.

  In addition, the magnitude | size aspect of a displacement is not limited at all. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be compared, the comparison may be made with positive and negative in opposite directions, or the displacement may be compared in a predetermined direction (component), A comparison may be made including the number of members arranged in the displacement means and displaced.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacing means includes: a second light emitting means that emits light in a manner that is visible from the predetermined direction; and a transmitting means that transmits light emitted from the second light emitting means. The gaming machine ZB5 is characterized in that the transmission means has a shape in which a width in a direction intersecting the direction of the displacement means changes along the displacement direction of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine ZB5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the position of the displacement means in the displacement section is set to the width of the light of the second light emitting means visually recognized through the possible area. Can be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the possible area is arranged on the center side of a window portion that is opened so that the liquid crystal display area can be visually recognized.

  According to the gaming machine ZB6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the light emission mode of the possible area can be used to guide the player's line of sight toward the liquid crystal display area side.

  In addition, the arrangement | positioning aspect of a possible area | region is not limited at all, A various aspect is illustrated. For example, a mode in which the window portion is scattered (including a case where there is one possible region) may be used, or a circle (arc) shape surrounding the window portion may be used.

  Any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6 includes a board on which the light emitting means is disposed, and the board has no fastening means for fastening at the end on the possible area side. ZB7.

  According to the gaming machine ZB7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure the arrangement space of the light emitting means on the side of the possible area, and that the shadow of the fastening means occurs in the possible area. It can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine ZB7, the gaming machine ZB8 is provided with covering means that covers the space between the possible area and the substrate in the predetermined direction view.

  According to the gaming machine ZB8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZB7, the boundary position between the possible area and the substrate is hidden by the covering means, so that the visibility of light near the edge of the substrate deteriorates. Even if it exists, it is possible to avoid showing it to the player.

  The gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8 includes substrate holding means for holding the substrate, and the substrate holding means includes a gap forming portion that forms a gap to facilitate assembly of the substrate. A gaming machine ZB9 which is closed in an assembled state.

  According to the gaming machine ZB9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, the effect of facilitating the assembly of the substrate by the gap forming part can be achieved, and problems such as light leaking from the gap forming part can be avoided. . Further, this gap forming portion may be used for engagement with another member and used for positioning of the other member.

  In any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board includes a connector portion to which wiring is connected, and the connector portion is disposed at a position away from the end portion on the possible area side. Game machine ZB10.

  According to the gaming machine ZB10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, a load is applied to the wiring connected to the connector portion, thereby generating a moment starting from the end of the possible area side. Therefore, even in a situation where the substrate cannot be taken out directly, the substrate can be taken out easily.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and interruption>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, drive means for generating a drive force for displacing the displacement means, and drive force generated by the drive means to be transmitted to the displacement means in a predetermined state In the gaming machine including the transmission means, the transmission means includes a transmission portion that transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmitted portion of the displacement means, and in the driving state of the driving means, the transmission portion is the transmitted portion. The gaming machine ZC1 is configured to be capable of suppressing displacement of the displacement means when it is not in contact with a portion.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided by a concave part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (for example, JP, 2010-234152, A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the posture of the displacement member is maintained by the support of the cylindrical portion, it is difficult to perform other effects using the cylindrical portion while maintaining the posture of the displacement member. There was a problem of becoming.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZC1, since the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed even when the transmission part is not in contact, the transmission part can be used for other effects in a state in which the attitude of the displacement means is maintained. Can be used.

  In addition, the aspect of a transmission means is not limited at all. For example, a single gear or a plurality of gears arranged between the displacement unit and the driving unit may be used, or a mode exemplified by a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members influence each other may be used.

  In addition, the aspect which can suppress a displacement is not limited at all. For example, it may be biased by an elastic force based on gravity or a spring member, or may be locked (engaged) by a claw-like member, or restrained by contacting a member having a function as a stopper. It may be an embodiment. Further, examples of possible suppression include an aspect of reducing the displacement of the displacement means, an aspect of preventing (restricting) the displacement of the displacement means, and the like.

  In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmission means includes a formation portion that is formed along a movement locus of the transmission portion, and the formation portion is not in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the displacement means. A gaming machine ZC2 configured to be able to contact the displacement means in a contact state.

  According to the gaming machine ZC2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZC1, since the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming portion and the displacement means, the stability of the arrangement of the displacement means with respect to external force is improved. be able to.

  In the gaming machine ZC2, the formation portion extends from the transmission portion along the displacement direction of the transmission means, and the distance between the displacement means is longer than the distance between the transmission portion and the displacement means. A gaming machine ZC3 characterized by being configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZC2, a portion where a load is generated when driving force is transmitted and a portion where a load is generated when displacement is suppressed are partially provided in the opposing direction of the displacement means and the transmission means. Can be shifted.

  In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means includes a one-side function part formed on one side in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted part, and the other side in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted part. The one-side function unit is configured in the same plane as the movement locus of the formation unit, and the other-side function unit is located outside the movement locus of the formation unit. A gaming machine ZC4 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZC3, the moving direction in which movement is suppressed by the forming unit can be set to one side direction.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means includes the first displacement means and the second displacement means. A gaming machine ZC5, characterized in that the mode of transmission to the displacement means can be changed for each operation section.

  Note that the transmission mode switching method is not limited in any way. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means or the second displacement means, the driving force transmission to the other may be cut off, or transmitted to the first displacement means and the second displacement means. The aspect which changes the ratio of the driving force to be performed may be sufficient.

  According to the gaming machine ZC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, a plurality of displacement means can be displaced in different displacement modes by one transmission means.

  In the gaming machine ZC5, the first displacement means is disposed on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is disposed on the other side of the transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine ZC6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of setting the combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

  In addition, the combination of the displacement aspect of a 1st displacement means and a 2nd displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include a timing at which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced in synchronism, or the transmission force or the cutoff of the driving force to the first displacement means and the second displacement means is reversed and synchronized. Thus, it may not be displaced.

  Further, in the case of including the timing of displacement in synchronism, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speed of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

  In the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the direction of displacement of the first displacement means and the direction of displacement of the second displacement means are set in opposite directions.

  According to the gaming machine ZC7, in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be made to visually recognize each other in the common area. Even if the effect area where the means is displaced is narrow, an effective effect can be executed.

  In addition, the aspect of a 1st displacement means and a 2nd displacement means is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which a plurality of displacement means stacked in the front-rear direction are extended to a common area at different timings, and the initial arrangement is such that a plurality of movable members move through a common range while being front-rearly stacked. It may be configured.

<Prevents displacement of the stop position by catching up and contacting the load generating part>
A gaming machine comprising: a first displacement means configured to be displaceable; and a second displacement means configured to be capable of displacing the first displacement means by displacing in a predetermined direction. A load generating unit that applies a load in a direction along the predetermined direction to displace the first displacing unit; the first displacing unit includes a loaded unit that receives a load from the load generating unit; The portion is configured to be separated from the loaded portion during the displacement along the predetermined direction and to contact a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion of the first displacing means. ZD1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided by a concave part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (for example, JP, 2010-234152, A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the cylinder portion moves excessively due to a drive transmission defect, there is a possibility that the position of the displacement member is displaced from the moving end, which may give the player a sense of incongruity. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating portion is separated from the loaded portion during the displacement and is brought into contact with a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion, so that excessive displacement occurs in the second displacing means. Even so, it is possible to avoid disposing the first displacement means at an unintended position.

  In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating unit applies a load directed from the other side of the predetermined direction to the one side in a state where the first displacement means is disposed at one end of the displaceable section. A gaming machine ZD2 that is configured to be assignable to the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine ZD2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, the load generating part is directed to the first displacement means in the predetermined direction. Since the load in the direction from the other side to the one side is given, the first displacement means can be pressed against the end portion on the one side in the predetermined direction by the load.

  The gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2 includes a drive unit configured to be able to drive the second displacement unit, and the load generation unit is in contact with the first displacement unit on the other side in the predetermined direction with respect to the loaded unit. A gaming machine ZD3 characterized by touching.

  According to the gaming machine ZD3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generating portion and the first displacement means, so that the driving force can be stopped. Even if the timing accuracy is low, the end positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be easily made constant. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being displaced from the end positions while abruptly stopping the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

  Further, by providing a part for taking measures against a rare event that the second displacing means moves excessively in a place different from the loaded part that receives the load by each driving force transmission, the loaded part Even if is deformed, the fail-safe function can be exhibited without problems.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, the gaming machine ZD4 is provided with a regulating means capable of regulating the first displacing means at one end in the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine ZD4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, the second displacement means is changed to the second displacement means while the first displacement means is restricted at one end in the predetermined direction by the restriction means. It can be displaced independently with respect to one displacement means.

  In addition, the aspect of a control means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a claw-like member that enters and exits in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement means, may be regulated by the biasing force of gravity or an elastic member, or part of the second displacement means It may be constituted by.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, the game apparatus includes detection means configured to be able to detect that the first displacement means is disposed at one end in the predetermined direction, and the first displacement means includes the detection A gaming machine ZD5, characterized in that the means includes a detected part whose position is detected, and the load generating part abuts on the detected part.

  According to the gaming machine ZD5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, it is possible to limit a portion that is damaged by a load at the time of contact to the detected portion.

  In addition, by linking the life that can be calculated from the number of times of displacement (the number of times of driving) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, it is possible to determine the second detection failure based on the detection piece being damaged. The replacement time (maintenance time) of the displacement means can be grasped.

  In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generation unit to the predetermined unit intersects the direction of the load applied from the load generation unit to the loaded unit. A gaming machine ZD6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine ZD6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, a plurality of operating directions of the first displacement means can be facilitated.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are disposed at a predetermined interval in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine ZD7, in any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded part and the predetermined part are arranged at the same position when viewed from a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction. And an area necessary for the arrangement of the predetermined portion can be reduced.

<Technical idea to hold using the flexibility of the tracking means>
In a gaming machine comprising a displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined area and a follow-up means for following the displacement of the displacement means, preventing the predetermined portion of the follow-up means from entering the predetermined area side A gaming machine ZE1 comprising means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of a displacement means (see, for example, JP 2012-157474 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, setting the length of the wiring in comparison with the displacing means has an advantage that the bending of the wiring is difficult to occur when the displacing means is displaced, but the wiring is caught in the displacing means. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to form a temporary fixing portion for temporarily fixing the wiring so that the wiring does not relatively displace at each position of the displacement means, and in addition, the displacement means is arranged at a predetermined position while holding the wiring in the temporary fixing portion. However, it usually takes time to assemble because of the assembly. As a result, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design and the assembly efficiency may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZE1, since the follow-up means exemplified by the wiring or the like is prevented from being displaced toward the predetermined area by the prevention means, the follow-up means is rubbed and damaged by the displacement means. Can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing portions on the displacement means, and to improve the degree of freedom in design of the displacement means and the assembly efficiency.

  In the gaming machine ZE1, the prevention means supports the following means so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a change in the distance from the displacement means occurs with the displacement of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine ZE2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZE1, the prevention means supports the follow-up means in a manner that can be displaced in a direction in which the distance between the prevention means and the displacement means changes with the displacement of the displacement means. Compared with the case where the position of the follower is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band, the load applied to the follower can be reduced.

  In addition, the aspect of a prevention means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar part around which the tracking means can be wound, or a claw-shaped part capable of sandwiching the tracking means. Further, when the prevention means is formed as a columnar portion, for example, the columnar portion may be formed as a fastening portion used when fastening and fixing members, or used for alignment when the members are assembled. It may be formed as a positioning part.

  Moreover, the aspect of a follow-up means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, or a belt-like member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means, and a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is made visible to the player. It may be a belt-like effect member that assists the effect, or may be an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates an urging force that assists the displacement of the displacement means.

  In the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, the following means is configured to be able to supply electricity to the displacing means.

  According to the gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, it is possible to supply electricity to the displacement means satisfactorily.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting a direction in which the displacement unit is displaced, and the follow-up unit is configured to surround the prevention unit. A gaming machine ZE4.

  According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the follow-up means protrudes greatly on one side. That is, since the range in which the tracking unit can be displaced can be arranged on both sides of the prevention unit, the area where it is necessary to avoid the interference between the tracking unit and other members can be limited to the range around the prevention unit. .

  In addition, it is possible to eliminate the need for configuring a clearance portion for allowing the follow-up means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. Thereby, the displacement means can be disposed in a space-saving manner.

  Any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4 includes shielding means for shielding at least part of the displacement means, and the follow-up means is connected to the displacement means at an inner position of the shielding means. A gaming machine ZE5.

  According to the gaming machine ZE5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion between the follow-up means and the displacement means from being visually recognized by the player by the shielding means. In addition, inward here means the inner side direction when the edge part in front view is made into the external shape.

  In the gaming machine ZE5, the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is disposed at an outer edge portion of the shielding means.

  According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine ZE5, a large amount of overhang from the outer shape (outer edge) of the shielding means of the displacement means is ensured while keeping the following means from entering the player's field of view. be able to.

  In the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is a straight line that equally divides the rotatable angle of the displacement means around the first axis, and is arranged on a straight line that passes through the first axis. A gaming machine ZE7 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine ZE7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the follow-up means can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, the displacement means includes a guide portion that guides the follow-up means in a direction away from the displacement locus.

  According to the gaming machine ZE8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent rubbing against the displacement means and to improve the durability of the follow-up means.

  In the gaming machine ZE8, the guide portion is extended in a direction orthogonal to the outer shape of the predetermined area.

  According to the gaming machine ZE9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZE8, the area occupied by the tracking means in the vicinity of the displacement means can be narrowed, and the area of the gap through which the tracking means can pass can be narrowed. The rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means can be improved as compared with the case where the gap is large.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the follow-up means is formed in a string shape or a belt shape, one end portion is connected to the displacement means, the other end portion is connected to the gaming machine, and toward both ends. The gaming machine ZE10 is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

  According to the gaming machine ZE10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, it is possible to apply a load in the direction of pulling from one side of the predetermined region at both ends of the follow-up means. Thereby, the whole follow-up means can be balanced with the load applied from the guide section.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the follow-up means is configured to be wound around the prevention means in a direction in which the displacement means is loosened by displacing from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. Machine ZE11.

  According to the gaming machine ZE11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the displacement of the displacement means is absorbed by the looseness of the tracking means, thereby suppressing an excessive load on the tracking means. can do.

  In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11, the game machine ZE1 to ZE11 include an arrangement unit in which the follow-up unit is arranged between the displacement unit, and an alignment unit that aligns the arrangement unit. A gaming machine ZE12, which is disposed outside the movement locus of the follow-up means.

  According to the gaming machine ZE12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11, the positioning unit can avoid eroding the displacement space of the tracking means, so that it is given to the tracking means as the displacement means is displaced. Load to be minimized.

  In the gaming machine ZE12, the follow-up means is configured to be wound around the prevention means, and the follow-up means has a first displacement portion (weak displacement portion) and a displacement larger than the first displacement portion. And a second displacement portion (strong displacement portion), wherein the first displacement portion is disposed between the second displacement portion and the placement means.

  According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit locations where damage is likely to occur due to contact with the arrangement means of the follow-up means. For this reason, since it is possible to limit the places where reinforcement is required, durability can be improved at low cost.

  In addition, the aspect of the magnitude comparison of the displacement of a 1st displacement part and a 2nd displacement part is not limited at all. For example, a linear distance between positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or when the displacement occurs in a plurality of directions, the comparison may be limited to a displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined surface).

  In the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the prevention means includes a protruding portion protruding from the arrangement means, and the follow-up means is wound around the protruding portion.

  According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled to the positioning means from above while supporting the tracking means hanging down by its own weight by the positioning means. In addition, the fixing means can be easily assembled.

<Technology that changes displacement (transmission) by forward / reverse rotation>
In a gaming machine comprising: a driving means; a displacing means configured to be displaceable by a driving force of the driving means; and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the driving means to the displacing means. The driving means is configured to be operable in a first driving mode for generating a driving force in a first direction and a second driving mode for generating a driving force in a second direction different from the first direction, and the displacing unit. Is configured to be displaceable between a first displacement mode driven in the first driving mode and a second displacement mode driven in the second driving mode.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with first displacement means and second displacement means that are displaced by a driving force of a common driving device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the driving direction of the driving device in the forward and reverse directions. There is a gaming machine configured as described above (for example, see JP2013-146413A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement mode of the first displacement means and the second displacement means changes depending on the length of driving the drive device in the forward direction, and the drive direction of the drive device is switched between forward and reverse. Even so, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are both displaced. For this reason, there is a problem that the degree of improvement in the rendering effect due to the adoption of a device that can be driven in the forward and reverse directions is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZF1, since the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated, a driving device capable of setting a plurality of driving force generation directions is provided. The used effect can be sufficiently improved.

  The gaming machine ZF1 includes light emitting means for emitting light toward the displacement means, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in a manner of passing through an optical axis of light emitted from the light emitting means. A gaming machine ZF2.

  According to the gaming machine ZF2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZF1, the position where the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means, so the position where the displacement means is illuminated Can produce a gorgeous production that changes over time.

  The gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2 includes a displacement suppression unit that suppresses displacement of at least a part of the transmission unit, and the transmission unit includes at least one of the first driving mode and the second driving mode. A gaming machine ZF3 comprising a suppression area where transmission of driving force is suppressed, and wherein the displacement suppression means is configured to be able to suppress a predetermined displacement in the suppression area.

  According to the gaming machine ZF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2, the displacement suppression means displaces in an unintended displacement mode by the transmission means being unintentionally displaced when the transmission of the driving force is suppressed. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced.

  In addition, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained higher than when the displacement means is stopped by bringing the displacement means into direct contact with another member. Therefore, the displacement means having an appropriate displacement mode can be configured to be easily seen by the player.

  In addition, the aspect of a displacement suppression means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an engagement device that generates a viscous resistance typified by a damper device, a resistance device that generates a resistance force due to its own weight, or a case where the resistance force due to its own weight tends to be insufficient (for example, displacement of the displacement means) In the case where the direction is along the horizontal direction), since the idling operation cannot be suppressed by the force of gravity, for example, a device whose resistance is variable according to the displacement mode such as a torque limiter may be used.

  The gaming machine ZF3 includes detection means configured to be able to detect displacement of the displacement suppression means, and the displacement suppression means generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression area is lower than a predetermined speed. The resistance is configured to be suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission unit in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection unit is a detected portion of the displacement suppression unit at a position where the displacement suppression unit generates resistance. The game machine ZF4 is arranged so as to be detectable.

  According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZF3, whether the detection means is functioning well in detecting the stop position of the displacement suppression means and suppressing displacement in the suppression area of the transmission means in the displacement suppression means It can be used for both detection and detection.

  In any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacing means includes a first displacing means that rotates and rotates around a first axis, and a second that rotates and displaces the outside of the first displacing means about the first axis. A gaming machine ZF5 comprising a displacement means, wherein the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

  According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, in the first driving mode or the second driving mode, the displacement of the second displacing means can be suppressed. In the state where the second displacement means is disposed between the player and the first displacement means and obstructs the view, and the second displacement means is disposed outwardly between the player and the first displacement means. In addition to the above, it is possible to configure two types of effects in the case of not obstructing, and in addition, since it is possible to displace even in a driving mode that does not suppress the displacement of the second displacement means, the effects by the displacement means are configured in three different modes of displacement. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the transmission means includes a light transmission means formed of a light transmission material on the connection position side with the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine ZF6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the effect of facilitating the assembly of the displacement means by the light transmission means, and the light emission effect by conducting the light toward the displacement means It is possible to achieve an effect that makes it possible.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means includes: a first displacement means that is rotationally displaced about a first axis; and a transmission means that is rotationally displaced about the first axis, and the transmission means of the first displacement means. Second displacement means coupled to the transmission means outside the coupling position, and the second displacement means overlaps the first displacement means when viewed in the first axial direction. Characteristic gaming machine ZF7.

  According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the first displacement means can prevent the second displacement means from coming off. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning of the separate retaining member can be made unnecessary.

<Vibration device next to device (P9 policy 1)>
A first operating means configured to be operable by the player, a second operating means configured to be operated by the player at a position different from the first operating means, and the first operating means And a load generating means arranged on the second operating means side and configured to generate a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a plurality of operation devices and a drive device for producing an effect for driving these operation devices (see, for example, JP-A-2006-159178). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the vibration device is arranged in each operation device, the space necessary for arranging each operation device increases, and the number of operation devices that can be arranged is easily limited. In addition, there is a problem that the cost increases due to an increase in the number of driving devices.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, since the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is the first operating means and the second operating means (that is, , A plurality of operating means) can be used in combination. Thereby, the space required for arrangement | positioning of a 1st operation means and a 2nd operation means can be reduced, and the upper limit of the number of operation means which can be arrange | positioned can be raised. In addition, since the number of load generating means can be reduced, the cost for configuring the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In addition, the aspect of a load generation means is not limited at all. For example, a means configured to be capable of vibration (high-speed repetitive displacement), a means for generating a load at a predetermined cycle such as a pump, or a means configured by an arm member whose posture is changed by the displacement of a cam may be used. good. Moreover, the aspect of load is not limited at all. For example, a load that is mechanically transmitted in a contact state or a load (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.) that is transmitted in a non-contact state may be used.

  In the gaming machine ZG1, the gaming machine ZG2 is characterized in that the load generating means is disposed between the first operating means and the second operating means.

  According to the gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG1, a load can be transmitted to both the first operating means and the second operating means to the same extent.

  In the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operation means is operated to launch a game ball toward the game area, and the load generation means covers the first operation means at least partially from a predetermined direction. A gaming machine ZG3, wherein the gaming machine ZG3 is disposed in a setting means.

  According to the gaming machine ZG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is disposed at a position where the finger of the player who operates the first operating means is sandwiched between the first operating means. Thus, the load generated from the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player's fingers.

  For example, the covering means is arranged at a position where the player's finger can easily pass in the process of moving the player's finger by operating the finger closer to the first operation means and releasing the finger from the first operation means after the operation is completed. By disposing the covering means so as to cover from the direction in which the fingers easily interfere with each other, the load of the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player during the movement of the fingers.

  Further, for example, by placing the covering means at a position where the finger contacts with high probability when the player operates the first operating means, the load of the load generating means is increased during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state that can be easily transmitted to the player.

  This idea is different from the idea that the load generating means is provided in the first operating means. That is, since the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is disposed at a position different from that of the first operating means.

  In the gaming machine ZG3, intervening means configured to be interposed between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means so as to be able to transmit the load to the first operating means and the second operating means. The gaming machine ZG4 is characterized in that the interposed means is configured such that the strength of vibration transmission to the first operating means is higher than the strength of vibration transmission to the second operating means.

  According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG3, load transmission can be concentrated on the first operating means side.

  In the gaming machine ZG4, the intervening means is configured to be able to change the strength of load transmission by displacing the load generating means as the load generating means is driven.

  According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZG4, the strength of the load transmitted through the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven compared to when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, when the load generating means is driven, the first operating means and the second operating means are controlled by the load applied to the pachinko machine by the player, etc. It is possible to execute an effect that strongly operates (vibrates) the operating means and the second operating means.

  Any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5 includes a holding means for holding the load generating means in a displaceable manner, and the holding means includes a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the load generating means. .

  According to the gaming machine ZG6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the safety of the player can be ensured by defining the displacement direction of the load generating means. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem such that the displaced member that is displaced by the vibration of the load generating means collides with the player unintentionally.

  In addition, regardless of the structure of the load generating means itself, the load generating means can be displaced in the desired direction by guiding it in the desired direction, so the load generation employed to realize the desired action (vibration) effect The degree of freedom of the means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine ZG6, the holding means is configured in a manner that allows displacement of the load generating means in an intersecting direction that intersects the direction guided by the guide portion.

  According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the crossing direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state, and at the time of switching, the driving state (stable state) The load generating means can be displaced in different ways. Thereby, the effect by the load generating means can be improved.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect which accept | permits a displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided, and the guide direction by the second holding means may be configured to intersect the guide direction of the guide portion, or the load generating means may be interposed between the holding means. It may be configured such that a flexible member is interposed, and the displacement may be caused by deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibrating means for covering means (P9 policy 2)>
Frame means configured to have a frame shape, covering means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side, and vibration means arranged on the covering means and configured to be vibrated, The means includes a permissible portion that is allowed to displace, and is configured to be able to transmit the vibration of the vibration means via the permissible portion.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a front frame and vibration means disposed on the front side of the front frame (see, for example, JP-A-2015-159837). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibration means to a level that does not transmit a vibration of a predetermined strength or more to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of vibration production. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZH1, the vibration means is disposed in the covering means, and the displacement of the covering means is allowed, so that vibration can be transmitted to the player side through the covering means. On the other hand, transmission of vibration to the frame means side can be suppressed by absorbing vibration by displacement of the covering means. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree allowed as the vibration intensity of the vibration means.

  In addition, the aspect of a permission part is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode based on the assumption of displacement of slides, phosphorus, gears, etc., and the displacement may be caused by the movement of slides, links, gears, etc., or from the material or structure compared to other parts It may be configured flexibly and may be displaced by being overloaded.

  In the gaming machine ZH1, the covering means is configured such that the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the allowable amount of displacement in the horizontal direction. .

  According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZH1, the effect of the allowing portion is maintained in the horizontal direction, while the player places his / her hand on the covering means in the direction of gravity. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the covering means from being displaced excessively and disturbing the player's posture. That is, it is possible to stabilize the structure as a product by keeping the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction small.

  In the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, the covering means is configured in a bag shape with the frame means side open.

  According to the gaming machine ZH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the frame means side is configured in a bag shape that is open, the edge of the bag and the frame means are arranged to face each other. It is possible to reduce the contact area between the covering means and the frame means that contact and transmit vibration. Thereby, since vibration transmission to the frame means side can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid transmission of vibration to the main board, the ball passage, and the main electrical configuration disposed on the frame means side.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibration means includes an arrangement portion disposed on the frame means side, and the frame means includes a support portion that supports the arrangement portion. The gaming machine ZH4 is characterized in that the portion has a lower deformation resistance than the support portion.

  According to the gaming machine ZH4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibrating means is limited while maintaining the suppression of vibration transmission to the frame means side. As compared with the case where it is configured to be hard, it is possible to cause biting by utilizing the low deformation resistance, and it is possible to ensure a large absolute value of the amount of displacement of the vibrating means toward the frame means. As a result, the covering means on which the vibration means is disposed can be easily displaced greatly.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the covering means includes a first covering portion and a second covering portion having a lower deformation resistance than the first covering portion, and the vibration means includes The gaming machine ZH5 is provided with a contact portion that is connected to the first cover portion and the second cover portion and can locally contact the first cover portion.

  According to the gaming machine ZH5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the first covering portion having a high deformation resistance and the contact portion are locally brought into contact with each other, so that the contact position Can be used as a fixed point (reference point) of vibration. That is, the absolute value of the displacement of the vibration means and the second covering portion with respect to the contact position can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, a ball launching operation unit operated to launch a game ball toward a game area is provided, and the covering unit is at least between the ball launching operation unit A gaming machine ZH6 that is provided with a predetermined member.

  According to the gaming machine ZH6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, vibration transmission to the ball launching operation means can be suppressed.

<Points characterized by blocking the light itself by the displacement of the object>
In a gaming machine including a light emitting unit and an irradiated unit irradiated with light from the light emitting unit, changing the appearance of the irradiated unit while leaving an outer shape of the irradiated unit in a predetermined direction. Characteristic gaming machine ZI1.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine equipped with a light emitting means that is mounted on a movable accessory and configured to execute a light emitting effect (see, for example, JP-A-2015-208360). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is no member displaced so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the aspect of the light emission effect. However, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the method for realizing the light emission effect because the data capacity is pressed for the control or the substrate is enlarged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacing means is configured to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the displacing of the displacing means may interfere with the light emitted from the light emitting means. By comprising so that it can do, the aspect of a light emission effect can be switched by the displacement of a displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the light emission effect without controlling the light emitting means, and it is possible to make the substrate smaller by making the data for control unnecessary or the circuit for control unnecessary. it can. Thereby, it is possible to improve the method for realizing the light emission effect.

  In addition, the aspect of a displacement is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, it may be a rotation, a linear slide, or a displacement along a predetermined curve. In the case where the displacement mode of the displacement means is a linear slide, the direction of the slide means coincides with the predetermined direction, compared to the case where the slide direction intersects the predetermined direction. The external shape can be easily maintained.

  In addition, the aspect of a to-be-irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it is configured to rotate around a rotation axis that intersects the optical axis, and the projected area may change depending on the posture, and even if the posture does not change, the member projects from the inside and is enlarged or reduced The relative projected area may be changed by the displacement.

  The mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured so as to be rotationally displaced around the irradiated unit, or may slide on a plane and enter the side of the irradiated unit (between the light emitting unit).

  Moreover, the aspect in the case of leaving the external shape of a displacement means is not limited at all. For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as being stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount is made smaller than that of the irradiated means, so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. An aspect may be sufficient.

  Further, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. What is necessary is just to comprise so that a light emission means may face the to-be-irradiated means side at any timing of the displacement.

  The mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, the position may be fixed or may be configured to be displaceable. In a displaceable state, the light emitting means may be disposed on the displacement means, or the light emitting means and the displacement means may be displaced separately (independently). Further, the irradiation direction may be fixed, or the irradiation direction may be variable.

  The mode of displacement of the light emitting means may be such that the light axis is directed toward the irradiated means and slides in a manner close to or away from the irradiated means, or around the irradiated means with the optical axis directed to the irradiated means. It may be rotating.

  The light emission mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, the lighting state may always be maintained, or switching between lighting and extinguishing may be used.

  In the gaming machine ZI1, the difference in the appearance of the irradiated means occurs when the irradiated means reflects light emitted from the light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZI1, since the difference between the irradiated means can be recognized immediately after the light emitting means emits light, the attention to the timing of light irradiation can be improved. . According to this, the irradiated means may be a displaceable means or a non-displaceable means.

  In the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in the appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

  According to the gaming machine ZI3, attention to the irradiated means can be improved in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2.

  In addition, the aspect of the displacement that is the basis of the difference in the appearance of the irradiated unit is not limited at all. For example, it may be a constant (periodic) displacement that continues at a constant speed, or an irregular displacement. Further, it may be an instantaneous displacement, or may be a slow speed (so slow that the player is difficult to grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm / min] or the like.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the irradiated means can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

  According to the gaming machine ZI4, in any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to make the portions that are conspicuous by being illuminated by the light reflected through the irradiated means different from each other while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the irradiation means can be configured to reflect the light in the same direction, but at least one of the light amount or the color can be different. .

  According to the gaming machine ZI5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, attention to the light emission mode of the irradiated means can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, the non-interference configured to be able to irradiate the irradiated unit with light in an irradiation mode in which the optical axis is non-interfering with the movement locus of the displacement unit arranged around the irradiated unit. A gaming machine ZI6 comprising a shielding light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine ZI6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, it is possible to irradiate the irradiated means regardless of the arrangement of the displacing means by irradiating light from the non-shielding light emitting means. Thus, it is possible to avoid the irradiated means being visually recognized darker than necessary.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiated unit can be arranged at a first irradiated unit and a shielding position where the light emitted from the light emitting unit toward the first irradiated unit can be blocked. A second irradiated means configured, wherein the first irradiated means has an area in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means as compared with a case where the second irradiated means is not disposed at the shielding position. The gaming machine ZI7 is configured to be smaller when the second irradiated means is disposed at the shielding position.

  According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, it is possible to make it difficult for light to reach the first irradiated means. That is, the effect of shielding light can be improved. The change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when light is emitted from the light emitting means.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate light to the irradiated means with a plurality of optical axes, and the irradiated means can cross the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine ZI8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the irradiated means is increased by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, increasing the number of LEDs). Can be made.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the irradiation unit includes a driving unit configured to be able to synchronously drive the irradiation unit and a displacement unit arranged around the irradiation unit. And a predetermined first surface is directed to the same side, and the displacement means is configured to periodically displace the first position and the second position. .

  According to the gaming machine ZI9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the light emission mode of the irradiated means (due to the arrangement of the displacing means) while suppressing the visibility of the irradiated means from changing greatly. For example, the switching timing of light and dark) can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

  The displacement mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement. The rotational displacement may be, for example, a rotational displacement that occurs on a rotational axis along the display surface of the display device, or a rotational displacement that occurs on a rotational axis orthogonal to the display surface of the display area.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, at least one of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means or the irradiated means has a surface on the light emitting means side, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. Accordingly, the gaming machine ZI10 is configured such that the traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed to the player side.

  According to the gaming machine ZI10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the light emitting means emits light when the displacement means is disposed at the first position and when disposed at the second position. The difference in the degree of light that travels to the player side can be increased.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, ZI1 to ZI10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, ZI1 to ZI10, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 Any of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, ZI1 to ZI10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine Machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 Outer frame (second support means)
12 Inner frame (accepting means)
13, A13 Game board (game means)
14 Front frame (blocking means, part of the frame means)
14d2 Auxiliary convex part (part of concave part)
17 Top plate (part of receiving plate)
50 Lower tray (part of receiving tray, part of game ball holder)
51 Operation handle (part of first operation means, operation means for launching ball)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way blocking means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
145, 9145, 10145 Foul sphere passage (foul sphere passage)
159 Open / close restriction part (blockage restriction part)
173 Long cover member (part of resolving means)
178 Reverse cup part (part of arrangement means, first means, intrusion restriction part, part of elimination means)
180 Bundling movable member (part of arrangement means, second means, support means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300, 10300
Operation device (part of second operation means)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311gL, 3311gL Left side detection piece (part of continuous hit discrimination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction judgment means)
311gR Right-side detection piece (part of continuous hit discrimination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction judgment means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 Shaft (shaft bar)
315 Torsion spring (biasing means)
324L Left side detection sensor (part of continuous hit discrimination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction judgment means)
324R Right side detection sensor (part of continuous hit discrimination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction judgment means)
330 Upper frame member (part of accommodation means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing part (part of support part)
340, 5340, 6340 Driving device (driving means, first driving means)
341 Body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft rod (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engagement tooth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engagement tooth)
343d Coil spring (biasing means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d Connecting pin (protruding part)
345 Arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of maintaining means, part of first means)
352 voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 Speaker (acoustic means)
453 Speaker connection line (passing member)
460 Front side assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 passage forming rib (bending means, protruding portion)
480 Rear side assembly (second means)
481Ha Auxiliary convex part (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing protrusion (part of opening)
487 passage forming rib (bending means, protruding portion)
500 Right panel unit (directing means)
500L left heavy plate unit (first means)
500R Right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support plate (connected means)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 531c Support hole (part of connecting part)
532 Inclined rib (contact means)
540 Light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b Protruding portion (part of connecting portion)
600 Board support device (state change means)
620 Claw member before rotation (proximity means)
640 Claw member after rotation (contact means)
801 Support base material (base member)
802 Petal (part of second displacement means)
804 Central motor (drive means)
830 Rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 Free fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul Sphere Passage (Foul Sphere Passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintaining means)
2348 Slide claw member (part of maintenance means)
2888 Regulatory part (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance)
5412 Weight member (vibration part, part of repulsion means)
5420 Flexible member (support means, part of repulsion means)
5430 Housing member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 Disc member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 disk member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 engagement member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of accommodation means)
8326a First through hole (a part of the second opening)
8326b Second through hole (part of second opening)
8326c 3rd through-hole (a part of 2nd opening part)
9142a Right slope (part of the payout ball discharge part)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal member (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of the recessed portion)
10014 Front frame (part of first support means, part of holding means)
10014a Metal body (part of holding means)
10145d Rolling plate part (regulating means)
10310 Swing operation member (part of operation means, part of operation unit)
10321 Left front cover (part of first support means)
10322 Right front cover (part of first support means)
10330 Inner case member (part of contact means, part of main body)
10340 Lever member (part of connecting part)
10366 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
6400 Lower tray unit (part of game ball holding part)
6411 Body (allowable part)
6413 Protruding shape portion 6414 Recessed shape portion 6427 Resin member (impact attenuation means)
6451 Main body (part of receiving recess)
6455 Right-side reinforcing rib (part of receiving recess)
6456 Left reinforcing rib (part of receiving recess)
6510 Top cover member (part of connecting means)
6520 Optical transmission unit (part of light receiving means)
6521b Light receiving protrusion (part of first light receiving means, part of insertion part)
6521d Light passage hole (part of second light receiving means)
6521e Body cylinder part (a part of light conducting part)
6522 Flange (extraction interface)
6540 partition unit (part of light receiving means, part of first means, part of fixing means)
6545 Fastening portion after guidance (part of fixing means, second fixing means or first fixing means)
6547c Projecting rib (part of suppression means)
6548 Transparent covering member (part of suppression means)
6550 Plate guiding unit (part of second means, part of fixing means)
6552 Extension plate (part of the outer surface)
6554a Screwing part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6555 Back side fastening portion (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6558 Light receiving member (part of light receiving means)
6560 partition member (first member, part of first means, part of accommodation means, part of partition means)
6562a Expansion hole (part of non-insertion through hole)
6562b Direct entry hole (part of through hole)
6565 Large-diameter cylindrical part (part of regulating means)
6570 Illuminated board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting substrate)
6574a Edge light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6574b Surface light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6580 Back support member (second member, part of first means, part of accommodation means)
6610 Sound device (part of vibration means, part of notification means, part of fourth means)
6621 Retaining plate part (part of facing part, part of suppression means, part of notification means)
6622 Contact avoidance recess (part of the facing part, part of the suppression means, part of the notification means)
6710 Base member (part of accommodation means)
6720 Illuminated board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting substrate, part of third means)
6730 Light receiving member (part of light guiding means)
6731 Light-receiving surface part (a part of the second light guide means, a part of the main body part, a covering part)
6732 Inside extension (part of the frame)
6733 Outer extension (part of the frame)
6734 long rib (part of first light guide means, facing extension)
6735 Fin (a part of the first light guide means, a separation extending portion)
6736 Insertion hole (part of support means)
6737 Fitting part (part of misalignment prevention part)
6740 Flat plate member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6750 Curved plate member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6751a Decorative protrusion (part of misalignment prevention)
6760 Cover member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6802L Fastening part (part of support part)
6802R Insertion hole (part of support)
18830 Illuminated board (part of light emitting means)
D1a Edge light emitting part (part of total reflection light emitting part)
D23 streak D24 end streak (part of streak)
E1 Notification device (detection means)
FC detection switch (part of detection means)
P1a deformation part (deformation part)
Rm1 inner edge (part of interference means)
S52 Termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped path (bent part)
V13, V14 Clearance 21051 Handle support plate (predetermined member)
21410 Covering foundation member (part of covering means, second covering portion)
21450 V-shaped design member (part of covering means, first covering portion)
21500 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
21510 Vibration motor (load generating means)
21520 Covering member (part of intervening means)
21522 Projection (part of arrangement)
21530 Covering cover member (part of intervening means, holding means)
21534 ridge (part of guide)
21540 Opposing plate member (part of intervening means)
21541 Shell-like overhanging part (contact part)
De3 overhang (support)
A310 Rear case (opposing means)
A312 outer wall part (part of proximity part, arrangement part, opposite side)
A312a Notch (part of edge, part of proximity, opposite side, non-contact part)
A313 Support plate (part of edge, part of proximity, facing surface)
A73 Outer edge member (part of suppression means)
75 Metal plate member (part of suppression means)
A86 Center frame (part of window)
A400 1st motion unit (part of production means)
A411 body part (part of covering means)
A415 Diffuser (refractive means)
A416 Electric circuit board (board)
A416a Light emitting means (light emitting part)
A416e1 first connector (connector part)
A417 Substrate fixing plate (substrate holding means)
A417h Notch (gap forming part)
A426 detection sensor (detection means)
A440, A4440 First displacement member (part of displacement means)
A444 Diffusion plate (transmission means)
A445b Light emitting means (second light emitting means)
A450 slide link (part of displacement means, part of first displacement means)
A455b Transmission projecting part (part of the predetermined part)
A455e Detected plate part (part of detected part)
A456a Projecting plate part (one-side functional part, loaded part)
A456b Opposing arrangement part (other side functional part, part of predetermined part)
A456c Insertion gap (transmitted part)
A462, A3462 Gear with pin (part of transmission means, second displacement means)
A463 Transmission protrusion (part of transmission means, transmission unit, load generation unit)
A464 Arc wall part (formation part, part of regulating means)
A465 In-phase member (part of transmission means)
A470 Support box (part of shielding means)
A475 fastening part (part of prevention means, protruding part)
A480 Rear lid (part of the arrangement means)
A483 Positioning protrusion (Positioning section)
A490 Second displacement member (part of displacement means)
A491a Shaft supported protrusion (first shaft)
A491d2 ridge (part of the guide)
A511 Slide rack (part of second displacement means)
A715a Light emitting means (non-shielding light emitting means)
A720 Rotating body (displacement means)
A721, A2721 First rotating member (first displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means)
A722 Shell (part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A724 Central rotating member (part of irradiated means)
A728 second rotating member (second displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A735 second support part (part of transmission means, light transmission means)
A752 First detection sensor (detection means)
A763 Detected piece (Detected part)
A765 Cylindrical functional part (part of displacement suppression means)
A2729 slide member (part of irradiated means, second irradiated means)
A3464 Outer diameter protrusion (part of transmission means, transmission part, load generation part)
A4550 Decoration member (part of displacement means)
A5001 Displacement member (part of displacement means)
A5002 Transmission member (part of transmission means)
A5003 Supported member (part of transmission means, part of transmission part)
A5004 Thin part (part of forming part)
A6560 Wiring guide member (part of prevention means)
A6562 Projection (part of prevention means)
AC1 first region (part of the light emitting region)
AC2 second region (part of the light emitting region, first region, first refracting portion)
AMT1 drive motor (drive means)
AMT2 drive motor (drive means)
HC wiring (following means)
HCa intermediate part (part of the specified part, part of the weak displacement part)
KJ Optical axis UL1 Upper transmission path (part of transmission means, suppression area)
DL1 lower transmission path (part of transmission means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine comprising a light emitting means and an irradiated means to which light from the light emitting means is irradiated,
A gaming machine, wherein the appearance of the irradiated means is changed while leaving the outer shape of the irradiated means viewed in a predetermined direction.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the difference in appearance of the irradiated unit is caused by the irradiated unit reflecting light irradiated from the light emitting unit.   The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the degree of difference in appearance of the irradiated means changes based on displacement of the irradiated means.